REVISED GREEK GRAMMAR, A GRAMMAR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. Jfor % ttlsc of Reboots antr Collftjcs. By ALPHEUS CROSBY, PROFESSOR EMERITUS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN DARTMOUTH COLLEGE. PROM THE PRESS OP A. S. BARNES & CO. boston college librart CHESTNUT HILL, MASS, [FORTY-NINTH EDITION. 3 “ The Language of the Greeks was truly like themselves, it was con¬ formable to their transcendent and universal Genius. The Greek Tongue, from its propriety and universality , is made for all that is great , and all that is beautiful , in every Subject, and under every Form of writing .”— Harris’s Hermes , Bk. III., Ch. 5. “Greek, —the shrine of the genius of the old world; as universal as our race, as individual as ourselves; of infinite flexibility, of indefatigable strength, with the complication and the distinctness of Nature herself; to which nothing was vulgar, from which nothing was excluded; speaking to the ear like Italian, speaking to the mind like English; with words like pictures, with words like the gossamer film of the summer; at once the variety and picturesqueness of Homer, the gloom and the intensity of iEschylus; not compressed to the closest by Thucydides, not fathomed to the bottom by Plato, not sounding with all its thunders, nor lit up with all its ardors even under the Promethean touch of Demosthenes!” — Coleridge’s Study of the Greek Classic Poets. Vignette: Temple of Theseus at Athens. “Athens, the eye of Greece.” — Milton. Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1871, BY ALPHEUS CROSBY, in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 132954 / FROM THE PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. The following pages are the result of an attempt to supply what was believed to be a desideratum in the list of Greek text-books; viz., a grammar which should be portable and simple enough to be put into the hands of the beginner, and which should yet be sufficiently scientific and complete to accompany him through his whole course. The volume from which the elements of a language are first learned becomes to the student a species of mnemonic tables, and cannot be changed in the course of his study without a material derangement of those associations upon which memory essentially depends. The familiar remark, “ It must be remembered that, if the grammar be the first book put into the learner’s hands, it should also be the last to leave them,” though applying most happily to grammatical study in general, was made by its accomplished author with particular ref¬ erence to the manual used by the student. In the preparation of this work, the routine of daily life has obliged me to keep constantly in view the wants of more advanced students; v and, for their sake, an attempt has been made to investigate the prin¬ ciples of the language more deeply, and illustrate its use more fully, than has been usual in grammatical treatises, even of far greater size. At the same time, no pains have been spared to meet the wants of the beginner, by a studious simplicity of method and expression, and by the reduction of the most important principles to the form of con¬ cise rules, easy of retention and convenient for citation. Many val¬ uable works in philology fail of attaining the highest point of utility, through a cumbrousness of form, burdensome alike to the under¬ standing and the memory of the learner. They have been the armor of Saul to the youthful David. I have not, however, believed that I should consult the advantage even of the beginner by a false repre¬ sentation of the language, or by any departure from philosophical ac¬ curacy of statement or propriety of arrangement. Truth is always better than falsehood, and science than empiricism. To secure, as far as might be, the double object of the work, it has been constructed upon the following plan: — First, to state the usage of the language in comprehensive rules, and condensed tables, to be imprinted upon the memory of the student. Secondly, to explain the usage of the language, and trace its his - 4 PREFACE. torical development , as fully as the limits allowed to the work, and the present state of philological science, would permit. The student who thinks wishes to know, not only what is true, but why it is true ; and to the philosophical mind, a single principle addressed to the reason is often like the silver cord of iEolus, confining a vast number of facts, which otherwise, like the enfranchised winds, are scattered far and wide beyond the power of control.* Thirdly, to illustrate the use of the language by great fulness of remark and exemplification. In these remarks and examples, as well as in the more general rules and statements, I have designed to keep myself carefully within the limits of Attic usage, as exhibiting the language in its standard form, except when some intimation is given to the contrary; believing that the grammarian has no more right than the author to use indiscriminately and without notice, the vo¬ cabulary, forms, and idioms of different ages and communities, — “ A partv-coloi'’d dress Of patch’d and pye-ball’d languages.” The examples of syntax, in order that the student may be assured in regard to their genuineness and sources, and be able to examine them in their connection, have been cited from classic authors in the precise words in which they occur, and with references to the places where they may be found. In accordance with the general plan of the work, these examples have been mostly taken from the purest Attic writers, beginning with Aeschylus, and ending with iEsehines. It was also thought that the practical value of such examples might be greatly enhanced to the student by selecting a single author, whose works, as those of a model-writer, should be most frequently resorted to; and especially, by selecting for constant citation a single work of this author, which could be in the hands of every student as a companion to his grammar, in which he might consult the pas- * “ Memory can neither accurately grasp the great variety of Greek forms nor retain them, unless it be supported by an analyzing and combining intelligence , which furnishes, as it were, the hooks and cement to strengthen that which has been learned, and permanently impress it upon the mind.” — Curtius. “ I aimed above all things at making every point intelligible by furnishing for every usage, so far as was possible, a satisfactory reason; and by thus trying to eliminate all mere grammatical mysticism, I hoped that I should also ren¬ der grammar interesting to every boy who has any aptitude for such studies, and is sufficiently advanced to understand them. “ Taught in a parrot-like manner to crude minds, I believe that grammar becomes bewildering and pernicious; taught at a later age and in a more ra¬ tional method, I believe that it will be found to furnish a most valuable insight into the logical and metaphysical laws which regulate the expression of human thought, and that it will always maintain its ground as an important branch of knowledge, and a valuable means of intellectual training.” — Farrar. PREFACE. 5 sages referred to, and which might be to him, at the same time, a text-book in reading, and a model in writing, Greek. In making the choice, I could not hesitate in selecting, among authors, Xenophon, and among his writings, the Anabasis. References also abound in the Etymology, but chiefly in respect to peculiar and dialectic forms. When the reference here follows the word without an intervening comma, it will be understood that the word is cited in the very form in which it occurs. The subject of euphonic laws has received a larger share of attention than is usual in works of this kind, but not larger than I felt compelled to bestow, in treating of a language “ Whose law was heavenly beauty, and whose breath Enrapturing music.” I cannot conclude this preface without the expression of my most sincere thanks to those personal friends and friends of learning who have so kindly encouraged and aided me in my work. Among those to whom I am especially indebted for valuable suggestions, or for the loan of books, are President Woolsey, whose elevation, while I am writing, to a post which he will so much adorn, will not, I trust, withdraw him from that department of study and authorship in which he has won for himself so enviable a distinction; Professors Felton of Cambridge, Gibbs of New Haven, Hackett of Newton, San¬ born, my highly esteemed associate in classical instruction, Stuart of Andover, and Tyler of Amherst; and Messrs. Richards of Meriden, Sophocles of Hartford, and Taylor of Andover. Nor can I conclude without the acknowledgment of my deep obligations to previous laborers in the same field, to the great living, and to the great dead, — Requiescant in pace ! It is almost superfluous that I should mention, as among those to whom I am most greatly indebted, the honored names of Ahrens, Bernhardy, Bopp, Buttmann, Carmichael, Fischer, Hartung, Hermann, Hoogeveen, Kiihner, Lobeck, Mait- taire, Matthise, Passow, Rost, Thiersch, and Yiger. ' Hanover, October 13, 1846. • A. C. It is with mingled emotions that I read this list, written a quarter of a century ago. To some whose names are here mentioned, I have new obligations to acknowledge. How many have ceased from their studies on earth ! And with what words shall I welcome and thank a younger generation of laborers in the classic field ? To how many personal friends am I deeply indebted for suggestion, counsel, en¬ couragement, and aid ! Will they accept my heartiest thanks? During this period that has elapsed, many works of true learning have been published, in this country and abroad, of which I have been glad to avail myself. Among the scholars of our own country not before mentioned, to whom I am thus under most obligation, are Professors Drisler, Goodwin, Hadley, and Short. To the Trans- 6 PREFACE. atlantic list should now be specially added the names of Clyde, Cur- tius, Donaldson, Farrar, Jelf, Kriiger, Madvig, Yeitch, and Winer. The name of Professor Sophocles may certainly be repeated for his more recent works, and that of Dr. Kiihner, for the Larger Gram¬ mar, — a new work rather than a new edition, — which he is now issuing when so close upon the age of seventy. Much of the advance in classical learning during this period is due to the light thrown upon it by Comparative Philology; though some familiar applications of this to the Greek seem to me unwarranted, and I wish there were room here for an argument upon some points. In the preparation of this revised edition, it has been my constant effort to convey more information of value to the student, without increasing the size of the book. That this might be effected, and even with a larger and clearer type than before, two new fonts of Greek were kindly obtained by the Proprietors of the University Press at Cambridge, to whom I am under so much obligation throughout. Nor can I omit to express how greatly I am indebted to the skilful compositor upon the work, Mr. Weinschenk. Those acquainted with former editions may perhaps observe to how much greater extent the translation of examples has now been carried, though it has not always been deemed wise to cumber the page by translating familiar particles. They may also notice, in the present edition, a more convenient system of reference with still fuller indexes, a more copious treatment of the anomalous verbs with the advantage both of alphabetic order and of classification, more attention to the particles, a second series of rules in syntax distinguished from the first by letters, a new chapter on arrange¬ ment, a more distinct statement of important principles and useful methods in General Grammar, and a freer illustration from Compara¬ tive Philology, especially by the abundant and often minute compari¬ son of the Latin and the Greek. These twin languages, so noble in their structure and literature, and which occupy so large a space in the curriculum of liberal education, ought not to be studied without all the light which they are so capable of throwing upon each other. We may not think with “ the great Busby,” that his joint grammar of the two languages, written in Latin hexameter for the West- minstei School, would convert their acquisition into mere pastime^ “ Ludicra Grammatics, tetricas fallentia curas ”; but most certainly the student, after devoting the time usually given to the elements of the Latin, ought not then to pass to the Greek, without seeing to how great an extent his new study is only a review of the old, — in the words of Horace, ciliudque et idem , — and with¬ out the delight and encouragement that come from finding in a sup¬ posed stranger an old friend. — September 16 , 1871. PREFACE TO THE TABLES. The following tables have been prepared as part of a Greek Gram* mar. They are likewise published separately, for the greater con¬ venience and economy in their use. The advantages of a tabular arrangement are too obvious to require remark; nor is it less obvi¬ ous, that tables are consulted and compared with greater ease when printed together, than when scattered throughout a volume. The principles upon which the Tables of Paradigms have been constructed are the following: — I. To avoid needless repetition. There is a certain ellipsis in gram¬ matical tables, as well as in discourse, which relieves not only the material instruments of the mind, but the mind itself, and which as¬ sists alike the understanding and the memory. When the student has learned that, in the neuter gender, the nominative, accusative, and vocative are always the same, wh}q in each neuter paradigm that he studies, must his eye and mind be taxed with the examination of nine forms instead of three ? why, in his daily exercises in declen¬ sion, must his tongue triple its labor, and more than triple the weari¬ ness of the teacher’s ear ? II. To represent the language according to its actual use. and not according to the theories or fancies of the Alexandrine and Byzantine grammarians. For a single example, where not a few might be cited, the second future active and middle , which, except as a eu¬ phonic form of the first future, is purely imaginary, has been wholly rejected. III. To distinguish between regular and irregular usage. What student, from the common paradigms, does not receive the impres¬ sion, sometimes never corrected, that the second perfect and pluper¬ fect , the second aorist and future , and the third future belong as reg¬ ularly to the Greek verb, as the first tenses bearing the same name; when, in point of fact, the Attic dialect, even including poetic usage, presents only about fifty verbs which have the second perfect or pluperfect; eighty, which have the second aorist active; fifty, which have the second aorist or future passive; forty, which have the second aorist middle; and thirty which have the third future? The gleanings of all the other dialects will not double these numbers. From the common paradigms, what student would hesitate, in writing Greek, to employ the form in -/xedoi/, little suspecting that it is only a variety of the first person dual, so exceedingly rare, that the learned Elmsley (perhaps too hastily) pronounced it a mere in- 8 PREFACE. vemdon of the Alexandrine grammarians? The teacher who meets with it in his recitation-room may almost call his class, as the crier called the Roman people upon the celebration of the secular games, 11 to gaze upon that which they had never seen before, and would never see again.” And yet, in the single paradigm of tvttto), as I learned it in my boyhood, this “needless Alexandrine ,” “ Which, like a wounded snake, drags its slow length along,” occurs no fewer than twenty-six times, — almost nine times as often as in the whole range of the Greek classics. To some there may appear to be an impiety in attacking the ven¬ erable shade of tvtttco, but alas! it is little more than a shade, and, with all my early and long cherished attachment to it, I am forced, after examination, to exclaim, in the language of Electra, 'AvtI (pL\T&T 7 )$ Mopfprjs, crTodov re /ecu cnaav avucpeXT), and to ask why, in an age which professes such devotion to truth, a false representation of an irregular verb should be still set forth as the paradigm of regular conjugation, and made the Procrustes’ bed to which all other verbs must be stretched or pruned.* With respect to the manner in which these tables should be used, so much depends upon the age and attainments of the student, that no directions could be given which might not require to be greatly modified in particular cases. I would, however, recommend, 1. That the paradigms should not be learned en masse , but gradu¬ ally, in connection with the study of the principles and rules of the grammar, and with other exercises. 2. That some of the paradigms should rather be used for reference, than formally committed to memory. It will be seen at once, that some of them have been inserted merely for the sake of exhibiting differences of accent, or individual peculiarities. 3. That, in learning and consulting the paradigms, the student should constantly compare them with each other, with the tables of terminations, and with the rules of the grammar. 4. That the humble volume should not be dismissed from service, till the paradigms are impressed upon the tablets of the memory as legibly as upon the printed page, — till they have become so familiar to the student, that whenever he has occasion to repeat them, £ ‘ the * In this edition, the example which takes the place of tvtttw is Xvu, hap¬ pily chosen by the sagacious Kruger as convenient and economical of time (zeitsparend), —a verb which presents, to the eye , the prefixes, stem, and affixes, with entire distinctness and regularity throughout. A method of pronuncia¬ tion now becoming common in our country renders the use of ( 3 ovXevcj as a verb of constant repetition less desirable than formerly, while it removes an objection to the use of Xuu. This paradigm, as well as some others, has been the rather substituted as presenting a closer analogy to the Latin. TREFACE. 9 words,” in the expressive language of Milton, “like so many nimble and airy servitors, shall trip about him at command, and in well- ordered files, as he would wish, fall aptly into their own places.” Hanover, August 10, 1841. A. C. During the period that has passed since the preceding was writ¬ ten, such great changes have taken place in the grammars used in our schools and colleges, that some passages above seem almost to require historic notes, and the earnestness of argument in others may appear to students of the present generation like a Quixotic joust with windmills. It seems difficult to believe that it is only since that time that the use of tvtxtco as a paradigm, and the tedious superfluities in -fxedov, have been dropped in our American grammars (not yet in all) ; and it is certainly much harder to understand, with all allowances for conservative force, why the latter are still so com¬ monly retained in the grammars prepared for German and English students. But time and labor are accounted of less value in the Old World than in the New. The Tables are printed, in the present edition, more compactly than they have hitherto been, and with a distinction of type to assist in the analysis of forms, which has also been made more minute. For illustration and explanation, many Latin analogies and many refer¬ ences to the text of the Grammar have been introduced, while other examples have been proposed for further practice. A minute Cata¬ logue of Verbs, with many references to authors, has been brought within moderate compass, with the help of some abbreviations; while the tenses commonly cited in parsing are so distinguished by larger type, that the eye of the student will catch them at once. It was believed that a few pages could not be better occupied than by a very brief statement of some of the chief principles, definitions, and figures of Syntax, and of a convenient System of Sentential Analysis. As these belong to General Grammar, rather than to that of any particular language, it seemed best, for economy of space and greater clearness, to present the few examples which only could find room, in our own language chiefly. Full compensation, however, is made to the Greek in § 80, which has been condensed from Dr. Clyde’s Appendix to his valuable trea¬ tise on Greek Syntax, with slight additions in brackets, and refer¬ ences to parallel parts of the present grammar. We are truly his debtors for presenting to us so concisely the received principles of Greek Grammar, in language such as an ancient grammarian, writing of course after the most classic period, might himself have used. *% The volume of Tables contains pp. 1, 2, 7-10,13-120. 1 * CONTENTS. TABLES. I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 1. Alphabet.§ 1 2. Comparison of Alphabets . 2 3. Ligatures.3 4. Vocal Elements .... 4 5. Words classified according to Accent.5 6. Figures affecting Letters and Sounds.6 7. Contraction of Vowels . . 7 8. Consonant Changes ... 8 II. ETYMOLOGY. A. Declension. i. Cases classified.10 ii. Affixes of Declension . . . 11 hi. Elements of the x\ffixes. . 12 iv. Affixes analyzed and com¬ pared with the Latin . . 13 V. Greek and Latin Paradigms compared, Xijpa, volvttjs, &c. 14 VI. Nouns of Declension I., dea, fiovaa, aiv, 6voj, kc. 44 iii. Verbs in -fu, laTTjpu, TiQrjpu, 8i8upu, SeiKuvpu , 'irjpi, dpi, elpu, 9 9 450 b. Complete .... 9 599 2. Likeness . . 0 # 451 C. Interchange . . . 9 602 ii. Of Influence # 0 452 IV. Use of the Modes. D. Dative Residual . 0 0 465 a. Intellective . . . 9 613 i. Instrumental and Modal 466 Use of av . . 9 618 ii. Temporal and Local . 469 i. Final Clauses . 9 624 E. Accusative . # 0 470 ii. Conditional . . 9 631 i. Of Direct Object, fee. . 472 hi. Relative & Temporal 640 Double Accusative , • 480 iv. Complementary . 9 643 n. Of Specification • • 481 v. Interchange . . 9 649 in. Of Extent . . 9 * 9 482 b. Volitive .... 9 655 iv. Adverbial . 9 9 483 c. Incorporated. . . 9 657 F. Vocative. . . . 484 i. Infinitive . . . 9 663 Remarks on the Cases 0 485 ii. Participle . . . 9 673 III. Use of Numbers, Gen- in. Verbal in -reos . 9 682 ders, and Persons 488 Ch. 4. The Particle . . 9 684 Rules of Agreement # . 492 A. The Adverb . . . 685 Ch. 2. Adjective and Pro- b. The Preposition . . 688 noun. c. The Conjunction 9 700 i. Agreement . . , , 504 Observations 9 703 ii. On the Adjective • 506 Ch. 5. Arrangement. . 9 718 BOOK IV. PROSODY. Ch. 1. Quantity and Ver- Ch. 2. Accent .... 766 sification . . . 725 I. General Laws . 770 I. Natural Quantity . 726 II. In Vowel Changes . 772 II. Local Quantity 734 III. In Inflection . 775 III. Versification . 740 IV. In Construction. a. Dactylic Verse . 747 a. Grave Accent . . 784 b. Anapgestic Verse 751 b. Anastrophe . . . 785 C. lambic Verse. 755 c. Proclitics .... 786 D. Trochaic Verse . 760 d. Enclitics .... 787 E. Other Metres 764 V. In Formation . . . 789 GREEK TABLES, I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 1. The Alphabet. (§ 90 Forms. Roman Order. Large. Small. Letters. I. A a a 11. B ft 6 b III. r y j r g, n IV. A 3 d V. E € e VI. Z £ z VII. H V e VIII. e 6 , & th IX. I i i X. K AC, X c XI. A A 1 XII. M f x m XIII. N V n XIV. 3 £ X XV. O O w o XVI. n 7T, VT p XVII. p h Q r XVIII. 2, c a, y s XIX. T r ? ^ t XX. Y V y XXI. $ 0 ph XXII. X X ch XXIII. ¥ 0 ps XXIV. n CO o EPI- SEMA. / F F \ 7 f> ^ f q sh 92.) Names. Numeral Power. *A \Z Phi 500 xr Chi 600 Vi Psi 700 t i2 peya Omega 800 Ban Vau G KoTnra Koppa 90 Scy San 900 14 TABLES. §S. 2. Comparison of Alphabets. (97, 98.) Hebrew. Green. Latin Hebrew. Greek. Latin. K Aleph A a Alpha A a D Samekh E Phi 7 Lamedli A X Lambda L 1 X X Chi ft Mem M |x Mu M m 'P x}/ Psi 3 Nun N v Nu N n H o) 0 mega 3. Ligatures. (90. 2.) CM at ($7 ’ 67 TL & (70 '^770 5 airo ft a6ak ecu av €U as¬ aa yap 1w rju s’ ar yf 77 l \ % D °X yev <£ \ KCU rat 7 9 M. \\ Tav ..\ 0 B\ ftp fji€U T T7jV Ji Bt 09 4 Trjs Bia OV V TO ei\ , ( €1 'Kept rr> § TOO r> { ' e? pa T TWV ok e/c & pi UJJ vv CM eV & po C VITO § 5 . ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. 15 4. Vocal Elements. I. Vowels, Simple and Compound (106-110). Class I. II. III. IV. V. Simple Vowels, < Orders. ( Short, 1. A Sounds. w a O Sounds. o E Sounds. e U I Sounds. Sounds. KJ V l ’ 1 ! Long, 2. d CO V V L Diphthongs in t. < j Proper, 3. u at OL Cl VI ' I ! Improper, 4. a t CO t 71 VI Diphthongs in v, < j Proper, 5. KJ av ou ev ’ i ! Improper, 6. dv (OV rjv II. Consonants (137, 138). Class I. Class II. Class III. Orders. Labials. Palatals. Linguals. i : i. Smooth Mutes, 7r K T MUTES. < ! 2 * Middle Mutes, 0 y d ( ’ 3. Rough Mutes,

Simple Consonants. , T . i a t- u ) Double, or Compound Com Mixed, +, 6 , t, J sonants. III. Breathings (93). Rough Breathing, or Aspirate (*). Smooth, or Soft Breathing (’). 5. Words Classified according to Accent. • Proclitic: o, ov, iv, f (TV, 10€, aKOIJ. Barytone: va), u£ia, Xve • r Enclitic: Perispome: vrjcros tis. ( ov, opd>, cmco. ( Paroxytone: Xvco, Tapias. Proparoxytone: idios, i).vere. Properispome: ovkov, ripare. 16 ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY, § 6. 6 . Figures affecting Letters and Sounds (99 s). 1. Adding: 2. Subtracting: Prothesis, {Initial) Aph^iiesis, Epenthesis, {Medial) Syncope, Paragoge, {Final) Apocope, Extension. Apostrophe. 3. Transposing: Metathesis. 4. Exchanging: Antithesis. Assimilation. 5. Uniting : Synueresis, Contraction, Crasis, Synizesis. 6. Resolving : Diaeresis. 7. Shortening: Systole. 8. Lengthening: Diastole. 9. Attenuating: Precession. 7 . Contraction of Vowels (115 s). In the columns in § 7 and 8, th o first of the vowels or consonants affected by the change is placed at the left , and the second at the top, both in common type. The residt of the change is in full-face type, in a line with the first and beneath the second. The paren¬ theses enclose regular changes in the union of the stem and affixes of verbs. The labial, palatal, or lingual mute with which v filial combines as a, is represented by l or p. Some changes are placed below the columns, and some special cases are enclosed in brackets. a at ct e et V V o ot ov 0} V t v{y) [ a ai (d * a a oi t. to 1 Oi Oi) Oi b at an a < an Tl ^1 Tl € 60) 6(0 6CO a 4 [ Oi at [Dor. a d] 1 n Tl (« l et Tl ov Ot on to) (0 4 61 en € < a at a ti [Ion. en €n] ! ci 6t [Augm. Tl > 0) > V ’t ’«] V Tl Tl Oi to Tl ^n ( i w at (on ot O) ot on ot on to) <0 4 ot on 0 < nt on ’l a a L < °u Tl CJ a> tO (0 i ton * L I L t t V V U nt n ete & eta €t, oie & ota ot, oua Oi & on, vt n. In Augment, eav T)V & an , iev 6n & tju, eo to, eeo ecu. In Affixes (13), ao on & a, ae at, oe oi & to, oi to. 8 ., Euphonic Changes of Consonants (141 s). e, v fi¬ TT, ft 7 , a k A* ad T VT nal 5 £ I tt, ft (+ * W 4>e ITT c|>aT) la p8 [ir<|>] t] k, y, x (S X yp. x0 KT yar) pa 78 [KX] trtr, £ t 8 6 < i («■ K trp. CT0 err SaT) la tr, trt 1 > u > v . 1 [t0] V t, °- O fc * Acc. a O * * Du. N. A.Y. a o * G. D. a o * Flexible Endings. s. Fern. 1, *. Neut. 2, v G. ; 3, * (o0) os. 2 and Masc. 1, o. V/ J l. v, u. Neut. 3, *. Es. 1 and 2, E. Neut.''AG. wN. (ESi). 3, Ei. 1 and 2, i2. (v£) u2. Neut. "A G. E. iN. 3, oiN §14. AFFIXES AND PARADIGMS COMPARED. 19 13 . iv. Affixes Analyzed and Compared with the Latin. The Affixes, printed in full-face type or italics, are preceded by their analyses in common type. Hyphens separate the Connecting Vowels from the Flexible Endings. Dec. I. Dec. II. Dec. III. Masc. Fem. M. F. Neut, M. F. Neut, S.N. a-s as,US | a-* a, tj o-s os o-v ov S * •4c ^ a-* a o-s us o-m um s * G. a-o ov | a-os as, t]S 0-0 ov os a-i ce [ai, as] o-i i [ids] is D. a-i a, T| o-i 0) 1 t a-i ce o-i o [i] i Ab. a-e d o-e 6 e [i] A. a-v av, tjv 0 - v ov v,« * a-m am o-m um 'em \im\ * V. a-* a, t] 0-* € o-v ov *[=N.] * a-* d o-* e o-m um = FT. * F.N. a-e at o-e ot * „ a -a a €S a a-e ce o-e i t/ -a a es a \ia\ G. a-oiv cov O-OJV COV cov a-um drum [am] o-urn orum[um ] um [idm] D. a-is ats o-is ois a-t(v a-is is [ dbics ] o-is is [obus ] i !>ds[is] A. a-vs as o-v s ovs -a a vs as & a-ms as o-ins os -V- W -a a ems es [is] a [id] D.N. a-e & o-e co e G. a-iv atv o-iv otv otv 14 . v. Greek and Latin Paradigms compared. FIRST DECLENSION. — FEMININE. Sing. Plur. Dual Horn. \vpa, lyra, lyroe, lyra, a lyre (Subject). Gen. Xtipds, ) Gen. Abl. of a lyre, from a lyre. Pat. \tpa, i Dat. lyroe, to or for a lyre. | Abl. lyra, lyram, with or by a lyre. Acc. \updv, a lyre (Object). Voc. Xbpd, lyra, 0 lyre. Nom. Xvpai, lyrce, lyres (Subject). Gen. Xl»/KOV, j Gen. f Abl. lyr drum, lym, of lyres, from lyres. Dat. Xbpais, i Dat. lym, to or for lyres. \ Abl. lyra, with or by lyres. Acc. Xvpds, lyras, lyres (Object). Voc. Xvpai, lyra;, 0 lyres. Horn. Xvpa, lyra; duce, two lyres (Subject). Gen. Xupaiv, lyr drum dudrum, of two lyres, &c. 20 GREEK . AND LxYTIN DECLENSION COMPARED. § 14. DEC. I. MASC. DEC. II. MASC. DEC. III. M. F. Sailor. Wile. Swine. Sing. Nom. ratrrrjs nauta do\ou dona guttum Sducpo a genua Gen, . Sdpiov don drum gutturam Sanpuiav geuuum Dat. Supois donis gutturzfras SaKpvcri genu bus D. N. A.Y. divpo) SaKpve G. D. dujpoiv Sanpb oiv For ovas was also used the contract form eras; for suibus, the syncopated subus ; and for gmubus (genuibus), by a syncope of the u, genibus. See 225 f. 15 . vi. Nouns of the First Declension. a. FEMININE. s. Lat. The goddess, dea fiy> musca muse, musa table, mensa song, ode mina. min a N. f V Bed pvia povara rpane fa c odrj eporjs pvd G. TTjS Peas pouts poverps rparvefgs pvas D. T V Pea c pola poverg rpanefy, v eoSeov pvav D. rals deais points povaais rpanefats (p8als pvals A. ras deas polas pooerds r pan efis a)8ds puds D. N. \ TCI ded pool pooad rpane^d eo8a pvd G. raiv deaiv polatv poocratv rpanefatv eo8aiv 1 pvalv § 15. c. Dec. I. 130 b, 194 s : Gender 176 ; ij, 6, 173 b ; d, a, or p, in Sing., 194 s; noipra 194. 2; p(aa)a, 'Ep/^aslfjs, 196, 120 e ; poppa, Tuppvov and -d, 198. 1, 93d. Accent: beds 775 a, pvias 771 b, pviQv 777a, rpair^fps 770 a, ArpelSai 771 c, Ep^(^as)fjs 772. —Other Examples, onid shadow, oiida house, 6upa door, tbpa hora, HOUR, polpa portion, y\Qooa or 7 \cDrra (169 a) tongue, 86£a opinion, XeWa lioness, rip.-/] honor, nopp maiden, cvK{ea)r\ fig-tree ; vedvias young man, xpirps judge, lie pops Persian. § 16 . NOUNS OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSION. 21 The steward, Lat. quaestor S. N. 6 Tapias Gr. tov rap'iov D. to) Tapia A. tov Tapidv V. d) Tapia P. N. ol raplai Gr. TOO V TapiCOV D. tois TajAiais A. tovs Tapias D. N. to) Tapia Gr. toIv Taplaiv b. poet, poeta TVOlTJTTfS TTOLTjTOV noirfTT) TTOirjTrfV TTOLTfTCL MASCULINE. son of Atreus, Atrides Arpeldgs A rpeldov * Arpeldr] ’Arpeldrfv ’ Arpeldr] Mercury, Hermes 'Eppfas )fjs 'Epp(eov )ou 'E ppfa )y 'Eppfdv )rjv ‘E pp(ed )g TTOLlfTai TTOLTfTCOV TTOlTjTais TTOLlfTdS noirfTa TroirjTa'iv Arpeibai Arpeidcov Arp Ada ls A Tpeldds E pp(eai )ai Epp(e66v')c6v E pp{eais)ais 'E pp{eds )as Arpeldd 'Epp(ed )d Arpeldaiv t EpfJL[eacv)a'iv north wind. boreas Po(peds)ppas (3o(peov)ppa ftoipeq )ppa (3o(peav)ppav (3o(pea )ppa Gobryas. N. Tcoffpvds Gr. Tcofipvov, Tcofipvd D. Tcofipva A. Tco[3pvdv V. Tco(3pva 16 . vii. Nouns of the Second Declension. a. MASCULINE AND FEMININE. The choir, island, angel, mind, temple. Lat. chorus insula angelus mens fanum S. N. 6 ’xppos 7j vrjaos 6 ayyekos 6 voos, vovs 6 vaos, vecos Gr. Xopov vrjerov ayyeXov voov, vov vaov, veco D. X°P / TCO COCO avrpco prjXco pop 1(0 OCTTCCO, OCTTCO Gr. TOLV 0)011) dvTpOLV flTfXoLV pop'lOLV OCTTCOLV, OITTOIV § 16. c. Dec. II. 199s: Gender 176; v(6os)ovs, 6ar(eov)ovv, 121, 120e, 772 ; v(a6s)eibs 120 e, i, 772 d ; A. veeb 199. 3 ; C\ ^ oOovcn icXeiai d8ovras icXelbas, icXels d8dvre /cXetSe ubdvroiv K.Xei8oiv t], vein. S. N. Gr. / V. ava Xeov P. D. 7 ratal ava^L 8 d papal Xeovai 7 ], helmet. 6 , foot. Kopvs KopvOos KOpvdl KopvOa, KOpVV TXOVS 7 Vo 8 oS 7 ro8l 7ro 8 a Kopvai rroal 0, giant. 7], Opus. yiyas ytyavros yiyavTi yiyavra yiyav *Ovrovs * Ottovvtos 'Onovxrn ’ Okovvtci yiyaai rb, body. S. N. a a pa Gr. aoopdros D. acopan P. N. acopara G. acopdrcov D. acopaai D.N. aoopare G. acoparoiv e. ' Neuter. — ■ LINGUAL. rb, light. s (pCOTO 9 (pCtiTl to, liver, ytvcip rjuaTos gnaTi to, horn. Kepds Keparos , Kepdri, cornu Kepdos, Kepa’i, Kepcos Kepa r 8 ,ear. ovs coros 1 / C OTL (peora (pdoTCOV (pcoal 777 vara rjTvdrwv fjrraai Kepdra , Keparcov Kepaoi Kepaa, Kepacov, Kepa Kepdcn> corn COT CO V 5 > coai ' > 5 N / avepi, avopi avepa, avbpa dvep 6,7], dog. KVCOV KVVOS KVVL Kvva KVOV 6, i], lamb, {apvds) dpvos apvl dpva P. N. Qypes Gr. dr/paiv D. flyparl A. Orjpas plves pivibv f- ! pure pivas X eipes Xeipbbv Xepai X^pas dvepes, avbpes avepoav, avbpbov dvbpauL avepas , dvbpas xvves Kwcbv Kvai Kvvas dpves apvcbv dpvaai dpvas P. N. Orjpe Gr. Bgpoiv ( ^ pive plvoiv X e7pe X*poiv > / >/ 55, avepe, avope avepoiv, avbpoiv xvve Kvvoiv ctpve apvoiv 6, orator. 6, harbor. 6, deity. 6, paean. b, father. Lat. orator portus daemon paean pater S. N. prjrcop XXpyv balpcou naiav Tvaryp Gr. prjropos Xipevos balpovos naLavos narepos, Tvarpos D. prjTopi XipevL balpovi naLavL n are pi, war pi A. pyropa Y. pgrop Xipeva baipova balpov naiava tv arepa Tvdrep P. D. pyropoi \ipecri balpocn Tvardai Tvarpaen 19 . C. PURE. — a. Masculine and Feminine. 0 1 , tree oil. 0 , y, sheep. 6, hero. 0, 7], ox. b, fish. y, echo. S. N. KLS ols ovis rjpois herds (3ov s bos lx^vs gxd) echo Gr. r KLOS > > OIOS rjpcoos (Boos bovis LX&VOS T]x(dos)ovs D. u/ KU V OIL rjpui f jpeg] /3 01 bovi lx 6vi vxif )°} A. KLV f •? OlV rjpcoa, fjpoo (Bovu lx@dv vx(.° a )" Y. . fiov L X 6v g X ol P. N. A KLeS 7 r ■? -1 OL(S[OLSj rjpeoes fives Ixodes [iX^yJ Gr. KICOV OL03V rjpdxov fiodbv bourn LX@VCdV D. w / KLCTL » / Old rjpaxTi fioval Ix^vai A. idas OLUS, OLS rjpeoas, rjpoos fioas, fiovs iX^vas, ix^vs D. N. & Kl€ ole rjpooe fide l x Sve [lx6v] Gr. KLOLV 0 I 0 LV gpcboLU fiooiv IxOvOLV 204 b; v] imrecov vecov x f D. noXecn nyxeaL imreiicn vavcri A. 7 roXeas, noXeis nyxeas, 7 tj ix* ls imreds, imreis vavs D.N. 7roXee, tt oXy nqxef imre'e [vye] G. TroXeOLV 7Tyx* 0LV imreoiv veoiv S. N. 'StoKparys Socrates G. 'ScoKpareos, 'Scotcpdrovs D. ScoKparei, ScoKparei A. 2c oKparea, ScoKpary, -yv Y. 2d ucpares 'H paicXeys, C H paicXeeos, 'Hpa/cXeVt, 'H paicXeea, 'Hpa/eXees - , 'H panXys Hercules 'HpcxKXeovy 'HpaxXeei, ‘HpcoeXei ‘HpafcXea, ‘Hpa/cXi) 'Hpa/cXecs [ r, Hpa/cXey] c. Neuter. S. N. to ye pas honor to yevos race genus to derrij town G. yepdos, yepcos yeveos, yevovs generis aerreos, ucrrecos D. yepa'i yepai yeve'i, y'zvei generi V •• V aarei, turret. P. N. yepaa, yepa y'evea y'evy genere derrea, dary G. yepdcov, yepiov ye vecov yeviov generum acrTe'oov D. yepaai yevecn generibus darecn D. 1ST. yepae, yzpd yevee yevy daree G. yepdoiv, yepcov yeveoiv, yevoiv aareotv pat[e]ri, ap[e]ra, 210; avdpos 146; dp(evji)vd(ri 145 a. —0. E. 6 tpcop, -wpbs, fu(rs)r, thief, 6, y ’a rip, -epos, aer, air, y pyryp, -rpbs, mater, -tris, mother, y aKTis, -tv os, raxj, 6 noLpyv, -kvos, shepherd, 6 pyv, pyvbs, mensis, month, 6 aldov, -cD vos, levum, aye, 6 aXs, aXbs, sa(ls)£, SALT ; to v^ttrap, -apos, nectar, to (f eap) Zap fjp ver, spring. § 19. d. Pares 212 s : kls, Ix^s, 217 c ; klv 216 b, 202 a ; (ofcs ovis) oi's oTs 21, 140 b; [/3 ofs, /3ofos bovis] /3ous, j3oos, 214, 217 a, b; £ 7 T 7 r(eFs)€iJS, v(a¥s)av 215 c, 217 b, d ; /3 oval, vaveri, 216 d ; vyt 222 f ; ’Ztotcpdryv 216 c. Con¬ traction 7, 118 s : 7 jpip, TroXeL, 7 dpcu, 119 ; yepa, aary, ytptos, tfpco, 120 a, b, c ; H paKXea 120 f ; veubs 120 i, 222 f ; iroXets, ytvovs, yxovs echus, ols, tX^O, iroXy, hnrys, 121 ; A. ols, fiovs, irbXeis, vaus, 122 ; -iroXeus, i-rnrea, -as, 220 ; ivqx&v 220 f ; 'idpakXys 219 c. — O. E. 6 9u>s, 9i(v * oxeaefnv. Ion. icri(v • ttuXlti. evo*i(v, Ep.^e. 2G NOUNS. §21. 21 . x. Irregular and Dialectic Declension. o, Jupiter. Dor. o, Givis. o, (Edipus. Poet. & Ion. s. N. Zees, Za> TAoes Oidiirovs [Ot’5t7ros] G. AtSs, Tipvos Titivas PAoe Oidiirodos, Oidiirovr)oet.Oidnr6ddo,-d,-eb3 D. Ad, ZrjvL ViCLvl TAoe Oidiirodi Oldurbba, -r) A. Ata, Zura Zara PAoei' Oldiiroba, OidLirovv OidiTToddu,-7)V y. Zee TAoe Oid'nrov Oidiwbda, -i) p. N. [Ates, TiTjves'l G. Oibnroduv, A. -as % Attic. 6,son. Homeric. Doric, i),ship. Ionic. S. 1ST. vios et6s raes [ras] urjv s [v^es] G. viov, viios viov, vios, vie os vaos VTjos, veos D. vicp, viei vlcp, vh, viei, r —> vie’. vat vrjt A. vioi' viou, via, viid vavv [vav] ur t a, via \yqvv\ y. vii vie P. N. vloi, vieis vies, viies, etets raes vrjes, vies G. viQtv, viicov viuiv, viicav vaCbv vrjuiv, veuiv D. viois, viiai vioiat, viacn, vavai, vdeccn ipvai, vr)eaai,vieaai, A. viovs, etets vias, viias vdas vpas, vi as [vav r appevos M t r appevi 3/ 3 r appeva 3/ 3 t appev 3/3 t appev 3/ 3 ' appeves 33 'c . appevcov 3/3 r appeal 3 / 3 t appevas 3/3 t appeva 6, 7 ? (pleasing) to ev)(dpis ev%api evxdptTos evxapiTi evxdpira, evx a P lv evx a p L • evxapires evxdpira ei’xaptTcov evxdpiai evxdpLTas 3 / 3 t appeve 3/3 t / appevoi v 3 / evxapire evxapiroiv 6, I) (two-footed) rd Slttovs SlTTOVV dlnodos StVofit S/ 7 roSa, dinovv 8'mov SiVoSer dlnoda 8nro8cov dlnoai dlnodas diTroSe 8nro8oiv 6, -f], (evident) to aaf>rjs aa(f)es aaepeos, aaepovs aacpei, aacpei aaepea, aiKpr) aaepes aaepees aacpels aa$ propitious, euyecos fertile; ev8alu(ovs) 200, 120 s, 77.2 c, 777.2. — 0. E. 0;Atos friendly, ScKatos just, paKpos long, 6x&p6 s hostile, 6.6poos dense, tea Ads beautiful. pecros medius, middle, 5g7tA(6os)oCs duplex, double, apyvpeos dpyupous argenteus, of silver. d. Dec. III. and I. 233 : p6Xas 20s ; iras, %aptets 205 ; pdds 213 c, 217 l) ; fie'atm, 7?5e ? a, 233 a ; vcLaa, xaptetrcra, 233 1), 155, 156; piXacri, §24. OF THREE TERMINATIONS. 29 S. X. g. i). A P. jST. G. D. A. D. X. Gr. S. X. Gr. D. A. V. P. X. G. I). A. D. X. G. S. X. G. D. A. V. P. X. G. D. A. D. X. G. b. Of the Third and First Declensions. 6 , (niger) peXds peXavos piXavi p eXava g (Hick) peXaiva pfXaivtjs peXaivy piXaivav rb peXdv 6 (omnis) 7T as navros Travri ndivra V (all) ndcra 7 raergs Tidier y irdcrav \ TO ndv peXaves peXdiuov piXaai peXavas peXaivai peXaivdw peXaivais peXalvds piXava Tvdvres navToov 7 rdai ndvras ndaai Traadiu nacrais Tvdacis TTuvra piXave peXdvoiv peXaivd peXciLvaiv 7 rdvre irdvroiv ndter a irdaaiv 6 (gratio.. u yapUis yaplevTos yapUvTi yapievra yapUv ;) g (nqrzcablc) to yapUcraa yapUv yapuaergs yapieoay yapUaaav d (suavis) 7]OV$ gdeos < £ r S ~ ijOsi, r\oei T) §VV gdv g (sweet) to gdela gdv gdeias ydeia gdelav yap'cur es yapuvTinv yapUcri yapUvras yapUcrcnu yapiccro d>v yopucrcrais yapieaads yapUvra c S\ ' * $N ~ ° 7)0669, 7)06£9 T]0€L(U gdecov gfieicov jjdiai gbeiais gdeas, gdeis gdelds gftea yapletne yapuvToiv yapuaad yapucraaiv g8ce gdsou; g8eid gdeiaiv 24 . Of the Three Declensions. o (magnus) g (great) to pdyas peydXg peya peydXov peydXgs peydXig peydXg piyav peyiiXgv peydXe peydXot pcydXai peydXa peydXcou peydXcov peyuXois ptydXais peyaXovs peydXds peydXco peyaXd peydXoiv peyaXaiv o (multus) g (much) 7 roXvs noXXg noXXov TroXXgs TToXXd) 7 ToXXff TToXvV TioXXgV \ TO TToXv multi, TVoXXoi TroXXidv 7roXXoty 7 roWovs many noXXat ttoXXu 7 ToXXcoV noXXols iroXXds yap'iem, irdm, 154 s; 7rai', varTinv, irdtn, 729. 2, 778 b; gSei 219.— 0. E. rdX(avs)as wretched (M. Voc. raX dv), rep(ev $)t]v tener, TENDER, (rvp’ird’i (ervv, 7ras), -daa, -dr, oil together, T~ipgeis honored, TTTepoeis winged (207 c), eic(ovTs)biv willing, fipayos brevis, short, yXvKvs dulcis, sweet (108), € i/pvs wide, £%vs sharp, (3padvs tardus, slow , rayos swift. 30 ADJECTIVES. -NUMERALS. §24. S. o (mltis) i] (mild) to P. ot ai rd N. 7 rpdos Tvpaeia npaov 7 rpaoi, npcteh npaelai rrpaea Gr. irpdov npaelas npaecov npaeicov D. 7 rpacp Tcpae'ia npaois , npaecrc TTpaeicus npaecn A. rrpdov npaeiav 7 r paovs, npaeis Trpiieids 25 . xiii. Declension of Numerals. M. (unus) f. (one) n. M. (nullus) f. (no one ) n. M., none. S. N. els fu duo duae duo Gr. D. apcpoiv amborum, &c. dvolv, late Gr. dveiv P. late D. dvai M .f. (three) n. M. F. N. m. f. (quatuor, four) x. P. N. rpeh rpia tres tria recradpes, rhrapes reaerapa, Terra pa Gr. rpLcov trium recradpcov, reTTapcov D. rpiai tribus reacrapcn, rerrapaL A. rp'h tres recraapas, rerrapas 24. a. See 236 ; -rroXvs 213 c, 217 b ; npaela 233 a, irpaels 121. g- « Homeric 0 S. N. ttoXvs, irovXh G. 7roXeos ttoXXSs D. (77-oXet ? dEsch.) 7 roXXu) A. 7 toXvv, TrovXh TroXXon P. N. noXees, noXels TToXXoi G. 7 roXeuv 7 roXXQv D. noXecn, -earn, -ha^i it oXXoiat A. iroXeas [7roXets J] noXXovs Forms of -rroXvs. » \ 7] TO TroWri TToXv, TTOvXv, TToXXoV iroXXrjS -iroXXfj ttoXXtjv, irovXvv iroXXai (TroXea A£scll.) 7roXXa -iroXXdwv, TroXXewv TroXXrjaL iroXXas § 25. a. Numerals 240 : (e^s) ets.208d, pia 194 c, oi>8ev6s 973 b ; rpeh 218 ; rhrapes 169 a, reaaapOL 157 ; {ov8£ eh) ovSeis, pr/8eh, no one , 128 a, late M. and N. (ouVe eh, pipe els) oideis, ovdev, prjdeh, prjdh, 161 b. b. Dialectic Forms: 1: Masc. N. Ep. I'ets 135, Hes. Th. 145, Dor. t)s 131 d, Insc. Heracl. ; Fem. Ion. pi-rj, -?,s, ovSepir), 197 a, Hipp., Ep. (fr. old tos) I'd, iris, irj, lav, A. 437, II. 173, A. 174, £. 435 ; also Neut. Up Z. 422 ; PI. Ion. oudapol, prjdapol, -ai, -a, none, -Cov, -otcrt, -attrt, -oh, -as (v. 1. ovdapeas 135 a, Hdt. 4. 114), Hdt. 1. 18, 143, &c. 2 : Ep. Du. Soon T. 236, PI. docoi, -ai, -a, -ottrt, -oh, -ods, -as, M. 455, 464, A. 7, <5. 129, 526 ; Ion. PI. dvuu Hdt. 1. 94, dvolac lb. 32. 3 : Dor. N. A. rots Insc., Poet. D. rpiolcn Hippon. Fr. 8. 4 : Ion. reaaspes Hdt. 2. 30, 31, Dor. t hopes or rerropes, Theoc. 14. 16, Tim. 96 b, TEol. and Ep. iriavpes e. 70 ; Poet, or late D. rerpacn Hes. Fr. 47. 5. PARTICIPLES. 31 § 26. 26 . xiv. Active Participles. a. Present. b. 2 Aorist, -|u Form. 6 (solvens) i) {loosing) rb {clearing) 6 {having put) 77 TO S. K Xvcav Xvovaa Xiiov luens dels deiaa dev G. Xvovtos Xvovags luentis devTOS delaqs D. XvOVTl Xvovaj) luenti devTi delay A. XvOVTCt Xvovaav luentem devra deiaav P. N. Xvovtcs Xuovaai Xvovra luentes, -ia deVTCS delaai devra G. XvOVTCOV XvovaZov luenti um deVTCdV deiaZov D. Xvovai X vouaais luentibus delai delaais A. X.VOVTOS Xvovaas luentes devTas delaas D. N. XvOVTC Xuoucrd devre deiaa G. XvOVTOlV Xvovaaiv devToiv delaaiv c. Present Cont ’acted. d. Liquid Future. 6 (vlvens) 7 } (1 living) TO 6 (diet nr as) 77 {about to say) r# S. N. £{au)v)iov ^■(doa)wra £{aov) Zv epZav ifolaa epovv G. £(do)u>vTos ${aov)aq epOVVTL epovaq A. f(ao)<*>^Ta fr( dov)a>aa; epovvra epouaav P. N. f\do)(jLres £(&ov)S>aai £{do)o»vTa. epouvres epojaai epouvra G. £{a.b)d>vTWV ^(aov)(t)Tcbv epovvruv epovaZZv D. ig(ao)Zaai f(aoij)acuv ipOVVTOLV epovaaiv e. 1 Aorist. f. 2 Aorist. 6 {having loosed) 77 t j S. N. Xt'O'a? Xvadaa Xvadv G. XuaavTos Xvaaaqs P. IN'. Xvaavres Xvadaai Xvaavra D. Xvaaai Xvaaaais 6 (having left) 77 to XlTTOiV XlTTOVCa XlTTOV XinovTos Xinovaqs Xittovtcs Xnrovaai Xmovra Xuroiiai Xnrovaais g. 2 Aorist, -ju Form. 6 {having givm) 77 T 1 6 (having entered) 77 to S. N. dovs dovaa dov s earwaa earoos, earos G. eldoros eldvlds earoiTOS earcoaqs P. N. eldores eldvlai eldora earcoTes earcoaai earZoTa D. eldoai eldvlais earZbai earcoaais § 26. j. Participles 234. 1 : \v(ovt s)o>v, Xva(avTs)a.s, dels, Svs, 205 ; 5ou$ 205 a ; ei’5(ors)u> s 214 a ; Xvovaa , Xvaaaa, 233 b ; eldvia, earucra, cards, 233 c, a ; £(acov)Z>v, faaa, {Zbvros, eaT(au) s)cos, eaT(a6)o*Tos, 120 ; ep(£u}v)iov, ' p(eov)ovaa, ep(£ov)ovv , 152, 121. — O. E. Xvauv, XvOds, XcXvkujs, 37. 32 PRONOUNS. §27. 27. xv. Substantive Pronouns. The forms marked with the sign} are enclitic when used without emphasis. The shorter forms, fjiov, /jloL , p.e, are only so used. The initials affixed to dialectic forms denote, IE. lEolic, B. Boeotie, D. Doric, E. Epic, I. Ionic, 0. Old, P. Poetic. The plural nos and vos are placed beside the dual for comparison. a. Personal. 1 Pers., I. 2 Perf t'wic. 3 Pers., of him, her, it. S. Nom. e’yu) ego A av tu * * Gen. efiov, fiov j mei o-ouj tui T . OV j sui Dat. efioL, fxol,\ mihi (TOL i tibi OL j slbi Aec. eye, ye j me cre'i te rf G se P. Horn. rfyeh we 'vyeis yo u acpels they Gen. v c vyHc>v (TCpCOV Dat. t]/juv c vyiv rh ^ r . (J(pl(TL V | Ace. rjyas 'vyds acjjds [neut. (reflect] D. N. A. voi nos CT(f)d) VOS [A. cr0(»e| G. D. voou nostrum t crcficpi/ vestrum [(7(^>&Uv] e. Personal Pronouns : Analysis, 243, 246. Stem. Conn. Flexible CO oi r*H Vow. Ending. S. N. [X- - -c-CO -tv, -cH(v A. rj jjl- up.- cr;|)- -€- k* r . v "l -ct-S [li.-uj D.N. V- 0-0- (T0- -0)- -e G. v- o-cj>- o-<|)- -co- -Tv Uncontracted and Contract Forms. e/a(eo)ov (fjL(ei')oC > t €/j e 7y/x(ees)eTs Tjfi(eojp) cov rifi(eLv) tv ■0a (eas) as v(tDe)cS v(tDiV) cuv cr(eo)cv {eu)v)uv acpLcri ioi{v j a(fn{v j ||cr0 L ac. xf/e\ I)., aatpe AC. A. due D. D. X. vuie B. h. Reflexive 244, 248 : New Ion. 1 Pers. eyecovrov, -rjs, -w, -y, -6v, -yv • 2 Pel’s, aeojvrov, -ys, -y>, -r/, -ov, -yv • 3 Pers. eiovrov, -ys, -y, -rj, -ov, -yv, -j, PI. -u)v, -eojv, -or (XL, -yen, -ovs, -as, -a • Hdt. Dor. 3 Pei’S, avravrov or -03, -as, -({), -q, -ov, -av, -o, PL -ojv, -av, -ols, -acs, -ovs or -ojs, -as, -d. jEol. Favru) for avrov, Ale. 88 [74]. See 131 e, 130 c, 197 c, 246 d. i. Reciprocal 244: Dor. aXXaXcov 130 a, Theoe. 14. 46, dXAdfXotcrt Pind. P. 4. 397, &e. Kp. Dual aWyXoLiv 201 b, Iv. 65. OR. TAP.. O* 34 rRONOUNS. § 28. 28 . xvi. Adjective Pronouns. I. Definite. a. Article. h. Relative. c. J cerative. M. (the) F. N. m. (qui) f. (who) N. M. (ipse) f. (very, same) n. S. N. t o T) TO r1 os fi tr V 0 avros avTri avTO Gl. TOV rrjs ov ¥ avToi) aVTT]S D. TCO i T fl CO l V avreo , 1 avrj] A. TOV TTjV ov V v avrov aVTTfV P. N. c n rt > t 5 t ) 4/ Ol at ra Ol a 1 a avToi avrai avTCi G. TCOV TCOV COV COV avrcov avrcov D. !*■ T ? 1 <• } - rots rats 019 CUS avrois avrais A. TOVS ras rt ovs rt as avrovs avrds D. N. TO) rd rl CO » - a avreo avrd Gi. * T 7' •> - , r" TOlV raiv oiv a iv avroiv avraiv d. Demonstrative. M. (this) F. N. M. (hie) F. (this) N. S. N. o8e hie r/8e luce ToSe hoc OVTOS aVTT) TOVTO Gr. rouSe Tya8e TOVTOV ravTTjs D. rco8e l T f)8e TOVTCO l TCIVTTJ A. rovde rr]v8e TOVTOV ravryv P. N. oi8e hi al8e has rafie luec OVTOl avrai ravra G. rcovSe rtoi/df TOVTCOV TOVTCOV D. to ia8e raioAe TOVTOIS ravrais A. rovaSe rda8e TOVTOVS ravras D.N. TcbSe Tnde TOVTCO ravrei G. ToivSe raiv8e TOVTOIV ravraiv e. Possessive. S. 1 P. e/ios meus, my 2 P. aos tuus, thy 3 P. os suns, his, her, its P. y per epos our vperepos your atfierepos their § 28. i. Adjective Pronouns 234. 4, 249 s. Those of Dec. 2 and 1 have in general the dialectic forms belonging to those declensions (20, 201, 197 s, 131 d) : as, Ep. roio, avroio, roi'Cv • Old tolwv, avratov, rdtai, ratal, roicride, avroicri * Ion. rrjcri, rrjs, rrjeride, rjai, aurycn * Dor. ru>, avru), Ties, 'a, a, drts, ras, avras, rq,8e, ravrav, rav, avrav * iEol. rots, rats. j. Article 250: 6, to, 199; rc6, roiv, 234 e. Dialectic Forms: Old Nom. PI. rot A. 447, Hdt. 8. 68. 1, Theoe. 1. 80, ASsch. Pers. 424, rat T. 5, Pind. 0. 13. 25, Ar. Eq. 1329. k. Relative 250 : 6 199. D. F.: Ep. Gen. o'ou a. 70, e V s II. 208, § 135. l. Iterative 251 : avr6 199. So decline aXXos alius, other, and iKdvos ille, that (/cetVos p. i., B. 37, Hdt. 3. 74, Kyvos js., Sap. 2. 1, rrjvos d., Theoc. 1. 4). D. F. : M. aurtov, -ecp, -e'e ov, -coui, -too s, F. -ty, -dys, -erj, 'irju, -tiov, -trjai, -das, New Ion. §28. ADJECTIVE. 35 II. Indefinite. f. Simple Indefinite, g. Interrogative. h. Relative Indefinite. Lat. aliquis, ullus quis ? quicumque, quisquis m.f. (any, some) n. m.f .(who?) N. d, t TL? TL m. ( whoever) F. N. S. N. \ \ TL? TL rf oans rf rjns rf O TL g. rivo s, rov rivos, rov OVTIVOS, OTOV rjanvos D. TLVL, TOO TLVL, TOO cbrivi, or co fjrivi A. TIVU / nva ovriva rjvriva P,N. rives Tivd, rives riva drives drives driva , G. rivcdv [drra TUTl TIVODV covrivcov, orcov ZiVTIVOiV r * [arra D. rlon otcrncri, orois atonal A. TIVUS rivas ovanvas dorivas D.N. TLVe rive (drive anve G. TIVOLV TLVOLV oivrivoiv aivrivoiv m. Demonstrative 252 : o&ros, avrr] , 252 b. Decline roioode, -aSe, -ov8e, and roiovro s, -atirr), -ovrov or -ovro (199 a), talis, such, roodoSe (232 a) and rocrovTos tantus, so much, TTjXiKoade and rrjXiKovros so old, rvwovros t&ntillus, so small. D. F. : for ruvde, r diode, by a kind of double declen¬ sion, Poet. ruvdeuv Ale. 127 Bk., Ep. roiadeoi 8L T7]8l rourtZi ravryi A. rovdi rr)v8L Tovrovl ravrrjvi P. N. 0 I 8 L al 8 L radi ovroii avraa ravrL G. ruvdi, &c. TOVTCJvi, &c. n. Possessive 252. D. F. : 1 Pers. PI. 'a/xos or ’a,aos 0 ., Z. 414, A sell. Ch. 428, 'djxerepos D., Theoc. 2. 31, dfxpios, ap.p.erepos M., Ale. 103, 104 ; Du. viatrepos E., 0. 39 : 2 Pers. S. reos D. E., 7 . 122, TEseh. Pr. 162 ; PI. 'U/xos 0 ., a. 375, v/x/xos AD. ; Da. oepcoirepos E., A. 216 : 3 Pers. S. os p. 1 ., T. 333, Hdt. 1. 205, Soph. Aj. 442, ids E. D.,*a. 409, Theoc. 17. 50, f6s je. ; PI. oepos 0 ., A. 534. o. Indefinite 253 s : rts 208 d, 6 n or o,n 255 c ; roioi; drouri, 253. Forms of ris, ris, and oris — oerns, in Homer and Herodotus, marked as in 27 f : S. N. rls ri ris rl \\8riS O Tl || G. reo, rev rev j| reo 6rev ]|oTreo, orrev D. reip ||ry [rM oreq) A. riva riva llorim P. N. rives nva rives riva ||6'ra'a G. recov] re wv drew I). reoic rt] reoicri ] oreoioi [f. -e$cri] A. rivas \\doock riva s] 116'ra'as acrcra p. For Correlative Pronouns, see 53. 36 COMPARISON AND CONJUGATION. § 29. 29. B. ANALYSIS OF COMPARISON. 1. Old Greek and Latin Forms. 2. Common Greek Form. 3. Second Greek Form. 4. Common Latin Form. 5. Common English Form. Base. 1, Root or Pos. Stem. Connect¬ ive. a (u)i Degree-Sign. Comp. rtup. T Ill Examples. Comp. Sup, viarcs minimus 2. Pos. Stem. o 0 ) ai €S, S IS ■Hr ■rep to.t [AdKpoTepOS vedrepos <£>i\atT£pos aKpareVrepos XaXtcrrepos p-eXavrepos fiaKpoTaTos vedra/ros t^tXairaros ascpaTecTTaTOS XaXtcrraTos peXavraTOS 3. Root. (1)1 ov err rjShov i)8i(TTOS 4. Pos. Stem. i or ssim long-tor longtssimus 5. Positive. e r st longer longest C. TABLES OF CONJUGATION. 30 . i. Distinctions Classified (265 s). a. voices. Subjective. I act {Simple Performance of the act) : ACTIVE. Intransitive : Transitive: 28pa|xov, ^iravora, cucurri, I stopped I ran. another. Objective. by myself (Both Performance and Recep¬ tion) : MIDDLE, Reflexive I am adccl upon by another (Simple Recep¬ tion of the act): PASSIVE. directly : indirectly : e'n'ava-dp.rjv, elXop/riv, I stopped my- I took for my¬ self I ceased. self I chose. e7rav0T]v, I was stopped by another. 1 . Time. 1 Present. Relations. 1. Def¬ PRESENT. inite. 2. indef¬ ypdtfxo scribo, / am writing. inite. * I wriU. 3. Com¬ PERFECT. plete. yt'ypacjjc. scripsi T have written. b. TENSES. Primary. 2. Future. * I shall be ivriting. FUTURE. YpcuJ/w scribam, I shall ivrite. FUTURE PERFECT. , Tr€Trav>a-op.cu desiero, I shall have ceased. II. Secondary. 3. Past. IMPERFECT. 2ypatj>ov scribebam, I ivas writing. AO III ST. ^YpcuJ/a scrips!, I wrote. PLUPERFECT, eyeypa^tv scr ipse ram, I had written. §32. DISTINCTIONS AND ELEMENTS. 37 1. Decided, or Actual. INDICATIVE. Ypa 4 >« scribo, / am writing. C. MODES. I. DISTINCT. A. Intellective. 2. Undecided, or Contingent. a. Present Contingence. /3. Past Contingency SUBJUNCTIVE. OPTATIVE, •ypdcjxo scribam, *yp < M >CH l JLL scriberem, I may write. I might write. B. V OLITXVE IMPERATIVE. ypde scribe, Write. II. INCORPORATED. A. Substantive. INFINITIVE. Ypd4>etv scribere, To write. B. Adjective. PARTICIPLE, ypaepwv scribens, Writing. 31 . ii. Formation of the Tenses. Prefixes. Tenses. Affixes. Active. Middle. Passive. Present, CO, [Al CfJLCCl, jxai Augm. Imperfect, OV, V (\l'V RV Future, crco crogav Gr|o-op.at 2 Future, iq Perfect; Perfect Ac- 0 , Par. ) tive. u( 0 ), Aorist Active and Middle. *, Perf. and Aor. Pass.; -pi Form. i. Flexible Endings (295 s). A. Subjective. Sing. 12 3 Pri. -p(pt,*) -s{a6a) -t(cu,*) Sec. -p.(v,/u,*) -s ( flN p p * £ t/> mx m» mi q q q q O' i o o t q 2 co 2 p I g * ? 3 =i p p * £' *T) TJ ft) f» ►— 1 tft t? O gp 3, Eft < rt- Cft P- 3 3 =J 3 3“ 3 m * ■» m m m m> ^1 ^ M ^ P P P p c- P' p * * x * o £ ? P -P * p > o P 'ft & a, <-t- cr^ * ►*j M i—( P S -j a JZ G> cn w O cc tr* rt- cr* p- p p cr c * * m p =} ^ ^ sj s* a) P P P P P P P' p> p> p' er-. p q q q q q q p p o p g p io <■ ** p cr- c- cs C' q q q q £ ? o £ < < -£ 3 p ^ Ci p- c m m < 5 p _ p- o £ "F IKZ A A > rt Tt- I 3 3 3 =* — — m n\ A A 3 . P P P p p c- p q q q q O' 2 o o T= q -ft'"F m O r Q S p -3 ? O r < tO 3 m p p "F A A A m p p rtj» 3 A 3 m m =* ^ ^ p p C' p 3 ^ ^ 3 P P P p p C' o c q q q q P' p p p *f q ~ - 2 - 2 » S sr* o g -s « q q T= “F -p -P o ^ Q N Q N _j p op o o ^ «/) !/)r^ o m»# =1 =1 M =1 =f S P p p p p C P C' C C P' CD O CD CD O CD ?' £>-£* «/) < H j ■< e - < P e o ■F o o s o */> -3 Ji'_3 ^5' q q q q O' 2 o o *f q--p m CD H q « p -5 ^ 0 ^ -c £S ^ 02 *1 o K 3 ^ ^ ^ ^ a 2 o e- 2 " mw; C^> c^* Co S 55- ^ O c* se C5 & a> -i CS P S? a> § $ § § o S o *-s Ci o Ci -C & > p r. o ^ pr ^ Co V\J V" P” 2 tS .3 5 1 0 1 Co ^ cs Co s- a. a. Oi» ^3 3 is •8,3 d S, rs *< 3 a 0 C*S4 U g !> f 2 h ^ pr O' Co Co o*. a Co Ci > fe! O H S3 > a< a> f H O !i2 o 3 H K ft ft ft ft 3 o C' e «0 r-s. 40 Ind. S. ^ p ct Ind. S. a o o 0> GO D. Sub. S. Opt. s. o o o CO 1 ). Imv. S. r. D. Infin. Partic. CONJUGATION. §35. 35 . v. Subjective Affixes Analyzed a. Nude. b. Euphonic. Pres. (2Aor.) Impf. Present (2 Aor.) Imperf. F. C. F. 1 00 [U (o-m)o 2 s (e-s)€is i-s 3 (r)crt (e-r)€i i-t 1 p.€V O-JJIEV l-mus 2 T6 €-T€ i-tis 3 (v7-,vcrT)ao'i (o-vr)ona'L u-nt 2 TOV C-TOV F. C. F. 1 00v (o-fj.) 0V eba-m 2 s e-s eba-s 3 (t)* (e-r)€ eba-t 1 |A6V 0-fA£V eba-nius 2 T€ €-T€ eba-tis 3 O' uV (o-vr)ov eba-nt 2 TOV c-tov 3 TT] V £-TT]V 1 (w-yU)<0 a-m 2 (??-s)T1S a-s 3 (0- r )tl a-t 1 C0-p.£V a-mus 2 Tj-Te a-tis 3 (w-vr)wo'i, a-nt 2 TJ-TOV C. F C. F. 1 £rj-v oi-fja ere-in 2 IT)-S oi-s ere-s 3 £r] oi ere-t 1 LT)-JJ.cV, l-|l£V oi-|o.£v eie-mus 2 IT|-T€ 1-T6 oi-T€ ere-tis 3 ir|-crav, i-crav oi-ev ere-nt 2 IT)-TOV, l-TOV £ O l-TOV 3 nf)-Tr)v, t-Tr|v P Ol-TT| V 2 (0)01, s, € (e-d)i SJ e 3 TCO 6-Tt) l-to 2 T£ €-T€ i-te 3 Tcoo-av, 6-Tcoo-av, VTU1V o-vtwv u-nto 2 TOV £-tov 3 TWV €-tcov F. VCH (e-v)tiv e-re N. VT-S (o-vt- s)wv (e-nt-s) oris VO'-U, (o-vo'-a)ovo'a (vt)v (o-vt) ov 0. VT-OS o-vt-os e-nt-is Vo--.-]? (o-vcr-7;s)oijO'rjs c. Future. T. C. F. ( T-bi b-0 cr-ci-sb-i-s tr-ei b-i-t 0--0-|A€V CT-e-TC cr-ovo-i (T-e-TOV C-01-p.l. 0--01-S cr-oi cr-oi-p.£V (T-OU-T6 cr-oi-tv (T-Ol-TOV o--ot-xr]V (T-€ t-v cr-wv O'-OVO'-O (T-O-V ct-o-vt-os (r-ovcr-r|s $ 35, .SUBJECTIVE AFFIXES. 4i and Compared with the Latin. I ml. t? P c3 D. Ph Ind. S. & P- rB I B. Sub. S. a S Opt. rH c3 O O -|xev 2 tr-rpre k‘-T)-T€ 6 ‘f|-T€ 3 cr- e'-o-0a> l-tor P. 2 o-0e €-0-06 i-mini 3 cr0a>crav €'-o-0coo-av, u-ntor OT0CDV 6-O-0WV g S 5 - D. 2 ct0ov 6-O-0OV < w ^ c3 3 o O £ ^ b cs (/> -» — V o £? P= o S • ^ ^ I * *s op 1.3 “ * 0 O 0 ^ rH W g oo 05 5 § ° CM CM Q jj 6 ® S r-4 ° o ^ ^ ^ s s §s§^: o ph w .bp g " ^ g s' .. 3 S ^ _r 0 £ - l C Gj «j O « r 3 ot oo b _• o k ®H ®(N „Q. CO $ " PI S a. » ^ - £fj £ *-g +3 1 5 ^ O _T^ r«a -* ^ W o W- o o u/ ®" s 53 N 52 p-y fc * H0 s ®« ^ .r-T g to g M ^ecT S' O j/3 !*-< ^ •" _» CO I O) O w pa £ ;; ~ w .. p-°£.5 K U^r-i * i- Ei 05 Ol * 2^ B —1 CO u> ~ _ /—» +" o -X * .- o • 'td 50 ^ b co co O ^ 05 _ Cl o c _2 ^’d cd Pb b >• CD o Id o' > 3 T3 I o b«3 b ^ rx C a 3 oj s^ cf^ S: og^ eeS'S^a®**).. cd ^^^ k ^ cd ci « 5TO co QJ 50 CO r O O CO ‘D CO 'J-l '+-%J r ^ ^ 2+8 C o *§ ^ M cc t>>' rt b M 0 rQ -g CO <55 _T b o rd ^ S 13- b JZ -b> O o _ h D ,, -P ^ O'" _ - S 5b ^ -3 - S o -T b b ^ b ci g cz? s r-i r—H K^i 7S *N a> ?- -» ^ — ___ CG ^ O -T^ © «8 -S— g ^ U CD . • <55 b o cd od bC'— K ^ +5 c ^ © _r 5T fe oq ^ § b 8 cn ^ g ^ S tJO co • «8 «? p CO ^ ^ ” rt O b ss S 00 2 o a sc .2 o s* ^ a cd -S co co b cd 44 CONJUGATION. $ 37. 37 . vir. General Paradigm of (Stem Xu- , Pass, to be loosed; Mid. A. Definite Tenses. 1. Present, or Definite System : Base XT- active. a. Present. I am loosing. b. Imperfect. I ivas loosing. solvo solvebam solvor, &e solvebar, Ac. Ind. s. 1 2 Auco liio Aifimai limr 2 Xvas luis 3 Aup, 2 Ada lu eris.-re . 3 2 Ada lin£ Xvirai \vutur C3 p. 1 Adopsv lu imifi Aed|i.;9a lu imur Pi 2 2 Al7€T£ lm7/s 2 Al'£O*0£ lu imlni • r-4 u Ph 3 2 Auoucri‘ lu unt Aeovrai lu untur D. 2 2 Al/£TOV 2 Ap«cr9ov Ind. S. 1 2 &\t7oy luc- eAiTop^v lue- 2 &\e€s[fom eAeou [bar |>* 3 &\ue‘ €.\l'cTO ci r. 1 cAdopsy 4Aed|JL:9a <—* 2 kXvtTt €Adt m Opt. S. 1 Aeoifn \\xerem 2 Xv ois lucres 3 Adoi lucres P. 1 Aeoipev lueremws 2 AeoiTc luerc^s 3 Auoiev lucres D. 2 AeoiTov 3 Aikhttjv Imv. S. 2 AOc luc 3 Au6to ) lu I to P. 2 2 Ai/£T€ lu ite 3 Ai'ercocrav, 2 Auqvtwv luwwto D. 2 2 AdeTOV 3 Xeeiiov PASSIVE AND MIDDLE, c. Present. d. Imperfect. I am loosed, &c. I ions loosed, &c. Infin. Part. N. G. Aiteiv lu£re Apcav,-ovcra,-ov ! luens ApOVTOSj-OUCTT^S lllCJifoS Acoip^v luercr Aooio In erJn's,-re Ai'Oito \wcrctur AeoifieQa lu cremur AooictOg lu cremlni AeoivTo \uerentur Aeoicr9ov Aeo£cr0r)V Xvov lucre ArearGa) lilt tor 2 Ae£cr3e lu imlni AitcrGiocrav, 2 Ai4, solvo, to loose, to loose for ones self, redimo, to ransom.) B. Simple Indefinite Tenses. 2, 3. Future and Aorist Systems : Base Xvcr-. ACTIVE. e. Future. f. Aorist. I shall loose. I loosed. solvam solvi I ml. 2 Xu luam 2 Xu Xi/croadvou, -tj ov Xucrdii€vos,-'nr c S Xucr: p.'yov, *T;S CONJUGxVTION. GENERAL PARADIGM, 4G C. Complete Tenses. 4. Perfect System : Base XeXu/c-. active. i. Perfect. j. Pluperfect. I have loosed. I had loosed. solvi solve ram Illd. S. 1 Xe'XuKa jOfipul?, 2 Xe'XuKas^epuh's^i 3 2 XeXuKe‘ pe\m\it <■* C3 D. Ind. S. XeX^Kixjxev \e\VKO.Ti XtXuKutrt* XeXuKurov o3 nd £ O CJ CD U1 1 eXeXu K€iv ^epule- 2 eXeXuxeis [raw, 3 eXeXutcei P. 1 eXeXtysceijxev 2 IXeXl/KeiTe [Keo-av, 2 XeXuo" 0 «v X 4 Xu(r 0 ov 2 XeXuo- 0 o)v XeXuo* 0 ai! XeXujxevos! -rj,- ov I XeXujxe'vov, -tjs Ind. k. Future Perfect XeXuKws &rojxai solvero, I shall have loosed. COMPLETE AND COMPOUND TENSES. 47 §;n. D. Compound Indefinite Tenses. Bases \e\u- and \e\va-. 6. Compound System : Bases \vde- and \vdiqa-. middle. n. Future Perfect. I shall have been loosed , fyc. soliitus ero, redemero Ind. XeXuo-op.a .1 XeXiXrT], \i\v' 0 v G. XcXl’crt e Xu07]TOV Xu0CtT]V Xu0€lTJS Xl’0€LT] Xu0€ir]p.6' - y Xu0€i|JL€V Xi'0r|crlr ov Xt'0T]CrO|i.£VOU, -tjs /-* r-«H p p? O o 5sj.O t'- 55 CN <*■ ■ CN So >» 'N CO > £ =° ■+J o 0> CJ

-P eg co bO CD CO ^ X O 33 a CO Ph eg £ a> 2 eg co o pp H Q3 O O o eg^C o O I—! CO 3 P eg fP'p 2 Ph x -_H , rP ^ ^ -2 m co ^ s- ^ i£ Sj.l| if CC N r; ^ v — £ •gH a) s-. pL, <5 * co § S 1 40 o .o eg 'g 5 o 53 ^ O - '£ -2 c O eg ut€os! solvendus. 48 CONJUGATION. SECOND TENSES. § 38 . 38. E. Second Tenses. 7. 2 Aorist System. r. 2 Aor. Act. t. 2 Aor. Middle. I left . I remained . Ind. 2 c.d,rovlnpiiiX'iTrop.qv 2 ’iXcrres eXi?rov 3 (zXtird €/\t7T€TO P. 1 e\i'7rop.ev €Xi7rd[Ji.c0a 2 6/\t7T€T€ i,\i7recr0t 3 2 c/\t7TOV 6/\t7TOVrO D. 2 IXiVeTOV e\:7T€cr9ov 3 4At7rerr]v 4\i7recr9rjv Sub. XLtO) 2 X 47 TT]S o O 2 X 17 r “jrj r. 1 X 47 T 4 l)jA£V 2 X 4 ' 7 TT]T€ 3 X 47 TtO(n,‘ D. 2 X 47 rrjTOv Opt. XiVo^jAt 2 X 47 TOIS 3 X 47 TOI r. 1 X 47 TOLp.£V 2 X 47 T 01 T£ 3 XLttohv D. 2 Xitronov 3 XiTTOlT^y Imv. XiTTi 3 Xi.Tcra) p. 2 X 47 T£T£ 3 A 47 T£T« 0 -C 2 X47tov r< XiVtouai 0\ ' ^Ai7rTj X;7TT|Tai Xt7Ti6fJLe3a X/tTT]O'0€ Xi7rwvTat Xt 7 TT]O- 0 OV Xt7TOt}l^V ADrOlO Xt7TOLTO X:7roLp.£0a Xt.TOicrJi Xl7TOLVTO X'7TOUT0OV Xt?ro^o"3r]V XtTTOV ! X47T£Cr3i») Xi7T£ir3i Xi7reo-0iD«rav, y 2 Xi7rc£T0a)v D. 2 Xt7T eTOV 3 Xt 7 T€TCl)V Xi7r£(r9cv 2 Xt 7 T€O" 0 JDV 8. 2 Perfect Syst. u. 2 Perfect Active. / trust , pret. ire7Tota fldo ire^04^as 2 ir€7ro40e‘ 'ir€7ro4#ap.ev Tr€7ro4&are TTc7T oi^CtCL 4 TT€7T OtOUlTOV TTtTTOidOi TTZKoiO TJS TT€7T04^r| TT€7TO40Cl>|Jl3V iT£7roi6 , /'|T£ '7r€7T046 ) 4i)V 7 T£ 7 T oL 6 £TOV TT£T04^€T&JV Inf. X47T5iv! X47r€O"0ai! Par. X47T jv ! X47ri(Ji€yo3 Theme Xhttm (s. Xltt-, Xenr-, 347 h) linqno, to leave, 50 ; F. Xdf/w, 2 Pf. XoXoi7ra, 312 b ; Xlttwv decl. 23 f ; accent 780 b, 781 b, 782. 7r€7ro40evai! 7r€7ro40tds! -via! -os! v. 2 Plot. Act. €.TCTO40£IV €7T£7rO'^£lS €7r£7ro:^€i £ 7 re 7 T 04 #€l[J,£V, &C. 9. 2 Comp. Syst. w. 2 Aorist Passive. I was worn. erpt/SrjV tritus sum 4 rpt/3rjs €T/04 ( dr) €Tp4'^T]fX€V €rp4/lr|T€ erpi/^.jcrav €Tp4/3r]TOV £T/34/A'|TT]V rpi/SJj Tp4/3?js rp4/3diji€V 2 rp4/4'r|T€ rpifiktcn.* rp4/3fjTOV rpi/SfitTjv rpifd^s Tpipdt) Tptfiii^ (JL£V, -€l|X£V rp4 ( 8£ir|T€, -£lV£ rpijSeir^crav, -£i£V rp4/3£^T|TOV, -€IT0V rp4j8eL7]TTjV, -flTTjV Tp4/3Tj0L rptl3v t T0) 2 rp4/3r]T€ rp4/3r)Tcocrav, 2 rp4/3£VTWV TpL[3 TjTOV rpipTJTCOV rp4/37jvai! t pi fids ! -€io-a! -£v! x. 2 Fut. Pass. rpi/Srjo-ojJLat rp4/4r]croL|xrjV Tp4jS^(T£O-0ai Tp4/3r i trdp.svos § 38. y. The Second Tenses, which have no place in the regular com jugation, are here supplied from the verbs \dirw, ireWw, and Tpf/3w (39). See 289, 303, 336 s. Pret. ireiroLda. 268, 338 b, 312 b, 317 b, 318 ; tren roi- Qolrpv 293 c. § 39 ; e. Mute Verbs 270 c : rpipw 347 g, rdaaw 349 i, 169 a, irddic 347 ll, optfw 349/3; rp4'(/3-crcc)\j;a», ?Ta{y-aa)£ > a, 7r^TreL(0-ao)v rerdyQai ! reraypevos ! ereraypr] v erera^o ererciKTO ererdiypeOa erera^Oe ererd^aro rera^opai erdxOgv ra^6r]aopai erdyrjv rare rayi)aopai raKTos, rciKreos ueTieiapai Ti(7leiaai 7T€7T(l(TTai TienelapeBa 77(7T€ia£e 77(71 €l(Tp(VOL (L9‘l i 77(7T€iaO 7T(7r€La6(o TieaeiaSe 7T(7T(lcrO(ocrav, 7T(7T(La3(OV nendaSai ! neneiapevos ! €7T(7r(L(Tpr]V (7T(7T(L(TO (7T(77(L(TTO €77(77(L(jp(£a (7T (7T(ia3( Treneiapevoi gaav XeXrjaopai enelaBgv 7V(ia6r)cropaL edpdOr/vY.or]. [slept thcttoSi miareos K€iv, 149; rerpi(^-pai)[i.pa.i, €Tre7rd[0-pT]v)a[ir\v , 148; rerpi(/3-rai) 7ttcu, irera(y-ro)Kro, 7rei(d-reos)crTeos, €Tpi(j$-6r)v)§ Otiv, ra(y-6)\Qr](ropai, ippl(d-O)- (T0 7]v, 147 ; Terpi{(3-cr0e)$Qe, rerd(y-cr6io)\Q()i, 158 ; rerpipphoi (-ai, -a) fjcrav , reray pevoi (-at, -a) elcri or reraxarai, 300 b, C, 158 ; c opifov, Copuca, 277 C, 278 a, 280 a. Tenses supplied from other Verbs ; £Xa[3ov 351. 2 ; rjyayov, OR. TAB. 3 D 50 VERBS. -MUTE, LIQUID. §30 Mute Verbs. 40 . B. Liquid Verbs. d. lingual : opt^co a. dyyeXXco nuntio b. (paivco ostcndo opid-, 6pi £-; to bound. dyyeX-, dyyeXX-; to announce. cftcuv--, to show. Pres. A. bpl£(o tlnio P. & M. OpL^OjJLat Impf. A. copt^oi/ P. & M. dpL^oprjv 1 Aor. A. cbpXcra Mid. cipLG’dp.rjv 2 Aor. A. ei8ov saw Mid. el8op.T]v 1 Pf. A. copi/ca 1 PI. A. (OpiKClU 2 Pf. A. oida 46 a 2 PI. A. fjbeLV Perf. P. gj piapai Plup. P. dopier pr]V 1 Aor. P. dopicrOrjv 1 Put. P. 6pio6r]aop.cu 2 Aor. P. •2 Put. P. [crreos Verbals opio-ros, ope- dyyeWai ayyeXXopai rjyyeXXov gyyeXXoprjv rjyyeiXa rjyyeiXdpgv fjyyeXov rarer rjyyeXoprjv rjyyeXKa rjyye\K€LU oXcoXa perii oXooXeiv jjyyeXpai rjyylXprjV rjyyeXdrjv dyyeXdrjaopat rjyysXrjv late ayyeXrjcropcu dyyeXros , ayyeXreos cf)a ivoo (paivopat ecpaivo v ecpaivoprjv ecprjva e(fir)i/dpr]U eftciXov threw ej3aXoprju 7re(payKa ene, (pan.2, i'(p{av-aa)T]va, ijyyeiXa, 152 ; or ctv£dva j augeo all--, av^ur- ; increase. av£a>, ai^avco av^oyai, aifdvopai rju^ov, rjvi-avov rjL^oprjv, yi^avopqv aiflqaco peXXrjoo) av£rjaop.ai. rjvflrjaa fjfl/rjaa qi^qadpgv rjv^rjxa rjpprjKQ. ■ql^qKCLV oSa -,8a smell (j8d>8eiv rjvjlqpcu rjv£jp.r]v rjv^Tjdqv av^rjOqaopai av^qrds, ai^greos Perfect Passive. (d. i\£ 7 %co to confute.) Pluperfect Passive. Ind. neneppac Tiene p\fr ac 3 TrenepnTai P. 1 neireppeOa 2 nenepcpde 3 neneppevoi e'.al Imv. nenep-^/o 2 nenepepdco P. 3 ninepcjode, &C. eireireppgv eirenepflo encnepmo eireneppeda enenepcpSe eXgXtypg v eXgXey^o iXrjXeypai eXriXeytjai eXqXeyKrai eXqXeypeda eXjjXcy^Pe eXgXeypeuoL dal neireppevoi gaav eXrjXeypevoi rj- iXrjXey^o Pf. P. Inf. Pf. P. Part. e'KqXiy^Ooi nenepfdaLl neireppevosl eXrjXcyxde, Ac. eXqXey\Sai ! eXqXeypevos ! (XrjXcyxTO eXr/XeypeOa IXrjXeyxOt \aav 42 . D. Pure Verbs, i. Contract. 1. In -dco: Tipdoi honoro 2. In -eco: (pLXeco amo 3. In -dco'. 8gX6u> declaro S. r~ipZ-; to honor. S. cfhXe -; to love. S. 5q\o -; to manifest. 156 b ; idiX(er/)r)-re derjre 3 rt/x(d<»)<3-0p £coad (jf>iX(eco) v decov 8rjX(6cov)cd v rifi(dov)co-aa cpiX(eov)ov aa 8r/X(6ov)ov-aa ri]x(dov)cdv cpi,X(eov)ovv 8r]X(dov)ovv b. Imperfect Active. s. 1 eri]x(aov)cov Kjxev, Ti/bi(dov)u>ai, Ti,a(aoi)a) ( at, 120 C ; riju(deis)q.S , rL/j.{de)d.re, Ti/z(d?7j)qi,s, rin(dr))a- re, 120 a, 118 cl; cpcXfco'cocrt., -pai 8qX(oo}ov-pai 2 Tipfifiq. -pe6a -paL (fuX(ea))( 0 -paL cptX(ey)y 8rjX(b(o)(o-p.ai drjXio^o'i 2 Tip{ap)g 3 Tip{aq)ci-Tai (piX(eq)rj-Tai 8rjX(dr])co-Tai p. 1 Tip{ado)d>-peda (joiX(edo)d)-pLeda 8r)X(od>]d> peBa 2 TLp{dq)d-a6e CpiX(eq)q-aBe 8rjX(dq)d>-aBe 8qX(uoo)co-VTai 3 TLp.(do))co-VTai (fiiX(eoo)(o-VTat. Opt. TLp{aoi)cp-pqv f)iX(eoi)oL-p.rjv 8rjX(ooL)o'-p r)V 8r]X(doi)oi o 2 TljliaOljdpO (piX(eoi)o'i-o 3 Tip(doL)a>-TO (piX(eoi)o'i-TO 8rjX(6ot)oi-TO p. 1 Tip.{aol)(p-p,€0a (jnX(eoi)ol-peBa 8qX(ooC)OL-peda 8r]X(6oi)oL-ade 8rjX(doi)oi-vro 2 Tip(doi)cp aOe (piX(eoi)oi-aBe 3 TLp{doL)(p-VTO e\)iX(eoL)oi-vTO Imv. TLp{dov)d> (fnX(eov)ov 8r]X(oov)ov o O Tip{ae)a-cr6 co (fiiX(ee)ei-(T0(D 8rjX(oe)ov aBco p. 2 TLp(de)d-a6e aav, (Tav, (piX(ee)eL-od oov 8r]X(oe)ov- aBcocrav, rip[ae)d-ad(t)v 8rjX{pe)ov-cr6cov Inf. Tip.(de)d-crdai -pevos Tifj.(ao)co-perq TLp{ao)d>-pevov (fnX(e6)ov-p.ei'os cpiX(eo)ov-pevq (pLX(eo)ov-pevov 8rjX(od)ov-pevos 8qX(oo)ov-pevq 8qX(oo)ov-pevou (1. Imperfect Passive and Middle. S. 1 erip(ad)d>-pqv 2 €Tlfx(dov)c 3 o €Ti/j.{ae)a-TO T. 1 €Tl/JL(a6^CO-fX€0a 2 eTi/j.(de)a-(r6e 3 eTin(do)d)-vTo €(JnX(e6)ov-prjv €(j)t\((Ov)oV i(fnX(ee)ei-To icf)iX(eo)ov-p(da ecj)iX(ee)€i-aBe i(fn\(€o)ov-VTO e8qX(oo)ov-prjv i8i]X(6ov)ov e8rj\(ue)ov-To 6 8r]X(oo)ov~peBa e8qX(de)ov-aBe e8qX(oo)ov-VTO pdaco, ecpiXrjaa, SeSr/XcoKa, 310 ; ereXeaa 310 c ; nXevaco 345 ; ir\evaovp.aL 305 d ; rer^Xeapai, eirXedadrjv, 307 a, b ; eX(daco) co, rcA(ecrw)a>, 305 b ; -rre- Trpa.aop.ai fr. ( irpa-) TrnrpdoKio sell, 50 ; KeKXrjaopai fr. KaXtoo, -taco, CALL, 342. 2, 50 ; de.8rjaop.ai. fr. deco bind, 319 c, 309 b; accent 772. — 0. E. VLKaw conquer, ottt aw roast ; Sitj/dw thirst, Treivdw hunger, 120 g; Treipda: try, eaw permit, cmaw vex, anpodopai hear, 310, 279 c; oirdw draw, 7 e\aw laugh, 310 c, e, 307 a ; atrew ask, p.Taeoj hate, oh;ho inhabit, pyeopai lead, p.ig.eopai imitor, imitate; .few boil, ai.8lop.at. respect, 310 c, 307 a, 309 b; ■trXrjpbu fill, xpvaow gild ; piyow shiver, 324 b; apoco plough, 310 c, 50. 54 GREEK AND LATIN CONTRACT VERBS. § 42 - f. Indefinite and Complete Tenses. Fut. A. Tl/JLT](raopai edpXooaa eftpXccaappv bebrjXwKa ededpXcoKeiv dedpXcopai ededrjXcoppv dedpXioaopai edpXcoOpv dpXco6paopai 8 r)X( 0 TOS, drjXcoTeot g* Pres. A. drjp^dctpw hunt P. & M. dpp'do co-pai Impf. A. e6pp'aovjcov P. & M. e6pp'aofi-ppv Fut. A. dppdaco Mid. 6ppaaopai Aor. A. eOppdaa Mid. eOppaadppv Perf. A. reOppaKa Plup. A. ereOppaKeiv Perl. P. redppapai Plup. P. ereOppdppv Fut. Pf. Trenpaaopai Aor. P. edppadpu Fut. P. OppaOpaopai Verbals Oppdros, Oppare* OTHER EXAMPLES. reX(eoj)d) finish TeX(eo)ov-pai ireX{eov)ovv eTeX(eo)ov-ppv reXeaco , reXd) reXeaopai, reXovpcu ereXeaa ereXeaappv TereXeKa erereXeKeiv rereXeapai erereXeappv KOiXpaopai ereXeaOpv reXeadpaopai ► reXearos, reXeareos nXeco sail eV rXeov nXevaco late 7r Xevaopai, nXevaov- errXevaa [pat neTrXevKa eTveTrXevK.eiv TrerrXevapai eTrenXevappv hebpaopai enXevoOpv late irXevaOpaopai late rrXevareos Att. } eX{acrco,dco)(b, eXas eXa, eXcopev, &C.; eXwpi or eXfdpv eXav eXd>v. Fut. j TeX[ea(D,ea>)(ii), reXeis, reXereXolpi Ol‘ reXoipw reXelv’ reXiov. 43 . Analogies from Latin Contract Verbs. 1. In -(ao)o : ama-. 2. In -eo : mone-. Active Voice. 3. In -io : audi Ind. Pr. am(ao)o love moneo warn audio hear 2 am(ais)os mon(eis )es aud(iis)l5 3 am(ait)d£ mon(eit)^ aud(iit)?£ P. 1 am(ai)dmus mon(ei)emus aud(ii)imus 2 am(ai)atis mon(ei)etis audiiptis 3 am(aunt)aw,£ mon(eiint)e?i£ audiunt Impf. am(ae)abam mon(ee)ebam audiebam Sub. Pr. am(aam)cm moneam audiam Impf. am(ae)drem mon(ee)erem aud(ie)irem BARYTONES IN - a > AND -/u. 55 ?45. Imv. s. 2 am(ae)a mon(ee)o aud(ie)i 2, 3 am(ai)dto mon(ei)eto aud(ii) ito l>. 2 am(ai)dte mon(ei)ete aud(ii)zte 3 am(aii)anto mon(eli)onto audiunto Tnf. Pr. am(ae)are mon(ee)5re aud(ie)ire Par. Pr. am (aens) awis mon(eens) f3ov\evofJtat e(3ov\evov eftovXevoprjv fiovXevaa) ^ovXevaofiat eftovXevaa e^ovXevadprjv fteftovXeoKa e(3e(3ovXevKetv ficftovXev/xai e^e^ovXevprj v ejdovXevBrjv fiovXevBrjaopai (BovXevros, -reos aetco aeio\xai eaetov eCfKjfXTJV aetata aeiaopcii e cretcra eaeiadprjv aeaetKa eaeae'utetv aeaetapat eaeaetaprjv eae'taBrjv aetaBrjaopat aetaros, -reos e'Bvaa eBvadprjv reBvna ereOvKetv re6vfj.at ereBvprjv ervBrjv rvBrjaopat Bvreos , tea-, &c., burn. Ka'tta, O. A. Kata Katopat eKatov, etcdov eKaioprju ttavata Kavaofjtat eKavaa , P. eaar, iardvrau TldeVTOOV 8i8orroor 8eiKvvuT(ov Inf. lardvai ! ndevai ! 8i8orai ! 8ei5. / \j €0€LKVVV } eOeiKWOV 2 laTl]S erldrjs , erldeis erldr], erldei e8l8(os, e8l8c.vs / - >c\ / v» £0€lKVVS, €0€lKVV€S 3 1CTTl) e 81800, e8l8ov 3C\ ' - . tOecKWi edeucuve r. 1 ler Taper erldepev e8l8opeu €0€lKVVfA€V 2 Harare erldere e8l8ore e8etKWT€ 3 laraaav erldeaav e8l8oaav e8eiKi>voav, -vov honor; KeXevoo command, ira'uo strike, 307 b; kXcLoj shut, koXouco maim, 307 e, 50 ; daKpuoj weep, kioXvio (~v) hinder ; leXalof weep, 50. § 45 . e. Verbs in -jai 313 s : Stems, So- 8180-, 0 e- ti 0 €-, 357 . 1 , o-Ta- io-Ta- 357 . 3 , 8 €ik- SeiKVu- 351 . 3 ; stem-mark lengthened 314 . Affixes 35 a, 36 a, g, 32 i, 295 s; ( Icrra-p.) I'o-Trjpa, to-rr,v, 296 ; (tcrra-r) ttrrrjo-i, Io"tt|, 298 ; 6 crr(a-i'T, aval, aacri)dcri, riOeacri 300 a, 156 ; Set Krvpu or deiKvvoj 315 a ; iaT(a-o))u>, Z, dip, y vip, rid(t- co)t 5 ,aat, 316 a ; laraipr, deiKVVoipi, 293 , didprqv, doxrjr, 316 b, Icrraiper, Oelpev, 293 a ; tpat betKVvcopai betKvvy 2 terry TlSfj 8t8a> 3 largrai rtdrjrat btbedrat betKvvyrat P. 1 laroopeda TtOeopeda 8t8e!opeBa betKvvdopeSa betKevyaBe betKVveovrat 2 iaryaOe rtBrjade 8t debase 3 lareoerat rtOdovrat 8i8coerat Opt. LerraLpyv TtOeiprjv, rtOoipyv biboigyv bfiKvvoipyv Q C Z ICTTCILO TtOeio, rtOoio 8t8oio beiKvvoto 3 iaratro rtOeiro, nOoiro 8t8o1ro betKevotro P. 1 ierratpeOa TtOelpeOa, rtSotpeda 8t8oipe6a beiKevotpeBa 2 iaraiade rtBeiaBe, rtBoiaOe 8t8olaBe betKvvotaBe 3 iaraivro rtOeivro rtOoivro 8tbolero betKvvotvro lmv. lardao. tareo rlBeao, rldov b'tboao, blbov beiKvvao 3 lardadco riOeaBco btSdaBco betKvvaBo) P. 2 laraaOe riOeaBe biboaBe betKvvaBe 3 tarda Bcoaav, rtBeaBooaav, biboaBooaav, betKvvaBeoaav, lardadcov rtBeaBcov biboaBcov betKvvaBcov Inf. laraadat rlBeaBat biboaBat betKevaBai Par. larapevos TtOepevos btbopeeos betKvvpevos larapevq larapevov Ttdepevg btbopeer/ betKvvptvr) rtBepevov bibopevoe beiKevpeeoe d. Imperfect Passive and Middle. Ind. lardprjv driBepyv erlBeao, erlBov ebtboprje ebtboao , ebtbov ebeiKevprje 2 taraao , terreo ibeLKvvao 3 tararo erlBero eblboro ibe'iKvvro P. 1 iardpeOa ertBepeBa ebt bopeBa ibetKvvpeOa ebeiKevade 2 taraade drlBeaBe dblboaBe 3 taraero irlBevro dbiboero ibeLKvvvro 315 b ; 'laraaae 300 ; ridecrat ridy (late, Pall. Ep. 79), tar aero terru), K€iv 8ei£(i> 8ei£oycu e8ei^a e8ei£dyyv 8e8ei%a e8e8ei)(eiv h. Second Aorist Ind. earryv efiyv (edyKa eerfiyv (e8 coxa eyvcov e8vv sank 2 earys efiys eOynas eafiys eScoKas eyveos e8vs 3 eery e'fiy edyKe') etjfiy e8o) 8cd yved 54a) 2 (TTJjS fifjS 6ys 8d>s yveds 8vys 3 OTff fill 8d> yvdd 8vy P. 1 aredyev fiedyev 6d>yev 8cdyev yvedyev 8va>yeu 2 erryre fiyre Byre 8d>re yvedre 8vyre 3 ardxrk fiedtrd Scocrd 8cdcn i yvcdcrS 8vaxn‘ Opt. CTTCiirjv fiaiyv 2 4)76 Sorcocrav, 86vra>v 8oi)vcu yvedvai 8ovs yvovs 8vyv Ep. 8vys 8vy 8vyy(V, 8l>yeV 8vyre, 8vre 8vycrav, 8vev 8vBi 5 lira) 8vt€ 8vrcoaav, 8vvto)V 8vvai 8vs Weyev, delvai, Hdwxa, ZSoyev, 8ovvai, 306 b, c, 314 d ; Svyv 316 c ; 8 p{dys )qis 120 h ; irp'uoyai, irpiaio, 783 b. —0. E. £r\ yv, Zepdyv, Zirryv, iTrrdyrjv, ^akkyv, eaXov or 77 X 0 w, tfilwv, 2 A. of r\a- endure, opev • 3 ary- iocti or areicoai, Sdcoaiv- D. 3 aryerov ; Inf. arppevai Iv. 55, Oepev, Qepevai, 2pev A. 94, 86pev, 85pevai, yvApevai, 333 c. Middle. Pres. Imv. Varacro, larao Bek., K. 291, § 297 e ; Part. nOypevov 335 d : Impf. P. 3 rLOevro H. 475 : Fut. s. 2 dyaeai 8. 163, § 323 c : 1 Aor. s. 3 dyxaro K. 31, § 306 b: 2 Aor. Ind. s. 3 Oero T. 310, tro 8. 76, § 284 a ; D. 3 deadyv x- 141 ; Sub. s. 1 Oeiopai 323 c; 2 dyai (v. 1. 8eLy s) T. 403 ; Imv . Oko k. 333, dev 323 c. GO PURE VERBS. -MI FORMS. §45. Verbs in -mi (continued). ACTIVE VOICE. k. Irffii mitto 1. dfil sum m. eifjLi eo, Ire S. le-; to send. S. ecr-, i- ; to be. Ci » ^ o. i -; to go. Present. 2 Aorist. Present. Present. Ind. t rjfu (TfKd €L[U j sum '3* €LfU eo 2 n trjs ■fjKas [(Is i] (l es [et y] d is Q O " i igai TfKd) i(TTL est (i(TL i it P. 1 L(fl(P (Lfl(P (iTfiep j sumus tfl(P Imus <) jU rt L(T( etre eVre I estis 9/ LT€ itis 3 iacri { , tetoV (iaav (ifKav) etat j sunt 9f- r taac eunt D. 2 Utqp drop, 3 (LTrfP (OTOP j >r LTOV Sub. Uo r ? sim 9/ LCD earn 2 W n s vs sis 9f LTfS eas 3 in i n sit 9/ l n eat p. 1 L(bfi(P (Ofl(P t (LTfP essem ’totfit, loirjp 2 Ultjs d7]S ft (LT]S esses tt LOIS Ires 3 t r ICLTj rt (irj >t (irj esset ft LOL iret p. 1 ietrffiev , Idfiev ’ dgfigp, (ifi(V (tr/ficp, dfiep LOlfKP 2 Idrjre, leire ogre, (ire €IrjTe, (LT€ to ire 3 lelrfcrav , UUp dgaap, (Lev (irj trap, (Up LOUP D. 2 ieirjTOV, idrop dTfTOP, (LTOP dTfTOP, (LTOP ’lOLTOP 3 LdrfTTfP, ULTrfP (irfrrfv, (irrfv (IrjTTfP, (LTTfP LO LTTfP Imv. rt 1(1 » lets ! rt (IS y (OP [ens] f • i LOOP ! iens T rf T fl t 1 rt 1 » f I KLcra ! t(v ! ctcra , (p ovaa, op tovcra! LOV ! Imperfect. Imperfect. Imperfect. Ind. it}p,[iovp]l(lp J?nt. fjaco, rjaoiui, - igs, tds 3 0 o tr), cet P. 1 Ttfiev 2 ' 3 D. 2 3 rt L(T( Lecrav l(T op ieTrjv rjaeiv, gacop 1 Aor. ijKa find. only) 306 Perf. (Ik a, daevai, (Ikcos 310 b Plup. (Ikclv S T T ? ft . I rjv, rj, g/igp 2 \rjs\ rjada 3 t)v erat j](lp, fja Ibam yds, rjdcrOa * C r/ei‘ p. 1 o rjfi(P JI(Lfl(P, 7)fl(P ft 1 Jj T]T(, TJ(TT( v(lt( , tr( 3 gaap erant ij(trap, gaap D. 9 4mi TjTOP, TfCTTOV fjdTOP, ffTOP rjTgv, t)(tt?)V rjuTrjv, ijTrjv § 45. *IHMI, EIMIj EIMI, KEIMAI. G1 PASSIVE AND MIDDLE VOICES, Ind. o jLi 3 p. 1 2 3 Sub. 2 3 r. 1 2 2 n. Of ITJ/Xl. o. Of elgi, to be. q. Keigai, to lie. Present. 2 Aorist. Future. Present. iegai eigrjv eaogai Keigai lecrcu eiao eay, eaei Keiocn ierai eiro [eaerai earai Keirai legeda elgeSa eaogeOa Kelgeda leoOe eiade eaeaOe KeiaOe iemai elvro eaovTai Keivra* Icogai eogai Kecogai | n i Key ifjTai grin Ker/rai hogeOa ioge6a Keiogeda Ir/aOe ya6e KeyaOe IdoVTCU fdVTCll Keiovrai Opt. leigyv, loigrjv eigyv, oigr/v iaolgyv 2 ieio, loio, eio, oio eaoio 3 ieiro &C. el to, olro eaoiro p. 1 leigeda ei/ieOa, oigeOa eaoifieOa 2 UiaOe eloOe, olaOe eaoiaOe 3 e ** T ieivTo eivro, OIVTO eaoivTO Imv. er cr ieao, iov ov O O lea Oio eaOio p. 2 iea6e eaOe ') O leoOioaav , eaOioaav, leadiov , eoOoov KeOLfJiT]V Keoio Keono KeoigeOa Keoio 6e KeOIVTO K61CTO Keio 6io Keiade Keiadiocrav, Keiadiov Inf. ieaOai eadai Par. legevos egevos Imperfect. Ind. leg. rjv Fut. M. ijaogai 2 Ieao, iov 1 A. M. fjKilgyv 3 iero Perf. elgai p. 1 lege 6 a Plup. eigrjv 2 iea6e Aor. P. ei6yv Q o ievro Fut. P. eOrjaogai n. 2 ieadov Verb- ( r / 6TOS 3 leaOyv als ( ere of ep-eadai eaogevos To eigi to go, some as¬ sign a Middle, iegai to hasten, I mperf. iegyu. Others write these tenses with a rough breathing, 'iegai, iegyv, and refer them to i7 )/ju to send. KeiaOai Keigevos I mperfeet. eKe'igyv eKeiao cKeiro ea-, 314 a, K€t-, contr. kci-, 342. 1 : V't]|xi, cf. Tidygi • ( ieacu ) £e?crt, Att. iaai, 122, 120 f ; 'ioigi 315 c ; i'eij/315 b ; A. etgev, etgyv, e'idyv, 279 c ; elp. 1 ', ttjii, 50 ; kart 298 a; ioiyv 293*c ; tdi, el, 297 d, Iovtwv 313 c, &r tT lf JL G cf* 'l^ryfu- ygl, (pys, 50 ; ipadi, ZipyoOa, 297 b, d ; (Kiegai) k€i|acu, cf. TiOegai• Keiogai, Ke- oigyv, 315 c, 772 g. licit, has the uncontracted k eerai, intero, i deodai, &c. t. Forms marked with the sign j may be enclitic. 62 PURE VERBS.-MI FORM. §45. Pres. Ind. S. 1 p>ppi\ ppt 2 (prjs, (prjs 3 (ppat j* P. 1 (paper j 2 (pare j 3 < pdai ; in -/it: u. Subj. Opt. Imv. Inf. < paipr (par at n (paiy, (pdro) (peeper &c. r. in Att. (pyre (pare (pas (pcoad (parceaav, (parroor IMPF. €/ J €, earto, eldelpr (so dedtelpr ? as fr. base Sedte-, PI. Ptuedr. 351 a), ecrra irjv, ( IS-dt ) tadt, eardrai, 320 c; etrrcas 320 d ; ySetr, ydp, 278 d, 291c; earpKetr 280 a, Att. also elaTpuetr 279 c ; rjfxat Ka0r](xai (tcara, ^ucu) 280 a, 161 b (having forms from both 4- and 48-, or see 307 e) ; cf. Lat. sede-o, and see 141 ; (t]8-tcu) parat, •fjaro, 147 ; Kadwpat, Kadoippr, 317 C ; pperos 780 c; enadpao, Ka6pao, 282 b, 783 a, 771 c. — O. E. rtdrpKa am dead, (3l(3pKa stand, pt- pora am eager, dr coy a command, 320 e, f. . §47 PRETERITIVES. FORMS OF THE STEM. 63 C. ripen and KndrjjjLai sedeo, / sit (s. i-, e3-). Perfect Middle. Indicative. Subj. Opt. Imperative. S. 1 2 p/zcu ijaai KiiBiyiai Kadijcrai Kadcdfiai Kadji Kadoi/Jirjv Kadoio rjero KaBrjGo KaBrjaB 3 rjcrrai KaO^rai naOrjrai KaOoiro fjaBco P. 1 rjneda KaOr^xeda K.add>fie6a KaBolfxeBa Acc. 2 T](T0€ KaOrjade KaOrjaBe KaBoiaBe rjaBe 3 r/vrai Kadijvrai KaBcovrai Kadoivro rjaBcoaav, fjaBcov Infin. T]a8cu K.a6r](j6aL Part rjfievos KaOrjfxevas Pluperfect Middle. S. 1 ijfJ-flv €Kct0r]iJiTiv, KaGrjyLTjv P. 1 rj/ieda eKadrjfxeda, Ka6r]^.e0a 2 rjao e 50. Indicative. S. 1 earrjua * 2 earrjKas * 3 e, earr/Ke , * d. ecrrrjKii sto, I stand (45 f). First and Second Perfect. Subjunctive. Opt. Imv. €(ttt]K(o ecrrco earairjv earrjKys * earair)s caradi ecrTrjKT], * earalr], eardroo Infill. €CTTT]K€VCul 1 . ((Travail Part. P. 1 &c. eardfie v (tec. earcd/iev &c. ecrrrjKaisl 2 errrare * e Graze eVrco?! 26 i 3 ecrrd crt‘ eVrcooP ec Traraxrav, earavrcov 1 Pluperfect. 2 Pluperfect. S. 1 ((TTT)KtlV , (IGrrjKdV P. eorr/Ket/xep S. * T> <* w i . earapev 2 earr/iceis, ei(TTT]Keis €CTT7]KeiT€ * Harare 3 (CTTrjKd, eiGT7]Kei e arrjKeaav , (tec. earaaav 47 . ix. Relation of the Tenses and Forms of the Stem. 1. Domain of the Old Stem : Second Aorist System : Second Compound System : 2. Domain of the Middle Stem : Perfect Passive System : First Compound System : Second Perfect System : First Perfect System : First Aorist System : Future System : 3. Domain of the New Stem : Present System : Xa0- Vht- Suk- ZXaQov etyyrjv e'SuKoi' iSa.KT]V Xr]0- levy- 8 t ] k - XeXpcrucu ?levyfjicu 8&r\yfm i e\r\crOT)v ^evydriv itr\x e W XA.t]0a tfcvxa StSrixci ^Xrjcra ZSriija X^CTCO Orj^Ojiai XavOuV- £evyvv- 8 < xkv - XavOavu ^edyvv/x t 86.kv u 64 TABLES OF CONJUGATION. §48. CO W S • . a ts g a -3- y> d. d_ o QO.<=i o p o ,o 'W 5H -o-ifif £< ^ O «s • ^ ilM '2 . ^ vo 'o JS . a ^2 J b S* b fe O 3 •«'d Q. Q_ ■©--©- *\ »\ o ^ Vo Vo c< H< c 2 fe fe y> wy wu b ^ . b 8 p o a. u/ 2 S ' ( D «o ^ * <*■ •su C ^ o b b b 5 'a Q. o'* 5 ; jj v> *d 'ClI JJJI ‘•p -d *“ fe *s *'VO l£ 'd cl o ■ c** 9; '■Hi r* "H/ O O - 5Hu S b <30. I> b J5 Wu -©-Oi pf -"©• g. « j << QA g o >. rf 3 9 fe*PS - p ;s d .3- =*- fe a. • "L • h° j - O _p- w -f d ji, S ^ Jfi ills Q> -4—^ Vi/ b -M fe d > „ d d b b 3 d P o d d d fr b » Vi/ CP d" m* d ® ? > d. > d r-H CO -v *-3 *\ o _r b d vg fe ^ p ^ 3 o 'o 00. o ''Vi/ • f=3 11 V vx/ r* d‘3 ^5 ? | > 2 o v d O P V ° id « d S q§ pp PS O K b b '3 -8 ^d p 3 l±i'd d,-v ^ Q_ -ii) ^ rP*o • >d • • O Ps _» -> d fe b d >'d® - § b b b '3 p S d - fe "" v§ P fe I •o cd _r di b d ^ g b f4‘J S» Vj d d PS PS b b i> o Vu v"/< UJ -o b *N Mi • b £ S b-S d I o • «d CD b <1/ Vi/ & O > ‘3 p d 3 C~ Vi/ CO s pi o Ph o Ml H O i-a ■ fe-t H O EH M w M> 0Q P ? fe b? o 3~ fe ^ S- 3 *■0 'Vj fej b o *§'-§' 3 '3 d. 3 -uj <3 -A- ' =*-CP y/ c 3 fe ^ ~ d <3 g ' b ^ ''Mi ^ o ( 3 ^ Ajk^ <3 d b £ "d-co ‘3 <3 w> p p o p S b fe ■1/ yj i_ P. Q_ -y/ 'Jr 3 , '' s ' S ■a § a "Ov b vu S' & g •vij _ir c< • Sg *1 p fe s: o ^ S b d fHcLa U M 3 ^ W J‘3 Ph - ‘3 3~ %-vy o q .q 3 3 $ b pfe <3 1) M '"H O O P ^pa <3 Em s "d ^ c- g **=■ b . I-1 > . p a vw \)J ■°i .a S' ^ d~ • /jji S v ° I'g p *y/ o . w d M JU/> 5 tj mh o p Q Id & b . d s <1 d b s 3 p o b d -A- cu o. b b d y/ fe 'SP- cc> y/ b -y, d 3 •s ' • *p 3 S g A'cu =Ai S' “P 5 o'^i' 3 Pi s< 5 3 ^ * 4 r-^vo A—' < 3 3 voj *•-» VI/ £ O ?H O 0) h—( ’M ^ p' VO d_ 3 3 • M fe-H _ W<3 hC> <>2 - - Pel d" G c§ . f P= b S ^ S *5 - **' o. a. - p /< d b o ^ „ fe b Go *n •M> Vo 0"> -?.&<§ *N (S> s- S'p-' 8 v P PS C'O b fe i «• >2 -d« i y/ iy> o (s> C5- '—* , • o Hv c5 HP Pi ** «o v -J m cF i v d b “C 1 CP co C/l '.' ~ . d. tJ ^ uT o fe p 3 P* ;T~S PS S a a d_H2 Hq rH CP DIALECTIC FORMS. G5 § ±8. b. Referred to Xvco as a active. Pres. Ind. S. 2 Xves, Xv7]s D. 326 a Xijeicrda o. 297 b 3 Xdrjai ? E. 328 b Xvt] D. ] 30 c P. 1 Xijo/xes D. 328 a 3 Xbovn d. 328 a Xtioiai a. 328 c Pres. Sub. S. 1 Xvoj/ja e. 328 b 2 Xvrjada E. 297 b 3 Xvrjcri E., -rt D. 328 b P. 1 Xvopev E. 326 d A9w/xes d. 328 a 2 Xtiere E. 326 d 3 Xijuvti d. 328 a Pres. Opt. S. 2 Xvoiada E. 297 b P. 3 Xboiaav al. 330 a Pres. Inf. Auer, Xvrjv d. 326 a Aue/xer e. D. 333 d A vepievai e. 333 d Pres. Part. F. A doiaa A. 131 d Xvcoa LAC. 334 Imperfect. S. 1 A vov o’. 284 a A deaicov IT. 332 P. 3 eXvoaav al. 330 a D. 2 eXvirrjv A. 299 d 3 [e]Aueror E. 299 d eXverdv D. 328 a Fut. Ind. Xvaij),-eis,-e;,kc. D.325b 1 Aor. Ind. S. 1 Xvcra o. 284 a XiJcraaKov IT. 332 [e]Aucror E. 327 a 1 Aor. Part. Xbaais,-aiaa A. 131 d Perf. Ind. S. 1 XeXvKG},-TjS D. -326 b P. 3 XeXvKavTL I). 328 a XeXvKdai P. 328 c XeXvKav AL. 330 a Perf. Inf. AeA tjkclv, -f)v d. al 326 b Perf. Part. XeXijncov D. A. 326 b Plup. Ind. S. 1 XeXvKea I., -rj 0.291 c eXeX vkov E. 326 b 2 AeAi/fceas I., -r/s O. 291c [163 b 3 AeAu/cee(r I., -ei(v p. 2 Aor. Ind. (XeXiirov, -es, -e E. 284 e P. 3 eXnrav AL. 327 b 2 Aor. Inf. Xnrleiv I. 323 d XtTTTjV d. 326 a) PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. Pres. Ind. S. 2 Afecu I. 323 a Xbeaai HEL. 331 c P. 1 A vofxeada P. 299 a Pres. Sub. S. 2 Xvrjai I. 331 a Xveai E. 326 d 3 A ijercu E. 326 d P. 1 A vo/neada E. 299 a Pres. Opt. P. 3 XvoLaro I. 329 a Pres. Imv. S. 2 Xbeo I., Xvev I.D. 323 Model. Imperfect. S. 1 XvjfMrjv o. 284 a eXvb,udv D. 328 a Auecr/e^iujr IT. 332 2 [ejAtfeo l.,-eu i.d.823 D. 3 [i]Xijecrdov E. 299 d eXviaOlv D. 328 a Fut. M. Ind. Xvcreu/xaL,-fi,k,c., D.325b S. 2 Xbaeai I. 323 a Aor. M. Ind. S. 1 XvGajX7}v o. 284 a eXvcrapidv D. 328 a XvaaaKufArjv it. 332 2 [e’]Autrao l. 322 b eXbad D. 322 e Aor. M. Opt. P. 3 A vaaiaro I. 329 a Perf. Ind. S. 2 XeXvai E. 331 b P. 3 XeXvaTen i. 329 a Perf. Opt. P. 3 XeXvvTO E. 317 C Pluperfect. P. 3 [e]AeAuaro I. 329 a Aor. P. Ind. P. 3 e .\vGev p. 330 b Aor. P. Sub. S. 1 A vdeco I., -dio E. 323 a, c [323 c 2 A vdeirjs or -ipps E. 3 XvSdirj or -r/rj E.323 c P. 1 XvObwpiev I. 323 a 2 Xvddiere E. 323 c 3 XvOeojGL i. 323 a Aor. P. Inf. X{>6r)v a., -'rj/j.ei' d. 333 b A vGijfiemi E. 333 b 2 Aor. M. [e]Ao/x??r, -oo E. 313 b c. Various Forms of Contract Verbs (321 s). Uncontracted. Contracted. opaoj, bplw I. bp Co op&ei, oparj op* opaoifju bp dpi opaovaa opQaa bpdovTes,-eovres I. opwvTes bpaeadcu opaadai yeiKbw VeiKh) veiKby veinrj idpboura idpovura apbovai apodai Variously Protracted. bpbw, fxevoLvujGj, Pt. opbuv A. 350 opaa, pevoivda, Inf. dvridav N. 215 opbippu, rjfi&oipii, Mid. 2 airibwo v. 135 opbwaa, vaierdwaa, piaipiJjuaa O. 542 bpbuvTes, bpbwvres I., T?/3u>orres k. 6 opdaadai a. 4, pivdaadai a. 39 vewduo, Inf. TrXeieiv o. 34, Pt. veiKeiwv a. 9 veLKeLiQ p. 189, veiKelriai A. 579, 6dy 2507 IbpdovTa, inrvdovrcLS , Fem. ibpdovaa apbioai, Opt. Stjcj wer, Mid. fibiovro G6 CONJUGATION. §49. 49 . xi. Classes and Notation of Stems. I. PRIME STEMS (a; 340). Roots, (a 1 ) giving rise, and (a 2 ) not giving rise to Modified Stems. II. MODIFIED STEMS. b. By Precession : b 1 . Of u to €. b 2 . Of e or o to i. b 3 . Of a to w, &c. c 1 . By Contraction. c 2 . By Syncope in the Theme. c 3 . “ “ in the 2 Aorist. c 4 . “ “ in Other Tenses. c 5 . By Metathesis in the Theme. c B . “ “ in the 2 Aorist. Derived Stems, (a 3 ) giving rise, and (a 4 ) not giving rise to Mod. St. 1. EUPHONIC (341s). c 7 . By Metathesis in Other Tenses. c 8 . By Antithesis. d 1 . To avoid Double Aspiration. d 2 . From Use of both Sm. & R. Forms. e 1 . By dropping a Consonant. e 2 . By adding a Consonant. f 1 . By dropping the Digamma. f 2 . By changing the Digamma. f 3 . By changing or dropping , £a£a 279 b [^£a, \k. 392]; 2 pf. c 2aya ^rjya I. ] am broken, °?ayyai 1., 2 a. edyyv [Ep. a, or a ?]. It has *ome forms as if from eay-: ao. ^. c ed£ajLys.l00.5, f. c ed£eiMat. 12.20. [Ao. opt. (/carFa^cus, k aFFa^ats, 136, 142) Kava^ais Hes. Op. 664.] dyco ago, lead, bring; d£w, m. (sometimes asywss.), 9j^a r., 2 a. ijya- yov m. 28 4 g; fjx°b later dyrjoxa 312 d, i}yuai,ijxdwf- Log. yyiloyai, [ayivSw.] [dS € - be sated ; see aw.] a8cj sing; acrop.ai., -aw r., yaa • yayai, rjadyu : ct. fr. po. & I. afiSw, aeicno m., rjeiaa. aeipu & deprafa raise ; see atpw. a k%w increase ; see av^w. [&T]p.L & da> (a-, ae- v) breathe, biota, P. dyyaL (314 b ; and i] in some other forms for the regular e); ao. aeaa, ct. Sera, breathed in sleep, slept. Cog. dia>, atadw. ] ai.8fop.cu v,jgo.aidoyai,respect; al8e- crop.aiao.; r)8ecrp.ai, ydeaOyv f. [Pr. imv. aldeio 323 e.] alvtco praise, usu. cp. w. err l, &c.; atvecrw c m [-yaw], ao. ; c f(v€Ka, c rjrrj- /xat310d, rjiddyu c f. [Cog. atvyyi, aivifa, -o/xat.j 68 TABLES. (lfX7TVV- §50. cuvvpai [al'vufuu take, see atpw.] alpeco take, M. choose ; aiprjcra) to., ao. a. 1 ., to . r. ; f)pT]Ka, -pai [dpaLprjfca, -picu, I.], 3 f. rippaopai r., rjptOi;v f. 310 d.: (FaX- x, aX- f, eX- 1), aXo- w, aXta/c-k 7 ) 2 a. dXov to. 279 c, e, late f. & ao. eXw to., eiXam.: as pass., aXCo-Kopai taken, captured; dXw- tropai, 2a. edXwr & 77X0^ ('aXw, -ot^, -wvai, -ovs) ; IdXcojca & IjXcoKa. ai'pco (li, dep-, sync, dp-) raise, M. win ; ’a pto to., i)pa to. (dpw, 'dpaipL, dpov, &c.), 2 a. ypbprjv f apwpaL, &e.) po.; ^pKa, -pai, -drjvi. Po. & I. cUip & -dvdpv f. 1. [a.Lo-0co & duo breathe; see a rjpu.] dto-(rw i 1 , acnxco c 1 , rush, po. +, M .; dt£co, a|l., fjxovaa• [diKOVKa D.,] 2pf. aKT)- Koa, 2 pip. 7)Kr]K:deu> 281 d, yjKovapac 1., -ad-pv f. Cog. dupoaopai, [aKovdfa. ] [aXdXKto ward off; see aXe£w.] dX6joy.a.\. wander, po. + [dXoa>322c]; [ c dXrjcrojJLai or -yjadpyv, Hes. Sc. 409 ; dXdXrjp.aL+ pret. 284 a,] nXy/d-pv. Po. cog. aXpreuw, dXalvw, [fXaivw, y]Xa- CKLO, 7)Xo.(TKdfa.] aXSaivco (n 6 , aX<5-) alo, nourish, po.; 1. ijXdr)va or -yjaa, [2 a. ijXdavor. Cog. dXSr/aKw alesco, grow.] dXeiM (li, aXup-) anoint, If .; aXei- v{/a or -et0a, aXrj- Xippai or-et/r/ratTli. 4. 68, yiXd(p6pvL, 2 a. 7)Xi(p7]v r. dXe'£o> r. (k 6 ,dXe/f-,dXK--c 8 ),&aX^/ew ?, ward off,hi. defend one's self, requite; [dXe£-qcra>, c aXe'£w r.,] TO., ao., [2 a. dXaXxov 284 e,] 2 a. inf. dXxaddv po. r. 353 a. [Cog. 1. dXaXxw, -Kijaw.] dXeija) (f 2 , aXeF-, aXe- f 1 ) avert, po. [AT. aXevopai & dXeopai shun] ; dXevcrco, ao. a., to. r. [yjXevapyjv & -edprjv 306 a], Pr. imv. aXev, by apocope for dXeve, JEscli. Pr. 568 v. 1. Po. cog. dXdcrKw (k 3 , dXvK-), f. dXv£to m., ao.; dXccr.vdfw,[dXua/cdra;,dXeet^w.] dXea grind; dX(c'cra;)co r. 305 b, •p'Xecra • dXt|XeKapo. r., -eapac or -epai, i)Xeadyjv\. Cog. dXrfiw r., [dX^rpedw.] [dXBcpai become healed, e. & i.; c dXGrj or -ttw (i 1 , aXXay-) change, M. barter; dXXd^co to., ao. ; c 'nXXaxa, -aypat., -dx^W c f-, usu. in Aft. prose 2 a. yjXXayrjv f. dXXcpai (1, aX-) salio 141, leap ; dXoupaL, yjXdppu, connn. (exc. in Ind.) 2 a. yfXbpnv [2 s. dXcro, 3 s. dXro, pt. aXpevos, 326 e, 167 c]. dXvlcrKu, -Ka^ctf, & -Kavw, see dXedw. dXvbj (o) be excited, po. +. [Cog. dXbaaLO, f. -£a>, aXvcrOaiv w, aXvKTeu (aXaXvKTr/paL pret., 284a), aXvKTafa, Hdt. 9. 70.] aX<})dvw (n 4 , dXffl) find, po.; [2 a. y)X(f)ov, opt. 3 p. aX : [2 a. ( appor - c°, b , 167 c, dpfipor- or dfipoT- 146 b) ijppporov. Cog. 1 a. sub. 1 p. c-fipord^opev 326 d, Iv. 65.] dpPXicrKw k 7 & c apftXbw cause mis¬ carriage ; du-PXwcrc'j 1., ao., 2 a. c rjp- /SXojvI.; c f t ppXwKa, c -pai, -6 t]v. [ajxep8a> & apetpco (o, li, apep-), de¬ prive ; due pa-a), ao. a. +, to. 1. ; yjp^pdpv + .] djUTrXaKLo-Kco (k 2 , dp-irXax-), miss, err, po.; 2 a. f)pirXaKov, pt. dirXaKwv 171, Eur. Ale. 241 ; ppyrXdKnpaL 311, yfisch. Sup. 916. [ap7rvu- take breath; see yrvtw.] apvvco VERBS. fiaivco G9 § * 30 . dfxdvw avert, defend (cf. munio), M. repel, requite; dpOyd m., rjpvra vi., 2 a. ypdraOor 353 a. aa'jjLYvoew doubt; see yiyrdsTKco. diicjjicrp^Tiw dispute ; see (3aLr k -otyviTJu open ; see otyw. avvto & also Att. dvvTw t (ace. to some, Att. a-), accomplish, M .; avdarto m. , ao.; rjWKa, -apai, -aOyr f. [Nude pr. arvraL 1 ; ipf. ijrvTO e. 243 ,"drupes k ’awTo Theoc. ] Cog. &ru m. , po. dvvoyw command, po. & r.; dvu>|w, ao. ; 2 pf. dvorya pret. & unaugm. [nude 1 p. dr-jjyaev 320, Horn. Ap. 528], imv. drioye k anoxlh 320 f. [Cog. dvio yiu H. 394 v. 1.], See 326 c. diravpaw, dirovpas, see ewavpeco. [aTa ^tcrxco (k 2 , dirat|cra> 311, ao. r., 2 a. yyraepor +, m. See d7rrw.] d7rt)(8d,vojji.ai & drrE'xOopai, delud¬ ed; see 2x® w - uttt o) (t, a cj>-, 147) fasten, kindle, M. touch; aij/wm., ao.; yppai, yepdyr, c f. 1. [Ippai k a (pOyr, Hdt. 1. 86, 19, edcpOyr 279 b, N. 543. Cog. acpaio or d (j 1 , i 2 , appjd-) adjust,M .; dppdcrco, to-.L, ao.; Ijppoxa, -crpai, -adyr f. See dpapiaKOK dpvupai win ; see a’ipco. apco aro, plough; dpdera), ao. ; [apypopai. E. I., | ypoOqr : [dpocoaLV 324 c, dpopperai 333 e 1 '.] ap7rd£« j 12 seize; cprrdcra> and oft- ener cpiracropai [apna^o:], ao.; qp- iraKa, -apai {-ypail.}, -crOyrf. [-x^W, Hdt. 2. 90 + ], 2a. ypirayyri. 1. [Nude 2 a. pt. m. (apira-) apnaperos 1.] dprv'j), -dvco, -eopai, see dpapLcnuy. dpdjj k apdTw t, draw water, 31.; dpdo-opai 1., iqpvaa 711 .; ypvdyr or -vadyr 307e.— dpxw lead, see 4l. acrcrco rush ; see at raw. [a££a; E. I. + ] & ad|dva) (n 4 , aFe^-, ai)£-, de£-, f 12 ) augeo, increase; see41. F.av^arQi inLxx. Cog. av£eco\. a j£o shout, po.; ddcrw ( v), ijvaa. daw & d^dcrcrw handle; seediTTO). dyE'wv, d\£dcov, dxvvp.ai k dxop-ctt be grieved ; see a/ca%tfw. dX^opai bevexed; dx9ecrop,aL311 d ; fjX0 , npa-'“ 1., yxfleaOyr f. [&a> satiate ; ' -, do-w m., daa m. ; pr. inf. ’ayerai 333 e r . Cog. sub. 1 p. eloper T. 402, ao. opt. 3 S. ’ddyaeier a. 134, pf. pt. ’ ddysores K. 399, as fr. ea- k adl- become sated; aadopat be nauseated, i. d. + .]—See aypi. B. Paivw (n°, /3a-) vado, go ; Pqo-opai po. exc. in comp., [efiyadpyr, usu. -adpyr 327 a,] 2 a. epyr 45 h, e, 322 c ( imv. fiqdi, c (3d, 297 c, d); Ps'pTjKa (2 pf. ind. 3 p. /3e/3dacrt B. 134, ct. /SejSacn Fur. Tro. 835, § 156, sub. ip- (3e(3s, PI. Tim. 63 c, 2 pip. 3 p. (3r)v, f. 1. Pacrrd£w carry, po. orl.; PcurTaa, -aggai, 3 f. -axf/opac, e0Xd(p6yv, & 2 a. epXa- pyv f. [Cog. pXdpw r., T. 82.] pXcurTavw & r. pXaa-Tew (n 4 , Y pXaar-) sprout, bud; pXacmr|CT-w, ao., comm. 2 a. e pXaar ov ; PepXd, G hppoxdyv 1 ., c eppi>xw-] ppi>xdcpai (u, Ppvx-) roar, 355 u ; c Ppvxfjo-opai very 1., ao.; 2 pf. Pe- Ppv\a pret., tppvxifyr. p-uvew n 10 , r. pdw, stopoip, M. ; c plJ- erw, ao. a., m. 1.; ptpvagai, 0 eptjdyv. Cog. pvvw k pdjpw r. r. yape'w (v, yap.-) marry (of the man), M. marry (of the woman); yapw on. 152, 1. yagyaw m., i'yypa m., later eyapyaa- yeyapTiKa, -pac, eyapyOyv f. 1.: [f. m. yageaaerai will provide a wife, I. 394 v. 1.] ■ydvvpai, 1. yavvvgai, rejoice ; [•ya- vv- cropai, ao. on. 1. [ dv-tyvcocra persuad¬ ed, Hdt.], 2 a. eyvcov, 45 h, e {on. opt. 3 s. avy-yuoiTO iEsch. Sup. 216); ^yvcoxa, -agai, -od-qv f. Cog. yvwpi- fa, -Lou, -tu>, eyvdjpiKa, make koiown; agepLyvoiu, -qou, doubt, aug. qgcpLy- k qgcpey- 282 b. ■y\vc|>w sculpo, carve; y\0]/co 1., ao. a., on. 1.; yiyXvggai k ZyXvggat. 280c, eyXvcpdgv 1. & r., 2 a. eyXvcpqv). Cf. glubo. Cog. 7 Xa Saxvw ( 11 1 , dan-, dr/K- g) bite, 47 ; 8rj£o|iai, -£a> 1., ao. r., 2 a. (dasov ; 8s'Sr]X a h, dtdqygai, idqxOqr f-, 2 a. edasqv 1. Cog. danvdfa po. Sapa^w (z, dag-) domo, tame, soib- due, po. +, M. ; 8apd + k 8ta» (di-, deed- o h) fear, diogai + frighten ; SaVopai, + t, -au> ].,] edeioa pret. Se'Soixa k 2 pf. 8e'8ia 46 b [ dddcuKa , deidia, 134 a, dedoLKiv I)., 326 b]. Cog. deigaLvw fear, de- dLoaogai [5et5tcrcrowat], r. dedicrKogai, frighten, dLqgt chase ( M. dLegai) po., k diuKiv q. v. SciKvvpi k SaKViio) (n 7 , deiK-) in- d rco, extend the hand to point out, show [M. greet with extended hand]; Sei'^w, &c., 45 [in Hdt., fr. des-f defy, eoe^a on., G dtdeygac, c idexdpr- Ep. dddeygai 134a, pret., q. 72]. Cog. d^x°ga.i q. v., de^ibogat greet, [5e<5t- oKogaL k deLdiGKogai greet, deiKava oj shoo ] SeiTTveo) sup : see dpiardcc. [8 ip.fn build, Hom.Merc.87 ;] edeega on.; [dedg-qgcud.] Cog. dogtw 1. SepKopai b 1 see, po. or 1.; Ssp^opai 1., ao. 1., 2 a. edpaKov c 6 , on. r.: 8e- Sopxa jwet., edepxOqu [2 a. idpasqu Pind. N. 7. 4]. St'pco (b 1 , dap-), less Att. deipio or daipco h, fag, c M. r.; Scpco, fdetpa • dtdapgai, edapOqu r., 2 a. idap-qv, f. 1. Stvopai ivaoit; see St'xopat o'cceive ; 8e|opai ao.; Se- Stypai, 3 f. dedet-ogai, ed^x^V v , f- h [Pr. 3 p. dex aTaL for 5ex[o]crcu 158, M. 147, 2 a. edPyg-qv, 326 e. Cog. d^x vv P a ^ deKogai 167, Hdt. 9. 91 ;] see ddKvvgi. 8€w, bind, M., 309 b; Sqorw on., ao.; StSeaa (r. -gsa 310 d), dedegai, 72 8(co TABLES. 3 f. bebyauuai 319 c, Cyr. 4. 3. 18, ebeOyv f. Cos;, r. bibypu r 1 , y. 8. 24. 8e'« (f l , SeF-) need, want, M. need, beg; Sitjcrw to. 311 e, ao. a. [3 s. ebycrcu IS. 100] ; SeSe'rpca, -/ lai , ebey- Oyv, 1. 1. [Ep. bedoyai f 2 , -yjopai, iSevyoa, i. 540.] Impers. del there is need, bey, ct. by 309 b, been, belv, beov • beycrei, ebeyae. 8t]Xow, -wo-co,&c., manifest; see 42. Srjc a shall find ; see bidder kco. SiaiTaco regulate, M. ; 8iairrjcrTO., ao. [ ebibaanycro. 311, Horn. Cer. 144]; SeStSaya, -ypiai, ebibaxdyv, f. 1. [Fr. ba- disco, learn , teach, baycrogai 311, 2 a. Zbaov k be- baov 284 e ; bebdyna, 6. 134, 2 pf. be- baa, p. 519, beddy/w. Horn. Mere. 483, 2 a. ebayv +. Cog. bebdopai 326 c, 7T. 316 ; by or as fut., shall find, N. 260. ] 8t8r|fii bind ; see dew bind. c 8i8pdcrKw (r 1 k, bpa-) run; c 8pd- crop.ai, ao. a. 1., 2 a. c ebpdu 45 li ; c 8c8paKa. Cog. bpaTrerevu, bpaana- fa ■ ebpa;uov, see rpe'xw. See bpdw. 8£Sco|m (r 1 , do-) do, give, 8« thirst, -T)tra>, &c. (bi\p(dei)f} 120 g). 8l« fear, flee ; see beibio. Siwkco pursue, M. ; 8iw£a> and oft- ener 8uic£op.ai, ao. a., 2 a. ebunxadov 353 a ; StSicoya, -yyai 1., ebaoxhyv, f. 1. See beibio. [Sea-, Sea- 114b, appear ; ipf. nude bearo 242 ; ao. to. boderaaro K. 23, sub. bodaaerai 326 d, SP. 339. Cog. boiafa or bod fa, doubt, imagine, Ap. Kh.j 8ok€w (v, box-) seem, think; 8o|w ao.; beooxa\.,-ypai,ebi>x0yv\.'. ch.po. boxyaio ao., 8fcSoKT]Ka, -pai, eboxydyv • [pf. m. pt. beboKypievos pret., fixed in thought, intent, watching, O. 730.] eOeXco § 50. Cog. [ookojo watch,'] boxigidfa ex¬ amine. Sov-rre'ci) (e 1 , ybovire-y) sound heavi¬ ly, (dr. po.; SoxiTrrjtrw, ao. [eydoc7r77Ka, c bebvpai 310 d, G ebv6yv f., [2 a. r. ebvyv Hi]>p. Cog. ti'nrTw, dive.] E. ea- become sated, eiopen ; see aw. edor permit ; edcrco m., elder a 279 C ; el'aKa, -pai, -dyv. c’yyuaa) pledge, M .; eyyvr^crin, yy- yvycra or eveydyaa • fjyyvrjKa or ty- ■yeyd^Ka, &c.; 282 c. eyeipco (h, eyep-) rouse, raise, M. rise; eyepcS, m. 1., -yyeipa, to. 1., 2 a. yypbyyv e 3 ; eyriyepKa 1., 2 pf. pret. eypyyopa, am awake, 281 d [eypyyopde 320 f; in imitation, ind. 3 p. eypy- ybpOdcri K. 419, inf. to. eypyyopdai forey^yepdar, K. 67], eyyyepyai, yytp- 6yv, f. 1. Cog. £ypu> po., eypyyopeio k ypyyopeu: 1., [iypyyopaw , ey pyaaio.] (lyKo\i.idfa praise ; -acrco to., eveKin- piaaa, eyKeKcopiaKa, 282 C. 28co eat; see eodUo. e£c|xai seat one’s self, sit; see l fa. eBe'Xw ]> & 0e'Xw, wish; -^o-w 311 b, ydeXyaa k ideXyaa * Tj0eXT)Ka k 1. re0eXi] Ka. 0Aw is rare k doubtful oral less common than edeXw, exc. in dramatic dialogue. €0c£o> (z 2 , Fed-, id-) accustom, M .; 49icra>, -tu 305a, eidiaa 279 c; ei0ixa, -apai, -g6t)v, f. 1 . Interns. 2 pf. pret. €ia>0a [ewda E. I.] 312 d, am wont, [pr. pt. tdorv I. 540.] €i 8 op.at seem, eldoi> soao ; see opaco. clxa/w (z 2 , F lk-, Fein- h, 6lk -) liken; tiicaara), c m ., ei.cara k fjKcura 278 d ; tl'Kaxa 1 ., -apat k fjxarpai, -Or/v f. Intrails., 2 pf. pret. &mca 312b, some¬ times elna or 77 /ca [oka I.], seem (nude 1 p. ]>o. tocyp.iv 148, Soph. Aj. 1239, [id. e'LKTOV S. 27, pip. tLXTTjV A. 104,] irreg. 3 p. ei'£a< tl po. +, Ar. Av. 96, see 'ijdji under opa co), pip. epceiv 279 d, f. r. edjw Ar. Nub. 1001 , ipf. eke 2 . 520 ? [Cog. ttTKui, etcncci) q. v. ] el'Koi (Feue-) yield ; e’djco [ c 7 ?i.], ao., 2 a. dnadov 353 a. a. Pres. Ind. S. 1 tppi JE. 2 ety E. l.,€7cri P. 4'ety, elada E. 3 evri I). P. 1 eiptv E. I. elpes D., epev p. 3 edai E ,evrl,t- t ? t eVTL msti jesti esti P. 1 5W1UUS 4tr-p.ev eager, D. etyu.es T€ eare sin as jesmn e.snie 2 cstis 4cr-(r s) 1 .vtlia jeste cste O stmt stud 4, opt. {eoiyv, cf. L. sin) eirjv • Ipf. 1 s. (augmented yar, yaa, cf. 273 r c, e, and L. cram, 139) ya e., -rj (Old Att., Ar. Av. 1363), 3 s. (par, 3jae, 273 r c, e) yer e. 163 b, rjv. (e) It was also dropped before vt, 4 com¬ monly passing into the kindred 6 (cf. 114 b, c): Pr. 3 p. erriD.,pt. (err- L. cut-, 6 vt-) u>v, err os r>., imv. 3 p. (errivr) ovtwv. (f) It was contracted, as e (142), with 4 or tj preceding : Pr. ind. (ea/uu) elf d, (eas) eh E. I., or (both sigmas apparently taken up) el, [eager) elger e. i., inf. (earai) etvcu (in Let. the r was assimilated, (es-re) esse), imv. (earw, eeru, cf. 121 e) f]Tw 1.; Ipf. 1 s. {yar) yr, 2 s. (yas) 3js 1., pi. 3jger, ijre (oftener than yare, Avliile in the dual 'qarov and ijaryr prevail), fjaar. See 139 s. The dialectic or less Attic forms of dpi to be, are (g) forms uncon¬ tracted or like those of verbs in -w (315) : taair B. 125, earn Arcliim., l. 18, £w hold an assembly, - do-w, &c.; aug. t)kk\-, e£exX-, kc., 282 c. eXavvw (n -, eXa-) & r. eXaco drive, M.\ eXacrw, [eXaw 305 b, eXow 322 c] IX w, eXaaoyai 1., ijXaaa m .; eXr|XaKa, -you, -ayau 1., [pip. 3 p. eXyXddaro or -eda.ro 329 a, y. 86,] yXadyv, -adyv c f. 1. [Cog. eXaarpdw E. I. + .] [2X8op.aL ( FeXS-) k eeXSopcu, desire.] l\ey\(a examine, confute ; eXiy^w ao. ; eXyXey ,uat 41, c rjXeyycu r., yXey- X^V V f. £Xko> k 1. cXkuo) (w, Fe\/c-, cf. vel- lico) pull, draw, M .; 2X£a>, less Att. IXkdo-w, m. 1., elXuvaa ooi., dX£a m. 1.; ct'XKvxa, -ayai, -adyv f., ciXydyv f. 1. [Cog. eXsew, -yaw - eXuvorafa. ] eXXqvi^co speak Greek, -ura>, &e.; eXXyviadyv or yXXyviadyv 279 f. eXm^to (z 2 , FdXn-) hope, M.; IX- •7r(t(roj)uo 1., -fjXTTLoa • {jXiriKal., -ayai 1., -odyv : [gXirai give hope, M. k 2 pf. pret. ^oXira e. 379, hope, 2 pip. tu>X- neev 279 d, 0. 96. ] cXv0- come; see epx oyaL. 6p,€co vomo, vomit; k'p.(daw)w on., yyeaa \yyyaa{\ ; cp.tip.6Ka, - traffic ; -rjera), kc. ; aug. yyn- or even-, 282 c. evaipo) (h, evap-) kill, po., M .; [evypa 1., m. E. 59,] 2 a. yvapov, Eur. And. 1182. Cog., evap C to kill, despoil, po., 349 a ; [evapi^co, m. 1.,] yvapiija, on. 1., [-tcra, Anac. 100]; c yvdpiayat., c -adyv. eveirw k evvena, k 1. kviemeo (even-, ev:n- b 2 , evion- o), tell, speak (cf. in- quam), }>o., a. 1 ; [ev^co k evio-'n-qo-w 311, 6 . 98, ivtxpa 1.,] 2 a. eeionov [imv. evianes v, 313 b, y. 101.] Cog. [evL- nrio + , k evLuao) i 3 , chide, 2 a. evevlnov, yvinanov, 284 e ;] elnov, see cpyyi. [ c 6v-qvo0a grow or lie on; see aved-.] c ^vvvp.i (n 7 , Fe-, e-), vestio, clothe, [M.‘, f. ecnw (eaau 171, n. 79) c on., ao. (eaaa d. 253, eeaaaro K. 23) ; pf. elyaL + r. 72, & eayai, w. 250 :] comm. dp.c{>i.-€vv9p.i M. ; dp.c{)i€crw e. 167, Att. c dpicj)i.c3 305 b, Ar. Eq. 891, ayefn- eooyai Cyr. 4. 3. 20, yyffieaa on. 282 b, Cyr. 1. 3.17 ; yyffiieayaa, -adyv 1. Cog. [ c etVep.i F.. I.;] 1. dp.0td.fw, -daw • eade- in pf. rjadyyai. ho\\eoi anoioy, - t ] o - o ), kc. ; aug. yvwx-, v. 1. yvox- or tvwx-, 282 b. [eoXiw 'press, trouble; see et’X-.] copTa^w keep a feast, -dtrw, kc.; aug. ewp- 279 d : [oprdfa I.] 4ir-av-op0dw set oiprigltt, -ucrw, kc.; aug. Inyvwp- 282 b. [eTr-avpew r. k etr-avpio-Ka) r. (v, k 2 , a dp-) enjoy, M. ; erraDpr.o-op.aL Z. 353, enyvpayyv I. +, oftener 2 a. enyvpov, p. 81,] enyvpayyv Eur. Hel. 469. Cog. drraDpdco take away, po., ao. anyvpa- yyv'{ \pt. anodpas 114, A. 356, d 7 roc- pduevos, Hes. Sc. 173, f. anovpyaovatv X. 489 v. 1.] 67ri-p.eXop.aL k etrL-pLeXeopLaL care for ; see y£Xu. 6 'ir-Ccrrap.aL uoiderstaoid; see ’iaryyi. h roi (f 3 , a 67T-, an- c 3 ) be after or busy with (act. scarce used exe. in comp.), M. 6 rrop.aL sequor, follow; ipf. elnov m. 279 c; c ^\j/op.ai, ao. m. ?, 2 a. c : 'anov (anw, anotyi, &c.). I 0 cttco TAB eairupLyv ( cnru)/icu, be.) & (b} r reclupl. b change of initial ,]ao., [2 a. ypvKaKov 284 e. Cog. ipvKauto b epvKavdio, a. 199, k. 429.] epvw b dpi)to (f epv-) draw, E. & I., M. draw to ones self, protect; epvo-to 1. (tpuco 305 f, X. 67) b c dpvtrto 1., m., e’Cpvaa rn. + ; eipvpai b -vcrycu, -uadyv ; see 279 c. [Nude pr. b ipf. forms (326e): act. ivf. eipvpcevai 333 c, Hes. Op. 816 ; mid. Zpvrou Ap. Rh. 2. 1208, eipvarai A. 239, Zpvao, -vto, -WTO, X. 507, e'ipvTO, -WTO, II. 542, epvodcu e. 484, eipvcrdcu \p. 82 ; pass. dpijTo Hes. Tli. 301. Some regard these mid. b pass, forms as pret. pf. & plf. ] See pvoycu. tp\op.cu {epx-, e\vd- x, i\ev0- h) go, come; ipf. ypxbyyv scarcely in Att., exc. in coni]).; cXcilaropcu scarcely in Att. prose, 2 a. rj\6ov c’ 3 (po. y\v0ov), [d. fydov 168. 3, Theoc. 16. 9, Lac. fjXaoi> 169 d, Ar. Lys. 105; for-^Xufla, sync. i)X6a, see 327 b]; 2 pf. tXr,Xi;0a [eiXrjXovda 134 a, nude 1 p. elXyXovd- yev 326 e, y. 81.] For the pr. exc. in the incl., the ipf., b the fut., the Att. comm, used other verbs, esp dpu. €ptordco (o 2 , ep-) inquire, ask; e’peo- Tqtrto b epi) & tVxw (crex-, tcr X' 1,3 d) have, hold (have belonging rather to ex w > 2£w, and /m/n? to i'crx^, c’x'Tcw), J/.; ipf. elxoi' & lerxov 278s ; ££jco TO. & v, TO. ox&- /icu, &c.), po. iaxeOov, Aisch. Pr. 16 [ c m. Theoc.], £crxr|Ka \pt.avv-oxonx aT0 312 d, 329 a], ia X ^w I. or L, f. 1. Cp. a/uLir-exv or dp.ir-Lax w 159 d (ipf. to. 'rjfnrei.xbP'Pv 282b, PI. Phredo 87 b); av-ex^ (2 a. to. dveaxoprjv, oftener 7)vecrxl > P l ' r l v 282 b, po. pvcrxoppv 136, f l. 518). Cog. c tVx^e'o/xat n 10 or c tV- X^o,aat y (see larLax^eo/ncu), [tcrxdvcu, iaxauau}, P. 747, 572 ;] ox^w bear. cj, Soph. El. 157, or r. few. £€vyvvp.i (n 7 , fry-, frvy- h, cf. jug- um, jung-o) join, yoke, M .; £€v|w m., ao.; c «T£euxal., -y/xai, -x^yv, f. 1-, 2 a. efrryrjv ; 47. Cog. fryocj, fryeu). £towup.i (n 8 , fr-) gird, M.\ Iuxtoj TO. l.,ao.; ^wKal., -crpai, -adyv 307 d. H. rjSco (f g, Tad-) please, M. delight in; rj &c. 0qpato hunt, -dcrco, &c., see 42 g ; oftener in Att. prose, Grjpeijco, -evcrco, &c. Qiyyavo) (n 5 , 6iy-) tango, TOUCH (in Att. prose r. k only 2 a., but rather d7rro,aat) ; 0i£op.ai or -£a>, 2 a. eOtyov, to. 1.; 3 f. TeOi^oyai ?, edixOyv 1. OXiptog, press; 0Xt\[/ break ; @pavo-, [ c i7?Xa.] Cog. aXXopaiq.v. [lax« shout, + ; pf. c uaxcu pret. B. 316.] Po. cog. lax^w, ia/c%7w. ISciv, I8ecr0au, see, 2 a.; see opdw. u8pow sudo, sweat (for ct. k pro¬ longed forms, see 324);, LSpwtrw ao.; tSpwKal., -p.cu 1. Cog., Zdlv, Ar. Pax 85, [1. i. ISp c5w.] uSpOw (a e. ) seat, set up, M .; LSpCcrw m., ao.; 'uSpvaa, -vyai, -vdyv k -bvdpv n 1 , T. 78, f. 1. Cog. tfa q. v. 1'cp.au or 1'ep.au hasten; see 45 p. i'tco (j, cre<5-, e<5-f 3 , l<5-b 2 , cf. sedeo, shlo) seat, set, sit, ch. po. or dial., M. l'£op.au k '^opiau sit; c u£r]c-a> 1., ao. 1., 311 a ; f. m. &rop.ttu 151 (ecp-eacre- adcu I. 455, eicropLaL 1.), ao. elcra m. 279 c, B. 549, Enr. Iph. T. 946 [pt. c d. ? Lk. 5. 23, av-ecovTcu or -eovTou Hdt. 2. 165 v. 1., pt. pLe-geT-ip.evos 282 b, 167 a, Hdt. 6. 1], c eWr,v, Eur. Ph. 1376, c f. Ven. 7. 11. See also 45 k, n, r, j, 315. Some forms are made as from shorter themes, tw, uKvecp.au (n 10 , Ik-), po. 'uKfivw n 6 , [»?., k ukuo,] come, in prose usu. acp- LKveop.a.L • i£op.ai e., Ar. Ach. 742], ao. a. 1. [l^cv 327 a], 2 a. m. LKopupv ; typ-ai. Cog. r,KW 114 d, lice- T€vto supplicate. IXacTKcpau (k, ’IXa-) propitiate [e. VKdopLUL k t’Xapai] ; IXacropau ao.; IXa- aOrjv, f. 1. Cog. iXeopcaL po., l\ebop.at., [& as fr. L\r,pu be propitious, pr. imv. i\cl9l 297 cl, 'CKrfit. 335 d r , pret. sub. k opt. l\r]KW, i\r,KOipLL, cp. 365.J IXXco roll, [e7r-iXXt^w,] see ti\-. [ipacrcrco i z , lash; ao. iuacra, e. 380.] iTruoTpo^eo) keep horses ; -\rjKa or -T€Tpc4>T»Ka 283 a. 1'Trrap.au fly ; see Treropai. [fcrapi knoxv, D.; see opau. icrTppu (r 8 , era-, cf. Lat. 5te-re) statuo, set up, station, d/.sto, stand ; o-tt;ctw m., ao., 2 a. ear-rju ; ^ctt]kg (1. pf. trails. earcLKa k 1 ao. eardaa ; so some explain faracrav M. 56), [2 pf. I. ear tare -at tl 335 C, pt. 6crrec5s 120 i, Hdt. 2. 38,] c (arap.ai r., kc. See 45, 46. Cp. eir-ucTTapau understand (2 s. i-friarg 297 h, I. eiricTTeai 322 a, Hdt. 7. 135) ; €Tri-crTT]o-opai ; rjTncrTrjSpv 282 b. Cog. iardrij}, 1. crr/;\'w k earTj- kw, Rom. 14. 4, [erreepat 326 e.] I'crx^, Icrxvcopau, hold; see e%w. K. Ka0aipa> (li, Ka.0a.p-) purify, M.\ Ka0apai m., CKadrjpa m., v. 7. 35, k eKadapa, Ole. 18. 8, 152 c', K€KCt0apKa 1., -pai, eKaddpdyv, f. 1., 2 a. 1. ^*ca- Oaprju ? § 50 . KCl6t£ofJLCU VERBS. kXlvco 70 KaGe'^opcu, Ka9?]}xai, KaGi£co, see ifa. KaG-eubw sleep; see evdio k 282 b. kcuvu|j.cu (n 9 , rad-, raid- h) excel, po.; K6Ka{r|Acu, Eur. El. 616 [pt. xe- Kadpsvos d., 148 b, Pind. 0. 1. 42.] Kaivtt (h, Kav-) kill, in prose nsu. ep. w. Kara, i. 6. 2 ; Kavai, 2 a. exa- vov ; 2 pf. r. K€xova or xlxava, 114. Cog. KTe'.VCO. kcu« (ll, Ka F-, Kav- f 2 , Ka- f 1 , xe- b) burn, also Att. fcda g, 44, 309 b [x-q w H. 408 v. l.\ M .; Kavcrw, m. r., exavaa [ c »i. Hdt. 8. 19, expa m. or exeia A. 40, c ao. 311c; 2 pf. pret. K€Krj 8 a sorrow.] M. Kr)8op.at sorrow, care ; expoeadppv r., iEscli. Th. 138 ; [3 f. xexaSofiopai, 0.353. C}). d-xr/bew + neglect, -paul., dxpbeaa, &. 427.] Ki8vr]fn spread ; see axeddurUpi. Kivew, -Tjera), &c., move; M. [A xi- vvpai, A. 281.] Cog. k£« go, po., [pt. Kilre • 2 a. per-ekiaOov 353 a, X. 581.] [klx^vw m.,] Att. Kiyx^ va) > v -di- X&vw (n 8 , n 5 , klx-) find, po.; kixti- o-opai, [-aoj 1., ao. a. 1 ., m.,] 2 a. eVt- %oy. [Cog. klxvpi ( iuxe- v ; not in pr. ind.), m. pt. KLXVperos 314 b.] Kixpqp. 1 , lend ; see xpdw. KXd'^w (j 3 , kXu 7 -, /f\ayy- 11 3 ) clan- go, scream, clang, ch. po.; kX dy^w ao., 2 a. e/fXayoy; 2 pf. pret. KeKXay- ya, Yen. 3. 9 [/feVXyya, B. 222, pt. KerX/iyovres 326 b, 30, but -wres Bek.], 3 f. KeKXdy^opai 319 b. Po. cog. kXayydvw +, /fXayyatVw, /fXayyew. KXaiw (li, rXa¥-, xXav- f 2 , /fXa- f 1 ) weep, also Att. KXcho g, 309 b, M .; KXay TABLES. M .; kaivw c on., exXra on.) k€kXXko. L, -pat, 304a, ixXiGoju f. [exXivdrjv +1, 2 a. c exXiurju c f. kX-uo hear, po.; ipf. CxXvov also as ao.; mule 2 a. imv. xXvGl A. 37 [xe- kXvOc 234 e, K. 284, on. pt. xXvgevos in-elutus ; kckAuko, Epieh.] ivjGj-o scrape, M. , s ee 120 g; ttvr crco, &c. (exrqadrjv 307 cl). Cog. xvaioo, xvifa, xvo)6cn L, xviso po. KoXovb) maim; koXcvxco 1., ao.; xexoXovgai or -a pax 1., exoXovdiqv or -adpv, f. 1., 307 e. KojAi^w (j 1 , xogxb-) bring; see 39 e. KOTTTCO (t, KOTT-) CUt, M. beiVttU ; K3\}/fc), f. 1., ao.; c KtKO. 456.] Cog. xoTaivin po., iEsch. Th. 485. Kpd"'co (j 2 , xpay-) erg out, pr. r.; Kpdijci) 1., on. 1., ao. a. 1., 2 a. c expa- 7 ov y. 1. 14 ; 2 pf. pret. KCKpaya vii. 8. 15 [imv. xexpaxdx 320 f), 3 f. xe- xpa^opax 319 b. Cog. xexpdyin 1. 326 C, xXafa q. V., xpihfa CROAK, xXidfim. Kpcuvw (h, xpau-) fulfil, po. & I. [xpaxaivin 135]; Kpavcom., expdva , on. l. , [expr\va, exp'/ypra, 130 a, 135 ;] pf. p. 3 s. KexpavTcu Enr. Hipp. 1255 (or 3 p. for aV-VTCLL ?), ixpdvdojV f. Kpepdvvvpi (n 8 , k pepa-) k 1. Kpepctw suspeoid, ha.oig ; Kpepdo-w, Att. Kpcpco [xpepboj 322 c], ex.pep.aaa on .; xexpepa- apai 1., expegdadr/r. Cog. xpegagai, ~r\aopai, iv. 1. 2 ; xprjpvrjpi po. or 1. Kpi^co (j 2 , xpLy- or xpix-) creak, po.; Zxpi^a 1., [2 a. 3 s. xpixe or xplye II. 470 ;] 2 pf. pot. xexpTyores Ar. Av. 1521. Kptvw (g, xpiv -) judge, M. ; Kpivco m. , expTva on.) K€KptKa, -pat, expldorjv f. [ixpirdr/v], 304 a. Cp. airo-Kplvopai Xayx } € 7X' n 3 b) obtain by lot; X^opai [Xa^ogac, Hdt. 7. 144], 2 a. «’iXaxov [redupl. k causative, 284 e]; 61 'Xtjxo. 281, Xe- Xo-yya po., i., or 1. [XeXoYxctcrt 328 c r 134 a], dXrjypai, eXorixOrju. § 50 . Xapj3au(o VERBS. paopai 81 Xap|3dv« (n 5 , Xa/3-, Xyfi- g) take , M. lay hold of; Xr|vJ/o|xat, -\pw 1., 2 a. eXaj3ov m. [redupl. 284 e] ; ei'Xr;- (|)a 281, diXyppai k po. XeXyppai, 3 f. G XeXrpJ/opaL 1., eXr)(pdrjv f. (° elXycpdr/V 281b): [Ion. f. Xapfopai n 3 , ao. c a. ra. r., XeXa/S^/ca. v, G XeXappai, eXap- look, po. ; Xe-uct-g) ao. 1. Xtj0cj, Xr|0dvco, see Xavddvw. XqC^opcu plo.ioidcr, A. r.; [Xr| icro- peu] ao.; XeX'qicrpcu, [eXy'tadyv.] In Att., some would contract the rjt into t) throughout. Cog. Xyarevw. Xiyy-; ao. Xiy£e twaoiged (both onomatopes), 337 a, A. 125. [XiXcuopcu, XeXiypai ; see Xaw.] Xi|Jcirdvo)^a.2;e,Th. 8.17 ; seeXef7rw. Xicrc-opaii 2 , r. Xiropai,pray, po. + ; [eXiaapyv, X. 35, 2 a. eXirbpyv, II. 47.] Xoto & Xotjgj (f 12 , Xoi^-) lavo, wash, esp. the body, M. bathe (the ct. forms from Xow, as tXov, Xoupai, Xoutcu, kc., are the more common ; pr. a. r.) ; [Xov. 516], 4peXydyv c f. Cp. 4irip4Xopai k -pe- \4opai v, care for, -peXycropai, ao. ]., -pep4Xypai, iirepeXydyu f. Der. pe- Xerdio study, practice. pieptova am eager ; see pdopai. fxevw nianeo, reMAiN, wait; |xevd>, epeiva * fX€fxevTp, see pipvyoKw. poXovpat, 1. pr. poXew go; see fi\Ka + , 2. 580.] See pyraopai, A pf. of fx\ia> shut eyes or lip>s ; pvc-w 1., ao.; fxe'fxvKa, 310 d. Late sappixo for Kara-pvto 136, Mat. 13. 15. 1ST. vaiw (h, va-) dwell, settle, po.; [vatrcropai, ao. a.] in.\ vevaapai 1., evdoQyv. Der. vaieraio po. [vaLerdinaa or -aovaa 322 c]. vdcro-w i, stuff, pr. 1.; [tvalja, ea> v, nubilo, gather clouds (cp. W. crw ); c ve4 >1 0 cr w 1.; c v£vojj>a Ar. vew (f, i>eF-) no, nato, swim, 309 b ; V€vcrovp,ai or V£vcrop.ai 305 d, iv. 3. 12, °§revara ; c v£V£VKaPl. Rep. 441c. Cog. vr)xu> ch. po. c V£w Hdt., heap up; vrjcrw Said., tvgaa, m. 1.; vhgpat, v. 4. 27, & -apai Ar. Nub. 1233, ergdgvk -adgu 1., 307 e. [Cog. vgecv, °vrjve, -fw, kc., ningo, snow (cf. nix, niv is). voe w, -rjcrw, &c., think ; [i. w for o-q 131 f.] H* |ec o scrape ; [^eua E. 81;] ’d^eapcu, -. 347]; e^gpaapou kc. 304b, -dvOgv, f. 1. O. oSaijw (k 5 , date-, o5cu<- p, cf. davviv), -ew, -aw 1., feel a bite, bite, Mr, [65a- i-gvopai 311, Hipp.], ibda^dpgv 1. ; tbdaypai. oSonropew travel, oSoiroiew make a road; -r|crw,&c.; wSoiirdpqKa k 6801 - TT€Trdpr]Ka • wSo-rreTrocrtKa, -peu k w<5o- 7 roigpeu ■ 283 a. [68v- be angry, cf. odi; wddadpgv 4 -, a. 62 ; 68wSvo-p.cu pret., e. 423.] 630pop.aip, & trag. 8dpop.ai lament; oSvpovpiat, udvpapgr ; wbbpOgv 1. o£w (.1L 65-) odoro, oleo, emit odor ; o£r|orw [-ecrw Hipp.] ao., 311 ; 2 pf. 58w8a •. [5cr5w d. 170 a, Theoc.] 1 oi'-yw k cfyvvp.i n 7 , open, veryr. in prose exc. in comp., ch. with am k did • ol'£w, tp^a [63i£a 132, a. 436] ; tpx~ 6gv. Cp. av-c£yw k dv-oiyvvpa, M. 1.; dvoi'ijw, dveip^a, Th. 2. 2, k r.gvoi^a, [dripla po.], 279 b, 282 b, m. r. 1.; dvEwya, 2 pf. dvepy a ch. 1 ., aveipypai, Th. 2. 4, 'gvoiygcu 1. [a vpypai po. ], 3 f. avep^opai Hel. 5. 1. 14, avepxOgr (sub. dvoixQd, kc.), gvoixOgv f. 1., 2 a. gvolygv f. 1. Even a triple aug¬ ment occurs late : gveip^a, gvcpxdgr, Lxx. o!8a know, el'cropai • see 46 k opaw. ol8-€w, -dvw, l.-dw k -atvco, swell, M. r.; olSrjcrw Hipp., ao.; wSrjKa, OLKrctpw h, pity ; oiKTepw, ipcreipa • late oUreipgaiv Rom. 9. 15, ao. a. p. olvoyoeo), -qcrw, pour wine ; 279 b. oioptai opinor, think (nude 1 s. olpai, ipf. ppgv, 313 e ; 2 s. oiei 297 f); olr|crop,aL 311 C, ao. 1.; tpgdgv, f. 1.: \6topai 132, E. 644, wivdpgv (oi'er- in Horn., a. 323), dtcrOgv. A. (pr. 1 s. only) ofw, e. usu. otio A. 59, Lac. oiu> Ar. Lys. 81 ; in of- or «£-, usu. u] olcrrpdw goad, -rjcrw ; aug. 278 d. oixop.ai go, be gone; olxr) 0 "op.a!, 311 ; ol'xwKa or wx w}ca 312 d, Soph. Aj. 896, (pxV Ka E. ? k 1., oixgpai or 6k€\Xw (p, xeX-) run ashore, vii. 5. 12 ; K£Xo-w ao. po. 152 d, wKeiKa. 6Xio-0dvw, r. or 1. -aivw (n 4 , n 6 , oXiad-), slip, slide; oXicrBqo-w 1., ao. ch. 1., 2 ao. CcXiadov, Soph. El. 746 ; wXiVOrjKa Hipp. & 1. 6'XXvp.t. (o\- 351. 4) perdo, destroy, lose, (po. or 1. exc. in comp., ch. with air6,) M. perish; oXdorw 311 d, [i. o\e w m.] Att. oXw m., &Xeva, to. 1., 2 a. to. wXbpgv \_pt. ovXopevos + 134a, A. 2]; c oXwXfKa, perdidi, 2 pf. pret. ttXwXa perii, am undone, dXuiXeapai 1., wXeadyv, f. 1. [Cog. 6X£kw m. +, A. 10,^ 6AAv, T. 135 v. 1.] ojxapTew accompany, meet, po. + ; [ipf. du. opaprgTyr 323 f.;] o[xapTqo-w ao., v. 87, [2 a. opaprov 1.] cp.vvp .1 (n 7 , op-, opo- w) swear, C M .; opovpai 152 (1. opjeru) to.), wpocra c m.; 6p.wp.0Ka, -pai k -apai 307 e (&pw- crpou 1.), d>pbdgv k -crdgv f.: [Lac. f. bpubpeOa, 323 f r .] 6 jJLopyvvp.i (n 7 , opopy-) ivipe, po. + , 84 oyopyvvpu TABLES. rrcu^io § 50 . M. ; 6|iop£ca c ?«., ao. °a. in., 6 . 88, PI. Gorg. 525 a; c iby5pxdyv. ovtvTjpu (om- 357. 2) benefit, M .; ovr]cra>u?., ao. a.,ni. ]., 2 a Anfidvrpai ?, w. dvyyyv 314 b & -dyyv, opt. Ivatyyv, [ imv. tvyaor. 68], inf. ovaedai [-7 -\adai J., pt. -i/yevos (3. 33 ;] &vyyai 1., -dyv. [ovojmu {duo-) scorn, E. & I.; pr. k ipf. nude, ef. bldoyat 45 ; ovocropai ao.; c Covoadyv. Fr. ov-, pr. ocveade (134 a) 0. 241, & 1 a. tovaro P. 25, it' these forms are genuine.] ottihw or ottCo) 'marry; 6ir0«r&> • ibirvayai: according to some, -vt- be¬ fore a vowel, -v- before a consonant. cpaco (opa-) see, M., ipf. bd>p(aov)cov 279 b, [opew T., -co) E., ipf. tbpeov or ibpwv i., 48 c, 322 ;] edpaKa k esp. in comedy lopaKa, -ptat (later than &y- yai, Isoc. Antid.), ewpddyv f. 1.: (fr. oir- x) f. oij/opat (2 s. 6\pei 297 f), ao. r.; 2 pf. cirwira }io. & I. -f, Cbpyai, AEsch. Pr. 998, Cbcpdyv f.: (fr. Fi8- x, cf. video) 2 a. elbov, in. ch. po. or i., 279 c, sub. 1810 , iSuyaL, &c. (imv. I 8 e, i8ou, or as exclam. I8e, idov); 2 pf. otSa (I have seen, hence) / know (46, 320, k below) ; Mid. (ch. po.) eiSopcu. h, seem, resemble, 1 a. dad- yyv, T. 81. [Gog. oppjLu M. 335 b; rn. 2 s. bpyai 314 b, £. 343 : Baocyai i°, v. 81 .] In the pret. otSa, the stem has four forms: (1) 18-; tayev [IS-yev 148 b, A. 124], tadi, taro: [b. ittio Ar. Ach. 911], &c., 320 a [also to shorten other forms, as below, 134]: (2) el8- h ; [sub. d' 8 oyev, elbere, 326d,] dSevai [^tb-yev, tdyevcu, 333 c], d 8 d>s [t’Sria, A. 608], ydeiv [w. double aug. 2 s. yeibys X. 280, 3 s. ydSy i. 206, or -dei, or l.-5e ?, 3 p. yelbeiv or y 8 eiv 330 b, also (IS-aav) taav v. 170], f. euro|xai : (3) ol8-312b; oToa, olda s or olcrda (olSas very r. in Att., Eur. Ale. 780 ; the comic poets sometimes blend the two forms into oladas, also Eur. Ion 999 ?): (4) clSe- v ; (d 8 e-io) d 8 Q [iStco a. 235], dbeiyv, 320 c ; f. dibya cj, A. 546, Isoc. 11 d [iSyato Theoe. 3. 37], ao. i. or 1. In the ind. plur., the shorter forms were more comm, in the pf., k the longer in the pip. (also 1. ySeiaav Mk. 14. 40). The defects of olda are ch. supplied by yiyvuaKCj. [Cog. taayi I). (per¬ haps suggested by 3 p. tadai) Find. P. 4. 441, tads, taan 328 a, Theoc. 15. 146, &c.] With the ind. of olda, cf. the corresponding Sanskrit 1 s. ved-a, 2 vettha, 3 veda ; 1 p. vid-ina, 2 vida, 3 vidus. opeyw [r. dpbyvvyi n 7 , X. 37] stretch out, beacii (cf. rego, Germ, lecken, reichen), M. reach for, desire, (A. ch. po. or 1.;) op^« ro., ao.; [tbpey- yat Hipp., dpcbpeyyai, II. 834,] up£x~ dyv as mid. See 430 b. Cog. opiyvd- oyai, opexdta> po. opifcs> j 1 [oiyupw i.] bound; see 39. cpvvpi (n 7 , op-) rouse, po., M. arise ; opera) ao. 152 d, [f. m. opovyai, 2 ao. ibpopov 284 e,] 2 ao. m. dpcyyv (Cipro, imv. opao; -eo, -ev, inf. 6 fiat, kc. 326 e, 327); 2 pf. optopa as mid., X. 78, 2 pip. dipibpeiv 281 d, AEsch. Ag. 653 : [fr. epe- v, ipf. dpeovro B. 398, pf. opwpeyai, sub. opinpyrai N. 271.] Gog., ch. po., opw, dplvoj, opo- 6 i free, opovw • Lat. orior. dpvca-w (i \6pi>x- or opvy- d 2 ) dig ; opvia), ao. (/., m. i. or 1., 2 a. tbpvyov r.; c cpwpvxa (1. dpvxa,) -yyai, (plf. opwp- or tbpiop- 281 d,) ihpdxdyr c f., 2 a. 1. Copvxyv or -yyv, f. co-cf)pa.LVcpat & 1. 6 aaXiVcj ao. 311b, 2 a. &(pe\ov (po. k I. 6 eX- Xa>+ increase, ao. opt. 3 s. dcpeWeie 171 a, 325 eg II. 651,] k o<|>XurKdva) (k 2 n 4 , 6(p\-) owe, in¬ cur ; ot^Xpo'cn) 311, ao. r., 2 a. wXrjKa, -p.cu: 1. pr. t(f>\u. n. Trailed (j, iraid-, iraiy-, 349 a) sport; Trai^ovpai 305 d, Symp. 9. 2 (1. -£oyai k -£w), eiraiaa (-^a 1.) ; irciraiKa (-xa 1.), -ayai (-yyai 1.), -x^n v h § 50 . 7TUU0 VERBS. nipn'XypL 85 iraiw strike, M .; x-aurco & po. i tcu- 7 ], xa- pevbpyaa 282 c, & xa.prjvop.7jaa 279 a (as if cp. of xapa k dvoplw); xapa- vev6|i.rj>ca (1. xapyvopyiaa), -pai, &c. Trapoiveo) act the drunkard ; ex a pop vrjaa 282 c ; TreirapoSyriKa, -pai 1., &c. Trdcrcrco i 2 , sprinkle; Trdtra), c ao. a., in. 1.; xexaapai 1., exaadyv, c f. 1. Tratryw (k 3 350, xad-, xevd- n 3 b) patior, suffer; Trciaropai 156, (ao. pt. po. xyaai ?,) 2 a. hradov ; 2 pf. ttc- irovOa, Til. 6. 11, [xexoaxa r>.; 2 p. xexoade 320 f, \P. 53, pt. xexadvirj p. 555, § 325 e.] [Trareopai (v, xar-) eat, taste, Hdt. 2. 37 ;] TrdcrojAai po. r., ao. po., I., or 1., y. 9, Soph. Ant. 202 ; [pip. xexdapyv O. 642]. Cf. pascor. iravt a stop, repress, M. cease, PAUSE, 34; ira vtw in., ao.; 'Tre'rravKa, -pai, 3 f. xexauaopai Soph. Ant. 91, txav- Orjv (-adrjv 1. or v. L), f. r., 2 a. 1. cxdrjv c i\, Rev. 14. 13. Tm0a> (h, 7 rid-) persuade, M. be¬ lieve, obey, 38, 39 ; xdarw to., ao. a., in. 1., [7re7Ti(9?7cra; 284 f., 311, k as raid. xidyaw, (p. 369, ao. + A. 398,] 2 a. exidov in. po. [7re7ri0oy to. 284 f, T'. 40] ; irCTrciKtt, 2 pf. pret. xexoida trust, 38. 8, Th. 2. 42, nude imv. r. xexeiadi 320, xEsch. Eum. 599, [2 pip. 1 p. ixixidpev B. 341,] xexeiapxu, exeLadyv f. Cog. 7 naredw ; Lat. fldo. TTUvoua hunger, xeiv(aei)r\ 120 g; -qtra) (1. -daw) ao.; 'TreTr€ivr)Ka. 7rapci> (h, 7 rap-, irep- b) pierce, po., I., or 1.; xepio't, hreipa, A. 465 ; x£- xxpp.au, 2 a. c exapyv, Hdt. 4. 94. xexrew (t‘ 2 , 7re«:-) pecto ,comb,shear, po., [xeisw h, a. 316; ireijai D. 325b, fxe^a 1., in .;] ixex^yv, Ar. Nub. 1356. 7reXd^cu (z, xe\a-), k po. xe\dw, xeXadw q, k (xXedd- c o1 ) xXd6w, bring or come near, M. po.; xekaxw, ttcXw 305 b, exeXaaa iv. 2. 3, [2 a. in. ixXypyv 314 b, 0. 63;] xexXypai po., po. exeXdadyv k exXddyv. Cog. xXy- aid^w, [xiXvaw n 3 b, xiXvapai, T. 94.] ireXco be, po. + , M .; [ipf. 3 s. "xXe c 4 , M. 11, in. 2 s. exAeo, -ev, 3 s. fxXero, X. 281, 116, pt. xX'opevosf xi jx-rrcj send, 41 ; M. cp. in classic prose, i. 1. 2 ; TrdjMj/a), Trgiroptfja, lie. xexapelv, ireirpcoTai ; see xopLfa. TT6p8o(xai (b, 7 rapd-) pedo, A. r.; c TrapS/jCropai 311, 2 a. c e7ra p8ov ; ueTTOpSa ; Ar. irepOw (b, 7 rapd-) destroy, ravage, po.+, [nude pr. inf. p. {xepO-aOcu, xep-adai, 151, 158) xepOcu II. 708 ;] xlparoi in., ao. a., [2 a. expadov °m. c 6 , i. 40.] Usu. 7rop06cj v‘ 2 , -yaw. 7repvqp.t sell, po.; see xixpdanw. xiarcrw (i 3 , xex-), k later xexrw t, coquo, cook, digest, M .; ir, ao. a., TO.?; xexeppai, exeapOyv f. TTsrdvvujXL (n 8 , xera-) pando, spread, expand, (in Att. ch. cp., esp. w. dvd •) 'n-£Tctx&>, °irexd> 305 b, exeraaa, in. 1.; c 7r£xexas. 311, pt. epTi- nXeis Hipp. as fr. 7r\e-] ; so 7rc7r\ds 171, iEsch. Cli. 360 ; but ipf. ev- eTipTXpv. Cog. [TipnXew I. 322 a, TipTXavopat, I. 679,] 7T Xppow • tX-t/Ow be full (2 pf. TreirXifa, Theoc. 22. 38), whence TXpdvw k irXpQivw. TrifiTrpTjpt (r 1 e, irpa-, see TipTXppc) burn , esp. cp. vv. ev ; -n-pija-co c m., ao. a., c m. 1., [tirpeae 134, 130b, Hes. Th. 856 ;] c '7rt''7rpr|Ka, -pat k -apai 307 e, [3 f. c TeTppaopaL, Hdt. 6. 9,] eTppadpv, f. 1. Cog. c nipTpw ?, [ c Trprjdoj, I. 589.] irtviJCTKco, Tewvvpai, see Tvew. mvco (n 2 , 7ro-, t1- b 2 ) poto, bibo, drink; mopai (usu. 7 ; Hellen. tlc- uai 331),, later irioupaL, 305 f, a, 2 a. Umov {imv. ir'ie k po. irWi Ar. Yesp. 1489, [r. inf. tc evai Hipp.,] 313 c r ) ; TrcTrcoKa, Tenopai 310 d, ewodyv c f. Causal, 7 rorifa k mmo-Kco r 1 k 1 , give to drink, po. or I.; mcrw, [ao. a. Hipp., m. 1.; enL- adpv 1.] mirpacrKco 1. (r 1 k, t repa-, irpa- c 2 ), & Tepvppi n 3 po., sell ; [mpao-co, -dco 321s, d>. 454, ao.;] TriirpaKa, -pat [TeTeppperos d>. 58], 3 f. Teapaaopai, vii. 1. 36, iirpddrjv, f. 1.: in Att., ch. supplied in pres, by 7 rwXtw, k in fut. & aor. by dirod da o pat k dnedoppr. irem-co (r 1 c 2 , irer-, softened Tea-, cf. 143b, 7 rre- c 7 ) fall; - 7 rso-ov|Aai 305 d [1. -opai], 2 a. eTeaor [ enerov D. 169 b, ’eneaa m. 1., Rev. 1. 17 ; 'TTCirTCOKa 312 c, tsttijkci 1., 2 pf. pt. po. [7re7rrews or -pcos 325 d] tcttiws 320 d, Soph. Aj. 828. Po. cog. tltvw or -dco Eur. Slip. 285. 7r\a,£co (j 3 , 7r\ay7-) cause to wan¬ der, po. or 1. +, M. irXa^ojxai wan¬ der ; 7rXa*y^o|xai, ewXay^a, m. 1.; iTXdyxOrjv, a. 2. Usu. TXavaco. T>\d, tppafa m.; eppaxpat, Dem. 1268. 2, 2 a. eppafyr, Eur. Bac. 243, c f. 1. (j 2 > pey- c 5 , see fpdw) do, po. +; pe£w, eppe^a PI. Leg. 642 c, po. epe^a 171, Eur. And. 838 ; [eppf- I. 250.] ptw (f 1 , pe F-, pev- f 2 , pv- 142 r , cf. Lat. ruo) flow; pevcropai, -aw 1., eppevaa, but more Att. pur|crop,ai, ifrpupr (ff. & a. p., or f. m. k nude 2 a. a.); Ippoipca 311 c, Isoc. 159 d. p'/j'yvvp.k (n 7 , Fpay-, pay- 141, ppy- g) BREAK, M .; pr|£co [»l.], eppp£a m.; c fc / » i P 7 lX a I*. 2 pf. ippwya am broken, 312 c, efppyixai r., -x^V u r.» 2 a. ep- pdypr f.: po. k 1. pr|crcra> beat. Cog. pda aw k apdaaw, -£w, smite ; frango. piyecu v, shudder, po. + ; pi'yr|tra> ao.; 2 pf. pret. ip plya P. 175. Cog. piyow, -waw, shiver (inf. piywr or piyodr 324 b); (ppiaaw q. v.; frigeo. piTTTO k pirniw (t 12 , pta, -t,p.p.ai [inf. pepi(f)6a'. 159 e r ], 3 f. eppL^opxu 1., -itpdpr c f., 2 a. u0pr 1., 2 a. eahcdcppr, c f. 1. orK€8avvv|xi (n 8 , axcda-) scatter (as 88 (TUtbavvifU TABLES. rapaaaco § 50 . sub., cnaGKtbdvvvGL, -vtcu, 316 c);! CTKeSdcrcs), -w, 305 b, eGKedaaa G ?n. ; 1 ecr/ce<5a Tlieoc. 8. 90, 2 a. G eap.vyyp d 2 . crdo|xai hasten, po. ; see Gebogai. enrdeo draw, -o-co, ^riraKCi, kc., 307. o-7r€tpw (b 1 h, Gorap-) spargo, scat¬ ter, sow : o"7repc5, eGireipa [on. 1.]; ihrrapsm 1., -pptat, Ages. 1. 30, -pdyvt, 2 a. 8cnrdpr]v, Til. 2. 27, f. 1. cnrevSa) pour a libation, M. make a. treaty; 2 a. c eardyyv 1 . o-tciPco or o-TiPw tread; o-t€u|/co 1., c ao., Soph.; eart/3y/rat311, Id. Aj. 874.! o-Tetyco h (or gtlxu) walk, po. or I.; [ c eureka, d. 277, 2 a. eGTix ov II. 258. Cog. (TTLxdoyai, B. 92, A. 1.] crrc'XXco (b 1 1, gtoX-) fit out, send, J/.; o-TeXw, m. 1., tcrretAa on.; ^crraXKa, -A/rat, iii. 2. 7, -XOyv r., 2 a. eGraXyv c f. errepyw love; o-Tep^w, m. 1., ao. a.; [2 pf. t'erropya, Hdt. 7. 104, tcrep- y/rat Emped.,] ecrWpx^yr 1. errepeo) k crTcpio-KW (v, k 2 , errep-) deprive ; o-repf|crw m., iartpyaa [-ecra v. 262]; €al., tarpap.- /rat, iv. 7. 15, eGTpeepdyv r. in Att., E. 40, [-dfpdrjp D. I.,] 2 a. eGTpdcpyv f., iii. 5. 1. Cog. GTpoxpdco k GTpocptw ch. po., 355 a ; crrpe/SAow, rpeirw. o-ruyto) (y, arvy-) hate, po., I., or 1.; crTyyr|(rop.(H will be hateful, Soph. O. T. 672 ; eGrvyyGa, Eur. Tro. 705, [epi£<»> m. 1., ao. a., k (Tvpicrb) (-tw) ao. 1., 349 a. d^w k o"dXXw (1, G(paX-) fallo, trip, de¬ ceive ; cr<{)aXJ) m., eacpr/Xa, 2 a. eo 0a- Xop on. 1. or?; ^cr(|)aXKa 1., -X/rat, -XOyv 1. r., 2 a. eacpdXyv f., Th. 6. 80. o-d»^w (z, Gao-, gu- c 1 ) save, M.\ crwcrco on., ao.; oretrwKC., Isoc. 410 c, i -/rat, oftener -cr/rat, eadoOyv f. [Ep. , -£w, TcVaxa, CEc. 4. 5, kc., arrange, 39 ; reracyarai, irerdxa.ro, rerd^opou, Til. 3. 13, 5. 6, 71, G rayp- CTdpOU r. 1. re'OrjTra (d 1 , Oaep-, 312a) be amazed, 2 pf. pret., po., i., or 1., £ 168 ; 2 a. eraepov d 1 , 7r. 12. Cf. ddirrio. Tc£vw (li, ra-, rev- b 1 n) teildo, stretch, M .; Ttvw c /ft., ere tv a m. ; re- raKa 304 a, -//.at, X. 19, erdOpv f. [Cog. Tavt>w+, -iXrw, &e., nude pr. 3 s. rdvvrai, P. 390, 393 ; titcuvw, B. 390, ao. pt. nrpvas. See ra-.] TeXew, -£(to), -w, TeTeXcKa, PI. Apol. 20 a, &e., finish, 42 g. Cog. re\e jw, reXedxo, reXevraio, & probably reXXw (b 1 1, raX-) perform, raise, (po., exc. in comp., ell. \v. ava, ei/, or iiri ,) 71/.; c TeXw, c to. L, ireiXa c to.; c T€xaXKa 1.; G riraXpai, Cyr. 5. 5. 3 : po. reXe'Gw arise, be, Eur. And. 783. Tep.vw (n, rap.-, rep- b) cut, [ra- pv w E. I. E., Hdt. 2. 65,] J/.; reaw c m., 2 a. Arapov rn., I\ 94, more Att. erepov m., Th. 6. 7; T£rpir]Ka 308, -pai, 3 f. rerppcropai, erppOpv f. [Cog. T|At|'yco, -£w, ao. a., m. 1., 2 a. di- erpayov p. 276 ; 2 a. p. irpdypv II. 374, -7)7771/1. Heyne k Bekker read repei, as pr., N. 707.] TtpTrio (b, rapn-) please, satisfy, M.; T€p\J no, m. po., ao. a. \m. r., 2 a. m. erapirbppv, rerapir oppv 284 e, T. 19 ;| iripepO ye, Mem. 2. 1. 24, f 1., [irdpcpdpv 99, 2 a. irdprrpv, S. *47, sub. 1 p. rpaireiopev c 6 , 323 c, 326 d, I\ 441.] [Tepcrcuvw (11 6 , rep-, re per- 0) torreo, dry (pr. 1.), M. k repo-opai 77 . 124 ; reptra) 1. 152 d, ao. a. m. 1., ire papua II. 529 ; 2 a. p. irepapv f. 98.] [t/t|jiov k ^rerpiov, 2 a. as fr. rep- find, 284 e, a. 218, lies. Th. 610. ] c T€Tpcuva> (r 1 n 2 , rpa-), 1. nrpdco k c rirpppi, terebro, bore ; Tprjcrw 1., ao. a., c m. 1., [ c rerpavtw Hdt. 3. 12, irirppva, e. 247,] °m. Ar. Th. 18, erirpdva 1., 152 c; rerpppai, irppdpv k -avdpv 1.: rirpaivio k rerppvto 1. or ?. Cog. ropiu, rirpihcneii), q. v. rev\io (h, Tuy-, rvie- d 2 ) prepare, make, po. +, M.; review m., ao., [2 a. rirvKov in. 284 e ; Tc-revya, as p. p. 423, -7 pai +, /3. 63, 3 f. rered^opai, M. 345, crevxOpr 1. + ,] rervypai, 2. 9, Eur. El. 457, IrvxOpv. Cog. rtrv- ctkoj l' 1 k 3 po., rvyxdvio, rL ktio • [pf. inf. rerevxpcrdcu to be armed, x • 104.] TTJKCO (g, rate-) melt, THAW ; tt|£w [m. Hipp.], erfia. [to. 1.]; 2 pf. intrans. TerrjKa, iv. 5. 15 ; rirnpypui 1., €Tgx@ 7 ) u r -j 2 a. irdrpv, f. 1. [tic- grieve ; 2 pf. pt. renpds 325 d, I. 13, pf. p. 2 d. reriperdov, pt. ren- ppivos, 0. 447, 437.] TL0rjp.t, (r 1 , 0e-), put, Grjcrw, Te0eiKa, Mem. 4. 4. 19, kc., 45 : late nGew, ndpcropai, irLOpja. For the pass, (not found in Horn.), Keipai is often used. TtKTto (b 2 t, re/c-) beget, bring forth , pr. to. po.; Tef;op.cu (po. re£o>, ao. r.; for reieeicrdai see 305 a), 2 a. ere/cov, to. po. A. 59 ; reVoKa Ven. 5. 13, rereypai (or -oypcu ?) h, erex^pr, 1. 1. Ttpidw, -qtrw, &c., honor, 42 : rert- ppcropeu Lys. 189. 11 ; for f. p., usu. ripperopai. Cog. rieo, riven, ripiopeio. tivw (7 E.; 11 1 , n-) pay, expiate, M., ch. po. or 1., take payment, pun¬ ish ; Ttcrw in., ao.; Text sea, G -apai, G erLcr6p>: a’so M. rivvpev. (less cor¬ rectly riwvpai) po., 1 ., or 1., T. 260, {A. 1.) Po. rtw (t) pay honor to, to. r.; [tictw, ao. + ; pt. ref'.pivos v. 28.] Ttrpwo-Kw (r 1 k 6 , rpo-) wound [r. rpibn, ep. 293] ; rpwcrw [to.], ao. a.; T£Tpwa, Ar. Nub. 858, later rtrpoujxx Dinarch. (cf. rptepto), r£rpapyu, 3 f. c rerpdfopai, irpeepOpv [i. erpdfpdpv\, 2 a. erpdirpv usu. as 90 Tpen (Si TABLES. § 50 . m., f. 1. TpeVw has the six aorists, as, less surely or less simply, a 77 e\- Xw k nXyaaej. Po. cog. rposiraoj, rpo- neeo, 355 a, rpairew. rpetfsco (d 1 , 6 pap-, 6 pep- b) nour¬ ish [d. rpapu], M .; (rpepoiv 296 b;) Gpevj/co m., ao., [2 a. erpapov usu. intrans. y. 28 ;J T€Tpcxj>a p. 237, 1. Ter papa l’olyb. (cf. t penes), redpapb- p.ai (redpapOab PI. Gorg. 525 a, v. 1. rerp-), edpepOyv Eur. Hec. 351, oft- ener 2 a. erpapriv, f. 1. Tpeyw (d 1 , 6pex-> bpag- x) run; 8pap.oip.ai. (r. dpap.es k 6pep,as, comic c dpt£oga t Ar.), edpeija po. r., 2 a. ebpapov ; c 8e8pdp.r]Ka 311, 2 pf. po. c 5edpoga, e. 412, c deopapypab. Cog. rpoxdfa, vii. 3. 46, [ rpesxdes , bpopdos.~\ rpeco fear, flee ; erpeaa, i. 9. 6. Cog. terreo ; rpepes [rpopees v 2 +] tre- IHO, TREMBLE. TpX^wg, rub, Tpi\|/co, c T€xpi(})a Ar. Lys. 952, rerpeppab [3 p. Terpiparab 300c, Hdt. 2. 93], &c., 38, 39. Cog. reipes tero ; rpdes, rpvxas • tribulo. TpL^co (j 2 , rpr/-) twitter, gibber, po., i., or 1., cu. 5 ; tjpb^a 1.; 2 pf. pret. TeTpiya, B. 314. An onoma- tope, like rpufa murmur. rpd>y(o (b 3 h, rpay-) gnaw, eat raw food ; Tpto£cp.ai, Symp. 4. 8, [ c erpo;- £a,] 2 a. erpayov • ^rerpesypab. Tv-yxdvco (n 5 , tvx~, rev X~ h) hap¬ pen, hit; T€v|o|iai, ao. 1. r., [erc- XV (Ta 311, A. 106,] 2 a. ervxov; re- Ti^nKa, k. 88, Til. 1. 32, later rerev- %a, c T€T€vypLcu 1., c erevxOy]v 1. Cog. retix w d- y - 5 [ D - 1 a - ^Toaaa, Lind.] tvttto) (t, tv 7T-) strike, M. ])langor, mourn; TvirT'fjcrw 311, Ar. PI. 21, m. r., [ropes 1.,] ’ervpa, N. 529, m., later eronTyaa Aristl., 2 a. erinrov r. Eur. Ion 767 [redupl. 284 e] ; t€tv- TTTTjKa 1., rtrvppab, N. 782, Hdt. 3. 64, reTonrypab 1., ervirrydyv k ervpdyv 1., 2 a. erviryv po. or 1., O. 421, f. ? Of the verbs signifying to strike , the Att. use of rdiTTeo is especially in the pres, system ; of naraacres, in the aor. act .; k of nXycrcres, in the perf. pass, k compound systems ; while nates has a freer range of the tenses : llard£cu y) nXyyyvab, to strike or be struck, Aristl. Ilh. 1. 15. TOnree. ., seal . . nard^as Lys. 136. 22. a r., redvppac, 2 a. c eTupyv °f. Y. [iXdo) ululo, howl, bark, it. 9 :] vXdcTKo: po., vXaacres 1., oXasries, v. 13, Veil. 3. 5, [eXa/cdw k vXaKTbaes 1.] i-rr-i.a-'xveop.ai, undertake, promise, A. r. 1. ; iiro-o-xrjO'op.ai, 2 a. vtt- eaxbpyv ; vTr-etrxTlpat, vn-eax^W r * • po. or i. vniaxopab. See £x i0 - "vw rain, 571 d, e ; "vcrco [m. as p. Hdt. 2. 14], baa] c dapae 307d, Ven. 9. 5, vadyv , Hdt. 3. 10. [a-, 4>ev- b 1 n, kill, + ; Zpaa a 1., 2 a. Znepvov c 8 , 284 e; nepapab, E. 531, -apa i 1., 3 f. nepyaopab, O. 140: 1. nepves, whence some accent 2 a. pt. as pres., vecpvajv.] Cog. upases. aycv, see ecdico eat. avd;, •iT€<|>a'yKa c Dinarch., &c., show, shine, M. appear, 40 ; as v. 1. 2 a. Zcpavov m. 2 a. p. iter, c pdvcaKe 332 g. Po. cog. [0aeiVo>, y. 2, ] f. (epaevw) (pavG) ? Ar. Eq. 300 ; [et8cp.ai (h, cpid-) spare ; €£crop.ai ao., [ire(pt,dr,aop.ai,2a.'ire(pid6p.r)i ',284 f; iretpibpp.OLL 1., 311,] Tr€€icrp,ai 1. cjjtppoj feed, nourish, M. po. + , PI. Criti. 115 a ; [2 pip. execpop^eL Horn. Merc. 105.] Cog. ?, op€6iJY w (h> < P V J-) fugio, flee,; <}>ev- |o|xai k -ovpai 305 d, -£oj 1., ao. 1., [l. f. pvyovpai 305 a], 2 a. Ipvyov ; 2 pf. ir€c})€vya, a. 12, [pt. ireqpa (pa.-), 45 u, 271 r s, & <})dcrKa), fa-ri, (a) say, affirm (this stronger sense belonging esp. to pdanw, k the fut., aor., k mid. fr. pa-); ipf. 'Ipa- (tkov k (usu. as aor.) tpyv ; M. pr. [2 p. paade k. 562, imv. pdo tt. 168, pdcrdoo u. 100, inf. pdadai + , iEsch. Per. 700,] pt. papevos, Hel. 1. 6. 3, ipf. epapyv eh. po. or 1., A. 43 ; h, v. 7, m. 1., ipf. m. t. 542 ;] f. qow, c to. 1.; «l'pT|Ka 281, -pat, 3 f. elpyaopai Til. б. 34, ippydyv, -Idyv r., [l. elpedyv, ] sub. pyduo, kc., Hdt. 3. 9, f. pydqaopai : (c) fr. (Fe7r-, Fei7r-li) elir-, 1 a. ei7ra306a ( ind. 2 s., k imv. exc. 2 s., esp. used ; opt., inf, k pt. r. in Att.), c m. i. or l. , oftener (exc. as above) 2 a. ehrov (enrol, -oipi, -l, -eiv, -Pv), °m. ? 1., [w. syllabic aug., iFenrov, leurov K. 445, lenra Pind. N. 9. 78.] (d) Cog. parifa k prjpifa eh. po.; paivu show, q. v.; [eipdo, Hes. Th. 38 ;] epoordoj ash, q. v.; [ehro; 1. r.; lair- o, in pr. or 2 a. imv. 2 p. I jit ere B. 484, pr. m. Icnvopai 1.;] evlnoj q. v. e. The forms with 4> omitted (45 u), I 3 s. fjin Sap. 48], qv, q, are used for greater vivacity or the metre. Some refer them to a distinct root, akin to the Lat. aio. The subject follows, if expressed : ijv 5’ iyp, quoth I, Ar. Eq. 634 ; ^ 5’ 6 s § 518 f; ff, lie spake, A. 219 ; iral, ypl, irac, irai, boy! I say, boy!, boy! Ar. Nub. 1145. (f) The pr. 2 s. is usu. written pys, as if ct. fr. pads, 120 g, [prjcrda 297 b, £. 149 ; 3 s. py fr. pad or pycri, 103 c, Anac. 41 ; I), pari, 3 p. pavrl, 328.] (ffpvyo) (g) 4>do-Ko> is most used in the pt., to supply the place of pas (45 u). Horn, has only the ipf., X. 100. The pr. ind. is esp. rare, (h) The familiar forms from ep- k elir- have associate presents, not only as above, but also in \eyoj, dyopevw (eh. in comp.), kc. 4>0avw (a e. ; n 1 , pOa -) anticipate, M. 1.; 0acrw, Cyr. 5. 4. 38, oftener 4>0q0cipw (h, pOap-, pdep- b) corrupt, destroy, esp. cp. w. did, M. ; 0epo> m., epdeipa, [f. c pdlpcrw, N. 625, ao. 1., 152d, c pdaplopai J. ;] £4>0apKa, c Eur. Med. 226, 2 pf. ’epdopa c Ib. 349, epdappat, 2 a. epdapyv f. Cog., <|>0tvco n 1 [t f.., k r. pdiw, (3. 368], decay, consume (usu. intrans. exc. in fut. k ao.), cli. po., M.; [‘ F., vi., \ ao. a. [m. 1., 2 a. c Ipdidovl q 1 , e. 110 v. 7.,] 2 a. m. epd'tuyv 313 b, Eur. Ale. 414, sub. kc. [ pdiuipai, c pdipyv 316 c, 3 s. pdiadoo, pdiadat,] pdipevos • £j)0tKa 1., -pai, v. 340, -dyv. Cog. pOivtiOw yo.‘, pdcvdo 1., pdeio ? c|>i\€a> (v, c fftX-), -qo-co, Tre\a8-, 2 a. IpXadov burst, iEscli. $\£yoi ilagro, burn ; cjAeTw, c m. 1., ao. a. iEsch. Pr. 582 ; irepXeypai 1., epXexdyv, 2 a. c epXeyyv c f. 1. Der. pXeyldu po., P. 738, pXoyifa. 4>op€W v 2 , -q6PqKa, &c., terrify, M. [& p€/3opcu E. 532] fear. (jjpa^ci) (j 1 , ppa8-) tell, M.; t{>p&crci> \m. ], ao., [2 a. ireppadov, eirlppo.8ov, 284 e ;] ir€(|>paKa lsoc. 101a, -crpai [ c 7 reppadplvos 148 b, Hes. Op. 653], eppacrOyv. [Cog. r. ppabdfa, Pind.] c}>pda-crco k r. t|>pd-yvv|xi (i, n", ppay-] fence, M. Ppayvvpai ; m. °pdYa (or - Ka) 1., -ypat, Th. 1. 82, eppaxdyv, c f. 1., 2 a. eppdyyv 1., f. 1.: sometimes written pap for ppa, 145. 4>picrcrw (i, ppLK -) shudder; 4>pt£a> 1., ao. a., to. 1.; 2 pf. pret. we^plKa, A. 383, [pt. ireppiKovTas 326 b.] Cog. (Fpry-, 139, 141) piylu q. v. tfipUya) g, frigo, roast; [4>pv|co] ao .; 92 TABLES. XP cfipiyci) irefpv'yp.cu, Til. 6. 22, eA-yvu]U n 7 , 1. [c piyw D., (p'Jjfa l. ; P£a & -waa Hip]).;] &c. vXdcpa) g, mix, knead, M .; ?(pvpa 1 . [£0t)/ucra 152 d, a. 21, m. l.j; Tretpvp- pai, [3 f. Trevco (v) produce, if. grow ; f. pret. Ke'xavSa, 5. 96.] Cog.?, XacrKu) (k 3 , x av ')' 1. x a ' LVW h, liisco, gape; 0 yavoupat [xqaop.ai'(], 2 a. exovov, A. 182 ; 2 pf. pret. Kc'xriva Ar. Ay. 264. Der. x acrK dfa 379 b. X«t w X e5 ~) caco, comic + ; \e- (rovp.ai 305 d, c x^oop.aL r., ex eaam ; 2 a. execrov r. 327 a ; 2 pf. 0 Ktx°§ a > K^xeap-ai ; Ar. X«w (f 1 , X e F-, xw- f 2 , X"- 1HP) § so, pour, ch. cp. \v. eK, ev, avv, kc., if., 309 b ; f. c X^ a> or X e <^ 305 f, b, m., [xeew [3. 222, ] 1 a. ex ea w - 306, [ ex ei;a 7/i., H. 86, 63, 2 a. m. txdp-qv 313 b, A. 526;] c K£XVKal., -you, exvdqv f. (1. f.) : also x^ w L (x 1 ' 0 ”^ &c.), XCJ'w 1., Acts 9. 22, x ei ^ w (pr.) po., ch. 1., (c'xevaa). Cog. x<- w q. v. XXi8dcou, luxuriate, po. or 1.; 2pf. c Ktx^Sa. [Cog. /cf^XaSapret., Pind.] XcXcco, -wcrcu, kc., anger; if. x°~ Xbopai [xdop.ai c‘ 21 , T. 29, x^ocpxu, ao. A. 64] be angry ; pret. KexoXojpui, a. 69, 3 f. KexoXwcrogcu v k. 543. you k later x^wupi n 8 , heap up ; y&oru, ao. a. \m. ].] ; c K€'xwKa, Deni. 1279. 20, -crpai, exdoOqv f. ; Cyr. 7. 3. 11, 16, 17. Cog. x ew q. v. [Xpai, T. 296, ao. 2. 62, 2 a. expowpov, a. 66 ; not in Od.] Cog., Xpdw (xpqo'w, kc., 310 a, 307 e ; Xpaeis XPV S i20g, i. or \. XP$ S Hdt. 4. 155, &c.) to supply need, — a. ) The need of another, by lend¬ ing ; if., one’s own need, by borrow¬ ing: Kixprp.i r 1 , m. KixpdyaL • [xpf|- rn., ao. a.; Ke'xpi]Kal., -ap.ai or -pai, Hdt. 7. 141, expqodqv. Po. cog. xPtf w » Eur. e.) One’s own need, by using what is required: if. xp^cp 011 ’ XPL 0-0 ! 1111 ao.; Kc'xpi’paq Hdt. 1. 42, ixpyadqv. d. Inipers. xpq (for Xpdei or nude Xpr, Hdt. 3. 117] need, wish, 414 c : as, X f Soph. Ant. 887 ; po. pret. nexpv- Ijloll need, wish, Eur. Iph. A. 382, a. 13, 3 f. Kexpyo’oycu, Theoc. 16. 73. Xptjj anoint, M.\ Xi-a^io m -i ao -5 Ksxpi* 31 1. Lxx., -uTyai or -1/xxt 307 e, Cyr. 7. 5. 22, expiadrjv, f. 1. Cog., Xpt)^ & 1. XP^vjp-L (z, n 8 , xP° ) touch, color; expooaa 1-5 c Kt'xpwxci 1-, K-eXpwTyuai, Eur. Med. 497, ixpdoadyv, f. 1. Cog. xpoifw po., xpwritw, XP at '- vco • (xpctF-) XP aw or XP a vw graze. [x«o|iai, be angry ; see x°X6ojUc».] \|/dco, c 4/r|crio, &c., rub, 120 g. Cog. fbX'-r nub, xpaiow touch, \pdXXoo twitch, xprjXacpdu feel after. v|/uX w breathe, cool; i|/u£io ao.; ”ir€- \}/iiX. a 1. 280 c, dpcygai, -x^V v f-> Ven. 5. 3, 2 a. ei puxyr or -yyv d 2 , Ar. Nub. 151, f. 1. Mat. 24. 12. H. wStvw g, be in travail, A. 269 ; late ciSivw ao., & dobivqaw 311, Lxx., ao. a. m. p. d>6eoj (v, tid-) push, M .; ipf. eu>- Oeov m. 279 b (&6- E., I., 1., k r. in Att.) ; cocro) c m,, k po. dodyaco, m. L, t uocra m. [Soaa m. E. I., E. 19], dOyaa c m. 1.; c 2wKa 1., -a/uai, Cyr. 7. 1. 36, -adyv f., (i. or 1. Soa/aai, c cadyv.) Del*. doarifafiai justlc, Ar. Ach. 42. a>v€op.ai, v. 3. 7, buy (pr. r. as pass. PI. Phsedo 69 b) ; ipf. euovej/xyv 279 b (dor- i., 1., k r. in Att.); ann'io-opai vii. 2. 38, eooryadyyv or dovyadyyv ch. 1.; ewvrjjxai as mid. k pass., Lys. 108. 26, 211. 1, -dyv as pass. : 2 a. fr. irpia- x, eirpiduyv 45 i, a. 430 ; 2 s. eirpioo, irpiaao, irpioo, Ar. Yesp. 1440, Ach. 870, 34. Cog. ir lit pda kco sell. 51 . Remarks, a. In using the preceding List, it is important to observe carefully the punctuation, as showing with what words the ab¬ breviations, references, and various marks are connected; and also to dis¬ tinguish the small Roman letters of abbreviation (marked by periods, asf., 1., r., for f uture, late, rare), from mere letters of reference (not so marked, though periods may follow them for punctuation). If the latter immedi¬ ately follow figures, they refer (except s) to parts of sections or pages ; but otherwise, to the notation of stems in § 49, 340 s. The articles on du, a>, duo, two. 3 y rpeis, Tpia, tres, three. 4 8' re'crcrapes, -a, quatuor, four. 5 e' ire'vTe, quinque, five. 6 r' sex, six. 7 eTTTa, septem, seven. 8 if oktu, octo, eight. 9 0' evve'a, novem, nine. 10 i' 8e'i8exa, duodecim, twelve. 13 i-y' Tpio-KaiSexa, SexaTpets, tre- decim, thirteen. [decim. 14 iS' Teo-o-apecrxaiSexa, quatuor- 15 te' 'rrevTexaCSexa, quindecim. 16 ir' exxaiSexa, sexdecim. 17 €7rraxai8exa, septendecim. 18 itf oxTcoKcuSexa, duodeviginti. 19 t6' evveaxaiSexa, undeviginti. 20 x' e’iKocrt(v, vigint twenty. 21 xa' eis Kal ei'KOtri, el'xooav els, viginti unus, twenty-one. 30 X' Tptd' TrevTaxocrioL, quingenti. 2. Ordinal. 7r octtos ; quotus ? which in order l or, one of how many ? ottocttos, quotuscumque, whichsoever in order. oXcyoaros, one of few. ■jtoXXocttos, one of many, or, one fol¬ lowing many. irptoTos, -tj, -ov, primus, first. SevTepos, -a, -ov, secundus, second. Tpi/ros, -t|, -ov, tertius, third. Te'rapTos, quartus, fourth. Tre'p-TTTos, quintus, fifth. pa 0> a H rti 5 . Number, iroacLKLS ; ovbevdtus oaaKLS biroacLKLS quoties ? quoties quotiesque Derivative Nouns. Troaor^s quantitas, iroibrijs qualitas, tt^Xlkott^s, €TCpoTTJS, TCLl itLttJS, OpLOL^Tr/S, ijOTIJS, obSeVCLa, laUCLS, dXXo'lUCnS, OpLOlUpLOL , k c. PRONOMINAL CORRELATIVES 97 § - 53 . CORRELATIVES. Of the Negative Forms, the Objective begin with ov-, and the Subjective with t-vq-. space after or below some words. Definite or Demonstrative. Universal. VII. VIII. IX. X. -v XI XII. Of Identity, Simple. Emphatic. Deictic. Distributive. Collective. Diversity, Arc 6, T02 offros hie ode hie irds omnis bjabs, aurbs eKeiuos ovtoctL 68 L apupw dXXos Pie hicce hicce am bo alius erepos eKarepos dpuf) 3 Tepos alter alteruter uterque eKaaTOS aVTOTOTOS roaos tan- rocrouTOS Toaoabe TVVUOS [tus TVUUOVTOS Toaoabi rotos talis TOIOVTOS Totoabe TravTo'los o/xoio? §Keiuiuos TOlOVTOaL Toioabi omnigenus aXXo'ios ttjXLkos TTjXlKOVTOS TrjXiKO'jbe bp.'?jXi £ TvauTobaivbs aXXobaTvbs av6rjp.epos roOev inde TOVTodeV eKdtTTodeu 7 xduToOeu cpibdeu ZuOeu hinc evTevdev eudbube eKaaraxodeu 7 rauTaxbOeu avTodeu eneWev hinc hinc eKarepdeu undique aXXodeu ertpwdev inde inde eaaTbpcoOeu dpepoTepwOeu aXXaxbdeu 4 uda hie iuTavOa euddbe [utrimque irauTaxov 6 /j.ov, abTov eKeX illic hie hie eKacrTaxov ubique aXXaxov toQi ibi ibi ibi eKdoToOt TvauTcdi aiWb6i eneWi evravOi c55e eKatTTaxbOi 7 rauraxbOL aXXotfi erepwdi hie eKaTbpwOi dpupOTbpwOi aXXaxbdt. 4 u 6 a 8 e eo evTavOol CKaiTTaxoi Tvauraxol Ojibcre t/eccae hue quocumque ivdvToae avTocve illuc eo eKacTTaxocre tv auTaxoae dXXocve erbpwcre eKGLTepwae apupoTepwcre dXXaxoae rrj ea TavT-rj Trjbe Tvdurrj op-V 4 K€Lvri hac hac ubique aXXrj iliac eKacrTaxv Tvauraxv aXXaxv Ttbs, &s ita OVTWS Cbbe sic ivduTWS bp.0) s CKeLvu's OVTCOffL wbi omnino avTWS c* 3 o h sic Toiwabe TVaUTOLWS cjiolws erbpws ita taliter CKaTbpws dpapoTepws wcrabTW s secus TOuavTax&s ■jvauTax&s dXXws TO), t!)(TO)S tot mod is • -jvduv aXXolws t6t€ turn €Kd(TTOTe TvduTOTe, aXXoTe tunc semper biawauTos alias TTqVlKCL TrjVLKaVTOL T 7 juiKa.be [semper avrLKa T 7 ],U 0 S, UVU TTjjlOXJTOS TTpibabe statiin Tews, Tlxfrpa av, avdis loadias ToaavTaKLS toties eKaaTaKis iodKLS toties TOVT&KIS eKUTepaKis dpupoTepaKLS _ Derivative Verbs, b/aoibw assimulo, tabu requo, dXXotdw, voabw, tvoiow, erepoibu ovbeuifa, apcfiOTepifa, tVd i v w, duoiafa, eKaTepew, aXXdacrw, &C. 98 TABLES. §54. 54 . F. TABLE OF DERIVATION. A. Nouns (363 s). I. From Verbs : denoting 1. The Action, in -iris, -cri'd, -ns, -"H, -d, -os (g. -ov), -tos, -TT], -tvs, -fxss, -p-rj, -os (G. -eos). 2. The Effect or Object, in -jia, -ov. 3. The Doer, in -ttjs, -Tijp, -Tiop, (f. -rpea, -reipa, -rpLs, -ns,) -evs, -ds, -p-iov. 4. The Place, Instrument, kc., in -rrjpiov, -Tpov, -rpa. II. From Adjectives : expressing the Abstract, in Ad (-ad, -olcL), -Tr,s (g. -rrjros), -(rvvr|, -os (g. -eos), -as (G. -ados). III. From Other Nouns : 1. Patrials, in -ttis (Arps, -prps, -drps, -idrps, -ulrps • F. -tls), -evs (F. -Is). 2. Patronymics, in 48r,s, -a8r]s, -idSfjS (F. -is, -o.s, -Las), Acov, (F.-l dvp, -\vp) : - iSovs (f. -lS?,). 3. Female Appellatives, in^ -is, -aiva, -eid, -o- -aXos,-eXos, -iXos, -vWts, -vXos, &c. 5. Augmentatives, in -iov, -am a, -a|. 6 . Place, Instrument, kc., in -aiov, -eiov, 37o r N. B. Adjectives (373 s). I. From Verbs : in -ikos, -Topics, -p.a>v, active; -tos, -re'os, -vos, passive; -ipos, implying fit¬ ness; -pos, -as, -os. II. From Nouns : in -ios (-cuos, -eios, - oios, -epos, -vios), per¬ taining to; -ikos, -kos, -aKos, -aiKos, relating to ; -eos, -ivos, -en, material; -ivos, time or prevalence ; -ivos, -rivos, -avos, patrial; -pos, -epos, -i^pos, -aXe'os, -TjXos, -toXos, -eis, -io8tjs, fulness or quality. III. From Adjectives and Ad¬ verbs : 1. As from Nonns. 2. Strengthened Forms: Com¬ parative, Superlative. C. Pronouns (53, 244 s, 377). D. Ver: I. From Nouns and Adjectives : in -e'i o, -evio, -6m, to be or do; -cu, -aiv, -d?a>, imitative, active, &c. ; -ida>, -aco, desiderative ; -co with penult strengthened, active, kc. E. Advei I. Oblique Cases of Nouns and Adjectives : 1. Accusatives: of Nouns ; Neut. Sing, and Plur. of Adjectives (esp. Comparatives and Super¬ latives). 2. Genitives , in -0ev, place whence; -ov, place where ; -t]s, kc. 3. Datives, in -oi, -o0i, -rjcri, -acri, place where; -tj (- 77 ), -a (-a), -ai, -i, way, manner, place where, time when ; kc. s (378 s). II. From Other Verbs: in -o-eCio, desiderative; -£co, -o-kco, -XXa>, frequentative, intensive, inceptive, causative, diminutive, kc.; redu¬ plicated. bs (380 s). II. Derivatives signifying, 1. Manner, in -cos, -rjSov, -8ov, -8t]v, -cLStjv, -8a, -8is,A (t), -ei, -£. 2. Time when, in -tc, Akci. 3. Place whither, in -ere, -8is. 4. Number, in -cLkis. III. Prepositional Forms and Phrases : 1 . Prepositions with their Cases. 2 . Prepositions without Cases. 3. Derivatives from Prepositions, in -w, -0ev, -io0ev, -tos, -Sov, &c. §55. ETYMOLOGY. 99 55 . G. SIGNIFICANT ELEMENTS OF LANGUAGE. Note. The term “ things ” is here used in its large sense, as including every object of sense, discoui’se, or thought; whether persons, material things, or mere abstractions The term “ actions ” is used for both actions and states. Grand The Signs Divisions. of Classes. A. Essential Elements. Things, | s UBSXANXIVESj Orders. Subdivisions. ( Proper c Nouns, | Common, Appellative. Collective. Substantial, Abstract. , Actions, | II. Verbs, Substantive ( Pei sonal, ,, „ „ < Reflexive, l n uns, | Connective, &c. Infinitives (Gerunds, Supines). r r „ ... ( Finite Verbs. Iransitive, ) hlflnitives . Intransitive,} Farticiples . ' Properties of Things, III. Adjectives, B. Descriptive • Elements. Articles, Numerals, Adjective Pronouns, Participles. Definite. Indefinite. t Cardinal, s Ordinal. (Multiple, &c. ' Possessive. Demonstrative. Connective. Interrogative. Indefinite. Distributive. Negative, &c. Connective • Elements D. Instinctive Elements. of Actions or of other Relations ) of i Things, ) Relations ) of \ Sentences, ) ' Of Manner, Of Place, IV. Of Time, Adverbs, Of Degree, Of Number, &c. Adiectives [ 0f Q ual!t y- ‘ ’ | Of Circumstance. Connective. Interrogative. Indefinite. Negative. v Emphatic, &c. V. Prepositions, Of Place, Time, Action, Cause, &c. ( Copulative. ( Coordinate, < Adversative. ( Alternative. VI. Conjunctions, VII ' Complementary. Conditional. Subordinate,- Concessive. Causal. Final, &e. Emotions, j i NXER j ECXIONS ^ Of Pleasure, Pain, Address, &c. Without its essential elements, language could have no existence as rational discourse; without its descriptive elements, it would be vague and meagre ; without its connective elements, it would be disjointed; and without its instinctive elements, it would want sensibility and passion. 100 TABLES. -SYNTAX. §5G. III. SYNTAX. A. GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 56. A thought expressed in words forms a sentence (sen- tentia, thought). Syntax is the doctrine of sentences, as Ety¬ mology, of words, Orthoepy, of vocal sounds, and Orthog¬ raphy, of written characters. a. To analyze, a sentence is to divide it into its parts, observing their offices and relations. These parts, in Syntax, are of three kinds : in¬ cluded sentences, commonly called clauses; phrases, expressive combina¬ tions of words, yet not sentences ; and single words, or those which in Etymology are so regarded : ‘ He came when it was time ’ ; ‘ He came in good time ’ ; ‘ He came seasonably .’ i. Sentential Analysis. 57. 1. Every complete sentence has two chief or primary elements, the Subject and Predicate ; and may have a third, the Compellative. a. The subject and compellative are those substantives in the sentence which denote most directly the persons or things spoken of (subject) or addressed (compellative) : ‘ Brethren, virtue ennobles.' b. The term substantives is here employed, as commonly in Syntax, to include not only nouns, substantive pronouns, and infinitives (55), but whatever is used substantively; as, an adjective or adverb denoting some person or thing, a phrase or clause forming an object cf thought or re¬ mark, or any word spoken of as a word: ‘Now’s the day’; ‘ Above twenty came’ ; ‘Go is a verb.’ See 68a, 70a, 491. c. The predicate is always a verb; and, of more than one, that which is most closely related to the subject in the expression of the thought, (d) As the essence of a sentence is predication, the predicate is often taken as a representative of the sentence. Thus a word which connects or modifies a sentence, is familiarly spoken of as connecting or modifying the verb of the sentence : ‘ But perhaps he will go.’ 2. Sentences have also various minor elements: e. ) Exponents, words which mark the offices or relations of sentences or their parts : ‘He said that he went to Paris and Rome.’ See 65s. f. ) Elements that are grammatically independent; as, a participial phrase absolute, interjections, &e. : ‘ This said, he fell, alas/' g. ) Subordinate elements, or modifiers, which are joined with other elements to modify or limit them, i. e. to affect in various ways their force or application : ‘Dear brethren, true virtue always ennobles.’ h. A word which is modified by another, is termed its principal; and this distinction of principals and modifiers applies not only to single words, but also to phrases and sentences. 58. Modifiers are of three kinds: (1) Words of Prop¬ erty", i. e. Adjectives and Adverbs (55), including all words so considered ; (2) Modifying Substantives, including Apposi - tives and Adjuncts; and (3) Dependent Sentences. a. Modifying Substantives. When, with one name of a person SENTENTIAL ANALYSIS. 101 § 59* or thing, another is connected for the sake of explanation, specification, description, or emphasis, the latter is said to be in apposition with the former, and is termed an Appositive : ‘Paul the apostle.'' All other modifying substantives are termed Adjuncts : ‘Saul of Tarsus.' b. When two names for the same person or thing are connected as above, that should be regarded as the. appositive which is added for the sake of modifying the other, whatever may be its position : ‘ George the King, ’ or ‘ King George.’ It is not, however, always easy to determine this ; and two or more names are often so joined that they may be re¬ garded as forming one. complex noun: ‘ Charles James Fox.' c. An adjunct, in respect to form, is either prepositional or nude ; that is, it is either joined to its principal by a preposition, which serves as an exponent of its relation ; or it is joined immediately, without a prep¬ osition. — In the first case, it is also termed exponential; and in the sec¬ ond, immediate. In the sentence, ‘Give me the book,’ the adjuncts me and book are both nude, or immediate ; while in ‘ Give the book to me,’ the adjunct me (or, prefixing the exponent, to me) is prepositional. d. As to its use, an adjunct is regarded either as completing the idea of its principal, or as denoting some circumstance respecting it; and is hence distinguished as complementary or circumstantial (more briefly, as a com¬ plement or a circumstance). In ‘ The son of Jesse slew Goliath with a sling,’ ‘of Jesse’ and ‘Goliath’ are complements of ‘son’ and ‘slew,’ which would seem incomplete without them ; while the less essential ‘with a sling’ expresses a circumstance of ‘slew,’ viz. the instrument. e. A complement is distinguished as direct or indirect, according to the closeness of its relation. This distinction appears especially in the ob¬ jects of verbs, which form the most prominent class of complements. f. Among the most prominent circumstances, are those of place, time, cause, origin, material, motive, price, manner, means, degree, agency, &c. g. There is no line of division between complements and circumstances, or between direct and indirect complements ; and many adjuncts may be differently classed, according to the view which the mind takes of them. li. A modifying clause performs the office of an adjective, adverb, or substantive ( appositive or adjunct) in the sentence to which it belongs. See 62 b, h. (i) Hence, all modifiers are adjective, adverbial, or substan¬ tive, in their force ; and, as substantive modifiers, when they modify other substantives, are akin to the adjective, but when they modify verbs, ad¬ jectives, or adverbs, to the adverbial, adjectives and adverbs may be taken as the types of all modifiers. 59. Some words have a double relation, which may be termed complex modification. Thus, a. A word modifying a verb, and thus partaking of an adverbial force (58 i), may also belong as an adjective, appositive, or adjunct, to the sub¬ ject or a complement of the verb: ‘He is esteemed wise.' ‘He stood erect.' ‘They made him king.' An adjective, &c., thus predicated of its subject, is termed a predicate adjective, &c. ; while others, joined with¬ out predication, are termed direct or assumed (393 a, b). An assumed ad¬ jective is also called an epithet. A verb which can thus connect an ap¬ positive to its subject, is termed an oppositional verb. b. A clause modifying the predicate is often incorporated in a parti¬ cipial form, and assumed of the subject: ‘ Fearing this [as he feared this], he fled.’ See 62 a, d. c. When two adjectives belong to the same substantive, one sometimes TABLES. SENTENCES. 102 § 59 . exerts an adverbial force upon the other, or modifies the substantive taken with the other as a complex ivhole : ‘ Red, hot iron ’ ; ‘ All good men.' d. An adverb modifying a sentence or phrase, often gives a special em¬ phasis, or bears a special relation to a particular word in the sentence or phrase : ‘ Bless me, even me also,' Gen. 27. 34. ‘ He, iie surely, will go.’ 60. a. Any element, with all the words which arc subordinate to it and aid in expressing its idea, forms a logical part bearing the name of its element, but distinguished by the addition of ‘ part' ; while the element itself is distinguished, if need be, by the addition of ‘ word .' The for¬ mer is also distinguished as ‘logical,' and the latter as ‘ grammatical ' (sometimes called the “basis” of the logical part). In ‘Good men are wise,’ the subject-part, or logical subject (the subject as thought of), is ‘ Good men,’ containing the subject-word, or grammatical subject, ‘ men ’ ; and the predicate-part is ‘are wise,’ containing the predicate-word, or grammatical predicate (the word that expresses predication, and has the appropriate grammatical form and office) ‘are.’ b. The predicate-part may be resolved into the attribute and the copula. The attribute (attributus, ascribed) expresses the action, state, property, &e., ascribed to the subject; as ‘wise,’ above. The copula (Lat. tie, bond) is a substantive verb (a verb which simply expresses being), uniting the attribute with the subject; as ‘are,’ above : ‘The sun shines [w shining].’ ‘ He fears [7s afraid].’ ii. Offices and Delations of Sentences. 61. A sentence is intellective (intellectus, understanding ) or volitive (volo, to will), according as it primarily expresses an act of the understanding, or an act of the will. a. An intellective sentence is declarative or interrogative, accord¬ ing as it makes a statement, or asks a question: ‘ He will go.’ ‘ Will he go ? ’ (b) Interrogation is sometimes used rhetorically for strong statement, (c) A volitive sentence (also termed imperative,’ from its mode) may express command, entreaty, exhortation, permission, or even supposition: ‘Go.’ (d) A sentence of any one of these forms is termed exclamatory, when used for exclamation : ‘ How fast he goes ! ’ (e) Sentences of all these classes may be either positive or negative ; i. e. they may affirm or deny, require or prohibit, &c. : ‘ I will go.’ ‘ Do not go.’ f. A declarative or interrogative sentence is actual, when it has re¬ spect to fact (what is, or is not, &c.) ; but contingent, when it has re¬ spect to contingency (what may be, or may not be, &c.). See 613 s. These sentences may be also named from their modes and time ( indicative , &c.) 62. Sentences are connected with each other in four ways: a. ) Bjr incorporation, in which the verb of one sentence is incorpo¬ rated in another sentence as an infinitive or participle (i. e. as a substan¬ tive or adjective). —Such a sentence, as well as its verb, is termed incor¬ porated, while sentences in which the predicate has a distinct form as a finite verb are termed distinct or finite. See 657 s. b. ) By subordination, in which one of the sentences, without losing its distinct form, belongs to the other as a part or circumstance (subject, object, condition, reason, result, time, kc.) ; and is therefore termed subor¬ dinate, dependent, or included, while the other is distinguished as the chief, principal, or leading sentence or clause. — The two together form a COMPLEX sentence : ‘ Go, if you ivish' ; ‘ That he went, is strange.’ §63. METHODS OF INDICATION. 103 c. ) By coordination, in which the sentences are joined by a connec¬ tive, but neither is subordinate to the other. Sentences so connected are termed coordinate, and together form a compound sentence. See d, e. d. ) By simple succession, in which one sentence directly follows an¬ other, without a connective (often referred to ellipsis, 68 d) : ‘ Luther said this. He sat down.’ — This form may be changed to coordination, by supplying a connective ( £ L. said this, and he sat down ’) ; often even to subordination (‘ JVhen L. had said this, he sat down’), or the yet closer form of incorporation (‘ Having said this, L. sat down’). See 657s, 693. e. A sentence is termed simple, if it is neither complex nor com¬ pound ; and independent, if it is neither incorporated nor subordinate, (f) A sentence which according to its main division is compound, may have complex members, and the converse, (g) Parts oi a sentence are also compound, complex, or simple, according as they consist of portions joined by coordinate conjunctions expressed or understood, of portions joined by subordinate conjunctions, or of neither : ‘ Asa and Eli gave more than ten dollars to John.' A sentence containing a compound or complex part may usually be resolved into two or more clauses, by supplying words. li. A subordinate clause is usually declarative in form. It is termed adjective (or relative), adverbial {final, conditional, concessive, causal, kc.), or substantive ( dppositive, adjunct, &c.), according to its office or connective. See 58 li, 66. (i) An incorporated clause, though always substantive or adjective in form, is often adverbial in force (665, 674). j. An independent sentence, whether simple or compound, with all its dependent clauses, forms a period, which may be further named accord¬ ing to its special character. If a dependent clause expresses a condition of the principal, the combination is called a hypothetical period (virbdeaLS, supposition) ; the dependent clause being called the premise, con¬ dition, or protasis (irpordvu, to stretch forth) ; and the principal clause, the conclusion, or apodosis (airobidcopu, to give back). — Some of these terms are also applied to parts of other complex sentences. k. Quotations, which form so important a class of substantive sen¬ tences, have two forms, in the lirst and more dramatic form, we simply repeat the words of another, without change or incorporation into our own discourse: He said, “1 will go.” This is termed Oratio Recta, Direct Discourse or Quotation. In the second and more narrative form, we make such changes and insert such connectives as will render the quo¬ tation an integral part of our own discourse : He said, that he would go. This is termed Oratio OblIqua, Indirect Discourse or Quotation (643 s). This distinction likewise applies to the thoughts and feelings of another. l. An incorporated clause does not usually require a separate analysis, except where, as in Latin and Greek, an Iniinitive takes the place of an¬ other mode in Indirect Discourse. iit. Methods of Indication. 63. The offices and relations of sentences and their parts are indicated in three ways : (a) by the form of the words; (b) by the arrangement; and (c) by separate words, which act as signs or exponents of these offices or relations. A. Indication by Form. This has four chief objects: a.) To mark the connection of appositives, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs, with their subjects (i. e. the substantives to which they refer), by a correspondence of form, termed agreement or concord. See 76, 492 s. 104 TABLES. SYNTAX. § 63 . b. ) To mark, by appropriate forms, the offices and relations of substan¬ tives. This is done, in most languages, through the distinction of case. When the form of a substantive is determined by its dependence upon another word, it is said to be governed by that word ; and the influence exerted upon it is termed government or regimen. See 76. c. ) To mark, by the form of an adjective or adverb, the degree in which its property is possesse 1 (comparison, 29, 256 s). d. ) To mark the offices and relations of sentences, through the form of the verb, th a predicating word. See 57 c, 30, 265 s. e. In agreement, the words which are connected are regarded, by a species of personification, as allies; in government, as ruler and ruled. (0 Of nude, adjuncts, those only which are complementary (58 c, d), are usually spoken of as governed. Prepositional adjuncts are commonly said to be governed by the prepositions ; and are called their complements, ob¬ jects, or, by a happier term, sequents. g. In the development of a language, new forms arise to express more specifically what has been generally expressed by some older form. This older form thus becomes narrowed in its appropriate sphere, and itself more specific in its expression. But habit, which is mighty everywhere, is peculiarly the arbiter of language ; — “ Usus, Quern penes avbitrium est et jus et norma loquendi ”; — and, wherever the new distinction is unimportant, there is a tendency to employ the old and familiar form in its original extent of meaning. The same is true of words and methods of construction. See 70 v. 64. B. Arrangement, a. Words are arranged for effect upon the understanding, the emotions, or the ear: in other words, the arrangement of a sentence may have for its object, (1) To exhibit the offices and rela¬ tions of the words ; (2) To present the thought in an impressive manner ; (3) To produce an agreeable effect upon the ear. — That order which most effectually secures the first object is termed the logical order; the second, the rhetorical order; the third, the rhythmical order. b. In the logical order, the verb is usually placed after the subject, and before the attribute, if this is distinct from the verb (60 b) ; and (c) a word which is governed by another is usually placed after it. (d) Words are often spoken of in Syntax, as following or preceding others, with refer¬ ence to the logical or usual order, without regard to their actual position. 65. C. Use of Exponents. These mark the offices or relations (1) of words (including phrases), or (2) of sentences. 1 . Word-Exponents are (a) those which mark the relations of ad¬ juncts (58 c), i. e. prepositions (“case-links”) ; (b) conjunctions used as in 62 g; (c) interjections marking address or exclamation [O, ah, 484, 73 e) ; (d) modal signs (modus, manner), i. e. connective adverbs of manner used elliptically to limit the application of modifiers (‘I took him as a friend,’ 393 c, 711). The last may be parsed as connective ad¬ verbs by supplying ellipses, but most conveniently as mere signs uniting modifiers with their principals. 66. 2. Sentential Exponents are either connective (denoting the connection of sentences), or characteristic (marking their charac¬ ter, without connecting them). a. The connectives may simply denote the relations of the sentences (conjunctions, “clause-links,” 700s); or (b) they may also enter into their structure as pronouns or adverbs (connective pronouns or ad¬ verbs). A connective pronoun or adverb is either (c) relative (referring § 68 . FIGURES. ELLIPSIS. 105 to an antecedent, 549 s), or (d) complementary (introducing a sentence used substantively, 563 s). Thus, (a) that, if, until, though, (c) who (73 e) ; (d) what (73 d). Connectives are either (e) primary (directly uniting the sentences), or (f) secondary (corresponding to the primary, “as the eye to the hook”) : ‘He (f) both reads (e) and writes ;’ ‘ (e) Though he feared, (f) yet he went. g. The characteristic exponents (marking sentences as negative, interrogative, contingent, &c.) maybe adverbs or pronouns: ‘ Who was it?’ ‘ It was not I.’ ‘I see no man.’ B. FIGURES OF SYNTAX. 67. Those special forms of expression which are termed Figures of Syntax, may be referred to four great heads, Ellipsis, Pleonasm, Enallage, and Hyperbaton. a. Figures or Syntax are associated and blended with those of Rhetoric ; and some of the latter will be mentioned below. Both classes are more common in poetry than in prose; in colloquial, than in formal discourse ; and in the language of passion, than in that of narra¬ tive or argument. b. The use of unauthorized constructions is termed solecism (from IoXolkol, dwellers in Soli, of Cilicia, famed for their bad Greek) ; of un¬ authorized words, BARBARISM ((3apftapos, barbarian) ; of antique vjords or constructions, archaism (apxdios, ancient). A form of construction specially belonging to a particular language is called an idiotism or idiom (tbios, peculiar) ; or, from the name of the language, a Hebraism, Hellenism or Grccism, Latinism, Anglicism, &c. 68. i. Ellipsis defect) is the omission of words which are required for the most complete and regular expres¬ sion of the sense. 1. These words are said to be understood. The omission may take place without any other change in the form of the expression ; or it may be attended with other changes, respecting either the words which are employed, or the forms of those words: ‘Will you go?’ ‘[1 will go] Certainly'-, or ‘Yes' [= 1 will go]; or, ‘No' [= not]. See 69a. (2) There is a rhetorical figure called Omission, in which there is a 'pre¬ tence of omitting something, which is thus mentioned and often made more prominent: ‘ His crime and folly I forbear to mention.’ 3. Ellipsis exhibits a striking paradox. It is generally true, that, the more essential a word is to the grammatical construction of the discourse, the more apt it is to be omitted ; for this reason, that it is the more readily supplied from the very necessity of the case. Hence the frequent omission of the word to which another refers as its subject or by which another is governed, of the substantive verb, of the direct object of a transitive verb, &c.; in general, of words modified rather than modifiers, and of leading rather than subordinate clauses. See 506, 571 s, 476, 626. 4. To ellipsis are usually referred, by grammarians, all abbreviated and compendious forms of construction, however familiar (though the term Brachylogy [brief expression ] would often apply more properly) : as, a.) Adjectives used substantively, and adverbs used substantively or ad- jectively (506 s, 526 s) : (b) Many forms of inscription, salutation, excla¬ mation, &c. (401, 670) : (c) The construction of responsives (words in the answer, corresponding to interrogatives in the question), and other 10f> TABLES. -PLEONASM. § 68 . forms of reply; as, ‘Who saw it?’ [saw it]: (cl) Asyndeton (aauvdeTos, not bound together), the omission of a conjunction or other con¬ nective ; often greatly promoting energy and vivacity, as in Caesar’s cele¬ brated despatch, Veni, vidi, vici , 1 came — saio — conquered. See 707. (e) Aposiopesis {dir oaubir yens, the becoming silent), the failure to finish a sentence, whether from design, diversion of thought, overpowering emo¬ tion, or any other cause ; as, ‘ If you ever do this again-’ So not unfrequently after a conditional clause (636 s). f.) Most cases of compound construction (60). A word referring to a compound subject has either the form which is required by all the sub¬ stantives in the subject, taken together, or that which is required by one of them, taken singly. In the former construction, named Syllepsis (crvX- Xyfis, taking together), the word is said to agree with all the substantives; in the latter, named Zeugma {frvyya, yoking), it is said to agree with one of the substantives, and to be understood with the rest. For ‘ My heart and my flesh rejoice ,’ Ps. 84. 2, an older version has, ‘ My heart and my flesh cricth out.' See 495 s. (g) The term zeugma is used, in general, to denote the connection of a word with a number of words, to a part of which only it is appropriate in meaning, or in form (while, in syllepsis, it would suit the whole): ‘ Yon are blind of ear, mind, and eye ’ (Soph. 0. T. 371). Cf. § 572b. 69. ii. Pleonasm (irheovaoryos, redundance ) is the use of more words than the sense requires. a. Pleonasm may consist in the simple repetition or insertion of words, or it may be attended with more important changes in the form of the ex¬ pression (cf. 68. 1 ; the limits of both Ellipsis and Pleonasm are very in¬ definite). (b) One of its common forms is emphatic repetition, in the same or in similar words (the latter specially named Synonymia): ‘Never, never, never ! ’ ‘ Oh, spare me ! pardon and forgive ! ’ c. Useless repetition is termed Tautology {ravroXoyLa, saying the same thing) : (d) a circuitous manner of expression, Periphrasis or Circumlocu¬ tion (irepi dia dvoiv, one thing by two) ; as, ‘ Whose nature and properly is ever to have mercy’: (f) the use of more connectives than are needed, Poly¬ syndeton (iroXvs, many; cf. 68 d); as, ‘ Whenne that,’ for ‘when,’ Chauc. 70. hi. Enallage ((vaXXayr j, exchange) is the use of one word or form for another. — 1. As the use of one word for an¬ other, it has respect either to the grammatical ofice of words, or to their signification. a. The use of one part of speech for another is termed antimeria {avTL, instead of, yipos, part) : ‘Now 's the day,’ Burns. Cf. 68 a. b. A figure by which a word is turned from its literal sense, is called a trope {rphiros, turning). The principal tropes (commonly classed as rhetorical figures, 67 a) are mentioned below, (c) The figurative sense of a word often becomes so familiar that we employ it without intending or being conscious of any figure : ‘a sweet temper,’ ‘works of tasted This use, in which the word has puissed over from its primary to a secondary sense, is hence termed transitive (transeo, to jiass over). d. In Metaphor (yera^opd, transfer), a word appropriate to one ob¬ ject is transferred to another, by reason of some analogy between them : ‘Tell that fox,' Lk. 13. 32. (e) Allegories are formed by extending and §71. 107 ENALLAGE, HYPERBATON. combining metaphors, (f) When inanimate or irrational objects are rep¬ resented as persons, the figure is termed Prosopopoeia or Personification (rrpoaojTrov persona, person, 7 renew facio, to make) ; (g) when a speaker turns aside in his discourse so to address them (or to address absent per¬ sons as if present), it is termed Apostrophe (airoerrperpco, to turn from) : ‘Sing, 0 heavens ; and be joyful, 0 earth !’ Is. 49. 13. h. Metonymy (percowpia, change of name) gives to one object the name of another which is related to it: as, crown , throne, and sceptre, for sovereignty, (i) An abstract noun is often used for a concrete, for greater strength of expression, especially in apposition: ‘ He is my defence.' j. Synecdoche (avvendoxy, comprehension) puts apart for the whole, or the whole for a part: keel, for ship ; steel, for sword. k. Irony {dpuiveta, dissimulation) is the use of a word for its opposite : hero, for coward . (1) A seeming contradiction, termed Oxymoron (o£e- pwpos, keenly foolish), is sometimes made by uniting words of opposite signification : learned ignorance. m. A form of expression beyond the truth is termed Hyperbole {virep- / 3o\y, throwing beyond) ; designedly short of it, Litotes ( Xirorps, sim¬ plicity) ; more agreeable, Euphemism (ei«j>r)pLagbs, use of good words). ( 11 ) A play upon words similar in sound but differing in sense, or upon the same word used in different senses, is termed Paronomasia {irapcvo- paaia, comparison of names, pun) ; and (o) an imitation of the sense by the sound, Onomatopoeia (ovopaTorroua, name-making; certainly one of the most copious of the original sources of language). 2. Enallage, as the use of one form for another, is specially termed, p.) Synesis (avreens, understanding), when the construction follows the sense or the conception of the mind, in disregard of grammatical form or of the reality of things (498 s) : (q) Attraction (attractio), when a word is drawn from its appropriate form by the influence of another word (500, 552, 71 b) : (r) Hypallage (inraWay'/}, interchange), when two words interchange constructions (474 a) : (t) Anacolutiion (avaKoXovOos, inconsistent), when there is a change of construction, so that two parts of a sentence do not agree (402, 504 b) : (u) Vision (visio, seeing), when the present tense is used in speaking of past or future events, as if they were actually occurring before the eye (609) : (v) Retention (retentio), when a form retains from its earlier extent of application a use afterwards assigned to another form (392a r , 485, 576, 603s, 651s): (w) Change of Number, Gender, or Person (488 s, 501s). 71. iv. Hyperbaton ({mepharos, transposed ) is a disregard of the common laws of arrangement. It is specially termed, a. ) Inversion, or Anastrophe ( dvaarpoepr) inversio, inversion), when words in a clause are inverted (chiefly for emphasis, euphony, rhythm, to bring similar or contrasted words nearer together, or to mark the connec¬ tion of sentences, 719 a, s). —The name Chiasma (%/ac rpa, imitation of \) is applied, when the arrangement in one pair of words or expressions is inverted in a similar pair following. b. ) Prolepsts (TrpoXrjipis, anticipation), when a word is placed in a clause earlier than that to which it properly belongs, or is otherwise anticipated. This is commonly due to attraction (70 q, 474, 657). c. ) Parenthesis (naplvOeais, insertion), when one sentence is inserted ‘ Kind w words, but thoughts ^ unkind.’ 108 TABLES. SYNTAX. § 71. within another, with which it has no grammatical connection : ‘ This, mark me, is true.’ — The term may be likewise applied to any interrup¬ tion of the sense by the insertion of unessential words or clauses. d.) Hysteeon Proteron (varepov irporepov, the last first), when that which follows in the order of occurrence or nature, is placed first : ‘ I was bred and born,’ Shahs, (e) Confused Arrangement, when this term applies, (f) Tmesis, see 388 c. C. FORMS OF ANALYSIS AND PARSING. 72. i. For Sentences. 1. Describe the Sentence: as, — It is Simple, Complex, or Compound [consisting of the Coord., or Lead’g & Suborcl. Clauses —] ; Pos. or Neg.; r Infinitive, incorporated in the sentence — as a Substantive./ p . Participial, “ “ “ “ “ “ an Adjective. J A - ( T .• 3 /Declarative, /Actual [Indicative, Past, &c.]0 Finite/ lntel ectlve ’ \Interrogative,/Contingent [Subjunctive,&cj; j-fol- „ ^Imperative, expressing command, entreaty , exclamatory, &c. lowing — by simple succession, or connected by — to — as a Coordinate Sentence, or as a Subordinate Clause, performing the office of a Substan¬ tive, Adjective, or Adverb. Remarks. Subject The Predicate Compellativw us —, which [is intro- 2. Analyze the Sentence into its Grammatical or its Logical Parts , or both " Adjective modified by the ^ v erb J Appositive Adjunct duced by —, and] is itself modified by —, and this by —, &c.; or by the Dependent Clause —, which performs the office of —, and consists of —. [Minor parts independent are the Interjection —, &c.] Remarks. Or, more fully, thus: The ,containmgthe®^jP[j Subject Predicate,&c Adjective Adjunct,&c. ieate-Part may be resolved into the Copula —, and the Attribute —.] - modilied b 5’ t,1e Adju/r/rt/o.} -> consistin S of the -, [introduced by —, and] modified by —, &c. [The Pred- 73. Written Analysis. It is of great benefit, in the study of other languages, as of English, so to write the analysis of sentences, that the office of each word shall determine its place. Of the several methods that have been proposed for this, the following is suggested as the most simple in use, that is also minute : a. Write the several sentences under each other, prefixing symbols to mark their general offices and relations, and placing connectives in one column, subject-parts in another, predicate-parts in the third, and inde¬ pendent parts in a fourth. Write all modifiers (or their symbols, in the case of modifying clauses) under the words which they modify, but indent¬ ed, that is, with the line beginning farther to the right. Exponents of the use of words are simply written with the words, in the same line. Compound parts, according to convenience, are either written as if simple, $>r with their elements under each other and connected by a brace (which may be extended below, to meet a common modifier). Words supplied 4 73. ANALYSIS OF SENTENCES. 109 to complete the grammatical construction are underlined in writing (printed below as Italic, or, in Greek, with smaller type); while paren¬ theses or brackets mark the repetition of a word in the scheme, to show a double office or relation (especially where a word in the subject or predi¬ cate part serves also as a connective). In complex modiftcation, the modi¬ fier is sometimes repeated ; but oftener written only once, in the place which shows its closest connection or is most convenient, its double office being shown, if desired, by a double mark. Space may be gained, if wished, by writing the article in the same line with its noun or with an¬ other modifier ; and time, by abbreviating words, or simply writing their initials. The article is sometimes even omitted. b. For sentences, the following symbols may be used : The capitals A, B, C, &c., for independent sentences (sentences of the 1st rank) ; the numerals 1, 2, 3, &c., for sentences immediately dependent upon these (2d rank) ; the small letters a, b, c, kc., for sentences dependent upon the latter (3d rank) ; the Italics a, b, c, kc., for sentences of the 4th rank ; the last letters of the alphabet, z, y, x, &c., for those of the 5th rank ; these in Italics, for the 6th rank ; the middle letters, m, n, o, kc., and m, n, o, kc., for the rare 7th and 8th ranks. If the sentence is in¬ terrogative, the sign ? may be added ; if imperative, t; if exclamatory, ! ; if quoted or parenthetic, the usual sign in part, ” or ). The members of compound sentences, or of those which have prominent parts com¬ pound, may be distinguished by the use of accents (unless a separate no¬ tation is preferred) : as A, A', A", kc. (read “A,” “A prime,” “A sec¬ ond,” &c.). The different kinds of modifiers may be distinguished by any convenient marks, or indices. An adjective modifier is marked below with °; an adverbial modifier, with ' ; a substantive modifier, with an angle, the opening turned up lor an adjunct ( v ), and down for an apposi- tive ( A ). Judgment will, of course, be exercised in regard to the extent to which, in any exercise, the notation shall be carried. c. When minute analysis is not desired, some of its most important ob¬ jects may be rapidly obtained by symbolizing a period or paragraph, that is, by writing the symbols of its sentences in the order of occurrence (the symbol being repeated, when a clause is divided), with additional signs above or below to mark the offices of the sentences, and such punctuation as will best suit their connections. The examples below will be first sym¬ bolized, and then analyzed more fully, with the proposed arrangement and notation. — d. From Campbell's Ode to the Rainbow : >-> ZA CO « .? 05 P-i O ^ to ^ cs O zz ST'S « ^5 a CONN. SCBJ. FRED. A I ask not' Philosophy v proud 0 to teach v me v c4 > (2 V ) < 1° (that) That fill’st ei - skv v i—< O • © o fformative. 44* 3 1 Vj a a bC 55 1 0 a. 4-* c3 2 jO bC .3 4-9 i\ &v 0 croc}) £ a p \e Ad | K a vai V ottX 0 s € dp id cr a VT epy 0 Xdp 0 0 ev 9 e e i ea KfX j ev V a a Oe e iy T re V y a 0 <3 r 1 es e (pe ire de i i di c}hX 8d r V , X cr K 0 ei pat h irnp Xt0 i 0 yev jo a A pi>\ 0 I ert 1 V tv 7t ya 1 V - / 0 T S V£|A 0 Qi T a rn vs 1 70 pvmn vog 4>dL rn tv n act . See 137 c, 109. b. Where consonants or the rough breathing are not specially noticed, it will be understood that they have the prevalent sounds of the corre¬ sponding letters in English : thus, (3, 8, £, A, p, v, t r, p, r, cp, v}/,', pro- nounced like b, d, z, l, m, n, p, r, t, ph, ps, h, in bud, zeal, phantom, rap, hops; y, k, hard, like g, k, in keg; 0, £, cr, sharp, like th, x, s, in sixth. The smooth breathing simply marks the absence of the rough.. c. To avoid confusion, the terms protracted and abrupt arc used below to mark what are commonly called, in English orthoepy, long and shot t sounds; and the term ictus (Lat., stroke, beat), to denote that stress of the voice which in English we usually call accent. Any secondary ictus needed in long words, may commonly be placed as their formation and the ear seem to require.] 1. Ancient Greek Method, d. The pronunciation of every lan¬ guage, from the very laws of language, is in a continual process of change, more or less rapid. And in respect to the Greek, there is full internal evidence, both that its pronunciation had materially changed before its orthography became fixed, and that it has materially changed since. Therefore, as there is no art of embalming sounds, the ancient method can now only be inferred, and, in part, with much uncertainty. For the probable pronunciation of the simple vowels, see 107. (e) In the diph¬ thongs, the sounds of the two elements seem originally to have been sim¬ ply combined, and uttered with a single impulse of the voice. But the mo le of representing Greek words in Latin (92 b) shows that, in some diphthongs, one of these sounds was early lost or became obscure, (f) The consonants seem, in general, to have been pronounced like the cor¬ responding letters in English ; however, resembling the German guttu¬ ral ch more than the English lc, and doubled or combined consonants being both sounded. —For probabilities respecting the details of the An¬ cient Method, see “History of the Greek Alphabet and Pronunciation,” by Professor Sophocles ; from whose Romaic Grammars, the following statement of Method 2 has been chiefly condensed. It shows how greatly the Greek, like the English, has been affected by the precession of vowels. 2. Modern Greek Method, g. Vowels: a like a.\ in father; but after the sound of i, more like a in peculiarity: t or at a little longer than e in men: t, q, q, ti, ot, v, or vt, like i in machine: o or co nearly as o in obey : ov like oo in moon. In av, tu, qv, wv, the v has the sound of p be¬ fore P, y, 8, 1, A, p, v, p, or a vowel; but otherwise, that of c{>: cpevyio, avros, pronounced v, or the article ; as tv Tipq. TABLES.-PRONUNCIATION. 118 § 79. pron. en-diml) : 4> nearly as / (a little softer) : x like the German ch. See a, b. As in English, a consonant doubled is sounded but once. i. The rough breathing is silent; and the quantity of a vowel is not considered. The ictus is placed according to the written accent. A pro¬ clitic- is pronounced as if a part of the word which it precedes ; and an enclitic , as if a part of the word which it follows. The accent of an en¬ clitic is only regarded when the preceding word is accented on the ante¬ penult : thus XeXe/crat p .01 has a secondary ictus on Krai. 3. English Method, j. Modern scholars have pronounced the Greek variously ; commonly according to the analog}' of their respective lan¬ guages. Hence the following method, though not closely approaching the ancient, has been extensively used in England and this country : k. Simple Vowels: ip v, cj, like e in mete, u in tube, o in note (tvtttt}- auv) : e, o, like e in let, o in dot; but before another vowel, or at the end of a word, like e in real and o in go ( ev, Xeovre, to) : a and i, in general, like a and i in English ; when protracted, like a in hate, i in pine; when abrupt, like a in hat, i in pin. At the end of a word, i is always pro¬ tracted ; but a, except in monosyllables, takes the sound of a in era: clvtl, pia, ra. If a or i receives the ictus, whether primary or secondary, and is followed by a single consonant or £, it is protracted in the penult, but abrupt in any preceding syllable (except that a is here protracted, if tl e next vowel is e or i before another vowel): ifa • rrarepa , saracpiXecv • rapuas. See c. — P affects an abrupt vowel preceding, in the same way as r in English : appa, 'E ppys, cpvis. l. Diphthongs: ci like the affirmatively; ci, ci in height; oi, oi in oil; vt, ui in quiet; av, au in haul; tv and t,v, cu in feud, Europe; ov and wv, OU in thou : eiovlai, like x, ps, in ox, lips; but, when initial, like z, s (fltp^ys, fi'xv)- Of two initial consonants which cannot both be pronounced with ease, the first is silent ; a consonant doubled is sounded but once ; and p is pronounced like p : pva, nTyaaoj, eppca. See a, b. n. In dissyllables, the ictus is on the penult; in polysyllables , on the penult if lung in quantity, but otherwise on the antepenult. 4. “ Continental Method.” o. Many of our scholars prefer a method of pronouncing Greek more like that which prevails, though with much variety, upon the continent of Europe. This method, in the details of which there is not yet full agreement, appears to be taking, in our country, a form like the following : ]>. Simple Vowels: d, a, like a in father, fast (nearly as in man) ; q, €, e in fete, men (or a in machine ); t, i, i in machine, pin (or direct) ; to, o, o in hope, hop (or obey ) ; v, v, u in tube, duet, or yet closer, like the French u. Cf. 107. The distinction between vowels long and short by nature should be carefully observed : irpayya • by, be • ‘’Tpts • Xbyuv ■ ovs, avbs. q. Diphthongs: at like the affirmative ay (by some closer, like ai in aisle) ; et, ci in height; oi, oi in oil; vi, uee in queen; av, ou in loud; ev, tjv, eu in feud; ov, cov, ou in soup : elbincu, avrov, IA. STOix^ia elements , ypdpp.aTa letters ; iirlcrypLa. 4>a)vr]€VTa vowels : [Spaxia short, yaKpd long, Sixpova doubtful, SLcova consonants : TjpCa>va semivowels, hypd liquids, (r&fupwva diTr\d double consonants; dcj>o>va mutes, \fi\d smooth, yeaa mid¬ dle, 8aaia rough. 2vXXaPq syllable ; XP 0V0 s quantity. p. Ilvtupaxa breathings: 8aav rough, \pTXbv smooth. IlpocrujSicu ( tovol ) accents : o|eta acute, (3apela grave, irepLairwyevy circumflex. 2ny- jxa l points : reXeLa GTiyyy period, yicry aTiyyy colon, viroGTi.yyy comma.] y. ’ETTMOAOriA. Tct xou Xoyov o-Toixda Xtyovrcu &Se • [/cXtra] dp0pov, ovopa, €tti0£tov, dvxcovvpia, pfj j.j. 0 . • [a/cXtra] tmppqpa, irpo0€cn.s, Mvqpa. [KXicris, erdy/epterts, av^vyia.] 8. Too ovopaxos at irTiotms dvoyd^ovTat. [euAetat] op0rj t) ovopao-TUcfi, kXtitik^, [wXdycai] ycviK^, Soxiiof), cuTLaxiKq (179) • rd 88 rpla yevt) (174), apcrevtKOV, 0qXvKov, ovStrcpov • [rd 88 rpia irpocranra, TrpwTOv, Svuxepov, xptxov.] Tpt7rXous 8’ iarlv dxxadrws 6 dpi0pos, SyXaS'rj Ivlkos, Svikos, 'irXq- Gvvxvkos (178). Too cmOexou ot (3a0pol XiyovTa t 0€xlkos, axiKal, opio"xiKTj, viroxaKxiKT), cvkxikt), irpocrxaKxiKrj, pia 88 d7raptp- 4>axos • yipos 88 too pyyaTos eari Kal y p,£xo\q (269). Ot xpovoi tov p-fj- paros \8y ovTaL u>8e (267) * cvetrxws, TrapaxaxiKos, peXXcov, [per’ oXtyov peXXcov,] aopurxos, TrapaKetpevos [?) cruyxeXiKos], tnrepcrvvxcXiKos. [Av- £r|t ^ T0 ' u viroKelyevov TideraL KaT alxiariKiriv (670). K. T6 €Trt0€TOV /cat y pexoX"?) avp,(pwvovcn tols eis A avacpepovTat ovbyacn, /card yevos, doi0pbv, tttuxtiv (504). — IIoXXtDy tCov ovopLaTivv 8 vtwv, TiOerai to eiriderov y y yeroxb 'irXq0vvxiK«s ’ eirl p.8v d\j/dxwv, ehe opoyevtov cl're 120 TABLES. GREEK RULES. § 80 . €T€po‘y€Vcov (223 a), /car’ ovSeTfpov y cpos ' eiri 88 £p\{/Cx«v, tuiv /xev opo'ye- vwv, /card to to?s dpo/xaai Koivbv yepos, tlop 88 crepoyevuv, /card rb iiriKpa- TecrTepov (496). X. H dvatjjopiKrj Xeyopcepij clvTwvupia avpLtpccvd TLpeavTrjs t|'y o xi|X€ vcp Ka.Ta "yevos /cat apiOpov /cat TrpdTrov (505). — Td crvPTaKTLKcp 88 o"yrjp,aTL 6 /ca- Xetrat £X£is r) &J>eX(;is, <-Xk€tcu rj apTUPvpua et’s Tijp irTcoaLP tov ijyovpLevov • aPTLCTTpocpus 8’ 8oQ' ore /cat ij aPTWPvp.la ^Xkci to rjyov/xtpop (554 a, c). p. Ovo/aaTa, rd /ah irpos to auTO TTpoo^wirov 4] irpa^ypa dpacpepopLepa, opoiOTTTdxws TldevTat • tovto 88 ovoparcov 7rpdcr0ecris /caXetrat (393). Ta oe irpos 8taopa aXXt o aXXo viroTauaeTaL eiri -yeviK^s (435 a). v. TeviKT] avvTaacrovTat. eiriOeTa Kai prjpLaTa tcl irXt]pt6cr€(»)S (414), pe0€- £e«S (424), ep-rmpias, empeXeias, pv^p-qs (432), 4m , n>x£as (426 s), ei8o€s (405 b) crrjpLavTiKa, /cat tcl tovtols havda • irpos 88 8k tQ>p iiriO^TWV, tcl eis -ikos XrjyoPTa (444), ra e/c tov d- CTeprjTiKOv crvpOeTa (436 b), /cat ra irapa- 0€TiKd (406 s), tcl owytcpiTuea St]\a8}] Kai vir€p0€TU> atTiaTiKfjS (472 g), 8ia "y£viKT ]9 (410 s). ( SoTiKfjs (469), erat epcirpod^TOV re /cat airpodeTOV. To dp'yavoy 8l ov yipeTai tl, 'O Tpoiros /cad’ 8p yipeTai tl, To 8iac|>opds perpov To Kara ti To Trocrov Ttnrov \pbvov T6 ‘iroo'bv iiri aPTaXXayQp iKcpeperaL ota Sotik^s (466 a). 8lcl 8otikt]s (466). 8lcl 8otikt]s (467). 8lcl 8otikt)s (468). 8l aiTiaTtKfjs (481). Sl aiTiaTtKfjs (482). Slcl ■yeviKfjs (431). t. Tt) opurTLKT], ds 06tikov tl Kai Pt^aiov irapLCTTcoari, irpeireL to diro- t}>aTiKbv OT • ra? s 88 Xonrais twv c'YKXio-ewv, a? ovk 6ptlos ti 8v 7raptcrracrt, aXXa ti viroTiOepevov r) irpoo-Taorcrdpcvov r) cvktov, irp8ireL to MH (731 a). END OF TABLES. INTRODUCTION. 81. The Ancient Greeks were divided into three principal races : the Ionic, of which the Attic was a branch, the Doric, and the yEolic. These races spoke the same general language, bat with many dialectic peculiarities. This was one of that great Indo-European family of languages, to which the chief tongues of India, Persia, and Europe have belonged, and to which the highest rank among the languages of the world has commonly been assigned ; and even in this family, it has usually been placed first in respect to beauty of form and of embalmed literature. Its grammar pre¬ sents striking and beautiful analogies to the Sanskrit, Latin, and other languages of this family. 82. The Ancient Greek Language (commonly called sim¬ ply the Greek) has accordingly been divided by grammarians into four principal Dialects, the Attic, Ionic, Doric, and JEolic. Of these the Attic and Ionic were far the most refined, and had far the greatest unity within themselves. The Doric and /Eolic were not only much ruder, but, as the dialects of races widely extended and united by no common bond of literature, abounded in local diversities. Some of the varieties of the Doric or Aolic were separated from each other by dif¬ ferences scarcely less marked than those which distinguished them in common from the other dialects. Of the Aolic, the principal varieties were the Lesbian, the Boeotian, and the Thessalian. The Doric, accord¬ ing as it was more or less removed from the Attic and Ionic, was char¬ acterized as the stricter or the milclcr Doric : the former prevailing in the Laconic, Tarentine, Cretan, Cyrenian, and some other varieties ; the lat¬ ter in the Corinthian, Syracusan, Megarian, Delphian, Rhodian, and some others. 83. The Greek colonies upon the coast of Asia Minor and the adjacent islands, from various causes, took the lead of the mother country in refinement; and the first, development of Greek literature which secured permanence for its productions was among the Asiatic Jonians. This development was Epic Poetry, and we have, doubtless, its choicest strains remaining to us in the still unsurpassed Homeric poems. The language of these poems, often called Epic and Homeric , is the old Ionic, with those modifications and additions which a wandering bard 6 RF.V. GIL INTRODUCTION’. 122 § 813. would insensibly gather up, as he sang from city to city, and those poetic licenses which are always allowed to early minstrelsy, when as yet the language is unfixed and critics are unknown. Epic Poetry was followed in Ionia by the Elegiac, of which Callinus of Ephesus and Mimnermus of Colophon were two great masters ; and this again by Ionic Prose, in which the two principal names are Herodotus and Hippocrates, who chose this refined dialect, although themselves of Doric descent. In distinction from the Old Ionic of the Epic poets, the language of the Elegiac poets may be termed the Middle Ionic, and that of the prose-writers, the New Ionic. 84. The next dialect which attained distinction in litera¬ ture was the iEolic of Lesbos, in which the lyric strains of Alcseus and Sappho were sung. But its distinction was short¬ lived, and we have scarce any remains of the dialect except some brief fragments. There arose later among the Mtolians of Bceotia another school of Lyric Poetry, of which the most illustrious ornament was Pindar ; who is commonly said, how¬ ever, but loosely, to have written in the Doric. Writing for the public festivals of Greece, Pindar rejected the peculiar¬ ities of his rude native tongue, and wrote in a dialect of which the basis consisted of words and forms common to the Doric and fEolic, but which was greatly enriched from the now universally familiar Epic. 85 . Meanwhile, the Athenians, a branch of the Ionian race, were gradually rising to such political and commercial impor¬ tance, and to such intellectual pre-eminence among the states of Greece, that their dialect, the Attic, adorned by such drama¬ tists as Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, Aristophanes, and Menander, by such historians as Thucydides and Xenophon, by such philosophers as Plato and Aristotle, and by such ora¬ tors as Lysias, kEschines, and Demosthenes, became at length the standard language of the Greeks, and, as such, was adopted by the educated classes in all the states. It became the gen¬ eral medium of intercourse, and, with a few exceptions, the universal language of composition. Its diffusion was especially promoted by the conquests of the Macedonians, who adopted it as their court language. a. As its use extended, it naturally lost some of its peculiarities, and received many additions ; and thus diffused and modified, it ceased to be regarded as the language of a particular state, and received the appellation of the Common Dialect or Language. The Attic and Common dialects, therefore, do not differ in any essential feature, and may properly be re¬ garded, the one as the earlier and pure, the other as the later and impure, form of the same dialect. In this dialect, either in its earlier or later form, we find written nearly the whole that remains to us of ancient Greek literature. It may claim, therefore, to be regarded, notwithstanding a few splendid compositions in the other dialects, as the national language of Greece ; and its acquisition should form the commencement and the basis of Greek study. DIALECTS. 123 §» 7 . b. The pure Attic has been divided into three periods : the Old, used by Thucydides, the Tragedians, and Aristophanes ; the Middle , used by Xenophon, Isocrates, and Plato ; and the New, used by Demosthenes, and the other Orators of his time, and the later Comedians. The period of the Common dialect may be regarded as commencing with the subjection of Athens to the Macedonians ; and the great Aristotle, as the connecting link in the transition. o. The exceptions to the universality acquired by the Attic dialect are found almost entirely in poetry. Here the later writers felt constrained to imitate the language of the great early models. The Epic poet never felt at liberty to depart from the dialect of Homer. Indeed, the old Epic language was regarded by subsequent poets in all departments as a sacred tongue, the language of the gods, from which they might enrich their several compositions. The iEolic and Doric held such a place in Lyric Poetry, that even upon the Attic stage an 2Eolo-Doric hue was given to the lyric portions by the use of the long a, which formed so marked a characteristic of those dialects, and which, by its openness of sound, was so favorable to musical effect. The Dramatic was the only department of poetry in which the Attic was the standard dialect. d. The culture of the Athenians was so liberal, and their intercourse with other states so extensive, that not only Attic poets, but even prose- writers, felt at liberty to borrow some forms of expression which belonged more strictly to other dialects. 86. Of the Doric dialect, in proportion to its wide extent, we have very scanty remains ; and of most of its varieties our knowledge is derived from passages in Attic writers, from mon¬ uments, and from the works of grammarians. In Greece it¬ self, it seems scarcely to have been applied to any other branch of literature than Lyric Poetry. In the more refined Dorian colonies of Italy and Sicily, it was employed in Philosophy by the Pythagoreans (Archytas, Timseus, Ac.), in Mathematics by the great Archimedes, in Comedy by Epicharmus and his successors, and in Pastoral Poetry (which was confined to this dialect) by Theocritus, Bion, and Moschus. 87 . In this grammar, an attempt is made to exhibit first and distinctly, under each head, the language in its standard form, that is, the Attic and the purer Common Greek ; and afterwards to specify the important dialectic peculiarities. It will not, however, be understood that everything which is ascribed to one of the dialects prevails in that dialect through¬ out, or is found in no other. a. This applies especially to the Doric and vEolic, which, with great variety within themselves (§ 82), are closely akin to each other ; so that some (as Maittaire) have treated of both under the general head of Doric ; and in the following grammar some forms will be simply mentioned as belonging to one of these dialects, that also occur in the other. By the term .Eolic, as employed by grammarians, is commonly denoted fhe cultb vated Alolic of Lesbos ; as the term Ionic is usually confined to the lan- INTRODUCTION. 124 guage spoken (though, according to Herodotus, with four varieties) by the lonians of Asia Minor and the adjacent islands. b. Grammar flourished among the Greeks only in the decline of their language, and the Greek grammarians usually treated the dialects with little precision. Whatever they found in the old Ionic of Homer that seemed to them more akin to the later-cultivated iEolic, Doric, or even Attic, than to the new Ionic, they did not hesitate to ascribe to those dia¬ lects. Even in the common language, whatever appeared to them irreg¬ ular or peculiar, they usually referred to one of the old dialects, terming the regular form kolvov, common , though perhaps this form was either wholly unused, or was found only as a dialectic variety. On the other hand, some critics used the epithet kolvus as a term of reproach, designat¬ ing by it that which was not pure Attic. 88. The wide diffusion of the Greek by the Macedonian conquerors, and subsequently the conquest of the Greek world by the Romans, much affected the purity of the later language, which became especially degenerate in the Byzantine period. a. The Macedonians, who had previously spoken a rude and semi- barbarous dialect of the Greek, retained and diffused some of the peculi¬ arities of their native tongue. These are termed Macedonic, or, some¬ times, from Alexandria, the principal seat of Macedonian, and indeed of later Greek culture, Alexandrine. Words and forms borrowed from the language of the Romans are called Latinisms. b. The Greek, as the common language of the civilized world, was em¬ ployed in the translation of the Jewish Scriptures, and the composition of the Christian. When so employed by native Jews, it naturally received a strong Hebrew coloring ; and, as a Jew speaking Greek was called 'VjWrjvujT'qs (from eWrjvLfoo, to speak Greek), this form of the language has been termed the Hellenistic (or by some the Ecclesiastical) dialect. Its peculiarities naturally passed more or less into the writings of the fa¬ thers, and through the diffusion of Christianity exerted a great general influence. c. From the very laws of speech, the Greek was affected, more or less, by the language of each new country into which it penetrated. Of neces¬ sity, therefore, notwithstanding the careful compositions of such scholars as Arrian, Lucian, and .Mian, and the precepts of a class of critics, called Attieists, it was continually becoming more and more impure. 89 . Since the destruction of the Eastern Empire by the Turks, the fusion of the Byzantine and Ecclesiastical Greek with the popular dialects of the different districts and islands of Greece has produced the Modern Greek, or, as it is often called, by a name derived from the Roman Empire in the East, the Romaic. This language has been especially cultivated and refined within the present century, and has now a large body of original and translated literature. The Greek, therefore, in its various forms, has never ceased to be a living language ; and it offers to the student a series of compositions, not only including many of the highest pro¬ ductions of genius, but extending through a period of nearly three thousand vears. “ * * * v BOOK 1. ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. ’E i;evpov avrois. rpajujudriou re avvdeaeis Prometheus of Aeschylus. CHAPTER I. CHARACTERS. 90. The Greek language is written with twenty-four letters , tivo breathings, three accents , four marks of punctuation, and a few other characters. 1. For the Letters (called the Alphabet from Alpha, Beta, just as we speak of “ the A, B, C ”), see Table, § 1. Remarks. 1. Double Forms. Sigma final is written ?; not final , a : as, aracns- Many editors, without authority from manu¬ scripts, use the final form at the end of any word compounded with another: as, nposeisoa 1871. 4 a. Sometimes the Greek letters, like our own, denote ordinal numbers, according to their own order in the alphabet. In this way the books of Homer are marked : as, ’IAtdSos A, Z, fi, The Iliad , Books 1, 6, 24. 126 CHARACTERS. § 91 . b. Van, in one of its forms (S'), resembles tlie ligature for or. Hence some editors confound them, and employ 2T, as the large form of Yau, to denote 6. c. In some old inscriptions, numbers are written by using the initials of the old'Ios one (§ 25), llevre five, Ae/ca ten, lie Karov (98 b) a hundred, XtXioL a thousand, and Mi fiioi ten thousand. II drawn aronnd another numeral multiplies it by live. Thus, p^MXXfcf^AAIII = 62,176. 92. 4. Roman Letters. By the side of the Greek letters in § 1, are placed the Roman letters which take their place Avlien Greek words are transferred into Latin or English: as, KvkXqo\Js Cyclops. a. The letter y becomes n, when followed by another palatal ; but, otherwise, g (137 c) : as, ayyeXos, Lat. angelus, Eng. angel, cvyKoirf] syncope, Xapvy£ larynx, A t^lva iEglna. b. The diphthong ai becomes oe ; ot, cc : €i, l or e (before a consonant almost always i) ; ou, u ; and vi, yi : as, and X, the double consonant Sk, and the sign for long o, O, naturally placing them at the end. In distinction, the short o was now termed "0 ficpbv, small 0; and the long o/O fieya, great 0. The names’ of the other new letters were formed by simply adding a vowel to aid in sounding them : thus, ?, Xt, as, in English, be, cc. d. In the softening of the language, the labial breathing F, and also V and which weie only rougher forms of K and X, fell into disuse, and these letters were retained only as numeral characters ; F and 9 in their proper places in the alphabet, but f") at the end. The Latin alphabet, which ours here follows, dropped but retained the other two, F and Q, in their proper places. San has also been named 'Zayiri (150 a), as the S which partook of the form of tt. This falling out, its place in the alphabetic order was occupied by the other sibilant X, and the place of X again by 3. e. F (also named from its form the Digamma, i. e. the double Gamma) is still found upon some inscriptions and coins, and performs an important office in the explanation of the forms of the language. Its restoration by Bentley to the Homeric poems has removed so many apparent hiatuses and irregularities of metre, that we cannot doubt its existence in the time of Homer, though apparently even then beginning to lose its power. It has been called the JEolic Digamma, as longest retained by the iEolians. f. The alphabet was completed, according to tradition, by the poet Simonides of Ceos, about the time of the Persian War. In its complete form it was first adopted by the lonians (S3), and hence termed lorn kIl § 100 . FIGURES. 129 ypappara. Ill Attic inscriptions it was first used in the archonship of Euclides, B. C. 403. The alphabet of twenty-one letters, which the Athenians had before used, was termed, in distinction, ’A ttlkcl ypdppo.ra. g. The Greeks first wrote, like the Phoenicians, from right to left ; and then alternately from left to right and right to left (as it was termed, fiov, &c. In the progress of the language, these inserted consonants extensively dropped out, and the more rapid method by contraction prevailed. a. In some cases, vowels were simply omitted to prevent hiatus, or to promote rapidity of speech. b. Compare, in Latin, the use and omission of v in the complete tenses, as amavissem and amassem ; of h in the Dative plural, as -abns and -is REV. OR. 6* I 130 ORTHOGRAPHY AND ORTHOEPY. FIGURE.!. § 100 . in Declension 1, -obus and -is in Dec. 2, -ibus and -is in Dec. 3 ; of r in the Genitive pi. and in the Infinitive, as -arum and -um, -oricm and -um, -erum, in Dec. 1, 2, 5 ; -um, -uum, in Dec. 3, 4 ; amare, amari y rcgcrc, regi, in the Infinitive. 101 . To give to the discourse a proper flow and rhythm, especially in poetry, syllables are lengthened or shortened, united or resolved. a. Syllables are lengthened by changing short vowels to long, or by adding consonants ; and are shortened by changing long vowels to short, or by dropping consonants. 102. To prevent undesirable combinations of consonants, or modes of beginning and ending words, letters are dropped, added, changed, and transposed. a. The names be’o .v ending in -thesis and -ceresis are derived from com¬ pounds of Tidrjiu, to put, and aipeu, to take. b. In applying the figures, the common form of a word is sometimes taken as the standard, when this may itself have undergone some change from the original. Thus &7r is considered an apocopate form of curb, from , though a7r may perhaps be the earlier form. Compare the Lat. ab. 103. Figures (see § 6). Addition and Subtraction, a. Pro¬ thesis (t rpo, before ; less properly Prosthesis) adds one or more let¬ ters at the beginning of a word ; Epenthesis (eVrt, to, eV in), in the middle ; and Paragoge {napaywyg, a bringing beside ), at the end: as, ydey heri, yesterday ; dvpos avbpos (18); ei. eifico, libo, to pour ; narepos: rrarpos , patris (18) ; ava dv, up. d. One form of Apocope has received the special name of Apostrophe or Elision (117). 104. Exchange. Metathesis (perd. among, interchangeably), or Transposition, changes the order of letters; and Antithesis (avri, in¬ stead of ) substitutes one letter for another : as, ebapOov edpudov, racra-a) rarTO). a. When one letter thus becomes the same with an adjoining letter, the change is called Assimilation : as, ovv\eyu ervXXe'ycv, to collect. 105. Union , &c. a. Synaeresis (avv, together) unites two vow¬ els (and thus two syllables) into one; and Diaeresis {bid, apart), or Kesolution, divides one vowel into two: as, voos vovs, mind; nais irais, boy. b. Synaeresis is divided into Contraction, Crasis, and Synizesis (117). c. Systole (avaroXg, a drawing in) shortens a long vowel; and Diastole (§i aaroXg, a drawing out) lengthens a short one : as, iraipos erapos, comrade , get/os £(ivos, stranger. For Precession, see 107, 113s $ 107. VOWELS.-PRECESSION. 131 CHAPTEE III. VOWELS. 106 . The Creek has five simple vowels, and seven diphthongs. Each of the simple vowels may be either long or short, and each of the diphthongs may have either a long or short prepositive, or first vowel. a. Of three vowels, the short and long sounds are represented by the same letters (a, a ; i, t; v, v) ; but of the other two, whose long sounds occur far more frequently, by different letters (e, rj ; o, co). b. When speaking of letters, and not of sounds, we say that the Greek has seven vowels; and call e and o the short vowels , because they always represent short sounds, y and go the long vowels , because they always represent long sounds, and a, i, and v the doubtful vow¬ els , because their form leaves it doubtful whether the sound is long or short. 107. There is strong evidence, that, in general, these vowels were pronounced nearly as follows : a like a in far, fast (not as in. fate) ; 77 . e, like e in they, then (not as in mete ) ; t like i in machine, pin (not as in pine ) ; co, 0 , like 0 in note, obey ; v like u in rule, full (afterwards becoming closer, more like u in tube, or the still closer French u or German u). They may hence be thus placed upon a scale of precession or attenuation. Entire Openness. a Scale of attenuation the tongue- ^ Least Opening. Sea l e of off °’ w at teni!atjo n by the lij os. Least Opening. a. In general, 1 and v are termed the close, and the others the open vow¬ els ; but a is more open than e and o, and 1 is somewhat closer than v. b. There is a strong tendency, in the progress of language, towards the attenuation, or closer pronunciation, of the open, especially the long open vowels (99). This chalige would be represented on the scale above by a moving forward of the vowel from the left to the right ; and hence has been called precession (priecessio, going forward). Thus the open a of the old Greek became t] in the relined Ionic ; and this again in the Modern Greek has passed (as also v, a, ot, and vi) into the closer sound of 1 . 132 D i I’ll Til ON GS. S V LL ABICATIOX. § 103. X08. In the Greek diphthongs, the voice always passes from a more open to a closer sound ; and the subjunctive, or last vowel, is alwavs i or v. a. A short prepositive left time for the full utterance of the subjunc¬ tive vowel, and the diphthong was then termed proper, as really combin¬ ing two sounds ; but a long prepositive nearly or quite crowded out the sound of the subjunctive, and the diphthong was then termed improper, as though diphthongal only in appearance. b. These combinations can be only seven, or, counting separately the proper and improper diphthongs, fourteen. Of these, cov scarcely occurs, except in the Ionic dialect. X09. After a long, 77 , and co, the subjunctive 1 so lost its sound, that it was at last merely written beneath the pre¬ positive, if this was a small letter, and was then termed Iota subscript (subscriptus, written beneath). With capitals, it still remains in the line, but is not sounded. It is not represented in Latin, except that, in a few compounds of eg becomes oe. Thus, r, ~Ai8r]s or a8rjs Hades, Opf/ao-a Tliressa, t Hi or where, ’£ 2 181) or eg8r) ode, song ; but Tpayeg8Ui tragoedia, tragedy. a. Editors vary in the use of the 1 subscript, from different views of ety¬ mology, &c. : as, contract infinitive m, aav or ripgv, adverbial datives ott] or ottt], ’AOrjvriai. or 'AOrjvrio'i.. So some have improperly written tepr/va, Trecpyua (40, as if made directly from epaivw, instead of the root epav -), and other like forms. b. The 1 in these diphthongs appears to have been either written in the line or (often) wholly omitted, till about the twelfth century, when it began to be written beneath. 110. In diphthongs, except the three just mentioned (a, rj , and eg), the breathings and accents are written over the second vowel, and thus often mark the union of the two vowels : as, avrrj herself, but dvrl) cry; r]v8a he spoke , but rjvere he shouted; A tpcou (a) Hsemon, but "Al8t]s («). a. If two vowels which might form a diphthong are pronounced sep¬ arately, the second is commonly marked, as above, with a diaeresis ; though the place of a breathing, accent, or 1 often renders this needless, and it is then omitted by some : as in avrij, A rjifoLgriv (109). b. In the table (4), the vowels, simple and compound, are divided into classes, according to the simple sound which is their sole or leading ele¬ ment, as A sounds, &c. ; and into orders, according to the length of this sound, or its combination with other sounds, as short vowels, &c. Tow¬ els of the same class are termed cognate ; and those of the same order, co¬ ordinate. 111. Syllabication. In Greek, a word lias as many syl¬ lables as it has simple vowels or diphthongs : nodeae has four. a. The last syllable in a word is termed the ultima (ultimus, last) ; the last but one, the pcnidtima ; or penult (pene, almost) ; and the last but two, the antepcnultima or antepenult (ante, before). § 114. EUPHONIC CHANGES. PRECESSION. 133 b. In the syllabication of a word, any consonant between two vowels is now joined by most editors with the latter ; and so even two or more consonants, — unless the first is a liquid, or the same with the second, or a smooth mute before its cognate rough, when it is joined with the former vowel (except in the case of |iv) : as, pp-^kape-Oa, a-arpa-Tmo, i-pv'q- aQr\v • but £p-yov, dv-rpov, dy~xi (137 c), ltttos, rda-aw, Bd.\>xos. c. Words joined by crasis or elision are here regarded as a single word : as, aX-X’ o!-5' '6-tl • so, in composition, e-ird-veipc {£ttL, ava, eipu). But the elements of a compound word not so joined are here treated as separate words : as, avv-eicr-eipi. 112 . A vowel preceded by a consonant is said to be impure (impurus, mixed , sc. with the consonant sound) ; otherwise, it is said to be pure. a. The same distinction is made in affixes beginning with a vowel ; and even the word itself and its stem are termed pure or impure, accord¬ ing as these affixes are preceded by a vowel or consonant. Thus, in avos (14) the o and affix cs are pure, and the same term, by an extension of its use, is applied to the word and its stem av -; while in yvrrds (17) the o and os are impure, and the word itself and its stem yvn- are so termed. 113. The Greek vowels are subject to a great number of Euphonic Changes, which may be referred, for the most part, to two great heads, the Precession of Vowels, and the Union of Syllables. a. These changes, besides their agreeable effect, diminish the effort in speaking, by reducing the volume of sound employed, or by preventing hiatus and lessening the number of syllables. I. PRECESSION OF VOWELS. 114. The great tendency in Greek to the attenuation of vowel sounds shows itself, 1.) In the interchange of vowels. a. Precession especially affects «, as the most open of the vowels, changing it, when short, to e and o ; and, when long, to tj, and sometimes to to. b. Hence, these three vowels may be regarded as kindred, and are often interchanged in the formation and inflection of words. Thus, in the verbs rpe-rru to turn, arpeepw to twist, we And the stem in three forms, rpa-r- rpeir- rpoir-, arpeup- errpeep- arpocp-, as in the Eng. speak, spake, spoken, or in the equivalent Germ., where precession is carried still further, sprcche, spricht, sprach, gcsprochen; and in prpyvdpi to break, we find the forms pay- ppy- puy- (cf. frango, fregi). The change extends to diphthongs : thus, in ireidio to persuade, the forms tt€l8- and itolO- ; cnrei'du to hasten, enrovdr) haste ; pecroyaLa and pLeaoyeia, interior . c. This interchange is also illustrated by the connecting vowels in- 134 VOWELS. -PRECESSION. § H4. serted in the infection of words. Thus, in Dec. 1, the connecting vowel is a, but in Dec 2, o, for which in one case € appears (12). In the In¬ dicative active, the connecting vowel in the Aorist and Perfect is a (pass¬ ing, however, into € in the 3d pers. sing. ; compare the Imperative Xvaov) ; while in the Present, Imperfect, and Future, it is o before a liquid, but ctherwise e. So, in the Aor. optative, we find loth ai and €ia. See 35. cl. The change of e to the closer i abounds especially in stems of the third declension : as, 7 roAe- 7 t6\is. city. Cf. rjvo and poet. T, aa a. d. In the following general rules, a, c, and rj are regarded as including the cognate diphthongs in i. For the mode of writing i, when contracted with a long, rj, or a>, or absorbed in these, see 109. e. In the examples below, and in others similarly planted, the letters or syllables which receive the change are inclosed in parentheses, and the result of the change follows in full-face type ; so that, in reading the forms of the word before and after the change, we first omit the full-face letters, and then the letters in the parentheses ; thus, p(cu)acrros is an abridged mode of representing that “ ui becomes a, as yd lotos pharos.” 119. General Rules. I. Two vowels which can form a diphthong unite without further change : as, y£v(£i')e. t 7)x(oLj°i (19) ; p{aL)aoTos easiest, Qp(r)L)r\ooa, \(&l)lootos best, v4k(vl)v. (Epic), y^p(ui)a.i (so Thiersch, Bekker, Kiihner in his latest grammar, &c., while others have written yypq, as if l were absorbed). 120. II. (a) a, before an E sound (§4), absorbs it; but, (h) after an E or another A sound, is it¬ self absorbed, (c) a, or (d) 77 , with an O sound, forms co. Thus, (a) rLp.(ae)d 7 rtg(dei)a, Tiy{ari)a.TC, TL/x(ari)a (42) ; (b) 7eV(ea)r|, ytp(aa)a (19), \u(«u)fl, Xt'(yadr) (37) ; (c) rt,(x(da)w/xer, ria(dw)w, ri/x(doi)w, 136 VOWELS. RULES OF CONTRACTION. § 120 . Tt/j.(aov)(a (42), -)7x(oa)w, yp(ica)(a (19), (ooalcoros (17 ; while, in the Nom. sing., odas becomes oOs by an absorption of the a, or by precession from the Dor. cDs) ; (cl) dyX(6r])(tiTe (42), 8i8(ori)d> (45), v(r]o)oi86s toothless. Cf. Lat. lyr(ae)a, am(ae)are, am(ae)abam, am(ao)o, c(oa)ogo, am(ai)ate (116). e. In Dec. 1, and the plural and dual of the common Dec. 2, contrac¬ tion imitates the forms of uncontracted words ; but in the Attic Dec. 2 (200), it has to throughout : as, xP V(T ^ a )‘H an( l 8arX(6rj)r\, -tjs, -rj, -r)v, -at, &c. (23 ; cf. (iidri, 15) ; car (la) a (16) ; dyyp(aa)o> (22). f. After a vowel, ea commonly becomes a ; as Heipai(£a)aL (220 e), 'Hpa- K\e(ea )d (19) ; but adjectives in -ir)s and -vrjs vary in the neuter pi. : as, from vyL-rjs sound, eiKpin/s clever, vyi(ea)a and -fj, evcpv(ta) a, and -fj. g. In the purer Attic, t] takes the place of u, in the contract forms of four every-clay verbs : rreivdw to hunger, Sixf/dw to thirst, xpaw to supply need, and faw to live: as, Treu^det)*}, xp(de) r\a6ai. Add Kvaco to scratch, ayau to smear, and i paw to rub. • h. In the liquid Aorist, and in the Subjunctive and Imperative of verbs in -pi, ae and arj commonly become rj, unless t or p precedes : as, ecprjva, lirldva (152) ; iaT(drj)ri i , 8p(ari)a, iVr(ae)T] (45). i. When a long is contracted with an 0 sound, there is usually inserted before the « an e, which, however, is not treated in the accentuation as a distinct syllable (cf. 117 b): as, vaos (vus) veds (16), Mei/eX(aos)€ws, ’A rpei- 5(do)ca> (197c). So sometimes, chiefly in the Ion. (135 a, 322), when the a is short. 121 . III. (a) c€ becomes ei. (b) e or o, with o, forms ov ; but (c) with other O sounds is absorbed, (d) In other combinations not already given (119, 120), e is absorbed. Thus, (a) 0iX(ee)ct, (f>iX(lei)tl (42), 7roX(ees)as (19), KX(eies)ei$ (207) ; (b) (pL - X(eo)ovp.ai, d7]\(oe)ov (42), ’O7r(oets)ovs (17), v(oos) ous (16) ; (c) 0tX(eu))to, (piX(eoi)oi, (piX(eov) ov, 8r]X(6 (especially before a) ; and a few other particles : as, 7 rpoedwKa irpovSwKa, irpooirTos irpovirTos (e-, ott-) • 7rpo epyov, irpoflpyov • tD ayade, cD ya6e • & avOpwire, wsOpunre • i' t TOL dpa, r/rdpa * pbvroi &v, pieurtiv • oj'rot & pa, ovrcipa • el pip 4'xotptt, et ptp yotptt • p /,/7 evpco, pip ’{jpoj • pipblirw kv, pipBerrco v • irov ecrrtr, irov ’ b<2\os • Gen. of Dec. 2, toj tbpavu • Inf. evpijv, birvCcv • for x e ' L P> bov\os, rov oupavov, evpelv, vttvovv. Ion. ^eivos, pLOvvos, voir], for ^vos, p,6uos, iroa. Att. Kopos, ovoixa • Ion. Kovpos, oiivopia • Dor. /cwpos, &vopa. Both the Dor. and Ion. have &v for ovu, therefore, contracted from ebv. d. Other examples of precession or the interchange of kindred vowels (114) are the following ; in some of which, contrary to the general law of the dialects, the Ion. has a more open sound than the Att., or the Att. than the Dor. or iEol. : Att. ’deg ’deros, ecrrld, OcLkos, Ion. aleL, alerbs, lariri, 6 u)kos • Old Att. Kctio, k\clw, Ion. and Com. Kaiw, kAcuw • Ion. r/>d* HO VOWELS. § 130. 7 ru, /jJyados, aeca-fSpir), dppuceu, Att. spenu, peyedos, peavsi, Kpvrrousi, for tpdei, KpinrTovai. The Dor. has here great variety, both employing the simple long vowels, the short vowels , ecraoov , for efpet z, dn-oSet^tf, p?t£du', rjcrcrcov • Dor. and Hp. erdpoy for ercupos * AEol. ’AAk aos, clp^aos, for AXkiuos , ap^alos. See 130 c, 131 d. a. The poets, especially the Epic, often lengthen or shorten a vowel according to the metre. A short vowel, when lengthened in Epic verse, usually passes into a cognate diphthong : as, eiXrjXovdas A. 202, irapaL B. 711, TtvoiT) E. 697, etV a. 162, for iXrjXvOas, irapa, irvorj, ii>. 135. IV. Addition or Omission. Vowels are often em¬ ployed in one dialect which are omitted in another ; and here, as elsewhere, a peculiar freedom belongs to the poets, especial¬ ly the Epic. These often add or drop a vowel, and often double a'vowel or insert the half of it (i. e. the short for the long , 103 b), for the sake of the metre, particularly in contract verbs : as, in and eivi for iv • r/Xi 0. 128, for ^Ae^ j8. 243 ; Kp'qrjvov iiXdiop, for Kprjvov ’iXbiop, A. 41, (paavOev, T][3uiU)aa, opbio, opdq.s, yeXuoovres, (poios, ii, ieiKOcn, r]i, for u Mem. 3. 3. 2, bpirabovraL Hdt. 1. 181. CHAPTER IV. CONSONANTS. 137. The Greek has eighteen consonants, represented by seventeen letters. a. In § 4, these consonants are arranged in classes according to the organs which give them their distinctive character, as labials, or lip- consonants, palatals, or palate-consonants, and linguals, or tongue- consonants. They are also arranged in orders, according to the method in which they are made by these and assisting organs, as smooth mutes, made by a simple closure of the organs ; middle mutes, so called as in¬ termediate between the smooth and rough ; rough mutes, or aspirates, in which the breath is sent strongly through the organs partially closed ; spirants (spirans, breathing), similarly formed, but with the organs more open, — one of these specially called a sibilant, from its hissing sound ; double consonants, or compound sibilants, so named as combining a mute and simple sibilant ; nasals, in which the passage through the mouth is closed, and the voice is sent through the nose ; and fluents (fluens, flowing), so named from their flowing so easily with other con¬ sonant sounds ; while the nasals and fluents, all flowing sounds of various kind and degree, are classed together as liquids ; and all the consonants, except the mutes ( dumb in comparison with the others), are called semi¬ vowels, as intermediate in vocality between the vowels and mutes. b. Consonants of the same class are termed cognate ; and those of the same order, co-ordinate. The classes are sometimes named from the let¬ ters standing at the head : as, the ir class, &e. ; so, -rr, k, and r mutes. Some use the term guttural instead of palatal, and dental instead of lin¬ gual. Euphonic, dialectic, and other interchanges of consonants are most frequent in cognates ; and then, in co-ordinates. § HO. OLD SEMIVOWELS. 143 c. The letter y performs a double office. When followed by another palatal, it is a nasal; otherwise, a middle mute. As a nasal it has n for its corresponding Roman letter ; as a middle mute, g (92 a). d. The double consonants were formed by the union of a mute with tr ; in \}/ and £ the mute preceding, and in £ the vivo, to live, (pipw fero, to bear, (pavai fari, to say, (pup fur, thief. 140. 2.) They were simply dropped: as, between two vowels, F regularly, 2 often, and N and I sometimes : as, wfov c bav ovum, egg, (Boras (3oas boves, yeveaos yeveos generis, Xveaai Xvcul lueris or lucre, e’Adcrco eXaco, pei^ova pei£oa, nXeloov nXecov more. a. So t in a few, and 8 in many words, of Dec. 3. See 207, 217. b. The two vowels were then often contracted : as, (3ods, yevovs (19), At 'j V or A9et (37), (42), ydfa (22). c. Compare the omission of corresponding letters between two vowels, in Latin :. of v in the complete tenses, as audivi audii, amavisse amasse ; of r in the Gen. pi., as nummorum nuinmum ; of m by the common CONSONANTS. OLD SEMIVOWELS. 144 § HO. metrical ecthlipsis ; and of j in such forms as reice for rejice, Virg. Ec. 3. 96. See 100 b. 141 . 3.) They were changed into common breathings. So, be¬ fore an initial vowel, F regularly, and 2 in some words : as, Fecnrepa eV7r epci vespera, evening , r ibeiv ’ibeiv video, to see, foivos oivos vinum, wink, reap tap ver, Spring; avs and vs sus, swine, aiarrjpL 'LcrrrjpL sisto, to stand, e£ sex, Six, eVrd septem, seven, «Xy sal, salt, vrrep super, over. Also F before initial p : as, Tprjywpi ppyvvpi frango, to break. a. So in the rude Laconic, the rough breathing is supposed to have taken the place of a* when dropped from the middle of some words : as, fjLuxx (gwa) for povaa MUSE, iraa ( iraa ) for 7 racra all, Ar. Lys. 1298, 995. 142. 4.) They were changed into their corresponding vowels. So F regularly, except as above ; and the others in many forma¬ tions : as, vaFs vavs navis, ship, /Sou /Sou (19); yvnv yvna (1G0 e) ; ( pavcro) (paveco (pavO) (152); r/8\uov yStcou. 7rXcIaw nXeiccv (260 s); r/lcla rjdeia (233); but for (eFl ev, sometimes v (see 217 b, 50 peco). a. Here contraction often takes place, as in most of the examples above ; and, after a liquid, e and i are sometimes transposed and con¬ tracted with the preceding vowel : as, yyyeXcra tjyyeiXa (152 b), prjrops prjTCop (153) ; xeplwj/ x^P wv > dyedwu apeLvuv (261), p,eXavIa p.£Xcuva (233). 143. The palatal spirant, of consonant I, with a con¬ sonant preceding, received yet other changes : thus, a. ) With X, it was assimilated : as. paXlov pdXXov more. Cf. Lat. melius ; and also dXXof alius, other, ahXopcu salio, to leap. b. ) It united with r to form cr or cn : as, navrla navaa ndcra (233), 7rXourIo? ttXovctios rich, dBavaaia (lrom dBdvaros) immortality. Hence, we often find a for r before t. c. ) It united with a palatal or lingual mute (or, rarely, with a la¬ bial mute or a double palatal) to form aa (in later Attic rr) or £: as, tjkIchv rjacraiv or fjrTOiv. rayJu> raacra). KopvSlco Kopvcrcrco , 7r€7rla> neaaco, dyxlov dacrov • oAuylcou vXl(coi>. eXnLblo) eXni^co, vLa, TeTa(yxa)\a, 7reTreL(0ica)Ka, Kei;6,uu(SKa)Ka. (39) ; 8eSei* (kk a)\a (45), /ce«:c(7r/ca)c}>a, yeypa((pxa)<\>a, oec75a(XfCa)\a, dvjpafsa) Ka. 150. IV. v , before a (a) labial or (b) 'palatal , is changed into the cognate nasal (4, 137 b); and (c) before a liquid , is assimilated (104 a) : as, (a) cn'(^7r)|iirdc7xw, e(i'/3)[xj3dXXa>, 2TXA2, for pev fvxds (Insc. Potid.) ; so, ArKAI, TOAAOPON, and even E22AM0I (cf. io5, 166), for av teal, rov \byov, iv 2 ct pip. 151. V. No consonant should stand before cu(7s)|, awpafai j(i})y\na. Cf. Lat. du(cs) to announce, vtpw to distribute, KpLuuj to judge, irXviuo to wash , and oipoj to flay, — (a) ayye\((T(j), ew)ia,vep()w ° (b) tfyy(e\cra, eeXa)ei\a, ?y(epuxa,eepa)f. ijxa, Hp{iv to trip, iriaivu) to fatten, Trepaivw to complete (s. (pav-, a, 109 a), tacprfKa, liridva, EUPHONIC CHANGES. 147 § 157 . ixtpSva. But lax^aivu to make lean, Kepdalvw to gain, KoiXaivw to hollow out, XevKaivoj to whiten, opyalvu, to enrage, Treiralvw to ripen, aipoj to raise, and aXXopai to leap, have here <1 (in the two last becoming q in the Ind. through the augment : ijpa, Subj. ’a.w) ; rerpalvcn, to bore, has tj ; and ap j-alvu to give a signal, pualvco to stain, and KaOalpiv to purify, both q and d. The use of d in the liquid Aor. increased in the later Greek. d. A few poetic verbs retain the old forms with o- : as, kIXXco to land, kvjlj to meet, dpvvpi to rouse, (fiupoj to knead, F. and A. neXaw, ZxeXaa, opjaj, u>paa, &c. Add these forms, mostly from Horn., rjpaa, 2Xaa, epaa, depaopai, xplaw, Zxepaa, baupOtpaw, ijepaa. 153. 3.) In the Nominative, the affix -p after p, and some¬ times after v, is transposed as e, and absorbed (118c) by the preceding vowel : as, \l(aps, aep) dp starling; Trar{eps, eep) t|p, pf)r{ops, oep)a>p (18); 7 radars, aev)a.v paean; Xia{evs, eev)r\v, dalp{ovs, oefuv (IS). Cf. Lat. fu(rs)r, pate(rs)r, orato(rs)r.- lie(ns)%, daemo(ns)«. a. Except in dap.dp wife, where cr is simply dropped. 154. 4.) In liquids of Dec. 3, v is simply dropped before -at in the Dative plural : as, peXa{vai)ai (23) ; Xiptfapai, balpo(vai)ai, pi{vai)ai (18). For the Dat. pi. of syncopated liquids and aaryp, see 145 a. 155. 5.) In adjectives (not participles) in «p, v becomes a before a- in the feminine, and is simply dropped before at in the Dat. pi. : as, x a P uucra x a P‘‘ eacra > x il P UVT0e, T€Ta(yad)\dai (39, 147) ; i inrep J5J. 412 ; irpoar/eLv ; Ov56ttu Ar. PL 696, rjo-Kew etpia P. 388. The form with v became the common form in the Impf. 3d Pers. yv, teas, and exoyv or XP'0 V > ought, even before a consonant : as, yv 56 i. 2. 3, expyv raura Cyr. 5. 5. 9. c. The v thus assumed is often called v paragogie (in Greek, v ecpeXxv- gtlkov, attached). It is sometimes employed by the poets before a con¬ sonant to make a syllable long by position ; and in most kinds of verse, is used at the end of a line. In Ionic prose it is generally neglected ; but in Attic prose it is sometimes found even before a consonant in the mid¬ dle of a sentence, while, on the other hand, it is sometimes omitted in closely connected discourse, even where we point with a period. 164 . 2.) The adverb ovroos, thus , commonly loses cr before a consonant; and «ypi and pi\pi, until, often assume it before a vowel : as, ovreo r)oi, epaoi, epbpovot. (Lat. fierunt). See 160 d. c. Dor. oos for evbov intus, within, irri for €ot'l est, is; and in the verb-ending of 1st pers. pi. -pcs for -p.€v (Lat. * mus ), as Xdyopes for Xeybpev (Lat. legimus). d. The Laconic often changes 0 to cr, and final s to p : as, 7 raXebp Ar. Lys. 988, oibp, odXoj, for iraXcubs, debs, 6eXco • wbip for irais (Lat. puer, cf. Marcipor). Compare the marked correspondence of cr and the Lat. r; and in Lat., arbos and arbor, honos and honor. For Lac. pwa, iraa, see U1 a. 152 CONSONANTS. - DIALECTIC VARIATIONS. § 170. 170 . 5.) The Double Consonants with other letters : as, old £vv, later and common trvv (in the Lat. cum the tr has been omitted instead of the k ) ; gEol. for Ainrcpu ■ iEol. anevos, anicpos, for £ vxvvyvos, curdXayyos, for nroXeyos, ttoAis, Six^, vdtvvyos, dirdXayos ‘ 8pe£ov, ’0 8vaevs, ’A;yiXeiA, (papvycs, for eppe^ov, ’08vbv. 175. The masculine gender belongs properly to words de¬ noting males; the feminine, to words denoting females; and the neuter, to words denoting neither males nor females. In Greek, however, the names of most things without life are masculine or feminine, either from the real or fancied posses¬ sion of masculine or feminine qualities, or from a similarity in their formation to other nouns of these genders. Thus, for the most part, the names of winds and rivers (from their power and violence), and also of the months, are GENDER. 155 § 177. masculine; and the names of trees, plants, countries , islands, and cfta’es (regarded as mothers of their products or inhabitants) are feminine; while nouns denoting mere products, or imply¬ ing inferiority (even though names of persons), especially dimin¬ utives , are neuter: as, 6 avegos wind , 6 Boppas Boreas, 6 7 roTagbs river, 6 NetXos the Kile, 6 pfiv month, o 'EKaTogj 3 aabv June —July; y avuy fig-tree, 17 gyXea apple-tree, 7? dgireXos vine, y fivpXos papyrus, 77 country, y Aiyvrrros Egypt, 77 1/7cros island, y "Zdgos Samos, 77 7 t 6 ?uj city, 77 Aavedaigiov Lacecloemon; to 6v, to decoy ecov chamber. a. Except when the diminutive form in -ov is given to feminine proper names : as, y Aeovnov, y Exvicepiov. 177. III. Ill the THIRD DECLENSION (17 s), a. ) All words in -evs are masculine; all in -, y vavs ' to acdga, to ge\i honey , to ckttv, to ye vos, to yrop heart. b. ) All abstracts in -Tys and -is, and most other words in -is are feminine : as, y ykvKVTys sweetness, y dvvagts power, y noiyais poesy, y pis, y noXis . c. ) All labials and poalatals, and all liquids (except a few in which p is the stem-mark) are either masculine or feminine. Except palatals, they are more frequently masculine. d. ) Nouns in which the stem ends 1 . ) in -WT-, -av-, -cv-, or -vt-, are masculine: as, 6 ybXios, -iotos, laugh¬ ter; 6 iraidv, -duos, pecan; 6 Xigyv, -Ivos " 6 Xbcov, -ovtos, 6 oSoffs, 6 yLyas, 6 igds, -dvros, thong. Except re offs, iotos, ear, rd (poos, (pcoros, light (both contracts), y -aros, t 8 Kcpas, -a tos, t6 ylpas, -aos. 156 DECLENSION'. § 178. — NUMBER. CASE. 173. B. Number. The Greek has three num¬ bers ; the Singular, denoting one; the Plural, denoting more than one; and the Dual (dualis, from duo, two), a variety of the plural, which may be employed when only two are spoken of. Thus, the singular dvdpwiros signifies man, the plural (LvOpuiroi, men (whether two or more), and the dual avdpdnru, two men. a. The dual is most used in the Attic and Homeric Greek. The Alolic dialect (as the Latin, which it approaches the most nearly ot the Greek diale ds) and the Hellenistic Greek show scarce a trace of the dual (the Mew Testament, like the Modern Greek, none), except in ovo, two, and da\p) P. N.V. -es IxOves yvires Gen. -os ixOvos yVTTOS Gen. -wv lx@vwv yVTTUV Dat. -i iyfidi yVTTL Dat. -ecu ixOdeaL yvireai Acc. - v, -a yuira f (i’x0yv \6y(o-eai, cicn)ois Tafju{a-eai, aari) cu$ A67(o-as)ovs ra/u(a-as)as as Nom. IX N. A. V. \iy(o-e)ta ra/.u'(a-e)a G. D. \6y{o~w)oiv rayl(a-it'), "A6co (199). So tlie neuters to, d\\o, a utj, ixeivo, 6 (199) ; unless these came from old forms ending, like the Lat. id, illnd, istud , quid, quod, and aliud , in a lingual mute, which 1 iter laws of euphony forbade. c. The Lat. Dec. 1 and 2 have Gen. sing, forms, both with and with¬ out a final s: as , funtil Las, aula'i, mensce ; illius, cjus, totius, servi. 188. We have thus far treated specially of the masculine gender. In the neuter (which occurs only in the second and third declensions), since things without life have no voluntary action, the distinction of sub¬ ject and object is obviously of far less consequence, and therefore in this gender the separation of the Nom., Acc., and Yoc. was never made. The place of these three cases continued to be supplied by a single Direct Case, which in the singular of Dec. 3 was the simple stem, and in the singular of Dec. 2 had the Acc. form, which suited the objective character of the gender. In the plural, it took the same form in both declensions, simply appending, instead of the old e, u, (which, as the corresponding vowel of v, is more objective in its character, 138) ; and without a connecting vowel, which was not here needed. The striking analogy of the Latin through¬ out will be here observed. We give, as examples, to odxpv (poet.) tear, of Dec. 3, and t6 eruxou jig, of Dec. 2. s. N. A.Y. ddxpv (JVK-OV P. N. A.Y. bdxpv-a cr ox¬ a Gen. daxpv-o s erux-ov Gen. daKpu-coe er vx- ■CO!/ Dat. bdxpv-L (TVK-U) Dat. daxpo-cn 0 ox¬ ■ots D. N. A.Y. daxpv-e ervx-cv D. G. D. btxxpb-oiv er u to -OLV 189. a. The declension which is first in name was probably last in development, and appears to have arisen in the effort to obtain a distinct form for the feminine. This may have taken place somewhat thus. A distinction was made in the theme by appending, instead of the strong ilexive s, the softer and more objective v. As this could uot remain after a consonant, it passed, as in the Acc. of Dec. 3, into the corresponding a, to which again in the Acc. v was affixed as the sign of case. The a be¬ came thus a connecting vowel, and was so adopted throughout. With this view of it, the theme has no flexible ending. The a united with all the open flexives, forming long vowels or diphthongs. Through analogy, or to render the distinctive sign of this declension more prominent, a was also lengthened, in many words, in the remaining forms : viz., those of the direct cases singular. For distinction from the theme, the form os was preferred in the Gen. sing. Thus, ij oiida, home : N.V. Sing. Gen. Dat. Acc. old [a )a olxi(a-os)as old(a-L )q oid(a-v )a> PI. oidai OLKCU1U oiidcus oLxLas Du. oi ad oidcuv oldau' otxid b. As, however, this declension, containing no neuters, was more dis¬ tinctively a personal declension than either of the others, it afterwards received many maseuline derivatives referring to persons, and thus be¬ came less peculiarly a feminine declension than the Lat. Dec. 1. An ex¬ ample of these masculines, ra,ulas, has been anticipated for comparison with Dec. 2. These were distinguished from the feminines by the use of the strong Ilexive s in the theme, and the consequent omission of the final KEV. Git. K FORMS IN -01, -GEN, &C. 162 § 189 . consonant in the Gen. sing. (187 a). For the precession which so pre¬ vailed in the sing, of this declension, see 195. 190. The prevention of hiatus "by the insertion of aspirate conso¬ nants (the successors of the digamina or used like it), and by different inodes of contraction (100), has given an especial variety of form, in the first and second declensions, to the Dative singular, which, as the primi¬ tive Indirect Case (186 c), originally performed the offices of both tlie Genitive and the Dative. Thus, we find, 1.) The i appended with the insertion of <|>, a natural successor of the digamina. This form is Epic, and from its being used as both Gen. and Dat., and in Dec. 2 even as plural, is evidently of great antiquity. It does not occur in names of persons, and is chielly used where local rela¬ tions are spoken of. E. g. Dec. 1. eij eivi'fii, from the bed, y. 405 ; d.7rd vevpycpiv (163 a) 0. 300 ; ijrpL (3ir]. 501 ; erlpytpi II. 734 ; Gvpypiv l. 238. Dec. 2. TAt kXvtcl rei'xea, the famed walls of (or at) Troy, 6i irpo f. 36 ; Dat. KtjpoOi I. 300, o. 370. 3. ) The i appended with the insertion of This appears in the Epic rjx L (less properly written yxi, cf. 190 b), for the adverbial Dative y, where, A. 607. 4. ) The i contracted with the preceding vowel into cii or oi (119). This simpler mode of contraction now scarcely appears except in adverbial Datives : as, %a gai humi, on the ground, oL'koi at home (but olxip to a house ; cf. Lat. domi and domus), iredoi, ’ladgot, ol, ttiroi. Yet ev Icrdgoi Simon. Fr. 209 ; h Ylpiavaidi Insc. Cret. ; ro? bagoi Insc. Boeot. § 194. FIRST DECLENSION. 163 5.) The common form, in which the i is absorbed by the preceding vowel : as, Xvp(a-i) a, oix(o-i)co, T adpp, rip bypcp. 192. The forms of the Genitive in -oQiv or -0cV (186 e) remained in the common language only as adverbs, denoting the place whence : as, o’Uodev from home, dXXodev, avrodev, ' Xdyvydev. As examples of their use as decided Genitives, may be cited air’ ovpavodev, from heaven, 0. 365, eg A lavprflev 0. 304, eg aXodev . 335, A iddev 0. 489 ; and the pronominal forms ip. I dev, ertdev, edev (27), which even occur in Attic poets. CHAPTEE II. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 193. The declension of adjectives is also here treated, so far as it corresponds with the declension of nouns. See 229. I. THE FIRST DECLENSION. (For the affixes and paradigms, see II -15, 20; for the gender, 176.) 194. The original affixes of Dec. 1 all had a as a connect¬ ing vowel (187, 189). In most of these, the a, if not contract¬ ed with a vowel following (183 a), was itself made long. Short a, however, remained in the singular, 1.) In the direct cases of feminines whose stem ended in cr, a double consonant, XX, or aiv : as, paver a, poverav , rpanegd ( 15 ), yKaxTcra (or yXcorra, 1 69 a) tongue , 8i\{/a thirst, boga opinion , a/xtX- Xa contest, \eaiva lioness. a. Add a few others in -Xa and -va ; as, iradXd rest, viper, pe- pipva care, deenroiva mistress: and a very few in which p. or a mute pre¬ cedes a ; as, roXpd courage, &Kavbd thorn, SLacru mode of life. b. Add many feminines in -a pure and -pa, mostly having a diph¬ thong in the penult, and easily recognized by the accent. The principal classes are, (a) Polysyllables in -€ia and -oia, except abstracts in -eia from verbs in -eva> ; as, aXrfieid truth, evvoid good-will, / 3 acriXei.u queen, but pacriXeia reign, from pacriXetoj • (/3) Female designations in -xpia ; as, \f. dXrpLd female musician : (y) Dissyllables and some polysyllabic names of places in -aia ; as, paid good mother, ’larlaid • (5) Words in -via ; as, uvid fly : (e) Most words in -pa, whose penult is lengthened by a diph¬ thong (except av), by v, or by pp ; as, paxoupd sword, yeiXoppXd, Aec evifids, ZfiXXas • and it became t] after p or po in the words Slpp ? edc, ropp maid¬ en, Koppp (Ion. and Old Att. ropap, 157) cheek, dddpp pap, aWpp clear sky, pod] stream ; in some proper names, as T 97077 s • and in compounds of pe- rpeu], as yecaperpps land-measurer, geometer. In some words, usage fluc¬ tuates between long or short a and t] : as, 'Apdairds Cyr. 6 . 1. 31, 'Apd- airps lb. 5. 1. 4, ireivd and ireLvp, hunger, 7 rpvpvd and irpfipvp, stern. 196. Contracts. A few nouns, in which the stem ends in a or e , and feminine adjectives in -ea and -op, are contracted : as, pvaa pvd, 'E pplas ‘E ppps, fioplas /3oppas (p doubled), avsla avidj, Jig-tree ; ypucrea XP VCT f bmXop dnrXp. See 1 D, 23, J 20 e. Dialectic Forms. 197. a. I 11 the affixes of this declension, the Doric dialect retains throughout the original a ; while, in the singular, the Ionic has t] in most of those words in which the Attic and Common dialects have long a, and even in some in which they have short a, particularly derivatives in -eia and -oiu (130) : as, Dor. cp8d, ipdas, g>8g, dpfidv • Ion. Xvpp, Xvpps, Xvpp, Xvppv, rapips (yet Horn, has Sect) • Ep. aXpOdp, efiirXoip, New Ion. dXp- Brjtp, pip, for aXpdeiu, evTrXoid, pid. b. In words in -rjs, the primitive Direct Case in -u is sometimes re¬ tained by Horn, and some of the other poets as Nom. (187 b), for the sake of the metre or euphony : as, 6 afire Qveard B. 107 ; iirirord N earup B. 336 ; evpvcnra Zees /3. 146 ; (3a6vppra Xeipujv Pind. N. 3. 92. Com¬ pare Lat. nauta, scriba. So in feminines in -ip the poets sometimes re¬ tain the old short a in the Voc. : as, vupcpd (piXp P. 130 ; *11 ALkcl, Sapph. 66 [44], On the other hand, Aiprp Ap. Rh. 3. 386, for Airjrd, Voc. of AiijTps. c. The old den. affixes, -do and dcov, which often occur in the Epic writers, were contracted as follows : (1) In the Ion., they were regularly contracted into -o and -cov, with the insertion of e after a consonant, but commonly in the poets with synizesis (120 i, 117 b) : as, ’Arpei5(ao, co)eo>, ’Arpei.o(dwv, (av)itav ‘ Bopedo Bop^oj, Eppteia; O. 214, iuppeXUo A. 47. (2) In the Dor., a absorbed the following vowel, and the affixes became d and av (131 a) : as, ’Arpei5(ao)d, 'Arpei8(dcjv)av. (3) In the Att., do and dcov were contracted into ov (by precession from w, 115) and av : as, ’ Arpei8(ao, w)ov, ’ Arpcio(duv)iav. § 200. SECOND DECLENSION. 165 d. In some masculines, chiefly proper names, the later Ion. has €a in the Acc. for Tjv : as Aea widea Hdt. 8. 15 (-T|v Id. 7. 206), Seairbrea Id. 1. 11 (so, in some editions, Acc. pi. -tiis for -us : as, 8emrbreas lb. 111). 198. a. The Dat. pi. in Horn, commonly ends in -tjcj-i or -t)s before a vowel (which may be referred to apostrophe) : as deycnv A. 638, deys ds F. 158. 1» a few instances, -ps precedes a consonant : as, ays naL A. 179, vrdpys irpds y. 279. We even find deals e. 119, a Krais M. 284, and ira- a:us x■ 471 ; where some would change -cus to -rjs. b. Antique, Ion., and Dor. forms are sometimes found in Att. writers; particularly, 1. ) The Dor. Gen. in -d, from some nouns in -as, mostly proper names : as, opvidodypas, fowler, Tojppvas, KaWLas • G. opvidodypa, Yw(3pva Cyr. 5. 2. 14 (Tu(3pvov lb. 2), KctXXla Ages. 8. 3 (KaXXcou Symp. 3. 3). So all contracts in -as : as, Poppas, G. poppa. 2. ) The Ion. Gen. in -eco, from a few proper names in -rjs : as Typys, Ka,apijjys • G. Typeto Th. 2. 29, KapPvaew Cyr. 1. 2. 1 (Ka^fivcrov lb. 8. 5. 27). 3). The old Dat. pi. in -auri, which is frequent in the poets. So, in Plato, rex^aiai Leg. 920 e, y;aepaun Pliacdr. 276 b. c. For Epic forms in -4 >l, -\i, and -0€v, see 190 - 192; for Dor. and iEol. forms of the Acc. ph, 131 d. II. THE SECOND DECLENSION. (For the affixes and paradigms, see 11 - 14, 16, 20; for the gender, 176.) 199. The flexible endings of the Nominative and Accusa¬ tive singular are wanting (187 b), 1. ) In the theme of the article: thus, 6 for or. Compare Lat. ille, ipse, iste, qui. 2. ) In the neuter of the article and of the pronouns dAAor, nuror, end aor, and or • thus, to, dXXo, avro, eKeiuo, d, for rov, iiWov , Ac. a. In crasis with the article (125), and in composition with the defini¬ tives ro?os, rbaos, ryXinos, and tvsvos, the neuter avro more frequently be¬ comes abrbr • thus, ravrbv and ravrb, for to avro • tolovtov and tolovto. 3. ) Frequently in the Accusative of the Attic declension (200), particularly in y door dawn, y aXcos threshing-floor, 6 Ad- ycor hare, y Kecor, y Kcor, y Tecor, 6 *Adcor • thus, Acc. eco (only), Xuyoou and Adyco, Axdco. So, ill the adjectives dyypcos (22), avd- ir\ea>s full, d^idypecoy competent. 200- Contracts. If the stem-mark (172 d) is a, e, or o, it may be contracted with the affix. See dyypaos (22), dareov, vdos (16) ; and also 120 c, e, i, 121. The contract declension in -cor and -o>v, from -aor and -aou, is termed by grammarians the Attic Declension from its prevalence among Attic writers, although it is far from being peculiar to them (87 b). 166 SECOND DECLENSION. DIALECTIC FORMS. § 200 . a. If the stem-mark is long a, € is inserted after the contraction (120 i): as, raos (vws) veds (16), vaou (vw) veu), vaip (vip) veep, vaov (ywv) veu>v • PI- vaoi (vip) veep, &c. For the accent, see Prosody, 772 d. b. The number of words belonging to the Attic declension is small. In some of them, the uncontracted form does not occur, or occurs only with some change. Thus euyecos, fertile, is the contract form of evyaos (fr. (yaa)yi], poet, yala, earth), in place of which we find the protracted evyaios and evyeios. Dialectic Forms. 201 . a. The affix of the Gen. sing, -o-o (13), which was commonly contracted to -ov, or, in the iEol. and stricter Dor., to -co (130 c), was often prolonged by the poets, especially the Epic (sometimes even by the Tragic in lyric portions), to -oio (called the Thessalian form, and not receiving elision) : thus, ttLvtov T/captoio B. 145 ; do/nov viprjXoio a. 126 ; oio 86 /j.oio a. 330 ; deou Pind. O. 2. 37 ; Oeolo lb. 6. 60 ; pieydXu ALos Ale. 1 [20] ; tpxopitvoio Id. 37 [23]; norapioio . . . 'Avdirw Theoc. 1. 68 ; /xaXa/cu) x°P TOl ° Id. 4. 18. b. A single contraction, with the insertion of € (120 i), gives the Epic genitives IleT(doo)ed>o A. 327, Ile^eX(aoo)€coo (v. 1. -^oio) £2. 489. The poetic doubling of i gives the Epic dual form in -ouv (so always in Horn.). c. The new Ion. has Gen. forms with e inserted : as, Trvptwv Hdt. 2. 36, 'Zovcreuv Id. 5. 35. In some proper names in -os, these imitate Dec. 1: as, K poiaos, KpoLcreu Hdt. 8. 122 (Kpoiaov 1. 6) ; Barrea;, KXeo/qSporecv, Id. 4. 160 ; 5. 32. d. The old Dat. pi. in -oicri is common in the poets of all classes, and in Ion. prose. So, even in Plato, Oeolai Leg. 955 e. e. For Epic or old forms in -oc|>l, -o0i, -oi, and -o0€v, see 190 s ; for the Dor. and iEol. Acc. pi., 131 d. f. Contracts in -ous from -oos occur in Horn, and Hdt., though rarely : as, vovs k. 240 (here only in Horn.), evvov Hdt. 6. 105. In words in -«os, -eov, Horn, sometimes protracts the € to ei (134 a), and sometimes employs synizesis (117 b). III. THE THIRD DECLENSION. (For the affixes and paradigms, see 11-14, 17-21 ; for the gender, 177.) 202. In this declension, the Nominative, though regarded as the theme of the word, seldom exhibits the stem in its sim¬ ple distinct form. This form must therefore be learned from the Genitive, or from some case which has an open affix (172 c). a. Special attention must be given to the euphonic changes which occur in those cases which have either close affixes, or no affixes ; that is, in the Nom. and Voc. sing., in the Acc. sing, in -v (where the stem receives the same changes as in the theme), and in the Dat. pi. b. The change of v, the original flexive of the ^cc. sing., into a, was so extensively required in this declension by the rule (160 e), that a became the prevailing affix, and was often used even after a vowel. It will there¬ fore be understood that the affix is a, if no statement is made to the con¬ trary. § 205. THIRD DECLENSION. -MUTES. 167 Words of Dec. 3 are divided, according to the stem-mark, or characteristic, into Mutes, Liquids, and Pures (172 d). A. Mutes (17). 203. Labials and Palatals. These are all masculine or feminine (177 c). Except in the irregular ywrj, the theme ends in yjs or £ (151), and the Voc. has no distinct form (182 d). a. rV i\, woman, wife, which has its theme after the form of Dec. 1, and is accented as if dissyllabic throughout, is thus declined : S. 1ST. ywr], G. yvva.LK.6s (accented as if pronounced yuaiKbs), D. ywaid, A. ywaZna, V. y6uac • P. N. yvuaZKes, G. yvuaiK&v, D. yvuaL^i, A. ywaisas • D. N. yv- vaiKe, G. yvvaiKoZv. The old grammarians have also cited from Comic writers the forms, A. yvvyv, P. N. yvuai, A. yvuds, according to Dec. 1 . b. In the stem Bpiy, ® becomes t, except where y is changed (159 b). In 7 ] a\u> 7 ryij, -exos, fox, the e of the stem is lengthened in the theme. 204. Linguals. In these, the characteristic lingual can¬ not remain in any case which has either a close affix or no affix (202 a); and if another consonant is thus brought before a or to the end of a word, further change may be required : as, i\TTL(5s)s, Kopvf) s)$, 7 rcu( 5 (T 4 )(r£, xXeZ{8v)v, {iraiSffiai, cru}pL{ar)a , A lo(vr)v (17); €\fju(vds)v<5 (156 b) ; 0u)(r)s, ^7ra(r)p (17) : avafrs, ./cs)£, dv(a/cr)a, Sdg.a(prs)p, A 4{ours, ovs, oe v)l»v, X6(ovtctl)ovo-i (17). Cf. Lat. 8 eta(ts)s, frau(ds)s, par(ts)s. a. Barytones in -is and --us form the Acc. sing, both in -v and less fre¬ quently in -a : as, tpis, xopvs (17), 6 , y 8 pvis bird, y yapis grace ; Acc. Zpcv, 8 pviv (160 e), and poet. 8 pi 8 a, 8 puZ 6 a, commonly Xdpira as the name of a goddess, but otherwise yd/uv. So xXeis (17), 6 y 6 Xws laughter, and the compounds of ttovs foot, have both forms : xXeiu and xXeZSa, yeXwra and ytXuu ; see Ol8l7tovs, Slitovs (21, 22). Add 6 8 pco s love, and nais (poet, for 7 rais, 105) : in later poets, Zpuu, ird'Cv. In oxytones, the accent served to prevent the lingual from falling away, and thus to forbid the form in -v. b. If a distinct A f oc. is needed, linguals obtain this by dropping the stem-mark (160 a) : as, 7 rcu, Xeou (17) ; “Aprepus Diana, vedvis girl, rvpau- vLs sovereignty, V. "Aprepu, vedvi, rvpawL Soph. O. T. 380. A few proper names in -as, -avros, then change v as in the theme : as, "ArAas, IIoAuSd- p.as, V. ’ArX(avr, av, aa)a, HoXv 8 dp.d Hel. 6 . 1. 5. The Voc. form aua is used only in addressing a god, as ZeO dva I\ 351, Soph. O. C. 1485 ; otherwise, & tivatj or d>m£ (126 7 ). 205. Stems in -vt-. When, by the dropping of r, v is brought before s in the theme, the s is changed, if an 0 vowel precedes ; but otherwise the v : as, Ae(ovry, oiw, oeu)a>v, yly(avrs, avs, acis)as (17, 153, 156) \ Xv(ovts)gov, 6(evrs)eis, \varas, 8vs (26). a. Except 6806 s (17), and participles from verbs in -copi : as, 8 L 8 ovs, 806 s, fr. SiSojpu (45). Yet Ion. o8ujv Hdt. 6 . 107. b. Some Latin names received into the Greek have -qs in the theme, instead of -as : as, KA yp.ys, -euros, Clemens, OvdXys, -euros, Valens. c. The host of words whose stems end -vt- may conveniently be made into a separate class {Liquid-Mutes), by taking vt as the stem-mark. THIRD DECLENSION.-MUTES. § 206 . 168 206. Neuter Linguals. In these the stem-mark is always r, which, in the theme, is commonly dropped after ya , but otherwise gives place to ? or p (160) : as, o-d>y[ar)a, (a>r)<»?, Kep[ar)as, i]n{ar)ap (1 7) ; ei§(or)dy (26) ; aXet0(ar)ap and -a, unguent. Cf. Lat. poem(at)a, co(rd)r. a. The r is also omitted in yeX(ir )i mel, honey ; in ydX(aKT)a lac, milk, which also drops k ; and in yov(aT)v genu, knee, and dbp(ar)v spear, which have also v in place of a (cf. 224 c). In the poet, ijy(ar )ap day, p takes the place of t after pa ; and in vd(ar)iop water, 6picvs and •bbpKvv, 6 8eX(pis and 5e\(piv del- pliin, DOLPHIN. t. In the Yoc. of 'AvoWiov, -covos, Apollo, IlocreiSu;^, -Covos, Neptune, 6 aioryp, -rjpos, savior, odyp, -epos, brother-in-law, and of the personal words in 210, the natural tone of address has thrown back the accent as far as possible, and shortened the last syllable of the stem if long : “ AttoX- Xov, IJbcreidov, a (Prep, 8aep, dvep, irarep, Ovyarep, Ayyyrep. If the accent is not thrown back, oxytone nouns retaining v or p in the theme have no distinct Yoc. : as, Xiyrjv, o, y aWyp, -tpos, ETHER. § 212. LIQUIDS. PURES. 1G9 209. N euter Liquids. A few nouns in wliich the stem ends in p are neuter. They are, for the most part, confined to the singular ; and require, in their declension, no euphonic changes of letters. E. g. nvp, nvpos (14 ; v lengthened in the monosyllabic stem), ve/crap, -apos, nectar. a. In Zap (f cap) ver, spring , and the poetic seap cor, heart, contraction takes place in the stem : N. Zap, poet, gp, G. and D. Zapos, Zapi, oftener ijpos, ?)pi • N. Keap, in Horn, always k rjp, D. Krjpt. 210. Sy ngopated Liquids. I. In a few familiar liquids, a short vowel is syncopated before the stem-mark : viz., a. In these three, the syncope takes place before all the open affixes: avr'ip (s. avep-, sync, avp-, av8p-, 146b) man; kvcov (s. kvov, sync, kw-) can is, dog, also syncopated in Dat. pi. ; apvos (s. apev-, sync, apv-) lamb's, of which the Nom. sing, is not used, but in its place, apvbs agnus, of Dec. 2. See 18. b. These five are syncopated in the Gen. and Dat. sing. : 'irdrrjo (18 ; s. 7 T arep-, irarp-) FATHER ; |J.TjTrjp MOTHER, G. pyrepos pyrpbs, D. pyrZpL prjrpL ; GuyiL'Tip DAUGHTER, 6vya(Tepos)Tp6s, OvyairepdjTpL • y yacrTt|p stomach, yaafeposffipos, yacrfepdrpi- y Arjp,t)Tr]p Ceres, Aypyireposffipos, AypyfepLjrpi, also Acc. Aypyfepafpa. c. In these words, the poets sometimes neglect the syncope, and some¬ times employ it in other cases than those which are specified. For the Dat. ph, see 145 a. Taaryp has not only yaarpajL (Dio C. 54. 22), but also in Hipp. yaarypai. d. Compare Lat. pater, pa(ter)£ris ; mater, ma(ter)£ris ; caro, carnis. 211. Comparatives in -w often drop the v before a and e in the sing, and pi., and are then contracted (140 b) : as, pdfrva pd£(oa)a>, pd'fores pel£(oes)ovs, pdfovas pdfrvs (22). Both forms are freely used, and even together : as, apdvovas sal Kpdrrovs i. 7. 3. a. A like contraction occurs in a few other words, particularly in the Acc. of ’AttSXXup and Ilocreiduv (itself contr. fr. TLoaeidcCwu, 131 a) : 'A-roX- Xcova ’A7r5\X(o;a)a) (iii. 1. 6), II oaeiduiva IlocretSw. See for both forms, of which the shorter is especially used with the article, PI. Crat. 402 d, e, 404 d, 405 d. So, likewise, 6 Kvneibv mixed drink, Acc. KVKcCoua, and poet. KVKeu (k. 316, KVKeLtn A. 624) ; y yXyxa, l)X° a i innea (19) j cracfvea (22) ’ but from 6 Aay, stone, kIs, ois (contracted from dty), noXis, l\Bvs, nrjxvs, vavs, /3oCy, t] 8 vs, Acc. Adi/ • k'iv, oiv, 7r6X.1v, i\Bo v, ntjxvv, vavv , fiovv (19) ) rjdvv (23). c. Proper names in ~qs, -eos, for the most part, admit both forms of the Acc. : as, 2cu/cpdr7?s (19), A. HioKparr) (Plat.), hioKparyv (Xen.) ; 6"Apr)s, Mars, A "Apr) and " Apr\v fApea Soph. 0. T. 190). So ypus, A. rjpcvv Hdt. 1. 107 (ifpcoa 2. 143). d. When the stem-mark is changed to a diphthong before -y in the theme, the same change is made before -ai in the Dative plural : as, innevai, {3oval, vaval (19). 217. These changes appear to have chiefly resulted from the earlier mode of preventing hiatus in declension, viz., by attaching consonant elements to the stem (100, 190). Of these, the most prominent seem to have been, for masculines and neuters, F and 2 ; and for feminines, the softer A, which in many words acquired a permanent place (see f below). With this exception, these in¬ serted consonants, in the refining of the language, were (a) simply dropped between two vowels (140 ; hence, except as above, 216 d, in the Dat. pi., originally ending in -ecri, 186 f) ; and A tlirouyhout. If not between two vowels, the F became v (142), which (b) formed a diphthong with an open vowel preceding, but (c) was absorbed by a close one ; while the 2 (d) re¬ mained where there was no affix (139), but (e) before the affixes -s and -v was absorbed, as if e, by the preceding vowel (142). Before the A, (f) a could remain, but there was a tendency in t before a lingual to pass by precession into 1 (114 d), so remarkable that in this whole declension there is scarce an instance of € before a characteristic lingual mute. Feminines in -€-, on losing the inserted A, took two forms as below (g, h). Thus, 172 THIRD DECLENSION. PURES. §217. (a) /SoFos /3oos bovis, cx@(vFos)vo$, i7T7r(eFes)€€S ' yfr(e2os)eos (fr. ytvos ; cf. Lat. genus, generic, 139), yep(a2os)aos (19) ; AtFos A'los (21 ; cf. Lat. clivus and dins, and bourn for bovum), r/5(eFos)eos (23) ; $ (22). (b) /SoFs [Sous, fioFv fiovv, /3oF j3ov, 'nnr(eFs)evs, LTnr(eF)ev, hrirevai, raFs vavs navis, vavcL (19). In adjectives, and in a few masculine ana neuter nouns, short u takes the place of eu : as, -! 7 < 5 eFs i]8v s, i]8(e f)v (23) ; 7 r i?X( e FS vs, 7 ryyuV, 7 r?)xu, ao"r(e f)u (19). • (c) IxdvFs ix®ts, Ix&{vf)-6, but Dat.pL Ix^vcn ; klfs (or /als, Kiihn.) ids (19). (d) Nom. neut. aacpeh aacpes ( 22 ), yeu(e'Z)os (e passing into a kindred vowel, 114 b), yep(a’2)as (19); Yoc. Sa)/fpar(eS)ts (19). The peculiar form of the Yoc. of 77 x 16 an( l alSibs (215 c) may have arisen from the change of s to its corresponding «, and then contraction with precession (142, 118 b) ; thus, yy(oS, oe)oi (cf. 214 b). (e) cra 0 eA s acuprjs (22), 2w/cpd/r(e2s)T]s (19), cu5(o2s)(c$ (214), 6 pv'Ls pvs mils, mouse, G. pv^os puds muris (a). For ^xc 6 , see 214b; cf. r/xoi (d). (f) 'EXAdj, -ados, Greece, Meyapts, -18os, Megaris. M eyape-, Megarian, had two forms, MeyapeF- masc., and with precession MeyapiA- fern.; from the former we have Meyapeds, -ecus, Megarian man, and from the latter (8 retained and becoming the stem-mark), MeyapG, -iSos, Megarian woman or land. This became the prevalent mode of declining feminines in -is, if we except the large class of abstract nouns in -cris. Especially many feminine adjectives, or words which are properly such, are thus declined. (g) The Nom., Acc., and Voc. sing, took the vowel of precession i, while € remained in the other cases : as, 7 r 6 A(eAs)is, 7 r 6 A(eAos)€ws, 7 roXei, ttoXlu, 7 roAi • iroXeis, &c. (19). This became the usual form of feminine pures in -is, in the Attic and Common Greek. (h) Precession took place throughout. This became the regular form of feminine pures in -is in the Ionic (130) : thus, Ion. N. -~s, G. -7os, D. -u, commonly contracted into -7, A. dv, Y. u ; PI. N. des, sometimes contr. into -Is, G. uuv, D. - v un, A. uas, commonly contr. into -is : as, ttoXls, ttjXlos, 7roXi, ttoXlv * iroXies, -Uov, ttoXlcti, irbXias, -7s. Tlie i was also the prevalent vowel in the Doric : thus, Dor. noXis, ttoXios, 7t 5XT and iro- Xei, ivoXiv • iroXces, ttoXLuv, TvoXieaaL and irdXecn, ttoXlcls. i. From the classes of Avoids in which they were used, F appears to have been earlier in its prevalence than A ; and this than 2. See 213, 214. 218. As might have been expected, the three last forms (f, g, h) am far from being kept entirely separate; and are not wholly restricted to feminines (213 a, b, 215 b). Thus, 1 . ) Some words exhibit both the lingual and the pure inflection, the latter especially in the Ionic and Doric, which were less averse than the Attic to hiatus (131 s): as, i] rpoiris keel, G. rpoirecos, TphirLos, and rpoTriSos • particularly proper names, as “lens, G. -iSos, -ios Hdt. 2. 41, D. -t5t, ’Iy and - 10 s. § 220. CONTRACTION. ru 219 . II. Contraction. Most pures in -77?, -o? ? and -co are contracted in all the cases that have open affixes; but others, for the most part, only in the Nom. and Acc. pi. and Uat. sing. ; and some, if at all, only in the Acc. pi. a. Sje 19, and also aafirjs (which i] rpiypys and like words, properly adjectives, follow, 213 c), ir/ips, and i]8vs (22, 23). The common con¬ tractions are given in the tables ; and also some in brackets which are rare or doubtful. The contractions there shown are sometimes omitted, and others sometimes occur ; especially in the poets. For the general laws, see 118 s. b. Of nouns in -w, the uncontracted form scarcely occurs, even in the poets and dialects. So, in alddbs and yJos (214 b) : G. -(oos)ous, D. -ot, A. -s, (32s, a%cDs, for o$s, /3ous, yx°vs > for xXds key , Dor. ( kXclfls clavis) nXats, Ion. nXyts, Old Att. kX-ijs. b. The dialects and poets vary greatly in the extent to which they em¬ ploy contraction, and in the mode of contraction (131). The Epic has here especial license. In the poets, contractions are often made by syni- zesis (117 b), which are not written. In respect to the usage of Homer, we remark as follows : (1) In the Gen. sing., contraction is commonly omitted, except in nouns in -co and -ws, G. -dos. In a few instances, -eos is contracted into^-eus (131 b), or svnizesis occurs : as, ’Epe(3ev s 0. 368, Gipevs y. 118 ; II? 7 \tos A. 489, 7rd\tos B. 811. (2) In the Dat. sing., both the contracted and uncontracted forms are freely used in most words : as, 7?7 pai' and yypai or yppa (119), reixd and Teryei, ifpan and ypep H. 453. See 21. The endings -u, -m, and -oi are almost always contracted : as, Kvyan A. 640, viiKXeas Pind. O. 2. 163, a.KXye'is M. 318, dyanXyos II. 738, 8vcn< Xia B. 115 (so euppeios Z. 508, virepdia P. 330, but e7rc5€€€S Hdt. 4. 130 ; see aireos and Ildrpo/cAoj, 21) ; ’HpanXiys Hes. Th. 318, Hdt. 2. 43 (HpaKXys lb. 145), Pind. O. 6. 115 ; G. 'HpanXyos g. 266, 'H/3aK\eos Hdt. 2. 43, Pind. O. 3. 20 ; D. 'HpanXyi 6. 224, Pind. I. 5. 47, 'RpanXii' Hdt. 2. 145, 'Hpa/cAe? Pind. P. 9. 151 ; A. 'Hpa/cAya g. 324, ' HpanXia Hdt. 2. 43, Pind. O. 10. 20, ' RpaKXiyv Theoc. 13. 73. e. In Kipas and repas (207), the r is commonly omitted in dialectic Greek ; and then in these, as in other neuters in -as, -aos, the later Ionic often changes a into e (130 b), except in the theme : as, Kipeos, nipe'C, Ki- pea, Kepiuv, ripeos, yipea, Hdt. For the Ion. and Dor. forms of words in -is, -€u>s, and -is, -iSos, see 217, 218. f. In vaus (vaFs, navis, 217 b, 19, 21), the original a remains throughout in the Dor. ; but in the Ion. passes by precession either into ip or with short quantity, especially in the later Ion., into t. The Att. retains the a in the diphthong an, but has otherwise r| or € (the latter having appar- 176 IRREGULAR NOUNS. METAPLASTS. § 222 . ently been inserted in the Gen. sing, and pi. after the contraction of do and aw, 120 i ; and the Gen. dual having followed the analogy of the other numbers). In the Att. poets, the Ion. forms occur rarely, the Dor. oftener : as, vybs Eur. Iph. T. 1385, vabs Soph. Ant. 715. IV. IRREGULAR NOUNS. 223. Irregularities in the declension of nouns, which have not been already noticed, may be chiefly referred to two heads: variety of declension, and defect of declension. A. Variety of Declension. a. A noun may vary, (1.) in its stem ; (2.) in its method of declension ; and (3.) in its gender (180). In the first case, it is termed a metaplast (peranXaaTos, transformed); in the second, a heteroclite frepoKXiTos, of different declensions ) ; in the third, heterogeneous (eTepoyevys, of different genders). b. Words which have distinct double forms, either throughout or in part, are termed redundant. Those, on the other hand, that want some of the usual forms, are termed defective. c. The lists which follow are designed both to exemplify the different kinds of irregularity, or anomaly , and likewise to present, in classes, the principal anomalous nouns (some of which might have been also placed under other heads, as doubly irregular). 224. 1. Metaplasts. Metaplasm has mostly arisen from a change of the stem, in the progress of the language, for the sake of euphony or emphasis, chiefly by the pre¬ cession of an open vowel, or the addition of a consonant to prevent hiatus ; while, at the same time, forms have remained from the old stem, espe¬ cially in the poets and in the dialects. The double stem may be, a. ) In ov- and in o- (cf. 140, 211) : y &t|Swv, -ovos, nightingale ; from the stem aybo-, G. aydods Soph. Aj. 629, D. aySo ? Ar. Av. 679 : y pXtp \wv, Ion. yX'hxuv, -covos and (s. (3\yxo-) -ovs, pennyroyal : y Topyw, -ous, and ropywv, -ovos, Gorgon (A. pi. Topyovs, 214 b, Ides. Th. 274) : y «Ikwv, -ovos, image; (s. et’/co-) G. einovs Eur. Hel. 77, A. et/cw Hdt. 7. 69 ; PI. A. eiKotis Ar. Nub. 559 : y xcXiSwv, -ovos, swallow ; (s. xeXtSo-) V. xeXtBot Ar. Av. 1411. b. ) In a- and in -e («- esp. Ion., 222 e) : to (3p eras, -eos, wooden image, poet. : to Kve'as, darkness, G. Ep. uvecpaos, Att. uvetpovs Ar. Eccl. 291, later sveeparos Polyb., D. uvecpai Cyr. 4. 2. 15 : to Kwas, fleece, poet., it. 47 ; PI. N. K(Joea v. 3, D. /eweert y. 38 : to ofiSas, floor, poet., G. ovdeos, D. oildei ovdei, in Horn. c. ) In F- and Far- : to yovv, yovaros, genu, KNEE, and to 8opv, -aros (s. 8op¥-, Sop- 140, dope- 142, dovp- 145, SopYar-, 8opar-, dovpar-), spear. For the forms of dopv (late theme dovpas Antiphil. 9), see 21. Those which occur of yovv correspond : Ion. and poet, yovvaros, -ara, -drew, -cun (-a • Ion. Xaybs, -ov, Hdt., also PI. N. Xayoi Soph. Fr. 113, A. Dor. (131 d) Xaybs lies. Sc. 302 ; Ep. Xaywos, -ov, K. 361 : 6 6pc|>c6s and 6p8ots, contr. (pdots, cake, G. (pdoibs ’ PI. hT. (pOoeis, A. (pdoets and D. Xpot, A. xpoa. f. ) Variously Double : 8opv£(ao$)ovs and -£<$s Ar. Pax 447, -ov, spear - maker : Zevs (s. ZeF-, AtF-, Zar-) ; see 21, and cf. Lat. Jupiter (ZeO irarep r. 276), Jovis, divus : 6 Gepdirwy, -ovtos, attendant; poet. A. dlpaxa, N. pi. dlpaires Eur. Ion 94 : 6, y jidprijs (iEol. and late ydpTvp), -vpos, wit¬ ness; A. puipTvpa, rarer p^apTuv, D. pi. yapTvat. • Ep. b ydprvpos, -ov, t r. 423 : 6 SapirqSwv, -bvos and -ovtos, V. 'Lapirybov E. 633 : y trpwSi^, -iyyos, weal, Ep., B. 267, SP. 716 : to dos, -eos -ovs Cyr. 4. 2. 26, light, poet. ; contr. (pus, epuros : 6, y cj>apiry|, -vyyos, poet, -ifyos i. 373, throat: 6 ‘PopKvs, -vos and -vvos, Phorcys : y xeip, hand, G. x eL P° s an( l X e P^ s > &c. (for the common forms, see 18 ; for the rest, the poets and Ion. prose) : 6 x°Ss, a measure, G. %o5s, &c., like (3ovs (19) ; from s. x oe '> the better Att. G. x°^ ws x oi ^ s > A. x°^d x°dj PL D. x 06 ^ 1 , A. x°Axs x oas (120 f) : to Xptos (Ep. xP e ?° s ), -covs, debt; fr. s. xpdc-, N. {xpdos, XP^ S ) XP G. ( xpaeos, xpfi° v S) XP&s) XP^ WS (120 i). g. y 0epLs, Themis, as a common noun, right, law, G. Qepudos, Ep. QepucrTos pi. 68, Ion. Qlpuos Hdt. 2. 50, Dor. Ge/xeros Pind. O. 13. 11, also PL Rep. 380 a. In the Attic, dtyis occurs mostly in certain forms of ex¬ pression, where it is used without declension, as an adjective or neuter noun : thus, depus eari, it is lawful; (pacrl . . . dlpus elvai, they say tha,t it is lawful, PI. Gorg. 505 d ; to yy depus, that which is not lawful, xEscli. Sup. 335. h. i] ttvu| (s. 7TVKV-, as in adj. ttvkvos, crowded; by met., from the dif¬ ficulty of appending s in the theme, ttwk-), G. ttvkvos and later ttvvkos. i. Poetic, mostly Epic, forms (with the themes to which they are referred or allied, in parentheses) : A. pi. AlGioTrfjas A. 423 (6 AiQLof, -ottos, Ethiopian) ; y 8a>s Hes. Op. 354 (doais gift) ; G. Xi(3os iEsch. Cli. 292, A. \i'/3a Id. Fr. 49 (y \t/3as libation) ; 6 Xls O. 275, A. Xiv A. 480 (Xluv lion) ; D. pacrTi 4'. 500, A. ydcTTtv o. 182 (rj yaaTit; scourge) ; at (rrdyes Ap. Rh. 4. 626 (arayuv drop) ; to v8os, D. vdec Hes. Op. 61 ( vdup water). j. Many prolonged forms are used in poetry or dialectic prose : as, ’A dyvala, creXyvcda, dvayKaiy, lltpae(pbveia, MyveXbTreca, for ’Adyvci Minerva, creX-r/v tj moon, avdysy necessity, ilepaecpbvr] Proserpina, UyveXoTTTj. 225. 2. Heteroclites. a. Of the First and Second Declensions. Some personal nouns have forms both in -os and in -t)s or -as, particularly compounds of &pX“> (where the form in -os is usually more Att.) : as, 6 yvpivaoiapxos and -&PXVS, gymnasiarch; 6 dSoXcaxvs and -os, prater. REV. GR. 8* 178 IRREGULAR NOUNS. IIETEROCLITE. § 225. b. Of the First and Third Declensions : 6 ''Ai8t|s, -ov, poet. ’A tdrjs, Hades; Dec. 3, Ep. G. “Al'dos, D. "Al'di • also poet. ’A'iSwuefc, -dws, Ion. -?)os : 7] -ywr) (203 a) : 6 Adas, contr. Aas, lapis, stone, G. Ados M. 462, and A aov Soph. 0. C. 196, D. Adi', A. Xaau, Xav, and Ada Call. Fr. 104, PL N. Aaes, &c. : 6 p,uKT|S, mushroom, G. yvKyros and yvKov : OlSirrcvs (21): i] tttvxti, -ys, and mostly Ep. tttv%, -iryos, fold: y vyI] flight). f. Of the Second and Third Declensions : to SaKpvov and poet. daKpv (14), lacrima (168 a), tear, G. SaKpbov, D. SaKpvcp • PI. N. SaKpva, G. dcucpvui', D. SaKpvois arid Saupvai Th. 7. 75 : to SevSpcv, - 00 , and Ion. Sev8peov, tree; Dec. 3, D. SevSpeL, A. 8eu8pos Hdt. 6. 79 ; PI. N. 8ev8py, D. more Attic form 8er8peai iv. 8. 2, Th. 2. 75, but SlvSpois iv. 7. 9 : 6 iktCvos, -ov, hawk; Dec. 3, rarer A. itcrlm, At. Fr. 525, N. pi. turiue s Paus. 5. 14: 6 xAdSos, -ov, twig; Dec. 3, poet. D. kXclSL, A. nXaSa, PI. D. KXaSeai Ar. Av. 239, A. /cAaoas : 6 koivoovos, -ov, sharer ; Dec. 3, PL N. KoivCjves Cyr. 8. 1. 25, A. kolv&vols lb. 7. 5. 35 (kolvwvov s 36) : to xpivov, -ov, lily; Dec. 3, Pl. N. Kpivea Hdt. 2. 92, D. KpLveai At. Nub. 911 : 6 poorruv, -vvos, wooden tower, D. yoaavvL v. 4. 26 ; Dec. 2, D. pl. yoaavvois lb. : 6 oveipos and to dveipov, dream (fr. 6vap, 228 a),G. oveLpov and ovdpa- tos ■ Pl. oueipara and sometimes 6recpa : IldTpoKXcs ( 21 ) : to irup, 7 repos (14), fire; Dec. 2, Tl. N. 7 rvpa, watch-fires, D. irvpois vii. 2. 18: 6 o-t£\os, -ov, row; Dec. 3, poet. fern. G. amxos IT. 173, Pl. N. arix «, A. vAa£, -clkos, poet, and Ion. 6 pvXaKos, -ov, guard : 6 \J/ap, papas, and later fapos, -ov, starling. g. Some contracts in -ovs of Dec. 2 have also forms, mostly late, like those of /3o0s (19) : as, 6 rods mind, 6 ttXovs voyage, G. robs, 1 Cor. 14. 19, ttXoos Acts 27. 9, D. rot Korn. 7. 25 ; y npoxovs ewer, D. pl. tt pbxovai Ar. Nub. 272. h. Some verbals have double forms in -os, -ou, and -evs, -€tos, or -Tpp, -Tripos : as, 6 iropnros and iropurevs, guide, 6 rpopb s and rpopev s, nourisher , 6 idrpbs and poet. Idryp, hectlcr. i. Add the poetic D. pl. dvSpa'irdSeo'o'i H. 475 (to drSpairobor slave) ; 0 8p.wos Hes. Op. 428 {8puP s, -wos, servant) ; 6 2pos 3. 315, A. fyor I. 92 (tyus, -taros, love) ; G. pl. p.r|XdTa)v Lyc. 106 ( t6 yy\ou sheep) ; A. olxa, only in oiKa8e, 'homezvard, Horn., and even in Att. prose, vii. 7. 57 (6 ot/cos house) ; ra rrpoo-wrraTa cr. 192, D. 7 rpocru)7racri H. 212 {irpoauTrov, face). § 226. HETEROGENEOUS. 179 j. Of the Attic Second and Third Declensions : y threshing- floor, G. aXco, aXenpos, and poet. dXcnos * also Ep. y aXcoy ■ 6 dpxi-epetis. -levs, and apxcepeus or -Lepws, -co, Hdt. 2. 37, high-priest; y ews dawn (s. a-), G. ew, D. ee\os advantage; re k pap and Ep. re/c/xwp, mark: Poet., Sepas instar, body, form; 1)809 pleasure; 8A (s. <5u>,a-, 160) A. 426 (to 8u>ya domus, house), pi. Hes. Th. 933 ; Kpi (s. /c/n#-, cf. /3pT, pg, 238 b) 0. 564 (y Kpldy barley) ; &\4>i (s. d\(pLT-) Horn. Cer. 208 (aXcpirov barley-meal) ; -yXcLt}>x» hollow, Hes. Op. 531 ; tpi Philet. (to Cpiov wool). b. Neut. XiVa with oil, indecl., chiefly as Dat. f. 227 ; Du. N. and A. #crcr€ eyes, poet., M. 466, PI. oaaoju, 6aaoLs, Eur. Hec. 915, 1105. c. Fern. G. paXqs (paaxdXy, ala, axilla, arm-pit), in the phrase vtto ud.Xys, under the arm, secretly, Hel. 2. 3. 23 (also vwo gdXyv late); D. 8at (t) battle, Ep., N. 286 (kindred A. ddl'v Call. Fr. 243) ; A. eirLKXr]v {eTinXyais, -eios, surname) PI. Tim. 38 c ; A. vi(f>a nivem, snoiv, Hes. Op. 533 (whence y vicpds, -ados, snow-flake). d. Dat. XItl, Ep., 2 . 352, A. sing, or pl. X?ra 0 . 441 (t6 Xlvov linum, linen) ; Voc. masc. and fem. & pc'Xe, my friend, in familiar address, Ar. Lys. 157 ; Voc. So t B. 92), tinea B. 786, adea Tlieoe. 3. 20, rax^tiv Tlieog. 715. So, very rarely, even in Attic prose, as some think. On the other hand, the poets, in a few instances, prolong -ta of the neut. pi. to -eia for the sake of the metre (134 a) : as, 6£e?a Hes. Sc. 348, ade'ia Soph. Tr. 122 (so anioecv i'or amoev, Ap. Eh. 2. 404, danpv- oeiv Id. 4. 1291). 234. Of those words which belong to the general class of adjectives (173), the following have three terminations : 1. ) All participles : as, A vcov, 6eis , A vcras, eidtis (2(3). a. In particles, which partake of the verb and the adjective , a distinc¬ tion must be made between the stem, affix, connecting vowel, and flexible aiding of conjugation, and those of declension: thus, in Gen. Xvovtos, the stein of conjugation is \v~, and the affix -ovtos • while the stem of declen¬ sion is \vovr-, and the affix -cs. 2. ) All comparatives and superlatives in -os : as, aoftirepos, -ff, -ov , wiser ; aoffftirciTos, -g, -ov , wisest. 3. ) All numerals , except cardinals from 2 to 100 inclusive : as, dia<6 ^ lc ^ wo hands , vi. 1. 8 (the fem. form ra is especially rare, Soph. Ant. 769) ; tovtoj red ygepa, these two days, Cyr. 1. 2. 11 ; rovrotv 5./ to 7 v Kivyjeotv PI. Leg. 898 a ; 8vo tlvc eerrov Idea dpxovre Kai ayovre, oh evogeda • . . . tgutoj PI. Phsedr. 237 d ; ibovre nai iradovaa Soph. 0. C. 1676 ; nXyyi’vre 0. 455. f. On the other hand, a distinct form is sometimes given to the fem. in words in which it is commonly the same with the masc. : as, ddaudry K. 404, Isocr. 192 b, avrogarai iv. 3. 8, btaboxy Dem. 1206. 10, dypotpovy Tlieog. 11, 7ro\u£emV Pind. N. 3. 3, TroXvTtgyry Ar. Pax 978, for the common y dddvaros, &c. This use is especially Epic and Lyric. 235. To some adjectives, feminine forms are supplied from a kindred or derived stem. These forms may be either re¬ quired to complete the adjective, or they may be only special feminines, used (particularly in poetry and the dialects) by the side of forms of the common gender (174 b). The feminines thus supplied most frequently end in -is, G. -ibos (217 f), but also in -as, G. -ados, in -eta, -tipa, &c. Thus, a. Masculines in -r\s of Dec. 1, and in -€vs of Dec. 3, have often cor¬ responding feminines in -is, -i8os. These words are chiefly patrials and gentiles, or other personal designations, and are commonly used as sub¬ stantives. Thus, 6 iroXirys, -ov, belonging to a city ( 6eoi ttoXitcu vEsch. Tli. 253), citizen, y ttoXitls, -tdos • 6 inerys, y inerts, suppliant ; 6 UnvOys, y IkvOis, Scythian; 6 Xleyapevs, -ews, y Meyapts, Megarian. b. The compounds of &ros year (in -qs, -es of Dec. 3, but sometimes in -rjs, G. -ov of Dec. 1), have often a special fem. in -is, -i8os : as, o, y eirre- rys, to eirreres, seven years old, and y eirrerts, -tdos * rov ei^ery nai ryv e£e- rtv PI. Leg. 794 c ; rets rptaKovrovrets cnrovbds Th. 1. 23, but TpiaKovrovri- bwv U7 rovbuiu lb. 87. c. Some compounds in -r;s, -es have a poetic (particularly Epic) fem. in -eta : as, yptyevys, -es, early-born, y yptyeveta A. 477 ; ybveveta, Hes. Th. 965, OecnrieTreta Soph. 0. T. 463, govvoyeveta, Ap. Eh. 3. 847. d. Add o, y ttloju, and y irtetpa, to ttlov, fat; o irpeafivs, old, venerable, fem., chiefly poet., Trpeafiu, irpeapetpa, and TTpeafiyis • o, y ydnap, and y gdnatpa, blessed, poet. ; o, y tt poppwv, and Ep. y irpoppacrca K. 290, kind; 6, y evvartop, y einraTetpa and einrarepeta, Z. 292, of noble sire; and some others. 236. Irregular Adjectives. Among the adjectives which deserve special notice are the following : a. p-eycis great, and ttoXvs much (24). In these adjectives, the Nom. and Acc. sing. masc. and neut. are formed from the steins gey a- and 77 -oXe-, according to Dec. 3. The other cases are formed from the stems gcyaX- and ttoXX-, according to Dec. 1 and 2. The Yoc. geyaXe occurs once, TEscli. Th. 822. From its signification, 7roXds has no dual. In Hdt., the forms from ttoXXos prevail throughout, yet not to the entire exclusion of the other forms. The Epic forms (24 g) sometimes occur in the Attic poets. b. 6 irXews, y irXed, to TrXewv, full. The masc. and neut. are formed from s. 7r\a-, according to the Attic Dec. 2 (200) ; the fem. is formed from s. -Xe- (with Nom. pi. nXig in imitation of masc., according to some § 238. IRREGULAR DECLENSION. 185 editors, Soph. El. 1405). Ion. irXeos plenus, Ep. vXeiot, - 77 , -ov. So, likewise, in Att. writers, the neut. pi. 7 rXe'a Cyr. 7. 4. 6 , and the pi. compounds epirXeoL, IharXea Cyr. 6 . 2. 7, Trepi-n-Xca lb. 33 (but £/c 7 rXeco lb. 1 . 6 . 7). In like manner L'Xea PI. Pheedo 95 a, 1ST. pi. from i'Xews, -cov, contr. from iXaos, -ov. c. 6 irpdos (24 ; by some written vpaos, 109 a), mild, borrows fern, and plur. forms from srpilbs, which occurs Find. Py. 3. 125, while the Ion. neut. Trprji) is found Horn. Mar. 10. d. 6 , 77 eras, to atov, safe. In this adj., contract forms from s. aa- are blended with forms from s. and -coros, laughter- loving, j3ovicepco irapCevov, ‘heifer-horned,’ /Escli. Pr. 588. Shorter forms also occur, according to the common Dec. 2 : as, vrjnepoi hornless, lies. Op. 527. c. Adjectives in -is vary in declension like substantives (118). d. Among other examples of varied inflection, we notice the Homeric o’ t-s B. 819, and fus II. 464, good, brave, rb iu, ev, and rju, G. epos A. 393 (cf. 222 c), A. iuv and rjuv, G. pi. neuter edcov O. 528 ; 6 epirpos A. 266, 1 rusty, PI. ipiypes, epLypas, F. 47, 378 ; 6 woX'uppTjvos X. 257, rich in sheep, PI. iroXvpprjves I. 154 (cf. iroXvapvi, 238 d) ; cuttvs oXcQpos N. 773, "IXioc aiird O. 71, ’IXios alirecvr] X. 773, 7 rbXiv cdirqv N. 625, aiira. peedpa 0. 369, Wribaaov aiirr)eaaav d\ 87 ; apyqTi T. 419, dpyirc A. 818, dpyrjra and dp- y era ; apyi>4>sov 2. 50, dpyvcpov ii. 621 ; 7 rbXiv . . . eireiysov A. 129, ttjXlv evreixca II. 57 ; Tpoigv IpiPwXaKa T. 74, Tpo'rpv ipificoXov I. 329 ; woXvtXcis e. 171, ttoXvtXtiplcoi' a. 319, TroXvrXr)TOi X. 38. e. Examples of adjectives of double formation, or of synonymous adjec¬ tives with different forms, might be greatly multiplied. Of., in Eat., hilaris and liilarus, cheerful, implies and -etus, restless, opulens and -entus, opulent, pnecox, -coquis, and -coquus, precocious. 238. Among defective adjectives, wo notice, a.) The following, chiefly poetic : 6, rj doatcpvs, to aoatcpv, tearless, Acc. adcLKpvv (the other cases supplied by adaKporos, -ov) ; so TroXvScucpus tearful ; 6 srpetrpvs (for fern, see 235 d) old, as subst. elder, ambassador (in the last sense G. vpia^ecos Ar. Aeh. 93), A. irp^a^w, V. irpJcr^v * PI. irptcrfieis, Trpeapfls lies. Sc. 245, elders, ambassadors, G. irptafUecov, D. 186 NUMERALS. § 238. 7rpecrf3ecri, 7 rpecrfievaiv Lyc. 1056, A. irpecrfieLS, Dll. 7 rpea/3-tj Ar. Fr. 495 (tlie plur. in the sense of ambassadors was in common use ; otherwise, the word was almost exclusively poetic, and its place supplied by 6 irpeaffTr/s, old man, and 6 irpecrpevTris, ambassador) ; eks A. 387 (yet rapepbs fEsch. Th. 535), -e?at, -ea, thick, frequent ; Ipuo-dppaTcs . . . hriroL II. 370 ; ot TrXe'es A. 395, robs irXeas B. 129 = 7T, eaves, 7 rXeovas, more. d. ) Poetic oblique cases which have no corresponding Nom. : as, tov ovcrSdp.apTGs unhappily wedded, iEsch. Ag. 1319 ; KaXXi-ytivaiKos having beautiful women, Sapph. [135], 'EAAcUa KaXXiyvvaiKa B. 683 ; -iroXvapvt OvejTg B. 106 ; 'jroXvSfcVSpecro-i.v Eur. Bac. 560 ; {nfnKc'pExa irerpav Ar. Nub. 597 ; x*P r ;C Xtpv a > also PI. yep^es, yepija or yepeta, A. 80, A. 400, kc. (as fr. yep- hand, 224 f ; under the hand of, subject), inferior, worse. CHAPTER IY. NUMERALS. 239. I. Numeral Adjectives. Of numeral adjectives, tlie principal are, (1) the Cardinal, answering the question, 7 roVot; hou) many ? (2) the Ordinal, answering the question, ttootos; which in order ? or, one of how many ? (3) the Temporal, an¬ swering the question, ttocttcuos ; on what day ? or, in how many days ? (4) the Multiple (multiplex, having many folds), show¬ ing to what extent anything is complicated ; and (5) the Pro¬ portional, showing the proportion which one thing bears to another. a. See 52 for the most common numerals, with some of the interroga- tives, indefinites, diminutives, &c., which correspond to them. 240. 1. C ardinal. The first four cardinals (25), and those above 100 are declined; the latter as adjectives of Dec. 2 and 1. The rest are indeclinable. Cf. the Lat. cardinals. a. E Is, from its signification, is used only in the sing. ; dbu, only in the dual and pi. ; and the other cardinals only in the pi., except with col¬ lective nouns in such expressions as aenris p. vpLa mu Terpo^oo-ia, 10,400 in¬ fantry, i. 7. 10, imrov oKTaKLaxdXLgv, 8,000 horse, Hdt. 7. 85. §241. ADJECTIVES. ADVERTS. 187 b. E Is has two steins, 4v- and ju-. Its compounds oi/SeLs and prjdeis (written, with more strength, ovdi els, pr)8e els) have a plur. of the masc. or comm, gender. . c. The common form of the second cardinal is duo, shortened from the regular Sven. The Dat. pi. 5vaL, found in late writers and Hipp., also occurs (?) Th. 8. 101. Both 86o (8vu) and a.pio, both (which is placed in 25, as partaking of the nature of a numeral, with that of an emphatic pronoun), are sometimes indecl. (in Horn, never otherwise) : as, Svo irXe- Opiay i. 2. 23, mim ovo Th. 5. 4 (so rarely in Att. poets or with a dual noun, and oftener in the Gen. than in the Dat.) ; 8vo poipau; K. 253, dlnn Kavjveaai N. 407, x e P a ' LV apepw Horn. Cer. 15. d. In the derivatives from evvea, ewa-, for era-, is a less classic form. e. In reaaapeaxaidexa, and the later dexarecraapes, oexarpels, the rpels and rtaaapes are declined : Sexarpels, dexarpia, bexarpi 0>v • rols t e a a apa ixai- 8exa. Yet we sometimes find reaaapeaxaidexa, and later even reaaapaxai- dexa used as indeclinable ; as in Hdt. 1. 86, Mem. 2. 7. 2. The com¬ pounds from 13 to 19, both cardinal and ordinal, are often written sep¬ arately : as, rpels xai Sex a i. 5. 5, rpia xai Sexa Hdt. 1. 119, reaaapes xai oixa • rpirov xai dbxarov Th. 5. 56, reraprov xai denar ov, lb. 81, irtvre t) exxaidexa Cyr. 1. 4. 16, -irepurrri i) ex rrj xai Senary Hel. 4. 6. 6 ; also tv xai eixoarbv Th. 8. 109. f. The cardinals become collective or distributive by composition with auv • as, auvdvo blni, two tor/ether, or two at a time, vi. 3. 2, avvrpeis terni, t. 429, awSHSexa duodeni, Eur. Tro. 1076. The distributive sense is also expressed by means of the prepositions dm, xard, and, in some connec¬ tions, eis and eirl * as, e • A6yoi/s am exarov dvdpas, 6 companies, each 100 men, iii. 4. 21 ; xara rerpaxiaxlXiovs, 4,000 at a time, iii. 5. 8 ; eis exarov, 100 deep, Cyr. 6. 3. 23 ; eiri rerrapwv, 4 deep, i. 2. 15. g. The numeral pvpioi, 10,000, is distinguished from pvpioi, pi. of pv- pios vast, countless, with which it was originally one, by the accent. 2. The Ordinal Numbers are all derived from the cardinal, ex¬ cept TTpbbros, and are all of Dec. 2 and 1. They all end in -ros (Eng. -th), except bevrepos, epibopos, and o-ySoo? • and those from 20 , up¬ wards, all end in -oo-to's (Lat. -esimus). Cf. the formation of ordinals in Lat. and Eng. 3. The Temporal Nlumbers are formed from the ordinals by changing the final -os into - aios , -a, -ov: as, rpiros rpiraios , v. 3. 2, nepnros nepnraios, vi. 4. 9. From 7 rptoros, no temporal number is formed. Its place is supplied by avSypepos, -ov. 4. The Multiple Numbers end in - 7 rXdos, contracted - 7 rXovs (Lat. - plex ), and are declined like bmXoos, bnrXovs (23). 5. The Proportional Numbers have double forms, in -nXdaios, -a, -ov (Lat. -plus), and, more rarely, -nXaaicov, -ov , G. -ovos. Thus the ratio of 2 to 1 is expressed by binXciaios duplus, or bmXaalcov (but Sis roaavrrj Th. G. 37) ; and that of 10 to 1, by bexanXeiaios or bexauXauicov. The ratio of 1 to 1, or of equality, is expressed by ’lo-os (Ep. la os), - 77 , -ov. 241. II. Numeral Adverbs, a. The numeral adverbs which reply to the interrogative noadxis ; how many times ? all end in -axis (Lat. - ies ), except the three first: as, bexdxis decies, ten times , evvea- KaietKoaixaienraxoaionXacridKis 729 times , PI. liep. 578 e. 188 NUMERALS. SUBSTANTIVES. §241. b. These adverbs are employed in tlie formation of the higher cardinal and ordinal numbers: as, deaxiXLoi bis inille, 2,000, irevraKLax'-Xt.ocrTos 5,000 th ; also written* separately, as rerpams yap %/Xtot Th. 6. 31. c. Other numeral adverbs relate to division , order . place , manner , &C.: as, diya or Six?), poet, fitydd, in two divisions , rpt'^a, -y?), or -ydd, in 3 divisions; beurepov secondly, rpirov third/?/ ; rpiyoG in 3 places, 7revTaxmv, and the Ion. acpia. are added in 27 a. 244. 2. Refl EXIVE, epavrov aeavrov , eavrov. These pro- nouns, from their nature, want the Nom., and the two first also the neuter. They are formed by joining the personal pro¬ nouns with avTos. a. In the plur. of the 1st and 2d Persons, and often of the 3d, the two elements remain distinct : ypdv avrCjv. Otherwise, the old Direct Case of the personal pronoun unites with the forms of avr6s ; while, in the 1st Pers., and often in the other two, contraction takes place : ( epe-avrov) epavrov, ae-avrou aavrov, e-avrov avrov. 3. Reciprocal. This pronoun is formed by doubling a\\os, other : aWrj'Kcav, for dXXdAAam. From its nature, it wants the Nom. and the sing., and is not common in the dual. 245. 4. Indefinite, 6 Selva. This pronoun may be termed, with almost equal propriety, definite and indefinite. a. 11 is used to designate a particular person or thing, which the speaker either cannot, or does not care to name ; in the language of Matthiae, it “ indefinitely expresses a definite person or thing ” : Toy Selva yiyvJjaieeis ; Do you knotv Mr. So and So 1 Ar. Th. 620. O Selva rod Selvos rbv Selva eijayyeWeL, A. B., the son of C. D., impeaches E. F., Dem. 167. 24. In the sing, this pronoun is of the three genders ; in the plur. it is nia.se. only, and wants the Dat. It is sometimes indeclinable : as, rod Se'.va Ar. Th. 622, 190 SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. § 245. b. The article is ail essential part of this pronoun ; and it were better written as a single word, oSetva. It appears to be simply an extension of the demonstrative ode, by adding -tv- or -ivct, which gives to it an in¬ definite force (cf. 253 b), making it a demonstrative indefinite. When -iv- was appended, it received a double declension ; when -iva, it had only the declension of the article. It belongs properly to the colloquial Attic, and first appears in Aristophanes. 246. History, a. The distinction of person, like those of case and number (186 b, c), appears to have been at first only twofold, merely sep¬ arating the person speaking from all other persons, whether spoken to or spoken of. We find traces of this early use not only in the roots common to the 2d and 3d Persons, but also in the dual forms of the verb common to these persons. b. The most natural way of designating one’s self by gesture is to bring home the hand ; of designating another, to stretch it out towards him. The voice here follows the analogy of the hand. To denote ourselves, we naturally keep the voice at home as much as is consistent with enunciation ; while we denote another by a forcible emission of it, a pointing , as it were, of the voice towards the person. The former of these is accomplished by closing the lips and murmuring within, that is, by uttering m, which hence became the great root of the 1st personal pronouns : (xe, Lat. and languages derived from it, Saxon, &c., me, Germ, mich, Sans, md, Zend mam ; verb-endings -pi, -pen, Lat. -m, -mus, -mur, Sans, -mi, -mas, &c. The latter is accomplished by sending the voice out forcibly through a narrow aperture. This, according to the place of the aperture, and the mode of emission, may produce either a sibilant, a lingual, or a strong breathing. Hence we find all these as roots of the 2d and 3d personal pronouns : ere, g, Fe • Art. 6, to • verb-endings, -s, -t, -tc, -tcv, -treu, -tcu, -crGe • Lat. tc, sc, vos, hie, -s, -t, -tis, -tar ; Sans, tvd, sa, tat, -si, -ti, -tha, -se, -ti; Eng. thou, he, she, the, -eth, -s, &c. In the progress of language, these two persons were separated, and their forms became, for the most part, distinct, although founded, in general, upon common roots. c. The p- of the 1st Pers. passed in the old plur. (which afterwards be¬ came the dual, 186 g) into the kindred v- (cf. Lat. nos ) ; and in the sing., when pronounced with emphasis, assumed an initial u (cf. /Eol. daefn, acrcpe), which passed by precession into c. In the new plur., the idea of plurality was conveyed by doubling the p (a/x/x-, in the Ep. and xEol. cfixges, a/ifie, &c.) ; or more commonly by doubling the u to i] (115 a), pronounced with the rough breathing (f[p-, in pixels, &c.), or, in the Dor., to d ('dp-, in 'a/x^s, &c.). d. From this the new plur. of the 2d Pers. appears to have been formed, by changing, for propriety of expression, a, the deepest of the vowels, into v, the most protrusive (vpp-, in the Ep. and TEol. v/a/aes, &c. ; and '6p-, in pixels, &c.). With the exception of this imitative plural, the plur. and dual of the 2d and 3d Persons have the same root, in which plurality is expressed by joining two of the signs of these persons (o-(f>- = cr + f, the latter remaining in the Lat. vos). In the separation of the two persons, the sign cr- became appropriated to the pronoun of the 2d Pers. (but in the Dor., t-, as in the Lat., and also in the verb-endings -tc, -tov, -tis) ; and the rough breathing to that of the 3d Pers. (in an early state of the language, this was F-, 247 a ; in Lat. it became s-; while in the article we find both the rough breathing and t-, and in verb-endings of the 3d Pers. both cr, and more frequently t). § 247. HISTORY. DIALECTIC FORMS. 191 e. In the Horn. sing., the subjective force appears to have been ex¬ pressed by peculiar inodes of strengthening ; in the 1st Pers. by a double prefix to the p, thus, i-y-o-g (the y being inserted simply to prevent hia¬ tus), or, as p cannot end a word, iyov, which would pass, by the familiar change of v to its corresponding vowel and contraction (142), into (eyoa) iyuj (cf. Sans, a ham, Zend azem, Dor. and Ep. eyJjv, Boeot. Ujv, iu, Lat. ego, Ital. io, Germ, icli, Engl. I, and the verb-ending of the 1st Pers. -to, Lat. -o) ; in the 2d Pers. by affixing f, which with the preceding € passed into v in the common Greek (cf. 217 b), but in the Boeot. into ov (cf. Lat. tu, 92 b) ; in the 3d Pers. perhaps by affixing A, before which precession took place (217 f), so that the form became Ft A, and from this, LA or LA, and, by dropping the A, l' or l (this obsolete form is cited by Apollonius ; cf. Lat. is, ca, id). With this Nom. there appears to have been associated an Acc. tv or tv, of which giv and vlv are strengthened forms. For the other substantive pronouns, see 244, 245. 247. Dialects. The dialectic forms of the Personal Pro¬ nouns arise chiefly, a. ) From variation of stem: as, Dor. and TEol. r- for v, dp iv Theoc. 2. 158, 5. 106 , ape Ar. Lys. 95 ; Dor. <{>-, \J/-, TEol. ao-4-, for crc{>-, Alcm. 16, eo B. 239 ; ygtes Hdt. 2. 6, dgtes Id. 6. 11 ; ygeiov I\ 101, ageevv Theoc. 8. 25, aggeuv Ale. 77, vgewv Hdt. 3. 50, vggi ojv Ale. 77, crepeojv Hdt. 1. 31 ; ygeas lb. 30, vgeas ( 3 . 75, a (peas Hdt. 1.4; vue Cor. 16, acpw'e A. 8 ; (with precession, in imitation of the Gen.) vui'i A. 418, aC A. 336 ; vCj'lv X. 88, crcpCj'Cv A. 257, crepcotv A. 338 : egeu A. 88, geu Hdt. 7. 209, creu Id. 1. 9, ev T. 464, rev • egv, v (cf. 20 b), rod Cor. 2 (246 e). c. ) From lengthening or repeating the connective (134 a, 135) : epeto A. 174, creto F. 137, elo A. 400 ; fueicov E. 258, vgeiojv A. 348, acpeiwv A. 535, aepeias v. 213 : ee T. 171, eot X. 495, eeto (v. 1. eoto) Ap. Rh. 1. 1032, reelo (v. 1. reoto) 0. 37, reov Sojdir. 76. d. ) From want of a connective : ages Alcm. 58, a ages ga t Z. 77, vgg K. 551, a T. 300. e. ) From the retention oiprimitive forms having no flexive : dp', vge, iigge, Ar. Lys. 95, 87, 1076, dgge A. 59, dgge T r . 412, crepe A. 111. f. ) From the use of different endings: as, Gen. Ep. -0ev (192), egedev, credev, edev, A. 525, 180, 114, gedev Sophr. 46 ; Gen. Dor. and Boeot. -os (186 e), egeos and cont. igevs, revs, Epich., reos Soplir. 75, egous, reous, eous (c), Cor. ; Dat. sing. Dor. and Boeot. -fv, egLv Theoc. 2. 144, reiV 8. 619, tLv Pind. O. 5. 16, itv Cor., tv or tv Hes. Fr. 66 ; Acc. sing, -v, gtv A. 29, Hdt. 1. 9, viv Pind. O. 1. 40 (246 e), so Dor. tlv Theoc. 11. 39 ; Dat. pi. -ci(v, dggecnv Ale. 91 [78]. g. ) From the retraction of the accent, or shortening the last syllable, or both ; and also from an extension of enclitic use: h/glv (v. 1. r/giv) A. 147, figiv (v. 1. vgiv) a. 373, fjgiv (v. 1. rjgiv) A. 344, 9/gas (v. 1. ygas) 7 r. 372, vgeuv (v. 1. ugeuv) O. 494 ; acpeuv S. 311, crepeas B. 96, crepds E. 567. Cf. i. li.) Add the strengthened Nom. forms eyJjv A. 76 (in Horn, only before 192 ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. § 247. a vowel), tvvt] E. 485 (so Dor. eywvy, as if the particle vy, truly, were added to the pronoun ; cf. £yuye, avye) ; the Boeot. Nom. twv, i'w (246 e), strengthened 'alovya (130 b) Cor. 12, iwya Ar. Acli. 898 ; the Dor. Nom. tv used also as Ace. (cf. 186 c) Tlieoc. 1. 56 ; and the Ion. Acc. neut. pi. ocpea Hdt. 1. 46. i. Some of these forms are also found in the Attic poets : as, eyuv Abseil. Pers. 931 ; eyedev Eur. Or. 986, credeu Id. Ale. 51, edev iEsch. Sup. 66 ; vLv (often, and without distinction of number or gender) Id. Pr. 55, Soph. El. 436, yiv (rarely) TEscli. Til. 453, Soph. Tr. 388, (often ; also in sing.) Id. Ant. 44,; vyye lb. 846, aylv rEscli. Eum. 347 ; yylv or ryjuv Soph. El. 17, 41, vyiv or vyiv Id. Ant. 308, fjyas Id. Aj. 21, vyas lb. 1274 (v. 1. yyas, vyas), aepas lb. 839. This retraction of the accent be¬ longs especially to Sophocles. 248. Reflexive Pronouns. In these the New Ionic compounds the Genitive of the personal pronouns with the forms of avros, contracting oav into ion (131 e) : €ye(o-av)ojvrov, eyecovrys, eyewvru). In Horn., the elements are always distinct : as, 'ey avrbv K 271, aoi avripY. 51, £ avryv E. 162. The Dor. doubles avros to make the forms avravrov, kc., which occur chielly in Pythagorean fragments. Apollonius cites the sportive Nom. eyavrbs from the Metceci of the comedian Plato. II. ADJECTIVE (28). 249. All the pronouns which are declined in 28, may be traced back to a common foundation in an old definitive, which had two roots, the rough breathing and r- (cf. 246 b, d), and which performed the offices both of an article and of a demonstrative , personal , and relative yoronoun. a. To this definitive the Greeks gave the name apdpov, artus, joint, from its giving connection to discourse, by marking the person or thing spoken of as one which had been spoken of before, or which was about to be spoken of further, or which was familiar to the mind. The Greek name dpOpov became, in Latin, articulus, small joint, from which has come the English name, article. b. This definitive, when used as a demonstrative, or simply as the dejinite article, naturally precedes the name of the person or thing spoken of; but when used as a relative, usually follows it : as, oSros eanv 6 dv))p ov etSes, this is THE man WHOM you saw; to p'obov 8 dvOei, THE rose WHICH blooms. Hence, in the former use, it was termed the 'prepositive, and in the latter, the postpositive article. When prepositive, it was so closely connected with the following word that its aspirated forms became proclitic. Compare the different uses of the Germ, der, the Anglo-Saxon se, the Eng. that, &c. c. In the progress of the language, the forms of this old definitive became specially appropriated, though with many exceptions in the dia¬ lects and poets, and some even in Attic prose (see Syntax) ; and other pronouns arose from it by derivation and composition. The forms ros and ry of the Nom. sing, became obsolete. Special care is required in distinguishing the forms of 6 , os, o3, ris, and rls. Forms which have the same letters may be often distinguished by the accentuation (see Prosody) : as, ol, ol, ot. Special care is also required in distinguishing the forms of odros, those of avros, the combined forms of 6 avrbs, the same, and the contracted forms of eavrov, § 253. DEFINITE. 193 A. Definite. 250. 1. Article, 6 , ?), to. The prepositive article, or, as it is commonly termed simply, the article , unites the proclitic aspirated forms of the old definitive, 6, ?/, of, of, with the r- forms of the neuter, the oblique cases , and the 2. Relative, 6'?, rj, 6. The postpositive article , or, as it is now commonly termed, the relative pronoun, has the orthotone aspirated forms of the old definitive. See 78G, 788 g. 251. 3. Iterative, avros, -?}, -o'. This pronoun appears to he compounded of the particle av, again, bach , and the old definitive ros (249 c). It is hence a pronoun of return (or, as it may be termed, an iterative pronoun), marking the return of the mind to the same person or thing. a. The article and avros are often united by crasis (125) : as, avros, the. same, ravrov (199 a) or ravro (Ion. tojvto Hdt. 1. 53, § 131 e), ravrov, rav- ra, for 6 avros, to avro, rov avrov, ra avra. 252. 4. Demonstrative. The primary demonstratives are ovtos, this, compounded of the article and avros • ofie, this, compounded of the article (declined as usual) and fie, an in¬ separable particle marking direction towards ; and eseivos, that, derived from eoL, vvvlevravdi, hvrevdevi. So, in comic language, even with an inserted particle, wy/awi Ar. Av. 448, isyeravdi Id. Th. 646, evixevrevOevi Ath. 269 f. See 163 a. 5. Possessive. The possessive pronouns are derived in Greek, as in other languages, from the personal; and are REV. GR. 9 M ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. lot arranged in 28 according to the person and number of the pro* nouns from which they are formed. e. 'llgerepos has a distinct Yoc. 0. 31 : <3 irdrcp T]p.lrepe KpovLSr]. B. Indefinite. 253. 1. The simple indefinite is rh, which has two stems : tlv-, declined throughout after Dec. 3 ; and re-, declined in the Gen. and Dat. only, after Dec. 2 (except that the Gen. sing, imitates the personal pronouns) with contraction : thus, fits, ft (the v omitted as in the theme, 208 d), fiu'os, &c. : G. reo tov Cyr. 8. 5. 7, tov ; Soph. 0. T. 1435, D. recp rep A. 299, i. 9. 7, r£ ; Soph. El. 679 ; and, in the compound, otov i. 9. 21, ^Escli. Pr. 170, lirep ii. 6. 23, PL G. orewv ot(j)v vii. 6. 24, D. oreois otols Soph. Tr. 1119, otolcu Ar. E

Tepos, -otcltos. b. The change to -to- takes place to avoid the succession of too many short syllables. Epic verse admits only two short syllables in succes¬ sion. Some exceptions to the rule occur in the poets for the sake of the metre : as, KaKo^etvxrepos v. 376, Xapdoraros (3. 350, 6i£vpurepov P. 446 ; dvaxorydiTepa Eur. Ph. 1348, evreKvwTare Id. Hec. 620. Some except Ktvbs empty, and arevbs narroio (as having also the forms seivas and , -taros. 260 . A few adjectives are compared by -icov and -to-To?, commonly adding these to the root of the word. a. In adducing examples, a noun or verb will sometimes be introduced, as showing well the base : xaxos bad, Katduv, Kastaros • fjSvs pleasant (■fjSco to please), ybtwv, -taros • aterxpos shameful (alcryos shame), ataxiuv, -Xurros • so ixdpos hostile, Kvdpos glorious, poet., and in Sup. oUrpospiti¬ able (t-X^os hatred, xvSos glory, oIxtos pity), exBieov, Kvbitou, otieriaros • aXyeuvos painful (ILXyos pain), aXyuov, -ytaros • xepSaXe'os gainful (xe'pSos gain), poet. Kepbtuv, -dtaros • xaXos beautiful (xd.XX.os beauty), kclXXLcov, -taros • (peX t-, akin to /3eXos, weapon T), fieXr'uov melior, better, (3eXr taros best. b. This was an early method of comparison, retained in a few common words, and in poetic forms of some others. For the declension of com¬ paratives in -wVj see 22, 211. The i in -icov is regularly long in the Att. poets, but short in the Epic and Doric. Yet fjbXov Fur. Sup. 1101. 261 . The different forms of the Comp, in -cov are well ex¬ plained by reference to -Icov as their common origin, and to the various changes of the consonant I. Thus, we notice, besides the use of the corresponding vowel t, a. ) Contraction (sometimes with transposition), or omission between two vowels (142, 140) : as, iroXvs much (base woXe-, sync. wXe-), wXetuv or wXeuv more, wXetaros most, Lat. plus, plurimus ; fnxpos small (ye-) yeluv minor, rare poet, ye tar os minimus ; paSios easy {pa-) pq.wv, pharos (Ion. prjtojv, pijtaros, 5. 565) ; (Xco-, akin to "Dor. Xtb to desire, neut. pi. Xc ota desirable, Theoc. 26. 32) Xuttov, /?. 169, Att. Xuynv, vi. 2. 15, Xtparos ; (dp-, ape-, in aperr) virtus, valor, virtue) dpe'iwv poet., braver, better, dpt- aros best ; (apev-, cf. amoenus) dyeIvuv better ; (xep- or X €l P"> 238 d) x e ' L P (av (Ep. xepeiwv A. 114) inferior, worse, xet/nerros. b. ) The change into crcr (tt) or £ (143 c), the preceding vowel, if short, now becoming long by nature: as, tux^s swift, ( Qax -, 159b; Bax Io>v) ddaauv or darruv, rax^ros • IXaxvs Ep., small, eXaaawv, iXaxwros • paxpos long ( yuK-, yys-), yaaawv poet., yystaros • xpartis Ep., strong, {Kparluv) Kpe'taatov, Kpdrtaros {Kpeaauv, Hdt. 1. 66, Kaprtaros, A. 266, § 134, 171) ; oXCyos little, oXXfav Ep., dXtytaros - pe'-yas magnus, great, yeifav major (Ion. yefav Hdt. 1. 202), yeytaros maximus. c. Some Comparatives have a double form in -uov and -cro-cov * as, (Upabvs bardus, slow, fipabLui', Hes. Op. 526, /3 pdaawv K. 226 ; waxds pin- guis, fat, waxLw Arat. 785, wdaawv, f. 230. d. Ot the Comp, forms irXeCwv and TrXecov, the Attic uses more the 198 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. § 261 . former, especially in the contracted cases ; but in the neut. sing., prefers 7 rXeou, especially as an adverb. It sometimes syncopates v-Xelou to TrXeiv, but only in such phrases as n-Xeiv y yupioc, more than 10,000. Hdt. pre¬ fers irXewv, often contracting eo to ev : as, irXevv, 7r\ei>os. The Epic varies according to the metre. e. Most adjectives compared by - up, avoir epos upper, avoir aro\ uppermost , Hdt. 2. 125 (cf. 263 ; so Karoo down, -c orepos, -oiraros, Cyr. 6. 1. 52 ; and late forms fr. ^oi without, £aoi within, and irpoaoi forward, i^dbrepos exterior, &c.) ; ppepa quietly, ypeyeorepos more quiet , Cyr. 7. 5. § 204 . OF ADVERBS. HISTORY. 199 63 ; Trpovp-ycv of importance, irpoupy io.lt epos more important, PI. Gorg. 458 c, irpoiipycaLraTos - ex, out of, eax aT °s (104) extremus, uttermost; irpo prse, before, repbrepos prior, former, irpuros (257 e) primus, first; in rep super, OVER, vireprepos superior, virepraros and inraros supremus, highest ; vtto (?) sub, sus-, below, (jjrepos later, vararos last. e. We find explanations of the formations in d, in the use of preposi¬ tions as adverbs, and of adverbs as adjectives ; in the fact that many nouns were originally adjectives ; and in the still more important fact, that in the earliest period of language there was as yet no grammatical distinction of the different parts of speech. Add, as poetic forms which may be traced to nouns, KyduxTos, I. 642, novpbrepos, A. 316, piyLuv, -lcttos, A. 325, pvxaros, pvxoLTaros (p. 146, oirXpTepos, -raros, B. 707, xpecrorepos, S.ip. 39 [96], kc. ; and, to adverbs, depdprepos, X F. 311, reprepos, Eur. Pli. 1020, oiriaTepos, -raros, 0. 342, irapolrepos, -raros, x P. 459, 7 repairepcs, Pilld. O. 9. 159, v piregos, Theoc. 8. 46, vpluv Pind. Fr. 232, vpnaros, yEsch. Pr. 720, &c. II. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 263. Adverbs derived |om adjectives are com¬ monly compared by taking the neuter singular com¬ parative , and the neuter plural superlative of these adjectives ; but other adverbs by -repco and -rdreo : as ? corals (fr. sos (aaepys, 258) evidently, aaepearepov, (raepearara • alcryptos (aicrxpbs, 260 a) basely, a’iaxfov, aiaxarr a ' Ta\c«S (raxes, 261 b) quickly, daucrov, daTTOv, rdxicrra ’ & va> u Pi dvwrepw, dvurdru • tKas afar, poet, and Ion. eracrrlpu, eKacrraru. a. Adverbs from which adjectives are formed are sometimes compared in the first method : as, o\pe late, nput early, 6\piairepov, -rara, kc. (257 d). So paXa very, p.aXXov (143 a), pcaXiara. b. The adverbial Sup. has sometimes the neut. sing, form, chiefly when denoting time or place : as, irpuror Kal vararov, first and last, PI. Menex. 247 a. c. The adverbial termination -o>s is sometimes given to the Comp. ; and, rarely, to the Sup.: as, x^^vurepus more severely, Th. 2. 50, pet,£6- vus Th. 4. 19, %\jvt opuTa.Tus most concisely, Soph. O. C. 1579. d. Some adverbs vary in their comparison : as, iyyvs near, eyyvrepu, iyyvrdru • tyyvrepov, eyyvrara • less Att. Zyyiov, Zyyiara • &yX L 01 ' u.yX 0 ^ poet, and Ion., near, daaov A. 335 (143 c), dyx^ra yEscli. Sup. 1036, dacrorepu (cf. 261 f) p. 572, dyxorario Hdt. 2. 24. 264. History of Comparison - , a. So far as we can trace com¬ parison in the Greek, it appears to have commenced with an emphatic annexation of the old article, in its strong form tos, to the stem of the positive, with a connecting vowel where needed : as, vl-a-ros, the new one, i. e. the newest ; p£t\os, iAairepos. The two Greek forms are mingled in the Lat. -ior; and the r appears also in the Germ, and Eng. : long for, 1 anger, longer. The Sanskrit has analogies to the forms of both Greek and Lat. comparison. Its prevalent form is Comp, -tarns (-repos), Sup. -tamas (-tci-tos, -i-mys). CHAPTER VII. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF CONJUGATION. 265. Verbs are conjugated, in Greek, to mark five distinctions : Voice, Tense, Mode, Number, and Person. Of these distinctions, the first shows how the action of a verb is related to its subject; the second, how it is related to time ; and the third, how it is related to the mind of the speaker , or to some other action. The two remaining dis¬ tinctions merely show the number and person Of the subject. See 802. a. These distinctions are marked by prefixes, by affixes, and also, to some extent, by changes in the stem. For a general view of the distinctions, see 30 ; for the particulars, see Syntax. For the prefixes and affixes, see 31 s, and Chapters VIII. and IX. ; for changes in the stem, see 49 and Ch. X. 266. A. Voice. The Greek has three voices: the Active, Middle, and Passive (30 a). VOICE. TENSE. 201 § 267 . a. The Middle is so called as intermediate between the Active and Passive, representing the subject of the verb not only as acting, but also as, more or less directly, acted upon: as, from Xoua>, io wash, fXovo-dprju I washed myself , I bathed. b. The middle and passive voices have a common form, ex¬ cept in the Future and Aorist. In Etymology, this form is usually spoken of simply as passive, or as middle. Even in the Future and Aorist, the distinction in sense between the two voices is not always preserved. c. The reflexive sense of the middle voice often becomes so indistinct, that this voice does not differ from the active in its use. Hence, in many verbs, either wholly or in part, the mid¬ dle voice taken the place of the active. This is particularly frequent in the Future. When it occurs in the theme (172 e), the verb is termed deponent (deponens, as if putting off its proper sense to take that of another voice). E. g. 1. ) Verbs, in which the theme has the active, and the Future has the middle form : clkov o> to hear, duotijopaLi * fiaLvco gt, (HrjcrojLuu • yiyccbcKOJ Tcnoic, yviixro/mi • elyl be, taoyai • fiavddvw learn, /xadr/aojuai.. 2. ) Deponent Verbs : aiaOdvo/iai to perceive, fioOXopcu will, ylyvo/uu become, S^^o.oat receive, dvmiicu be able, ydo.uai rejoice, olo/lcu think. d. A Deponent Verb is termed deponent middle, or deponent passive, according as its Aorist has the midtile or the passive form. e. The traces of a middle voice in Latin appear in the large number of deponent verbs, and in the use of the passive voice in some verbs : as, volutor, I roll myself, wallow, revertor, I turn myself back, return, mereor, I merit for myself. 267. B. Texse. The Greek has seven tenses : the Present, Imperfect, Future, Aorist, Per¬ fect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect. a. Tenses may be classified in two ways : I. with respect to the time which is spoken of; II. with respect to the relation which the action bears to this time. b. I. The time which is spoken of is either, 1. present , 2. future, or 3. past. The reference to time is most distinct in the Indicative. In this mode, those tenses which refer to jiresent or future time are termed primary or chief tenses ; and those which refer to past time, secondary or historical tenses. c. II. Tho action is related to the time, either, 1. as doing at the time, 2. as done in the time, or 3. as complete at the time. The tenses which denote the first of these relations are termed definite; the second, indefinite; and the third, complete. key. gk. 9* TENSE. 202 CONJUGATION. - § 207. These constitute three great formations, or classes of forms, in the Greek verb. d. The Aorist (dupio-ros indefinite ) represents an action simply as performed. Its place is chiefly supplied in the Latin by the Perfect. Thus k'ypafa scripsi, I wrote. e. Of the Future Perfect (also called the Third Future , and in old grammars the Paulo-post Future ), the simple form is found in only a few verbs ; and, with this exception, this tense and those which are marked in 30 as wanting, viz. the indefinite present and the definite future , are supplied by forms belong¬ ing to other tenses, or by participles combined with auxiliary verbs. f. For the general formation of the Greek tenses, see 31. In respect to the details of formation, they are naturally asso¬ ciated in six systems : 1. the Present , or Definite System , in¬ cluding the Pres, and Impf. ; 2. the Future System, including the Fnt. ‘Act. and Mid.; 3. the Aorist System, including the Aor. Act. and Mid. ; 4. the Perfect (or Perfi Act.) System , in¬ cluding the Perf. and Plup. Act. ; 5. the Perfect Passive System, including the Perf. and Plup. Pass, and Mid., and the Fut. Perf.; and 6 . the Compound System , including the Aor. and Fut. Pass., which are formed with an auxiliary (274). Of these systems, the 1st belongs to the great definite formation; the 2d, 3d, and 6th, to the indefinite ; and the 4th and 5th, to the complete. For the so-called second systems, see 289 b. 268. In some verbs the sense of the complete tenses, by a natural transition, passes into that of other tenses; and the Perfect becomes, in signification, a Present ; the Pluperfect, an Imperfect or Aorist ; and the Future Perfect, a common Future. Thus, larypi (45) to station, Perf. 7crr^ I shall stand ; pipvfprKco to remind, Perf. Pass, pepvrjpcu [I have been reminded) l remember, Plup. epfpvrjprjv I remembered, Fut. Perf. p^pfian/uu I shall remember. a. In a few of these verbs, the Pres, is not used, and the Perf. is regarded as the theme. Such verbs, as having a preterite tense for the theme, are termed r iieteiutive. In like manner, those Perfect systems in which the Perf. is used in the sense of the Pres, may be termed, for convenience, prctcritive systems ; and even a Perf. so used, a Preteritivc. 269. C. Mode. The Greek has six modes: the Indicative, Subjunctive, Optative, Impera¬ tive, Infinitive, and Participle. $ 270. MODE. NUMBER AND PERSON. 203 a. For a table of these modes, classified according to the character of the sentences which they form, see 30 c. b. In the regular inflection of the Greek verb, the Pres, and Aor. have all the modes; but the Fut. and the Fut, Perf. want the Sub¬ junctive and Imperative ; and the Perf., for the most part, wants the Subjunctive and Optative, except as supplied by compound forms, and likewise, in the active voice, the Imperative. c. The tenses of the Subjunctive and Optative are related to each other as present and past, or as primary and secondary , tenses (267 b) ; and some have therefore chosen to consider them as only different tenses of a general conjunctive , or contingent mode, calling the Pres, and Perf. Opt. the Imperfect and Pluperfect Conjunctive. With this change, the number and general offices of the Greek modes are the same with those of the Latin, and the correspondence between the Greek conjunctive and the English potential modes becomes more obvious. In the Infinitive and Participle, the forms called Present and Perfect belong also to the Imperfect and Pluperfect. Without changing familiar names, the relations of the modes and tenses are illustrated by the arrangement in 37. The Imperative, from its very signification, cannot belong to a past tense. d. The passive verbal adjectives in -tos and -reos (Lat. -tus and -ndus), as closely akin to participles, are often included in tables of inflection. In the form of the stem, they commonly agree with the Aor. in -d/ 71 /, except as a preceding mute is changed before r (147) : as, SyeTrreos, fr. Tpecfico to nourish , Aor. edpe(p6r]v. 270. D. Number and Person. The numbers and persons of verbs correspond to those of nouns and pronouns (265). a. The Imperative, from its signification, wants the first person ; the Infinitive, from its character as partaking of the nature of an ab¬ stract noun, wants the distinctions of number and person altogether; and the Participle, as partaking of the nature of an adjective, has the distinctions of gender and case, instead of person. b. The 1st Pers. sing, of the Pres, ind ., is commonly regarded as the theme of a verb (172 e) ; while, in adding its meaning, the Eng. Inf. is more frequently used : as, \vco to loose (yet also, 1 loose , or simply, loose). The stem is obtained by throwing off the affix of the theme , or it may be obtained from any form of the verb, by throwing off the prefix and affix, and allowing for euphonic changes. A verb is conjugated by adding to the stem the prefixes and affixes in 35 and 36. c. Verbs are divided, according to the stem-mark, or characteristic, into Mute, Liquid, Double Consonant, and Pure Y erbs ; and, ac¬ cording to the affix in the theme, into Verbs in -co, and Verbs in -pi. For a full paradigm of regular conjugation, see \voo (37) ; for shorter paradigms of the several classes of verbs, see 39 s. d. In Ai ju, the v is short in the Perf., the Plup., and the Compound System ; but otherwise, long in the common language. In Homer, it is commonly short in the Pres, and Impf. 204 CONJUGATION. HISTORY. §271. HISTORY OF GREEK CONJUGATION. 271. a. The early history of Greek conjugation can be traced only in the same way with that of declension (186). The following view is offered as one which has much in its support, and which serves to explain the general phenomena of the Greek verb, with those of the Latin in large part. b. Greek conjugation, like declension (186 b), was progressive. At first, the root was used, as in nouns, without inflection. The first dis¬ tinction appears to have been that of person, which was, at first, only twofold, affixing jx, to express the first person, and a lingual or sibilant to express the other two. Of this second pronominal affix, the simplest and most demonstrative form appears to have been -t (cf. 246, 249). By unit¬ ing these affixes with the root 4>a-, to say, we'have the forms, ejxjfx, / or we say, a.T, you, he, she, or they say. A plural was then formed by affixing the plural sign v (186 c), with the insertion of t to assist in the utterance. Thus, 1 Person, Sing, (pa jx 2 and 3 Persons, S. (par Plur. 0ct|xev P. : thus, -tw (Lat. -to). In the objective inflection, -tw naturally becomes -trGco (271. 2 ; in Lat., by ad¬ dition, -tor, 271. 3). The old plur., afterwards the dual, was formed by adding the plur. sign v (271 b) : -tcov, -cr0a>v. The new plur. was still further strengthened by prefixing v (which in the obj. form would make no change, cf. 272 a), or by adding the later plur. ending o-av (275 c) instead of v : -vtwv or -two-civ, (-r b o -OIVTO, &C. Imperative. 2 P. 3 P. 2 P. 3 P. s. Xey-e9 -£TW Xey-ftro -€O-0a> leg-c -ito 1 eg-ere -itor p. Xey-€T€ -ovtcov, -€Twcrav Xey-€o-a Xe7o-afi€vo$ § 273. FUTURE AND AORIST. COMPLETE TENSES. 209 c. The use of a as a connective in the Aor. may have arisen in the fol¬ lowing way, akin to that suggested for Dec. 1 (189) : The flexive |i of the 1 Pers. sing, appended directly to the tense-stern could not remain, and passed into its corresponding vowel a. This was then adopted as the con¬ necting vowel required in the tense (except in the 3 Pers. sing, of the Ind., where t may perhaps have given place in like manner to the cor¬ responding £, and in the Subjunctive, 272. 2). If we now class the a and e with connectives, these persons are left without flexible endings ; and the want of them, without the lengthening of a vowel as in the present, is thus readily explained. The Latin furnishes a close analogy iii its form in -i, which was both Aor. and Perf. : scripsi, 1 wrote or have written. The Sanskrit Aor., on the other hand, retained or resumed the flexive m of the 1st Pers., as well as the t of the 3d : S. 1 adiksham ede^a dixi, I showed , 2 adikshas £5et£as dixisti, 3 adikshat edefe dixit. Some prefer, in Greek, to regard the flexives p. and r as here simply dropped ^160). d. In many verbs, by a change of stem, a new Pres, and Impf. were formed, which expressed more specifically the action as doing; and in some of these verbs, the old Secondary Tense, with the cognate forms in the other modes, remained as an Aorist (called, for distinction’s sake, the Second Aorist, 289 a) ; and in a few, the old Primary, as a Future (305 f). e. The complete tenses appear to have been later in their development. These tenses, in their precise import, represent the state consequent upon the completion of an action {tqj eiricrToX'qv yey papa, I have the letter writ¬ ten), or in other words they represent the action as done, but its effect remaining. This idea was naturally expressed by an initial reduplication (280). These tenses admit a threefold distinction of time, and may ex¬ press either present, past, or future completeness. The present complete tense (the Perfect) naturally took the primary endings ; the past complete tense (the Pluperfect), the augment and the secondary endings ; and the future complete tense (the Future Perfect), the common future affixes. In the Perf. and Plup., the objective endings were affixed without a con¬ necting vowel; and, of course, with many euphonic changes : as, tc-t/h/3- pcu T^rpippai., Te-ray-pcu, we-Treed-pen ireiveLapai (39). The subjective end¬ ings appear to have been at first appended in the same way : thus, Perf. Ind. yeypaep-p, Inf. yeypap-vai, Part. yeypap-vrs. But all these forms were forbidden by euphony. Hence in the Ind. -|jl became -a ; and after this change the inflection of the Ind. proceeded according to the analogy of the Aor., except so far as the primary form differs from the secondary : yey parp-p yeypaep-a, a-s, -e, -a-pev, -a-re, -a-vr, -a-rov. In the Part., v also became a, which by precession passed into o (114 ; indeed, in Dec. 3 no masculine or feminine noun has a stem ending in -cvr-, 177. 3) : ye- y pa - pcCov, e ppinrov (146) A 01*. eXvcra , iyvcopicra , eppL^a. b. If the verb begins with a votvel, the e- unites with it, and the augment is termed temporal. c. The syllabic augment is so named, because it increases the number of syllables ; the temporal (temporalis, from tempus, time), because it in¬ creases the time, or quantity, of an initial short vowel. For the syllabic augment before a vowel, see 279 b. The breathing of an initial vowel re¬ mains the same after the augment. 278. Rules for the Temporal Augment (7). a. The prefix e- unites with a to form y, and with the other vowels, if short, to form the cognate long vowels : as, to injure, 'dQX(o) contend, hope, 'ikctcuw supplicate, op0oo> erect, ’vfiplXp) insult; Impf. (ia)i]8LKOvv, ijdXovv, (ee)-fi\7rtfbi', ( eijlneTCoov, (eo)e\eco profit, cl'koj yield, ol«v£^op.at augur, ovra^co wound; Impf. ( erj)r\yovpT]v, wcpeXovv, dnov, olejvL^opyv, ovra^ov • Aor. yyy- adpyv, dxpeXyaa, d£a, oicovLadpyv, odraaa. d. But in verbs beginning with eu, a few beginning with oi, ctKa^w to conjecture , and avc uvt»> to dry, usage is variable : as, dsa^ov and in Att. also rjicafrv, avavdyv and rjvavdyv • fflyopcu P ra Vi ev^dpyv and yvj-dpyv • ola-Tpcuo goad, otarpyaa or oiarpyaa Eur. Bac. 32. Et is also changed in rjeiv and ydeiv (45 m, 46 a). 279. a. The verbs fiovXopai to will, hvvap.0eco push, wvcopai buy, and some poetic, chiefly Epic, forms : as, eipvoxbei A. 3. c. In a few verbs beginning with e, the usual contraction of ce into ft takes place (121) : as, edeo to permit, eiW, daaa. Add e0i£a > to accustom, IXCcrcrto roll, £Xko> draw, ?irw be occupied with, ep-yd^opcu work, ^pirto and kpicv'yco serpo, creep, to-ndco entertain, have ; the Aorists dXov took, da a (Ion. and poet.) $ 281. REDUPLICATION. 213 set, etgev, ely-qv, eidqv (45 k, n) ; and Plup. elaryKeiv fr. Perf. ear'qua (45 f) stand. So el from h‘(119) in the Aor. etdov, eiSbgqv (s. IS-, 50), I saw. d. An initial e followed by o unites with this vowel, instead of uniting with the augment : as, loprd^w to celebrate a feast, (eeo)kwca seem, ^oXira hope, 2opya have wrought. e. The forms in b, c, and d are to be referred, in part at least, to an original digamma or €uSop.cu lie, epevryat • crT€c{>avda> crown, eare- (pavuca • aSiKt'o) (278 a), qSiKqKa, rjSix'rjKei.v • a-u|dvw (278 b), yu^qgai • rcycopai (278 c), ^jyqgaL • op do (279 b), ePpava, eupdneiv • epya^opiat (279 c), etpyaapLcu • elta, elite iv (45 k). b. In a few cases, the first of two other consonants is repeated, espe¬ cially if there has been syncope : as, irerdwv gi to spread (s. rrera-, irra-) TnhrrayaL • yiyvqvKO) remind, gep.vqp.aL • Kra.op.aL acquire, te try gat, i. 7. 3, but also ttrqyai (properly Ion., as Hdt. 2. 42, yet also iEsch. Pr. 795, PI. Prot. 340 d, e). c. Verbs beginning with pX, y\, and a few others vary : as, fSXaardvo) to bud, PepXarrqKa and i^Xacrryta • yXocpw carve, yeyXvggai and £yXvyyai. For ZoLta, ZoXira, topya, cf. 279 b, d ; and for the Pret. old a know, 278 d. 281. a. In five verbs beginning with a liquid, el- or ei- commonly takes the place of the regular reduplication, through euphonic change : Xa y\dv(i) to obtain by lot, etXqx a and htXoyxct, elX-pygai • XapPdvto take, etXqcpa, etXrjggai and XtXqyyai • \eyo> collect, eiX o%a, elXeyyai and XiXe- ypat ■ (xdpcpai share, ecyapyai, elgapgqv • s. p€- SCiy, eipqta, eipqyai. b. Some of these forms seem to have arisen from an omitted consonant (the rough breathing in etgapgai, as in tcrrqta, pointing to an original cr ; 214 PREFIXES OF CONJUGATION. -COMPOUND VERBS. §281. cf. 141, 279 e). They were sometimes imitated by late writers in the Aor. Pass.: irapeLXycpdyaav Dion. H. 168. 3. c. Some verbs which begin with d, e, or o, followed by a sin¬ gle consonant, prefix to the usual leduplication the two first letters of the root : as, dXAfxo to anoint , dXfjXapa, dXyXlfaLv, dXp Xippai • eXavvoo drive , iXrjXaK/t , eXrjXaKeiu • opvaaco dig , opcopuya. d. This prefix is termed by grammarians, though not very appropri¬ ately (87 b), the Attic Reduplication. It seldom receives an augment in the Plup. (c), except in the verb pledge (eyyvy), yyyvejv, vii. 1. 22, eveyvwv, &c. 283. 2. Verbs in which (W-, ill, precedes a vowel which the augment changes (§ 278), commonly receive their prefixes after this particle : as, bvaapeerrea) to be displeased , dvaypearow. § 284 . DIALECTIC USE. 215 So, sometimes, with ev, well: evepyereo) benefit, fvepylrovv and (vrjpyerovv. 3. Other verbs in which there is composition, receive the augment and reduplication at the beginning : as, \oyonoiea) to fable , eXoyoTToiovv • dvarv^eco fare ill , edvarvxyaa, dedvarv^pKa • cvrvfiu) prosper, (vtv^ovu or rjvrv^avu (278 d) j 8vcramico shame, (dvaamovr. a. With, however, doubtful or rare variations ; as in some compounds of rroidoj : (bdoireTTonwlvV (v. 1. udorroLrjp.ei'r) ) v. 3. 1. So ImroTeTpocprjKa, Lycurg. 167. 31. DIALECTIC USE. 284. a. It was long before the use of the augment as the sign of past time became fully established in the Greek. In the old poets it appears as a kind of optional sign, which might be used or omitted at pleasure : thus, ddyxev, drjxe, A. 2, 55 ; u>s & paro, &s cpdro, A. 33, 188 ; Z[3a\e, (3a\e, A. 473, 480 ; opwpei, wp. 153 ; neTrLdoLpiev A. 100, TveniOoiTo K. 204, ireiriOriaw X. 223 ; TvecpidoLpcriv i. 277, TvecpibrjcreTai O. 215 ; Ke^a- povro II. 600, Kexapr}(Tepi.ev O. 98, KexapjcreTaL \p. 266 ; ijKaxe II. 822, d/ca- Xovto tv. 342, dkaxvaeis Horn. Merc. 286. g. Some of these reduplicated forms occur in Attic poetry : as, apapev Soph. El. 147, Kei- con¬ nective, is wanting ; after -oi- and -at-, and in the nude Present (303 a), it becomes -pi ; in other cases, it becomes v (275 a): as, VXvG-a, Xl\uK-a, rj5-ea {fi-q (46 a) ; Ai j(o-p)oi, Xv(oj-p)o) * Xv-oi-pi, Xtia-ai- pi (293 f), 'icrT7]-pi (45); ^Av-o-v, eXcXux-et-v (273 e), iXvOrj-v, XvOclrj-v • fati. § 297. FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. 221 a. In those cases in which the fiexive -p. is usually said to be wanting, it may still be regarded as virtually present in a vowel into which it lias been changed or absorbed ; and so, in some cases, the llexive -t of the 3 Pers. See 273 c, e, 291 a. b. In the Opt., -v, for -ju, occurs very rarely for the sake of the metre: rpi(poLv Eur. Fr. Inc. 152. 297. 2 Sing. : -cr (ada), -d (di, s, e, v, ; - aai, -c to. a. For -s, a stronger form was -ada (271c; cf. -sti in Lat. Perf., and the Eng. and Germ. -st). b. This was retained as the common form in 7)cr0a, 8(ppa0a (451, u), and olada (46 a) ; and was good Attic in rj8eiG0a, rjdrjada (46 a), and fieurda (45 m). Other examples are furnished by the poets (particularly in the Subj., by Horn.) : as, e0eXrjG0a A. 554, eLirycrda T. 250 ; pdXoia0a 0. 571, icXaloiada O. 619 ; Tidrjcrda i. 404, did^iada T. 270 ; £yetcr#a, ings, a labial or palatal mute must be rough (<{>, \), and a lingual, middle (8) : as, from Tpeiroj (s. rpa tt-) to turn, (tot parr-vrai) TerpacparaL PI. Kep. 533 b ; from raacroj (39 ; reTay-vrai) reraxarcu iv. 8. 5, ireraxaTO Th. 7. 4. See 338 f. d. In the Imv., the older and shorter forms in -vtcov and -aOoov (termed Attic, 87 b), are the more common (272 e). § 304 . UNION OF STEM AND AFFIXES. 223 e. The forms m -co to wash, v is omitted before the affixes which remain close (152) ; except sometimes in poetry for the sake of the metre, and in late writers : KeicXiputi, iuXLdyv (erXirdy Z. 468) ; Kespisa, enplOyv (KpLvOevre 6. 48). See 50. In these words, v seems not to have belonged to the root. b. In other verbs, v characteristic , before p., more frequently becomes o’, but sometimes becomes p. or is dropped : as, iricpaapicu (40) ; £qpcuva> to dry, i^ypacryai, i£ypayp.cu, and late ipypdpuu. So late Pf. A. Terp&xvKa, fiefipabv na, fr. rpayeew roughen, (3padvvco delay (150 e). 305. 2. Future Tense-Sign, -a--. In the Fu¬ ture active and middle, changes affecting the tense-sign often bring together two vowels, which are then contracted : a. Attic Future. In Futures in -iaco from verbs in -t£o> of more than two syllables, the -or- becomes -e-: as, K0y(i-, Kop.(t.-cro, i-eo)iovp.cu, Koy(i- and -taco drop the -a-: as, 4Xauvco or e\aa> to drive, F. eX(d-crco, d-co)u», eX(dcreis)q.s, eA(acretv)dv or iXav, iX{dcr, reX(icrei)ei, reX(i-ao, i-o)ovycu (42 g) ; \€w pour, F. x(e<7cu)4co, x(4, particularly /3i/3d£u> make go. c. This form of Futures in -acrco, -etrto, and -'i draw, ravvco stretch, also as Fut. A. 365, 454, 0. 174. For as Fut., ,8. 222, see 50. 306. 3. Aorist Tense-Sign. a. The sign of the Aor. is omitted in ciira scud, fjvtyKa bore , poured, ti;-y-9yr ' boil, yp-y-cra * 2ppa> go away, ijppyKa • p,£XXto delay, yeXXyaw (41) ; o£co smell, &£yaa • (Soo-kw feed, (SoaKyaw • but Trep.-ira), ireypw • &px«> ^Ps a ’ concern, eyeXyaa, eyeXydyv ip- inquire, epyaoycu • p.€va> remain, v€p.a> distribute, F. yep Co, reyw, but Pf. yeyiryna, perlyysa (cf. 150 e). c. ) To a few other stems : as, 8eo) to need, de-y-aw, dede-y-ra • €v8a) sleep, evdyaw * ol'op.ai think, olyao- ycu, yr)9yp • oi'xop.cii depart, oixyaoycu. d. In a few verbs, c is inserted instead of rj (cf. 310 c) : as, &x® 0 H Lat 1° be vexed, axO-e-aoyaL, yx0ea-6yr • p,axop.ai, fight, yax(eao)ovyai (305 b), eyaxecrdyyp, yeyaxyyou. e. 1 n most of these cases, the vowel is obviously inserted for the sake of euphony, to prevent undesired combinations of consonants. That the vowel should be commonly ip rather than e, results from 310. 312. 4. In the Second Perfect System, the common affixes are annexed with these changes in the preceding syllable : a. ) Short a, t, or v, before a single consonant, is lengthened (a commonly becoming y, unless preceded by e or p, 115 a): as, a£va>, (s. (pulp-) xepyra, eirepyreLP (40) ; 0a.XX« to bloom, rldyXa • but Kpa£co cry out, (spay-) Kispdya • XcLctkw sound, (Xu k-) Att. AAa/ca, Ep. XeXyKa • Kpi£a> creak, (icpiy-) slspiya • p,vKaop.ai bellow , ( yvK -) yeyvna. After the Att. reduplication, the short vowel commonly remains : as, eXyKZda. (281 d, 134 a). b. ) e becomes o, and « (lengthened from T) becomes ot : as, KTeivo) to kill, (kt( v-) eKTOva • depKoycu see, poet., debopica ■ Xenra> (Xi7r-, Xci7r-) leave, XeXonra, nenoida. (39) \ euXna, eopya, eoi to lead, Pf. yx a -> later dyy-o-xa ’ eo-Guo, poet. iScn, cat, eSqS-o-Ka, Ep. iSySopai • oi'xofuu (311 c), ot^-aj-Ka or $x w/f a (278 d) ; (id-) €to>0a I am wont, pret. ; Pass, auproy. 272, for jjepro, eirdo- X : dwtiu, SeiKvtiovcn (a frequent form in the 3 Plur. Pres.), vi. 1. 31, 2. 2, deua'uei Cyr. 6. 1. 7, 8dt, Tt#(^-77s)rjs • 8i5(6-c>})to, 5io(6-77s)u>s, 5(6-a;)«u.cu, 5(6-rj)tu. b. In like manner, «q is sometimes found in the Opt. for oiq ; chief¬ ly, but not wholly, in the later Greek : as, a\vp Theoc. 15. 94, eKOupev II. 99, irr/yu(v-i)vTO PI. Pheed. 118 a, 5cu vvto il. 665, daivvaro (for -vvto) . XeXvpevos 6) • Opt. XcXvkcos dqv. XeXvpevos dqv. b. The Perf. act. may aho form these modes by inflection, especially when used as a Pros.: as, €, and -ow (309), the liquid, Att, and Dor. Put. (305), the Aor. Pass. Subj. y2$$ a), the Subj. of Verbs in -pi (316), and the 2 Sing, in -cu and -o <297 e). In these forms, the first vowel is commonly either (I.) a, (II.) €, or (III.) o. Of these, € is far the most frequently uncontracted. b. The Att. poets sometimes omit the contraction ; and sometimes here, as elsewhere, adopt dialectic forms ($5 d). 232 AFFIXES OF CONJUGATION. § 322 , 322. I. The first vowel a. a. In the Ionic, the a is commonly contracted or changed into c (a change sometimes found in the Dor.,130b,d); and when a with an 0 vou r el is contracted into co, e is often inserted (135, 120 i). Thus we find, as various readings, opuivres, bpeovres, and opbojvres, v Hdt. 1. 82, 99. So dpbopev, v. 1. eup&pev, Id. 1. 120, xP^ ea ^ aL > v * 1- XPV~ * crdcu, 1. 47, %pacr#cu 7. 141, i'to 3. 57, expbovro G. 46, %p^w (for Xpaov) 1. 155 ; tfureov H. 423, xpet6 ( uei'os \p. 834, opbwv Alcm. 83 [53] ; Suhj. of Verbs in -fu, Svvedpeda Hdt. 4. 97, 2 Aor. crreaj ai Id. 3. 15, /3ea>- pev 7. 50, Kreupev %. 216. See c. (b) In the 2 Sing., the termination -ao commonly remains : as, bxprj A. 515, eiSbiv i r. 236 ; a. 54, Sapriys, v. 1. 5a- pdys, r. 436, 5a./u.rj€Te, v. 1. Sapeiere, H. 72 ; 2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in -|u, deiu IT. 83 (64& Hdt. 1. 108), deiy (6rpQ Bek.) k. 301, avy-rj B. 34, 64w- llev w. 485, deiopeu A. 143, deiopou 2. 409. d. After the analogy of the contract Pres., the Ion. often extends the 2 Aor. Inf. in -€iv, as if formed by contraction, to -e'eiv : as, ideeiv, , and ew into uo : as, poyiopes Ar. Lys. 1002, iiraiviu 198, for poy(4o)ovpev, 4 tv for ou and oi (131 b, 130 c) : as, SiKaLeuaL Hdt. 1 . 133, e5t/cateei/ 6 . 15, OLKeievvTai 1. 4, (XTecpai- vevvTai 8 . 59 ; virvQv Ar. Lys. 143, paarTyCov Epicli. 19 [1]. b. The Dor. « is likewise used by other dialects in plyoo to be cold, and in the Ion. ISpdu sweat: as, piyuv Ar. Vesp. 446 (piyovv Cyr. 5. 1. 11), piyy PL Gorg. 517 d ; iSpwcrcu A. 598. c. The Epic sometimes protracts the o to co, and sometimes employs the combination cw after the analogy of verbs in -do (322 c) : as, ISpujovra 2. 372, ISpuovaa A. 119, virudjovras e. 48 ; apowaiv t. 108, 8 rfCb(j}VTO N. 675, brfibLpev 8. 226 ; 2 Aor. Subj. of Verbs in -p,i, yvuw £. 118, dXww A. 405, 5A 77 p. 216, 8 u)r](Tiv A. 324 (Spai 129), Sujopev H. 299 (SQpev 'P. 537), 50w- pro iEsch. Ag. 987 ; Imv. S8^o T. 10, 8ex9e Ap. Rh. 4. 1554, 6pao A. 204 ; Inf. dex^cu A. 23, ’opOai 0. 474 ; Pt. Seygeros B. 794, Sppevos Soph. 0. T. 177. 327. The 1 and 2 Aor. forms are united , a. ) In poetic, chiefly Ep., Aorists which have the tense-sign -tr- with the connectives -o- and -e- : as, (3cuvo) go, 8vo> sink, I'kco come, ol ~(pavTo Hdt. 1. 80. See 306. c. These tenses of mixed formation are usually classed as 1 or 2 Aor., according to the connective : 1 A. fjXdav, 2 A. l^ov. • D. Flexible Endings. 328. a. 1 and 3 Peesons. The old flexives -t and -vt, prolonged to -ti and -vti, remained in the Dor., which had also -p.es for -ptev (Lat. t, nt, mus; 169 b, c) : as, pari Theoc. 1. 51, rLdgn 3. 48, pavri 2. 45, pi- X£ovtl 16. 101, oj5 pKavTL 1. 43, Xtyovn. Find. O. 2. 51, rpefovn 6. 36 ; eidop.es Theoc. 2. 25, SeSoixages 1. 16 (Pind. uses the form -p.ev). For the Dor. -p.dv, -Tdv, -, cf. 272 e) SiSbadw, Insc. Corcyr. 329. The change of v into a (142) is extended, especially in the Ion. a. Here, the 3 Plur. endings -urai and -dro, for -vtcu, -vto (300 c), are usual in the Opt., and the Perf. and Plup. ind., and are also employed in the Impf., 2 Aor., and nude Pres. ind. Before these endings, a short vowel in the stem is not lengthened (310), except in the poets for the sake of the metre, the connective -€- is used instead of -o- (290 a), a and some¬ times ei become e, and consonants are changed according to 300 c. Thus, oLk8o.tcu Hdt. 1. 142, for LptcqvTai.' £arcu I\ 134, Hdt. 2. 86, eidreu (134 a) 236 CONJUGATION. -DIALECTS. § 320. B. 137, £'aro H. 414, ei'aro T. 149, for ?}vtcu, -rjvTo • ireepopHjaTO . 442, contr. piepLvr] O. 18, Tlieoc. 21. 41, (3e[3Xr)ai E. 284, eaavo II. 585. c. On the other hand, in the S. S., we find the cr retained in some con¬ tract forms, and in the Presents having the sense of the Fut. Tlofiai, epa- yopLac (305 f) : as, Kavx(deaaL)d(rai Rom. 2. 17, odwacrai Lk. 16. 25, irie- crai, (payeaai Id. 17. 8. 332. Iterative Form. a. The Ep., to express with more emphasis the idea of repeated or continued action , or sometimes perhaps for metrical effect, often formed the Impf. and Aor. in -ctkov, -cric6fxr]v. b. This form, called the iterative (itero, to repeat), and akin to the Lat. formation in -sco, also appears in Ion. prose, and rarely in Dor. and Att. poets, (c) Of the connectives of the Impf. and Aor., it used and -a- (290 a), (d) sometimes dropping the -c- after a or c, and (e) rarely using § 335 . FLEXIBLE ENDINGS. VERBS IN -MI. 237 -a- for (f) It was almost strictly confined to the Ind. sing, and 3 plur. (vixaaKoyev X. 512, eepaanere %. 35), where it was inflected as an Impf. (-crxov, -crxcs, -ctkc, &c.), but commonly without the augment, which was now less needed (cf. Lat., 271 d). (g) Before the -ctk-, a short vowel was not lengthened. Thus, (c, f) Impf. ex €aK01> I was in the habit of carrying, N. 257, e'xecr/ces E. 472, £x e(TKe 126, Hdt. 6. 12, 3 pi. %x eaK0V 6. 627, for elx ov > -c, -ov ; ixpaiuecTKev she kept weaving, /3. 104, dXXveaKev 105, ireyTreatee, -ecncov, Hdt. 1. 100, (p-peaKe Tlieoc. 25, 138, rayieuecrKe Soph. Ant. 950, iraveane 963, yaxeaKero H. 140, ireXeaKeo X. 433, eyiayevKovTO v. 7 ; 2 Aor. i'Secr/ce I\ 217, Xafteane Hdt. 4. 78, eXdfiecrKOV 130, yevearero X. 208, oXecrKero 586 ; 1 Aor. (only poet.), arptxpaaKov 2. 546, Coaacnce X. 599, yviladanero A. 566 ; (d) £a have a contract form in -fpjievai: as, yo(d-ev){\- psvai £. 502, ireii/yyevcuv. 137, /caX(^-ev)i]p.€vai K. 125, irevdyyevaL a. 174. Yet’a yevai, fr. ctw, cXewa, 6 vpaa(^ovau>v, I70a)88wav, Ar. Lys. 1297, 1299, 1313. See 141 a. For the TEol. contraction into ai and 01 in the Part., see 131 d : KLpvcus Ale. 27, pLfcus Find. P. 1. 86, dptfeuaa 8. 37, £etf£anra Sap. 1. 9, ?x oLaa 77 [70], Theoc. 1. 96. E. Verbs in -yi. 335 a. The Ion. and Dor. employ more freely than the Att. the forms with a connecting vowel (315), especially in the Pres. sing, of verbs 238 STEM OF THE VERB. § 335 . whose characteristic is € or o : as, ridels Pind. P. 8. 14, ride'i a. 192, Hdt. 1. 133, SiSols I. 164, Sidol 519, Hdt. 1. 107, oiSovaiv B. 255 ; iara Hdt. 4. 103, Imv. Kadlara I. 202 ; it podeovn (unredupl., for irpondedai) A. 291 ; Inf. avvielv Theog. 565, SidQiv (324 a) Theoc. 29. 9. h. On the other hand, the iEol., Dor., and Ep. retain the form in -fu in some verbs, which in the Att. and in Ion. prose have only the form in -a) : as, KaXrjfu Sap. 1. 16, Sprjpu 2. 11, (piXrjpu 79 [23], aiurjpu Hes. Op. 681, vinripu Theoc. 7. 40, for KaXeoo, opdu, &c. ; epoprpai B. 107. c. The Ion. changes a characteristic before another a to e (cf. 322 a), and sometimes inserts € before a (135 a) : as, iarlaam, 156)€don Hdt. 5. 71, Svvearai (329 a), iareairo Hdt. 4. 166. So, in the nude Perf., eareaai Hdt. 1. 200, eareare 5. 49. d. The Ep. sometimes differs from the common language in the length of the stem-mark (314) : as, Inf. nd'qpievcu \P. 247, Sidovvcu O. 425, 6i y. 380 (so nude Pf. earrire A. 243, 246 ; v. 1. 2 Aor. ’Sarrjre) : 2 Aor. /3a- ear M. 469, /3 o,tt]v A. 327, for Sfirjaar, &c. See 134. CHAPTER X. STEM OF THE VERB. 336- The stem of the Greek verb, although not properly varied by inflection, yet received many changes in the progress of the language. These changes affected the different tenses unequally, so that there are but few 'primitive verbs in which the stem appears in only a single form. a. The earliest form in which the stem of a verb appears is briefly called the prime or old stem ; and other forms, later or modified stems. If a later form appears in the Present System, this is called the new stem ; and any intermediate forms, middle stems. b. The 2 Aor. and 2 Compound Systems are widely distinguished from the others by their attachment to the original form of the stem ; and the Pres. System no less by its inclination to depart from this form. The other systems differ comparatively little from each other in the form of the stem. If the verb has three stems, they are commonly formed from the middle. If it has only two stems, they are sometimes formed from the earlier , sometimes from the later, and are sometimes divided: as, in rdvy- Zcpvyov 7r '(pvyncu, n. s. cj>evy- e9eipa> to destroy (stems cf)0ap-, cj>0ep-, c{>0eip-), Ztpdapyai, ZfpdapKa • reivw stretch, rerdyai, rtra/ca. So, from the influence of X, o-TeXXa> send, 2 crraX/xai, earaXra. e. The changes in the stem were, for the most part, the result of time and use. Hence, those tenses which were earliest and most employed were most affected by them, and the latest tenses the least. They appear most of all in the Pres. System (of which the 2 Aor. System was the an¬ tique form), less in the Put. and 1 Aor. Systems, and least in the Perf. and Compound Systems. 337. Many verbs are defective, either from the want of a complete formation, or from the disuse of some of their forms. a. In both cases, the defect is often supplied by other verbs having the same signification. In the poets, especially the older, we find many frag¬ ments of verbs belonging to the earlier language. These occur often in but a single tense, and sometimes in only a single form of that tense : as, 3 Sing. ZjSpaxc rang, A. 420, dedro (s. Sea-) appeared, f 242, endirvacrep breathed, X. 467, Xlyl-e twanged, A. 125. b. Many forms, however, were doubtless used, or might have been used, which do not occur in the remains of Greek literature. If one form of a tense-system is found, it is usual to infer the existence of the other common forms of that system in the same voice. 338. On the other hand, many verbs are redundant, either through a double formation from the same stem, or the use of forms from different stems. It should be observed, how¬ ever, that two or more forms of the same tense, with few ex¬ ceptions, either, (a) Belong to different periods, dialects, or styles of composition: thus, kt€lv u>, and later ktlppvpu (50), to kill; rdcraw, and later rdrrw (39), A. P. erdx^?/ v, and later erdyyp- Ka'uv (44), A. P. enavdyv, and Ion. e/ca yv 7 rvpddvop.ai, and poet, irevdo/xai (50), inquire ; Treidoj (39), A. cbreica, and poet. Zmdov. (b) Differ in their use : thus, 1 Pf. TreireiKa, transitive, I have persuad¬ ed, 2 Pf. ireiroida, intransitive, I trust (39) ; -rrefayKa I have shown, 7 T€ (322 a) ; peXi^w, -rrcu^w, Dor. peXCcrSw, iraiSSw (170 a). c. In the following sections of this chapter, and in some of the tables, small Roman letters, and figures annexed, are used to mark classes of stems and their subdivisions : as, a, a 1 , b 2 . For the sake of apter nota¬ tion, there will be a few departures from strict alphabetic order. Not a few stems belong to different classes, as exhibiting more than one kind of change. I. Prime Stems (a). 340. 1. Prime Stems may be roots , either (a 1 ) giving rise to modified stems, or (a 2 ) remaining alone ; or they may be derived stems , either (a 3 ) giving rise to other stems, or (a 4 ) re¬ maining alone. Thus, (a 1 ) the root ti-, to pay (itself found in the poet. Pres, t/oj), gives rise to the stems tiv- and nvv-, used in the later Presents rivco and poet. tLvvucu ; while (a 2 ) the root eXir-, to cause to hope, remains alone in the Ep. verb gXncj. But these verbs have derivatives in the nouns eX-rris hope , and Tiny honor ; and from these are taken derived stems for new verbs : viz., (a 3 ) eXmS-, giving rise to IX-iri^- in the Pres. eXirifa to hope; and (a 4 ) Tipa-, the only stem of the verb ti/j-uw to honor. 2. Most verbs which have only the prime stem are derivative pure verbs : as, Tiyao*, and dp^XicTKo; miscarry ; (b 3 ) 2 A. Zrpuyov, Pr. (Tpdy-) xpwyaj cat. Cf. the changes of a to c, of a and £ to i, of ce to i, of a and au to u, he., in Latin compound verbs : as, folio , xofello ; cado, accido. 342. c. Contraction, Syncope, Metathesis, Antithesis (103 s). 1 . Some stems (c 1 ) are contracted: as, cUCSw aSw sing, aicrcra> acrcrcj rush, kXtji kXti jj old Att. (later /cXetw, cf. 222 a) shut. Cf. Lat. demo, cogo, nolo, prendo. 2. Some stems are (c 2 ) syncopated in the theme, chiefly in cases of redu¬ plication ; (c 3 ) others, in the 2 Aor. (340. 3) ; and (c 4 ) others, in other tenses : as, (c 2 ) 2 A. eyzvopryo, Pr. (ycyev-) yiyvopcu become (cf. Lat. gig[e]- no) ; £ Kirov (Dor.), mirTw fall; psva> and poet, fjupvoj remain ; (c 3 ) (eyep-, hyp-) rjypb iyv awoke, (IXv9-, eX0-) yXOov came ; (c 4 ) «a\ea; CALL, Pf. (kAc-) kIkXi jKa, KenXygcu. Cf. Lat. per\y\\go, sur\y\\go. 3. In some stems there is transposition, chiefly by changing the place of a liquid. This occurs (c 5 ) in the theme ; (c G ) in the 2 Aor. ; (c 7 ) in other tenses: as, (c 5 ) 2 A. eOopoj', Pr. (0po-) Opwaaw leap; e'9avo^, (0va-) 0vi}(XKO) die ; (c°) (TaX-, rXa-) trXyv endured, (trx aX-, X ev ’> X u ‘) X eaj pour, Aor. ^\ea, Ep. ?X £ua > A. P. (\vhrjv ; kolloi (44) : ( (39) ; eavpyu, cuvto (40), Kadaipa; purify ; (rirepu), (rirtfpw sow; revcO, reivw stretch; 2 A. £\Xttov, £iri0op, Pr. Xeiuw, Tret0w (38 s) ; ^v'yoi', cp€"»j*ya> flee ; Pf. atcqKoa (aKo-), Pr. d«ova> hear. a. Some refer these changes, in part, to the addition of I, with trans¬ position and contraction (348, 142). 348. B. By ADDING SYLLABLES OR LETTERS. These may be annexed , inserted , or prefixed (32 c, e,f)- i. The consonants annexed or inserted are the consonant I (with the resulting changes, 143), at c, v, r, 0 , Ac. 349. Iota Form. i. The consonant I unites (i 1 ) with a palatal mute , or less frequently (i 2 ) with a lingual or (i 3 ) labial mute, to form a a (in later Att. rr, 169 a) : as, (i 1 ) 2 A. P. erixyyv, ipayr/v, Pr. rdcrcrw or tcittw (39), pa knead; 4>vXuK-, (fjvXdtrcra) guard ; rapaX-> rapaaaoj disturb ; (i 2 ) PXXt-, PXlttoj take honey ; dppoS-, appo-rrea or appo^ca fit ; Kopv0-, poet. Kopvtrtrca arm; (i 3 ) F. (Treir-crw) ire\pw, Pr. irecrcrca or itcttcu cook. j. The I unites (j 1 ) with a lingual mute , or less frequently (j 2 ) with a palatal mute , (j 3 ) a double palatal , or (j 4 ) a labial mute , to form £: as, (j 1 ) <|>pu8-, (J>pd£ca tell; ovopuT-, ovopa£ca name; (j 2 ) 2 A. tKpayov, ca^ilyyu, Pr. Kpa£w cry, crcjjd^ca or crcf)dTTto slay ; ctt€vuX-> errevd^w groan; (j 3 ) KXayy-, nAa^ta clang ; o-aXTriyy-, craXm£ca blow a trumpet ; (j 4 ) vf* oj, later vCtttoj, wash. § 351 . IOTA, INCEPTIVE, AND NASAL FORMS. 243 1 (for k, see 350). The I unites with X, to form XX : as, F. cruXw, (ttcXcD, Pr. paXXw throw, crcjxxXXa) deceive, cttc'XXw send. Some regard the liquid as here simply doubled to make a long syllable. This doubling was extended in the .Eolie (171 a). Cf. Lat. pcllo, pepwZi; perccZZo, percwZi. a. Palatals in are mostly onomatopcs (words formed to imitate sounds). Some verbs in -fa or -o-o-a) have both palatal and lingual forms. p. Linguals in -fa are very numerous, particularly those in -l£o>. They are mostly derivatives, wanting the second tenses and, by reason of euphonic changes, nowhere showing the stem in its prime form. This may often, however, be ascertained from a cognate word. It ends most frequently in 8, and may be assumed to do so, if the contrary does not appear: as, opi5-, opif (39 d). y. Most linguals in -fa may be practically regarded as having but a single form of the stem, with £ as the stem-mark. And in some, (z) the stem may be regarded as having for an added consonant simply l, either (z 1 ) alone or (z 2 ) with a vowel (the modified stern marked with z, to avoid double notation) : as, (z 1 ) irptw, and later Trpi£o>, to saio; ovt&w and oi- tcl^w wound, poet.; (z 2 ) 2 A. enopov, Pr. iropi£u> furnish. The euphonic changes of lingual mutes would then, of course, apply to l (147 s). 8 . With these forms in -trcrco and -la, compare the Lat. derived forms in -sso: as, incedo, inccsso ; quatio, quasso ; capio, capesso ; 'Amid fa, Attieisso. 350. k (for 1, see 349). Inceptive Form. In this form, -07c- is annexed, (k 1 ) either alone, or (k 2 ) with a vowel, com¬ monly t. When -o’Ac- alone is added, (k 3 ) a consonant preceding is dropped or (k 4 ) transposed , or (k 5 ) rarely unites with the a-, excluding the k ; while a vowel preceding, particularly o, (k 6 ) may be lengthened or (k 7 ) changed to i. Thus, o (k 1 ) F. apicra, |i€0v, Pr. dpc'o-Kw please, p.£0ijcrK« intoxicate ; (k 2 ) 2 A. tvpov, Pr. evpio-Ku find; (k 3 ) ^\avor, xdenew (151) gape; eXaK or, XdcrKw sound, utter, poet.; ebra0or, (7 radtric-, 151, 159 g) irdo-yw safer; (k 4 , 6 ) ^0op ov, ( doptTK-) Qpaa-xa leap, eQavov, {6a vctk-) 0vt|crKw die (342. 3) ; (k 5 ) aXcK-, (a\cK bite (47) ; ^icap-or, Kapvco labor; ^Tepoj/, rfava cut; (n 2 ) Z-tnov, iriva, drink, (ho-) code, SxJvai enter; (Pa-) tp v , PaCvw go; eXda;, commonly eXavvw, drive; ( 11 8 ) F. 8ap.dja>, poet. Pr. 244 STE.il OF THE VERB. § 351 . SajjLvaw or bdpv-qpu subdue ; (“Trcpa-, Trcpva-) TrepvTjfii poet., sell ; poet. Kepaw and (Kipva- b 2 ) Kipvpgi mix. Cf. the Lat. Presents strengthened by the addition of n : as, cerno, sperno, crcv i, sprcw i (342. 3) ; lino, slno, Zitum, Situni; jindo, scindo, fldi, scldi. 2. There are three ways of adding -av- : (n 4 ) without further change, chiefly to double-consonant stems (already long); (n 5 ) with v inserted before a characteristic mute, to lengthen a short syllable (344) ; (n 6 ) with -cm- prolonged to -aiv- or -av- : as, (n 4 ) and avfjavoj (41) ; 2 A. £{3Xao-Toi', pXacrTuvw bud; fSapdop, 8ap0dvw sleep; r/paprov, agapravu err; (n 5 ) fkidQov, Xav0ava> lie hid; e'jj.a.001', |xav0dva> learn; eXapoiq XapPdvw (150) take; 2 tv\ov, Tvyxo-rw happen; (n°) (ocr^>p-) (hcrcppbppv, 6pa£v v * 1- kixupo}, find. 3. When - w - is added, the preceding syllable is by rule long. Hence, while -w- can be (n 7 ) annexed without further change to consonants (chiefly palatals and liquids), (n 8 ) the v is doubled after a short vowel (o also becoming a>): as, (n 7 ) 2 A. epiypv, pvyvvat mingle ; eTrra.pov^.'iTTapvvpaL sneeze ; olyw and olyvZpu open ; E. opcrw, op vvpu rouse ; (dry-) afco, &yvvg.i break ; (n 8 ) xcpa- aoj, K€pdvvu/xi mix; crjlZcrw, and f3avew stop up. 352. t (for o, see 354). Tau Form. In this, r is added, either (t 1 ) alone, chiefly to labial stems , or (t 2 ) with a vowel: as, (t 1 ) 2 A. eKOTryv, kotttw cut; eTi-irr/v, Ttnrrw beat; (’pXdp^, pXdirTai (147) hurt ; CKpvfipv, Kpvrnw hide ; e{3dcj>''7*', Pauru dip ; epphfypv, pairra; stitch ; ov, tlktco (341) ; avuw and dvvrw accomplish; (t 2 ) ippifyrjv, piTTTw and pLTrreio throw ; 1 A. (irex-) 8-rre^a, ttcktco) comb; 2 A. («p-) ypb- prjv, tptoTaw ask. Cf. Lat. pecto, fiecto, necto, plecto. 353. q ( for p, see 356). Theta Form. In this form, which is chiefly poetic, 6 is annexed, (q 1 ) either alone, or (q 2 ) with a vowel, commonly a or e. (q 3 ) A short vowel in the stem is oftener lengthened before 6. Thus, (q 1 ) ircXaw and 'ireXa0u> approach, poet.; (q 2 ) cJjXcyw, poet. (JAcycOai, burn; (0aX-) ddkkco 1, poet. 0aX€0a> flourish ; 0tvct>, poet. <}>0ivu0a;, con¬ sume; £8w, poet. (ebOco 147) 2, eat; (q 3 ) V€ai and vt|0a> spin ; (irXa-, 236 b) ttXt|0w and irXqOvw be full. a. A few verbs obtain, in this form, a 2 Aor. with a short penult (340. 3): as, bahKu pursue, ibuhsctOov • daw yield, eiKadou ; etpyu exclude, tipyaOov, eLpyaOoppv • apvvw ward off, ypvvadov, -bp .tjv ; xa, Ppu^doyat roar (onomatopes, as also fiXrixdogai, halo, Germ, bloken, bleat) ; (v) yeyrjOa, yrjGew poet., rejoice; 2 A. Iktvkov, KTDTrecj crash ; F. (8ok-) dot^w, Sokcw seem, think ; (d>0-) cbcru), A0ew push ; eVtpe'Xo/xat and iwipiXiopai take care of; (w) eXxo;, late IAkvoj draw ; (dp-, djxvv- n 7 , d/xo-) opvyiu swear, F. dpocw. Cf. Lat. .sectum, secare, to cut ; efoctum, doceo, teach; capture, capio, take; ventum, venio, come, &c. a. (u 2 , v 2 ) When a is affixed, € in the preceding syllable usually be¬ comes a); but when € is affixed, o : as, rpeirw, poet. Tpwirdw and Tpoire'w, turn ; o-rpecjjw, chiefly poet. do> and crrpo€a;, twist ; vt'pw and vwpaw distribute ; (cnceTr-) u-Kitnopai t, and (tkottIco, view. p. This addition of vowels appears to be also in part euphonic. For vowels added with consonants, see 349 s. 356. p, r [for q, see 353). III. Preforma- tiyes lengthening the stem consist chiefly of (r) three kinds of reduplication ; and (p) the few others may be rather euphonic than emphatic : as, (p) cnrcupuj and donrcupca gasp ; Svpopai and oSvpopai lament; oxeXXa’, for KtXXw, come to land. 357. r. Reduplicated Stems. Reduplication in the stem is most frequent in verbs in -pi and -o-kco. It is of three kinds : 1. (r 1 ) Proper, prefixing the first letter with -i- (rarely with -e-) to stems beginning with a single consonant , with a mute and liquid, or with pv -: as, ( 8 o-, 8180 -) diboopi, (0t-, 6i6e-, 159 a) Tldrjpi (45) ; (xp a_ > X l XP a ~) ^XPVm lend; (irXa-, m-p-uXa-, 344) Trlpir\r]pi fill, (irpa-) ’'Klpirpgpi burn; 2 A. e8a ov poet., SiSdcrKo; teach; ^Spay (45 h), SiSpacrKw run; (yvo-) eyvuv, yiyvwo-Ka> k e , know ; Tpcow Ep., and TiTpwtrKw, wound ; F. (rpa-) rprjcrw, T€TpaLvw bore. Cf. Lat. gigno, sisto. 2. (r 2 ) Attic, prefixing the two first letters to stems begin¬ ning with a short voivel followed by a single consonant : as, (dp-) apapio-Kw fit, poet. ; (ax-, d%a%-, 159 a) axax^ w afflict, Ep. So, with the familiar vowel of reduplication i, in place of the initial vowel repeated, (ova-) 6vlvr)pi benefit; drdXXu and drtrdXAo> rear, poet. 3. (r 3 ) Improper, simply prefixing i with the rough breathing 246 FORMATION OF WORDS. $ 357. to stems not included above : as, (o-ra-, aiara-, 141) iarypi, (£-, i-e) LTJ/1L (45) ‘ 2 A. €7TTa/J.T]V, l7TTa/JLCU fll). a. Reduplication in the stem resembles that in the Perfect, except that the closer i takes the place of e, and that the Att. Redupl. does not also lengthen the initial vowel. Cl. bibwpu and bibtoKa, lctttj/ju and earr/na, apupiaKu) and its Pf. apapa. IV. Adopted Stems. ( For t, sec 352 ; u, v, w, 355 ; z, 349 7 .) 358. x. Some themes, to complete their inflec¬ tion, adopt tenses from stems that appear to be radically distinct: as, cupew take, 2 A. (4X-) el\ov • ’£p\opai come, P. (4\v0-, eAec0-h) cXebaopcu, 2 Pf. eXrjXvda • 4o"0tw eat, 2 A. e(f>a.you • opaw see, F. (oir-) 6\pop.ai, 2 A. (IS-, 279 c) elbov • rpe\v run, 2 A. ^Spapov • §£pu bear, F. oiVw, Pf. (cvcK-) ev7]voxu • diviop-ai buy, 2 A. eirpiapyv (45 i). a. Note. For general views of the classes of stems, and their RELATION TO THE TENSES, See 47, 49 ; for a CATALOGUE OF ILLUSTRA¬ TIVE verbs, see 50. CHAPTER XI. FORMATION OF WORDS. 359. a. The Greek, like all other original languages, is the development, according to certain natural laws, of a small num¬ ber of germs, ox primary elements. These elements (termed by botanic figure roots or radicals) have a significance which is not arbitrary, but founded upon instinctive principles of the human constitution. b. If a word contains only one radical, either with or with¬ out formative elements (172b), it is termed simple; but, if more than one, compound. Of simple words containing the same radical, that which appears to have been the earliest is called the primitive ; and the others, derivatives. c. Of those words which are commonly distinguished as primitive and derivative, some are directly related to each other as parent and child ; while others are merely formations from the same radical, which, however, may have a simpler form in the one than in the other. It is important to observe this distinction, though the same language is commonly, for the sake of convenience, employed in both cases. The parent of a word is sometimes called its primitive, even when it is itself the child of an older word. So the term stem is sometimes extended to the essence of a word which is not inflected (172 a). § 3G1. PRIMITIVES AND DERIVATIVES. > 247 d. The much agitated question, whether the radicals of language are nouns or verbs, has no propriety, inasmuch as the origin of these radicals was prior to grammatical distinctions, and the same radical was used as noun, adjective, verb, kc., as the case might require. When, however, a verb or a noun can with equal ease he taken as the primitive, the verb is more frequently so regarded. So, if an adjective and noun have the same stem, precedence is usually given to the adjective. Thus &px w t° lead is commonly esteemed the primitive, rather than apx^ leader; and (PaGe-) (3a0us deep, rather than (36.6 os depth. e. In tracing derivations, it is sometimes convenient to assume a theme, either as a primitive, or as a link of connection. We must, however, be cautious in pronouncing that to have been essential in the actual forma¬ tion of the language, which we find convenient in explaining that forma¬ tion. f. Some trace derivation farther back than others, or trace it different¬ ly ; and hence regard that as a derived stem, which others consider a root. In some cases, ive cannot go beyond a word, or stem, which is yet doubt¬ less derived, the simpler forms of the root having perished, or the word having been borrowed from another language. The evident roots of the Greek have commonly but one syllable and a short vowel (340. 3); and, if two consonants are combined in them, one is commonly a liquid or xybs drought. f. ) -os (G. -eos, n.) : as, nyd-oyai. to care, Krjd-os care. Cf. Lat. - us (frigus). § 366 . NOUNS. 240 g. Other suffixes appear in 6 yeXws, -wros, laughter, oXedpos destruc¬ tion ; y aXyySuiv pain (cf. Lat. cupido), Svuapus, -ecos, poivcr, eXirts, -iSos, hope, TreiOJj persuasion, aid of the Fut. or -vos, m.). This ending may express either a place, an animal, or a person, in which any thing exists in numbers, or in large size or degree : as, apireXos vine, dpreXcov vinetum, vineyard, i-mroov (i'7nros) equile, horsc-stcible, avBpcov, ywauuLv {dvyp, yvvy) apartments for men, women, olvdov (olvos) wine-cellar; Aos lip, x^Xuv, a fish with a long snout ; 7 vaOosjaiv, yvadoov glutton ; nXaros breadth, nAdrwr. As a desig¬ nation of place, -cuvia is also used : as, poBwvia { pbBov ) rosetum, rose-bed. Cf. Lat. Naso, -5nis, Big-nose, capito, fronto, &c. b. ) -afj (G. -dKos, m.), applied, like the preceding, to persons and ani¬ mals, but harsher in its expression : as, ttXovtos wealth, irXo&ra^ a rich churl. So Xa(3pos greedy, Xd[3pa£ sea-wolf. Cf. Lat. adj. loquax, rapax. B. Adjectives. 373. Adjectives derived from verbs express, in general, relations {active or passive in their character) to the actions or states denoted by the verbs ; and those derived from nouns express relations to the persons or things denoted by the nouns. But, from their very nature, relations are distinguished with less precision than things or actions ; and, to some ex¬ tent, the offices stated below blend with each other. 374. I. From Verbs. These end in, a. ) -ckos, -r\, -ov, active : as, cipxco to rule, dpx-ixos able to rule ; ypacpco to describe, ypcupucos descriptive, graphic. This ending is more frequently preceded by t (cf. 365 a, b) : as, TroiyTucbs (tt oieco) poetic. But see 375 b. b. ) -Tqpios, -a, -ov, active (r-qp + ios, 365 b, 375 a) : as, crcjfw to save, acoryp, acorypios saving, preservative. Cf. Lat. ora-tbr-ius. c. ) -Ipos, -ov (or -rj, -ov), implying fitness, both active and passive, and annexed after the analogy of different verbal nouns : as, rptepoo, rpoepy (363 b), rpocp-ipos fitted to impart or to receive nourishment, nutritious, vig¬ orous ; {xpd.op.cu, xpvau) fit for use. Cf. the various senses of cpv^ipos. d. ) -fjLcov, -pov (G. -povos), active: as, BXetw to pity, iXey-puv compas¬ sionate ; pvypwv (pepvypai) mindful; voypcov (votco) thoughtful. e. ) -tos, -q, -ov, passive, signifying that which is done, either as a mas¬ ter of fact (like the Lat. Part, in -his or -sus), or more commonly as a § 375 . ADJECTIVES. 253 matter of habit or possibility : as, opau to see, opd-ros visus, seen, visibi- lis, visible; piXyros amatus, amaliilis. See 269 d, 272 c. f. ) -reos, -a, -ov, passive (269 d), expressing necessity or obligation (like the Lat. Part, in - ndus) : as, irodo to make, vroLy-reos faciendus (Cic. has the sportive facteon), that is to be made. Often in neut. as impers. : ypanreov scribendum. g. ) -vos, -fj, -ov, passive (compare the Part, in -pevos): as, 3co to revere, (aef3-v6s, 148 c) aeyvos revered, 7 rodeivos (irodbto) longed for. li.) -pds (-a, -ov), -as (G. -aSos), -os, Ac.: as, %aXaw to slacken, %aXa- pos slack; to bear, (popds fruitful; Xeyos, -vtos), and often, without respect to this, assuming the form -etos (Ion. -rpos, 132), especially from names of persons and animals (iv. 5. 31). Many patriots (properly adjectives, but often used substantively) belong to this class. Thus, ovpavbs heaven, ovpdv-Los coelestis, pertaining to heaven, heavenly, (povios (povos) of murder, murderous, ivi.avai.os {eviavros, 143 b) annuus, for a year, MiXyacos (MiXy- tos) Milesius ; ayopalos (dyopa) forensis, ’A dyvalos (’Adrjvcu) Athenian; duos (6e-os) divine, (3aaiXeios ((3aoiXevs, -i-ojs), Ion. paoiXyios.Tegius, royal, ' A pyeios Argivus ; epos (ews), Ion. yoios (yds, -6-os), of the morning ; iryxoios (iryxos) of a cubit's length; dvdpdareLos ( avdpwiros) humanus, Oypeios (dyp) ferinus, 'Oyypeios ("Oyypos) Homeric. Of. Lat. -ius and -ivus. Note. From the neuter of these adjectives has come a class of sub¬ stantives denoting an appropriated building or other place, instrument, Ac.: as, ’A dyvaiov (’A dyva) Athenaeum, Qyaeiov, Moecmot' Museum, temple of Minerva, of Theseus, of the Muses, Kovpeiov (novpevs) barber s shop, ypay- yarelov (ypayyarevs) writing-tablet. Of. 366. h. ) -Tkos, -t), -ov (commonly -kos or -uxos after t or v, while -ates often makes -at kos), relating to. These adjectives in -kos are often formed from words that are themselves derivative. They apply to things rather than to persons. When used of the latter, they commonly signify related to in quality, or fit for, and are mostly derived from personal appellations. Thus, rexvy art, tcxv-lkos relating to art, artistic, iroXeyLKbs (iroXeyos) bel- licus, military; vedvi-Kos (vedvias) youthf ul, ALfivs Libyan, Al(3vkos per¬ taining to the Libyans; K optvdios Corinthian, Kopadcavos, cnrovdeiaKos (airovdeios) spondaic ; ’A%atos Achaean, ’Axdikos, and less Att. 'Axaukos • TTOiyrys poet, TroiyriKOS poetic, ttoXltlkos (TroXirys) civilis, civicus, arparyyi- kjs (arparyyos) fit for a general. See 374 a ; and cf. Lat. -icus, -ilis. c. ) -eos, -d, -ov, and -tvos, -r), -ov (proparoxytone), denoting material, -cn : as, xpdabs gold, xptur-eos aur-eus, golden, dpyvpeos argenteus ; ^vX-lvos (£ vXov) wooden, nidpivos (nebpos) cednnus, of cedar. Cf. Lat. -cus, -inus. d. ) -Tvos, seldom -tvos, expressing time or prevalence: as, yp-tvos (yp) vernus, vernal, iredivos (iredov) level, opeivbs (6pos, -e-os) montanus, moun¬ tainous. e. ) -tvos, -T]vds, -avos, patrials, from names of cities and countries out of Greece : as, Tapavr-ivos (T apas, -avros) Tar online, Kv£u (X°P^ S ) dance; roXydoj (roXya) audeo, be bold, dare, riydu (riyy) honor. So from superlatives : as, dpurrevco to be best. Cf. Lat. -eo, -(ao)o. b. ) -d)5os) to imitate or favor the Medes, 'EX- Xyvifa sg>cak Greek, A upifa and Aupidfa live, talk, sing, or dress like the Dorians, QiXnnrifa be of Philip’s party, aXurexifa (dXdnry^) play the fox ; irXovrifa ( 7 rXouros) make rich, eb8aiyovLfa esteem happy, Oepifa (6epos) har¬ vest, epifa (epis) contend, copra fa (eopry) make a feast, Sixdfa (81 vy) judge, Oavydfa (davya) wonder. Cf. Lat. patrisso (pater), Grcccisso. d. ) -idw, rarely -dw, expressing desire (Desideratives), or morbid state : as, yadyrys disciple, yaOyr-iaix) to wish to become a disciple, Ar. Nub. 183 ; crpaTyyidw (arparyyos) desire military command, vii. 1. 33 ; davaraoj ( Oavaros ) d sire death, PI. Pliaedo 64 b ; (nrXyv<.dw (airXyv) be splenetic. e. -w with simply a strengthening of the penult, more frequently active : as, xadupos pure, nadaipw to purify, ttolklXXw (ttouuXos) and aioXXu) (albXos) variegate, yaXdraio (yaXavos) soften, oeairbfa {pea-rrorys) be lord, Koicxtifa (kokkv£) cry cuckoo. f. Other endings appear in kovlw (/com) to bedust, 8axpvw (Sdxpv) weep, cpevfa (. 325 ; nveu breathe, ironrvvu puff, A. 600 ; dvr-, sec, oifiirevu gaze at, A. 371. See 357. Of. Lat. tinnio, tintinnio, tinkle. E. Adverbs. 380. Most adverbs belong to the following classes : I. Oblique Cases of Nouns and Adjectives, employed as circumstantial adjuncts (see Syntax). With an adjective thus employed, a noun is strictly to be supplied. Many of these obliqiLe cases have antique forms, and many belong to themes that are not in use. Thus, a. ) Accusatives : as, dupear as a gift, gratis, aKyyv at the moment, %apt v in gratiam, for the sake of, binyv instar, like ; and the Neut. sing, and pi. of adjectives, especially Comparatives and Superlatives (263). b. ) Genitives, (1) in -0ev (192), denoting the place whence ; (2) in -ou, denoting the place where : as, o5 [sc. tottov or x 0J P L0V ) kn which place, where, avrov there, oyov in the same place, ovbayov nowhere ; (3) in -qs : as, afyvps (and etjaicpvys, 382 a ; so Lat. repente and derepente ) of a sudden, e^ys (and ev), Ion. aa- (peu>s, manifeste, evidently: fr. adj. pronouns and participles, ms, ms, eri- pus ’ 7r pen out m s, €ik6tus, t €t ayyev u s. b. ) -t]8ov or - 8 ov (perhaps kindred with etdos, form), chiefly from nouns ; - 8 r|v or -uSrjv, chiefly from verbs (those in -ctSqv conforming to § 383. ' ADVERBS. 257 366 d ; and -8a : as, 7 rXiudybbu (irXiuOos) like bricks, Hdt. 2. 96, (3orpvddu (fiorpvs) in clusters, B. 89, ay eXrjdou gregatim, in herds, dvarpavdbv or -da (duaepaiuw) openly, Kpvfibyu or -da (upvTcrw) secretly, airopdd-qu ( aireipw) sparsim, scatteringly, yiydi]u, -da, or -adyu, mistira. These appear to be Acc. forms (ef. 380 a) : Sing. fem. -5t]v, neut. -8ov and pi. -8a. Cf. Lat. -tim (-sim), -dtim. c. -t or -et, especially from imitative verbs (378 c ; -fa becoming -, ra|ts) leaving one's post, dpx-e-x°p°s (apy-w) chorus-leading, repir-i-Kbpavvos (repir-w) delighting in thunder, A. 419. b. ) In the contraction of this vowel with an adjoining vowel : as, (bpe- L-fiarps, fr. opos, -e-os, and /3cuVw) opei^arys mountain-ranging, ( vd-o-Kbpos, fr. va-os and Kopeco, 120 i) neomopos temple-sweeper, (ya-o-yerpra) yewyerpia geometry. A vowel so contracted appears especially in some words which have dropped F or p, denoting the agent (365) : as, voyo-dtrys legislator, yvpo-nioXys (194. 2), opvLdo-Oypas bird-catcher, yyXo- fioTyp shepherd, 2. 529, iratS-oXlTwp child-murderer. 4. ) -s : as, d-yvus, -lotos (yvo-, 357. 1) unknown, d-Syys, -pros untamed, voyo-, “ a fricassee consisting of shellfish-salttish-skate-shark-remain- ders-of-heads-besprinkled-with-sharp-sauce-of-laserpitium-leek-and-honey- thrushes-besides-blackbirds-pigeons-doves-roasted - cocks - brains - wagtails- cushats-haresflesh-steeped-in-a-sauee-of-boiled-new-wine-with-the-cartilages- and-wings,” Eccl. 1169 s. 389. There is a loose form of composition, in which a pronoun or particle is attached to a word with which it is sometimes really and sometimes only apparently combined in sense; 1. The orthography here varies, the words being sometimes written together, especially if the last is an enclitic, and sometimes separately. 2. Among the chief words that are thus affixed to others are, a. The indefinite pronoun t'is : as, dans (or os ns) whoever, ovtis no one, eh is if any one. Cf. Lat. quisquis, ncquis, siquis. The following particles : b. &v (Ep. xe or xev, Dor. xd), contingent or indefinite : as, os av whoever, orav or 5f av, onorav, eneidav (end dp av), \whenever, whensoever, &c. c. yl (Dor. 7 a) at least, emphatic : as, eywye (accent drawn back) I at least, av ye you surely, touto ye this certainly, end ye since at least. See 247 h, and cf. Lat. egomet, tumet, equidem. d. 8 rj now (shorter form of r/5??) : as, oar is 5j whoever now, vvv dp just now. e. 8 t] 7 tots (5// wore) ever now : as, oaTiadrjTroTe whosoever nmol tL 5y- 7 rore ; what in the world l f. h surely, indeed: as, rt '77 (Att. tit/) or tL i); why surely l oriy be- i cause indeed, eneiy or eirei 9) since indeed. g. ofiv (contr. fr. e’jv, it being so ; see elyi, 50) then, therefore, yet, often added to an indefinite pronoun or adverb to strengthen the expression of indefiniteness : as, oanaovv whoever then, onwabynoTovv howsoever now then. h. irep (shorter form of nepl) very, particularly, just : as, oanep who in j particular, ibairep just as, oloanep, ornrep, odevnep. Cf. Lat. parumper. i. -rroTt at any time, ever, often added to interrogatives to strengthen the expression : as, rt 7 ror^ ian rovro; [what at any time is this ?] what in the world is this l or, ivliat can this be l Ep. tLttt€ (sync. fr. tL 7 tore) A. 202. j. ri, the simplest sign of connection, and hence often joined to other connective words, before their use was established, to mark them as such. In the Ep. and Ion. this is found to a great extent: and even with an intervening particle, as os pa re 0. 411, rdnep re Hdt. 1 . 74. In the Att., it has remained in dre and (Pare, as, olbs re able, possible, and ep' ure on condition that. 3. With some of the forms above, compare the Lat. quicumque, quan - documque, quisque, uterque, ubique, quisnam l quisquam, utpote, &c. 390. For the mutual and external relations of the elements of com¬ pound words, see 722 s. Miaous vcpaLveiv. Homer. III. AX. 0 YXT 391. Syntax, as the doctrine of sentences, treats either of the offices and relations of words as arranged in sentences, or of the offices and relations of these sentences themselves. a. For a general view of the principles, terms, and definitions of Syntax, see 56 s. 392. The Greek is one of those languages whose syntax exhibits the greatest freedom and variety. Among the causes of this are, a.) The great extent to which, from the fulness, freedom, and original¬ ity of its etymological development, it can employ at pleasure either generic or specific, earlier or later, forms of expression. The figure of retention has an especially large office in Greek syntax. See 63 g, 70 v. h.) The extended period through which the masterpieces of Greek literature were successively produced. Between the poems of Homer and the orations of Demosthenes, how many centuries elapsed, each of which had its own special idioms, while the glorious Epic never became properly obsolete, but was still cherished as a source of wealth for later composi¬ tions (85 c). It was as if our own writers might borrow, not only from the olden style of Sliakspeare, but with equal freedom from the antique dialect of Chaucer. c. ) The prevalence of different dialects in states intimately connected with each other by commerce, by alliances, and by national festivals ; and also in different departments of literature, without respect to local distinctions (85 c, 86). It cannot be thought strange, that forms of ex¬ pression appropriate to the different dialects should have been sometimes interchanged or commingled ; or that the laws of syntax should have acquired less rigidity in the Greek, than in languages which have but a single cultivated dialect. d. ) The vividness of conception and emotion, the spirit of freedom, the versatility, the love of variety, and the passion for beauty, which so pre¬ eminently characterized the Greek mind, and left their impress upon all its productions. The Greek language was the development in speech of these characteristics, the vivacious, free, versatile, varied, and beautiful expression of Greek genius and taste. § 395. SYNTAX. RULE I. -APPOSITION. 2G3 CHAPTER I. SYNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. I. AGREEMENT OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 393. Rule I. An Appositive agrees in case with its subject. — Apposition may be (a) Direct: II apvaans . . y p.r)T-qp, Parysatis, the mother, i. 1. 4. (b) Predicate : Ta ok &6Xa ijaav a-rXeyyiSes, and the 'prizes were flesh- combs, i. 2. 10. r Hs avrov o-arpair^v eiroLyae, of ivhich lie had made him satrap), i. 1. 2. “Ovoya avru) ehai ’AyaGcova Pl. Prot. 315 e. (c) Modal: Aafikov Tcacracpkpvrjv ws <{>£Xov, talcing T. as a friend, i. 1. 2. (d) Parti¬ tive : OCrot . . dXXos &\Xa Xkyei, these say, one one thing, and another another, ii. 1. 15. (e) Of generic and specific terms, especially of com¬ mon and proper nouns : '0 McuavSpos irorayos, the river Mceander, i. 2. 7. "A vdpes (TTpanwrai, gentlemen soldiers, i. 3. 3. (f) Of a noun and a pro¬ noun : ’ AXiapiadys . . kclkcivos yykXyaev, A., he als> neglected, Mem. 1. 2. 24. (g) Of a sentence and word (396), &c. h. Appositives, more frequently, agree with their subjects in gender and number, as well as in case : 'Eirva^a, y Uvewkcnos ■yvv^, too KiXLkuv pcurt\€a>s, E., the wife of S., the king of the Cilicians, i. 2. 12. 2o0cu- verov . . Kai XioKparyv . ., £tvovs ovras Kai tovtovs i. 1. 11. 394. a. Ellipsis. The appositive or the subject may be omitted, when it can be supplied from the connection : Avkios 6 UoXvarparov [sc. i4<5s], L., the son of P., iii. 3. 20. QepuaTOKXys i j/cw irapa. at [sc. eyu>], I, T., have come to thee, Th. 1. 137. b. The sign of modal apposition (commonly ws, as) is often omitted : Aupdepas, Sls elxov aKeiracryaTa, the skins which they had as coverings, i. 5. 10. KXkapxor . . irapeKaXeae auy(3ovXov i. 6. 5. A yferai puadov to.Xo.vtov 11. 2. 20. c. Synesis. An appositive sometimes agrees with a subject which is implied in another word : ’AGqvcuos &v -rroAews rys yeyicrTys, being an Athenian, a city the greatest, PI. Apol. 29 d (here iroXews agrees with ’ Ady- vQv, of Athens, implied in ’ Adyvaios). ’AcpiKovTO eis Korvopa, -rroXiv EX- XyvL8a, Zivioirtuv airoiKOvs [referring to iroXiras, implied in TryAty] v. 5. 3 ; cf. iv. 8. 22, v. 3. 2. 2ov too irpecr|3€a>s Ar. Ach. 93. Fopycl/qv KecpaXyv beivoio irtXwpov X. 634. Tuum, hominis simplicis, pectus, Cic. 395. a. In partitive apposition, the statement of the parts is not always complete ; and sometimes the appositive denotes that which is closely related to the subject, rather than properly the same pier son or thing, even in part. With a participle, it may take the place of the Gen. absolute, in expressing some circumstance, as cause, manner, &c. Thus, Oi £vypiaxoi ra Svo p.€pq . . icrkj3aXov, the allies, two thirds of them , in¬ vaded, Th. 2. 47. E OnpXeKTa. 8k ra TrpoGupa avruv, (poiviKos yev ai Ovpai ire-irckyntvou, their portals are easily set on fire, the doors being made of the palm-tree, Cyr. 7. 5. 22. "AXXo Tpirov &pp.a i^yyero, (poivudci KaTaireirra- ykvoi oi tinroi lb. 8. 3. 12. ’Odvpyds iroXvs, 'Pay^jX icXaiovcra, Mat. 2. 18. 2G4 SYNTAX. R. I. -ArPOSITION. § 395. b. Hence by a poetic, especially Epic, construction, an appositive is used to specify the part affected: BovXei 7 row yoi rfjSe npoaOelvai x*p£ / do you wish to impose labor on me, viz. on this hand ? Eur. Heracl. (53. hdevos eyftaX eKaarcp KapSir], imparted strength [to each one, to the heart] to the heart of each one, A. 11. ’Ay aytyvovi yvSave 0vpu> A. 24. Me'0es ye . . X € ^P a > ^ go my hand, Soph. Ph. 1301. Ho top ere hros (pbyev ^pKos o8bv- tojv, ivhat language has escaped the hedge of your teeth ! a. 64. c. Some relations may be expressed either by an appositive or an ad¬ junct ; and one of these constructions is sometimes used where the other would seem more appropriate : T ovtov to eftpos Sbo irXeGpa, of this the breadth is two plcthra, i. 2. 5 ; but, ToD Se M apavov to ebpos eanv elKocrt /cat 7 revTe TroSaiv, and the breadth of the M. is twenty-five feet, lb. 8. Ilora- yos . . edpos Sbo irXeOpwv lb. 23 ; but, Tacppos . ., to yev ebpos opyuial 7 rerre i. 7. 14. Abna pvai eiacpopd • but, Ai/oIp pvcuv irpbaoSov, Yect. 3. 9, 10. *Ecrri 8b i) x^P a • • Ulkoul (rraSioi v. 3. 11. II6Xtp Tpoujv evreL- %eop A. 129 ; but, Tpct^s iepbv irroXiedpov a. 2. 396. a. A word, in apposition with a sentence not used substantively, is commonly in the Accusative, as expressing the effect of the action ; but is sometimes in the Nominative, as if an inscription marking the character of the sentence : ’Pt^et . . curb nvpyov, Xvypov oXeGpov, will hurl thee from a tower, a sad fate, 11. 735. 'Lrecpi 7 yLcdvercu, 7 roXet r ov€i 8 os /cat de&v an- pta, our garlands are profaned, a dishonor to the city, and an insult to the gods, Eur. Heracl. 72. 'EXep^p KTavwyer, MepeXecp Xti 7 rT]V Trucpav id. Or. 1105. To Se iravTwv peyicrrov . ., rr\v yev ■ The Accusative. That which is acted upon. 3. Residual. Tiie Vocative. That which is addressed. ii. Indirect Relations. 1. Subjective. Tiie Genttive. That from which any thing proceeds. 2. Objective. Tiie Dative. That towards which any thing tends. 3. Residual. Tiie Dative. That with which any thing is associated. 399. a. For the historical development of the Greek cases, see 186 s. From the primitive indirect case (which remained as the Dat.), a special form was separated to express the subjective relations, but none to express the objective. The primitive form, therefore, continued to express the objective relations, as well as all those relations which, from any cause, were not referred to either of these two classes ; and hence the Dat. is both an objective and a residual case. REV. OR. 12 2GG SYNTAX. R. II., III. -NOMINATIVE. § 339. b. In the Latin case-system, which so closely resembles the Greek, there is a partial separation of the indirect objective and residual, or, as they are termed in Lat., Dative and Ablative cases. This separation, however, does not appear at all in the Plural or in Dec. 2, and, wher¬ ever it occurs, may be explained by the mere precession or contraction of final vowels. ' c. A more important difference between the two languages appears in the extensive use of the Lat. Ablative. The Romans were more con¬ trolled than the Greeks by the power of habit, while they were less ob¬ servant of the minuter shades of thought, and niceties of relation. Plence, even after the full development of the Lat. case-system, the primitive in¬ direct case continued to retain, as it were by the mere force of possession, many of the subjective relations. It is interesting to observe how the old Ablative, the once undisputed lord of the whole domain of indirect rela¬ tions, appears to have contested every inch of ground with the new claim¬ ant that came forward in the younger Genitive. But we must leave the particulars of the contest to the Latin grammarian, and content ourselves with merely referring to two or three familiar illustrations. Thus, in Lat., the Gen. (as well as the Dat.) was excluded from all prepositional adjuncts, because in these the relation was sufficiently defined by the prep¬ osition. The Gen. of price secured a few words, but was obliged to leave all others to the Abl. After words of plenty and want, the use of the two cases was more nearly equal. In the construction of one substantive as the complement of another, the Gen. prevailed, yet even here the Abl. not un- frequently maintained its ground, if an adjective was joined with it as an ally. In some constructions, the use of the Gen. was only a poetic license, in imitation of the Greek. d. As most verbs express action, and the Active is the leading voice, the use of the Nominative as the subject of a finite verb became so established, that it extended to verbs of state as well as of action, and to the Passive no less than the Active voice. e. The Nominative, from its high office as denoting the subject of discourse, became the leading case, and was regarded as the representative of the word in all its forms (its theme, 172 e). Hence it was employed when the word was spoken of as a word, or was used without grammatical construction (401). f. There are no dividing lines either between direct and indirect, or between subjective, objective, and residual relations. Some relations seem to fall with equal propriety under two, or even three heads, according to the view which the mind takes of them. Hence the use of the cases not only varies in different languages, and in different dialects of the same language, but even in the same dialect, and in the compositions of the same author. g. A case may sustain the same relation to more than one word in the sentence : as, Kptct expovres yadior, they boiled and ate flesh, ii. 1 . 6. A. The Nominative. 400. Rule II. The Subject of a finite verb is put in the Nominative : as, ’Lj7T€i5t] Se ereXevryae Aapeios, sal Kareary els ryv ftaaikeiav ’ApTa^p^rjs, T«rcra<{>€pvqs 5ta/3a\Xet rov K vpov, and when now Darius was dead, and Artaxerxes teas established in the royal authority, Tissaphernes accuses Cyrus, i. 1. 3. § 402 . INDEPENDENT. 26 ? 401. Rule III. Substantives independent of grammatical construction are put in the Nominative. \ Note. The Nom. thus employed is termed the Nominative indepen¬ dent or absolute (absolutus, released, free , sc. from grammatical fetters). See 399 e. This use might be often explained by ellipsis (68 bj. To this rule mav be referred the use of the Nominative, a. ) In the inscription of names , titles, and divisions: as, Ku- pnv ’A v a /3 a cr t 9 Cyri Expeditio, The Expedition of Cfries ; B t /3 A i o v npeomv Liber Primus, Book First. b. ) In exclamations : as, ©dAarra, 0 d \ arr a , the Sea ! the Sea ! iv. 7. 24. dvaraXaiv e y 6 ), 0 wretched me ! Eur. Iph. A. 1315. (plXTarou

iX€ BdtKXte Eur. Cycl. 73. 15 12 ovros, Atav Soph. Aj. 89. Ovros cD, t rot aov Trod’ at pets, SetrnroTa; Eur. Hel. 1627. 402. Anacoluthon, &c. From the office of the Nom. in denoting the subject of discourse, and from its independent use, it is sometimes employed where the construction would demand a different case : as, a. ) In the introduction of a sentence : 'Yp-ets dk, . . vvv dy raipos vjjuv doKe t dvac; You then, . . does it now seem to you to be just the time ? vii. б . 37. ’ EmdvpGiv 6 Ivvpos . ., edo^eu avrui, Cyrus desiring, . . it seemed best to him, Cyr. 7. 5. 37. '0 yap Mwvtrfjs ovros, . . ovre otdapev rL yeyovev avra> Acts 7. 40. Kai. evravda paxopcvoi rai PacrtXevs /cat Kvpos, /cat ot dpfi avrovs inrep eKarepwo, o 7 roOT€pwv Kara spar os ii roXe/xeiro- ’AGrjvaioi yh . . irepLirXeovTes Th. 4. 23. A67 01 o’ ev &XXr|Xoicriv epgjdovv kclkoi, <}>vX.af; eXe7%wv cpoXasa Soph. Ant. 259. — The two last examples may perhaps be referred to 395 a, or 396 a c.) In speaking of names or words as stick : IIpodvTqs, he has obtained the common appellation of the vile, “sycophant,” zEschin. 41. 15. Hapey^ba b KCpos avvdypia, Zeus £v|A|iaxos Kal Tjyepwv, Cyrus gave out as the pass-word, “Jove our Ally and Leader,” Cyr. 3. 3. 58. B. The Genitive. 403. That from which any thing proceeds (398 d) may be resolved into (i.) That from ivhich any thing proceeds, as its point of departure ; and ( 11 .) That from ivhich any thing proceeds, as its cause. Hence the Greek Genitive is either (i.) the Geni¬ tive of Departure, or (n.) the Genitive of Cause ; and we have the following general rule for subjective adjuncts (397) : Rule A. The Point of Departure and the Cause are put in the Genitive. a. The Genitive of departure is commonly expressed in English by the preposition from; and the Genitive of cause, by the preposition of. The former is commonly expressed in Latin by the Ablative ; and the latter partly by the Gen., and partly by the Abl. (b) Hence, in general, The Genitive is used to express that of or from which something is or is done. c. The relations here denoted are, however, sometimes translated by other prepositions, and sometimes without a preposition. i. Genitive of Departure. 404. Departure may be either in place , in time, or in character. Hence, Rule IV. Words of separation and distinc¬ tion govern the Genitive. a. There is no line of division between the tw r o classes of words which are mentioned in this rule. Many words w'hich are commonly used to denote distinction of character referred originally to separation of place (cf. 398). And, on the other hand, words which usually denote separa¬ tion of place, are often employed, by a metaphorical or transitive use, to express departure or difference in other respects. § 406 . OF SEPARATION AND DISTINCTION. 269 (1.) Genitive of Separation. 405. a. Words of separation include those of removal and distance , of exclusion and restraint , of cessation and failure , of abstinence and release , of deliverance and escape , of protection and freedom , v yev vycrcpwv y8d yoi cjmSetrOcu, it is my pleasure to spare your property, Cyr. 3. 2. 28. K dscivos {nrcxtupTjcrev avrp tov 6p6- vov, and he [Sophocles] conceded to him [iEschylus] the throne, Ar. Ran. 790. T?)s opy?,s avcvTes, resigning your anger, lb. 700. tu>i> 'EXXy- vwu eXevdepias . . 'rrapaxojpfjcrai epovo-av, bringing from the house, Soph. El. 324. T overde iraidas yrjs tXav, to drive these children from the land, Eur. Med. 70. Ba dpwv l'o-Tao-0t, rise from your seats, Soph. O. T. 142. T6 t ovpavov ‘rretrrip.a Eur. Iph. T. 1384. (d) So that from which action begins: "Tyvyaau Aios dpxbycvai, they sang beginning from Jove, Pind. N. 5. 48. ’Ap^aycvoi tov x«pov opcv t&v aXXcov ttoXcoju, superior to the other states, Mem. 4. 4. 15. liXoorou apery SigcrTTiKev PL Pep. 550 e. 'E-rcpov be to ybv rod ayadov, ‘ other than,’ ‘ different from, ’ PI. Gorg. 500 d. So aXXos other, with aXXolos, aXXbrpios, aXXoibo) ; irepiaabs exceeding, with irepiaaevo: ; biaaXfjs Ar. Eccl. 524. Olvos oivtKa>v ii. 3. 14 (cf. i. 5. 10). A Ifivijv . . feovaai' iiSa/ros PI. Phsedo 113 a. Me^ecr^ets rod veKTapos PI. Conv. 203 b. Ao-ywv upas A vaias eterria; PI. Phsedr. 227 b. a. The Gen. of source or material occurs, especially in the Epic poets, for other forms of construction, particularly the instrumental Dat. : as, Ilp^trcu 88 -Trapos dytoio dvperpa, burn the gates with raging fire [from fire, as the source], B. 415. Xeipas vi-fapevos iroXiijs aXos, having washed his hands [with water from] in the foaming sea, (3. 261. Aoueadai euppsios iroTap.oio Z. 508. ITupos peiXcaatuev H. 410. p.Las poi \eipbs 68a6ai rd5e, * with a-single blow,’ Eur. Here. 938. 272 SYNTAX. It. VII., VIII., IX. -GENITIVE. §413. 413. That of which one discourses or thinks may be regarded as the material of his discourse or thoughts ; thus we speak of the matter of dis¬ course, a matter of complaint , the subject-matter of a composition, &e. Hence, not unfrequently, both in immediate dependence upon another word, and even in the introduction of a sentence, Rule VII. The theme of discourse or of thought is put in the Genitive : as, ToD to|ototj ov naXws e'xet Xeyeiv, oti, k. t. X., it is not well to say of the bowman, that, &c., PI. Rep. 439 b. AiaQewyevos avrov, ocryv yev xw- pav . . %x 0Lev > observing in respect to them, how great a country they have, iii. 1. 19. Tys be yuvaiKos, d . . KaKoiroid, but in respect to the wife, if she manages ill, (Ec. 3. 11. KXcwc trov, hearing of thee, Soph. 0. 0. 307. T L be Imvwv o’iei; what do you think of horses l PI. Rep. 459 b. Olcr 6 a . . kvvcov, on tovto cpvveL avrwv to yQos, ‘ you know of dogs,’ lb. 375 e. To Meyape'tov j/yfnaya Th. 1. 140 (= to irepl M. -fyefiaya 139). be a', t s pevbs, ev (tov beboLKa Eur. An cl. 361. So with eppafw to tell, epyyL say, epwraw inquire, xpaw respond (of an oracle), ya.vQ6.vw learn, oKoiriw con¬ sider, voew think; ayyeXia message, yd6os fable, epwryais inquiry (qusestio animorum, Cic.) ; &c. a. For the Gen. of the theme may be often substituted another case, more frequently the Horn., in the succeeding clause : Ei bk y yuv?| kclko- Toiei, if the wife manages ill. 414. 3. Genitive of Supply. Supply may be either abundant or defective. Hence, Rule VIII. Words of plenty and want gov¬ ern the Genitive : as, a. Of Plenty. QypLwv ‘TrXrjpqs, full of beasts, i. 2. 7. Mcoral ctLtov, full of corn, i. 4. 19. Aiepdepas . . ImirrrXacrav x°P T0V > they filled the skins with hay, i. 5. 10. T ovtwv cLXis, enough of these things, v. 7. 12. Aacrsos . . bevbpwv, thick with trees, ii. 4. 14. IIXovtci . . epiXwv, he is rich in friends, vii. 7. 42. So irXews full, irXovaios, poet. aepveiis, rich; irXydw, y tyw, to be full, einroptw abound, (3puw teem ; irXypbw, yearbw, fill, Kophvvyi satiate, (t6.ttw stuff; do yv enough ; e iir op La abundance ; &c.: and Lat. plenus, dives, impleo, &c. b. Of W ant. ’AvQp&wwv a-n-opwv, wanting in men, i. 7. 3. hevbo- vyrwv . . 8ti, there is need of slingers, iii. 3. 16. OtW dv eXirlbwv eyavrbv cTTepf](raL(xi, of what hopes I should deprive myself, ii. 5. 10. M tus Seov- creu TecraapcLKOvra, 40 less 1 (§ 242 c). $>i\wv fpr*pos, devoid of friends, Eur. Med. 513. Sou [aovt] lb. 52. Ile'vqs . . efiXwv, poor in friends, PI. Ep. 332 c. So ivbeys wanting, eXXnrys deficient, nevus empty, bpcpavbs be¬ reft, yvyvus naked, fiXos bare ; irevoyac to be poor, airopew, airavifw, lack ; epyybw, yovow, yypow, bereave, yvyvuw, \piXow, strip ; cnropLa, bvbeia, XP €ta > want; &c.: and Lat. indigus, inops, pauper, egeo, &c. c. The Gen. which belongs to S^oficu and xpp£o> as ver ^ s °f wani ma y be retained by them in the derived senses, to desire, to request, to entreat: Outivos dv bbyaQe, whatever you may desire, i. 4. 15. Aikcuwv bdcrOcu, to request what is reasonable, Cyr. 8. 3. 20. M anpov XPIlfr LV P^ov, to desire long life, Soph. Aj. 473. §417. OF THEME, OF SUPrLY. FARTITIVE. 273 4. Genitive Partitive. 415. Rule IX. The whole of which a part is taken is put in the Genitive : as, "Hfucru too 6'Xou (TTparcvparos, half of the whole army, vi. 2. 10. a. This Gen. has received the names of the Gen. of the whole, and the Gen. partitive; the former from its denoting the whole, and the latter from the conception of this whole as divided into parts, of which the mind takes up one or more (partio or partior, to divide, from pars, part). 416. The partitive construction may be employed, a. ) To express quantity , degree , condition, place, time, &c., considered as a limitation of a general idea, or as a part of an extended whole (especially with a neuter adjective or an ad¬ verb) : Mispov 8' vttvov Xa%c6v, obtaining a little [of] sleep, iii. 1. 11. 'Ev tol- ovtu) . . too Kivbvvov iTpoaibvTos, in such imminent danger [in such a degree of], i. 7. 5. '0 5’ eis rood' vfipecos eXr/Xvdev, ‘to such a pitch of insolence,’ Dem. 51. 1. CM per h toot ip -rrapacrKevrjs ijaav, in this state of prepara¬ tion,’ Th. 2. 17. T Hy piaov ypepas, it was midday, i. 8. 8. Els toS' ype- pas, to this [time of day] point of time, Eur. Ale. 9. Bvviirecrov is touto avdyays Th. 1. 49. ’E7ri piya opycrav Sovapeios lb. 118. Ets h polpas Eur. And. 1172. See 420 a, b. Cf. Lat. hoc negoti, id temporis, illud aetatis, tantum fidei. Note. A neuter demonstrative pronoun is oftenest found in this con¬ struction, when governed by a preposition. b. ) In presenting the whole as the sum of all the parts; in denoting the whole and a part; and in denying of all the parts : ’Ev tols dyadoiai 8i irdvr heanv aoplas, in the good dwell all the quali¬ ties of wisdom, Eur. Ale. 60L 'Ev wavrl kukou, in the [whole] extreme of evil, PI. Rep. 579 b. Oi pev 'Adyvaioi ev iravTt 8>) ddvplas ijcrav Th. 7. 55. 'HpioXtov . . o5 irporepov Zcpepov, half [and the whole of what] as much again as they before received, i. 3. 21. T ovrwv . . ovSha olSa, I know none of these, Cyr. 7. 5. 45. OvSev diroXeixovres irpodoptas Th. 8. 22. Cf. Cuncta terrarum, Hor.; Nihil rerum, Cic. 417. a. The whole is sometimes put in the case which belongs to the part, the paid agreeing with the whole instead of governing it ; chiefly when different parts are successively mentioned (cf. 393 d, 395 a) : ’A koO- opev vpas . . ivlovs asyvovv ev rats olkIcus, we hear that you, some of you, quarter in the houses [for vpQv ivtovs], v. 5. 11. AlSvpa rhea irbrepos &pa TTOTepov aipd^ei; ‘which of the two ?’ Eur. Ph. 1289. OIk£cu, at ph ttoX- Xal enewTibKecrav, dXlyai Si irepirjaav, the houses, the most had been demol¬ ished, and few remained, Th. 1. 89. Ou yap Td Kat\a ywaucdv, 0 [be¬ loved of] dearest of women, Eur. Ale. 460. Ata ywaindv 8. 405. AciXcua SeiXaLuv Kvpeis, wretched of the wretched art those ! Soph. El. 849. " Ereuov rys yys ryv ttoAXtiv Til. 2. 56. ’E^t TrActcr-rov dvdpdirwv Th. 1.1. T^s yrjs y dpis<- 8 ecrTaTa v clvtuv eTiywpelro, he pun¬ ished most unsparingly of all [he of all, 418 b] i. 9. 13. VpoTiyydqvat. paXiorra tu>v 'FXXyvojv i. 6 . 5. OI ydv eyytrraTa tQv -rroXeyLuv ii. 2. 17. 421. IV. Verbs. The Genitive partitive, in connection with a verb, may perform the office either of a subject, an ap- positive, or a complement; taking the place of any case which the verb would require, if referring to the whole. See 418 b. 1.) The Gen. Partitive as a Subject, (a) Of a Finite Verb : EiVI 5’ av- t(3v, ovs oud’ av . . diafialyre, there are some of them, which you could not pass, ii. 5. 18. noXefiou, sal pax^S ov yeryv avry, of war and battle, there fell to her no share, Cyr. 7. 2. 28 (so with irpoayKei, 4. 2. 20). Teat' ok Sapi'tov • • Zwdkyevoi . . diefiyaav Th. 1. 115. (b) Of an Infinitive: ’ETLyLyvvvaL crcjxtv, that some of them mingled, iii. 5. 16. ’'ihero TrpoayKeiv ovdevl dpxqs, he thought that [a share of] authority belonged to no one, Cyr. 8. 1. 37. Aonei diraiov elvai, Train tujv dpx^v yerelva l Rep. A. 1. 2. 422. 2.) The Gen. Partitive in the place of an Appositive is most common with substantive verbs, but is likewise found with other verbs, particularly those of reckoning, esteeming, and making: 0 vk eylo totjtcov elyt, lam not one of these, Cyr. 8 . 3. 45. ’E rvyxave . . f3ovXqs he hap¬ pened to be one of the council, Th. 3. 70. "TXas paKapcov apiOyeirai, IPylas is numbered as one of the blest, Theoc. 13. 72. Movo-lkt|S . . ridys Xdyous ; do you make letters apart of music ? PI. Pep. 376 e. 276 SYNTAX. 11. X., XL-GENITIVE PARTITIVE. §423. 423. 3.) The Genitive Partitive is used as a Complement, a. Generally, with any verb, when its action affects not the whole object, but a part only : as, Aa/3'ji'Tas too (3ap[3apL,ids be run/ c.L)(p.aXcora)V, sending some of the captives, vii. 4. 5. Utipicrocpcs Trepirei rdy etc tt )s Kp 77 s aicefopevovs iv. 5. 22. Kat rrj$ re yrjs irepov Th. 2. 56. IIapot£as rrp 0i3pas, opening the door a little, Ar. Pax 30. 424. 13 .) Particularly , with verbs which, in their ordinary use, imply divided or partial action. Note. The Gen. partitive may he connected with other parts of speech upon the same principle. Hence the rule is expressed in a general form. Rule X. Words of siiapjng, beginning, and touch govern the Genitive. 1. Words of sharing include those of partaking (part¬ taking), imparting, obtaining by distribution, Ac. Thus, T Cjv klvcouwv jj-tTe'xtiv, to share in [have a share of] the dnngers, Hel. 2. 4. 9. T^cr5e Koivwvai 77 s, I partake of this fortune, Eur. Med. 303. Twv exxppocrwCjv p.£Ta 8 i 8 dvT€s, imparting our joys, CEc. 9. 12 . MeioveKTt? r u>v einppoavvQv 6 rvpavvos, ‘has less of,’ Hier. 1. 29. Toy ijXiov irXtove- KTOvvTd, ‘ hearing more of,’ Cyr. 1. 6 . 25. WvjxpdXXeTai, . . rovde deipa- ros Eur. Med. 284. ’A yadp de cruXXfjirTpia tw iv eipri^y ttovwv, f3e(3cda de tujv ev TToXepcp v 7 rcubos vTravTpo-as, having met with the son, of brave heroes, Soph. Ph. 719. Metrcrou bovpbs IXwv T. 78. So 61 y- yavu, 1 pavu), to touch, Xapfidvopat, dvriXapfidvopai, take hold of, bpacrcropcu seize, i^LKviopac, iffnnviopxxi, reach; poet, dvracn, dvridw, Kvpico meet with; ?X°P a b dvrexopac, keep hold of, cling to, bvaftaivw go on board (fl. 416) ; § 429. OF MOTIVE, REASON, OR END IN VIEW. 277 dfavaros, (LOlktos, free from the touch of; &c. Cf. “Lest his hand reach of the tree of life,” Milton. a. Hence, the part taken hold of is put in the Gen., in connection with ether forms of construction : "Elkafiov Tys t'ov ’OpbvTyv, t'lcy took Orontes by the girdle , i. 6. 10. Rlv . . \pavetv x«pos Eur. Here. 968. *Ayeiv Tys t|vias tov lvitou Eq. 6 . 9. Kc|XT]$ eXe IlyXetwa A. 197. T yv ybv xpeyavryv avyevos Soph. Ant. 1221. h. To the analogy of verbs of touch may be referred expressions like the following : Tip KecJxxXfjs Kart dye, he broke [was fractured in] his head , Ar. Ach. 1180. yiweTplfiy rip xetpaXys Ar. Pax 71. lv parivov avvTpixpcu Tys KerpaXys avrys, that C. had broken her head, Isoc. 381 a. Cf. 476. 427. 4. Several words of obtaining , attaining , and receiving , govern the Genitive, from their referring primarily either to distribution or to touch. Thus, "Ira Tys irpocryKovays yoLpas XaY\dvrj, that it may receive its proper por¬ tion, PI. Leg. 903 e. KX-qpovop-eiv ovdevbs, to inherit nothing, Dem. 1065. 25. Twj' dLKaiwv Tvyydveiy, to obtain your rights, vii. 1. 30. QvyTov yev cuyaTos Cruxes, A0ANATOT Se SkTXHS Isoc. 22 b. T depov avnairas, Soph. El. 868. Et 8£ tls scupsi yvmLxbs evdXys, evTvxci Eur. Cr. 2. a. The student can hardly fail to have remarked the great variety of metaphorical and transitive meanings in which words of sharing and of touch are employed, not only in Greek, but likewise in our own and in other languages. 428. B. That which exerts an influence as an EXCITEMENT, OCCASION, Or CONDITION. To this division belong the following rules, respecting, 1. the motive , reason , and end in view; 2. price, value , merit y and crime ; 3. the sensible and mental object; and 4. time and place. a. The Gen. so employed is often translated by other prepositions than of and from, especially by for; and sometimes without a preposition. 1. Genitive of Motive , fyc . 429. Rule XI. The motive, reason, and end in view are put in the Genitive. To this rule may be referred the use of the Gen., both in regular construction and in exclamation , to express the person or thing, on account of which, in consequence of which, for the sake of which, in honor of which, or to affect which, any thing is done, said, felt, or existing. Thus, a. With Verbs : Micr0ov inrypeTodvTes, serving [from, or on account of] for hire, Cyr. 6. 2. 37. Tovrou ere . . fyXu, on this account I envy you, lb. 8. 4. 23. Mydev avrwv Ka.Ta.9eis, paying nothing for them, lb. 3. 1. 37. ddXov Selvas . . ?) \avrov, fearing [on account of] for a friend or even himself, Soph. 0. T. 234. Tavi-qs ixvovyai ere, I beseech you for her GEN. OF MOTIVE, &C. § 429. 278 SYNTAX. R. XI., XII., XIII.- sake, Eur. Or. 671. 'I/ceredw ae tuipSc yovvarav, ‘by these knees,’ Id. Hee. 752. 27 rdaop dyadov 8 cup.ovos, ‘in honor of,’ Ar. Eq. 106. II/oo- 7 re 7 rorat Try napavTixa rjSovqs, ‘for the sake of present pleasure,’ Deni. 34. 23. ‘'Ey pa fa . ., tov yy rivas ^qTq envy, dyayai, davydfa, admire, evSaiyopifa, yaxapifa, esteem happy, olxTcipco pity, opyL^oyou, dvyuoya l, yaXe7ra^co, be angry, ypyaixaxtw bear ill-will, Tiywpeoycu take vengeance, alvtw, eircuvew, praise, yeyfoyai blame, cttcpoj sigh, dWdaaco exchange, irpuTTw exafit, 6(pei\oj owe, &c. Cf. Profieiscitur cognoscendie antiquitatis, Tac. A. 2. 59 ; Sume cyatlios amici, Ilor. b. With Adjectives : Ev8aiyup . . tov Tpo-rrov, happy [by reason of] from his character, PI. Phsedo 58 e. *0 yaxapie rr,s Tcxvqs, Blessed in thy trade! Ar. Ay. 1423. C tclKcuv eyd> cre'0ev Soph. El. 1209. dvard- \(uva rrjs eyys av0aSias Eur. Med. 1028. Cerebri felieem, 7/or. c. With Adverbs : Hepdix&s Si ’4x°os fepeip avrwv Th. 2. 62. KaAtDs -ira- pd/rrXov xeiTcu, it lies well for the voyage, Th. 1. 36. IlapoSov xpyvffus e&iv Th. 3. 92. d. With Nouns : ’ildivas avrov irpoafiakdov, causing pargs on his ac¬ count, Soph. Tr. 41. Ttveiov tov§’ . . Xtras, entreaties by this beard, Eur. Or. 290. Tpo£as yiaos, hatred on account of Troy, lb. 432. e. With Interjections: ‘kev tov avSpcs, Alas for the noble man! Cyr. 3. 1. 39. Mai kcikcSv Eur. Here. 899. O tyoi 8 d(JLapros lb. 1374. Oa . . xd.£ €cr ® t u> to take aim at men, Cyr. 1. 6 . 29. A vtov x e P~ yaSas . . ^ppurrov, they threw stones at him, Eur. Bac. 1096. Ev0v lleX- Xypys 7 r€T€o- 0 ai, to fly straight for Pellene, Ar. Ay. 1421. Tts yap curry ear ip octls rry dpxys dvTi'TrouiTcu ; for who is there that disputes with him the sovereignty [makes for the sovereignty in opposition to him] ? ii. 1 . 11 . BadiXi/c^s yeraTTotovyepovs re%r 77 s, laying claim to the kingly art, PI. Pol. 289 e. Tc'vcu tov npoau, to go farther [for that which is farther on], i. 3. 1. So with axoPTL^w, Toijetiu, irjyi, to shoot, rpexv run, opeyoyac reach for, eiTLyaloyaL poet., feel or seek for, dy(pia(3yTeu contend for; Wv{ s Ion., straight for; &c. b. The student cannot fail to remark the ease with which verbs of motion pass into those of simple effort and desire (432 e). Thus, 1 'cp.ai, and, more commonly, cc|u€|acu, to send one's self to, rush to, strive for, seek, desire; opdyopcu, to reach after, strive for, seek, court, desire : Ao^ys iv PI. Menex. 239 c. So with to deem worthy, afiuos in a manner worthy of, dvdfios un¬ worthy, Kard^ios, right worthy ; i roieoyai, ridypu, to estimate ; &c. Cf. Magni festimabat pecuniam, Cic.; Salutis dignus, Plant. e. Crime : ’Ao-£(3aas (pevyovra, accused of impiety, PL Apol. 35 d. Auv^oyai ere StiXias, I will prosecute you for cowardice, Ar. Eq. 368. "Evoxos . . XsmoTa^iov, guilty of desertion, Lys. 140. 1. So with aindo- yai, eiraiTidoycu, to accuse, ypdpoyai indict, ciadyiv, virayw, eve^eiyi, eire £- tpxoycu, emuKyivToyai, KaXouyai, prosecute, arraign, Sued fa, Kpivw, judge, aXicncoyai, opXiaKdvw, be convicted; viredduuos liable; &c.: and, in Lat., with accuso, arguo, condemno, absolvo ; reus, insons; &c. d. The Gen. (chiefly Oavdrov) is sometimes used to express the punish¬ ment (regarded either as the desert of the crime, or as the end in view in judicial proceedings) : ©avd-roo <5e ovtol Kpiuovcn, these pronounce sentence of death [adjudge worthy of], Cyr. 1. 2. 14. 'Tn^yov GavaTov, ‘on a capi¬ tal charge, Hel. 2. 3. 12. Avdpdnrwv KaTaxpTjcpio devrivv Gavd-rov rj cjjvyijs PL Rep. 558 a. "Eroxoi Setrpov yeybvdm Dem. 1229. 11 . See b. Cf. Damnatus laboris, Ilor. 3. Genitive of Sensible or Mental Object. 432. The object of sensation, thought, or emotion may be regarded as its exciting cause , and, in this view, may be put in the Genitive. Hence, Rule XIII. Words of sensation, and of men¬ tal state or action govern the Genitive : as, a. Of Sensation : Siroe eyevcravTo, tasted of food, iii. 1 . 3. 0 tvov . . oo-^patveorGai, to smell wine, v. 8. 3. QopdfSov ^Kaucre 8ia tG>v rd^euv lov- tos, ‘ heard a murmur, i. 8. 16. Ovdeis 8e Trujirore S wupdrovs oudev acrepies ov8l avjcrior oere irpaTTOvros tt8ev, oirre Xeyovros ^kouotcv, ‘ saw S. doing, or heard him saying,’ Mem. 1. 1. 11. reOcrai tt)s Ovpas, [taste of] knock at the door, Ar. Ran. 462. So yevu to give a taste, aKpoaoyai, kXvo poet., hear ; ay tear os not tasting, avyuoos not hearing ; &c. For words of touch, see 426. 280 SYNTAX. R. XIII., XIV. -GEN. OF MENTAL OBJECT. § 432. b. Of Perception, Knowledge, Reflection, Experience, and Habit : ’E7n(3ov\r)s ovk -rjo-BdveTo, he did not perceive the plot, i. 1. 8. ’AW yXwv fj vvUcrav , understood each other, Th. 1. 3. ’Ev0iip,ov 88 koX tQv ciSbrwv, consider those who know, Mem. 3. 6. 17. Ilaptojitvoi radrys rijs ra^ews, making trial of this order, iii. 2. 38. Taw ret^wE yyQv veipav, to [try] attack our walls, Tli. 7. 12. Tpij3a>v ibv liririicrjs, practised in horse¬ manship, Ar. Vesp. 1429. QeXu 8' d'iSpis piaXXov i) o-o4>bs kclkwv elvai iEsch. Sup. 453. Qevws T V s evddSe Xe£ews PI. Apol. 17 d. Max^s it) elSdre B. 824 (Pugnse sciens, Hor.). So veipa trial, experience, with ty- 7 reipos, epnrdpws, ipnretpia, cpnreipew, dnreipos, dwelpcos, aircipia, airdparos, -los ; €iri croi ov (})0ovr|cra), which I shall not grudge to you, Cyr. 8. 4. 16. pioi , poet. vt]kov vov ] Trdcrxocyer, ‘in future,’ Dem. 44. 12. "iicrre rqs Tjfiepas o\-qs diqXdov . ., aXXa SciXtjs dpiKovro iii. 3. 11. Too aurou depovs, Too 5’ eviyiyi'op.evov x^^wos, Til. 2. 66 , 69. Cf. Eng. o’ nights. b. Place : Avtou [sc. rbirov] yeivavres, remaining in that place , i. 10. 17. T(]s 8 b Tomas . . aiaxpbv vev’jgujTcu, in Ionia, it has been deemed base, PI. Conv. 182 b. Kare/cXetcrac . . MaKsSovias ' Adyvadoi He / o5t/c/cat', the A. shut up P. in M., Th. 5. 83. Tl ovk ’'Apyeos ijev; was he not in AJ y. 251. Tot'd’ ei defta aov. On which hand l On thy right. Eur. Cycl. 681. '0 pQ -n-vpas vecopq fioarpvxov, ‘on the tomb,’ Soph. El. 900. Necpos 8’ ov (paivero irdcrys yaiqs, ‘ [in] over the whole land,’ P. 372. Cf. the Lat. Gen. of place (perhaps a modified form of the Dat.) : domi, &c. c. This use of the Gen., to denote the place where, rarely occurs in prose, except in those adverbs of place which are properly genitives (380 h) : 06 , avrov, dyov, ovSayou, &c. Cf. 469 d. d. This Gen. is sometimes employed, chiefly in the Epic, to denote the place upon, over, or through which any thing moves : "Epx .vtcu ireSioio, they advance [in] upon the plain, B. 801. IleSuov eirLuLaaeraL, it fiows over the 'plains, Soph. O. C. 689. ’EX/A/xerai veioto (BaOeiqs tt^ktov dporpov, ‘through the deep fallow,’ K. 353. ’ Eiirerdxdvov rqs oSov, ‘on the way,’ Th. 4. 47. rioias [sc. odou] eiatvkyKwtnv avrbv, ‘ by what Avay,’ Lk. 5. 19. e. The ideas of place and time are combined in some expressions which 282 SYNTAX. R. XV., XVI. GENITIVE ACTIVE. § 433. relate to journeying (Fr. journee, a day's-march, fr. Lat. diurims, fr. dies, day) : 'E7rra/cat5e/ca yap crraOjiiuv tuv eyyvraTW ovbev dxeyev, ‘ [in] during the last seventeen day’s-marclies,’ ii. 2. 11. 'H yepevovras . . paspas Kt- XtuGov TEsch. Clio. 710. f. The idea of cause appears especially in such expressions as A dxreiv . . rpla ypu.Sapei.Ka too ypvos, to pay three half-claries a month, i. 3. 21. g. Some of the examples under this rule have been referred by some to the partitive use of the Genitive. 434. C. That which produces any thing, as its active or efficient cause ; or, in other words, that by which, as its author, agent , or giver, any thing is made, written, said, done, bestoived, &c., or from which any thing is obtained, heard, learned, inquired, requested, demanded, &c. To this division, which must obviously refer chiefly to persons, belongs the following rule, which will of course be understood as applying only to adjuncts. Genitice Active. Rule XV. The author, agent, and giver are put in the Genitive : as, a. With Verbs of Obtaining, Receiving, Hearing, Learning, Inquiring, Requesting, &c.: T avra de trov rvxbvres, obtaining this of you, vi. 6. 32. ’Epoii aKovaeade icacrav ryv aXyOecav, you shall hear from me the whole truth, PL Apol. 17 b. Ma0e de pon /cat rdde, learn from me this also, Cyr. 1. 6. 44. IT vvdavov Se tCjv (jevwv, inquire of the, strangers, iEsch. Clio. 848. Atovrat crov Kai tovto, ‘request of you,’ vi. 6. 33. IIcuSos £8e- tjaro x €L P L KvireWov A. 596. Son . . curet pevdov Soph. 0. C. 1161. b. With Passive Verbs and Verbals : llXyyds 0vyaTpos tt)s epps, smit¬ ten by my daughter , Eur. Or. 497. Zcpayels Avyi (442), -rrXyaiov in TrXrjaiafa (445 c), idvdvvos in klv- dweuw (446 d). Hence, Rule B. A word may govern the Genitive, by virtue of an included substantive, adjective, or adverb. b. Adjectives in which a substantive is compounded with a- privative (385), have often a Gen. defining the substantive : as, Trjpcos &Xvira, free from the pains of age, Soph. 0. C. 1519. See 446 b. Hence the special rule, Rule C. The compounds of Alpha Privative govern the Genitive ; or, in the Latin rhyme, Semper Alpha Privativum Poni facit Gcnitivum. c. The verbs o£co to smell, i rvew to breathe, and 'irpoo-pdXXco to emit, may take a Gen. defining a noun implied in these verbs or understood with them : ‘Ofrovai they smell of pitch [emit the smell of pitch], Ar. Ach. 190. Mvpov 7 tv£ov, breathing of myrrh, Soph. Fr. 147. Bpo-roO ge TrpoatfiaXe, the scent of a mortal strikes me, Ar. Pax 180. 'f2s rjSu goi irpoo- tTruevae xotpei ov Kpcwv Ar. Ran. 338. d. Some adverbs govern the Gen., as originally substantives (380), or by virtue of an included substantive : To55e rod ev'Abyyrov KaKuiv Eur. Ale. 761 (cf. ’Et>’A byyrov bbyois 68). ’Et^At- boo Soph. Ant. 654 (cf. E Iv’Aidov bbyois 1241). Cf. Hectoris Andromache, Hector's [wife] A., Virg.; Ad Vestae, to Vesta's [temple], Hor.: John Peters [originally for J., Peter's son]. To St. Paul's [Church]. Note. The ellipsis of words of abode is chiefly with the prepositions els, tv, and b. Instead of simple ellipsis, the possessor is sometimes put in the case belonging to the thing possessed, chiefly in comparison: as, "A pyara . . tiyoia eKCLvtj) [= rots eKeivov apyaai], chariots like [him] his {chariots), Cyr. 6. 1. 50 (cf. [’Ap/xara] oyoia tois Kvpov 2. 7). ihrXiaytvoi . . rots avrois § 442. OF PROPERTY. OF RELATION. 285 Kvpu) o-n-Xois, equipped in armor the same with [Cyrus] C.'s {armor), Cyr. 7 . l/2. "Exo/iei/ atbyara iKavJjrepa tovtwv, we have bodies better able than [they] theirs, iii. 1. 23. MtjS’ iZurdxrrjS rdcrSe [ = ra, ruvbe /ca/ca] rots e/xois kolkols Sopli. 0. T. 1507. Ko/xou XaptTecrcriv op.oiai P. 51. 439. An adjunct defining a thing either expresses a prop¬ erty of that thing, or points out another thing related to it. An adjunct defining a property points out a thing related to that property. Hence the constituent genitive is either, (1) tlie Genitive of Property , or (2) the Genitive of Relation . 1. Genitive of Property. 440. a. The Genitive of property expresses dimension , age , quality , &c. (often expressed by an adjective, 435 d): II ora/xov 6vra to ebpos -rrXeOpov i. 4. 9, a river being [of] a pletliron in width (cf. TlorapLov to efipos TrXcGpiatov i. 5. 4, and see 395 c). Hplv clkocuv 4tu)v dvai, before he was [of 20 years] 20 years old, Mem. 1. 2. 40. [Tet- Xos] eCpos eiKOcri iroSwv, iifos 8e Ikcitov • jhtj/cos eXeyero elvcu d'KOtri ‘Trapacrayyaiv ii. 4. 12. See 437 a. b. Except in the predicate, the Gen. of strict quality is chiefly poetic or Hellenistic (437 e) : T obrov too rpoirou 7rc5s el ili, I am somehow of this turn, Ar. PI. 246. "Ocroi rrjs avrrjs ■yvtofj.-qs h (Jav , as many as tvere of the same mind, Th. 1. 113. ToO0’ opto i roXXoO irovov, I see it {a work) of much difficulty, Eur. Ph. 719. SroXtSa . . rpu({>ds [= rpvs etcetvov exOicrrovs, . . toijs Kvpov fpiXovs, his ivoist foes, the friends of C., iii. 2. 5. Cf. 450 a, 456. 286 SYNTAX. R. XVI. GENITIVE OF RELATION. § 442. a. To this analogy may be referred the use of the Gen. for the Dat., with some adjectives denoting near conncctiepvovs, the Ionian cities belonged to T., i. 1. 6. Twv yh yap vikwvtwv to KaTasaiveiv, t«v be TjTTcupevwv to cLTrodpyaKeip eari, for it is the part of victors to kill, but of the vanquished to die, iii. 2. 39. IloAts . . IlaXXdSos nekXyyepy, a city called Minerva's, Eur. Ion 8. "Up ipcov av- t(ov edeXyayre yepeaOai, ‘your own men/ i. e. ‘independent/ Dem. 42. 10. T?)s TroXews orras, true to the state, Isoc. 185 b. Oi) KpcovTos . . ye- ypdfoyai, I shall not be registered as Crcon's, Soph. 0. T. 411. Myb' & yy “diyes TTOLou creavTf|S, nor make yours what you did not touch, Id. Ant. 546. b. A neuter adjective used substantively takes the Gen. possessive, in connection with some verbs of praise, blame, wonder, and the like : ToOro ciratvw ' Ay yaiXdov, I commend this in Agesilaus [this characteristic of Agesilaus], Ages. 8. 4. crov StSoiKa, one thing [of you] in you I fear, Eur. And. 362. "0 ji€|xt}>ovTai yaXicrra yy&v, wliat they most blame in us, Th. 1. 84. So with ay a you admire, Oavyafa wonder at, SuLkw impeach, &c. e. An adjective sometimes supplies the place of the Gen. possessive (435 d) : To pacriXeiov [= /SacriX^ws] cryyeiop, the king's ensign, i. 10. 12. To Kvpetov arpaToirebov, the camp of Cyrus, lb. 1. See 375 a. d. The Gen. possessive is the converse of the Gen. of property, the one denoting that which possesses, and the other, that which is possessed. 444. y. Genitive Objective. If an action, instead of being predicated by a verb, is simply presented in a substan¬ tive, adjective, or adverb, then its object is usually expressed by the Genitive (instead of an Acc., Dat., or preposition with its case, as with a verb, 435 a, b). In Eng., various preposi¬ tions are used in translating this Gen. Thus, a. Genitive of the Direct Object: 'O (ppovpapxos tcls (Jj-uXcucas e^rd^i, the commander reviews the guards, (Ec. 9. 15 ; but, KOpos e^erao-iv iroLenaL tup 'EXXt]vuv, C. makes a review of the Greeks, i. 7. 1 ; Tc bp tolovtup £pycov elerao-TiKov, fitted to review such matters, Mem. 1. 1. 7. Tcb yayoi . . 6Xe0pioi cjuXcov, 0 marriage destructive of friends! vEsch. Ag. 1156 (of. iTrbyyos uXecrtv ypacjjtiv 1329). Aa0pct 8b tup crTpancuTcidv, without the knowledge of the soldiers, i. 3. 8 (cf. AaOclv aoT^v aireXdur 17). Kpva tujp ’A0t|vcu«v Th. 1. 101. ’Aptrfjs SiSacrtcaXos PI. Meno 93 c. Xopwv SiSacncaXias Mem. 3. 4. 4. A LSaaKaXacbr . . crocfjias PI. Eutliyph. 3 C. § 445. POSSESSIVE, OBJECTIVE, LOCAL, k C. 287 AiKCuopo€\cov, ‘ as helper of this desire,’ Soph. 0. C. 436. f. To the Gen. of the direct object may be referred the Gen. with a trios and its derivatives : '0 i/xos epws rovrov cu'tios, my desire is [causative of] the cause of this, ii. 5. 22. 0 i too iroXeyov airuvraroL, the chief authors of the war, Hel. 4. 4. 2. To draw ov av atria, you are not responsible for this, (Ec. 8. 2. Tou irarpbs robs airiovs, those guilty towards my father, iEsch. Clio. 273. T ovrov EwKparyv . . alridrai, for this he blames S. [makes S. the author of this], Mem. 1. 2. 26. Cf. 429, 431. g. The Gen. in its more active uses (when employed to denote agent, possessor, &c.) has received the special designation of the Gen. subjective, in distinction from the Gen. objective. They may both modify the same word: T qv IleXoTros yeu airdcrys Il€X.oirovvT|crou KardXyfiv, Pclops's seizure of all Peloponnesus, Isoc. 249 a. Adjectives taking the place of the Gen. are, in like manner, used both subjectively and objectively. 445. 8. Genitive of Local or Temporal Ef.lation. a. With Substantives: 'Ebirou 4\4ovs, place for pity, Polyb. 1. 88. Tepya rys treu- TT|pias, the goal of safety, Soph. 0. C. 725. Too TroTap.ov 656s, channel of the river, Cyr. 7. 5. 16. Tpdbu f,p,epwv 68bu, a three days' march, ii. 2. 12. 'H (vpa rod 4tovs, the time of year, (Ec. 4. 13. "Ilpy Soprano, time for supper, £. 407. TeXevrqu rod |3Cov, end of life, i. 1. 1. TptQu p.T]vdiv p.Ladov, three months' pay, lb. 10. b. With Adjectives. 'Evaurios tar ad 4p.eto, stand opposed to me, N. 448. Tb fid tov rwu T€txea)v, the [middle] distance between the walls, i. 4. 4. rdp .00 y8y ojpaia, now of proper age for marriage, Cyr. 4. 6. 9. TtXeiou . . aperfis, [having reached the end of] complete in excellence, PI. Leg. 643 d. c. With Adverbs. The Gen. is used with many adverbs of place and time: ’Eyyvs rrapabeiaov, near a park, ii. 4. 14. ’£ 771 )? gupLoou, nearly 10 , 000 , v. 7. 9. ’Ektos too rdxovs, without the wall, Mag. Eq. 7. 4 . ’Ekt6s dXiyojp, except a few (406), Hel. 1. 6 . 35. Mc'xpt eairepas, until evening, Cyr. 1 . 4. 23. So with near ; byporipwdev on both sides, avTLOv, euavriou, dvr nr t pas, over against ; dvoj, duw6eu, inrepdev, above; &XP L until; eta a [thing of a tyrant] vile tyrant, PL Rep. 567 e. 'Yo$ xPVP- a pW/iarov, a monster of a boar, Hdt. 1. 36. Aid rqp rr/s dbeXfir )s driyiap rrjs Kavt]6va> fibvos Oibnrbdd boyov CoXeaeu, but slaughter 'upon slaughter [slaughter following slaughter] has destroyed the house of CEdipus, Eur. Pli. 1496. Mi) tIktclp eXqp.aTa, benefits to men, JEscli. Pr. 501. i\oi? apqyav, to succor friends, Cyr. 1. 5. 13. YlapvaarLs . . tnrqpxe rp Ki/pco, P. favored C., i. 1. 4. 'Eyfo tlvl ejnroSwv eipi; am I in the way [to] of any one ? v. 7. 10. T# rjXiKia ^-irpeTre, it s'liited his age, i. 9. 6. "42 poi 2. 54, Ot pot Eur. Hec. 192, Tu> poc lb. 181, JVoe to me ! Alas ! (Hei mihi ! Vse mihi ! Ter.) So XvcnreXfoo, avpfepco, dxpeXeco, to benefit, Xvpalvopau injure, jopOeco, eiriKovpeco, assist, oovXevco, inrypereco, serve, aprcco suffice, appjTTu fit, hoxXlu trouble, Tipwpeuo avenge, x a p' L fopaL gratify, del it is necessary; ay ados good, Karos evil, -irpoatpopos, virovpybs, serviceable, evpevys favorable, mar os faithful, lkclvos sufficient, eroipos ready, x^Xe-iros difficult, aafiaXys safe, eTnKivdvvos dangerous; (3oydos helper, foyOeia help, exi/coiA pypa protection ; irpeirovTcns suitably ; &c. : and Lat. faveo, noceo, auxilior, servio, ministro ; utilis, fidus, facilis, diflicilis, propitius, molestus, &c. Note. The Dat. denoting a person or thing to w r hose advantage or disadvantage any thing is or is done, has been termed Dativus Commodi, or Incommodi. 454. c.) Words of appearance, including those of seeming , showing, clearness, obscurity, Ac. : 292 SYNTAX. R. XVIII., E. - DATIVE OF INFLUENCE. § 454. n acn SfjXov lycvero, it became evident to all, Hcl. 6. 4. 20. ’'AStjX.ov ahv iravrl, obscure to every one, vi. 1. 21. ’Hi' nal tols dXXois avT]$ oloairep epoi SoKets dual, if you appear to others such as you seem to me to be, Cyr. 6. 4. 3. So 8 yXow, epavepoco, to manifest, SeiKvvpu point out; aaepys, epave- p'js, evident, depavys invisible; &c.: Lat. appareo, videor, ostendo, monstro; manifestus, obscurus, &c. d. ) Words of cause, destiny, obligation, and value : ’AyadQv atTioi aXXyXois, authors of good to each other (444 f), Cyr. 8. 5. 24. ncirpwTai aoi, it is fated to you, vEsch. Pr. 815. Tots arpaTiwTcus a>€iX.€To purdos, pay was due to the soldiers, i. 2. 11. BacrtXet hv iroXXov &£ioi yivoLvro (431 b), would be worth much to the Icing, ii. 1.14. ”A|tos . . Oavdrov rrj iroXei, meriting death [to] from the city, Mem. 1. 1. 1. ' 1 p.lv etaerai yapiv, will recognize an obligation to you, i. 4. 15. So diroKeipat. to be reserved, pevoj aioait, e'lpaprcu it is allotted, &c.: Lat. destino, debeo, &c. e. ) Words of giving, including those of granting , offering , paying, distributing, supplying , &c. : AiStojxt 6 epia sai vbpois tvavrCos, every tyrant is a foe to freedom, and an enemy to laws, Dem. 72. 2. OvSeis avrtp tpax^TO, no one fought with him, i. 8. 23. , E'rn,(3ov\'?| epoi, a plot against me, v. 6. 29. So evavnoopai to oppose, diravraoj encounter, avdi- arapai, inpiaTapai, withstand, dpcpiaftyreoi, dvrnroieopai (430 a), dispute, araaidfo rebel, iroXepeoj make tear, diKafopai go to law, iharLfopcu, fustic ; avriiropos opposite, aXXorpios averse, iroXep'.os hostile; dvriXoyia dispute; &c.: Lat. adversor, obsto, resisto, dissentio ; contrarius, inimicus ; &e. g.) Words of yielding, subjection, and worship, including those of homage, obedience (cf. 432 g), prayer, sacrifice, &c. : ndi'ra rots Be ois viro\a, all things are subject to the gods, ii. 5. 7. "Epoi oi> dtXere Trci0€cr0ai, you are not willing to obey me, i. 3. 6. 'Eav poi -rm- o-0t]T€, if you will listen to me, i. 4. 14. Evx €i.\caT€pov, more friendly to C., i. 9. 29. Tourots t]o-0t] KOpos, C. was pleased with these, i. 9. 26. '"ilv epol xaXeircuvexe, for which you are angry with me (429 a), vii. 6. 32. Xaipeis • • (pLXois ayadois, you delight in good friends, Mem. 2. 6. 35. Ercpyeiv rots irapovanv, to be con¬ tent with things present, Isoc. 159 e. ’Emcn-euov yap avTtj, for they trusted him, i. 2. 2. 'Hpiv amo-Tetv, to distrust us, ii. 5. 15. T rj tvxv eXmcras, hoping in fortune, Th. 3. 97. So ay air aw to be content, ayavanrew, ax®°~ pa l, be displeased, opyi^opai be angry, advpew, xa\e7r<2s pepw, be dejected, airopew be at a loss, rrddopai believe, trust, avyyiyuwaKw forgive, fQovew envy, grudge, davpdfa wonder (432 f); evvovs, /ca/drous, well-, ill-disposed; evvoCKws, with good-will; &c.: Lat. credo, Mo, ignosco, irascor, succenseo; amicus, benevolus ; &c. See 466 a. 457. i.) Words expressing the act or power of exciting emotion : as pleasure , displeasure , care , fear, &c. : ’ApecrKeiv bpiv, to please you, Cyr. 3. 3. 39. , ATrex0dvea-8a.i rots arpa- TubraLS, to displease the soldiers, ii. 6. 19. ’Epol p.eXr)(ret, it shall be [a care to me] my care, i. 4. 16. 'O (piXraTov p.eXi]p.a bwpacnv, 0 dearest care to the house, iEsch. Ch. 235. MeTapeXei poi, it is a regret to me, I repent, Cyr. 5. 3. 6. See 432 d. So avdavw please ; ydvs pleasant, Xvirypos griev¬ ous, (pofiepos frightful; &c.: Lat. placeo, displiceo ; jucundus, tristis, odiSsus ; &c. 458. j.) Verbal Adjectives in -ro'? and -reop. With these the Dat. is used to express relation to an agent (for which, in Eng., to or for can be used, though other forms of expression are frequent): 0avp.ao-Tov 7racrt, wonderful to all, iv. 2. 15. "Ira pot etnrpaKTOTepov rj, that it may be more practicable for me, or easier for me to effect, ii. 3. 20. Tots otsoL £r)Xa)Tov, [enviable to] an object of envy to those at home, i. 7. 4. Ylorapbs . . ypiv eart 8ia.j3a.Teos, there is a river for ws to cross [to be crossed by us], ii. 4. 6. 'H p 7 v . . iravra TroujTca., everything [is for us to do] should be done by us, iii. 1. 35. ’fh^eXriTea, trot y ttoXis IcttLv Mem. 3. 6. 3. Of. Lat. Dat. with Verbals in -bills and -dus. Note. So rarely other verbals : Tourt bvarvxovcnv euKTaia Oeos, a god¬ dess to be invoked by the wretclwd, Eur. Or. 214. '056s iropevo-qios avdpw- 7 rots, “passable by men,” Cyr. 7. 5. 16. 459. k.) Substantive Verbs implying possession (in forms of expression which may be variously translated). Rule E. Substantive Verbs take a Dative of the Possessor : ’E vravda K upep (3aioi' avrois eiro'njcav, they made for them a cenotaph, vi. 4. 9. Mty lctov Kocpov dvbpi, the great¬ est ornament to a man, i. 9. 23. "Flpa rjv aivL^vaL rots iroXepiois, it was time for the enemy to withdraw, iii. 4. 34. 'Eycb clwttGj ripbe ; I be silent for this fellow ? Ar. Ran. 1134. Hrparevpa atrip cvveXbyero i. 1. 9. Ilacrt kolvov, common to all, iii. 1. 43. Aonrov poL ehreiv, left for me to secy, iii. 2. 29. JdarpLpa vplv oUia PI. Charm. 157 e. 'I pdrLa rrj yvvaud, garments for his wife, vii. 3. 27. 'H be [sc. cbos tlvl ] bLaddvrL rbv irorapbv iii. 5. 15. Ka/cas eyt!> ywaisas viecL ervyu Soph. Ant. 571. Avw-tj re fpevCbv yepciv re irbvos Eur. Hipp. 189. 461. m. A Dative of the Agent is sometimes joined with passive verbs, chiefly with the Perfect and Pluperfect : II avO' Tjp.iv ireTroLTjraL, all things have been clone by us, i. 8. 12. E£ 5^ rt Ka\ov . . eirlirpaKTo {ifj.lv, if any honor had been gained by you, vii. 6. 32. Ta 7 rvpa KeKavpeva eLrj rp ZcvGtf vii. 2. 18. Tots ' EXXrjcri pLcoivro, ivould be hated by the Greeks [hateful to them], Th. 3. 64. Tots be Kepicupcuois . . oi>x ewp&vTo Th. 1. 51. Carmina scripta vvihi sunt, Ov.; Neque cer- nitur ulli, Virg. N ote. This use seems to have come chief!} 7 ' from the possessive use of the Dat. (459). Thus, touto pol ytypairraL, hoc mihi est scriptum, [this is to me written, I have this written] I have written this, or this has been written by me. So the possessive lias passed into the active idea, in the use of the auxiliary in our own and in other languages : I have it written, I have written it (Germ. Ich habe geschrieben, Fr. J'ai ecrit, &c.). 462. Remarks. 1. The remoter relations expressed by the Dat. (452 n.) are various, having respect to place, time, sensation , thought, feeling, expression, action, Ac. They may be expressed (a) directly by a substantive in the Dat., with which (b) a participle is often joined ; (c) by the participle with its subject omitted ; or (d) by an elliptical form of construction, in which the Dat. is preceded by cos, as: § 4G4. REMOTER RELATIONS. 295 IToXts iv 5e£t£ ItnrXcovTi [sc. tlpL or o-ot], a city on the right to one sail¬ ing in, or as you sail in, Th. 1. 24 (cf. vi. 4. 1). Hf 8 7)yap t}8t) Sevrepop ttUovtC |jlol, it was now the second day of my voyage [to me sailing], Soph. Ph. 354. Tts 'X'Pbvos toIpovovs €fj.ot [sc. e5o/cet], as it seemed to me, , in my opinion,’ lb. 1161. To yep ovv pocmjya, 7roXXa nai ctXXct rrcipciX.i'n'ovTi . ., to’.outop 7)p, ‘[to one omitting] to omit, ih. 2. 51. Oeos yap encruifet ye, xwSe 8 ’ ot X oyai, ‘so far as lay in him,’ Soph. Aj. 1128. M aiepdp ydp cos -yEpovn, Trpovop.€VM ot. . 6 r/Xtos ayavpIOrj, while he was sacrificing, the sun was eclipsed, Hdt/9. 10. Motpt otinu 7)p trea elpcucoaia t€T€\€vttik6ti, M. had not yet been dead 90 years, lb. 2. 13. 463. 2. Words governing the Gen. sometimes take a Dat. in its stead, to express the exertion of an influence : 'H-yetTO 8 ’ avroh 6 Kwyapxys, and the bailiff led the way for them, i. e. guided them, iv. 6. 2. ’EcrTpaTTj-yqtrs Aa/teSat/tortotcrt es QecraaXiyr, he led the L. into T., Hdt. 6. 72. TafiLoim . . avacrcrco, I am lord [to] of the T., a. 181. Aapop yap ovk &pj;€i deois, he will not long rule the gods, iEsch. Pr. 940. T'qv rvpavvov apOpLowois yoprjr, the only sovereign [to] over men, Eur. Hec. 816. T ol(tlp atfeiXcTo pbanyop 7)yap, lie took away [for] from them the day of return, a. 9. Osyarri . . Sckto <5^7ras, she accepted a cup [for ]from Themis, O. 87. Eilpygtv reKobari yijrpl iroXeyior 86pv vEsch. Th. 416. Il€<|> € ' u 'Y €V fX7ris rurSe yoi, ‘has fled [for] from me,’ Eur. Heracl. 452. Tct dnpa rjyip . . ‘irpoKaTaXap.pdvctv i. 3. 16. TvpappoLS cK'iroSwv yediaraao Eur. Ph. 40. Of yap pXenoPTes roh rvcpXdis Tjyoiip.eBa Ar. PI. 15. Nec mihi te eripient, Ov. Cf. 405, 407, 472 b. 464. 3. A Dat. depending upon a verb is often used instead of a Gen. depending upon a substantive : Ol . . ittttol atirots 8 i8eprui, the horses are tied for them, = ot t-mroi av- tC.)p SebePTCu, their horses are tied, iii. 4. 35. Tots (SapPapois tu>p re irefQp dnlOapop ttoXXol, [for] of the barbarians, many of the foot were slain, iii. 4. 5. 'll . . too naprbs apx'l X€ipi(r6({>4> ipravda /careX GOy vi. 2. 12 (cf. "H re X€tpttXois (Soybeiav, assistance to friends, PI. Ale. 116 a. Ilept cpiXias rois ’AOqvcwois Th. 5. 5. Traditio alicujus rei alteri, Cic. D. The Dative Residual. 465. The Dative Residual is used in expressing adjuncts, which are not viewed as either subjective or objective (397 s). It simply denotes indirect rela¬ tion^ without specifying the character of that rela¬ tion; or, in other words, it denotes mere association or connection. Hence we have the general rule : Rule F. Ax Attend art Thing or Circum¬ stance, SIMPLY VIEWED AS SUCH, IS PUT IN THE Dative. a. In accordance with this rule, the Dat. is sometimes used in express¬ ing an adjunct, which, upon a more exact discrimination of its character, would be expressed either by the Gen. or Acc. (399 a, f). b. The Dative Residual is commonly expressed in Lat. by the Abla¬ tive ; in Eng. most frequently by the preposition with , but likewise by the prepositions at, in, by, through, &c. Cf. 403 a, 448 a. c. The Dative Residual may be resolved into (i.) the In¬ strumental and Modal Dative, and (n.) the Temporal and Local Dative. i. Instrumental and Modal Dative. 466. Rule XIX. The means and mode are put in the Dative. Instrumentality and mode may be either external or internal , and mode may apply either to action or condition. Hence, to these heads may be referred, § 468 . INSTRUMENTAL AND MODAL. 297 1.) The instrument, force, or other means, with which any thing is done, or through which it comes to pass : ’A KovTi^eL tls iraXTui, one shoots with a clart, i. 8 . 27. 2x € ^ ais 5ia(3ai- uovres, crossing with rafts, i. 5. 10. 'ChrXurp^oi 0a>pa|i, armed with breast- plates, i. 8 . 6 . Kivrjcreis rp crw[xaTt, movements with the body, PI. Leg. 631 e. Awpoi$ eAfxa, honored with gifts, i. 9. 14. 'EcpehrovTo . . tinriKw, pursued with cavalry, vii. 6 . 29. ©avara) puovv, to punish with death , Cyr. 6. 3. 27. '\xodvi)7Kei vocro), dies through disease, vii. 2. 32. E vivo La eiropivovs, following through good-ioill, ii. 6. 13. Tu> pot dovpard t Hern, [through which, 380] wherefore I have spears, N. 264. llapeXOeiv ovk yv it was impossible to pass by force, i. 4. 4. 'Terw 5’ &rv€t, let it rain [with] pea-soup, Nicoph. 13 (cf. Lacte pluisse, Liv.; Let the sky rain po¬ tatoes, Falstaff). See Cyr. 4. 3. 18. Fame confecti, Cic. a. Means and Cause, to some extent, cover the same ground. Hence some of the examples above, and others like them, might be referred to a Dative of Cause (for which the Gen. could be used, 465 a). Some refer to this head some of the constructions in 456. b. Xpaopai, to use [to supply one’s need with, 50], takes the Dat. (originally of means) : T p ovj/w atrip xPV creTa ' L > he will use meat as bread (394 b), Mem. 3. 14. 4. ’E XPV T0 to:s levois, ‘employed,’ i. 3. 18. ToT? i'lrrrois dpiara xpywvfj . . voplfovart, use the language, Hdt. 4. 117. ©vodais . . vopfovres, observing sacrifices, Th. 2 . 38. EucrcjlgLa . . hbpu^ov Id. 3. 82. 467. 2.) a. The ivay or manner, in which any thing is done or affected, together with attendant circumstances; and also (b) the respect in which any thing is taken or applied : (a) Od yap Kpawyrj, dXXa criyr\ . . TTpoar/euav, they advanced not with clamor, but in silence, i. 8 . 11. "tivirep opy eneXeeae, he commanded, as in anger, i. 5. 8 . ’EA avvwv . . tSpoCvn tw iTnra>, riding with his horse in a sweat, i. 8 . 1 . T odrip r^rpd-ira> eiropevdyaav, in this manner they marched, iii. 4. 23. Tlopevbpievoi . . rrj 68 u>, ‘ by the route,’ lb. 30. Apop.a> deiv i. 8 . 18. Tas pia irpat-ets PI. Pol. 280 d. IleTero Trvovfjs avepoio M. 207. For adverbial datives of manner, see 380 c. iEe[ua rnente pati, Ov.; recta, cito, repente. (b) IIXt]0€i ye rjpCbv Xeupdeures, inferior to us in [respect to] number (406 b). T?? <|>uvfj rpaxvs, rough in voice, ii. 6 . 9. IIoAis . . Qa\paKos dvdp.an, ‘by name,’ i. 4. 11 . T rj eTripeXeLa tt epteivat i. 9. 24. 'Evl pibvip irpotxovaiv ol imreis, * in one respect,’ iii. 2. 19. 'PL£n ptv ptXav &r kc k. 304. Pietate filius, consiliis parens, Cic. c. The pronoun avTos is sometimes joined to the dative of an associated object to give emphasis ; and the preposition 5e yaXXov TriGTefa, too-ovtw yaXXou airopu), [by how much] the more I believe, [by so much] the more I am at a loss, PI. Ilep. 368 b. See i. 5. 9. Minor anno, Hor. ; Superat capite, Virg.; Eo magis, Cic. ii. Temporal and Local Dative. 469. Rule XX. The time and place at which are put in the Dative (cf. 433, 482) : as, a. Time (in prose, chiefly in stating some day, night, month, season, year, or festival, as the time at which an event occurred) : T 77 xpArp 5 k T)|Ji€pa a(pLKovro, the first day, they came, iv. 8 . 1. T 77 vo-Tspaia ovk e 8' Ixlovtl 2t€i, a> ijv’OXvyjuas, i] to araSiov en/ca Kpoduas, the following year, in ivhich was the Olympic at which C. won the foot-race, Hel. 2. 3. 1. Tf) exLovcrp vukti, Tpirip ptjvi, 5’ atrip xpovw, Xpovw 7 rore, lb. 2 . 1 . 22 ; 1 . 4. 21 , 2 . 18 ; 4. 1 . 34. "Hpa krovs Th. 2 . 52. Ni nerds apoXyw 0. 324. Die quin to decessit, Xep. b. Place (in prose, chiefly in adverbs of place which are properly da¬ tives, 380 c ; and in stating some town or Attic deme, as the place at which an event occurred) : ramp and rrjSc [sc. ywpa] in this region, here, iv. 5. 36, vii. 2. 13 ; 777 rep where, ii. 2. 21 ; kvkXuj in a circuit, around, i. 5. 4 ; olkoi at home, i. 1. 10. Ta rpoxaia ra re Mapa0wvi /cat 2aXapivi Kal nXarcucus, the victories at M. and S. and P., PI. Menex. 245 a. ©vpcutri KCLyevov, lying at the door, Soph. O. C. 401. Sots orav aruxTir Tacjjois, ‘at thy tomb,’ lb. 411. Kdyevov TrcSw AHyiadov Eur. El. 763. M ip.va aypw X. 188. E55e pv)(w I. 663. 'EXXaSi oida vaiwv n. 595. Ze5s ppLevos Oi- Xtipirw dc 388. AlOepi vaiivv B. 412. Natus Tibure, Hor. c. This Dat., while at expresses its general idea, is often translated by in, on, &c.; or without a preposition. d. To the local dative may be referred the use of the Dat., chiefly poetic, to denote persons among whom, or in whom any thing occurs : Av- vapuv av0pco7roLs 1° have power among men, Eur. Bac. 310. 'Apixpe- xea Tpweo-criv, distinguished among the T., Z. 477. Ovk av ei-evpois epol ayaprias oveiSos, ‘in me,’ Soph. O. C. 966. O la Kal 'Opt|pw AioyqSps Xe- yei, ‘in Homer,’ PI. Rep. 389e. e. In some expressions, the idea of time or place seems to blend with that of means or mode : Wyavnov yap kXCov rrj xpore pa irapoxuria, having taken B. at (or by) his previous coming, Th. 1. 128. ’E/cetV# rrj 4o-poXfj oi> KaTafiijvai Id. 2. 20. Tecxea • . %X WV wpoto-iv, P. 472. E. The Accusative. 470. The local idea upon which the uses of the Accusative are based (398), appears to be the idea of that into ivhich an action (joes. ACCUSATIVE OF DIRECT OBJECT, &C. £99 S 172. a. Locally viewed, as the Gen. is the Whence-Case , the Eat. Residual tne Where-Case, and the Dat. Objective the IF hither-Case, so the Acc. is the Whercinto-Casc (10). b. Under the local form of conception, an action is conceived of as going towards or to an indirect object, but into a direct object ; or, in famil¬ iar grammatical language, this is regarded as the receiver of the action, (c) In another view, the action passes into its effect, (d) It goes, in a special sense, into the part affected. And (e), in going through an object, it necessarily goes into successive parts. Hence, 471. Upon this general idea, are based (i.) the Accusative of Direct Object , (ir.) the Acc. of Effect, (m.) the Acc. of Specification (specifying the particular part , property, dec. affect¬ ed), and (iv.) the Acc. of Extent (denoting the space, time, dec. through which anything extends). (v.) In some uses, which may be referred to these heads or to its generic office (472 a), the Acc. has been termed Adverbial. a. The uses of the Acc., to some extent, blend with each other (as i. and ii.), or with the uses of other cases. The ideas of to and into espe¬ cially blend, since if an action goes fully to an object, it usually passes into it by its effect, (b) For the Acc. as absolute, or the subject of the In¬ finitive and Verbal in -reov, see ‘ k Use of the Modes.” i., ii. Accusative of Direct Object and Effect. 472. Rule XXL The direct object and the effect of an action are put in the Accusative: as, Aa(3epvr|v, taking T., i. 1. 2. Etprjvr|v iroiricrai, to make peace, Ages. 1. 7. xirwirreve reXevrrjv, i. 1. 1. 'O 5k Kvpos v-iro\a(3ui> tovs 4>€vyovTas, crvWk^as crTpaTCvpa kiroXibpKei MiXiyrov lb. 7. a. The term action is here used to denote that which is signified by a verb; since the verb, from its prevalent use, is grammatically regarded and treated as the word of action (cf. 435 a). And as the direct is more generic than the indirect, it results that (Rule G.) An adjunct simply considered as modifying a verb is put in the Accusative. Hence, b. Many verbs may take the Acc. as the generic case, which, according to preceding rules, govern the Gen. or Dat. as more specific cases: IIpo- € poverty oi iinreis yuas, the cavalry surpass us (406), iii. 2. 19. Karfjpxe Xoyor, began a discourse (425), PI. Euthyd. 283 b. MeTaSotev avrois -rrv- povs (424), iv. 5. 5 (cf. 6). aur0€cr0ai,, to perceive you (432), ii. 5. 4. 4>i\oes a>4>eX.tiv, to benefit friends (453), Cyr. 1. 4. 25. ’Ear ti tvoxXfj yyas, if anything troubles us (453), Mem. 3. 8. 2. " En-ropa ehre, spake to H. (452 a), M. 60. XaCpco 5k cf ei/Tvxovrra (456), Eur. Rh. 390. See e. c. The same principle applies to circumstantial adjuncts (485 e). (d; This generic use of the Acc. is far more frequent in respect to things than persons, since the relations of the former are less varied and require less careful discrimination. For like reason, and also to distinguish the gen¬ der (181. 1), it is most frequent of all in the neuter adjective used sub¬ stantively (478 a, 483 a), (e) It is sometimes chosen for distinction from SYNTAX. R. XXI. ACCUSATIVE. 300 a Gen. or Dat. modifying the same verb : as oov Oavpdfa (432 f), but rod* rov oe 6avpd£to (429 a', or rovrb oov 6avpd'^to (443 b). f. As many Greek verbs govern the Gen. or Dat. while the correspond¬ ing veil s in Eng. govern the Objective case ; so many verbs governing the Acc. in Greek are translated into Eng. with a preposition: "0[xvup.i 6eoi)s nal deas, I swear by gods and goddesses, vi. 6 . 17. 'Hpuxs . . eb irotulv, doing well by its, ii. 3. 23. '0 de oiyXos Sovaxai eirra ofioXovs, the sights is equivalent to seven oboli, 1. 5. 6 . Ma%as Gappetxt, you have no fear of battles, iii. 2 . 20. 4 > vXaxxbfxevov . . ypas, guarding against us, ii. 5. 3. •doifiov xopsvwv, dancing in honor of Phoebus, Find. 1. 1 . 8 . So atoxtoopai to be ashamed of or before, dirobtopdonin run away from, epevyen flee from, C 7 nopnew swear falsely by, pevio wait for, tt\coj sail over, &c. See b, g. g. With verbs of motion, the place where it ends is commonly expressed with a preposition ; but sometimes, chiefly in the poets, as a direct ob¬ ject : ’Ad>U;eTcu toitov uXtudy, will come to a woody spot, Ven. 10. 6 . TTcptfcu 4>xos, to send you into the light, Eur. Ale. 456. Kvioy 5 ’ otipavov free, the savor ascended to heaven, A. 317. V E/ 3au veas y. 162. Aopiovs (Trelxeiv Soph. O. C. 643. liopyovs yys enXevoe Eur. Med. 7. 'H/S^s xe- Xos poXbvrx s lb. 920. KetcXyaro [sc. eA#e?E] (3ovXf|v K. 195. Cf. Romam redit, Liv.; Ite domum, Virg. (h) This construction applies less frequently to persons : Mvqcrxfjpas arpiKero, came to the suitors, a. 332. Tiva xpeuo . . 'beet: to whom does the need come t /3. 28 (so with ytyverai, as = iicei, 8. 634). See 450 b. i. The poets sometimes even join an Acc. of the place lvith verbs of standing, sitting, or lying (as implying occupation) : "Ectxt|K€ irerpav, stands on a rock, Eur. Sup. 987. Tpi 7 ro< 5 a Ka0i£cov < f ) o?/3os lb. 956. Tcnrov . . ovTLva Ketxai Soph. Ph. 144. Cf. “ He sits a horse well.” j. This rule primarily applies only to the adjuncts of verbs (a). Verbal adjectives and nouns, however, sometimes take the Acc. bj' virtue of the included verb : 2£ . . <|>v|i[xos, able to escape you, Soph. Ant. 788 ; cf. ptr) tjjTj-yo) oe; Id. El. 1503. T dsets . . oljxwyav . . ’ Ayapepvova, you pine with wailing for [bewailing] A., lb. 123. Td re perltopa 4>povxurxf|s, a student of the heavens, PI. Apol. 18 b ; cf. Tcey peredptov (ppovnorys Symp. 6. 6. ’E^dpvo) elvat rd cptortopeva, ‘ to deny,’ PI. Charm. 158 c. Xoas irpoTrop/rros xEsch. Ch. 23. See also 477 a. k. A specification with Xeyw is sometimes its direct object, and some¬ times follows the preceding construction : Upooeicpovoa dvdpunnp Tovypqj . ., ’AvSpoxicova Xeyw, I had a quarrel with a bad man, I mean A., Dem. 701. 24 (or’Av 8 pcoxiwvi Xeyco, with A., I mean). l. The Greek and the Latin use of the cases with verbs have (a) striking analogies, but also (p) marked differences : (a) as in the double construc¬ tion of dtopeopai and dono (and also our present) : btopeiodai lttttov K uptp, donare equum Cyro, to present a horse to Cyrus ; or btopeiodai KOpoy hr tv to, donare Cyrum equo, to present Cyrus with a horse. HepipaXXto and cir- cumdo, to surround, have a similar double construction. (P) Tpias . . IXetb, vestri misereor, PI. Conv. 173 c. O ivov yeueoOai (432), vinum gus- tare. lleWovres dvdpunrovs, persuadentes hominibus, Cyr. 1. 5. 9. ddAois dpyyetv (453), amicos juvare. 473. a. Causatives govern the Acc., together with the case of the included verb : as, M 77 p avaixvrio-ps kclkcov, do not remind me of [cause me to remember] my woes (432 c), Eur. Ale. 1045. PaXa upids crroxitra, I have made you drink milk, 1 Cor. 3. 2. ’Avap.vf|crc<) yap upas sal roes. . Kivdovovs (472b) iii. 2. 11. Toes 7ra ; <5as . . -ytuo-xtov aiparos (432 a) PI. Rep. 537 ft. S'476. OF DIRECT OBJECT AND EFFECT. 301 b. The verbs Set and xprj are sometimes construed by the poets as causatives: 2d Set Upoyydews, you have need of [it needs you of] a Pro¬ metheus, iEsch. Pr. 86 (414 b). Tt yap y edei iraidcop; Eur. Suppl. 789 (cf. Sot re yap ttcll dcop tl del Id. Med. 565, § 453). 2e XP1 ■ • aldous, you have need of modesty, y. 14.. So %peu> &rrcu (as if a Fut. of XPV> 475 b) . 322. Cf. the construction of the Lat. miseret, poenitet, pudet, &e. 474. Attraction, a. A word which is properly construed other¬ wise, sometimes becomes the direct object of a verb by attraction, espe¬ cially in the poets. This sometimes results in hypallage (an interchange of construction) : Et Si p,’ c&5* del Aoyois e^rjpxes [= poi Xoyovs or Aoywv], if you had always begun your addresses to me thus. Soph. El. 556. Aecriro- Tav yoots . . /cardp£w, I will begin lamentations for my master, Eur. And. • 1199. Vina cadis onerarat, Virg. See 476. 3, 479. b. A verb, of which the proper object or effect is a distinct sentence, often takes the subject (or some other prominent word) of that sentence in the Aec., by attraction : "Htdet airrov, otl ye crop ?x oL , ^ ie knew [him] that he occupied the centre, i. 8. 21. TwaiKa Xeyovcnp, otl KdOyrac, they say that the woman is sitting, Cyr. 7. 3. 5. 0 Ida ere tLs el Lk. 4. 34. See iii. 5. 14, 18 ; iv. 5. 29, 7. 11. Ilium, ut vivat, optant, Ter. “Conceal me what I am,” Shaks. (c) Nor is this anticipation confined to the Acc. : BapjEaocov eireyeXelro, cos iroXeyelp re Ikclpo'l ei-qaav, he took care that the bar¬ barians should be prepared for war, i. 1. 5. See 402 a. 475. Periphrasis, a. The ]Vjace of a verb is often supplied by an Acc. of the kindred noun joined wicii such verbs as iroieco (or more fre¬ quently iroLeoyai), dyw, rtOqpa, &c.: Kupos e^eracuv teal apedyop tuip ' tiXXypojp kirolyaep [= e^yraae sal ypidygae To5s"EAA?pa.s], C. made a review and numbering of [= reviewed and numbered] the Greeks, i. 2. 9. T'pv Tropeiap eiro.eiTO i. 7. 20. b. These and like periphrases sometimes take an Acc. by virtue of the implied verb: ’AvSpairoSa apiray'qv no Lyra peer os [= apirdcras], having made seizure of slaves, Th. 8. 62. ^rjya rebels (= arjyaLpojp) . . viKqv, giving a signal of victory, 0. 171. Te0vdvat rip (pojicp tovs 0r)(3aiovs, to be mortally afraid of the T., Dem. 366. 26. Cf. 473 b, 472 j, 395. 476. Ellipsis. 1. The verb which governs the Acc. is sometimes omitted ; particularly, a. ) In emphatic address or exclamation : 0 5tos, & p (dobXoiTO oiareXecrcu i. 5. 7 ; ’EXaiVovros tov 'Lirirov, riding his horse, and IlapeXau- vovtos, Cyr. 8. 3. 28, 29. Avklos rjXaae i. 10. 15. 3. An elliptical or unusual construction of a verb and Acc. is sometimes employed, especially by the poets, for energy or brevity of expression : d>tX6r7?ra . . rdywyev, let us strike f riendship [a victim in pledge of friend¬ ship], r. 94 (cf. feedus ferire). “E/cetpe [ = Keipwv ixoiet] xoXvKepwv f>l>vov Soph. Aj. 55. Teyyet 8aKpvuv &x v0LV Id. Tr. 849. Cf. 474 s, 479. Accusative of the Effect. 477. The effect of a verb includes whatever the agent does or makes. Hence any verb may take an Acc. expressing or defining its action. The Acc. thus employed may be either (1) a noun kindred , in its origin or signification, to the verb ; or (2) a neuter adjective used substantively ; or (3) a noun simply defining or characterizing the action. 1. Kindred Noun (with this, the verb is often translated by a more general word): Evrvxyaav tovto to €tiTvXT|p-ci, they had [succeeded] gained this success, vi. 3. 6. ‘imXa.Kas (fcvXa £etr, to keep guard, ii. 6. 10. 'Os clkLv8vvov ptov fapev, how secure a life we live, Eur. Med. 248. Yaixeiv ■ydfJLOV rov8e lb. 587. Tt xpoayeXdre tov xavdararov yeXtov ; why do you smile upon me that last smile l lb. 1041. Maxqv eydxovTo M. 175. Mi)0ov iaxes A. 552. "Tetr v8 yeipe dedeyevov, [bound as to the hands] with his hands bound, vi. 1. 8. Ilora^os, KuSfos ovofia, €vpos Quo irXkdpwv, a river, Cydnus by name, two plethra in breadth, i. 2. 23. IldvTa Kpanaros, best in every thing, i. 9. 2 (cf. 416 b). 'Anro- ryyQkvres tcls KeaXas, beheaded, ii. 6. 1 , 29. 0 avyaatat to KaXXos, of wonderful beauty, ii. 3. 15. ’E ijievcu, yveop-qv eyrjv, ykXXet, ‘in my opin¬ ion,’ Ar. Pax 232. Top Scikti/Xov dXyet PI. Rep. 462 d. A eivol 8e p,a.XT]v iEsch. Pers. 27. II(5 Xip ryv ou8€v airiav vii. 1. 25. "0pvyLas WG must first run, Ar. Th. 662. So yarpau a long way, dXXyv ral dXX-qv one way and another, ryv dXXcos [the way leading elsewhere] to no purpose, kc. F. The Vocative. 484. Rule XXV. The Compellative of a sentence is put in the Vocative. a. The usual sign of address, in Greek, as in so many lan¬ guages, is w. It is commonly employed in prose, except (b) in REV. Gil. T 306 SYNTxYX. R. XXV. VOCATIVE. REMARKS, &C. § 484. abrupt or familiar address ; and (c) is frequent in poetry, (d) It is commonly followed by the emphatic word in the address, unless (e) this has already preceded ; and is (f) sometimes doubled for special emphasis. (a) ' ! 'fl iv. 2. 13, in the same manner (483, 467). t[3) Measure of dif¬ ference : Qv/jLoei.deaTepoL oe ttoXtj, much more spirited (483), iv. 5. 36 ; IloWa) 5e varepov (468) ; Toctovtov i. 8. 13 ; Too-ovra) i. 5. 9. (y) Re¬ spect : riXij0os ws 5 i( 7 xt\tot, about 2,000 in number , iv. 2 . 2 ; KiJSros ovopa (481) ; IIXq0€i . . XeLcpdevres, 0a fasos dvdfj.cm (467 h) ; Neurraros . . yovoio (446 b ; cf. 413). ( 8 ) Part affected : Tw xctpe Se8ep4vov (481) ; T'aeetv \eipds, to take by the hand (426 a), (c) Time : To Xoittov ii. 2. 5, Tov Xoittov (433 a), afterwards ; Te'Xos, at last (483) ; Xpovy 7 Tore ehrev, [with time] at length he said, Hel. 4. 1. 34. (t) Cause : Tovt’ etpucopyv, on this account I came (483 b), Soph. 0. T. 1005 ; Tovrov ere . . ft Xd> (429 a) ; T<3, wherefore (466). 486. The construction belonging to a word in its primary sense and form (a) is extensively retained in figurative or secondary senses, and in composition (414 c, 427, 432 g, &e.) ; but (b) is often changed to another more appropriate. Thus, (c) many verbs become transitive through a sec¬ ondary sense, or through composition with a preposition, even though the preposition may not itself govern the Acc.: K Lvbuvov elecnrqcrav, they shrunk from danger, Dem. 460. 2. In the same way, (d) other verbs from transitive become intransitive : Oikry ivScore, you may [give inj yield to pity, Th. 3. 37. 487. a. Most of the relations expressed by the cases may be more definitely expressed by the aid of prepositions. This definiteness was naturally more sought in prose than in poetry, and more in the later than in the earlier Greek. b. The use of a preposition, or of one case rather than another, often avoids ambiguity, or distinguishes from other adjuncts, or gives emphasis, or favors the metre, or promotes euphony, &c. See 464 c. III. USE OF THE NUMBERS, GENDERS, AND PERSONS. 488. Numbers. 1. The Singular is sometimes used for the Plural in the Greek, as in other languages, to give to the expression greater individuality or unity: Tov "EXXgva, the Greek. (= the Greeks), Hdt. 1. 69. Tov noXipiov, the enemy, Th. 5. 9. '’Epnd daKpvov opparo)v ano, the tear trickles from my eyes, Soph. El. 1231. HtpnXgp cvdvs oppa daKpvcov lb. 906. Note. A nation is oftener so denoted, if its power is held by a mon¬ arch. a. A chorus, from its unity and the action of the coryphaeus as its rep¬ resentative, is more frequently denoted by the singular (sometimes inter¬ changed with the plural) : 'Hjjuv pbv tjSti i rav Tero^evrai (3e\os, pevco 8e, every shaft has now been shot by us, and I wait, TEscli. Eum. 676. T2 £eIvoi, pp Syr ddiKydCj crol mo-Tevaas Soph. 0. C. 174. (b) So the dual for the two semichoruses or their leaders, Aevo-o-erov irdvra, do you both look everywhere, TEscli. Eum. 255. Cf. 494 a. c. Some imperatives, used like interjections, are singular, though more than one are addressed : Aye bp, aKobaare, Come now, heayr , Apol. 14. SYNTAX.-NUMBERS AND GENDERS. 308 § 488. HovXeade, tl-rre yoi, do you wish, tell me, Dem. 43. 7. So ide behold, lo, (pepe come, kc. Age, intro abite, Plaut. d. In Greek, as in Eng., some nouns related individually to more than one, may be either singular or plural : Kpartcrrot . . r'rjv strongest in heart, Th. 2. 40 (or ras \j/uxds, in their hearts; cf. Mem. 4. 1. 2). 489. 2. The use of the Plural for the Singular is particular¬ ly frequent in Greek, especially in abstract nouns , in neuter ad¬ jectives used substantively , in the names of things composed of distinct parts , and in vague expressions for persons or things. a. This use is due to some complexity or indefinitencss of conception, preventing strict singleness of view. It often renders the expression more comprehensive or general ; sometimes more emphatic, courteous, or mod¬ est. M'vx'q Kal 0dX.7rr| /cat irovous (pepeiv, to endure cold, and heat, and labor [in repeated instances], iii. 1. 23. Td Sefjia tov vlpdros, the right [portions] of the icing, i. 8. 4. Td hveweaios PacrlXeia, the palace [royal buildings] of Syennesis, i. 2. 23 ; cf. iv. 4. 2, 7. HiV roiade to£ois, with this bow, Soph. Ph. 1335 ; cf. T6£oy rode 288. Xd\a tokcvctiv cIkotus 6v- uovyevois, forgive parents (like this mother) justly excited, Eur. Hec. 403. b. An individual sometimes speaks of himself in the plural (with which the sing, maybe combined), as if others were associated with him, especially in poetry ; and (c) a woman speaking of herself in this indefinite way, uses the masculine of the plur., as the generic gender (490 b) : (b) Ai.8ovp.e0a 7 dp ra XeXeyyeva pot, I am ashamed of what 1 have said, Eur. Hipp. 244. TaOra TreipacrdpeOa SiyyyaaaOat., these things we will endeavor to relate (the authors plural), Cyr. 1. 1. 6. TKertvopev . . irpocrirlTvcov, I beseech you, falling down, Eur. Here. 1206. "HAioy papTvpopetrOa 8p 7r apcucaXovcri p.e ctt l TavTa, whenever they have anything good, they invite me to [these things] this, Symp. 4. 50. IMt/do/cXos, os aoi irarpos Ijv ra <})^ TaTa > /*., who was thy father s best-beloved, Soph. Ph. 434. Of)s ov TrapaSorea rots'\0yvaioLs eariv, whom we must not give up to the A., Th. 1. 86. Ilto-Td ywafiv [ecrrti/], women can be trusted, X. 456. Otbc "luves TaSe eicrlv, [these things are] there are here no Ionians, Th. 6. 77. ' AvbXXwv toS* l)v . . 6 . . tcXCjv, it icas A. that brought to pass, Soph. O. T. 1329. IIoXepqTta dvai Th. 1. 88. Cf. 491 c, 502. e. The plural or dual may be used with a singular compellative, to in¬ clude more than the person directly addressed : 'O tckvov, y Trdpeo-Tov ; . . ripoo-eXOcT’, u> it at, Trarpi. My child, are you both here l Come to a fa¬ thers arms. Soph. O. C. 1102. ’Tr’, ’4v, consort¬ ing with those [= her] with whom I ought not, Soph. 0. T. 1184 (CEdipus shrinks from pointing out his mother more plainly). "H areipos overa yb- axos ovk ave^erai TLKrovras dAXovs, ‘ will not endure others [= another] bearing children,’ Eur. And. 711. See 489 a, c. 491. 2. The Neuter is the generic gender for objects of thought considered without respect to personality (simply as things) ; and hence may even apply to persons so considered. See 489 d, 175, 371 a. a. Infinitives, clauses used substantively, and words or phrases spoken of as such, are naturally regarded as neuter : 05 to nepi irXduTov ttou]- t€ov, a\\a to £t)v, not to live is to be valued most highly, but to live well, Pl. Crito 48 b. AfjXov yv 8 tl eyyvs irov j3a£[ifcvw toutov rpairoivTO irpos to diaKioXveiv aXkr\X(x>, as if the two hands, which God made to assist each other, leaving this should tarn to obstructing each other, Mem. 2. 3. 18. 493. Rule J. Agreement is commonly according to form, but often rather according to sense. See 70 p. a. The different forms of agreement are interchanged or combined, according as the conception varies, or for the sake of emphasis, euphony, metre, &c. 494. 1. The Dual and Plural, as different modes of de¬ noting two (178), very often agree with each other, or are interchanged : Ileuses bvo two children, tCo it aloe the two children, i. 1. 1. dvdpCbv vi. 6. 29, tlo avdpe 30, robs avopas, . . tovtuv, . . rw &vdpe 31, &c. Ilpocr- irpexov duo veavicnao, two young men came running up, iv. 3. 10. ‘Eye- Xauaryu ovv ayepw fXe'paures els dXXrjXw, both laughed, looking at each other, PI. Euthyd. 273 d. A vvayeis de aycpbrepai earbv, db£a re Kal emaTyyy PI. Rep. 478 b. 2<3v d’ evodoir) Zeus, rad’ el reXetre yoi Qavbvf, eirei ov yoi £QvtI y avdis ^fjerov. MeGecrGe 5’ ydy, yaipeTov re. Soph. 0. C. 1435. a. In the old poetic language, a few passages occur in which the Dual appears to retain its application to more than two (186 g, 271 c): Eavde re Kal av, Ilbdapye, teal Afdosv Adyire re die, vvv yoi ttjv Koyidpv diroTivcTOV 0. 185. UeWeade . ., KaGtrov, XvcravTe /Soelas Horn. Ap. 486. Some think that the Dual is never thus used, except when two pairs or sets are spoken of. Of. 488 b. 495. 2. In compound construction, both syllepsis and zeugma are common. See 68 f. a. They are even found together : Kupos re kcii y arpaTia irap^XGe, Kal eyevovro ei'aco, Cyrus and his army passed, and came within, i. 7. 16. T£> d’ oxiti yvv'rj Kal vyiria t£kv a . . TrapLtrTaTai ovde 'yavuvreu y. 42. 496. In syllepsis, (a) the combined number may be the dual, if only two are spoken of; but is otherwise the plural (with an exception in the verb, 569 b). — (b) For persons of both sexes, the combined gender is the mascidine (490); (c) for things, or persons and things ,* it is the neuter (though it may be another gender, if all the subjects agree in that). — (d) The combined person, as in Lat. and Eng., is the first, if that is in¬ cluded in the subjects ; the second, if that is included and not the first; but otherwise the third. Thus, * Classed together as objects of thought (491). Zeugma, however, is here more common. § 498. DUAL AND PLURAL, COMPOUND CONSTRUCTION, &C. 311 (a) 2c OKparei opaAqra ‘yevop.evw Kptrtas re /cat ’AA Kcfiiabys nXelara /ca/cd t }]v ttoXlp €TroiT|ararr]v, C. and A., who had been associates of S., brought very many evils upon the city, Mem. 1. 2. 12. ’ATroXeXoiirao%v y,ads Sewas /cat Tiaa'uov, A r . and P. have left us, i. 4. 8. ils be elSe'rqv dAXr|Aoi)s y yvvy Kal 6 ’ Aftpabaras, Tio-rra^ovTO aXXrjXovs Cyr. 6. 1. 47. (b) Et5e narepa re /cat yyripa Kal abeXcpovs /cat ryv eavrod yvraiKa cuXjiaAcoTOUs ■ye'yevqp.e.. vovs, he saw father, and mother, and brothers, and his own wife taken cap¬ tive, Cyr. 3. 1. 6. (c) IIAti'tfot Kal £uXa Kal Kepayos ara/cra/s yev eppippeva ovdev xprja-tjJLa ecmv, bricks, wood, and tiles, thrown together in confusion, arc of no use, Mem. 3. 1. 7. H KaXXlaTy . . 7roXtreta re Kal 6 /caXAtaros avyp Xonra civ yyiv dir] bteXdeiv, the noblest polity and the noblest man would be [themes] left for us to discuss, PJ. Rep. 562 a. ’AccpaXeiav /cat evKXeiau, & ovre KaracryireraL, security and glory, which never decay, Cyr. 8. 2. 22. (d) ’Eqcb /cat vcriv avdpojirlvyv £yop.ev, [I] the speaker and you the judges have a human nature, PI. Tim. 29 c. e. Syllepsis is sometimes found, where the relation of the subjects to each other is disjunctive : Et be k”Apys ftpycocri yaxys r) 4 > oT/3os, if Mars should begin the fight, or Phoebus, T. 138. Kal y ovd’ 6 I1A ovtwpos kvwv oure . . dp Xdpuir ^cryov, and neither the dog of Pluto nor Charon should stay me, Eur. Ale. 360. Si quid Socrates aut Aristippus fecerint, Cic. 497. In zeugma, the agreement is sometimes with the most 'prominent substantive, sometimes with the nearest: as, BacrtAeus bh Kal ol avv a era) Siwkcdv elcr-nan-rei, the king and those with him, pursuing, attack, i. 10. 1 (cf. bLapirafovcn 2). ' AiraXXayePTes iroXeywp Kal KLPbdvwp Kal rapaxys, els ijv . . Kadecrrayer, delivered from the wars, perils, and trouble, in ivhich we are now involved, Isoc. 163 b. 'E7rra bpoXobs /cat yyio(3!)Xiop ’Attikovs, seven Attic oboli and a half, i. 5. 6. llatSas 7 ) yvva'iKas v vpx e K Xedvwp, the Arcadian infantry, whom C. commanded, iv. 8. 18. Multitudo abeunt, Liv. See f. b. ) With the plural used as singular (especially t||j.€ls for eyed) ; and with the singular used as plural, or so modified as to render the idea plu¬ ral : HeirovOayev, 1 ) . . Ktvty Kare(XX 0V bXiriba, we have suffered, [yes 1] who cherished a vain hope, Eur. Iph. A. 985 (see 489 b). IIoXiopKtvfitvT] 26- Aot, (the city) Soli besieged, Hdt. 5. 115. "OpvLS . . airoppoifibei . . PejBpw- xes, the bird [= birds] screams, having eaten, Soph. Ant. 1021. AyyoaObvys yera rCov tyarparyydv . . tnrevSovrai, I). with his colleagues makes a truce, Th. 3. 109. Absente nobis, Ter.-, Demosthenes cum ceteris erant ex¬ pul si, Nep. c. ) Nouns figuratively used to denote persons, and others in which the gender does not follow the sex: T6 8 ’ epvos . . Ka.T0avovTa, this scion [son] slain, Eur. Bac. 1307. MeAea i/u >xa, os . . yady, wretched soul, who vxts pleased. Soph. Ph. 714. Ta reXy KaraPdvTcts, the authorities having gone clown, Th. 4. 15. & irepurad Ti|rr[0€ls tckvov, 0 dearest, 0 most fondly cherished son, Eur. Tro. 735. KoXXiKocjjdyg Bouvribioi/, my little roll-eating Boeotian , Ar. Ach. 872 (§ 175). Capita conjurationis csesi sunt, Liv. d. ) With a noun forming a periphrasis with a genitive or adjective : ddXraT 1 A iyiaOov fa, dearest majesty of AH., ALseh. Cli. 893. ’EX0wv . . / 3Ly 'H pasAyeLy, the mighty Hercules coming, A. 690. ’Akovlo tpdbyyov bpvi- 6 uv, kukp KXa'ovTas oiarpip, I hear the cry of birds screaming with mad fury, Soph. Ant. 1001. To be tQv irpeagvrepwv yyCbv eiceivov s av 0£topovv- rcs, didyeiv r)yo6fx=0a PI. Leg. 657 d. e. ) I 11 general, with words for which others might have been used, or with which others are implied (as inhabitants with places, crews with ves¬ sels, troops with commanders, &c.) : llaaa be yevva [= Act6s] $pvyCn> . . Siocrwv, the whole race of the Phrygians, about to offer, Eur. Tro. 531. yei . . es hkepKvpav, ibv avruv evepyerys, he flees to Corcyra, being a benefactor of theirs, Th. 1. 136. WevryKovra rpcr/peis . . ovk €18ot€s, 50 triremes (came ashore), not knowing, lb. 110. Tty iroXiv . . ovras Th. 3. 79. BacrtAeiA . ., ol 5' dpird^ovTfis, the king [with his troops] . ., and they plundering, i. 10. 4 (cf. 5, and T unrav Teix&i rjtrav cttcISiol rpeis, the distance between the walls was three stadia, i. 4. 4. ’E7rl irvXas• . . ijaav Ssraira (for adrai) 5vo T€t\r», l) the gates ; now these xoerc two walls, i. 4. 4. At Q7j[3ai Aiyu-n-ros cKaXe- cto, Thebes was called Egypt, Hdt. 2. 15. ,01 ydp oxpOaX/iol , KaXXio-Tov ov [for oVres], the eyes,- being a most beautiful object (502), PI. Rep. 420 c. Atv' 77 .. . 7 r tvs ov KaXov, 6 ircLVTa rjpJpcvxe ; Id. Leg. 937 d. Amantium irae amoris integratio est, Terr, Animal quem vocamus hominem, Cic. a. This construction occurs chiefly where the true subject is more remote or in a different clause ; and might be often referred to ellipsis or inversion : 'Ecmas, ov [sc. xtyotou] oure otnuorepov xcvpiov, the hearth, than which [spot] there is no holier spot, Cyr. 7. 5. 50. "Eowov be ovo XocJjo) i) 15o ievr] y prjXd), I. [is] consists of two high hills, i. e. two high hills [are] constitute I., Th. 3. 112 . b. The attraction is sometimes from an appositive to its subject : "HXtos . . iravruv XapirpoTaros, the sun, the brightest [sc. thing ] of all things, Mem. 4. 7. 8 (where the more regular Xa,u 7 rphrarov, in the gender of the Gen. partitive, might also have been used). Indus fluminum maximus, Cic. e. A word is sometimes attracted from its true subject by a noun gov¬ erning the latter, chiefly in the poets : Tick reiKos duopdu Idvatpov [for ^waipav], this [kindred strife] strife of kindred men, Soph. Ant. 793. "Eevwv irp'os dXXrjv ear lav 7 ropeviofiou, I will go to the hearth of other hosts, Eur. Ale. 538. MeXava VToXfiov irhrXwv lb. 215. 'H tIkvojv drjf 6\j/is . . pAcur-rotcra Soph. O. T. 1375. —111 such cases, the Gen. with the word which gov¬ erns it may often be regarded as forming a complex idem, which the adjec¬ tive modifies : 05,aos ircus iraiSds, my [son's son] grandson, Eur. And. 584. 501. G. Change of Number. The number is often changed for the sake of individualizing or generalizing the expression, especially when a distributive or indefinite 'pronoun is used : ’'AXXovs 5’ e opepwraTOv b’ epygia, solitude is the most terrible thing, ii. 5. 9 (cf. EvgfiovX'ri iepov ypfjpa PI. Theag. 122 b). “Egoiye 4>LXraTov ttoXls, to me the state is the dearest object, Eur. Med. 329. Tt ovv ravra. eanv; what then [are these things] is this ? ii. 1. 22. K pivaaa o owrlv tIp egCop rd pt'Xrara, having selected the best of my citizens, fEsch. Eum. 487. Mu/c^ai puepov yp, Mycenae was a small affair, Th. 1. 10. Ilpbs top ov8V [sc. opt a], against him that is nothing, Eur. Ph. 598. TV firjSev els to gydep Soph. El. 1166. Mors est extremum, Cic. —(a) In these cases, an adjective agree¬ ing in gender and number with the substantive would either express a different idea, or would express the same idea with less emphasis. (b) This use often appears in the construction of the pronoun. 503. 8. A change of person sometimes takes place, a. ) From the union of direct and indirect modes of speaking, especially in quotation : XAyotr’ hv garaiov avbp' eKirocvr, os . . kuktolvov, take out of the way a senseless man, me, who have slain, Soph. Ant. 1339. w k. (in inhabited city, large and flourishing, lb. Tw iraibe dp.4 OT€ P w ) the children, i. 1. 1. Toforas Kpt)ras 8ia- koctiovs, 200 Cretan archers, i. 2. 9. Tavr-qv tt|v ttuXip lb. 24. 0eoi)s srdvTas /cat '/rdtras' (490 a), all the gods and goddesses, vi. 1. 31. b. Anacoluthon. An adjective sometimes differs in case from its sub¬ ject, through a change of construction. This occurs chiefly in the participle, as less closely joined to the subject, and especially with intervening words : "Ebo£et' avTots [= efytpiaavro] . ., liriKaXovvrts, it seemed best to them [they voted], alleging, Th. 3 . 36 . Tv be yvhgy rod ’ApicrTeus [= 6bo4 : e t io ’Aptcrret] . ., 2x ovTt cu r< ? iaOgip ctvlt qpelv, it leas the purpose § 506. AGREEMENT OF THE PRONOUN. 315 of A., keeping (his army) on the isthmus, to watch, Th. 1. 62. Aid Jus |x bx CL [ = aidouycu] er rjde Trlrpup Tvy\dvovcra, I am ashamed, being in this state, Eur. llec. 970. "IVec tt'l poi Opacros [ = Opdao s /x e'xa] . . KXvovo-av Sopli. El. 479. 'Hpuy f = yaQ>r, 464] 5’ acre KareK.Xda6y . 'O de Treldercu, lb. 3. 'Yjjlois . ., 8crci hire iv. 6. 14. ©a vyaaror noteis, os . . diocos Mem. 2. 7. 13. M f]T ijXidior yyr d\dfov a (fixiveaQou . ., eduKet. d’ hr dycpuTepci tg.vtol, to ap¬ pear neither foolish nor boastful ; but lie would seem both of these (491 b), Mem. 1. 1. 5. b. A pronoun, for the sake of perspicuity or emphasis, is often used in anticipation cr repetition of its subject, or is itself repeated: Tt yap tovtov paKapiJuTepov, too 7,7 puxOPiVai; for what is happier than this, to mingle with the earth ? Cyr. 8. 7. 25. Kxlvo KaXXior, Terror, laoTgra rtydr, that is nobler, my son, to honor equality, Eur. Ph. 535. ’Ay las de 6 ’Apras ral 'LwKpbrri s 6 ’A%aios, vai tovtco d-ireOareryr, ‘these also died,’ ii. 6. 30. BaciXea . . del avroy opLjcrcu ii. 4. 7. OZ/xat de croi . . ^x €LV cmdetfat crot (Ec. 3. 16. “Eart 7 dp ns ob npoaio 'SArdprys ttoXls tis Eur. And. 733. (c) Intervening clauses often lead to this repetition. d. Homer often uses the personal prom ov, with its noun following : "H fuv byetper NavcriKdav evneirXor, who aroused [her] the well-clad N., f. 48. "Hy apa ol Oepdirwr %x e uroip,svi XaCur N. 600. Cf. § 516 b. II. OBSERVATIONS OX THE ADJECTIVE. 505. 1. Ellipsis. The subject of the adjective is often omitted , especially if it is a familiar word, or supplied by the context. The words most frequently omitted are, a. ) Masculine. &vt]p or dvOpwiros, man, xpo'vos time: 'ZwrdpaL de 'etca- aSa Id. And. 867. Teyp be crcoTtip, protecting fortune, yEscli. Ag. 664. — These words, as substantives, are commonly appellations of persons or countries, avr)p, yvvfy yi], &c., being understood. g. There seems to be a double ellipsis in the phrase of kingly dignity, iv rifiertpou [sc. olteov buyaaiv, 438], in our palace, at our court, Hdt. 1. 35 ; 7. 8. 507. 2. Use op the Neuter. The substantive use of the neuter adjective exhibits itself in a variety of forms : a. In the sing., a neuter adjective with the article has often the force of an abstract, or (b) collective noun ; while (c) the plur. rather denotes particulars of the kind specified : (a) To 5’ a-n-Xovv teal to &Xt]0€s evbyfe to avro tcu r)Xi0£u> ehai, but [the sincere and true thing] sincerity and truth he thought to be the same with [the foolish] folly, ii. 6. 22. Avv to 8ikcuu> (cf. yera abudas) lb. 18. To yaXeirov [ = y xaXe7ror7;s] rod irrevyaros, the [rough nature] roughness of the wind, iv. 5. 4. To merrov [ = y m- errts] Th. 1. 68. Tov 7T€pi\apovs rys vixys, the transport of victory, Id. 7. 73. To y eyov Trpo0vjxov, my zeal, Eur. Med. 178. Ta> SiaXXao-crovTi rys yvuyys, the [differing] difference of opinion, Th. 3. 10 (Time, is espe¬ cially fond of this use of the Part.). To ybv 8e8ios avrov, his [being afraid] fear, Id. 1. 36. Justum colere, Cic. (b) To 0r)Xv [sc. ybvos], the female sex, Eur. Here. 536. To 'EXXt)vikov 7ray, the whole Greek race, Hdt. 7. 139. To iirruKov [sc. crTparevya], the cavalry, Mag. Eq. 1. 19. To’Ap- KabiKov oTrXtTiKov (499 a). Neuters in -ikov are especially so used, (c) T& . . 'EXXqvixa, the Affairs of Greece, Th. 1. 97. Ta Tpwixa, the Trojan JVar, lb. 12. Ta AvKaia, Lyeoea, the Lyccmn rites, i. 2. 10. $ 500. NEUTER USED SUBSTANTIVELY. 317 d. Neuter adjectives (both with and without the article) are used with prepositions to form many adverbial phrases : ’Air'o rod avroydrov, of their own accord , i. 2. 17. "E v ye rj epavepu) , openly, i. 3. 21. Aid raxicov, rapidly, i. 5. 9. ’E/c ru>v Svvar&v iv. 2. 23. Kara ravra, in the same way, v. 4. 22. At a iravrbs, throughout, vii. 8. 11. Cf. de integro, in pri- mis, per mutua, sine dubio. e. The neuters TrXetov or -n-Xecv, petov or ^Xcittov, 8crov, pqSfcv, and tI are sometimes used as indeclinable adjectives or substantives ; and (f) from this, sometimes pass into an adverbial use : MuptdSas -n-Xctov y SdSeKa, myriads more than twelve in number, v. 6. 9 (cf. Kpyres ttXelovs rj i^yKovra iv. 8. 27). "AXvv, ov (xsiov 8vo?v araSioiv, the Halys, not less than two sta¬ dia in breadth, v. 6. 9. d?oivL^L GepeXubaas ov peiov rj irXeG pcaioLS Cyr. 7. 5. 11. ’ AiroKTe'ivovGL ruiv dvbp&v ov peiov -irevraKocrLovs, non minus quingentos, vi. 4. 24. 'f’povpovs 7rap aiirip ovk ^Xcittov rerpa/acrxiAiW Hel. 4. 2. 5 (cf. XcpevSovqra i . . ovk eXarrous rerpaKocrLwv lb. 16). lleXraaTai ocrov [ = ro- aovroL oao.\ SiaKjaioi., targctccrs as many as (or about) two hundred, vii. 2. 20 (cf. 'H/xeis ToaovroL 8vres 8crovs erb opas ii. 1. 16). Airixoc ocrov irapa- crdyyyv, ‘about a parasang,’ iv. 5. 10. llpbjara ocrov Obpara, sheep [as many as the sacrifices would be] enough for sacrifice, vii. 8. 19. ALGovs . . o rim with all speed, Ar. PL 229. Toes vespobs {i 7 rcanrov 8 ovs cLirediSocrav Hel. 2. 4. 19. Venit Telamon properus, Ov. cl.) Effect : E!vrjpov [ = wore dnpyyov eu/cu] . . Koiyrjaov arbya, hush your mouth to silence [so that it should be silent], iEsch. Ag. 1247. Mci£ov’ eKTevCb \byov, I will extend the tale to greater length, Soph. Tr. 679. 2 e teal biKaiwv clSikous 0apou [ = dvSpos cpOapewos ] . . dlyaros, homicidal blood, Soph. Ant. 1022. IIoXc.8a.Kpw iibovav, the joy of many tears, Eur. El. 126. ’0£cix €l P l [ = °% e " L X €L P^ p ] a ^ p s.TVTnp Aisch. Ch. 23. nappqxop [ = iravTinv yrjrep ] re yrj Id. Pr. 90. "EXe^os apicrxopavxis [= apiaros yauTa] Soph. Pli. 1338. Sextus nullus discedit, Cie. f. This use of the adjective gives to the sentence a closer union of parts ; and often a greater energy or vivacity, by binding to the subject, or to an adjunct, what would otherwise for the most part be only con¬ nected with the verb. It sometimes modiiies the sense. Compare x-pioxov to bs deovs eircuvu) (see Cyr. 4. 1. 2 ), primum cleos laudo, first (before doing anything else), I praise the gods, with irpa/ros robs Ceobs eirairui, primus deos laudo, I first (before any one else) praise the gocls, and -irpu.xovs robs 6eobs eTTcuvu, primos deos laudo, I praise the gods first (before praising others). In like manner are distinguished, povov robs deobs iiraLvCb, pc'vos r. 0. e., and povous r. 0. e. (solum, solus, solos), (g) Sometimes, chiefly in the poets, the adjective simply forms an emphatic pleonasm. h. The use of the adjective for a Gen. modifying a substantive (both subjective and objective, 444 g) is very extensive ; and, in some instances, a Genitive and its adjective appear to have been changed into two adjectives agreeing with the governing substantive : Ildvxiov t Avycucw’ [for uLvtov t’ Aiyaiov] iir’ clktclv, upon the coast of the JEegean Sea, Eur. Ale. 595. Iloxapia vcpxepa re [for irorayov ueprepov ] Kunra,, with the oar of the nether stream, lb. 459. i. Derivative and compound adjectives are formed in Greek with great freedom, and the latter, especially among the poets, often appear to have taken the place of a simple adjective or noun, by a species of emphatic or graphic pleonasm: Movap-n-vKas [ = ybvov{\ ttloXovs, singly-bridlecl [ = single] horses, Eur. Ale. 428. ’A 7 e'Xcus fJowopois [= /Sowr] Soph. 0. T. 26. (j) The poets often repeat a noun in composition with 6 .- priva¬ tive or a similar word, to express emphatically the idea of negation or of § 511 . USE OF DEGREES. 310 evil: M 77 x 770 dprjTcop, our [unmotherly mother] mother, yet no mother. Soph. El. 1154. Yay.ov dryapov Eur. Hel. 690 (Innuptis miptiis, Cic. da Or. 3. 58). 7 rarep ai-voira/rcp iEsch. Cli. 315. (k) Negative compounds are also used for emphatic pleonasm: Yviora kook ayvura yoi, things known and not unknown to me, Soph. 0. T. 58. III. USE OF THE DEGREES (256 s). (The following observations apply both to adjectives and adverbs.) 510. 1. Words are compared not only by inflection, but also by the use of adverbs denoting more and most: a©, MdXXor iXobcra avTov yaXXov i) . . ' Apr a%£pi~yv, loving him more than A. (magis quam), i. 1 . 4. "Iinrwv Odrrov (408), equis celerius. ’A plarois Ilepo-dv (419 c), optimis Persarum. a. The Comp, is sometimes construed with other particles, which com¬ monly strengthen the expression through the union of two forms of con¬ struction (cf. 510 a) : KdXXtor . . irpo rod (pebyeiv, more honorable than to flee [honorable in preference to fleeing], PI. Phaedo 99 a. IIc'pa rod deov- ros ocKpibrepoi, wiser than is proper [wise beyond what is proper], PI. Gorg. 487 d. ripbs air auras . . irXelu, more [in comparison with all] than all, Th. 7. 58. So with irapa beyond, birlp above, dvri instead of e-rrl upon; irpiv before, repbv earn, p^j fryiovs trwpaTos y )7 by id foxy crvvoiKeiv, it is more wretched to live with a diseased sold than [to live with] a diseased body, PI. Gorg. 479 b. nXelaiv xpovos, bv del pi apeaseiv rots Karev, twv 4v9d8€ Soph. Ant. 74. See 438 b. This elliptic comparison has been termed Co v iparatio Con ipe ndiaria. By a mixture of the two methods of construction which belong to the Comp., — (c) When a numeral, or other word of quantity, follows -n-Xeiov, petov, or 4 Xcittov, is sometimes omitted, though the Gen. is not em¬ ployed (the Comp, being now construed as an adverb) : 'AttoktAvowi tu>i> dvdpCiv 00 yciov irevraKoalovs, ‘ not less than 500 ’ (507 e). (d) To the Gen. governed by the Comp., a specification is sometimes annexed with V\ : T i rood’ dv ebprjy ebpov ebroxlcrrepov, r) -rraida yrjyai pacnXAvs; what happier fortune could I have found than this, [than] to wed the daughter of a king ? Eur. Med. 553. Ybv vodv f dytivw t&v (ppevuv, 7) vov (plpei Soph. Ant. 1090. 320 SYNTAX. ADJECTIVE AND ADVERB. § Oil. See also 513 g. (e) The Gen., very rarely, follows instead of the appro* priate case : 05 irpoyeL irXeov ttjs ypepas, t) 5e/ca t) 5c o5e/ca (TTaSiwv, he did not advance farther in a day, than 10 or 12 stadia, (482) Hel. 4. 6. 5. f. The construction of the Comp, with the Gen. is chielly where fj would be followed by the Horn. or Acc. 512. 3. The positive is sometimes added to the superlative for the sake of emphasis : as, /ca/ccov KaKt-are, 0 vilest of the vile, Soph. 0. T. 334. ’ AyaOuv imricov KpcLTUTTos cov iinrevs, ‘ the best of good horsemen,’ Cyr. 1. 3. 15. 'EPM. ^0 . . |xiape, kcu Tra}X(j.''ap6, /cat [napeorare, IIcos bevp dvyXOes, & paapcov pLiaptoTCvre ; Tt x rjKUXTa Id. 7. 44. 513. 4. Certain special forms of comparison deserve notice: as, a. ) The Comp., with a Gen. expressing hope, duty, power of description, &c.: Metfov iXTrioos, majus spe, [greater than our hope] above hope, /Esch. Ag. 266. MaAAov too beovros, [more than is proper] too much, Mem. 4. 3. 8. Kpeiaaov Xbyov, beyond description, Th. 2. 50. Opinione celerius, Cic. b. ) The Comp, followed by i) Kara, or sometimes irpds * as, Metfco, y Kara bdvpva [sc. ecrrtv], [greater than is in accordance with tears] too great for tears, Th. 7. 75. ’Evdeecn-epcos . . 7) irpos rpr e£oucrtav Th. 4. 39. Minor, quam pro tumultu, cpedes, Tac. (c) Sometimes with an Inf. added : Metfco . . 7 ) kut ip's /cat ere e^evpeiv, too great for me and you to discover, PI. Crat. 392 b. d.) The Comp, followed by q wore (or ws) and the Inf. (sometimes an¬ other mode) : Bpaxdrepa rjxovri ("ov 7) cos e£t/cvet<7#at, they shot [a shorter dis¬ tance, than they must that they may reach] too short a distance to reach, iii. 3. 7. Metfov 7 ) were (pepeiv Mem. 3. 5. 17. Mefovcos 7 ) cos e&Oee, more violently than [as] he wcls wont, Hdt. 6. 107. Metfco . . 7 ) cos rco X6y Xaov abov ’dyyevai [sc. yaXXov] ?) airoXeadcu, I wish the people to be safe, rather than perish, A. 117. ’Ep.ol TTiKpbs rkOvysev y ndvois yXvtctis, his death has been more bitter to me than sweet to them, Soph. Aj. 965. Ipsorum quam Annibalis interest, Liv. \ 514 . 5. The comparative and superlative are often used without an express object of comparison. In this case, the super¬ lative increases the force of the positive, while the comparative may either increase or diminish it, according to the object of comparison which is implied. Thus, A] 0ac(xao-ioL«TaTe avOpanre, 0 most wonderful man, iii. 1. 27. T Tayi- trrqv, immediately, iii. 3. 16. HAeiiy [sc. rod Seoi'ros] XeXeKrai, [more than is proper] too much 1ms been* said, Eur. Ale. 706 (cf. 513 a). New- Ttpos Cov es ro apyav, being too young for the command, Th. 6. 12. Ma- KpoTcpov . . bniyyaaoOcu, it is [longer than it might be] rather long to relate, PI. Conv. 203 a. MeXos evrovov, dypoiKorepov, an energetic strain, somewhat rough, Ar. Ach. 673. Tls rQv d.'irtipoTepwv, one of the more in¬ experienced, v. i. 8. Vir clarissimus, Cic. ; Liberius vivebat, Ncp. ; Se- nectus est loquacior, Cic. a. The Comp, and Sup., when used without direct comparison, are said to be used absolutely ; otherwise, relatively. In the former use, the Comp, is often translated into Eng. by the simple Pos., or by the Pos. with too or rather ; and the Sup. (“ Superlative of Eminence ”), by the Pos. with very. See 513 e, 515. 515 . G. The degrees are more freely interchanged and mixed, than in English. It may be however remarked in gen¬ eral, that the use of a higher degree for a lower renders the discourse more emphatic, and the converse, less so. Thus, Tavryv pdAicrra [for ttoXu ydXXov ] rrjs Kopys dcnrdfcrai, this she chooses far rather than the virgin, Eur. Iph. A, 1594. ’A^ioXo'yan-a/rov rCbv npo- REY. GR. 14* 322 SYNTAX.-ARTICLE. EARLY USE. § 515. yeyevgpieviov, [tlie most remarkable of those which had preceded it] more remarkable than any which had preceded it, Th. 1.1. T 42 PcXthttc tQv cravrov (piXwv Ar. PI. 631 (cf. Comitum pulcherrima). ’HKvixopwTaros aXXuv A. 505. 'H.p.u>v 6 -ycpaiTepos [for yepairaros], the oldest of its (though none of them were old), Cyr. 5. 1. 6. 'AveKpayov iravres ibs oXvyas [sc. TrXy- yas] iraicreiev, they all cried out that he had given him too few blouis, v. 8. 12 (cf. 514). Oi ttoXXoi, the [many] most, Mem. 1. 1. 19 (cf. Ot ttXucj-tci lb. 11 ; Tots TrXeiocrL Hel. 2. 3. 34,'. Ot 5e yepcuTepoi, but the [older] old men, Cyr. 1. 2. 4. Tt veArepov . . yeyovev, what new thing has happened, PI. Euthyph. 2 a (so Kacvorepov). Neiorepuv rives eir:6vp.ovvTes tt paygar cov, ‘ a revolution,’ Hel. 5. 2. 9 (Novarum rerum avidi, Sail.). IloXXa &v oi> (BeXTiov avrois arepeadai, ‘not well for them,’ Cyr. 5. 1. 12 (so, especially ill negation or interrogation, au.ei.vov, Kpeirrov, Ka.XXi.ov, Kvbiov, yoiov, %eipov, &c.). See 408 a, 419 c. “Adam, the goodliest man of men since born, His sons, the fairest of her daughters Eve.” Milton. IV. USE OF THE ARTICLE. A. Broad Use. 516. 1. Epic. The article (6, y, to) appears, in the Epic language, as a general definitive, performing the office not only of an article as usually understood , but still more frequently of a demonstrative , personal , or relative pronoun (249 s): as, f O yepcov, the old man, A. 33 ; Ta f airoiva ceyecr^at, accept this ransom, 20 ; To aov yevos, that wrath of thine, 207 ; O yap i)Xde, for he came, 12 ; Tov, whom, 36 ; Tut peev iroX'unv eTrpd.6op.ev, tol bebaarai, 125. Note. These uses are intimately allied, inasmuch as, — (a) The art., as usually understood, is simply a less emphatic form of the demonstr. pron.; and so, for the most part, the personal pron. of the 3 Pers. (but used as a substantive). Cf. “ That man whom you see,” and “ The man whom you see”; “ Those that love me,” and “ Them that love me,” Prov. 8. 17, 21. (P) The demonstr. pron. used connectively becomes a relative : “ Blessed are they that mourn.” -— (y) We cannot, therefore, expect to draw a precise line of division between the use of the article as such, and its use as a pro¬ noun. (8) Observe the resemblance in form between the English article the, and the pronouns that, this, they, kc. ; the derivation of the definite art. in the French, Italian, Spanish, &c., from the Lat. demonstr. ille ; and the extensive use of the German article der, die, das: Der Knabe den wir lobten, der hat \s gethan, the boy whom we praised, he has done it. In Epic poetry, — (a) The article, in its proper use as such, is commonly not expressed. The same omission prevails to a great extent in other kinds of elevated poetry, (b) When used as a personal pronoun, it is most frequently connected with the same particles as in Attic Greek (518) ; and is not unfrequently followed in the same sentence by the substantive to which it refers : 'H 5’ eenrero IlaXXds, and she, Pallas, followed, a. 125. AL 8’ eirbixv^av ’A&tjvcut) re Kal ' Hpq A. 20. Cf. 505 d. (e) As a demon¬ strative, it sometimes follows its substantive before a relative : ZwOecnduv Tttwv, hrireXXe, those instructions which he gave, E. 319. (d) The article when used as a personal or demonstrative pronoun has sometimes, from its position (518 f), or for the sake of the metre, the same form in the § 519. USE AS A PRONOUN. 323 Nom. with the common relative : "Os yap deuraros yXOcv, for he returned last, a. 286. M??<5’ 8s (pvyoi Z. 59. "O yap ye pas earl OavovTcvv, for this is the honor of the dead, 'P. 9. 517. 2. Ionic and Doric. In the later Ion. and in the Dor. writers, this extended use of the article was, in great measure, retained. E. g. in Hdt., the relative has in the Nom. sing, and pi. the forms os, rj, to, oi, at, rd • and has elsewhere the r- forms of the article, except after prepositions which suffer elision, in the phrases of time, Iv , and of them I most, Soph. 0. C. 741. (b) '0 yap peyiaros avrois rvyxdvei dopv^tvwv, for he [Phanoteus] is the greatest of their allies, Soph. El. 45. Tqs yap ire- t| (45 u) : Kai 8s eOabpacre, and he wondered, i. 8. 16. Kat ot throv vii. 6. 4. T H §’ oj, o VXavKuv, said he, i. e. Glauco, PI. Kep. 327 b. T H o’ y, said she, Id. Conv. 205 c. So, later, "Os p£v ireiva, os 8s pedvei, one is hungry, another drunken , 1 Cor. 11. 21. 519. In its r- forms, this use of the article also occurs, (a) before the relatives os, 6cros, and ofo? ; (b) in some special forms of expression ; and (c) sometimes, through poetic imitation of the earlier Greek ; while (d) the tragedians even give these forms to the relative pronoun : 324 SYNTAX. R. XXVIII. ARTICLE. § 519. (a) Tov o £s tov Kal tov, / go to this one and, that, Lys. 94. 3. With the article again repeated : *E<5ei yap to Kal to nroirjcai, sal to prj nrofeat., for this and that we ought to have done, and this not to have done, Dem. 128. 16. K iv- bwevew . ., oircos f 7 to. q to, yevp crerat, aXX’ 07ra;s Ta, ‘ not these or those, but these,’ Id. 1457. 16. The nominative os »ca't os (518 f) occurs, Hdt. 4. 68 . (c) Tov . . (pdLoor , him destroy, Soph. 0. T. 200. Tatv pot peXeabap take care of these for me, lb. 1466. ’Acrepas, orav (pQivojcnv, dvroXds re twv, ‘their risings,’ TEsch. Ag. 7. (d) Kretvdo-a tovs ov XPW sraveiu, having slain those whom she ought not to slay, Eur. And. 810. T ov 6eov, tov vvv \peyeis, the god, whom you now blame, lb. Bac. 712. (e) This substitution of the r- for the aspirated, forms (250) in tragedy, scarce occurs, except to avoid hiatus, or lengthen a short syllable. f. On the other hand, the aspirated forms are sometimes found with piv and 84 for the r- forms (518 a, d) : IUXeis 'EXXyvibas, &s pdv drat pair, cis ds 8 e tovs (pvyabas Kardywv, ‘ some destroying, and to others,’ Dem. 248. 18. ' As |A£v KardXrjipe nroXeis . ., Tivas 8 e nropdel Id. 282. 11. Ols p.ev . ., toZs 8 e, to some . ., to others, Eur. Iph. T. 419. So, 'O t£ ph . ., ore be, sometimes . ., at other times, Th. 7. 27. 'Ore de Yen. 5. 8 , B. Tiie Article Proper. 520. Rule XXVIII. The Article is prefixed to substantives, to mark them as definite. a. The Greek article, in its specific and later developed use as an article proper, corresponds in general to the definite article in our own and other modern languages. It is often, however, when used substantively, and sometimes when used adjectively, translated into Eng. by a demonstrative pronoun (527, 523 h). With a participle following, it is most frequently translated by a relative and verb, preceded, if no antecedent is expressed, by a personal or demonstrative pronoun (527). It is often omitted in translation, especially with proper names, abstract nouns, nouns used ge- nerically, and pronouns (522, 524, 531) ; and must he often supplied in translation when not expressed (533). In Eat., it is only partially rep¬ resented by adjective pronouns : “ Roster sermo articulos non desiderat, ideoqne in alias partes oration is sparguntur.” Quintil., 1. 4. 19. b. The article may he separated from its substantive by words modify¬ ing the latter (523 a), by particles which cannot stand first in the clause § 522 . GENERIC ARTICLE. (as fuv, St, “yap, ye, re, 8-q), by the pronoun rls in Tonic, and sometimes "by other words : TQu rts ilepjeuv, one of the Persians, Hdt. 1. 85. c. A substantive used indefinitely wants the article : KaXds yap Oyaav- pos, vap’ avdpi Girovbalw ^dpts b(f)ei\op.evrj, a favor due from a good man is an excellent treasure, lsoc. 8 b. See 548 a. 521. A substantive used definitely is either employed in its full extent , to denote that which is known, or, if not employed in its full extent, denotes a definite part. a. Compare, “ Man is mortal,” where man is used in its full extent of application, to denote every individual of a known race, and is therefore definite ; “ The man whom we saw,” where man is not used in its full ex¬ tent of application, but is yet definite as denoting a particular and known individual ; and “ If a man love me” (Jn. 14. 23), where man is indefi¬ nite, simply denoting any one of the race. b. The article, according as it is joined with the substantive in the first or the second of these uses, is distinguished as the generic or the limiting article. 1. Generic Article. 522. A substantive employed in its fall extent , to denote that which is known, may be, a.) A substantive used generically, i. e. denoting a whole class or kind; as t] yvvy, woman (for the whole sex), oi dvdpwiroi, men (all men), oi ’Ady- vadoi, the Athenians (the whole nation) : '0 dvSpwiros “ avdpwiros ” &voya- ady,mam ( Fr . l’homme, Germ, der Mensch, &c.) was named dv6pwiros,Y\. Crat. 399 c. Tub- 'EXXfjvcov be ’ex wv birXlras . . rpiaKoaiovs, ‘of Greeks,’ i. 1. 2. See 533 c. (b) To this head may be referred substantives used distributively, which consequently take the article : KOpo? v:TLaxreiraL . . rp'ia yyiSapeiKa rod [xqvos rep crTpa/rilrrip 0. promises three half-darics [the month to the soldier] a month to arch soldier, i. 3. 21. If eKaerTos, each, is expressed, the article may be used or omitted : "E/cacrrov to eduos (523 b), each nation, i. 8. 9. "E/caarov clctkov iii. 5. 10. e.) A substantive expressing an abstract idea ; as y apery, virtue {Fr. la vertu) : 'H eweppoowy, uai y byspareia, /cat y dX/c>) Cyr. 7. 5. 75 (533 c). d. ) An infinitive or clause used substantively, or a word spoken of as such : Aid to 4>op€ia-0cu, through fear, v. 1. 13. To ovoya 6 dvOpanros, the name dvdpojiros PI. Crat. 399 c (tire article conforming by attraction to the noun following, inasmuch as the word bvoya expressed sufficiently shows that dvdpwiros is spoken of merely as a word ; cf. 491 a, 500). e. ) The name of a monadic object (one which exists singly in nature, or is so regarded ; yovadiKos single ) ; as 6 yXios, the sun, y creXyvy, the moon : “Eyet rpocpqu y yr| d7ro rod ovpavov, the earth receives nutriment from the heavens, (Ee. 17. 10. See 533. f. ) The name of an art #r science : 'H larptKr| /cat y )(a\K€UTiKf| /cat y t£ktovikt|, medicine and brasiery and carpentry, CEc. 1. 1. See 533 c. g. ) A proper name, which has been before mentioned or implied, or which is well known : Ata ffipoytas • . . rrjs ffipoytas ttjXlv, through Phrygia; . . a city of said P., i. 2. 6, 7. Kupos rqv KtXtcrcrar els ryv KtXiKiav a 7 ro- •Klp.-Kei, Cyrus sends the Cilician queen to Cilicia, i. 2. 20. 'Tirep rrjs 'EX- Xa8os, in behalf of Greece (their native land), i. 3. 4. Observe the use and omission of the article in 418 a ; and see 523 h, 533 a. h. Proper names appear the rather to’take the article, from their being SYNTAX. ARTICLE. 326 so extensively, in tlieir origin, either adjectives used substantively (506 f), or common nouns used distinctively (530). Thus, 'PI 'EXActs [sc. 777], [the Greek land] Greece, Fr. la Grece (cf. England, the land of the Angles, Fr. L’Angleterre ; Scotland) ; Tf/s Mimas, of Mysia, vii. 8. 8, but T77 Mvaiq. X-bpg, i- 2. 10 ; 0 'EXXrjcnrovTos, the [sea of Helle] Hellespont; '0 Ile/rt/cA^s [sc. dvi)p], [the Illustrious Man] Pericles; 'O ovtos Te\vrjS ’ipyov, the work of the carder’s art, PI. Pol. 281 a. ’Ev rats KiLpais rats V7rip tov 7 rebiov tov irapa tov Kewpiryv iv. 3. 1. Tas peydXas rjbovas sal tcl dyaQx ra yeydXa Cyr. 3. 3. 8 . b. (Order of Statement.) On the other hand, words and phrases not belonging to the definition or description of the substantive, but to that which is said about it in the sentence, regularly either (4) p>rececle the article, or (5) follow the substantive without a repetition of the article : ’Ayadbs 6 dvrjp or 6 avrjp ayaObs [sc. ecrric], the man is good. "On Kfvos 6 (pojos eir), sal oi dpxowes crcoci, that the fear was groundless, and the gen¬ erals safe, ii. 2. 21. \Pi\fjv ex wv r W Kev (fnXLav, the friendship of the barbarians, i. 3. 5. (2) T rjv 6vya- repa t'ijv (3acnXecos ii. 4. 8 . (3) ’E 7 ri aKrjvrjv ijvres ttjv ’EevorpQvros, going to the tent of X., vi. 4. 19. (4) Too be kvxXov ij irepLobos, the length of the circuit, iii. 4. 11. (5) T 77 TeXevTrj tov (3lov i. 9. 30. (1) Tots 'EXXrjVuv irXovcnoiTdTois Th. 1. 25. (d) A prepositional adjunct takes the 5 th order more freely after a verbal, or when another modifier has taken the place between the article and substantive : 'II yvopubrj e/c t&v aypbbv is to aaTv , LIMITING ARTICLE. 327 / 524. */ the crowding from the country into the city, Th. 2. 52. Tt?s rui' yvpaixQv r|vacri, Oeois ra tc ovetpaTa, to the gods who had sent the dream, iv. 3. 13. Tor tuv dXXcov 6aparop o’TpaTq'ywv, ii. 6. 29. Ilepcrcov robs apiarovs rwv irep! awrov eirra i. 6. 4. 524. Rem arks. 1. It is common to employ the article even when the substantive is rendered definite (a) by a g^osses- sive or (b) demonstrative pronoun : (a) 'O iybs naryp, my father, i. 6 . 6 . "Oyya rovyor [= to eyw, 125], Cyr. 8 . 7. 26. T/jr yyerepar %t 6 pap iv. 8 . 6 . T# rjyui rp uyerepep vii. 3 . 39 . (b) The pronouns outos and o 8 e, as themselves beginning with the article (252), do not take it immediately before them, and exeivos follows their analogy. These pronouns are therefore placed according to 523 b, except when separated from the article by another modifier : Tadras ras irjXeis, these cities, T ASe top rpjnop, Exeipys rr)s y ye pas, Tor dropa rodror, i. 1 . 8 , 9 ; 7. 18 ; 6 . 9. O yep dr. 7/3 oSe Apol. 29. H arepy aury 686s, this narrow way, iv. 2 . 6 . 328 SYNTAX. LIMITING ARTICLE. § 524. c. In prose, when the article is omitted with a demonstrative pronoun and a common noun (except as in 533, and in some special deictic uses, 543 s), the pronoun is regularly employed as a subject, and the noun as an attribute : "Ein yev yap ire via avr-rj aacprjs, this is manifest poverty , CEc. 8. 2 (cf. Avry i] evSeia, this want, lb.). Aury ad aWy npixpaens bjv, this again was another pretext, i. 1. 7. KLvyais yap avry yeyiary . . eyeveio Th. 1 . 1 . 525. 2. Upon the same principle, the article is prefixed to words and phrases, which are joined with a proper name or a personal pronoun to give definiteness or emphatic distinction : T bv pv . . r/Ku Eur. And. 1070. a. If, on the other hand, no distinction is designed, the article is omitted: Eevo(pu)v ’Adyvaios, X., an Athenian, i. 8. 15. Harayvas avpp Iltpays lb. 1. ’EytbrdXas, I, unhappy man, Soph. 0. C. 747. ’A vov , the [now time] present time, vi. 6. 13 (Tc? ’ovra vvv xpi>- vov Eur. Ion 1349). Ev rw'irpdcrQev [sc. yevoyevif] \byo) ii. 1. 1. Tou totc (BaaiXecvs, the then king, Cyr. 4. 6. 3. Tfjpepov yyepav iv. 6. 9. ToO iruvu IIept/c\eous, the great P., Mem. 3. 5. 1. otKctSe odov iii. 1. 2. a. So a prep, with its case: ToO cv AeXtjxns xP r l a " rr lP' L0V i die Delphic ora¬ cle, Cyr. 7. 3. 15. ’ApyevLa . . y -irpos ccnrtpav, fFestern Armenia, iv. 4. 4. b. This adjective may again, like any other adjective, be used either substantively or adverbially (527 s, 529). 527. 4. The substantive which is modified is often omitted, as a familiar word or supplied by the context; and in the former ease, the article is commonly regarded as used substantively with the word or phrase following (500 d, 520 a) : Tu)v napa (SaaiXecos [sc. dvdpCov], of those from the king, i. 1. 5. Td>v 7 repi rqv Oypav, the hunters, PI. Soph. 220 d. To irepav rod irorayov, the opposite side of the river, iii. 5. 2. T L to kojXvov dy, what it teas that pre¬ vented, iv. 7. 4. '0 yydev &v, he that is nothing (507 e), Soph. Aj. 767. a. The phrases ot ctpcfn and ot -rrept, followed by the name of a person, commonly include the person himself with his attendants or associates ; and sometimes, by a species of vague periphrasis, denote little more than the person merely : 0 i Sit dy lb. 3). Ot irepi Eevo- (pCovTa, Xenophon with lvis men, vii. 4. 16. Ot yev irepl roes Kopivdiovs, the Corinthians with their allies, Hel. 4. 2. 14. Ot ire pi KeKpoira [i. e. KC Kpo\p] Mem. 3. 5. 10. So Ot perd 'ApiaLov i. 10. 1. 528. 5. When the neuter article is used substantively with a word or phrase following, (a) the precise idea (as, in English, of 1 thing' 1 or ‘ things' ) must be determined from the connection, and (b) not unfrequently the whole expression may be regarded as a periphrasis for an included substantive: § 530 . PREVIOUS MENTION, CONNECTION, &C. 329 (a) Td tov yypus, the evils of old age, Apol. 6. Td we pi Upo^evov, the fate of Proxenus, ii. 5. 37. ’Ev Tois ewdvu ,[in the above] in the preceding narrative, vi. 3. 1. Ta irap’ ep,ol eXVrOai dvrl tuv o'l'kol, to prefer remain¬ ing with me to returning home, i. 7. 4. To tCov dXiewv, the habit of fisher¬ men, (Ec. 16. 7. Ac5;e'va' to tCjv waLSuv, to have the boyish fear. Id. Phredo 77d (478). To to 0 2oo5/x7ra\tv, back, vi. 6. 38. To waywav PI. Tim. 41b. c. ) Prepositions followed by their cases : To a7rd rovSe, [as to that after this] henceforth, Cyr. 5. 1. 6. Td 7r ( ods eawepav, to the west, vi. 4. 4. 530. ii. A substantive not employed in its full extent may also be definite (a) from previous men¬ tion, , mutual understanding, general notoriety , or emphatic distinction; (b) irom contrast; and (c), in general, from the connection in which it is employed : as, (a) ©opvpov rfKovae . ., teal ypero tIs 6 Oopvjlos ei'y, lie heard a noise, and inquired what the noise was, i. 8. 16. w Ore £Upfys verrepov dyeipas t?|v dvapC0[xr]Tov crrpcmdv ijXdev, ‘that innumerable army,’ iii. 2. 13. Tov dvSpa opw, I see the man [i. e. Artaxerxes], i. 8. 26. 5 AvaKaXovvTts tov 7rpo8oTT|v, exclaiming, ‘ the traitor ! ’ vi. 6. 7. (b) Contrast may give a degree of definiteness to expressions which are otherwise quite indefinite ; and may even lead to the employment of the article with the indefinite pronoun tIs : "Iwwovs . ., rods pev tivcis wap’ e wl, rods 8e rd) KXeapxv KaTaXeXeiyylvovs, horses, some with me, and others left by C., iii. 3. 19. So with numerals denoting part of a whole : ’Ev eKaaTCp rpeis dvSpas, tov ol pgv 8do CKfidvres els rd^iv ’edevTO ra owXa, o 8« ds Zyeve, ‘of whom two . ., but the third,’ v. 4. 11. Td Sdo pulpy, [the two parts from three, 242 d] two thirds, Tli. 2. 47. Cf. 518 a. (c) EweL8q ereXedryae Aapeios, sal Kareary els TtjV PacrtXeiav ’Apra- ^ep^ys, ‘ had succeeded to the throne [sc. of Persia],’ i. 1. 3. d. A substantive is often definite as denoting that which is natural, usual, necessary, proper, &c., in the circumstances : ’Ev ybv rrj dpiCTtpa. Xexpl to 8opv l-^cov, tv 8e ry otfia paKTqpiav, (Clearchusf having in the left hand his spear, and in the right a staff (the .spear a part of his regular equipment, but not the staff), ii. 3. 11. See e. e. With substantives which are rendered definite by the connection, a possessive or genitive pronoun is often implied in the article : Turoacpzpvys 8ia/3dXXei rbv Kvpov wpbs tov d8t\<|>6v, T. accuses C. to [the] his brother, i. 1. 3. KOpos re KarawySyaas dwb tov upp-ccros tov OdpaKa ivlSv, /cat ava- (3 as ewl rhv IVirov Ta -rraXTa els rds x £ b ocss eXajde, 6'., leaping from h is chariot, put on his breastplate, <5c\, i. 8. 3. So, familiarly, in French. 330 SYNTAX. -ARTICLE. § 531. 531. From a reference to something which precedes or is mutually understood, or for emphasis, the article may be even joined, (a) with an interrogative pronoun , (b) a personal pro¬ noun ., (c) a pronoun of quality or quantity : (a) AXXa . . WXu aoi . . bnjyriaaaOai . .. To, 7rota; l ‘I will relate to you other things .” “ [The what ?] What are they P ’ CEc. 10. 1. Ud v\}/os b£, To edpos . ., kuI rb b\f/o s, in breadth . ., and in height, ii. 4. 12 ; iii. 4. 10. Avdpeia, teal aimppoadvy, sal duiaioavvy PI. Phajdo 69 b. Yewpylav re teal t)\v TroXegiryv tIx v V v CEc. 4. 4. Geocre- (3£vXf|s, one from [a tribe] each tribe, Hel. 2. 4. 24. d. ) Familiar designations of place, time, and related persons or objects ; Ei’s rb dtrrv, Ei’s olya body, fvxy soul, 5e£ia ( dpiarepa), right (left) hand, irons foot, Sj pv spear, denris shield,, kc. e. ) Ordinals and Superlatives (523 f) : Kai rpvrov Hr os rip iroXjucp ire* Xevra, ‘the third year,’ Th. 2. 103. Ets ’lacrobs, rys KiAt/das ecr)(drrjv irb- A ip i. 4. 1. f. The article is more freely omitted, as in Eng., when two or more nouns are coupled together ; and also after a preposition or governing adverb : 'HA iou re heal aeX'gvys teal darpoiv kclL yrp Kai aWepos Kai aepos Kai irvpos Kai vdaros Kai ojpwv Kai iveavrov, of sun, moon, stars, dee., PL Crat. 408 d (Tov yXiov, 'LI creXyvy, T& aarpa, kc., Ib. 408 s). QavyaaLaL to KaX- A os Kai to piiyeQos, wonderful for beauty and size, ii. 3. 15. 'Tiro KaXXovs Kai yeyldovs dSLyyyrov Cyr. 8. 7. 22. To?s apxovcn. rys OaXaaays, . . rots rys yrjs, to those that rule the sea ( the land), Pep. A. 2. 4. Tots yev Kara OaXarrav apxovaLV, . . rots 8e Kara yyv Ib. 5. g. If two substantives are placed in comparison, the article is common¬ ly joined with both, or with neither: OvSeTrore . . XvaLreXearepov abiKia (OLKaLoavvYjs, injustice is never more gainful than justice, PI. Rep. 354 a. XvaLreXearepov y aSt/cta rys SiKaioavvys Ib. b. h. It will be observed that the generic article is most freely omitted in Greek, as it also is least used in English. Cf. its prevalence in French. 534. 3. The subject of the sentence, from its distinctive prominence, has the article more frequently than an adjunct; while a predicate ap- positive commonly wants it, as simply denoting that the subject is one (or more) of a class. Hence the article is often useful in distinguishing the subject, and sometimes appears to be used especially for this purpose : Mg o8os, lest the departure should be a flight, vii. 8. 16. ’Eyirb- piov o’ yv to xojpCov i. 4. 6. Td 8ls irevTe SeKa eariv, tioicc five is ten, Mem. 4. 4. 7. 01 p.vJpi .01 i-irn-ets ov8ev dXXo ?) ybpLol elaiv avdponroL iii. 2. 18. Geos yv 6 Aoyos Jn. 1. 1. Tts 8 ’ ol 8 ev , el to £qv ysv tart . KarOavelv , To KaT0aveIv 8e fgv Karoo voflferai. Eur. Pol. El’. 7. 4. When words or phrases are coupled by conjunctions, they are more clqsely united in conception, if only a single article is used ; less closely, if the article is repeated : Toes -iriarobs Kai eiivovs Kai fieftaLovs, the faithf ul, friendly, and steadfast, i. 9. 30. T Q>v ’EikXyvwv Kai ruiv (3apj3dpo:v, of the Greeks and of the barbarians, i. 2. 14. 5. The insertion or omission of the article often depends, both in poetry and prose, upon emphasis, euphony, or rhythm ; and upon those nice distinctions in the expression of our ideas, which, though they may be readily felt, are often transferred with difficulty from one language to an¬ other. Its omission, in many cases, doubtless conies from the retention of earlier usage (516 a). In general, the insertion of the article promotes the perspicuity, and its omission, the vivacity of discourse. It is, con¬ sequently, more employed in philosophical than in rhetorical composition, and far more in prose than in poetry. It should be remarked, however, that there is perhaps none of the minutiae of language in which manu¬ scripts differ more, than in respect to its insertion or omission, especially with proper names. 332 SYNTAX.-PRONOUNS. § 535. Y. OBSERVATIONS ON THE PRONOUNS. 535. a. Of the observations which follow, many apply equally to pronouns and adverbs of the same classes. b. In the use of pronouns, especially those first presented below, it is important to distinguish between the stronger and weaker forms of ex¬ pression ; that is, between those forms which are more distinctive, emphat¬ ic, or prominent, and those which are less so. c. As pronouns are used so largely for distinction, the choice or rejec¬ tion of a form in a particular instance depends greatly upon the use of other pronouns in the connection. The use of the pronouns is likewise much influenced in poetry by the metre, and even in prose, to some ex¬ tent, by euphony and rhythm. d. From the natural tendency in the progress of language to greater distinctiveness of expression, the stronger forms prevail more in the later than in the earlier Greek. Observe the New Testament use. A. Personal, Reflexive, and Possessive (27 s). 536. 1. The personal pronouns (a) are commonly omit¬ ted in the Nom. (as implied in the affixes of the verb, 271), except for emphasis or distinctness of reference, (b) If needed in the Nom. of the 3d Pers., they are supplied by the article, or, as a stronger form, by the demonstrative 'pronoun, (c) They are also omitted in the other cases, when understood from the connection, more freely than in English, (d) In the weaker form for these cases, they are enclitic in the 1st and 2d Per¬ sons sing., and are commonly supplied in the 3d Person by avros; while (e), in the stronger form , they are orthotone throughout, and are supplied in the 3d Pers. by the article *or still stronger demonstrative. Thus, "Airavra aCoa airdduKa croi, eirel Kal crv> ep.ol airedei^as tov avdpa, I gave you back everything safe, when you also had shown to me the man, v. 8. 7. r O 8e €/JLTrnr\as caravToov rgv yvungv atveirepLire [sc. avrous ], and he dismissed them, satisfying the wish of all, i. 7. 8. (Jure cru €K€tvas cpiXeis, ovre iKtl- vai ere, neither do you love them, nor they you, Mem. 2. 7. 9. H8’ ovv OaudraL, she then will die, Soph. Ant. 751. ’E-yw ph, u> avdpes, i]8r) xijxas eiraivCb • otws de Kal {jfjieis €fjd erraiveaere, €|xol peXyaeL, t) p-yKeri [xe K vpov vopl^ere i. 4. 16. Tcrurw avyyevjpevos 6 Kupos, yyaaOrj re avrov, Kal did w- aiv av-rw i. 1. 9. See 518, 530 e. Natura lu illi pater es, consiliis ego, Ter. 537. 2. In reflex reference, the distinctive and emphatic forms are those of the so-called reflexives (244) ; while the forms of the common personal pronouns and of nurd? are also used as weaker forms, chiefly when the reference is both in¬ direct and unemphatic. § 538 . PERSONAL, REFLEXIVE, AND FOSSESSIVE. 333 ’Efiavru) ye 5 oku> avveidevai, to myself at least I seem to be conscious , vii. 6. 11. Aijxvveadui p.oi dodb, [1 seem to myself to be] / feel ashamed, i. 7. 4. 'Opjrras, . . be ipero iriarbv ol elvai, raxu avrov eupe Kvpip (piXairepov, rj lav Til), 0. soon found the man whom he believed to be faithful to him, more a friend to C. than to himself { 0.), i. 9. 29. KeXeaown diaaivaavra aA-rots ra icpfiara, ra, yev avrbv XajSeiv, t a de crcjucriv anrodovecu, they bid him save the sheep for them, taking some himself, and returning them the rest, vi. 6. 5. ’AyeXeiv Tjp.Dv avraiv, to neglect ourselves, i. 3. 11. IlapeSotrav ot ttclv- res o-<})d3 avTovs, ‘ surrendered themselves,’ Th. 7. 82. a. If a pronoun used reflexively and its subject are both related the most closely to the same verb or participle, the former is termed a direct reflex¬ ive ; (b) but otherwise, indirect: (a) Ous eyk . . Karediyyv 4;xo(, which I laid up for myself, i. 3. 3. ' Acpnnrebei eki rqv 4avrov) aKyvyv, he rides back to his own tent, i. 5. 12. (b) nparrere ottoIov av tl vpuv o’iyade yaXi- ara avycpipeiv, do ivhatcvcr you think will most benefit yourselves, ii. 2. 2. Aeyerai ’AirbXXcov eubelpai Ma pavav . . epiipovrd ol, A. is said to have flayed M., who contended with him, i. 2. 8. 25 yev jyouyevos auras eiri^yyiovs dvai (rsa-uTu Mem. 2. 7. 9. c. A common reflexive or personal pronoun is sometimes used for the reciprocal pronoun : 'Hp.iv avTots biaXe^oyeda, toe will confer with each other, Dem. 1169. 5. ’Eirpa^ayeu . . irpos T;p.ds dprjvTjv, we made peace with each other, Dem. 30.16. iT€pas avTuiv, to sail from their own land, Rep, A. 2. 5. (c) ’Ep.ov (4ov) avTov xP e ^ 0S > m V flis) own interest, (3. 45 a. 409. To's oicriv aurov, suis ipsius, Soph. O. T. 1248. d. This substitution is sometimes made for the Gen. in its other uses with substantives, even the Gen. objective (444 g) : To €T€- pos, which is used reflexively, and w r ith no great frequency ; while the poetic or dialectic os, 46s, and cr<{>6s (28 e, n) are very rarely used except as reflexive. - f. The weaker form of the Gen., from its want of distinctive emphasis, is rarely preceded by the article, and therefore follows the rule of position in 524 b ; while the stronger form of the Gen., and the possessive adjective follow the rule in 523 a : T p aibyam qvtov, To yev 4clvtov erw/xa, his (oion) body, i. 9. 23. II 4k€ivc ov vfipis /cat 7/ Tjp,€T€pa vropia iii. 1. 21. ’A7re- irey pi jxov rbv deairjriqv Ar. PI. 12. Toy ISiov rbv Ip-avrov PI. Gorg. 488 a. '11 yUp ir&Xa'. v'p.jov (pvais, our ancient nature, PI. Conv. 189 d. (g) The Gen. of avTcs, however, i:i its stronger, and especially its reflexive uses. 334 SYNTAX. -PRONOUNS. - OY. § 538. may take the position of lavrov : A vrol /cat oi ainov arpaTitoTcu, they them¬ selves and their men, vi. 2. 14. ’E/eeXeve;' . . decrdcu ra 07rXa irepl rqv ai- tov CKyurju (cf. eis rpv eavrov atcyvyv) i. 6. 4. 539. 4. The third 'person being expressed demonstratively in other ways, the pronoun ov became simply a retrospective pronoun, i. e. a pronoun referring to a person or tiling pre¬ viously mentioned. As such, it performed the office both (a) of an unemphatic reflexive, and (b) of a simple personal pronoun ; rarely (c), in Epic, of a general reflexive, without respect to person, (d) This last use appears oftener in its deriva¬ tives (even in the Attic, in lavrov and crcJjSTepos). — (a) See 537. 2, a. (b) 'Zvvecpaaav of, they agreed with him, Cyr. 3. 2. 26. Atyeiv re e/cAe vev avTotis, otl ovdev av ijrTov pujv av- rG)v\ (ppovTi^cTe Dem. 9. 13. 'Eivpyaere creeds avTOvs ypapryKoras, ‘your¬ selves,’ Hel. 1. 7. 19. Tt av o-<{>€Tepcov (ppovpLuv, our fortresses, Cyr. 6. 1. 10. Sui juris sumus, Pauli. e. Some of the forms of ov are used with great latitude of number and gender. Thus, (a) pav and viv commonly sing., but also plur. (especially vtv) ; viv, him iEsch. Pr. 333, her Eur. Hec. 515, it Soph. Tr. 145, them, masc. So])h. 0. T. 868, fem. Id. 0. C. 43, neut. iEsch. Pr. 55 ; pLv, them, Ap. Eh. 2. 8. (P) crebe properly plur., but also (especially in the tragic poets) sing.; afe, them, masc. A. Ill, fem. Soph. O. T. 1505, him iEsch. Pr. 9, her Eur. Ale. 834. (y) crejav rarely sing.: Horn. H. 18. 19, iEsch. Per. 759. (8) ’4 commonly sing. masc. and fem., but sing. neut. A. 236, plur. Horn. Ven. 268. (e) So the derived posscssivcs: Ic's, their, Hes. Op. 58 ; o-(f>€T€pos, his Id. Sc. 90, Pind. O. 13. 86, my (cf. d) Theoc. 25. 163, thy Id. 22. 67 ; o-cf>coiTepos (from both 2 and 3 Pers. dual), his, Ap. Eli. 1. 643. f. The place of ov as a reflexive is commonly supplied in Attic prose by lavrov, and as a simple personal pronoun, by civtos. The plural occurs far oftener than the singular, which, except the Dat., is in Attic prose very rare. The disuse of the Horn. sing, of this pronoun (246 e) is ex¬ plained by its reflexive character. B. AYT02 (251, 28 c). 540. The pronoun avros marks a return of the mind to the same person or thing. This return takes place, a.) In speaking of reflex action or relation. Hence at’ros is used with the personal pronouns in forming the reflexives See 244. § 541 . AYT02. 335 b. ) In designating a person or thing as the same which has been previously mentioned or observed. When thus employed, avros (like the corresponding same in English), being used for distinction, is preceded by the article (523 a) : '0 avros dvyp, rarely 6 avqp 6 avris or av'qp o aiiros, idem vir, the same man. T?) be avrrj 'puepa, and upon the same day, i. 5. 12. OSros be 6 av- t os, and this same person, vii. 3. 3. ’E/ce?ra ra aura Mem. 4. 4. 6. Taura iiracrxov iii. 4. 28 (§ 125). See 451. c. ) For the sake of emphasis, one of the most familiar modes of expressing which is repetition. When avros is thus employed in connection with the article, it is placed in the order of state¬ ment (523 b) : Avros 6 avrjp, less frequently 6 du)p avros, vir ipse, the man himself. A iiros hlivwv ej3ovXero, Mono himself wished it, ii. 1. 5. K vpos rrapeXadvwv avros (jvv Iliypyri i. 8. 12. A vra ra airb rCov ohaCov £e\a, the very wood, from the houses, ii. 2. 16. Kat Oeoae^ecrrarov aero eari iravriov £u>uv dv- Opwjros, ‘ the very most religious,’ PI. Leg. 902 b. See iii. 2. 4. d. The emphatic avros is joined with pronouns in both their stronger and their weaker forms (commonly preceding them) ; and (e) is often used in the Nom. with a pronoun understood, (d) Aiircp p.oi ’eowev, Aer<£> Ijxol . . <5o£ei, it seems ( shall seem) to myself, PI. Phsedo 60 c, 91 a. A vrov tou- tov ere/cer, on this very account, iv. 1. 22. 01 be crrparidjrai, ol re avrov CKtivou /cat ot oXXol, ‘ both his own,’ i. 3. 7. Avrol '^Kacrroi y it ai, , for we are by ourselves, PI. Leg. 836 b. Avrovs robs arparyyods 336 SYNTAX.-PRONOUNS. § 541. airoica\lv avrqv [1. e. rqv apx V] £{B 8 opos, ‘with six confederates,’ PI. Leg. 695 c. Cf. ’Ivdov 7 roTap.br, os KpoKoSeLXovs 8 evT€pos ovtos 7 rorapQv ttclvtwv irapexe- rat, the river Indus which [the second this of all rivers], with one other river only, breeds crocodiles, Hdt. 4. 44. li.) A reflexive is frequently preceded by av-ros, agreeing with the same subject ; and the two pronouns are often brought into close connection, in disregard of the natural order : ’AiroKreivai A eyerai auTos rrj lavTov x eL P L ’A pTayepayv, he is said [himself] until his own hand to have slain A., i. 8 . 24. A lox^cls ttoXlv tt\v au-ros aurou, you disgrace your own city (539 d), Soph. 0. C. 929. Tots t curros av-rov irypaaiv (3apvveTai TEscli. Ag. 836. T oiov TraXaLOTpv vvv Trapaaneva^eTai, eir’ avTos aiiTu Id. Pr. 920. See 513 f. C. Demonstrative (28, 252). 542. 1 . Of the primary demonstratives, the more distant and emphatic is eseivos, ille, that; the nearer and more familiar is ovros or ode, hie, this : ’Ecu' exavois doicrj, sal toutovs xa/ccos iroii)o(f>Cjv rdSe ehre, to this Xenophon replied as follows , ii. 5. 41. Ovtoi, oi)s opdre, (3ap/3apoi (523g). Touto 7 rp&Tov yp&ra, irbrepov \!pov ety, ‘this, whether,’ &c., iii. 1. 7. To the retrospective character of ovtos may be referred, a. ) Its use preceded by kcu, in making an addition to a sentence, the pronoun either serving as a repetition of a substantive in the sentence, or, in the neuter Acc. or Nom. (commonly plur., 491 c), of the sentence itself: ScVaus irpoayicei aoi ToXXobs 5^%ecr0at, Kal tovtovs [sc. dexcadai] yeyaXo- ■n-peirLos, it becomes you to entertain many guests, and these magnificently, (Ec. 2. 5. 'Efioy9r)aai> t y AaKeSaipovi, kcu Tavra [sc. eiroiyaav] Adores (491 c). AiecfbXa^e rpv i toXlv, Kal Tawa dreixarrov ovaav Ages. 2. 24. b. ) The use of tovto and Tawa in assent: Aei birapxcw ical dvmrovs. . . “Eari raura. “ They ought also to be competent.” “This is so.” PI. Rep. 412 c. ElaUopev. T aura vvv [sc. Troi&ge-j or Arrw]. “ Let us go in.” “Yes.” Ar. Vesp. 1008. So Kcu rourb ye, ’'E 4pvovs axiaTiav, oo-tis Xbywv . see the perfidy of T., [one] a man who saying . ., iii. 2. 4. Noels eKelvov, ovtiv’ dprlus poXelv iip'JpecrOa ; do you know that man, the one whose coming we just now desired l Soph. 0. T. 1054. 0 uk aiaxbveaOe . ., oixives opbaavres . . d7roXwX^/care ii. 5. 39. See 549 b. — The use of an indefinite relative referring to a definite antecedent be¬ longs particularly to those cases in which the relative clause is added, not SYNTAX. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 340 § 550. to distinguish, but to characterize, tlius representing the antecedent as one of a class. c. ) A simpler relative for one of quantity, quality, etc.: ’E7 ndvyeh roiavrys dffrjs fjs [= cuas] iroXXol rvyxdvovaiv, to desire such glory [which] as many obtain, Isoc. 408 d. TyXinavrys . . -rjv [ = ryXiicyv], so great as, lb. "Euxnrep dv ys os [= roiovros oIos] el, as'long as you are what [= such as] you are, PI. Phsedr. 243 e. "Hv ye os eiyi Id. Theiet. 197 a. Innocentia est affeetio tabs, quae noceat nemini, Cic. d. ) A relative of quantity, quality, &c., for a simpler relative: Taera . . XPO voielv, ocra [for a, or sc. roaavra ] 6 debs eneXevaev, you must do th-ese things, [as many as] which the god has commanded, iii. 1. 7. llav, 8 opei, £v6airep eatcr/vow iv. 8. 25. To avro axgya . . aicr-irep, the same order as, i. 10. 10. Eum necassit, unde natus esset, Cic. f. After the plural of ttcls all, octtis and 8s &v are regularly used in the singular, and ocroi, ottoctoi, and ot in the plural: ’ Aaird^erai iravras, [for aXXos orw] . . nXeicj eTrirphreis ; is there [to whom else] any other to ivhom you entrust more ? (Ec. 3. 12. Aoyovs dxovaov, ovs aoL 8vt€l, noXXovs, many of those whom he distrusted, Cyr. 5. 4. 39. B\a.TrTeaOou afi civ [= tovtwv, a] ygr.v TrapecrKeiiaarcu, to be in¬ jured by those things which have been prepared by us [in respect to which preparation has been made by us], Til. 7. 67. — When the subject of a verb is attracted, the verb, if retained, becomes impersonal. (c) Inverse Attraction. The antecedent is here treated, except in position, as if a part of the relative clause ; and sometimes omits an article, as if supplied by the relative (cf. 523 g) : ’AveiXev avrii) 6 ’AttoXXwv 0sois ots [= robs Geovs, ots] ’ebei Gvclv, Apollo made. knoivn to him [to what gods] the gods t) whovi he must sacrifice, iii. 1 . 6 . Tao-Ss [= At5e] 5’ aa-rrep ecao- pas, . . xupouat. irpbs v aeplKero x@°va Eur. Med. 11 . So, in respect to the omission of the article, Xweireg^pev avrij crrpaTicoTas ovs blevwv he sent with her [what soldiers] the soldiers ivliich M. had, i. 2 . 20 . Erbeni quarn statuo, vestra est, Virg. “When him we serve’s away,” Shaks. d. Assimilation appears also in adverbs: ’Ek be yys, oGev [= o3] npotj- KeiTo, from the ground [whence] where it lay, Soph. Tr. 701. A uKogfovTo evGvs o0ev [= evreddev of] vire^edevTo iraioas, they immediately brought over their children from the places whither they had conveyed them, Th. 1 . 89. Inverse, B rjvcu KeI0ev [= Arefre], odev 7 rep 77 kcl, to return thither, whence he came, Soph. 0. C. 1227. Kat dAXocre [ = aAAaxov], ottol clv drpLKrj, dya-rri]- aovai ere PI. Crito 45 b. 555. 3.) Condensation. The two clauses may he condensed into one by the omission of a substantive verb either (a) from the antecedent clause or (/3) from the relative clause. (a) From tiie antecedent clause, a. After a demonstrative pro¬ noun or article, the relative is also omitted, and the antecedent takes its place in the construction. This form of condensation is particularly frequent in questions, exclamations, and denials, especially with the poets : Tt rob' avbas [= Tt ean robe, 0 cAoas] ; what is this, which you say l Eur. Ale. 106. Tt tovt dpxaiov ivveirets kukjv ; what is this old evil of which you speak ? Soph. 0. T. 1033. Oiav exdvav ryvo tepueras ! what a viper is this, which thou hast produced ! Eur. Ion 1262. Tovro gev ovbev Gavgaarov Xeyeis PI. Prot. 318 b. KaXov y£ got Tovveibos e£wveibiaas, the reproach which you have cast upon me is an honor, Eur. Iph. A. 305. Quis ille sprevisset, who he was that had despised, Tac. b. An exclamation without a verb and a relative clause may be united in like manner : Tovs egos l’be Traryp 0avaTOvs ai.K€ls [ = ”11 G6.vo.to'. aweis, ovs toe 7 T 0 . 7 - 77/5 egos] ! the cruel death my father saw ! Soph. El. 205. e. Expressions like the following are still more elliptical : "EvGa q Tpi- -rrupyta [= earl x w P L0V i & T.] /taXetrat, where there is a place, which is called Tripyrgia,, Hel. 5. 1. 10. ’Ev crol dvSpt [ = avbpi roiovrip, olos av et], obliging a man 344 SYNTAX. -RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 55G. such as you arc fa such as you man], Mem. 2. 9. 3. 01 8b oloC ir€p t>ji€ts dvSpes, but [the such as you men] men like you, Cyr. 6. 2. 2 (cf. Toes olo «* oSros dvdpdnrovs Dem. 421. 16). ’’Ovtos tov irayov ot'ov SeivOTcrrou [ = Toa ovtov, olLs can LeivjTdTos), the cold being [such as is most dreadful] of the most intense kind, PL Conv. 220 b. Maxcupiou ocrov £vT)X.qv [= ToaovTov, buy hurl IjvyXy], a knife as large as a dagger, iv. 7. 16. Elkos av8pa Kvcpov, rjXiKOV 0 oi>kv8lSt]v [ = ryXucovTOv, tjXlkos 0. IotIv], c^oXeadai, ‘ a man as old as T.,’ Ar. Acli. 703. Aeivov toutiv fjA.tKot.a-i vwv Id. Eccl. 465. So Toe TrepiTTov bvros oe% ou-rrep rfjs TpiaSos PI. Phaedo 104 a. — But if a sub¬ stantive following otos as above is in a different number, it remains in the Nominative: capias 5’ otoes [ = tolovtovs, otos] evda], to the region where , as far as, i. 7. 6 . ’E£ orou (ou, ou re), ex quo, since, vii. 8 . 4. ’A vd &v, Owe ica, 0 dovvesa (126 8), [for this that] because, Soph. Ant. 1068, Fh. 585, Aj. 123. T Ht, in this respect that, Mem. 2. 1. 18. llpoeXdovres 8 o-ov ctu 8 okt) Kcupos elvai, advancing [so far that] until it may seem to be time, vi. 3. 14. a. The Attic poets sometimes use oiiveKa, and Hdt. pe'xpi oii (otov), as compound adverbs governing the Gen.: Twaucbs ovvexa, for the sake of a woman, yEsch. Ag. 823. Mevpt brev nXydil>pys dyopys, until the time of fall market, Hdt. 2. 173. 558. |3.) When the definitive belongs to the second clause: Tts ovrw yaiverai, 6cnris [= ware eseivos] ou (3ovXerai col dv esovres eirwvrai, I think it a great proof of the excellence of a leader , if men follow him willingly, GEc. 4. 19. a. Akin to this construction is the extensive use of the relative in ex¬ planation, or the assignment of reason or purpose : Qauyaarov it 0 cels, os . . blows, you act strangely, [who give] that you give, or in giving (qui des), Mem. 2. 7. 13. "07rAa nrwvrai, ols ayvvovvrai rods aSiKovvras, they prepare arms, [with which they will repel] that with these they may repel assailants, lb. 1.14. Kcu TrjXec ireyfov riv, octtls ayyavel, send some one to the city, to give notice, Eur. Iph. T. 1208. "AyyeXov Ijicav, os ayyelXeie yuvaist, they sent a messenger to tell the woman (qui nunciaret), 0 . 458. Equitatum praemittit, qui videant, Cces. b. Relative adverbs likewise exhibit this form of attraction : Eu<5cu- Plwv . . cos [ — on ovrws] dSdbs sal yevvaiws ereXevra, happy that he died so fearlessly and nobly, PI. Phiedo 58 c. 559. 5.) This attraction so unites some words, that the combinations are treated as complex pronouns or adverbs (see 556): a.) "Eo-ti with a relative, the verb remaining unchanged, whatever might be its appropriate number, tense, or mode : banv 01 (at, d, &v, oh, ah, oils, as * in questions oinves ; &c.), sunt qui, [there are who] some; earns ore or bad’ ore, est quando, [there is when] sometimes, ii. 6 . 9 ; eanv bvda, est ubi, in some places, Cyr. 7. 4. 15 ; banv birov (ws, oirws, rj, odev, &.C.). IIpoi)/3dAAovro irpeafieis irpwrov yev Xeiplaocpov . ., e’ “The vote concerning ns.” “ [ Which will decide what t\ And what will this decide ? ” Eur. Or. 756. K ariaov . . c pvXaKovs, ot Xeybvrcov, station guards, and let them say, Hdt. 1. 89. Compare the far greater frequency with which qui is so used in Latin. (c) 'Ftijeraaai . . ’Odvaaea, rj 'Ziavipov, rj aXXovs pvpiovs av tls ehroi, to ex¬ amine Ulysses, or Sisyphus, or [one might mention ten thousand others] ten thousand others whom one might mention, PI. Apol. 41 b. (d) K vpov be per air eprrerai diro rys apxys, clvtov aarpa irrjv eirohjae, sal arpaTTjybv bb avrbv anrebate i. 1. 2. This construction is adopted chiefly to avoid the repetition of the relative, in accordance with the following special rule. 562. Rule K. T1 ie repetition of the. relative is commonly avoided, either by ellipsis, or by the substitution of a personal pronoun or of a demonstrative : as, COMPLEMENTARY AND INTERROGATIVE. 347 5 r >64. ’A pialos 8t, ov fads yOeXopeeu (3a5’ ecpLXovu avrovs Deni. 35. 3. Adv. "EvOa (3a what have you in mind l a. In other languages, as the bat., with those derived from it, and the Eng., the complementary use of the simple relatives has prevailed ; and 348 SYNTAX.-PRONOUNS. § 5G4. lienee, in these languages, the general identity of the relatives and the inter- rogatives. Thus, qui, quando, ubi, unde, who, which, when, where, kc., are both relative and interrogative. b. In direct question, the Greek employs only one of the two shorter forms above mentioned, but in exclamation it employs both : Oiyoi, ira- t 6o, tl eliras! old y e’lpyacrai! 0 my father, what have you said ! how you treat me! Soph. Tr. 1203. Ilotov Genres! (3. 85. 'Ocrc. irpayyara e'xeis/ how much trouble you have ! Cyr. 1. 3. 4. c. The neuter rC unites with several 'particles to form elliptical ques¬ tions ; which, with various specific offices, serve in general to promote the vigor and vivacity of the discourse, commonly introducing other questions: Tl yap [sc. eoTiv, or AeyereJ; . . eyiroSJjv eiyi ; What, indeed ? Am I in the way ? v. 7. 10. Tt ovv; What then? v. 8. 11. Tt' 81; Tl by; Tl Syra; Tl Sal; Tt yyv; Xen. Of. Quid enim ? Quid ergo ? Quid vero ? d. A complementary PRONOUN or adverb, used as an echo to an in¬ terrogative, has, for distinction’s sake, its full form : Tls yap el; [sc. ’E pw- rasJ' Oo-Tis; IIoAtr-ps xpparos. “ Who are you ?” “[Do you ask] who ? A good citizen.” Ar. Acli. 594. 0 utos, ti iroiels; ' O xi ttollo ; “Ho ! what are you doing?” “What am I doing?” Id. Ean. 198. IIcos hr raura y eri lyxwpolyev ; ' Ottcos; PI. Leg. 662 a. 565. 3. Condensation, a. Expressions like OavyaoTov icr tlv boos (ocron, co?, &c.), it is wonderful how much, ctx., may be condensed into complex adjectives or adverbs : Oavyaoros ooos, OavyaoTOv boov , Oavyaoroos bos, Ac. (cf. 555 , 559 ): ©avp.acrT''|v oerqv ire pi ere irpoOvylav 8x €L , it is wonderful how much re¬ gard he Juts for you (mirum quantum studium), PI. Ale. 151 a. Merd IdpuTOS 0av}ia(rro9 ocrov Id. Hep. 350 d. 0avp.ao-Tcos cos eireicrOyv, I was wonderfully convinced, Id. PI undo 92 a. ’Afxqxavov 8crov xpbrov, an w>~ conceivably long time, lb. 80 c. ’Ajxqx.a.vov tl olov Id. Charm. 155 c. 'Yirep^vcos ds %cupw Id. Conv. 173 c. lmmane quantum discrepat, Hor. b. A complementary word may take the place of a connective particle and a demonstrative (cf. 558) : KaTOLKTelpcov ryv re yvvaisa, olov dvSpos [ = ort toiovtov avdpos] arepolro, commiserating the wife [what a husband she had lost] that she had lost such a husband, Cyr. 7. 3. 13. 566. The Greek idiom (a) admits a greater freedom than the English, in the construction and position of both interroga¬ tive and complementary words, especially in connecting them with dependent words and clauses ; and even (b) allows the use of more than one in the same clause : (a) Ti . . tooju iroLOvvra, radra KareyvcoKcts avrou; [having seen him do¬ ing what, do you] what have you seen him do, that you tints judge of him! Mem. 1. 3. 10. "Orav ri irocycrwai, voyLeis avrovs oov (ppovrifeev; [when they have done what, will you think] what must they do, before you will think that they care for you, lb. 4. 14. Iva xl [sc. yevyrai) raura \tyeu ; [that what may be] with what intent, or why, do you say this ? Id. Apol. 26d (so ws tl;) "On 8 7 tC ye [sc. Zotlv]; [because there is what ?] why so ? PI. Charm. 161 e. Elr’ iXavvoyevcov, sal v[3pLfoy£vinv, sal ri kclkov ov\l iraoxovTWv, ircLaa y OLKOvyevy yeerry ylyove irpoSorCov, ‘ what evil not suffer¬ ing?’ i. e. ‘suffering every evil,’ Item. 241. 28. Oi) oieXoyioavTo virtp ola ireri'oiy kotlov dvOpu)ircov Kivdvvevcrovoi Id. 259. 1. "H Slot cLv aKOuaaiyi ovo- ya, ris oi’Ttos carl Sclvus Xtyeiv ii. 5. 15. Cf. 561 a. § 567 . "A A AOS AND r/ ETEP02. 349 (b) Ti's tlvos clltl'js iari, yev-qaerac tpaeepjp, it will become evident who is guilty (and) of what, Dera. 249. 8. Tts -roOev els; who are you (and) whence l a. 170. Xlortpos dpa -irorepov at/xd£et ; which will slay [which | the other t Eur. Ph. 12S8. Aevcraere, . . oia irpos o'ioiv ap 8 pu>p ndaxoi, what I suffer from what men, Soph. Amt 940. G. "AAA02 and "ETEP02. 567. These pronouns are not only used retrospectively , but also prospectively and distributively : that is, they may denote, not only a different person or thing from one which has been mentioned, but also, from one which is to be mentioned ; or they may, in general, denote a difference among the several individuals or parties which compose the whole number spoken of; but erepos commonly with reference to two objects or sets of objects only. Compare alius and alter. For modes of translation, sec the following examples of aXXos, e-repos, and their derivatives, as used, (a) Retrospectively. T navbv epyov ivl e\feiv Kpea, dXXo) oittolp, dXXu> de 1x0 vp efeiv, dXXw oittolp, it is work enough for one man to boil meat, for another to roast it, Ac., Cyr. 8. 2. 6. Met- vavTes Se Tcuirrjv Tyv yyepav, rrj dXXr] eiropevoPTO, ‘ Oil the next,” iii. 4. 1 (so t\ j €T€pa Cyr. 4. G. 10). (h) Prospectively. dXXois re bnreucri 7 rpos toIs eavTuy, with other cavalry besides their own, Mag. E, iracrxw, elp.C, or -yi-yvopai • Tt aXXo oSrot [sc. eTroiycrae] r) eTre(3ou\evoap; what else have they done but plot against its ? Th. 3. 39. Ou5ie dWo 7) . . edearo, he did nothing but gaze, Cyr. 1. 4. 24. E l . . yySep dWo ■r) yeTepeynois lb. 6. 39. "O 7 rcos air by polo 77 too &\\o tl [sc. irpdcnjeip] 7) Kpaieip, that there might be no hope of anything but conquering, Th. 3. 85. g. Hence the phrase of confident interrogation, dXXo tl [sc. ? opas, tu vides, ii. 1. 12. ’ll 7). 'T7 ro^vyia vepoiVTO ii. 2. 15 ( T. eXavvero iv. 7. 24). Ta reXy . . €^eTr€fu|/av, the magistrates sent forth, Tli. 4. 88 (T. inreax eT0 L 58). <&avepa fj (cf. the use of il cst and il y a in Fr., and of it is in Fug.). AGREEMENT. ELLIPSIS. 351 S 571. "Ectti 8 e in to. araSioL ’A(3u5ov is ryv an avriov, it is seven stadia from Abydos to the opposite shore, Hdt. 7. 34. ’ Ectti . . apxovres re sal dr/pos ; are there both rulers and people ? I'l. Rep. 462 e. rvyvrjTcu . . dpxai re sal yapoL lb. 363 a. *Hv 5’ appiirAesroi KALpases Soph. Tr. 520. "Ectti toutoj SittCj tuj piio (of. 569 c) PI. Gorg. 500 d. See 559 a. a. A few other examples of the Nom. pi. masc. or fern, with a verb in the sing, occur in the poets : "T pvoi . . re\Aerai, hymns become, Find. 01. 11. 4. Kopai KarevyvoOev Horn. Cer. 280. 571. Ell ipsis, &c. 1. The subject of the verb is com¬ monly omitted, (a) if it is sufficiently indicated by the affix of the verh with the context , and is without emphasis ; or (b), if it is a pronoun of the third person, referring to an agent implied in the verb itself, or (c) to persons in general, or (d) vaguely to some power, thing, or condition of things. In the last case, the verb is commonly termed impersonal. Thus, (a) ’Eirti 8e yaOivei A apeios . ., € ( 8o6\€to, when Darius was sick, he wished, i. 1. 1. M ij 0av|xa^€Te, on x^Aenins spco i. 3. 3. See 536. (b) ’E-ret tcraX-my^e [sc. 6 adAmyKrys], [when the trumpeter blew] at the sound of the trumpet, i. 2. 17 (c-f. iv. 3. 32). 'Extipo^e to?s "EAAym [sc. 6 KYjpv^], proclamation was made to the Greeks, iii. 4. 36. Toe vbpov vpiv avrbv dva-yvdcreTCH [sc. 6 ypapparevsj, the clerk shall read to you the law itself, Dem. 465. 14. Olvoxoeuci. [sc. 6 oivoxbos ] . 142. (c) Ae-youa-cv, cjjac tlv, dicunt, aiunt, they (men, people) say. Touroz' nadelv ^cj>acrav (cf. T otevdrjvaL res eAiyero) i. 8. 20. ' 07rep Trctcrxovcriv iv rols peyaAois ay urn, as men are affected in great crises, Th. 7. 69. OuVe dpa avradiKelv del, . . bnodv -Trao-xr), it is not right, then, for one to return an injury, whatever he may suffer, PL Crito 49 c. (d) "Yet, vitrei, pluit, ningit, it rains, it snows. ’E-ret cruvea-KOTacre, when it grew dark, Cyr. 4. 5. 5, 'Ope fjv, it was late, ii. 2. 16. Th t'oixev, ut videtur, as it seems, vi. 1. 30. Maxys 8st, there is need of a battle, ii. 3. 5 (see 473 b). MtXet poi tovtwv, [there is to me a care] I take care of these, (Ec. 11. 9 (432 d, 457). MeTajxeXet poi, me pcenitet, I repent, Cyr. 5. 3. 6. KaAws ^crTat vii. 3. 43. ’ESrjXcocre Si Mem. 1. 2. 32. e. An impersonal verb, from its very nature, is in the 3 d pers. sing.; and an adjective joined with it is in the neat, sing., or in the neat. plur. for the sing. (489 d, 491c.) As it expresses an action or state without predicating it of any particular person or thing, its force may be commonly expressed by a kindred noun with a substantive (or other appropriate) verb: Aei[= xpeta iariv] Aoywv, opus est verbis, there is need of words, Cyr. 6. 1. 7. JlapeaKevaoTo, preparation had been made, Th. 4. 67. The opera¬ tions of nature commonly expressed impersonally are sometimes referred, especially by the poets, to a personal agent : "Tec crv, clkos, Oepis, Kcupos, copa, drjXos, eroipos, npodvpos, (fipov- bos, bvvaros, oios re, paStoy, ^aXeTro's': ToDro ov TTOLTjTeov [sc. eTj is often separated from its subject by some of the words quoted ; and is often thrown in pleonastieally: “ED Xeyeis,” eepy, “ <3 2i/x/x'ci,” 6 K t(3ys, 11 You speak well, S.," said C., PI. Plnedo 77 c. ' AiroKpiveraL 6 Heipiaocpos • “ BXei pov,” ey, “ irpos tcl 6py,” C. answers : “Look,” said he, “to the mountains,” iv. 1 . 20. See v. 1. 2 ; vi. 1. 31. II. USE OF TPIE VOICES. (For a general view, see 30, 266.) 575 . Rule M. The uses of the voices are sometimes interchanged. 1. A transition of meaning sometimes gives to one voice the force of another voice of a different verb. Thus we find, a. ) The active for the passive: ED to hear agreeably, and hence, from the bewitching sweetness of praise, to be spoken well of: eD dsobeu/ v-rro . . . avdpuirur, to be praised by men (bene audire), vii. 7 . 23. K ukus aKovcras, male audiens, spoken ill of, Symp. 4. 64. KXveiv dvaXms, to be called a coward, zEsch. Pr. 868 . ’AireGayev bird tK&pdpov, he [died] was killed by N., v. 1 . 15. Gurus eaXw, it was thus taken, iii. 4 . 12 . See tcrelvu, alplu, 50. ’EKTn'irreiv e/c UyXoirovvycrov bird to [fall out] be driven out of P. by the Medes, Hdt. 8 . 141. 5 , Evyov . . otto too Sypov, they [fled] were banished by the people, Id. 5. 30. ’ Acre [deias tf>evyovTa (431 c). Karao-rds bf bpuv, appointed by you, Dem. 49. 11. b. ) The middle for the active: Kotttu smite, KowTop-ai smite one’s self through grief hence bewail : Koirread’ ”A8 uvlv Ar. Lys. 396. Ttvu pay, Tivopai take payment, punish : r La an Oat aXdryv F. 28. See 579 s. c. ) I he middle for XXwpassive: ’AtuoXovto vttj re tlov iroXeylup, they [perished] were destroyed by the enemy, v. 3 . 3 . ’Akovctoixcu KctKos, I shall be called vile. Soph. O. C. 988 (cf. a). d. ) The passive for the middle: ’EKTrXayacrd ere, [struck out of my wits by fear] fearing you, Soph. El. 1045. "O fiu a.rv\Qds, alarmed at the sight, Z. 468. 576 . 3. As the middle and passive had at first the same form throughout, and were afterwards separated in the Aor. 11EV. Gil. w 354 SYNTAX. 11. M. VOICES. § 570. and Fut. only (scarcely in the latter till after the age of Homer), it was but natural that the earlier freedom of use should some¬ times prevail, especially in poetry, over the later distinction (266 b, 274). This occurs chiefly in the use of a shorter for a longer form ; viz. a. ) In the use of the Future middle for the Future passive (oftener in pares than in mates, rarely in the contract Fat., 305) : Oi 8e ayaOol Tip.r|crovTCH, the good will be honored, Th. 2. 87 ( TLpLydyaovraL 6. 80). 4*t- At[G-€cu, you will be kindly received, a. 123. Elp^opeGa, we shall be ex¬ cluded, vi. G. 1G. 'Ttto ruiv hnrecov ov pXdi}/ovTai, ‘will not he harmed,’ Th. 6. 64. ’QveiSieurGe, you will be taunted, Soph. 0. T. 1500. Mcuj-ti- *yaKT€TCU, (TTpejlAwcreTCH, deSyaercu, eKKavdyaeTca TuflOaXpun PI. Rep. 361 e. — Not in verbs in which the Fut. mid. supplies the place of the Fut. active. b. ) In the use of the Aorist passive for the Aorist middle. This occurs chiefly in deponents (266 c), and in other verbs in which the proper passive is wanting or rare : as (M. marking verbs which have also an Aor. mid., less common or differing in sense), (a) Deponents Passive, d-yapcu m. (yydcrOy re avrov, he admired him, i. 1. 9, tov S’ 6 yepwv yya.aaa.To, him the old man admired, F. 181), fovAopat will, Siivapai m. be able, emcn-c.- pai understand, ol'opai m. think; (|3) Other Verbs, Sew (beyOyvai . . Kd- pov, to have requested C., i. 2. 14), peuvw M. madden, aivw m. show (40). See 50. c. A few verbs belonging under b, extend the middle force to a Fut. pass.: SiaXeycpcH (biaXe^oyaL Isoc. 233 c, SiaXexdyaoyaL Id. 195 c, I will discourse), dyOopai M., t|8w M. (O vk axOeadyar] poi; . . 'Vadyaopai. “ Will you not be displeased with me ?” “I shall be pleased.” Cyr. 8. 4. 10 s.), alSeopai M. respect, Siavoeojiai M. purpose, empeXopai M. care for, 2papcu m. love (no Fut. mid.). d. The use of the Aor. mid. as passive (except through simple transi¬ tion of meaning, 575 c) is rare. It scarcely occurs, except in the 2 Aor. (originally the Impf. mid. and pass., 273 d) : Aovpi rvirels y pXppevos lq>, struck by a spear or shot by an arrow, A. 191. KaTeo-yero epun, was smitten with love, Eur. Hipp. 27. Krapevoio, slain, X. 75. A. Active. 577. In many verbs, the active voice is both transitive, and intransitive or reflexive, in its use ; or both causative and immediate, (a) In some, the double use belongs to the same tenses ; but (b) in others, to different tenses, the intransitive sense falling especially to the complete tenses and 2 Aor. (c) In some verbs, the intransitive or reflexive use may he explained through the ellipsis of a noun or pronoun (476. 2). Thus, (a) XTpeifmvTfs to ayyya, turning the corps, Lac. 11. 9. STpevJmvres evyov, turning they fled, iv. 3. 32 (of. crrpa^eVres t ovv], to give attention, Mem. 4. 5. 6. BdXX’ is KopaKas! [throw yourself to the crows] go to the dogs! Ar. PI. 782 (Pasces corvos, Hor.). ’ESrjXoxre, showed itself, ii. 2. 18. See 476. 2. d. ’'Eyo used reflexively with an adverb is commonly equivalent to tipi with an adjective: ’Aduyus eycvTes — " Advyot ovres, being disheartened, iii. 1. 3. EiWncws exoiev = Ewoi/coi etyaav i. 1. 5. The poets even join ex w with an adjective : ’'Ex’ yavxos, [hold still] be quiet, Eur. Med. 550. e. In a division of uses, the stronger transitive sense naturally fell to the strengthened stem (346), leaving the intransitive to the imperfect of the old stem, i. e. the 2 Aor. (273 d). The complete tenses were also more inclined than the rest to an intransitive use (often preteritive), be¬ cause the state consequent upon the completion of an action is more promi¬ nent and durable in an intransitive than in a transitive subject. This appears especially in the older 2 Perfect. Cf. 320 g. B. Middle. 578 . The middle voice, like the active, may be either tran¬ sitive or intransitive. Its reflexive sense is far from being uni- form either in kind or force. It not only varies in different verbs, but often in the same verb when used in different con¬ nections ; and is extensively not expressed in translation, but left to be understood. It is, a.) Direct ; so that the middle is equivalent to the active with the Acc. of a reflexive pronoun : Aovtcu [ = Xovei iavrou], lavatur, he is wash¬ ing himself, or bathing, Cyr. 1. 3. 11. liavres yev qXeicfovTO, they all anointed themselves, Hel. 4. 5. 4. ’Eirufepopevqv, bearing herself on, i. e. rushing on, i. 9. 6. T 0>v abiiaov a/rrexopevos, refraining [holding himself] from injustice, Mem. 4. 8. 4. Avoprjv, uireXua-a 8’ eraipovs, I loosed myself, then loosed ray comrades, i. 463. 579 . b.) Indirect ; so that the middle is equivalent to the active with the Dat. or Gen. of a reflexive pronoun: 'ZrpaTyyovs ykv IXetrG&i [= eXeir iavTois] dXXovs, ra 8' eTurySeia cLyopd£€cr8cu, to [take for them¬ selves] choose other generals, and buy (for themselves) provisions, i. 3. 14. Ilcucia . . ere iroioupcu, I make you my son, Cyr. 4. 6. 2. "Oxi irepi irXei- arov ttoiolto, that he [made it to himself] esteemed it of the utmost con¬ sequence (582 y), i. 9. 7. Tpiryu ecrqydyeTO ywoLixa . . ryv Sevrepyv diro- TT€|Ji\J/d[i€vc$, Ice took to himself a third wife, having [sent from himself] divorced the second, Hdt. 6. 63. Kvpou 8 t perairepx-erai, he sends for Cyrus (to come to himself), i. 1. 2. ToDxoi' uXdxTe(r0ai, to watch him for your own safety, to be on your guard against him, i. 6. 9. ’A-rro- SYNTAX.-VOICES. § 579. 356 <|>rjvai yvJjyyv, express your opinion, i. 6. 9. 2-Tracrdp.evov tov aKivdKyv, drawing his scymitar, i. 8. 29. ©e'trGai ra orrXa i. 6. 4. d?€povTai 8e OLKoOev . . Kcudivva, ws curb tov i rorayov apfio-acrGai, Cyr. 1. 2. 8. ’AirodL- doycu [give up for one’s own profit], sell; raura aTro86p.€vos, oflre ’Zevdy ajreSwKev oure pylv rd yiyvbyeva, having sold these things, he has neither paid over the proceeds to S., nor to us, vii. 6. 41. Avop.ai, loose for one's self, ransom; rid-ryu or ypaopai [have the name of one taken down as a criminal] accuse: oi ypajayevoL 'LwKpdryv Mem. 1. 1. 1. Ilpe- (jffivu) go as an ambassador, TTpeo-(3evopai send an ambassador. Mio(3eo) frighten, 4>o(3e- o\uxi fear: iroXeyiovs (poj3?)crai iv. 5. 17 ; e(poj3ovvro avrov i. 9. 9. Aiax^ v(j0 put to shame, alcr^dvopai be ashamed ; itrryyt make to stand, ia'vo|j.ai appear. (y) *0 pifa bound, opt^ojxat define : noraybr, . . 8s cpL^ei rff ’A pyeviav iv. 3. 1 ; rgv ybovqv ay ad or opffbyevoi, defining pleasure as a good, PI. Rep. 505 c. Esonew view, o-KOTreopai consider (see v. 2. 20) ; aydXAw adorn, dyd.AXop.cu pride one's scl ; (ppd^w tell, <{>pdYop.cu tell one's self, reflect. (8) lloXiredw, raputvw, be a citizen {steward), 7roXiTed:sp.ai, rap-tuopai, act the citizen {steioard), manage state (or other) affairs: noXirevovra nap aurois, being a citizen among them, Hel. 1 . 5. 19 ; ol pier noXirevoyeroi . . uopiovs ridevraL, those loho administer the state make laws, Diem. 2. 1. 14 ; rapuebecrdai, to parcel out (as a stew¬ ard), ii. 5. 18. 583. Remarks. 1. If the reflex action is direct, it is oftener ex¬ pressed by a reflexive pronoun with the active, or sometimes middle ; and in other cases, the pronoun is often added to make the expression more plain or emphatic : 'Etceivos dneaepaffr iavror, he slew himself, Dem. 127. 3. 'Eavrov emacpa^acrdai, that he slew himself, i. 8. 29. 'En La (paXecrrepav av- tt]v . . rareanevaKcv eavrip, he has rendered it less secure for himself, Dem. 22. 13. 'E avrip 6voya nepinoirjaaadai, to win a name for himself, v. 6. 17. AieXeyovro re iavrols, they talked to themselves, v. 4. 34. 'Enedei^avro db ras aurwv aperds Isoc. 58 a. ^iereneyneTO rov Uvevveaiv npos eavrov i. 2. 26 (cf. 579). Evveybvovro dXXijXois, they met each other, lb. 27. See 537. 584. 2. As the Future so extensively denotes purpose (what a per¬ son will please himself by doing), it is the most subjective of the tenses ; and hence, in so many verbs (266 c), the middle here takes the place of the active, (a) In some of these, the Fut. act. is not used at all; and (b) in others, only as a second, usually later or less common, form. (c) In some, the action of the body is thus connected with the state of the mind. E. g. (a) yiyvwasw and oTda know, yavdavw learn, eiai be, nd- ayw suffer, dvqanw die, Xayydvw and rvyxdvw obtain ; (b) /3t ow live, nvcw breathe, ayaprdvw err, below fear, rXdw endure, davyd'gw wonder, pew flow, t'iktw bear ; (c) asouw hear, opdw see, gbw sing, /3 odw shout, yeXdw laugh, yodw wail, sXalw weep, Syvvpu swear, eadiw and rpwyw eat, nivw drink, sa,avw labor, naifa play, (3aIvw and /3 Xwctkw go, vew swim, didpaasw, dew, and rpe\w, run, (pevyw flee, biwuw pursue, dpwasw leap, diyydvw touch, dpnd^w seize, Xayfidvw take. See 50. 585. 3. In many cases, the reflex reference is so obvious, or so in¬ distinct, that it may be either expressed or omitted without affecting the sense ; that is, the active or the middle may be employed at pleasure : lloAi) 4>epovTes, XliKpbi' 4>€po[i€VGJV, bringing much {little), Mem. 3. 14. 1. IIa0Xay6ras pyaxovs Troit|cr€(r9£ • . . cpLXov Troitjo-ofiev rov TlacpXayova • you will make the Paphlagonians allies ; we will make the Paphlagonian a friend ; v. 5. 22 (cf. Ib. 12). ’Hyopa^ov ra emrybe la i. 5. 10 (cf. 579). ’Ecrayaye ywalsa, ’Ecrr^ydycTO yvvaiKa, take {took) a wife, H,dt. 5. 40, 6. 63. — In some verbs, the use of the mid. form is poetic, especially Epic. 4. It follows naturally from the distinction between the two voices, that the middle is more inclined to take its object in an indirect case than the active: ’EXoidopow avrbv, Avrip eXoidopelro, reproved him, Cyr. 1. 4. 8s. 5. In the middle, as in the active (577 e), the 2 Aor. is less transitive in its use than the 1 Aor.: 'Erpeipavro robs . . inn las, they put the cavalry to flight, Th. 6. 98. ’Es cpvyff irpdnovro, they turned to flight, Id. 5. 73. 6. The active and middle may be often translated by the same Eng. word differently used : evwxet- feed, feast (trans.), evwxou (intrans.f, Cyr. 5. 5. 42, 1. 3. 6. So tndyw hasten , rrpaw melt, &c. See yaybw marry, 50. 358 SYNTAX. ■— TASSIVE VOICE. § 58G. C. Passive. 586. The passive voice has for its subject a complement of the active , commonly (a) a direct, but sometimes (b) an in- direct complement. (c) Any other word governed by the active, and not in apposition with this, may remain unchanged with the passive, (d) The subject of the active is expressed, with the passive, by the Gen. with a preposition (commonly vno, but sometimes ano, e£, napd, or 7 rpos), or (e), less frequently, by the simple Gen. or Bat., or (f) yet more rarely (chiefly in poetry, especially Ep.), by the Bat. with vno. Thus, (a) Act. governing ACC. II epieppeiro o’ avry inro rov Mctcr/ca, it was surrounded by the Mascas [= nepUppei <5’ avTtjv 6 M danas, the M. sur- ronnded it], i. 5. 4. (b) Act. governing Gen. Earev, to be led by us (407), Th. 3. 61. ’Epcpo vi t dvdptlnrwv, you would be loved by men (432 e), Hier. 11. 11. Act. governing DAT. 0 vkctl be aneiXovgcu, aXX ijby dneiXib dXXois, I am no longer threatened, but I now threaten others (452 a), Symp. 4. 31. Ei- kotojs noXepovvTctL, they are justly attached (455), Th. 1. 37. Oi jk av 9av- pafoio (472e), aXXa pOovoio (Dat.), . . icarayeX^o (Gen.), you would not be admired, but envied, ridiculed, Hier. 11. 6. (c) 'IirTTgcov 6 \o’ exdarcov eXeyovro, opinions were expressed [from] by each, Th. 3. 36. ’Ek fdaatXecos bebopevcu, given [from] by the king, i. 1. 6. Ilapd, 7 rdvrivv bp.oXoye'iTcu, 'OpoXoyeiTcu irpos 7 rdvrwv, it is conceded by all, i. 9. 1, 20. (e) See 434 b, 461. (f) 'Tiro toj TraTpl Tedpa.pp.ivos, brought up [under] by his father, PI. Rep. 558 d. ’EcpifSyOev v v KtcpaXCbv, their heads being cut off,] ii. 6. 1 (cf. K vpov dnoTepvercu y KepaXy i. 10. 1). Td bora tct pviryplvov, having his ears bored , iii. 1. 31. § 591. RULE XXX. - USE OF THE TENSES. 359 588 . 3. The passive is sometimes the converse of the middle, rather than of the active; and hence deponents may have a passive: MurGcoGrjvcu bk ovk €ttI tovtuj bcpaaau, ‘that they had not been hired,’ i. 3. 1 (581). OupaKas eu tlpyacrjitvas, corselets well made, Mem. 3. 10. 9 (cf. dub p Lauras /caXws dpyaapeuou, ‘having made,’ lb. 2. 6. 6). ’EpyacrBrjcreTCH, it shall be performed, Soph. Tr. 1218. ’EwvfjBr) be bpia, and wool was bought, Mem. 2. 7. 12. To 6 ea6eu Th. 3. 38. Bia£dp.svGi viro tlvwv, compelled by some, Th. 1. 2. —This passive occurs cliieiiy in the complete tenses (often in the Perf. part.) ; and in the Aor. (especially when the Aor. mid. is also in use). 589 . 4. If an active or middle which has no complement is changed to a passive, it becomes, of course, impersonal (571 d); and it may be¬ come so, with an indirect complement: ' YirrjpKTo 5’ avrov, a beginning of it had been made [= virrjp^au avrov, they had begun it], Th. 1. 93. Ila- pecrK€vav . ., cyoiv, having taken (momentary), having (continued), i. 1. 2. ’E^et be ciScv avrev, oerrep npoadev irpocreKV- vow, /cat Tore 'rrpco€Kvvrjo-av, when those saiv him who previously used to boiv before him (habit), they bowed even then (single act), i. 6. 10. "Ocrrts 8 ’ diKV€LTO, . . o/n-t'irtpireTo, whoever came (from time to time), he sent away (course of conduct), i. 1. 5. ’E7retc>a/' curavra ccKovayre, Kpivarc, /cat py irporepov TpoXapPdveTe, when you have heard all, judge, and do not be previously anticipating, Dem. 44. 2. AiaXtyov /cat p.u0e iv. 8. 5. a. Any dwelling of the mind upon the agent, mode, or circumstances of an action, or any attempt at graphic description, inclines to the use of the definite tenses : ’ ArreicpLvavTo (KAeapyos 5 t-Xeyev), they answered ( and Cle- archus was the speaker ), ii. 3. 21. VpxycravTo abv rots ottXols, /cat t^XXovto v'pyXd re /cat Koupcos, ko.1 tolls paxatpeus eypdvxo, they danced in armor, they leaped high and lightly, and flourished their swords, vi. 1. 5. Ob¬ serve their use in the description of character, i. 9. 2 s, ii. 6. 2 s.. b. In the Imperative, the momentary character of the Aor. is peculi¬ arly favorable to vivacity, energy, anti earnestness of expression : Akov- craT€ obv pov npos deuiv, hear me, then, by the gods ! v. /. 5. BX€\|/ov vpos ret opy, look at the mountains, iv. 1. 20. c. The Aor. sometimes gives more vivacity or force to the sequel of an¬ other tense : 'Os re /cat dXicipov dvbpa (po/3ei /cat ac^eiXeTO v’ucyv, who puts to flight the valiant man, and snatches victory from his grasp, P. 177. AiacpOdpeL re iroXXa /cat t)8lkt]o-€v, they work much corruption and harm, PI. Conv. 188 b. IlpocpSoAas y&rperrtkovTO, /cat ctXXws cvSieTpixJ/av XP^ov, they were preparing assaults, and otherwise consumed time, Th. 2. 18. See 605 b. d. In verbs denoting state, the Aor. usually expresses entrance into the state (becoming), and the definite tenses continuance in it (being) : BavXdTT€iv . . tens av avros Xa{3y • him he commanded to guard for him the woman ; to guard her, till he should himself take her ; Cyr. 5. 1. 2 s. 594. 3.) By the definite tenses, as begun, attempted, designed, or imminent (doing, not done) ; but by the Aorist, as accomplished (done): KXeap%os tovs aurov orpaTiwTas eJ3id^ero Uvat • ol de avrov re £|3aXXov. . . M nepov i£epa 8tSa>a-t, he (is for giving) offers gifts, I. 201. *£ 2 v€ 0 |i£voio"L 2 Swk€ dwrtvyv, when they proposed to buy, he gave to them freely, Hilt. 1. 69. ’EKouvopqv £t0et, aXX’ c^eKXej/ev, I was on the point of being slain by the sword, but she (Diana) stole me away, Ear. Iph. T. 26. *'0 iroiets, irovqo-ov Tafflor, what thou art doing [going to do], do at once, Jn. 13. 27 (Fac, si quid facis, Sen.). a. Hence the definite tenses are often used with a negative to deny the attempt as well as the accomplishment of an action : K Xeapxos ovk avepC Pa£tv i-rri tov Xixpov, C. did not undertake to march upon the hill, i. 10. 14. O vdev dxpiXipov kXeyev . ., 6 de Xolttos IXeffv, he would say nothing useful, but the other said, iv. 1. 23. ’E7rei de ovdels dvre'Xeyev, ehrev, iii. 2. 38. b. A person is often spoken of as having done what he has attempted to do: “ Almia yap rovd' evrvxciv KidvavTa pe “KTeivavTa; Aeivov y' etnas, el nal ffis davovv." “Geos yap eKaw^ei pe, rutde d' oixopai." “Is it right that he should prosper, having slain me?” “ Having slain you? You tell a marvel indeed, if, dead, you are yet alive.” “ For heaven pre¬ serves me, but, so far as lay in him, I am no more.” Soph. Aj. 1126. c. The modest artist inscribed on his work, “-eiroiei,”-facie- bat, as if he had made an attempt, rather than succeeded. 595 . 4.) By the definite tenses, as introductory ; but by the Aorist, as conclusive : ’Hpumcv Kdpov, .. 6 d' dbreKpCvaTo, they asked Cyrus, and he answered , i. 3. 20. "EXeye roidde, lie began to speak as follows ; but at the close of the speech, Totavra . . direr, thus he spoke ; Th. 3. 35, 41, 49. ’Akoiv- aavres ravra eireiGovTO Kal Sie^rprav i. 4. 16. OHEXX^i/es ej3ovXetiovTO • /cat drreKpLvav’TO ii. 3. 21. a. Verbs of asking, inquiring, commanding, forbidding, deliberating, attempting, endeavoring, besieging, wounding, and some others, are intro¬ ductory in their very nature, and hence incline to the use of tin; definite tenses : T l del avrbv cureiv, sal ov Xapetv eXQjvra ; why must he ask for REV. Git. 16 SYNTAX. R. XXX. -TENSES. § 595. '!fiO OOjJ them (which of itself accomplishes nothing), and not come and take them (which is final) ? ii. 1. 10. lloXXoes KaTeriTpoicrKOv, sal tKpdrrjorav tUv 'EXX? )vojv, they wounded many, and worsted the Greeks, iii. 4. 26. 2eXXe- £as arparevya, eiroXiopKei M IXyrov . ., sal eireiparo sardyeev toos isirenTW- soras, ‘besieged M. and endeavored,’ i. 1. 7. b. There is no precise line of division between the offices of the definite and indefinite tenses. In some cases, it seems to be indifferent which are employed. And the definite tenses, as the generic forms (602 b), often occur, where the indefinite would seem to be more strictly appropriate ; especially in the earlier Greek. In poetry, the metre seems often to in- lluence the choice : cf. j3aXXero, /SaXero, &c.; ZXurev, Xelire • B. 42 s, 106 s. 596 . Future. The dim, shadowy future has little occasion for precise forms to mark the state of the action. It is com¬ monly enough to mark the action simply as f uture. a. Hence the inflection of most verbs has but a single Fut., the in¬ definite ; leaving the definite and complete Futures, if they require to be distinguished from this, to be expressed by a Participle and substantive verb (267 e) : Hsvpos €|apKOvcrd yoi Hcttcu to Xclttov, Scyros shall hereofler content me (continued, 592), Soph. Pli. 459. "Avdpa KciTGKavovTcs &r€cr0e, you will have slain a man, vii. 6. 36. Td dtovra ecrcpeOci cyvcoKOTts, sal Xbywv yaraluv a'rrqXXtrypevoi Dem. 54. 22. 597 . In Greek, as in other languages, the Fut. furnishes indirect and variously expressive forms for the Imperative : (a) Affirmation, "kls ovv Tr(Hr)crfcT€, sal ireWeoQe yoi, thus [you will do] do, and listen to me, PI. Prot. 338 a. llavrws 8e touto SpcUreis, this do, by all means, Ar. Nub. 1352. (b) Negation, 05 KXaJ/eis, thou shalt not steal, Pom. 13. 9. hlybev t&v5’ Ipeis, not a, roord of this ! TEsch. Tli. 250. (c) Question, ns . . tov j3oT?jpa; [will] let some one bring the herdman, Soph. O. T. 1069. (d) Negative Question, O us d>s raxterra; sal . . afiere yovrjv, [will you not] carry her away instantly, and leave her alone, Soph. Ant. 885. (e) Doubly Negative Question, 05 yp XaXfjtreis, aXX’ dsoXovOyaeis iyoi; [Won’t you not talk] Don't talk, but folloio me, Ar. Nub. 505. 05 yrj Xvapfjcr€is, don't trifle, Ar. Pan. 524. Cf. 629 c, 627 d. — For the Fut. with 67 rcos, in the place of the Imv., see 627. f. The Aor. and Pres. ind. have also an imperative force with ri ovv ov, or ri ou • T L ovv ov . . ^Xt£d$ yoi ; why then have you not told me 1 i. e. tell me, Cyr. 2. 1. 4. T i ovv ovs Iporas ; PI. Lys. 211 d. 598 . a. A future action may be represented more expressly as close at hand, or as connected with destiny, necessity, will, purpose, expectation, &c., by the verbs pic'XXct), eBeXw or 0eXco, f3ovXop.ai, Set, \pf|, kc., with the Inf. This Inf. may be Pres., A or., or Fut., according to the view taken of the action in respect to definiteness and nearness : MAXw yap vyds 8l- ddijeiv, I am about to teach you, PI. Apol. 21 b. "EgeXXor clpa iravaeiv, I thought I should stop you, Ar. Pan. 268. 'O araOyos dda eyeXXe tcara- Xveiv, the station where he was to halt, i. 8. 1. MeXXyaavTa tl iraOdv, on the point of being punished, Cyr. 6. 1. 40. Ovs eOtXw eXddv, I am not willing to go, or I will not go, i. 3. 10. Et 5’ edeXr/aeL . . avafirjvai i] rv- pawls, if the sceptre shall descend, PIdt. 1. 109. B ovXevecrOai, 8 tl XP'O irocdv, ‘what we must do,’ i. 3. 11. b. The ideas of destiny, necessity, puiywse, kc. are often expressed by the simple Fut. Especially is the Fut. Part., both with and without ds, used continually to express purpose, particularly with verbs of motion : § 599. FUTURE. COMPLETE. 363 Tt SuMpipovoc . ., et ye Treivr)croocri /ecu StxJ/rjcroucri.; what advantage have they, if they must hunger and thirst ? Mem. 2. 1. 17. Ola6’ ovv 6 Spcureis; do you know what you must do 1 Eur. Cycl. 131. AeZ top eu crrpaT7]-yf)- crovra ix eLV i h& that would command well must have, Mem. 3. 1. 6 (cf. top p,iXXovra arpaTyyelu lb. 5. 24). ’2vXXay[3dpei K upov ws airoKrevdv, he ap¬ prehends C. [as about to put him to death] with tlce design of putting him to death, i. 1. 3. "EiTreuipe nra epoOvTa, he sent one to say, ii. 5. 2. Ma- Xovjisvos avvyei, lie advanced to battle, i. 10. 10. See 558 a. c. Instead of the Fut. Part., the Pres, is sometimes employed to denote purpose, according to 594, especially with verbs of motion : Taur IkSikcI- £wv yXOov, I went to avenge this wrong, Eur. Sup. 154. d. The Modern Greek lias lost the simple form of the Fut.; but is Avell supplied, like the Eng., with compound forms, both definite and indefinite, B. Complete. 599 . a. While the indefinite tenses represent the action simply as performed in the time contemplated, the complete tenses represent it as already finished (as having been already performed) at the time contemplated. In the former, the view is directed to the action simply; in the latter, it is specially directed to the completion of the action, and to the state conse¬ quent upon its performance. Hence arise two special uses of the complete tenses : (b) the one to mark emphatically the entire (often immediate) completion or termination of an action; and (c) the other, to express the continuance of the effects of an action. Thus, (a) T oLadra ,uiv TrsTroirjKf, such things has he done, i. 6. 9. \A.KT|Koa ph Tovvoua, pvrjpopev'jj Si oil, I have heard the name, bid do not remember it, PI. Th ;et. 144 b. (b) "II (pebyeiv . . y raxb KaraxeKouicrScH, cither to flee, or to be quickly and utterly consumed, Cyr. 7. 5. 23. (c) '0 ir'jXepos . . Trepecrrepovs 'rreTrobjKe, sal ttoXXous klvSopovs UTropepeip YivdyKcure, the war has made us poorer (as we still are), and compelled us to meet many dangers (now past), Isoc. 163 a. JUhrop rqv Ovpar K€K\eur0ai, they commanded the door [to be closed and to remain so] to be kept closed, Hel. 5. 4. 7. "Opy- pov tyuye pdXwra TeOavpaKa, Homer I have most admired (as I still do), Mem. 1. 4. 3. "0 yeypa vptop y (3pa8vTys • vvv Si . . /3orj- Oyjare, let your sluggishness have reached its full limits ; and do you now assist, Th. 1 . 71. Taura . . 7T€7raicr0a), let [so much have been played] the sport end here, PI. Eutliyd. 278 d. nerreipdaOji), let a full trial be made, Ar. Vesp. 1129. 'UpoXoyrjcrQa) -quip PI. Rep. 485 a. e. The proper use of the Perf. Imv. in its simple form scarce extends beyond the 3 sing. pass. A very few exceptional cases may be added, unless these belong rather to the preteritive use (318) : nebrava-o, [have done] stop (at once) ! or (pret., cf. 601c) be silent! Dem. 721. 6. H piv ttiotcl Oeup ‘rrciroirjcro, give us (once for all) a solemn pledge, Cyr. 4. 2. 7. 364 SYNTAX. R. XXX. TENSES. -COMPLETE. § 599. f. Compare the three classes of tenses in examples like these : T rjv ayo- puv eta co avecrK€iJacrav, icai ai rrvXac €K€kX€ivto, /cat e7rt tujp tcix&p 6VXa tfycdvtTo, they removed the market into the city, and the gates were kept closed, and arms appeared upon the walls, vi. 2. 8. '0 yep Xyarys ovroai . . es top IIvpupXeyedoPTa 4jA(3epXT)o-0oi), 6 8e iepocrvXos vtto tt}s XiyaLpas 8ia- , I am dying, Eur. Ale. 284 ; TtOvatriv ot Gavcvrts, those who have died (the past event) are dead (the state consequent upon the event), lb. 541. (b) The preteritive use has a far wider extent than is commonly recognized. In some verbs, however, it is dialectic or doubtful: e(3e(3i]Kec, he went, Z. 513 ; /3e/3?)/cet, she ascended, or had now ascended, A. 221 ; (3e- I3Xt]K€l, he hit, or had hit, E. 66, 394, 661. c. For the same reason, the complete tenses are more used in the pas¬ sive forms than in the active (317 s), and the Perf. is most frequent in the passive Participle, which often approaches a mere adjective use. Some modern languages, as the English, French, and German, have no simple forms either of the passive, or of the complete tenses, except the Perf. Part. d. The Perf. is sometimes called a past, and sometimes a present tense; and neither without reason, since it marks the relation of a past action to the present time. The action which it denotes is past; but the state conse¬ quent, to which it also refers, is present. The tense is therefore in its time, as in so many languages in its form, compound, having both a past and a present element. The comparative prominence of these e ements varies in different languages, in different words in the same language, and in different uses of the same word. We remark, in general, that the present element has a far greater prominence in the Greek than in the Latin or English Perfect. 601. Future Perfect. a. The Fut. Perf. expresses the sense of the Perf with a change of the time ; that is, it rep¬ resents the state consequent upon the completion of an action as future, (b) As it carries the mind at once over the act itself to its compdetion and results, it is sometimes used to ex¬ press a future action as immediate , rapid , or decisive, (c) In some verbs these uses pass, more or less decidedly, into a pre¬ teritive use (268). (a, c) "Hi' 8e yy yhyrai, ydryv eyol KeKXavcrfTCH, € to j3l[3Xiou, h,e came and took the book, Rev. 5. i. LUirpaKt it dura . ., /cat yy Spare, he sold all and bought it, Matt. 13. 46. (e) The Modern Greek, while it has lost the simple Perf. and Plup., still retains the simple Aorist. 666. it. Gnomic Use. Past and future tenses may be used gnomically, as well as the Present (G02 c). a. If we can say “ The wisest err ” (the most general expression of the truth), we can also say “ The wisest have erred ” (the lesson of experience), or “The wisest will err ”(a forethought for the future). Thus, IIoAAot Si § GOO. GENERIC AND GNOMIC USE. VISION. 3G7 did tov 7 rXovrov . . cnrdXXvvraL, iroXXol 51 5i a So^av . . peyaXa Kcuca Tmrov- 0acriv, many arc ruined by wealth, and many have suffered great evils from glory, Mem. 4. 2. 35. '0 ineiKps avqp . . TO Tedvaval ov Seivov rj-y-rj- o-erai, the good m,an will not account death an-evil, FI. Rep. 387 d. Kar- 0av‘ op.Qs 6 f aepyos a vqp 6 re 7roAAa copy cos, the indolent and energetic [have died] die alike, I. 320. b. Gnomic Aorist. Especial force, vividness, or actuality of expres¬ sion is often given to a general statement by the use of the Aor. (of. 592, 603 b, 605) : ’Ai >qp S’ 6Wav tois evSov dxOyrai ^vvojv, etjw yoXiov ^irautre tcap- Siav daps, when « man becomes weary of the society of those at home, going abroad lie [has relieved] relieves his heart at once of its disgust, Eur. Lied. 244. " Orav . . tis, tienrep ovros, laxocry, . . puspov irraiapa bnravra avexcu- tlct€ Kai SUXv nv, when one has so acquired power as lie has done, a slight stumble instantly tosses off and scatters the whole, Dem. 20. 25. Twv fav- Xuv awpOeias oXLyos xpjvos 8ieXvo-c, a short time dissolves the intimacies of the bad, Isoc. 2 a. c. The general statements in similes are often expressed by the Aor., especially in Homer : ’'Hpt 7 re 5’, ibs ore tis Spvs ^pi/rrev, he fell, as when an oak falls, II. 482. See V. 33; and for Aor. with Pres, or Perf., P. 23, A. 62, H. 4. (d) A like use of the Put. is doubtful or rare : 'Gs 5’ ore kivt|o-£i 7Jcpvpos, as when the west-ioind shall stir, B. 147 v. 1. (for Kivpuy). 607. in. Absolute and Relative Time. The time of an action is absolute, as simply viewed from the time of speaking or writing ; but relative , as not so viewed, but from the time of another action. a. The tense conforms to relative time far oftener in Greek than in English : in "EAe 7 ev bn to arparevpa d-n-oSiScocri, he said that he [resigns] resigned the army, vii. 6 . 3, dirobibwai conforms to the relative time, as the time of saying and resigning was the same, but resigned conforms to the absolute time, as the action was past when the author was writing. '\EAe 70 i' 8 ti eXir^oucri.v, they said that they hoped, Isoc. 87 a. ’'Eyvm on ob 8 v)vt|cr€TCLL, he perceived that he [will] would not be able, i. 3. 2. 608. iv. Synesis, &c. The relations of time have nothing sensible to fix the conceptions of the mind. It ranges there¬ fore with freedom through all time, past, present, and future ; and, at pleasure, transfers in thought the events of one period to another. a. Even if the events are viewed in their proper time, a less direct mode of stating them sometimes spares the feelings, or is deemed more relined, courteous, or politic. This may have had an influence in leading to some interchanges that are usually referred to other causes, (b) If the events are themselves imagined or supposed, there is, of course, especial freedom in assigning their time. 609. 1. Vision. That which is past or future is often seen in the imagination as present, and is so expressed. This figure of speech is called vision ; and the present tense so used is termed (a) the historic or (b) the prophetic present, according as it expresses the past or the future : (a) T<7> rpoirip StoXXuxcu; how does (did) he perish ? Soph. El. 679. U apwanbos ■yvyvovrcu naiSes 5vo (412). '‘Ov eK6Lr]v8e, / [am going] shall go to Phthia, A. 169. ’H wdev yap vevpcu, I will return at dawn, 2. 136. — This became the regular use of the Ind. dyi. See 603 c, and 50 elpu, epxoyai. d. The Greek has the power of giving to narration a wonderful variety, life, and energy, from the freedom with which it can employ and inter¬ change the Aor., Impf., and Historic Pres. Without circumlocution, it can represent an action as continued or momentary ; as attempted or accomplished ; a# introductory or conclusive. It can at pleasure retard or quicken the progress of the narrative. It can give to it dramatic life and reality by exhibiting an action as doing, or epic vivacity and energy by dismissing it as done. It can bring a scene forward into the strong light of the present, and instantly send it back again into the shade of the past. The variety, vivacity, and dramatic life of Greek narrative can be preserved but very imperfectly in translation, from the fact that the English has no definite tenses, except by circumlocution, and has far less freedom than the Greek in uniting the past and present tenses. See i. 10. 13 s, 8. 23 s; iii. 4. 25 s, 38 s; iv. 7. 10 s; vi. 1. 5 s. 610. 2. a. A present or even future action, in view of the nearness or certainty of its completion, may be spoken of as already accomplished; and (b) that which is present or even past is sometimes expressed by the Future, as though not yet finished, or for the sake of less direct expression (608 a) : (a) "Av tovto vLK(2p.ev, Trdvff yylv TreTroiqrat, if we conquer this, we have accomplished all, i. 8. 12. ’AmoXofiecrO’ dp, d Karov TrpocroLaoyev veov ira- Xaiu>, we have perished then, if we are to add a new evil to the old, Eur. Med. 78. Si animum habueritis, vicimus, Liv. (b) T ovyov . . a-rrepy I8dv pooXr|o-op.ai, 1 [shall] choose to learn my origin, Soph. O. T. 1076. So ideXyau I [shall] wish, airyaop-ai, deyaoyaL, I [will] beseech, Eur. Ale. 164. O lyoi, tl Xe^eis ; "12s pi arrAXecras! Alas, what will you say ? How you have slain one ! Eur. Med. 1310 (tl Xe£eis for tl Xeyeis or tl £Xe£as, as if a new statement were besought). IIws (pys; tl Xe£eis; Id. Hel. 780. c. A writer sometimes throws himself into the time of the reader (chiefly in epistles): ’Aireo-TaXicd ctol tovSc tov Xbyov, I have sent (= I shall send) ojou this discourse, Isoc. 2 b. Mer ' Apr a fta'^ov . ., ov aoi firep.- \J/a, irpdcrcre, arrange with A., whom I [have sent] send to you, Th. 1. 129. d. That which belongs to one time may be so stated as to imply the opposite concerning another time : UpLv o tot fjpev, once we wei'e (but are no more) ! Eur. Tro. 581. Euimus Trocs ! Fuit Ilium ! Virg. 611 . 3. A past tense may be used, in speaking of that which is pres¬ ent as related to some past opinion, feeling, reonark, action, cveoit, or obliga- tiooi: KvTrpLS ovk dp -rjv debs, Venus [was] is not then a goddess (as we sup¬ posed), Eur. Hipp. 359. Aw/3 yaopeda, 6 too yev dLKaiip [SIXtlov iylyvero, ore shall injure that which (as we said) is improved by justice, PI. Crito 47 d. Herat a (KeXevov oi arparpyol, the geoicrals [bade] bid you go, Ar. Ach. 1073. ’'Ec}>w dyyxoLvos, I [was born] am by oiature incapable, Soph. Ant. 79 (§ 50 €X.e yev Kvpos £qv, [C. ought to be living] Would that Cyrus uiere living ! ii. 1. 5. 0 vk 4x.Ph v C-cvtol p.i, ivould I were young ! II. 132 (638 b). Et#e . . yovvad' A. 313. f. If there will be no mistake respecting the time, the Impf. may take the place of the Aor. or Plup., to mark the act as continued or repeated (592): Oe/c hv irpockcyev, ei py tmerrevev ahytkvaeiv, he would not have § 617 . RULE 0. — LAW OF SEQUENCE. 371 predicted (thus often), if he had not believed that his words would prove true, Mem. 1. 1. 5. Cf. 632. 616. That which is indefinite is so far undecided ; and hence often employs the forms of contingent expression. Thus, a. ) The Suhj. and Opt. are used in conditional, relative, and temporal clauses referring to the indefinite. See 634, 641. b. ) The secondary tenses of the Ind. are used with ixv to denote in¬ definitely any one of a past series of acts, (c) This construction seems especially appropriate to the Aor. as the general expression for a single past act (592) : IloWa/as . . T]KOvcrap.€V ixv n kclkws vgas fiovXevcragevovs, ivc would often hear of your planning amiss [used to hear], Ar. Lys. 510. Tore S' ad ev dXXois &v s, opa (thus ex¬ pressing more distinctly the idea of contingency). See 624 a, e. d.) That Av was thus combined before the Subj. (which grammatically it modifies), and not before the Opt., appears to have been due to the later and less strongly marked separation of the Subj. from the Ind. forms. See 272, 2. (e) Dialectic, late, or rare exceptions, however, occur both ways (especially in the early poets) : El yeya vcIkos 'dpyrai, if a mighty contest arise, tt. 98, Ei! aov arepyOw, if I lose you, Soph. 0. C. 1443. Tlvvrai octtis a/iapTrj, he punishes whoever may sin, X. 214. Ov yev fipaxeis apnGxn, where brief {words) may suffice, Th. 4. 17. ' Us k t . . 5jlt] o’ k' iOeXoi, that he might give her to whom he pleased, /3. 53. Ef Kev yoi inrouraiq, if he should promise me, I. 445. f. In the Epic, Av is sometimes joined more directly with the Subj. See 617 b. 620 . a. In the Epic, Av is often used with the Fut. ind. as with the Subj. (chiefly in the form kc) : K at k 4 ris IDS’ cpc'ci, and thus woidd (in this case) many a one say, A. 176. Ei' kcv . . t0fc\r|cr€i, if he shall wish, 0. 213. (b) Rare and disputed cases also occur in the Attic, in which Av is used with the Fut.: IIoi'p dwayei avyyaxv xPV cr ^P iev0L yaWov Av Ko\acr€o-0€, by using what auxiliary force you can better chastise than, ii. 5. 13. Oe5’ Av i\& PI. Rep. 615 d, v. 1. c. Critics deny that Av ever properly belongs to the Imv., or to the Pres, or Perf. ind. (d) The insertion or omission of Av for the most part FINAL SENTENCES. 373 § G24, follows general rules, but in some cases appears to depend upon nice dis¬ tinctions of sense, which it is difficult to convey in translation, or upon mere euphony or rhythm. Upon its use in not a few cases, manuscripts differ, and critics contend. Verbs with which dv is connected are com¬ monly translated into Eng. by the potential mode. 621 . The place of dv is after the verb which it modifies ; or far oftener, after some prominent or characteristic w T ord which is earlier in the sentence : as (a) a leading verb on which its own verb depends (especially such a verb as olojach think, 8okr||xi say) ; (b) a participle or other word expressing the condition ; (c) an interroga¬ tive, negative, or connective ; (d) any emphatic word, (e) Hence it often shows an emphasis upon the word to which it is attached (and from which it is not regarded as parted by such particles as p-tv, 8e, re, yap, &c., cf. 520 b). (f) Between dv and its verb, even another verb some¬ times intervenes. Thus, (a) Otoyac dv vyds yeya ovfjtrcu, I think that you would greatly benefit, iii. 1. 38. (b) Aeyouros dv tlvos 'nucrTcicrai o’teade ; if one had said it, do you think they would have believed ? Dem. 71. 4. (c) IIws &v odv iy 7 | o i T (be learning). "Iva ciSrjTe. so that you may know, i. 3. 15. ’E yol obs ailrd, o-rru )s . . Sia8«, give them to me, that I may distribute, Cyr. 1. 4. 10. ’E0- yXdov (Aor. for Perf., 605) 8bywv, yy yol tl (j.ejx\J/rjcr8e, I have come forth from the house, that ye may not blame me, Eur. Med. 214. (With Lv, 619 c) "Ai-eis 7/, ads, ottcos ay dScopev, you shall lead us, so that toe may know (perhaps), Cyr. 5. 2. 21. 44s 8' av pd8qs . ., avraKovaov, listen in turn, that you may learn (if you will), ii. 5. 16. "Everett, opa Key cvSaj colcnv evi yeyapoccnv y. 359. See 650. (b) Instead of the Subj., the Put. ind. is here commonly used after words of attention, care, or effort, and sometimes after others (regularly joined by ottcos, sometimes by d>s, ocjipa, or fjurj) : lloiyeva Set CTrtyeXelaOaL, ottios aCbai re ^crovTai at dies, a shepherd must take care, [how his flock shall be safe] that his flock be safe, Mem. 3. 2. 1. Qapavvov . ., opa are in their origin relatives ; and jat) seems to have become a connective through the ellipsis of one of these, the fuller form being still often retained : Oorco iroielv, on-cos . . (paveLy, to act [in that way in which] so that he might appear, Cyr. 7. 3. 10. Tpdfw 'iva. ydOys, I write, whereby you may learn (a). KarC yeivev, cos yy (ioyddiev oi cppovpol, he remained, [in which case the guards would not come] that the guards might not come to the rescue, Cyr. 1. 4. 17. 625. a. To the English reader, the use of the connectives after words of fearing often seems reversed, as in Latin, French, &c.; apprehen¬ sion for being indicated rather than apprehension against: 'On-cos Addco, SeSoLKa, metuo ut lateam, [I am apprehensive for this, how I may elude] I fear I cannot elude, Eur. Iph. T. 995. A cSolx on-cos yq rev^oyai, vereor ne inveniam, [I am concerned for this, how I may not find] I fear that I shall find, Ar. Eq. 112. b. Yet words of fear are sometimes followed by a complementary con¬ struction, as in Eng., especially if themselves modified by pf) : M q foftod, cos diropyaeis, do not fear that, you will want, Cyr. 5. 2. 12. My rpeays, oncos ere res . . diroairdaeL Eur. Heracl. 248. s] aiidyu ruv eau- 6ev enpadu, hush, [that I may] let me listen to the voice of those within, Eur. Hipp. 567. ‘Pep’, clkouctu, come, let me hear, Hdt. 1 . 11 . (c) M .7 7 roir|o-T]s raura [sc. andnec], ne feceris hoc, [see that you do not do this] beware of doing this, vii. 1. 8 . Mr; Oavpd^Tc, do not be wonder¬ ing (as you now are), i. 3. 3. Mijr okv€it 6 , pyr d^T’ Znos Kaxbv, neither be afraid, nor utter an ill word, Soph. O. C. 731. Mr;5’ tmKtvOe, Mr;5* ( 7 riK€vcrr]s, do not conceal, n. 168, 0 . 263. Mydels oi€(r0co, M ydels {nroXdjBr], let no one be thinking (suppose), Isoe. 55 e, 101 a. (d) M ydds . . vopurdna (ISeru), lei no one think (see), Cyr. 7. 5. 73 ( 8 . 7. 26). Mr) if/gOcov, do not disappoint, Ar. Th. 870. M 7 . . 'IvBzo A. 410. c. The reason for the rule may be this : The Pres., as often used to arrest an action now doing, requires the most direct form of command ; MODES. 376 SYNTAX. R. R. - § 628. while the Aor., as a more general prohibition, takes the appropriate form of warning. 629. a. Another form of ellipsis is found in such expressions as ‘Gs be awreyu, but to be concise [I add this only], Eur. Tro. 441 ; "Ira yy eyavrov Xeyu, not to speak of myself , Luc. D. D. 7. b. A final clause may refer elliptically to the present or even past: si scripsit, bene fecit (bene est), if he wrote, he did well (pit is well). Et -ypd\|/€i, raXus -n-oitjcrci, si seribet, bene faciet, if he will write, he will do well. Ei Sokcl iX<3, may I die if I do not love X., Ar. Ran. 579. Tt Siacfjtpovo-i, et ye Tr€ivf|crovori (598 b). Atpe irXyKTpov, el |xaxa Ar. Av. 759. (Form b.) If the premise is presented as contrary to fact, it takes a prior tense of the Indicative ; and the conclusion, a prior tense with &v (615, 618 a): Et £-ypac}>t, uaXus av tiroict, si scriberet, bene fueeret (615 d), § G33. IN THE HYPOTHETICAL PERIOD. 377 if lie were now writing, ha would be doing well. Et eypcuj/e, ko\los dv €ttol- r,(T€v (kclXuis &u etyeu), si scripsisset, bene fecisset (bene esset), if he had written (yesterday), he would have done well {it would, now be well). Et ykv ewpwv diropovyras vgas, tout dv tcrKoirouv * . . €7rei Se opu> • if I saw you in want, I should be considering this ; but since I see ; v. 6. 30. Qua dv ciroiTjcrev ' Ay aulas raora, et py ey<±> avrbv eKeXtucra, A. would not have done this, if I had not commanded him, vi. 6. 15. See 615. (Form e.) Here the conclusion, as depending upon a decision yet to be made, is properly expressed by the Fat. incl., or some other form referring to the future (as the Imv., Opt. of wish, &c.): ’Eau ■ypdtjrri {ypafrj), saXQs Troifjcrei., si scribat (scribet), bene faciet, if he write, he will do well. ’Edu t T l T fi s xa\uis, evpfpras PI. Gorg. 503 d. XptD aurols, edu Ser) Tt, use them, if you have any need, Cyr. 5. 4. 30. "Hu . . dt^eXcopai . ., diroXoLa^v, may I perish, if I take, Ar. Ran. 586 (63S d). "Ilu 4<{>f]s pot, . . Xe^cup/ dv, if you permit me, I [would] will speak. Soph. El. 554 (637 c). ’Av touto viKcofisv, iravO’ ypiv ttsttoI rjTcu (610 a). — For the forms of the con¬ nective, see 619 a. (Form d.) If the premise is undecided and without present expectation of decision, the conclusion must also be, so far as depends upon the pre¬ mise ; and both are therefore appropriately expressed by the Optative, with dv in the conclusion (618). Et -ypdcjjot ( ypdfai), /caAtDs dv ttoioitj (Troiyaai), si scribat, bene faciat, if he should write, he would do well. Ou54 yap dv M?)5o/cos . . eTraivoLrj, el 4£eXauvoi|ii toos evepyeras, M. would not approve, if I should drive put our benefactors, vii. 7. 11. 0 Ikos 8’ avros, el s, f t v Suvwvtcu, o-TroXecroocriv, they are 'plotting to destroy us if they can, iii. 1. 35. b. The conclusion lias sometimes a second condition, expressed or understood, to which its verb conforms : ’Ecu' 8’ eyb 'eXyaOe, ovk dv 0avp.d- crai|xi, et tlvol efpoiTe, if you elect me, I should not wonder if you should find, vi. 1. 29. Ei SieXdoiev . ., rjv yev (3ovXcovtcu, 8ia(3f|(rovTai iv. 1. 3. c. The true conclusion is sometimes implied, rather than expressed, in the grammatical apodosis ; or (d) is elliptically contained in it : (c) Oi 8’ cbcTeipov, el aXiJjaoLvro, others pitied them [for what they would suffer], in case they should be taken, i. 4. 7. "Ictcu, ei' tl 8uvo.lto poyOrjcai, he hastens, [to help] if lie might in any way help, Cyr. 7. 3. 15. Oe yqv yap e'poip.ev, toTpwev (pepeiv, if we should fail to bring anything, he t bade us bring it, Eur. Ale. 755. (c, d) "Hr 8' eyyvs £X0T] davaTos, ovSels PovXeTcu OvyaKCLv, if death come near, no one is willing to die, lb. 671. (c, e) "Hz' ybv yap els Sokoit] . . (3 XasedeLv, . . £n-ai- crev dv, sal aya avTos 'irpocreXdp.pavev, if any one seemed to him to shirk, he would give him a blow, and at the same time took hold himself, ii. 3. 11. Et 8e tlv a opuW] 8eivov 6vra oixovoyov del irXeUo irpocreSiSov i. 9. 19. ovSeva dv irtoTore dei\eTO, aXX 635. Incorporation. The condition, instead of being ex¬ pressed in a distinct clause, is often incorporated in the con¬ clusion, especially in a participial form : A eyoLs dv ed 4>povwv [ = et e7 (hpovolrjs], you woidd speak, if you were a friend, Soph. 0. T. 570. MaOoOo-’ epQ, I will tell, if I know , lb. 749. Kat Kev tout eObXoiyi, Aids ye SiSovtos, apbaOai, this I should like to ob¬ tain, if Jupiter would grant it, a. 390. "ilinrep dv Spayoi tls irepl viktjs, as one would run [if lie were running] for victory, i. 5. 8. "AXXws 8b ovk dv ToXylpev, they would not venture otherwise [if it were not so), v. 4. 34. § 637. ITEMISE INCORPORATED OR OMITTED. 379 636. Ellipsis. In a hypothetical period, the premise or the conclusion is often omitted ; the other part retaining its proper form (as also in 635) : i. Premise omitted. Among the conditions most naturally supplied, and therefore most frequently omitted, are those of inclination with possibility and of possibility with inclination ; since these are the two great conditions of human conduct. a. Hence the frequent use of the Opt. and past tenses of the Ind. with dv (specially termed ■potential Opt. or Incl.), to denote one of these ideas, the other being implied as a condition. Other familiar ideas are also im¬ plied, as of effort, necessity, propriety, occasion, existence, actuality, &c.; and (b) the premise is often involved in an independent sentence, or otherwise supplied by the context. Thus, (a) Avvaio dv . . evpeiv ore) av yaptcraLo ; [would you be able if you tried] could you find one whom you might oblige (if you should wish) ? Cyr. 3. 1. 29. A vroi yh dv eTropevOq- crav, they could themselves have marched [might if they had chosen], iv. 2. 10. Enroire av, epaipre av, you may say [might if you were disposed], vii. 6. 16, 23. Ov8’ avrov diroKreivaL dv eGeXoipev, nor should we wish to slay him (if we could), ii. 3. 23. "H 8evecr0a>, come, let us turn him back, or [may] let one stand by A. and give him great strength, nor let him want aught in heart, T. 119 (cf. Soph. Ant. 151). Mr? ysvoiTo, yevecrQco Se 6 Geos d\y6ys, ‘ God forbid ! ’ Eom. 3. 4. f. v Av does not belong to this Opt. of direct wish, which is often thus distinguished from the Opt. in its other uses : Tcvolo irarpos evruxearepos, rd 8’ aXX oyoios • Kal yc'voi’ dv ov Kanos • m,ay you be happier than your father, but otherwise like him ; and you rcould not then be bad ; Soph. Aj. 550. g. A wish in opposition to fact is also expressed by the 2 Aor., and rarely by the Impf., of o^clXco ought (50) ^the particles of wishing being often prefixed to add strength : ’OXecrdat. 8' &(f>eXov, [I ought to have per¬ ished] Would that I had perished! Soph. O. T. 1157. “ihpeXe yev KDpos Zyv (611). E 19' ocpeXes dyovbs t Zyevai, Would you were unborn! T. 40. '42s irpiv &s . . awdyaoyeada ; suppose, he has consented; how then shall ive be saved ? Ear. Hel. 1059. For conditional relative clauses, see 641. in. Relative or Temporal. 640. Rule S. A relative clause commonly uses the modes like other sentences to which it is most nearly akin. a. From such analogies, some relative clauses have been distinguished as conditional relative, final relative, &c. 641. 1. Conditional Relative Clauses, &c. A relative or temporal clause referring to that which is indefinite or general or not yet determined, may be viewed as contingent (616) ; and then has regularly (a) the Subj., if it depends on a primary tense, but (b) the Opt., if it depends on a secondary. For the form of the connective, see 619 d. (c) Such a clause has commonly a form and force akin to those of an in¬ definite premise (634) ; while its leading clause resembles in form the cor¬ responding conclusion. Thus, (a) "O ti dv [ = edv t i] ireicroyai, whatever [if any] evil must be met, I will suffer (551 a), i. 3. 5. ’’A^ios (pLXos, <3 &v cpiXos $, he is a valuable friend to whomsoever he may be a friend, lb. 12. 'OwoTav natpbs t], -ffw, when it is the proper time, I will come, vii. 3. 36. ’EimSav wavra clkou- 3ya>criv, they will have no place for refuge [whither they may ilee], ii. 4. 20 (cf. Ib. 19 ; i. 7. 7). llorqrqr dr ov X evpois . ., Cjtls p yerraior Xcikoi, you could not find a poet [who would utter] to utter a noble word, Ar. Ran. 96. 382 SYNTAX. R. T. -MODES. § 042. b. The use of the Opt. without dv after a relative, as above (640 s), is sometimes extended in poetry (perhaps in prose) to cases where dv would regularly be used : 0 vk £- TTTevcre cos ovk dy 6 Ki 'jpov EpepSis, aXX oenrep nv, suspected that this was not S. the son of C., but the person that he really was, Hdt. 3. 68. e. The rule may extend to various dependent clauses, which are thus referred to the speech or mind of another: Causal, 'Ek6.kl$ov, 8tl . . oik eire^ayoi, they reviled him, because (as they complained) he did not lead them out, Th. 2. 21 (eire^rjyev would have been the writer’s own statement of the cause). Relative, "Ecpevyov evOa uy-noT 6\j/cup.T;v, I fled where (as I believed) I should never see, Soph. O. T. 796 (cf. 642). Conditional, *f2 LKTCLpov, d dXcocroivTO (633 c). (f) So rarely even to clauses elliptically expressed as independent: 'T-rreaxero . . SyXiPcreiv aywv, oIolto pkv yaXtaO (Koucnop, he promised to bring and show him, [saying] he hoped rather, with his own consent. Soph. Ph. 615. g. That which is presented in Indirect Discourse, is not presented as fact, but as the statement, thought, or feeling of some person, and con¬ sequently as having some degree of contingency. This seems the greater, if all is in the past, to which indeed Indirect Discourse chiefly belongs; § 646. IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 383 and the use of the Opt. serves as an express disclaimer of responsibility. In the present, this distinction of modes was very limited (647), as far less needed and often discourteous. Compare “ He says that he will go,” and “ He said that he would go” h. It is only through the Opt. in Greek, as through the Potential in Eng., that the Future tense can he carried hack into the past; and it is only in Indirect Discourse, and in clauses partaking of its nature, that the Fut. Opt. is used. Yet even here the Fut. Ind. is very often pre¬ ferred, and even though associate tenses may take the Opt.: "OyoioL yaav Oavya^eiv, ottol ttotc rpevf/ovTcu oi "EAA rjves, nal tL ev vp £>( 0L£V > they seemed to be icondering ivliither the Greeks [will] would turn, and what thc-y had in mind, iii. 5. 13. ’E5o/cei 8r)\ov elvai, otl tupTjcrovTai ovtov, el tls tm- i|/t|4h£oi, it seemed evident that they ivould elect him, if the vote should be put, vi. 1. 25. See 645 h. —This remark extends to the Fut. Perf. i. When the Subjunctive of Direct Discourse becomes the Opt. in In¬ direct, &v is sometimes retained with a connective (619) : ’E/ceAeue . . pv- \6 .tt€lv, 'tu s av avros <-X0oi, he ordered him to guard it, until he should himself come, Hel. 5. 4. 47 (directly, cpoXarre, eu>s av aurds 8\6 lo). 644. The Greek has here an especial love of variety, either for its own sake, or for euphony , or to express in various degrees contingency or positiveness of conception ; so that 1.) Indirect and Direct Discourse are freely blended; commonly by a change to the latter, either (a) after the introductory particle on, or (b) in the body of the quotation, chiefly after a relative, a parenthetic clause, or one of the larger pauses : (a) Et7rov, otl “ UavoL ecryev,” they said, [that they were able] “ IFe are able,” v. 4. 10. ’Tcrws civ d-rroiev, otl “& Huncpa- res, yq davya^e,' Crito 50 c. Cf. Fr. II dit que "out, perhaps they might say , “ 0 S., do not wonder,” PI. “ oui,” he said “yes.” (b) ’EwiSecKvijs 8 b, d>s eijydes etrj, Tpyeywa alreiv irapa tovtov, “y Xvyacvbyeda rqv irpa^LV,” showing , that it was folly to ask a guide from him, “ whose plan (said he) we are frustrating ,” i. 3. 16. ’ AireKpivaro, otl ovdev civ toIitcjv Gttol els rqv (TTpaTLav “ vytis 5 b i-v\\b£avTes,” 5 cri (607), he said that he [resigns] resigned (a compromise between the regular cltto5l8olt) and the direct “ airobidwyL ”). ’H7t bpow, tl 7rore Xe'-yei, I was at a loss, what he meant, PI. Apol. 21 b. 'Tiro-pia yev ijv, otl dyei (cf. otl 8b bid /3a, I am at a loss whither, &c.] Eur. Ale. 864. ’Ap- TrXaKw too aov yopov; must I miss your fate l Soph. Ant. 554. Ilot rts ovv <]>dyr); whither can one flee ? Id. Aj. 403. e/ The Subj. of Doubt is plainly akin in force to the Fut. ind. With it &v is rare, and by some denied. 648. Optative of Doubt, a. Indirect Discourse in past time may change this Subj. to an Opt.: ’E/3ov\cdcTo . . cl irtp/rroiev, he consulted whether they should send, i. 10. 5. ’II 7 rbpcL 0 tl xpr]s to express wish : [Sc. EovXolyqv dv] Os oXoito vayKaxCos, O [1 should wish] that she might perish miserably ! Eur. Hipp. 407. 'Os yq OdvoL 0 . 359. v. Interchange. 649. Rule U. The uses of the finite modes are often interchanged. § 651. RULE U. INTERCHANGE OF MODES. 385 a. Especial freedom belongs here, as elsewhere, to the poets ; partic¬ ularly to Homer, and others who sung before the use of the modes became fixed. b. The Greek has also great freedom here, as elsewhere, in combining different forms of construction (392) ; and (c) one part of a sentence often conforms to another, not as this is expressed, but as it might have been expressed (anacoluthon) : (b) 11 u>s av dtjnKoivTO Trove bvOa 8ei, ei, eireLbav tl dvTiKoij/r], evdvi eh ravavria irXeoiev; how could they ever arrive where they ought, if, as soon as any thing may oppose, they should sail back, Hel. 2. 3. 31. See 641. (c) Ei pev eTraivta [= eiraivolpi] avrov, ch/caiws &v pe Kal ai.Tia>cr0e, if I [commend] should commend him, you would justly blame one, vii. 6 . 15. 'Eyu pbv av, ei [= tr^or], . . e-rroi,ov|Jir|v, I indeed, were I able, should procure made, Cyr. 2. 1. 9. See 631. d. If the form of a leading verb does not agree with the time of its action, a dependent verb sometimes conforms to the one, and sometimes to the other: Hist. Pres., VpapeL . . otl (v. 1. Tjfjei), he ivrites that he [would come] will come, i. 6. 3 (cf. 624c). Opt. of Wish, &c., Tedvaiyv . ., tv a p) ivda.be ptvw, let me die, that I may not remain here, PL Apol. 28 d. Elpyvy . . eyoL ttoXlv, bp pa per aXXajv Kwpd'foip.t, may peace possess the city, so that I may be merry with others, Tlieog. 885. IloLr/aaLTo (civ), tm . . €itj (r. 1. -j) ii. 4. 3. Impf. as a prior tense (615 a), ’Epofioijprjv civ <705 bpa \eyei ', py . . 8o£co, I should now fear greatly to spealc, lest I seem, PI. Theaet. 143 e. 0 ore . . ybbvar hr t rparreiv, & epovXero, he lOOlild not be able to do what he ivished [= might wish], Mem. 1. 4. 14. e. If a dependent verb has another depending upon it, the latter has sometimes the form suited to the general dependence of both, and some¬ times the form suited to its own special dependence (that which it would have, if the former were independent). See 633, 643 c, 645 b. 650. i. Dependent sentences often conform to relative, instead of absolute, time (607) : Iv areKavaev, tm p'g lid poo 8iaf3fj, he had burned (the boats), that C. [may] might not cross, i. 4. 18. "Enrpaao-ov 6Vw? ns fioyQeia they oiegotiated that some succor [shall] should come, Th. 3. 4. Cf. 653. (a) This is especially frequent in final clauses, and in Indirect Discourse. See i. 3. 17. 651. ii. Generic Use. This has a varied application to the modes: 1. The Indicative is the generic mode ; and hence may be used for the Subj. or Opt., if it is not deemed important to mark the contingency: Xpyadwv b tl povXovTai, let them use me as they [may] please, Ar. Hub. 439. See 645 s. — In late Greek, the Ind. even occurs for a final Subj.: "Lm avTous J^Xovrt, that ye onay be zealous for them. Gal. 4. 17. a. As the lmpf. and Plup. have no separate forms out of the Ind., they often remain in this mode, for distinction from the Pres, and Perf., in cases where other tenses would take the Opt. or Subj. ; especially the lmpf. expressing a repeated or continued act or state in past time : "EXe- yev, on opOQjs tjtuSvto, koX avro rb bpyov avrols [xapTepoLT], he said that they had blamed him justly, and that the result sustained them, iii. 3. 12 (directly, yriaaOe, vpiv papropd). See 632, 634, 646. b. In applying the rules for the modes, the Fut. and Fut. Perf. ind. are also regarded as subjunctive. The future has such an element of un¬ certainty in its own nature, that a separation of the two modes was here less important. Compare the hat., Eng., &c. Sec, 643 h. rev. gr. 17 Y 386 SYNTAX.-INTERCHANGE OF MODES. § 652. 652. 2. Tlie Optative is the generic contingent mode, as the earlier developed, and as expressing past contingency (614 b). It is, hence, often used for the Subj., especially to render the expression more general, indefinite, vague, or doubtful, or from a reference in the mind to some¬ thing past, distant, or contingent : ' Airoreixt^L, u>s cnropos el'p y 68os, he is building a wall, so that the way might be impassable (for any one), ii. 4. 4. Tovtov 8’ oyw, ha yy TaXanropoiTo, I let him ride, so that he might not (at any time) be fatigued, Ar. Ran. 23. a. We observe here, as elsewhere, the Greek love of variety, and the tendency to drop into a more general form, after the use of one that is more special or definite (cf. 592 c, 605 b) : blerepxoycu, els v[3piv S«i|cojj.€v AiyLadov Oeois, yoovs t dcj>eiTjv, I go, that I may show to the gods the inso¬ lence of JE., and [might] utter wailings, Eur. El. 58. Et odv ei.8ei.ev tovto . ., i'evTo av . /cat Karep-ya^oivTo, if they knew this, they ivoidd rush and win, Ven. 12. 22. UryaoyaL, y ne tjjep'fto-i yeya Kparos, i) ne cf)epoi|iT]v 2. 308. Ouk av . . dyopeues, ov8e ne . . avieujs (3. 184. See 643 h. 653. hi. The freedom of the mind in its conceptions of time affects the modes, as well as the tenses (608 s). a. Especially is the Subj. often used for the Opt. from a view of the past as present (or sometimes, as extending to the present): ’ETrirySes ae ovk eyeipov, ha (Jos yoiara Sidygs, I purposely did not wake you, that you may pass your time as pleasantly as possible (forethought continued), PI. Crito 43 b. Cf. 650. b. Among classic writers, Thucydides is especially fond of using the Subj. for the Opt.; and in late Greek this use, from combined influences, so prevailed, that at last the latter mode became extinct. c. An action that might be expressed by the Subj., is thrown more decidedly into the future by the use of the Eut. ind.: Et yy Kcdk'leis yXuicraav, earai epe, 10q dire, and 184 may be used in the singular, as interjections, though more than one are ad¬ dressed ; and in the 2d Pers., though associated verbs are in the 3d : "Aye 8y, aKodcraTe, come now, hear, Apol. 14. EiVe goi, tL irdaxer, wv- Spes; Ar. Pax 383. "Ldt. . . tls . . Sdrco Ar. Ran. 871. c. An exclamatory Imv. seems to have been sometimes apocopated : llctO [for irauef irav ’ ! Stop, stop ! Ar. Eq. 821. d. An act of the will may respect either the real or the ideal. Hence in Greek, as in other languages, the Imv. may be used to express sup¬ position or condition : Elpt|(r0a> got, [let it have been said by me] suppose me to have said, Mem. 4. 2. 19. UXovret, [be rich] suppose that you are rich. Soph. Ant. 1168. KukXos -yeypcufBco 6 BP A, let the circle BGD [have been] be described, Eucl. 1. 1. e. The Imv. sometimes so proposes as to imply a question : ‘0 iroXXa- kls ipwrCd, K€icr0a> vbgos, as I often ask, [let it be] shall it not be established as a law ? PI. Leg. 801 d. So indirectly, iiravepuTu) . ., ei irpCjTov 'iv rovd’ ygiv dpicTKov KetcrGo) lb. 800 e. C. Incorporated. 657. In dependent clauses, the Greek lias great freedom in the employment of either distinct or incorporated forms, ac¬ cording as a more or less intimate union is desired; and also in respect to the manner of incorporation. Thus (a) a depend¬ ent clause may be preserved entirely distinct ; or (b) its subject or most prominent substantive may be incorporated in the lead¬ ing clause, leaving it otherwise distinct; or (c) its verb may be also incorporated as an Infinitive , or (d) yet more closely as a Participle. The union often becomes still closer by an attrac¬ tion, through which (e) the leading verb adopts, for a subject or object, the subject of the dependent clause; or the Inf. or Part, adopts, for its grammatical subject, either (f) the subject or (g) an adjunct of the leading verb, (li) Different forms are often combined or blended. E. g., (a, b) * ihcrdeTo , oti to s TroXeyyaovres), they prepared to make war, Th. 1. 115 ; 2. 7. See 598 b. (e) See 573. (f) 'EvoyLtfoyev dipoi clvai [= yyas aijiovs elvai], we thought that ice were worthy, Cyr. 7. 5. 72 (cf. voylffoiyt. yap eyavrov ioLKevai lb. 5. 1. 21). No- y t yev efjapapxdvwv Eur. Med. 350 (cf. opCo 8e p’ Zpyov Seivov e^eipyacrpeV^v Soph. Tr. 706). Aeycv 8b tov8’ eveva, PouXopevos, I speak for this reason, [wishing] that I wish, PI. Pliaedo 102 d. (g) Ilpoar/KeL apxovrt. ^povipw elvai, it becomes a ruler to be prudent, Mag. Eq. 7. 1. E8 yap c^povotivTos cyya crou Karyyope?, for your eye proves that you feel kindly (677), iEsch. Ag. 271. See 667. (h) 0 i’X a KpeiTTtov fjSec wv, raura rpovKaXeiro toos avvovras, aXX’ anep ev ijSci eavTov qTTova ovTa, he did not challenge his companions to those exercises in which he knew he was superior, but those in which he well knew he was inferior, Cyr. 1. 4. 4. llapiryrea . . yy8bv &‘jroXoyr l a-ope- vovs, . . 8r)Xd)crai Se, they must come forward, not to make any defence, but to show, Th. 2. 72. ”AXXbs wv (ov Suva- pevw, 8 ti Xe'yw), I am conscious that I am wise (that I am not able, that I speak), PI. Apol. 21b, Conv. 216 b, Ion 533 c. ’Eyw cot ovvoiGa [sc. ere] . . Trpwt dvitTTdpevov \y. 1. dvurxape'vw] (Ec. 3. 7. v Eot/cas patriXe-us elvai (fjSopevos, SeSioxi,), you seem to be king (pleased, like one fearing), Cyr. 1. 4. 9, Hel. 6. 3. 8, PI. Rep. 527 d. So "Oyoioi yaav 6avpd£av (v. 1. Gavpa^ovres, = davyatpovai), they seemed to be wondering, iii. 5. 13. k. Some verbs may be followed either by the Inf. or the Part., with scarcely any difference of meaning, as in some of the examples above ; and others, with an obvious difference. In the latter case, the Part, commonly denotes that which is less dependent on the action of the lead¬ ing verb, or is a more immediate, positive, or personal object of percep¬ tion : Tovro yev ovk aiaxdvoyai \iy wv • to 8b alax vvo ' L l x y v Xcyciv * I am not ashamed [saying] to say this (which is said) ; but I should be ashamed to say that (which from the shame is not said) ; Cyr. 5. 1. 21. n Av awa^ ydOojyev apyoi £fjv, if we once learn to live in idleness, iii. 2. 25 ; "lva yady cropurrys wv, that he may learn that he is a schemer, /Esch. Pr. 61. So yvy rpepeiv, learn to keep, Soph. Ant. 1089 ; yvwaiv d-iuarovyevoi, perceive that they are distrusted, Cyr. 7. 3. 17. Meyvyadu dvyp dyad os elvai, let him remember to be a brave man, iii. 2. 39 ; Mbyvyyai aov aKovcras, I re¬ member that I heard from you, Cyr. 2. 4. 12. "Hkovov 'Adyvaiov ttvai, I heard that you were an Athenian, iii. 1. 35. " II cover av avrov c^wvrprav- tos, they heard him speaking, Symp. 3. 13. See Zouca (j). l. Infinitives and Participles retain the properties of the verb, so far as may consist with their substantive or adjective use. In general, they modify as nouns or adjectives, but are modified as verbs. See 504, 663. 658. The use of both the incorporated modes is even more extensive in Greek than in English. O § 659. INFINITIVE AND FxVRTICIPLE. 389 1. Hence we often translate the Greek Inf. and Part, by finite verbs with connectives (that, when, while, as, and, if, although, because, since, in order that, &c.). Sometimes, also, from a difference of idiom, the Inf. and Part, are interchanged in translation : Uapikv ervyxuve, happened to be present, i. 1. 2. ’EftouXero eavrov (pCkeiaQai, wished himself beloved, Cyr. 8. 2. 26. "Ene/afe nva epovvra (598 b). a. With &v, the Inf. or Part, commonly supplies the place of the cor¬ responding tense of the Opt., or past tense of the Ind. (618) ; and is usually translated by our potential mode : Kac S’ &v rots aXXoicriv eepy wapapu0T](racr0cu, he said he would advise the rest, I. 684.(directly, av . . Trapap.vOyaalp.yv I. 417). 'Ds ovtco 'irtpi-yevopevos &v, as though he would thus prevail, i. 1. 10 (directly, icepiyevolpyv civ). Aca to py avacr^ecrOat &v, because they would not have borne it, Hel. i. 4. 20 (directly, aveaxovro &v). "Dare /cat Iduvryv &v •yvwvai vi. 1. 31. b. In Latin, the Gerund and Supine supply in part the place of the Greek Inf.: Tou icceiv eTridvpdg, bibendi desiderio. ’A sovaai aydy (663 g), injucundam auditu. The Latin Participle, from its defective formation, is far less used than the Greek or English ; and is often absolute in the Passive, where they are used in the Active : 2 vXXe^as arparevpa, exercitu collecto, having collected an army, i. 1. 7. (c) In Modern Greek the place of the Inf. is commonly supplied by a conjunction and finite mode : OeXco va {{ja-yw [= classical OeXco (payeiv], I wish to eat. 659. 2. The use of the incorporated modes, particularly the Inf., is very great in Indirect Discourse, sometimes (a) continuing through a series of sentences, or (b) even extending to relative, ■ and rarely to other- subsidiary clauses (cf. 661 a) ; and being interchanged and blended not only (c) with other forms of Indirect Discourse, but also (d) with those of Direct Discourse. Compare the much greater use of the Lat. Inf. in In¬ direct Discourse. For the use of the tenses here, see 660 b. E. g., (a) See Hdt. 1. 24 ; Cyr. 1. 3. 4 s. (b) ”Ecpy de, eireidy ov €it,6dva>, and Treptcpdco : T! civ elircov ere tls op6G)s it pc emir 01 ; what could one call you and call you rightly 1 Dem. 232. 20. J I8o)v eiSov, [seeing] surely 1 saw, Luc. D. Mar. 4. AaTvd.yyv crKuaJ/avTCt elirelv Cyr. 1. 3. 8. Arjeropev e'rrnretrovTes, we shall attack by surprise, vii. 3. 43. Oe yy a eyCb irepiGij/opcu wrreXGovTa, I will not let you go, Ar. Ran. 508. See § 677. 661. a. Clauses depending upon the Inf. and Tart, have usually the same form as if these were finite verbs : Erocyos yv diroriveLv ei KaTa- ■yvoiev, he was ready to pay, if they should condemn him, Isoc. 361^ e. Qofioiyyv 5’ civ rip yyeybvi, lo Soup eneaQai (641 b). ATroireyyaL b 7 rpoandels, announce [with an oath, adding it], adding an oath, Soph. El. 47. 662. From the intimate nnion subsisting between the Inf. or Part., and the leading finite verb, a word properly modifying the one is some¬ times placed in immediate connection with the other. Thus we find (a) such adverbs as apa, cuitikci, €ii0vs, 4 £cu4>vt]s, peTaijv, 6pa>s, Kaiirep, &c., joined with the Part, instead of the leading verb ; and sometimes (b) a particle joined with the leading verb instead of the Inf. or Part., particularly &v (621), and ovk with : (a) "Apa ravr eiirdv aveary [having said this, he at the same time rose], as soon as lie had said this, he rose, iii. 1. 47. Eu0i)s ofiv ye l8Av 6 K ecpaXos yaird^eTo, immediately upon seeing vie, C. saluted me, PI. Rep. 328 c. Mera£t> 7 ral^cov eiaepxcrai, [playing, meanwhile] he enters in the midst of his play, PI. Lys. 207 a. 'iKvovyoa, Kdl yvvy irep ova' opcos, I covie, even though I am a woman, Eur. Or. 680. (b) Ouk ecpaaav levai, they said they vmdd not go, i. 3. 1. ’EirypeTo aurbv, el oirhirevoi. Ouk ’ecp 77 [sc. bir\iTedeLv\. ‘He said Nod v. 8 . 5. 1 . The Infinitive {Verb-Noun, u ”Ovoya too 'P^paros”). 663. Rule XXXIII. The Infinitive is con¬ strued as a neuter noun (491 a). Hence, (a) The Inf. may be the subject of any word which would agree with a noun, or (b) even of another Inf.; (c) it may itself agree as an appositive ; (d) it may depend upon any word which would govern a noun; or (e) it may be used, like a noun, to express a circumstance ; particularly such as are denoted by the Gen. of cause , the modal Dat. (466 s), the Acc. of specification (481), and the adverbial Acc. (483). (f) The article is often prefixed to the Inf. to give prominence to its substantive character, or to define the relation which it sus¬ tains as a substantive, by marking the case. If the Inf. is gov¬ erned by a preposition, the insertion of the article is required. (a) ‘Fevyeiv avrois aacf)d\lcTTepbv eanv, to fly is safer for them, iii. 2. 19. Ovdev olov ear [= toloutov earn', olov ] dKOvcrcu (to avrov epeorav), there is nothing [such as] like hearing (like asking him), Ar. Av. 966, PI. Gorg. 447 c. (b) A odyvai aiirip cro^tiv rods "EWr/vas, that it should be granted to him to save the Greeks, ii. 3. 25. (c) To yap yvCbvai eivujT'pyyv irov Aapelv eanv, to learn is to acquire knowledge (534. 3), PI. Thetet. 209 e. Tt yap tovtov yanapiurepov, rod yrj pi\0fjvai, Cyr. 8. 7. 25. (d) 0 epybrepov imiv, warmer for drinking, Mem. 3. 13. 3. ’E7r baxoyev too SaKpuav (405). MavOaveiv yap yuoyev, we have come to learn. Soph. 0. C. 12. Avvaiyyv irapa f3aai\£us alrT)(ra, y8vs, but to guess, joyous, Id. O. T. 82. ’OXiyov 8clv 7tA elovs dircKrovdcnv, have slain [to want little] almost a greater num- § GG7. CASE OF ITS SUBJECT. RULE XXXIV. 393 her, Hel. ‘2. 4. 21. So yucpov delv, oXlyoo [sc. beer], ylspov [sc. becV], almost. ’Es deov irdpead’ ode K pecvv, to irpacrtreiv /cal to PovAeveiv Soph. 0. T. 1416. For other examples, see 663 e, 664 c. b. The use of given as the Inf. of specification , or the adverbial Inf, wall he particularly remarked with Ikwv, chiefly in negative sentences ; and with some adverbs, or prepositions followed by their cases, chiefly pre¬ ceded by to : Ovre avvOysas hv fevSoLyyv enwv elveu, nor rvould I break my engagements willingly [to be willing], or, so far as depends on my will, Cyr. 5. 2. 10 (cf. “to be sure” — surely). To vvv etvai, [as to the being, or state of affairs, now] for the present, iii. 2. 37. To pdv Tyyepov elvai, for to-day, PI. Crat. 396 d. To /card tovtou elveu, so far as regards him, i. 6. 9. To eirl tovtols eivcu, so far as depends on these, Lys. 180. 41. 666. Bule XXXIV. The Subject of the In¬ finitive is put in the Accusative: as, OioyevoL . . KOpov £yv, supposing [C. to be] that Cyrus was alive, ii. 1. 1 (cf. the finite KOpos £y, C. is alive, 400). ’Hftou . . Sodyvcd oi ravras ras 7 roAeis, he requested that these cities should be given to him, i. 1. 8. a. The subject of the Inf. is very often, either properly or by attraction (474, 657 e), the direct object of a preceding verb, and consequently in the Acc. Hence has arisen an association between this case and the Inf., which has led to this rule, (b) The Inf., on the other hand, extensively constitutes an indirect object of the verb or other word on which it depends. From the prevalence of this use appears to have arisen the resemblance in form of the Greek and Lat. Inf. to the Dat., and the use of the prepositions to and zu before the Inf. in Eng. and German (272a, c): YleireLiee rov yavTLv A eyeiv, had persuaded the prophet [to the saying] to say ( G. zu sagen), vi. 4. 14. Tods 0 vyadas exeXevae crijv avrp arpaTebeabai, he urged the exiles [to the serving] to serve with him, i. 2. 2. 667. a. This rule applies to the subject of the Inf. simply as such. (b) Very often, this subject has a prior grammatical relation, which determines its form ; (c) even if its two uses are not in immediate connec¬ tion. . (d) Still, it is sometimes repeated in the Acc. for more distinct ex¬ pression ; and (e) is of teller so understood, (f) For clearness, emphasis, or euphony, it is sometimes repeated in the same case, chiefly in the Nom. (g) Attracted and mixed constructions also occur. Thus, (1») Kdpou edbovro cos irpo0upoTd,Tou . . yevecrdai, they besought C. to be as strenuous as possible, Hel. 1. 5. 2. ^ croi Hfrariv . . dvSpl yeveaOai, it is now in your power to become a m.an, vii. 1. 21. See 657 f, g. Ida Oat avTos to rpavyd povXeaOcu dv, I swear to you that I would choose, Cyr. 6. 4. 6. (g) ’EXnlfav . . ovd' &v avTos, ov8e oi [for rods, attracted by auVos] e£ avrov, navaeaQai, trusting that neither himself, nor his descendants, would lose, Hdt. 1. 56. Tovs be diroKpLvacrdaL . . avTol beberea/ (as if a finite mode had preceded), that these answered that they would give, lb. 2. Evv^ttw ct£ . . veiv, . . cos ovti ( as if croi had preceded), Soph. O. T. 350. See T. 258 s. KEV. GK. 17* 394 SYNTAX. R. V., W. INFINITIVE. § 6G7. h. The subject of the Inf. is very often indefinite ; and is then com¬ monly omitted, though words may he expressed agreeing with it: “ Ovda- ycos apa bei [sc. riva] abiKeiv.” “ Ou dyra.” “0 vde ct8iKOii[AfcVOV dp a a vra- dLKelv.” “ One ought then by no means to injure.” “ Surely not.” “ Not then, when injured,to injure in turn.” PI. Crito 49 b. 668. Pleonasm and Ellipsis, i. The Infinitive (a) is sometimes redundant, and (b) is sometimes omitted: (a) Xdptv avTididwcnv in return gives [to have] 'pleasure , Soph. 0. C. 232. Alrydoyat be a ov yaxpov yepas Xa\€tv Id. Aj. 825. (b) Ed’s to /3 aXaveiov fiovXoyai [sc. ievai\ I wish to go to the bath, Ar. Ran. 1279. "E py 6 ’Opovrys [sc. ovtco noLyaaij, Oroides [said that he had so done] assented', i. 6. 7. llapayyAXet eis rd on Aa i. 6. 13. c. The Inf. added for the sake of expressing an idea more fully or pre¬ cisely is termed the Inf. epexegetic (ine^yyyriKos, explaining further). 669. ii. The Infinitive often depends upon a word which is omitted or implied in another word. 1. This often occurs in Indirect Discourse : Ot de aparreev iniXenou • ov yap hv ddraadac nopevQyvai [sc. epacraif] • but they bade him kill them ; for [they said that] they were unable to pro¬ ceed ; iv. 5. 16. ’'EOyKev, ip’ ols ifeivai, he made conditions, on which he said it was permitted, Dem. 505. 19. K areppdvovv . ., yybeva civ imxecpy- aai, they despised the foe, ( thinking that) no one woidd, attack, Hel. 4. 5. 12. 670. 2. Pule Y. The Inf. often forms an elliptical com¬ mand, request, counsel, salutation, exclamation, or question: 23 yoi 4>pd£eiv [sc. £'#eAe], do you [please to~\ tell me, PI. Soph. 262 e. Ila?5a o’ iyol XSo-cu A. 20 (so esp. in Horn.). Zeu ndrep, 7 ) A ’lavra Xa.\ely, ‘ 0 [grant] that either Ajax may draw the lot, H. 1/9 (cf. Zeu dva, 80 s riaaadai, f grant that I may punish,’ T. 351). To/Iww xatpav [sc. kc- XeiJw], I bid Ion hail, PL toil 530 a. _ ’Eye iraGeiv rd.be [sc. deiv&v ion), feu ! that I should suffer such things [is horrible], alas! yEsch. hum. 837. j3aacXev, Korepov Xeyeiv . . f) triyav [sc. XP 7 )’ 01 ’ xeXeveLs] ; Hdt. 1. 88. '’A beiXoi, nod 1'jj.ev; k. 431. Mene incepto desistere victam ? Virg. a. So often in proclamations, laws, &c.: Tods Qpaicas andvai [sc. /ceAcue- raL or 5et], it, is ordered that the Thracians depart, or the T. must s gybe ra oopara virepexciv (550 e) iii. 5. 7. Me7aXa eKTyoaro Xpvp-ara, rpiypeis, wore iXelv to eKeivoov irXoiov, ‘so as to take,’ i. e. ‘so that I can take,’ i. 4. 8. ’Etff <3 yy Kaieiv, ’Ecj)’ (3 Tt irXoia ovXXeyeiv (557). Oloi . . eipieodaif'Ocrov boKeiv • see 556 b, c, d. (b) 'i'vxpov Chore XoboaodaL eonv, it is cold [so as to bathe in] for bathing (cf. Xodoaodai fvxporepov ), Mem. 3. 13. 3. Haw yap yoi eyeXyoev wore eibevai, I took much pains [so as to know] to learn, Cyr. 6. 3. 19 (cf. eyeXe atrip eibevai Mem. 4. 7. 1). ’E7rot- yaa ware o6(ai, I had made [things so result that it should seem] it seem (feceram ut), i. 6. 6. "HfleX’ (bare yiyveodai Ta.de, wished that this should be, Eur. Hipp. 1327. (c) '£2? be ovvroyios (or ovveXovri, or ev (dpaxei, sc. Xhyco), eiireiv, ut breviter dicam, [I say this so as to speak] to speak briefly, CEc. 12. 19, Ages. 5. 3, 7. 1. '£2s eiros eiireiv PI. Gorg. 450 d, '£2s Xoyu) eiirai Hdt. 2. 15, '£2? eiireiv Th. 6. 30, [that I may speak the word, &c.] so to speak. £2s punpbv yeydXio eisdoai, to compare small with great, Th. 4. 36. '£2s eye ev yeyvijoOai, so far as I remember correctly, Hdt. 2. 125. d. Other modes are also used after these connectives, for the sake of greater precision, force, actuality, or independence of expression ; while it is here the especial office of the Inf. to describe, characterize, or modify something that precedes : K arefiaivov, bis eiri rov 'erepov ava(3aiveiv [y. 1. dva(3aiev), they were descending, so as to ascend the second [that they might ascend], iii. 4. 25. 0 vrios dyvwyovws ?x eTe • •> Chore . . eXirifere; are you so senseless, [that you hope] as to hope ? Dem. 25. 18. ’A piaios dcpeor^ei, Chore cpLXos yyiv ovbels XeXeL ferai, A. will depart, so that no friend will be left us, ii. 4. 5. K pavyrjv iroXXyv eiroiovv . ., (bare nal rods iroXeyiovs dtcotkiv • Chore . . 2cf>wyov • they made so much noise that even the enemy heard (characterizing the noise by showing its effect) ; [so that] and there¬ fore they fled (narrating the result as a fact in the history) : ii. 2. 17. See 655 a. e. '£2s and w0dvw to anticipate, with a different ellipsis : "Torepov . . y avrovs oitdocu, later than [it took place that they settled] their own settlement, Th. 6. 4. 11 . The Participle {Verb-Adjective). 673. The Participle is either circumstantial, complementary , definitive , or descriptive, that is, it either expresses some cir¬ cumstance or complement of the leading verb, or defines or de¬ scribes some associated person or thing. a. “One of the grammarians calls the Greeks lovers, 658]. — Farrar. 4)iXopeTo\oi ” [participle 396 SYNTAX. R. XXXV. -PARTICIPLE. § 674 . 674. 1. The Circumstantial Participle is distinguished according to the circumstance denoted, as time, cause, means, condition, concession, purpose, consequence, &c. ; and also as (a) preliminary, (b) contemporary, or (c) prospective, according as its action precedes, is simultaneous with, or follows, that of the leading verb. d. It is often translated into Eng. by a finite verb with a connective, an infinitive, a circumstantial adjunct, or an adverb (658). The Greek usually prefers a participle and verb, where the Eng. uses two verbs closely joined by ‘ and.' (e) As a preliminary participle, the Aor. is especially used ; though, for brevity, it is often translated by the Eng. Pres. The prospective participle is commonly in the Fut. ; and is often translated by the En». Infinitive. E. g., (a) Mdvdav 4X@wv, [having gone] go and learn, Ar. Nub. 89. K upos {nroXaP&)v roi/s fievyovras, o~uXXc£as (TTparevpia, ivoXiopKei Mt \yrov, C. received the exiles, and raising an army besieged II., i. 1. 7. Mera 88 2(7Wa olyop-cvov, after S. had gone (612), Hdt. 1. 34. (b) Oi Xr|t£dfi€Vot. 0€v 54 ovSe'v, nothing having been fixed, Th. 4. 125. Aiaxpbv bv to avnXeyeiv, as denial were base, Cyr. 2. 2. 20. Ao^avra 54 ravra, this having been accepted, Hel. 3. 1. 19 (cf. 5o^dvrs or wenrep (680) ; a use which seems due to a verb of thinking or speaking expressed or understood, or to the influence of an associate construction : 'ils pev a-TpaTT]'yrj as Ihey were advancing, tracks appeared, i. 6. 1. Et7rov, epwryaavros [sc. abrov], when he asked, they replied, iv. 8. 5. O vru 5’ exovrwv [sc. irpayparuv, 577 c], affairs standing thus, iii. 2. 10. "Tovros TroXXip [sc. rod dead, 571 e, 466. 1.], in a heavy rain, Hel. 1. 1. 16. "Akovtos (3apa wXdovos evSeov, he saw [there being need] that there was need of more, vi. 1. 31. E idevai crwotcrov, to know that it would be advantageous, Dem. 55. 2. (d) AAs lath [sc. &v], knoio that you arc safe, So])h. 0. C. 1210. — e dyXwain Karov [sc. ovra], ‘prove you [to be] vile,’ lb. 783. Meyttfros rvyxdvei Id. El. 46. (e) See f. f. A few verbs, as \av0dvw to escape notice, elude, <{>8dv« anticipate, avveo despatch, SiaXeiira) leave an interval, may either take complementary participles, or be themselves used as circumstantial participles ; and Aav- 0 avco may express concealment either from others or from one’s self, according to its object expressed or understood : Aadelv avrov aweXdinv, [to elude him departing] to depart without his knowledge, i. 3. 17. Tpe- cf)bp,evov eXavdavev, was secretly maintained, i. 1. 9 s. "Owms yy XdOys aeavrbv dyvo&v, that you may not be unconsciously ignorant, Mem. 3. 5. 23. ’EAaz >9ave fibasinv, he was fostering unawares, Ihlt. 1. 44. ' Owens /uy (pOacwai . . ol KlXlkcs raraXafibvres, that the Cilicians might not anticipate them in taking possession, i. 3. 14. O vk dv cpddvois . . Xlyuv, you cannot tell me too soon, i. e. tell me at once, Mem. 2. 3. 11. Oi )k ZepOaaav wvdb- pevoi . ., sal . . I)hoc, they no sooner heard than they came, Isoc. 58 b. lXXlfcu . . XaOovras sal dpwdaai tpddaavras, to seize unobserved and take by surprise, iv. 6. 11. "Awe wpdrrmv, make haste to do, Ar. PI. 413. ’ Avo¬ ir as rplx e (509 c) lb. 229. g. The Complementary Part, sometimes occurs with an impersonal ex¬ pression, or with an adjective and verb supplying the place of a simple verb. When thus connected, the real subject of the sentence is some¬ times implied in the Part.: IIoAe/roeo-ty dpeivov &rxai, it will be better for § G79. 399 DEFINITIVE. WITH elfli, kC. them [warring] to go to war, Til. 1. 118. ’E /mol “irpeiroi hv paXiara inpe- Xopevcp, it loould become me most of all to attend, CEc. 4. 1. Mecrrbs fjv Qvpoiipevos, I ions sated with passion, Sopli. 0. C. 768. AfjXos rjv avuv- pevos (573 c). IIoXAbs rjv Xiaaopeyos, lie was [much] earnest in beseeching, Ildt. 9. 91. 678. 3. The Definitive Participle is equivalent to a relative pronoun and finite verb , and is most frequently trans¬ lated by these. It is often used substantively, and may not unfrequently be translated by a noun, (a) It occurs chiefly with the article (the proper sign of this use, 520); but (b) sometimes without it, if the class only is defined. E. g., (a) r O t|"yricrdpevos ovdels earai, there will be no one ivho will guide us, ii. 4. 5. O l avropoX-qaavres, the deserters (cf. ol barepov eXyfidqaav), i. 7. 13. Tots yeivaptvois (cf. rots yovevai), the parents, Apol. 20. T bv lepbv KaXovpevov irbXepov, the so-called Sacred War. Th. 1. 112. TQ>v aXXcov top fiovXopevov, of the rest [him that] any one that wished, i. 3. 9. (b) "kiravra yap ToXpw he has persistently dishonored. Soph. Ant. 22. K-qpv^ayf $x €LV lh. 32. 400 SYNTAX. R. X., Y. PARTICIPLE, VERBAL. § G79. c. ) "Epxofxai with the Fid. Part, forms a more immediate Future. ”E pxo/ncu aTroOavoufxei'os vvvL, I am going to die now, PL Theag. 129 a. d. ) The Part, of a verb of motion with otyopai is a stronger form of expression for the simple verb. Thyero diruhv wktos, lie [departed going off] went off in the night, iii. 3. 5. Thyero aireXabvuv, rode off, ii. 4. 24. So Otyerat Oavwv Soph. Ph. 414 ; B?) cpebyiov, he fled, B. 665. e. We sometimes even find two participles joined : Aieairappcvovs ’ovra s ’ Adyva'uvv tovs fiXous cSUokou, ‘ being dispersed,’ Hel. 1. 2. 2. 680. Rule X. A Participle is often preceded by cos or coancp, chiefly to mark it as subjective; That is, as expressing the view, opinion, feeling, intention, or statement of some owe, whether in accordance with or contrary to fact. The Part, thus construed may be either (a) dependent or (b) absolute, (c) It often supplies the place of a finite verb or Inf.; and is sometimes complementary in force, though circumstantial in form (with words of thinking, saying, &c.). E. g., (a) FT epinXea ev air La eiyo^ a>s 'imcravTa, they blamed P. as having per¬ suaded [because, as they complained, he had persuaded], Th. 2. 59. 2iA- Xagflavei K vpov cos curoKTevwv (598 b). (b) IIap?) 77 etAe . ., a>s I'rri.povXev- ovros Tnra-cujjepvovs, he gave command, [as he would, T. plotting] as if T. were plotting, i. e. on the ground alleged (whether truly or not), that T. was plotting, i. 1. 6. Kara/cefuefta, wo-irtp e£ov, we lie, as if it were per¬ mitted, iii. 1. 14. (c) '{2s prjdh elSor* laOi pe, [know me as knowing] be assured that I know nothing, Soph. Pli. 253. '12s iroAepov ovtos, . . airayyeXG), I shall report [as I should, war existing] that there is war, ii. 1. 21. '12s epou odv ibvros, . . ovrco rpv yvivgyv £yere [so have your opinion, as if I were going] be assured that I shall go, i. 3. 6. 'H 8e yvcopy fy, cos . . e\Cbvra [sc. r a appara], the plan was that they should drive (675 d), i. 8. 10. ’ AveKpayov d>s ovdiv 8eov vi. 4. 22. 681. So the particles &re, otov, old, wcttc (Ion.), may precede the Part., especially in presenting a cause or other circumstance sls actual: K vpos, are irais Cov . ., ydero, C., as [he naturally would be] being a boy, was pleased, Cyr. 1. 3. 3. Ola 8y irals (piXoaropyos &v (pvaei, yairdlero lb. 2. ’JUXevOepubraTos, are Kai ry$ (pbaecos virapxouays, most noble, as his nature cdso was, Cyr. 6. 4. 4. III. Verbal in -reos (Lat. -ndus). 682. The passive verbal in -reos, expressing obligation or neces¬ sity , is often used impersonally , in the neut. sing, or plur., with eort* and from some verbs it can be only so used (571 e, 589; cf. Lat. -dum est ). In this use, it is equivalent to the Inf. act. or mid. with Set or xpy : 2/ceTrreoj/ ecrriV [= crKeirrecrdai Set], considerandum est, it is to be considered [= ice ought to consider ]. See i. 3. 11. ’ESoxet Stco/c- reov ui/cu, it seemed that they must pursue, iii. 3. 8. Hence it imitates this Inf. in two ways, as follows: Rule Y. Impersonal verbals in -rlav, or -rea, (a) govern the same cases as the verbs from which they are derived ; and (b) have sometimes the agent in the Acc., instead of the Dat. ( 458 ): § 085 . INTERJECTION. ADVERB. It. XXXVI. 401 (a) 'fts ireiariov dy KXedpyo), that they must obey Clearchus (455 g), ii. G. 8. Xldvra iroLyreov, we must do all things (572), iii. 1. 18 (of. iravra noiyrea § 458). Ov>s ov -jrapadorea rols ’A0T)vaiois ecrrtv, whom we must not give up to the Athenians, Th. 1. 86. Pwcukos ov8ap u)s yaayrea (408), Soph. Ant. G78.~ (b) K arafiareov odv ev pipe t <-k, &, at, ol, pv, da, lu, lav, lov, da eja, (pev, d>bir, euoi evoe, ovaL vai, trairal papse, arrarat, ororot, eXeXev. c. The other particles are construed as follows. A. The Adverb. 685. Rule XXXYT. Adverbs modify sen¬ tences, phrases, and words ; chiefly verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs : as 7 REV. gr. z -V 402 SYNTAX. ADVERBS. NEGATIVE. § 685. IlaXiv rjpihTrjaep, again he asked, i. 6. 8. ’0 pOia lcr)(vp«s, very steep, i. 2. 21. 'klyeXyyerws [xaXXov, more negligently, i. 7. 19. a. if an adverb proper modifies any other part of speech, it is through the included idea of a verb, adjective, or adverb : T^s . . -rraXiv /cara- fiaaeios, the descent back, Th. 7. 44 ( Kara^aipu /, to descend). ’E yireiplg jxaXXov, through better acquaintance, lb. (eyiretpos, acquainted). Typ ov 7 reptretyuro', the not blockading, Th. 3. 95. b. An adverb modifying a sentence or phrase is usually parsed as modifying the verb or leading word of the sentence or phrase ; while it may also give a special emphasis or bear a special relation to some other word (57 d, 59 d) : 'Hpets ye pudhyep, we at least are victorious, ii. 1. 4. ’Aptatos, . . kcu ovtos . . ireiparai, Ariceus, even he attempts, iii. 2. 5. ’Eyw pdv . . eTuzLvw i. 4. 16. IT pocreidwyaav Kcuirep elSores (674 f). c. Some classes of adverbs, specially termed particles, are chiefly char- acteristic in their use (684 a) : as, Negative ov, yy, not (regularly preceding the words which they modi¬ fy) ; Interrogative, Direct a pa, y, ov, yy, yCop, Indirect el, dpa, Ep. y, if, whether, yy whether not, Alternative wore pop . . y utrum . . an, el . . y, eire . . etre, Ep. y . . i), whether .. or; Contingent up, kc (618 s) ; Con¬ firmative 8y (389 d), oyra, SyOep, dal, i), yyp, rol (27 f), Ep. dyp, indeed, truly, surely, forsooth, pal, py, yd (476 d) ; Emphatic or Intensive ye, yovp (ye oSp), irep (389), /cat even, ou5x ijaaov [not less] more, ov iroXXoi few, ov kclXos base, ovx ydecos disagreeably: Et . . ovk egs Soph. Aj. 1131. Et dy roi ov Secret 0. 296. ’Eap . . ov (pyre PL Apol. 25 b. k. Some other cases occur in which ov appears to be used for pq, chiefly to negative a single word, or for stronger or more positive expres¬ sion (especially in contrast) ; or (1) pq for ov, chiefly on account of the general character of the sentence, or (m) for the sake of weaker or less positive expression : (k) Z yv de ovk avOpwirov /Stor, dAAa nvos rr\ev- povos, to live the life not of a man, but of some mollusk, PL Phil. 21 c. (1) ’Eav . . aio-0Ti creavrov ah eiobra, if you perceive yourself ignorant, Mem. 3. 5. 23. (in) Cf. 608 a, 654. n. Ov is the no of fact; pq, of feeling and conception; or, in philo¬ sophical language, ov is the objective, and pq the subjective negative. “ Ov negat rem ipsam; pq, cogitationem rei.” — Hermann. For ov and pq as interrogative particles, see 687. 687. Interrogative Particles, a. The chief are apa (Post- Homeric, a stronger form of dpa, accordingly) and q {indeed), (b) These do not themselves indicate the answer expected ; while dpa ov (or simply ov) implies that an answer is expected in the affirmative, but apa pq (or q pq, or simply pq, or pwv contracted from pq oSv), in the negative : LAp’ ovk cLv eirl irav fxdoi; would lie not resort to every means l iii. 1. 18. M?) i, Sid, Kara, yerd, and vnep, the Genitive and Accusative ; ini, napa, 7T€ pi, npos, and xmd, the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative. b. The Dative sometimes follows aptfn, ava, and pe-ra in the poets ; and aptjn even in prose, chiefly Ionic : ’Apapi re povaiKy, about music, Hdt. 6. 129 ; aycpl irXevpais TEsch. Pr. 71. ’Ara re vaveri, [up] in ships , Eur. Iph. A. 754. Mera irpcvTouri, among the first, A. 64. c. The eighteen words above mentioned (with their euphonic, poetic, * and dialectic forms, as ck for e£, 165, £vv for ervv, 170, evi for ev, irpoTt and ttotl for irpbs, 136 b, virai for bird, 136) are all which are com- 404 SYNTAX. R. XXXVII. — PREPOSITION. § G88. monly termed prepositions in Greek (from the use in 387), though other words may have a prepositional force (703 a). (d) J Ev and -irpo, by the addition of s (expressing motion or action , cf. 273 b), become ( evs , cf. 156, 154) els or es, and irpos (689 a, i). Els prevails in Att. prose, except Time.; but es in Ion. and Dor.; while the poets may choose according to the metre. e. To the prepositions governing the Acc., must be added the Ep. suffix -8e, to (cf. 252, 382) : OuXvyirovde, to Olympus, "AXade, A. 425, 308 (cf. irpos "OXvyirov 420). "Ai'dbsSe [= els “Aidos dbyov, 438 a] H. 330. It is some¬ times used pleonastically : "Ovde doyoude, to his house, a. 83. Ets aXade, into the sea, k. 351. For cos, see 711c. 689. The prepositions have primary reference to the rela¬ tions of place, and are used to express other relations by reason of some analogy, either real or fancied (many similar extensions of use appearing in our own and other languages). The use of the different cases with prepositions may be commonly re¬ ferred with ease to familiar principles in the doctrine of cases. E. g., 1. Place. Some prepositions merely show what place is referred to, while the relation to this place is marked by the case employed ; so that the same preposition may be used with different cases. From the place is expressed by the Gen.; into (or, with like sense, to) the place, by the Acc.; in or at the place by the Dat., or sometimes the Gen.; through the place, commonly by the Acc. Cf. 398, 433, 470 a, e. The following are the chief distinctions of place denoted by prepositions, with modes of notation : a. Within. ’Ev, Lat. in with Abl., [in the space within] in: ev MiX^rca, in M., i. 1. 7. Els, Lat. in with Acc., [into the space within] into: els iredlov, into a plain, i. 2. 22. J E(;, ex, [from within] oat of: ck rrjs xc5- pas, out of the land, i. 2. 1. Aid, akin to dvo and Lat. dis-, [through the space within, dividing it in two ] through: with Acc. poet.; did svya, through the wave, iEsch. Sup. 15 : commonly with Gen.: dia <$>pvylas, [in a line dividing] through Phrygia, i. 2. 6 ; 5l eXdaaovos, [through less] at less distance, Th. 3. 51. b. With. cum [in the place with] with: abv vyiv, with you, i. 3. 6. ’Atto ab, [from the place with] from: dir aXXrjXwv, from each other, i. 8. 10 ; edypevev air6 iinrov, he hunted [from a horse] on horseback, i. 2. 7. ['12s, to: ds fiacnXea, to the king, i. 2. 4. See 711 c.] c. Amid, among, hence with: MeTa, akin to ye a os medius, and Germ. mit: vcKpdv yerd, [in the midst of] among the dead, Eur. Hec. 209 ; yera Tpdas, into the midst of the Trojans, A. 460 ; yef tx VLa /3atVe, he ivent [to be among] after , ox followed the footsteps, y. 30. Mera irpdroiai (688 b). <1. Beside. Ilap a yev Kvpov, [from beside] from Gyrus, i. 9. 29 ; irapa Kvpw, [at the side of] with C., i. 4. 3 ; irapa Kvpov, [to the side of] to C., lb.; irapa ypv, [through the space beside] along the shore, vi. 2. 1 ; irap ocKlau, [beside] pasta house, vii. 4. 18. See i. 3. 7. e. About. ’ApcfG akin to ayl (irep'i ■) [about] in fear, Eur. Or. 825 ; ./Esch. Ch. 35. 692. 4. Comparison. n P° ye dWojp, before [more than] others, PI. Menex. 249 e. 'Y-rrep iXirida, above hope, Soph. Ant. 366 ; vnep alaav, beyond reason, I 1 . 59. Hep! tt&vtwp, superior to all, A. 287 (the greater surrounding the less) ; ire pi nXeiarov, of the utmost importance, i. 9. 7. IIpe7re /ecu 8id irdvriov, shone [through] among all, M. 104. napa nx aAAa £ya, [by the side of] in comparison with the other animals, Mem. 1. 4. 14 ; 7 rap’ oXLyov, of small account, vi. 6 . 11. Hpos to kXcos avT&v, [brought before] in comparison with their fame, Th. 1. 10. See § 511 a. 5. Number, Addition, Distribution. ’A|m}>i robs SnrxtAIous (531 d). Hep! e(3doyr]KovTa, about 70, Th. 1. 54. Kara nevTr,KovTa, [according to] about 50, Hdt. 6. 79. Els ovs, to the number of 1,000, i. 8. 5. 'Yirep reaaepdKOvra avdpas, above 40 men, Hdt. 5. 64. ’End rerrdpwp, [the line of battle resting on four ranks] four deep, i. 2. 15 ; epovos ini povp, mur¬ der upon murder, Eur. Ipli. T. 197. Hpos tovtols, in addition to these, iii. 4. 13. ’Ava iKarov, [according to or by the hundred] a hundred each, iii. 4. 21. Kar eiuavrov, [by the year] yearly, iii. 2. 12 ; /cad’ era, one by one, 4. 7. 8 ; /card l dvr], by nations, i. 8. 9. 693. 6. Origin, Source, Material, &c. reYords a7rb A ayaparov , sprung from 1)., ii. 1. 3. Hpos narpos, [from the father] on the father s side, Isoc. 35 c. d’ds . . ei< Atos, a light from Jove, iii. 1. 12 ; e/e £uXiov, [out of] of wood, Hdt. 1. 194. Xireiv Trap a tovtov, to ask from him, i. 3. 16. ’O XLyot. a-rro noWwv, few [from] of many, Th. 1. 110 . Ot . . ck tQv noXegiwv, those [out] of the enemy, i. 7. 13. 7. Protection (defenders stand before, over, around). Mdxeo- dai . . Trpb ywacKLov, to fight [before] for their wives, 0. 56 ; npo vyCbv, in your behalf, vii. 6 . 27. Cf. Eng. fore and for. XlaybyevoL irrrep Kdpou, fighting [over] in defence of C., i. 9. 31. ' Xpovovrai Trepl tckvwv, fight for their young, M. 170. ’Eyu re Inrep 'ZevOov, I in behalf of Seuthcs, vii. 7. 3. 694. 8 . Cause, Motive, End, Atm. ’Atto rotirov, [from] on ac¬ count of this, Hdt. 2 . 42. ’E£ vnofias, [out of] from suspicion, ii. 5. 5. Aid nLarews, through confidence, iii. 2. 8 . Xapas iiiro, [under the in¬ fluence of] from joy, TEseh. Ag. 541. Aid saipa, [through] by reason of the heat, i. 7. 6 ; 5i yyas, through our agency, vii. 7. 7. Hep! vlktjs, [about] for victory, i. 5. 8 . "EttAwo^ end Xiov, sailed [upon] for Chios (430), Hdt. 1 . 164 ; irri Qavdrp, for death, v. 7. 34 ; iiri Xeiav, for plun¬ der, v. 1 . 8 . IlXew/' . . perd sailing [after] in quest of copper, a. 184. Els top 7 ToXepiov, [tending into] for war, i. 9. 5. Hpos apiarov, for breakfast, i. 10. 9. 9. Action. This is commonly conceived of as proceeding out of the agent, or from him, or from his sphere, or from under his influence (€k, aTro, Trapa, irpos, vtto, 586, d, f). 695. 10. Means, Instrument, Manner. ‘Atto Xya-rdas, [from] by means of robbery, vii. 7. 9. ’Ek /Sects, by force, Soph. Ph. 563. Evv cu’xpb?, with the spear, dEsch. Per. 755 ; avv rip 8up.yv, as to intellect, Soph. O. T. 1087 ; /car’ avOp&nwv asonei, consider in respect to men, PI. Phaedo 70 d. npos ae, towards you, vii. 7. 30 ; npos raura, in view of this, upon this, i. 6. 9. ’Es (jn\lav, in respect to friendship, ii. 6. 30. 698. a. In many connections the preposition may be either em¬ ployed or omitted, at pleasure : Iv pavyrj no\\rj, 2bv noXXrj Kpavyrj, with great clamor, i. 7. 4 ; iv. 4. 14. "Slanep Se ns ayaWerai €tti deoaepelg . ., otirio MfVuv yyaWero rp fanarav bvvaadat ii. 6. 26. See § 487. (b) In Greek, as in other languages, prepositions with their cases form many adverbial phrases. See 382 a, 695. c. In composition, a preposition usually shows its original meaning, or one that is easily derived from it : arafara, els, es, dux, npo)fa.'ao}, to go up {down, in, out, through, before) ; saraveow I [nod down] consent, ava- vetiw, I [nod up] refuse. Its force should be carefully observed, even when its special translation is not required, (d) In composition, the older cv is sometimes used instead of the derived form els (688 d) : ep-nlnro:, eypaX- Xu>, fall or throw into or upon. 699. Rule Z. A preposition in composition often gov¬ erns the same case as when it stands by itself. a. A preposition in composition often retains its distinct force and government as such, according to this rule, (b) But oftener it seems to be regarded as a mere adverb (cf. 703 b), and the compound is con¬ strued just as a simple word would be of the same signification. See 486. (c) Hence the preposition may be repeated, or a similar preposition in¬ troduced. (d) This adverbial force is particularly obvious in tmesis, and (e) when the preposition is used with an ellipsis of its verb (chiefly €xtl). E. g., (a) Swo regxj/ev atn-rj arparuvras, he sent with her soldiers, i. 2. 20. Hence compounds of KaTa, against, often take the Gen. (cf. 689 m, 696) : KaTa5iKct(w epavrov, I give judgment against myself, vi. 6. 15. Oudevbs 408 SYNTAX. R. XXXVIII. -CONJUNCTIONS. § 099 . KareykXa ii. 6. 23. (1>) ’EimrXevcras airy, sailing against him, Hel. 1. G. 23 (cf. TrXelv eir avroijs lb. 1. 11). (e) ’ EweipCcvro €l6€ipas, Kara b' ^KTtivas, you have ruined and slain me, Eur. Hipp. 1357. ’Avr’ eb -imcreTai PI. Gorg. 520 e. (j) Il6{xv{/avTos, tD ybvai, peVa, ‘having sent me for you,’ Eur. Hoc. 504. ’AttoXci voXlv, diro 8k varkpa, destroy the city and his father, Id. Here. 1055. So, ’flpvvTo 8’ . . ' Ayayeyvwv, dv [sc. tipvvTo] b’ 'Obvaevs, then rose Agamemnon and [up] Ulysses, T. 267. ’'EXi-ttov . ., Ka8’ be E. 480 (707 c). (k) On the other hand, napqv sal KpLTo^ovXos, . . r)v be kcll KT7jpa (624 e) ; to cne, &os until, 8tc since, (p) Other Adverbs, irpiv, pe'xpt, &XP L > ir Xr|v. (q) Numerals, pe'v, 8e (supposed to be related to gia, duo, lienee in the first place, in the second place, c, 685 c), of which gyv and 8y are longer forms, and yglv, yde, l) gyv, rjdy, gevroi com¬ pound forms, (r) Verb, el if, referred by some to the Imv. la grant (el ypd(pei, grant he is writing, 631 a), as if to give (“ Gif ye want a friend,” Burns). 702. a. "On (that, the thing which) is stronger, more positive, di¬ rect, or actual in expression than cos (how, the manner in which). Hence, in indirect discourse, 8rt chiefly introduces what is simply said and not questioned ; cos, what is described, or what is said but questioned, or what is not said, or what is presented as thought or not thought: Ae'yei cos a7re- Koiryaav . ., Kal on reOvdcn . . dXkoL, he states liow they had been beaten off, and that others are dead, iv. 2. 17. ’EveKaXovr egol, cos gaWor gl\oc got, they brought against me the charge (which 1 do not admit), that I cared more, vii. 7. 44. Ou r ouro Xe'*yc*>, cos ou Set, I do not say this, that one ought nut, REV. GR. 18 SYNTAX.-PARTICLES. 410 § 702. Cyr. 5. 4. 20. Nopa^ovcrt, . . d>s o"H (paarros xaA/cedei, they think that Vul¬ can forges , Th. 3. 88. b. A conjunction often connects tlie sentence which it introduces, not so much to the preceding sentence as a whole, as to some particular word or phrase in it: llpocr(3aWovcn . . KaraXurovTcs &4>oSov tois TroXe/xiois, el {BovAolvto ^evyciv, they attack, leaving a ivay of escape for the enemy, if they should wish to flee, iv. 2. 11. c. In many connections, two forms of construction are equally admis¬ sible, the one with, and the other without, a connective. The two forms are sometimes blended. See 511, 644, 659 e, 671. A conjunction is sometimes used in Greek, where none would be usual in Eng.; e. g., when another adjective follows ttoAvs : IIoAAd re sal eiTLTydeLa 8ie\ey ovto, they conversed on many [and] fit topics, v. 5. 25. A twofold construction is sometimes admissible, according as a word is regarded as belonging (d) to a compound part of a sentence, or (e) to a new sentence : (d) llXova loot epip pbv av . . y cpol ididovs, you would give to a richer man than I [am], Cyr. 8. 3. 32. ’E/c oeivoreptov r} TotcovSe eVw- Oycrav Th. 7. 77. (e) Tots . . pidXXov aKpa£ovv Si apieivov, y CKeivoi, to pueXXov irpoopwp.evwv Dem. 287. 27. So, even with a connective adverb : (d) Kvpip . ., Coairep (TKvAaKi -yevveua), dvaKXa^ovTL, C. crying out, as a generous hound [barks], Cyr. 1. 4. 15. (e) "E|ecrrt 6\ toenrep 'H-ye\o\os, ypdv Xeyeiv Ar. Ran. 303. OBSERVATIONS. 703. i. Interchange. In Greek, as in other languages, the uses of the particles are often interchanged. Thus, 1.) a. Adverbs sometimes take a case, as prepositions; (b) prepositions are sometimes used without a case, as ad¬ verbs, especially in Horn, and Hdt. (npo? even in Att. prose) ; (c) the same particle is used both as an adverb and as a con¬ junction, or as a connective and a non-connective adverb, e. g. feat, fie, prj, npiu, coy (G85 C, 701): (a) See 405 s, 436 d, 445 c, 450. Horn, uses el'crw and &rco as protracted forms for els : 'Ayayytnu &rw nXialyv, ‘into the tent’; TAtor efcrca, ef. ds "IAtov • Q. 155, 145, 143. Adverbs so used (chiefly with the Gen.) have been called improper prepositions (688 c). (b) Tdfie Xiyco, dpaaco re irpos [sc. rovTip], this 1 say, and will do it [in addition to this] too, vEsch. Pr. 73. Upos d’ £ti iii. 2. 2. ’Ev be [sc. tovtols], and meanwhile, Soph. O. T. 27. Ilepi, [above others] eminently, 6. 44. (c) Iv vpov hi (and) peTcnrep.- Trerai • . . /cat aTparyyov hi (on the other hand, also) avrov airbb ei£e i. 1. 2. Evra 5b £Ae£e, Elra ttoXXol, i. 3. 2, 5. 12. TaOra eiroiovv, p.e'\pi ctk6tos eyevero iv. 2. 4 (cf. 445 c). Ti/mt/c^s ovveKa, [because of] for the sake of a woman, iEsch. Ag. 823 (§ 557 a ; cf. 701 j). d. In the connection of sentences, 7rptv is variously used : (a) as a con¬ junction, with a finite mode, or (f3) as a 'preposition, with the Inf. (the Subj. and Opt. good Attic only after a negation expressed or implied, and here the Inf. rare in Att.); (y) as an adverb with I) and a finite mode or (8) even the Inf. (less Att.), or (e) in Horn, with fixe; or (£) as a correla¬ tive (and so Trapos, xrpoo-Gev, irpoTepov) preceding another x-piv, chiefly in negative clauses and oftenest in the Epic : (a) Mrj orevage vplv pdOpi* $ 705. INTERCHANGE. CONSTRUCTS PILEGNANS. 411 (611 (1). (|3) ’EOvero irpiv tivi elirctv, he sacrificed before speaking to any one, v. 6. 16. (y) II pin y . . i- yevovro, [sooner than] before they had come. Ages. 2. 4. (8) Uplv ?) . . acrcu, before he satiates, E. 2S8. (e) lTpiv y ore . . 5u>::ev, until [when] he gave, M. 437. {%) Ov8e rts ZtX y -irpiv melv -irpiv Xdxf/cu, ncr did any one dare to drink [previously] before offering, II. 480. Mi) irpocrSev KaraXvcrai . ., -irpcv, not to make peace, before, i. 1. 10. e. When two prepositions are combined, which occurs most frequently in the Epic, either one or both of the prepositions are used adverbially, or one of the prepositions with its substantive forms the complement of the other : ’Aprpi ire pi Kpyvyv, round about the fountain, B. 305. At ex peydpoio k. 388. 'Airoirpb, [forth] far aioay, II. 669. II ape^rov . . dpyv- piov, ‘besides,’ Hdt. 3. 91. 'Tir ck (HeXbwv, from beneath the weapons, A. 465. f. The prepositions may be regarded as essentially adverbs of place used with a complement. Strictly, however, the separation of the parts of speech does not belong to the earliest period of language (359 d) ; and it continues least complete in the particles, from their defect of inflection. 704. 2.) One preposition or adverb is often used for an¬ other (or a preposition is used with one case for another), by reason of something associated or implied. This construction (especially frequent with ev, eh, and eV, 689 a) is termed, from its elliptic expressiveness, constructio proegnans. Thus, A sign of motion for one of rest, (a) Preposition : Oi Ik rps dyopds . . tepuyov [e/c for ev, by reason of ihpvyov following], those in the market fled [from it], i. 2. 18. ’Ek iraaaaXbcpiv Kpbpacrev (poppiyya, he hung the lyre on the peg [so that it hung down from it], 0. 67. Ol curb tcDv koto- crTpiopdriov rots aKovriois . . ixpd>vro, ‘on the decks,’ Th. 7. 70. 'Erpavy Xts . . els oSbv, a lion appears [having come into] in the way, O. 275. ITa- prjaav els SapSets i. 2. 2. Els dvdysyv seipeOa, we lie [having come into] in a state of compulsion, Eur. Iph. T. 620. In lustra jacuisti, Plant. (b) Adverb : TAv p i roLyaere ravra; r?,ae?s . . esiXelipoyev, if then you tcill not do this, we shall desert, Hdt. 4. 118. (b) The frequent use of yap in specification, where we should use that, namely, now, &c.: Tc38e SyXov i)v • rfj ykv yap npoadev y ye pa . . tKeXeve, was plain from this, that on the preceding day he com¬ manded, ii. 3. 1. (c) The use of Kat after a word of sameness, likeness, or anticipation: Tf) aiiT-rj yXdnrarj xpl° VTai Kal FeAwrot, they use the same language [and] as the Geloni (eadem ac), Hdt. 4. 109. Ovx opoicos Treiroiri- Kdcn Kal "Oyypos, ‘ in like manner with H.’ (similiter atque), PI. Ion 531 d. Cf. 451. Ovk &f>0acrav irvdoyevoL Kal -qKOV (677 f). 706. ir. a. Adverbs and prepositional adjuncts are often used sub¬ stantively or adjcctively, in any case required: Substantively, Nom. t Hv . . -uTrep qp. 10-0 . . ’ApsaSes, above half were Arcadiam, vi. 2. 10. Gen. ’E/c rCbv apcfA tovs fruplovs, from the about 10,000, v. 3. 3. Mexpt tot€, until then (445 c), Hdt. 6. 34. Acc. "Ora*' Se toStojv &\is ?xv Te , when you have enough of this, v. 7. 12. Eis yev dira| Kal fipaxvv xpbvov, for once and a short time, Dem. 21. 1. Adjcctively, HeAracrrat 8e ap.({>l tovs SurxiXiovs, about 2,000 targeteers, i. 2. 9. See 526 s. (b) An adverb and a preposition governing it are often written together as a compound word: ’Ecraet, forever, Eur. Sup. 374. “ Eyn-poadev iii. 4. 2. HapavriKa Cyr. 2. 2. 24. llponaXai Ar. Eq. 1155. 707. hi. ’ In the doctrine of particles, especially connec¬ tives, the figures of syntax hold an important place : thus, a. Ellipsis. Ellipsis here consists either (a) in the omission of the par¬ ticles themselves, or (#), far more frequently, in that of words, and even whole sentences, related to them. a. A particle belonging alike to two parts of a sentence is either (a) ex¬ pressed in both (the most distinct and emphatic form) ; or (b) in the first only ; or (c) in the second only (more rarely and chiefly in poetry) ; or (d) is sometimes even omitted in both. (e) A like variety obtains in respect to other classes of words, and (f) when more than two parts of the sentence are affected, (a) ’Ev Aiyunrcp Kal ev St/ceXtp, in E. and in S., Mem. 1. 4. 17. (b) IIpos re j/vxv xal daXiry, to cold and heat, lb. 2. 1. 6. ’Ev ru xpovcp , ylya, you have no morj than any other one, FI. Thecet. 209 a. (f) See g. § 710. ELLIPSIS. 413 g. Copulative conjunctions are often omitted (especially if more than two particulars are joined) ; (h) less frequently, those of other classes, (i) When not joined by a connective, a clause is sometimes in 'parenthetic or inverted order, or placed in apposition with another clause, (g) llbdov Trarpiduv, yovewu, yvmiKv, iraiSevp, from longing for country, parents, vnves, children, iii. 1. 3. (h) ’Oyvvw . . [sc. on] t Bvogyp, I swear [that] I sacrificed, vi. 1. 31. (i) T aura, . . figpvpu . ., Zwadop Cyr. v. 4. 31. ’AcpeCKfirjv, bgoXoyQ), I rescued him, I confess, vi. 6. 17. j. In annexing several particulars, the Eng. more frequently uses the copulative with the last only ; but the Greek, with all or none : HXLpBol Kai |ih\a tail Kepapos (496 c). Cf. d, g. k. A secondary connective is sometimes used without its primary (66): 'OyoLovs fuv (piXoaocpoLS, like philosophers indeed [but not philosophers], PI. Hep. 475 e. 708. (3 . Connected sentences especially abound in ellipsis, from the ease with which the omission can be supplied from the connection. E. g., observe the frequent ellipses, 1.) In replies : “'Opfrs fie . .“’Opw.” “Doyou see me?” “I see.” Eur. Hipp. 1395. Reply is made in various forms ; as, (a) by repeating the most prominent word or part of the question, or a substitute for this, with the frequent addition of particles to modify the answer or make it more emphatic : (b) by the mere use of particles of different degrees of strength ; as Affirmative vaL, irapv ye, napv yep odv, Traprcjs 8rj, yaXurra, Kai ydXa, aepoSpa ye, &c.; Negative ov (yrj), ov Srjra, ovSayCos, rjKUTra, &c.: (c) by asking another question, or by assigning a reason ; as, irus; [how can it be so?] by no means, -rrus yap ov ; tL yap; ri yyp; “ Aeyeis “0 u yap (ppovovvra ere fiXeirw •” ‘[Yes] for I see’; Soph. 0. T. 625: (d) by other forms of expressing assent or dissent; as epyyi, ov eppyi, tern ravra, Kai tovto, Zywye, ovk Sywye, v'p top Aia, &c. e. In a dialogue or address, a speaker often commences with a connec¬ tive (most frequently an adversative, distinctive, or causal conjunction), from reference to something which has been expressed or which is mutually understood : ’AXX’ opdre, but you see, iii. 2. 4. ’AXXa . . Xey ets, well, you say, ii. 1. 20. ’Eyco S’ ovtco yiyp&crKcc iv. 6. 10. Ofet "yap croi yaxAaOai top adeXcpop ; i. 7. 9. (f) In like manner, the Yoc. is often fol¬ lowed by a connective : ’f2 yvvai, 6poya 8e - 487. 414 SYNTAX. r ARTICLES. § 710. Et fiev av tl s ijicovcra, K. pI\\ei, or IjKovaa, otl K. peXXet], as I heard from some one, [that] C. is about to come, vi. 4. 18. 'A vyp 68' yap /cat raura, . . ol8a pbv yap [for ipd yap, ol8a, or epd, ol8a yap] ii. 5. 12. See iii. 2. 11. (b) Kat el . . if [for /cat et], both if . . [or] and if, Th. 6. 64. Te . . eVetra Se, both . . [but then] and , v. 5. 8. ' Aytta piv . . /cat [for apa <5e] i. 9. 16 s. 0 ore . . be vi. 3. 16. c. After a connective, a distinct sentence often takes the place of a part of a sentence, and (d) sometimes the reverse : (c) "A Wcp re rpoirip ireipa- eravres, /cat ppx aV! l v 'irpocrtjyayov, both attempting in other toays, and [they brought up] bringing up an engine, Th. 4. 100. See i. 10. 12 ; ii. 1. 7 ; vii. 2. 2. (d) IT apypeXovv . ., oure yap . . didovres [for eSiSoaav, as if yap had been omitted], they slighted them, [not giving] for they did not give, Th. 1. 25. (e) So Part, for Inf.: "H cud to 4>evyeiv, dW-rj eiriirto-ovo-a, either from fleeing or attacking another, Th. 7. 70. 717. iv. The Greek especially abounds in combinations of particles, and in elliptical phrases having the power of particles. The use of these sometimes extends farther than their origin and structure would strictly warrant. E. g„, a. ciXXcos t€ kcu, both othenvise and in particular, especially: OvSev vo- plfa dvSpl, aXXws re /cat d/ryorn, kclXXlov elvai XTyua vii. 7. 41. b. SfjXov oti, it is evident that, evidently, et) 618’ otl, 618’ otl, edef ljO' otl, and similar phrases, which are often inserted in sentences (quite like adverbs), or annexed to them : Td pbv Srj Kvpov SyXov 6'rt ovtu s e^et i. 3.9. Our 'dv vpels, ed old’ 6tl, ejradaaade Dem. 72. 24. c. el 8£ purj, but if not, otherwise, used even after negative sentences : Mr; 7tolt], if he wishes, let him boil; if the contrary, let him do, PI. Euthyd. 285 c. d. |atj tl ye, not to [say aught surely] mention, i. e. much less, nedum : Ou/c evL . . rots (piXoLS eirLTaTTCLv . ., pi) tl ye Sy rots Oeols Dem. 24. 21. e. ov yap aXXa, for it is not otherwise, but, i. e. for indeed: Ov yap aXX’ 7) yi) (dig. e'X/cet, for indeed the earth forcibly attracts , Ar. Nub. 232. f. ov |xe'vToi, ciXXa, ov prjv aXXa, yet no, but, i. e. nevertheless: 'O l-inros . . pL k pod nane lvov t^eTpaxyXiaev • ov pyv a’XX’ iirbpeLvev o Kvpos Cyr. 1. 4. 8. DIRECT ORDER OF ARRANGEMENT. 417 § 718 g. oi\ fm, /xy otl, ov /xbvov otl, ovx oaov, ovx oVcoj, /it] ottcvs, ovx olov, I do not say that, not to say that, kc., i. e. not only, or not only not: ’'Axpy&TOL yap Kai ywad-iv . ., /xy otl dvopacn, for they are useless even to women, not to say men, Pl. Rep. 398 e. Qv’x otl /xovos 6 Kplrcov ev yavxig- yv, aXXa Kai ol ti is sometimes although [not be¬ cause, denying an inference which might be drawn]: ’Eyyecyucu /xy eirtAy- aeadaL, ovx ° TL iralfrei Kai. bv, traduces C. to his brother , i. 1. 3. AiScvaiv awu yvpiovs 8a- peiKotis, gives him 10,000 darics, i. 1. 9. 1.) An infinitive follows the principal verb ; (m) a 'participle follows or precedes it, according to the natural order of the thought, (n) Coordinate sentences follow each other according to the order in which they lie in the mind, (o) Substantive and adjective clauses, except the indefinite rela¬ tive (641), follow the words upon which they depend, (p) Adverbial clauses may follow or precede the principal clauses, according to the nat¬ ural order of the thought ; and (q) are sometimes inserted in them, for the sake of a closer connection. E. g., (1, m) 2 v\\e£as arparevya . . e-rreLparo KdTa-yeiv, having raised an army, he (then) endeavored to restore, i. 1. 7. 8ee 571 f. (n) 'O Se ireWerai re /cat avX\ay(3avei, and he both be¬ lieves and (as a result) apprehends, i. 1. 3. (o, p, q) ’Exetc^ Se Kupos e/caAet, \af3ii>v vyas enopevbyyv, "iva, et rt Seoiro, onpeXoiyv aurov, avO' £ov ed tiradov vS eKelvov i. 3. 4. r. An order different from the preceding is termed, in general, indirect, varied, or abnormal; or, more particularly, inverted, divided, parenthetic, mixed, confused, Ac., as the case may be. See 71. t. If a complex or compound sentence is so arranged that there is no complete sense without the final clause, the structure is often termed periodic ; but otherwise, loose : Et do neb aoi, arei-ye (631 a). SpQ avrois, ear Sey tl (631 c). The Greek well illustrates the progress, in advancing civilization, from the looser to the closer connection of thought. Among ancient languages the Latin, and among the modern the German, are remarkable for the extent to which they exhibit the periodic structure. 719 . The order of the sentence is varied, chiefly, a.) To render certain words more emphatic or prominent , or (b) through the attraction or repulsion of other words. (a) a. The beginning and close of the sentence have a special promi¬ nence ; and of other places, the earlier are in general more favorable to emphasis than the later. It is but natural, that a sentence should com¬ mence with that which is most prominent or foremost in the mind, and that it should then proceed with that which is closely related to this, or next in prominence ; while the last word leaves the freshest impression. E. g., 0\)iroT€ epei otiSeis, NEVER shall any one say, i. 3. 5. Mfjviv aetbe . . ov\o(Jievr|v, sing the fatal icrath, A. 1. "AvSpa yoi evveire, MoDaa, tto- XvTpoTTov a. 1. Anna virumque cano, Virg. llepl X) pbvrov tovtoxh i. 6. 6. p. Any unusual order attracts attention ; and in prose, commonly ex¬ presses emphasis or emotion : 0 vk avOpwirtov airopCbv |3appdpuv, not from want of mere men,—barbarians, i. 7. 3. Ovirep avrbs evena i. 9. 21. (■y) Hence the frequent hyperbaton in earnest adjuration : 'H pur ei-rre a) irpos Aios MeXijTe, tell us, by Zeus, 0 Meletus, PI. Apol. 25 c. See 476 b. (8) The address is sometimes emphatically placed before a general con¬ nective ; while a subject is sometimes deferred to be rendered emphatic by the adverb KaC: "Ektop, arap - pe l oe tov aycova sal Kvpos, and even C. xoitnessed the games, lb. 10. (b) c. The desire of connecting kindred or contrasted words as closely as possible often varies the order ; while a connection is avoided that would offend taste or might lead to mistake : llapa tfuXqs cJjiXo) (ptpeLv yuvcuKos avSpf, to bring from a dear wife to a■ dear husband, vEseli. Ch. 89. Kat eirolow oi/tcos ovtoi i. 1. 11. See 541 h, 567 d. (£) If a word modi¬ fying the verb comes early in the sentence, it often attracts the verb to a §719. VARIED ORDER. 419 place before the subject : ’EvTatOa qo-av Ktdpai, here were villages (6), i. 4. 19. ’EttcI 5e Tjo-0€vei Aapelos, and when 1). was sick, i. 1. 1. (ip A particle is sometimes attracted from its proper place : Ovk old’ &v el irel- aaip-i, I know not whether I could persuade {rrdaaLpu civ, 621 a), Eur. Med. 941. Kai vvv on noXiopKodvrai, and that they are now besieged, vi. 3. 11. 'VjKppv^ev, Sims hv a A a) . ., on Treirpdaerat, lie proclaimed that whoever might be taken should be sold (on yielding to the attraction of nenpaaerai, perhaps the rather to avoid dans), vii. 1. 36. ''On or cos, that, is not un- l'requently so placed after a dependent clause : i. 6. 2 ; ii. 2. 20 ; vii. 1.11. c.) Ill conformity to the natural order and connection of the thoughts ; or (d) to present sooner an outline of these, some details being deferred. Thus, (c) Aapcio-u Kal IlapvcrdnSos ylyvovrai iraldes 8vo (412 ; the well-known parents being naturally mentioned before their children). See £. (0) A word referring or corresponding to what is contained in the preceding sen¬ tence, lias commonly a leading place, as introducing the new thought and connecting the thoughts : '0 per odv npeaftbrepos napkv ervyxave • Kiipov (corresponding to it pea ftvr epos) be pier an e general and rr)s dpxgs, qs (refer¬ ring to dpxps) avrov aarpdnyv enolyae 1 Kal crrpaTipyov (corresponding to oaTpaKrjv) 58 avrov anebei^e navrojv, 8 croi (referring to navrvjv) els Kaarco- \ov neblov adpolfovrai. ’Avapatvei (the result of yeranepnerai) odv 6 Ku- pos. i. 1. 2. (i) When a question is made without an interrogative ex¬ ponent, the predicate, as in Eng., often leads, as the part on which the force of the question most directly falls : TeOvrjKe <&l\nnros ; is P. dead l Dem. 43. 10. (k) A word pointing to a following sentence has naturally a late place : Ataftaivovres a> 8 e, crossing as follows, i. 5. 10, See 544. (d) ’EvTCuiOa a<|)LKV€iTai ’Eirvaija, 17 ’Zvevveaios 7 vvr], rod KlXIkcvv ftaaiXeivs_, irapd Iv dpov, here comes E., the wife of S., king of the Cilicians, to C., i. 2. 12. An outline is here first presented in ’Evravda (6) dv ar), 574 ; a>, 484 ; &v, 621 ; ov, p.rj, 685 c ; SfjXov oti, kc., 717 b; ’A TTLKys es Oivor/v, kc., 418 a ; Zeugma, 497. — For the minutiae of ar¬ rangement in Attic prose, the student is referred to Professor Short’s learned Essay, prefixed to Professor Drisler’s greatly improved edition of Yonge’s English-Greek Lexicon. f. In proportion to the use which a language makes of inflection to mark the offices and relations of words (63), is its freedom of arrangement for the impressive and melodious expression of thought and feeling. Our own language is consequently among those which are the most closely con¬ fined to the logical order; and the French is confined even more closely than the English. Among those languages which have the greatest free¬ dom, are the Greek and Latin ; and it is to this freedom that we must ascribe, in no small degree, the surpassing beauty of classic composition. ‘‘It is impossible to read a page of Demosthenes, or Cicero, or Virgil, without seeing the immense rhetorical power which they are able to corn- man 1 by a mere variation in the order of construction. It is almost § 724. PARTS OF COMPOUND WORDS. 421 impossible to render in an analytical language the matchless force of such expressions as ’Ey 8b \a£, irpd^is, 5iu>pu£. b. ) In paroxytones, if the last vowel is short , the vowel of the penult is also short ; and, on the other hand, if the vowel of the penult is long, the last vowel is also long : as in yacpados, Kaptuvos, %X aytbos • Ayda, (poiul^, KUiyVS. 728 . B. Inflection. In the common affixes of declension and conjugation, the doubtful vowels are short, except cases of contraction, -a in the Sing, of Dec. 1, and dert for vaX in the nude Present. Thus, Dec. 1, Gen. sing, and Acc. pi. -as, Nom. du. -d (13, 122), Aor. Pt. -payis, -Idos. (d) In a few other words : as, id pas, -ar os * i pap, -papas - yptf, ypviros. — None of these words are neuters in -a, -aTos : or pures , except ypads, ypabs, and vavs, vabs : or labials, except a few monosyllables, in which tt is the stem- mark, as pip, plirbs ’ ydp, yvirbs. 2. Monosyllabic themes are long : his, tubs • yds, yvos • 7 rvp, 7 rvpbs. Except the pronoun ris (208 d). — In accordance with this analogy, the neuter irdv (23) is lengthened. 3. Nouns in -awv, and in -iwv, G. -iovos, have commonly the a and 1 long: oirdwv, -ovos • but A evKaXiaiv, -wvos). For comparatives in -uov, see 260 b. 730 . Special Rules of Conjugation. 1. Before the open af¬ fixes (303), — (a) a is short; except in idoyai heal, ndw, icXdco (309 b), and sometimes in the Epic and lyric poets for the sake of the metre, (b) 1 is commonly long : kovloj cover with dust, irpiw to saw ; but diw (1), iadiw, Stota, ZrAov from tuvio (50). (c) v is variable: avow, Xvoj, Ovu (v), eppvyv from ptu (50). 2. Before the regular close affixes, — (d) In lingual and liquid verbs, the doubtful vowels are short,: as, ibplcra (39 d), KcxfiKa, eKX'iOyu (304 a); except fdpiOto weigh down, F. fipicru). (e) In pure verbs, a is short , except when the theme ends in -aw pure, or -pdeo ; 1 is commonly long ; 424 PROSODY.-QUANTITY. § 730. and v variable: ZcnraKa, ecKebdaa (310 c, e), but eider a, eOypdOyv (310); ericra (310), but tpfhcrco, ecpfiyyv (50) ; &vvx/.uos oblique) ; the Epitrite, as containing still an addition to the third long foot ; while the Cretic, Ionic, and Molossus are of local origin. “Trochee | trips from | long to | short. From long to long, in solemn sort, Slow Spoil | dee stalks ; | strong foot ! | yet ill able Ever to | come up with | Dactyl trisyllable. Iam|bics march | from short | to long. _ With a leap | and a bound | the swift An|apsests throng.” Coleridge. RHYTHM, FEET, ARSIS. 427 § 742 . 741. The long syllables are naturally pronounced with a greater stress of the voice than the short. This stress is termed arsis, ( lipais , elevation ), while the alternate weaker tone is termed thesis (deo-tr, depression). These terms are also ap¬ plied to the parts of the rhythm which are thus pronounced. a. The arsis (also termed metrical ictus or rhythmic accent) is here marked thus ( 1 , ', or to indicate greater force, ). b. As one long syllable is equal to two short, the partial substitution of vh — for _L in the arsis { resolution ), and of — for — _ in the thesis (con¬ traction), may be made without affecting the rhythm. In this way, as the short syllables have more vivacity, ease, and lightness, and the long syllables, more gravity, dignity, and strength, the poet has the power of greatly varying the expression of the verse ; while, at the same time, the facility of versification is very much increased. c. In the common kinds of verse, the metrical ictus is determined by the prevailing foot. Hence in Trochaic and Dactylic verse, every foot receives the ictus upon the first syllable ; while, in Iambic and Anapaestic verse, every foot receives it upon the second, except the anapaest and pro- celeusmatic, which receive it upon the third, (d) In Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic verse, the ictus is commonly stronger upon every other foot ; and the verse is consequently measured, not by single feet, but by dipodies (740 b). 742. The simplest and most familiar rhythms are those in which a long syllable alternates with one , or with two short syllables (-U ~ -—■ -J- or In the latter, the thesis is equal in time to the arsis, and the rhythm is termed equal or quadruple = 4 breves, 725 a); but in the former, the thesis is only half the arsis, and the rhythm is termed triple (— — = 3 breves). a. Of these, the equal is the more stately in its movement, and tho more appropriate to those kinds of verse which are farthest removed from common discourse ; while the triple has more nearly the movement of com¬ mon conversation, and is hence better adapted to the more familiar kinds of verse, and to dialogue. Even the same rhythm has a different expres¬ sion, according as it begins with the arsis or the thesis. In the former case (Dactylic J— | ^— -—-, and Trochaic _L _ | _L _), the movement, passing from the heavier to the lighter, has more ease, grace, and vivacity; in the latter (Anapccstic _ JL | _ _L, and Iambic ^ J_ | _ J_), the move¬ ment, passing from the lighter to the heavier, has more decision, empha¬ sis, and strength. b. Other rhythms are formed by doubling the arsis, by prolonging the thesis, or by variously compounding simple rhythms. Thus, by doubling the arsis, we obtain the rhythms J—L_, and _L L_L_^. Of these, the first, according to its division into feet, is Cretic JL w J_ | Bacchic _ -L_L | W J- JL, or Antibacchic J_J_^|J__L W ; and the second, Choriambic Antispastic Rising Ionic or Falling Ionic (c) Verses, in which the equal and triple rhythms are united, are termed logaoedic (\ 070 s discourse, aoiSr) song, see a). The most irregular kinds of verse are termed polyschematist (TroXvaxynaruxTos, multiform) and asynartete (a.aovdpTrjTos, disjointed). 428 PROSODY. -VERSIFICATION. § 743. 743. Verses are named, — (a) From the prevailing foot: Iam¬ bic , Dactylic, (b) From some poet who invented or used them, or the species of composition in which they were employed: Alcaic , from Alcaeus; Sapphic , from Sappho; Heroic , as used in singing the deeds of heroes, (c) From the number of measures (i. e. feet, or dipoclies, 741 d) which they contain: monometer (povoperpos, of one measure ), dimeter , trimeter , tetrameter , pentameter, hexameter, (d) From their degree of completeness ; thus a verse is termed catalectic (Kara- Xgyco, to end abruptly), when its last foot is incomplete; brachycata- lectic , when it wants a whole foot at the end ; acatalectic, when it has its just measure; liypercatalectic , when it has one or two .sylla¬ bles beyond; hypermeter , when it exceeds in any way its just meas¬ ure; acephalous (aKecfraXos, headless ), when it wants a syllable at the beginning; anacrusic, basic, or syncopated, when affected as below. e. A long or short syllable or pyrrhic is sometimes prefixed to a lyric rhythm beginning with the arsis. This is called an anacrusis (avanpovais, striking up). A similar prefix of greater length is called a basis (a term sometimes applied to any monometer; /3ae0 ! Eur. Ale. 536. T L epQ ; Soph. 0. C. 315. TdWa ! Ib. 318. g. Metrical syncope is the omission of a thesis in the middle of a rhythm; where we may suppose the time to have been supplied, as in modern music, by a rest, or by dwelling longer upon an adjoining arsis. See 749 a. h. A catalectic verse is said to be catalectic on one, or more syllables (in syllabam, in dissyllabum, &c.), according as the imperfect foot has one, or more syllables. Dactylic verses ending with a spondee or trochee (738) are by some regarded as acatalectic, and by others as catalectic on two syllables ; e. g., the common Hexameter (748). 744 . Metrical composition is either in monostichs, systems, or stanzas, (a) Monosticiis (povoortxos, of a single line ) consist of the same verse repeated, as in Hexameter verse (748), Iambic Trimeter (756), &c. (b) Systems are formed by the repetition of similar rhythms, with continuous scansion (as if a single long line, 738 b) and an appropriate close, (c) Stanzas (also called strophes ) are formed by the union of different kinds of verse. A stanza of two lines is called a distich; of three, a tristich; of four, a tetrastich. d. The most common systems are easily arranged in dimeters, with here and there a monometer; and close with a dimeter catalectic. See 752, 758, 762. e. The Greek choral odes were written in stanzas of very varied struct¬ ure, but commonly arranged in duads or triads (sometimes in tetrads or pentads). A duad consists of two stanzas, corresponding in metre through¬ out. Of these, the first is termed the strophe {aTpopp, turning round, stanza), and the second the antistrophe {avrujTpo counter-turn or -stanza). A triad consists of a strophe and antistrophe, preceded, divided, or fol¬ lowed by a third stanza of different metre, which according to its place is termed probde {irpb before, eidy ode), mesode {peaos middle), or epode (eiri after). Of these, the epode is far the most common. The odes of Pindar are written each in a peculiar metre, but nearly all in strophes, anti- § 74G. KINDS OF VERSE. CAESURA. 429 strophes, and epodes. In the same ode, the strophes and antistiophes are all written in one metre, and the epodes all in a second, different from the first. In the drama, on the contrary, the metre of one duad or triad is not repeated in a second. 745 . C/ESURA (csedo, to cut) is the cutting of the metre by a division in the sense. It may be (a) of the foot , or (b) of the verse. In the former, a foot is cut by the ending of a word; in the latter, a verse is cut by a pause permitted by the sense. c. This pause, which is often slight, is called the caesural pause ; and the syllable preceding any caesura, the cae,sural syllable. When this syl¬ lable is pronounced with the arsis, the caesura is termed masculine ; with the thesis, feminine. A caesura in the second foot is named tricmim, from the portion of the verse which has preceded (740 b) ; in the third, penthe- mim; in the fourth, hcphthemim ; &c. d. The caesura of the verse (often called simply the caesura) is more frequently*, but not necessarily, a caesura of the foot. A prominent ex¬ ception is the caesura often occurring in Hexameter verse after the fourth foot (which is then commonly a dactyl), named the bucolic or pastoral ccesura from its prevalence in pastoral poetry. See also 757, 701. (e) When a foot-caesura separates the arsis from the thesis, it is likewise termed a caesura of the rhythm, (f) Averse-caesura is sometimes allowed between the parts of a compound word: Ivai y! otjrt //,e?ut||y\c5cr(r(HJ | ireLdovs TEscli. Pr. 172. g. Composition in verse consists of two series : the metrical series, di¬ vided into feet and verses ; and the significant series, divided into "words and sentences. These two series must, of course, correspond in their great divisions ; but if this correspondence is carried too far, it gives to the composition a disconnected, mechanical, and spiritless character. The life and beauty of poetry depend essentially upon the skilful and varied interweaving of the two series, producing a continuity in the one, where there is a division in the other. The caesuras not only contribute indispensably to this ; but also show eminently the art of the poet, and afford a grateful relief to both voice and ear. r h. The coincidence of the divisions of the metrical series with those of the significant series is termed diaeresis (diaipecns, division). The most important diaereses are those at the end of verses, systems, or stanzas. A foot-diaeresis occurs whenever the division of words corresponds with the division of feet ; so that a verse-caesura may be a foot-diaeresis (d). i. The expression of the verse is affected by the place of the caesura. In general, the earlier caesuras give to the verse more vivacity ; the later, more gravity. The most frequent caesura is the penthemim. The effect of the caesura in producing metrical variety will be seen by observing that the two most common metres, the Hexameter and Iambic Trimeter, are divided by the two most common caesuras, the penthemim and hephthe- mim, into two parts, having the ratio of 5 and 7 , of which (with the par¬ tial exception produced by the feminine caesura in the Hexameter), the one always begins and ends with the arsis, and the other with the thesis. 746 . a. Hiatus between words was admitted the most freely in Epic poetry, where however it may be often removed by the insertion of the digamma (98 e, 99 b). It was the most studiously avoided in Attic poetry, especially in the Tragic Trimeter (756), where it was scarce al¬ lowed, except after the interrogative tl, and some interjections, or words used in exclamation : Of eyw ! * 70 ) ! TEscli. Ag. 1257. 430 PROSODY. -VERSIFICATION. § 746. Synizesis (117). 1). In Epic poetry synizesis is very frequent, espe¬ cially when the first vowel is e ; thus, ta, tq., eat ; to, eot, eov ; eco, : IITjXrjlad to), xP va ^ L P b.\va,A.. 1, 15 ; see 27 f, 197 c, 222 b, 323 c. We find more rarely ae ; ta, tat, frj, iy, to ; oo ; va, voi ; &c. Synizesis sometimes occurs between two words, when the first is fj, 8rj, |jit|, eim, or a word ending in the affix -q or -u> : ? )~oi>x E. 349, brf'Syboov t). 261, eirei'~ou 5. 352, IlrjXetbrjedeX A. 277, acrfieoTif^ovo P. 87. c. In Attic poetry, synizesis occurs chiefly in the endings -€&>s, -ewv, -ea of Dec. 3 (220 d) ; in a few single words and forms (as 6e6s Eur. Or. 399) ; in the combinations ov and p-fj ov, regularly pronounced as one syllable ; in some other combinations in which the first word is %\, ip p.rj, eim, or eyto : [ijfeibevai Eur. Hipp. 1335, eTrel'bvbtv, eydb^eifi Soph. Ph. 585. d. In scanning, observe not only the division into dipodies and feet, but also the arsis or metrical ictus (741), and the verse-caesura (745). Unless these are carefully marked, the metrical character and expression of the verse are, to a great extent, lost, (e) In the following exhibition of metres, the division of feet will be marked by a single bar ( | ) ; the divis¬ ion of dipodies by a double bar ( || ) ; the verse-caesura by an obelisk ( t ), sometimes doubled ( f ) ; and sometimes the omission of a syllable by a caret ( a ). An anacrusis will be denoted by a, and a basis by B ; and of syllables metrically long or short (whether by nature or position), the former will be printed in full-face, and the latter in common Greek type. Latin analogies will be less abundantly given, because the common metri¬ cal system in the Latin was avowedly borrowed from the Greek ; though, in accordance with the Roman spirit of law, its rules were stricter. Horace thus boasts : Princeps TEolium carmen ad Italos Deduxisse modos. — Od. 3. 30. A. Dactylic Verse. 747 . The place of the fundamental dactyl is often supplied by a spondee — — = -—). See 741 b. 748 . i. The common Hexameter or Heroic Verse consists of six feet, of which the first four are either dactyls or spon¬ dees, the fifth commynly a dactyl, and the sixth always a spondee. a. When the fifth is a spondee, the verse is termed spondaic, and has commonly an expression of greater weight or dignity. This occurs most frequently when the verse ends with a word of four syllables, (b) The favorite caesura of the verse is the penthemim (the “ heroic caesura ”), which is almost equally masculine and feminine (745 c). Alter this, the most frequent caesuras are the masculine Irephthemim (often preceded by a triemim), and the pastoral (745 d). (c) Even when the penthemim is not the principal verse-caesura, it is yet seldom wanting as a foot-caesura. It is stated, that in the first book of the Iliad, 290 lines have the mascu¬ line penthemim, 315 have the feminine, and only 6 have neither. d. Scheme and Examples. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. _i_____ | _i____ — L —- j JL — -Lt - — t - ti (— —) § 750. DACTYLIC VERSE. 431 ’AXXa /caiKws a(f)L jrj, t /cparejpov 5’ iirl \ \lv6ov tjTeXXtv. A. 25. El K6V | ttcos dpjva>v Kvijcrqs t al|*yaiv re rejXeicov. A. 66. 2T€p./xar’ e|xcov 4v j yepcrtv t e|KT]/36\oi; | ’AttoXIXwvos. A. 14. B^i Se kclt | OvXvip.|Troio Kap\r\voiv, t | x&> o/me jvos tajp. A. 44. Anna vi|r unique cajno t Troijse qui | primus ab | oris. Virg. Coleridge's “Homeric Hexameter Described and Exemplified." Strongly it | bears us a j long t in | swelling and | limitless | billows, Nothing be | fore and | nothing be | hind, f but the | sky and the | ocean. 749. ir. The Elegiac Pentameter consists of two dactylic pen- theiniins (740 b), the first containing two dactyls or spondees with a ctesural syllable, and the second, two dactyls with a final syllable. It commonly alternates with the Hexameter, forming what is termed, from its early use in plaintive song, the Elegiac Metre. — t ) ) -1 ) ) -1 1 _ Evxo/r^|vo> p.oi j kX- 004, t /cajKas 8' curb | KTjpas a|XaXK€ * Sol p.€v | to vto, 0e|a, t | cpiKpov, e||XOi Se ge\ya. Theog. 13. NesciS | quid ma|jiis t | nascitur | llia|de. Propertius. 'In the Hexlameter | rises t the | fountain’s | silvery | column ; 'In the Pen|tameter | aye t|falling in | melody | back. Coleridge. a. This verse is strictly a syncopated catalectic hexameter (743): A _L -L A 750. ur. Other Dactylic Metres are, (a) Pure , consisting of dactyls only; (b) Impure, consisting of dactyls and spondees; (c) xEolic, containing, in place of the first foot, a basis or anacrusis (743 e); (d) Logacedic (742 c), in which dactyls are united with trochees. Thus, 1. Dimeter. (a) Mvo-ro<561 kos Sopot. Ar. Nub. 303. (b) Adonic (J —j _l—). IIoTwct, | 0Op,ov. Sapph. 1. 4. Tenant | urbem. Ilor. Od. 1. 2. (b) Hypercat., Dactylic Penthcmim. 'AXix-r^vra 7rojpov. iEsch. Sup. 844. 2. Trimeter. (b) IloXXd yap \ lien' a/ca | piavTOs. Soph. Tr. 112. (c) Phehecratic (b. j j __ _ | _L_). "EXbelcu T\ap.ov | Oi§t7r6i8a, fiporCjv. Soph.O.T. 1193. Possunt | Iinperi | osius. Hor. Od. 1. 14. (d) M^tiv b'Jira 0i5|-yoi|x’ &v. iEsch. Pr. 907. (a) Ilypercat. IloXXd/ypojrwv 5iajp.€i/3o/^|va. iEsch. Sup. 543. 3. Tetrameter. (a) Alcmanian. Mwo-’, dye, | KaXXiolira 0ifyajT€p A los. Alcm. 36 [4J. (b) Spondaic. Zees 7roXidat'opoj I ap.0i 7 e|vaiKbs. ASscll. Ag. 62. (c) Y\vk8\tvik P ov a\\i.6.xavov | Spirerov. Sapph. 20 [37J. 432 PROSODY. -VERSIFICATION. § 750. (<3.) Greater Alcaic (a. | a^ | a — | A.^^ | _L WW ). Kdp|j3aXXe | tov X € ^ I P«c*>v*, eiri | [xcv TiOeis. Ale. 27 [34]. Dissolve | frigiis, j ligna sii|per fbco. Hor. Od. 1. 9. Lesser Alcaic (J-__ | _i____ | _l_| A w ). X P ■ucro/colpa Ze^ejpcp /hlycicra. Ale. 5 [24]. Et I oil |is vidu|antur j drill. Hor. Od. 2. 9. (a) Hypercat. Twv fie 7 v Aavajwv viro | KXTjfo/xA|av. Soph. Aj. 225. 4. Pentameter. (b) ’ArpeilSas p- a x' L \ t e<5a|-q Xa 7 o|SaiTas. iEsch. Ag. 123. (e) Olvos, j w epLXe | irat, t X^ 7 e|TCU, /cat ajXatka. Theoc. 29. 1. (d) ^12 iroXis, | to 7 eee|u ra|Xaira, | vvv ere. Sopll. El. 1413. Sapphic (A_ | A — | A^^ | A _ | A ^_). Al de | Scopa | pf] deieer, | &XXa | Soocret. Sappll. 1. 22. Jam sa|tls ter|ris nivis | atque j dine. Hor. Od. 1. 2. PlIALCECIAN (b. I J__ | A_ | A_ I A_). Tov Xeilovro/tdlxctv, tov | 6^v\\eipa. Tlieoc. Ep. 20. 5. Hexameter. (a) IIpos ere 7e|v€ia5os, | to (pLXos, | to 5o/ct|ptoraros | 'EXXaSt. Eur.Slip.277. (b) ’AXX’ to | TravTOL|as . Dimeter Acatalectic. f. Paroemiac. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. 2. 3. 4. ’AUa a 6 j Mcuas t 11 ‘irop.'ircujos ava£ ITeAdcriij.? Sopais, t II «v r eni jvoiav 2TT€u8€tS j KCLTe\(OV t || TrpcUjeijx?, eTTet Fevvatl avi|p, Alyev, | 7 rap epol || deSoKT] | trai. Ear. Med. 750. Though her eye j shone oiit, f || yet the lids | were fix’d. Bi/ron. I enjter thy gar||den of rojses. Id., from the Romaic. 753. ii. The combination of the regular dimeter with the pa- rocmiac (cfl 757, 761) forms the Anapaestic Tetrameter Catalectic of comedy, also called, from its use by the great master of comic verse, the A ristophanic. Ti yap ciSjScupov t II leal /ua/cajpia-Tbv f || paWov | vOv 4s t 7repi|/3a\.etv || kuku) | r:vt. Eur. Or. 905. "AiSoujcrt ■yovv || Tbv’'la.K\xov t 8v||irep Aiajy'pas. Ar. Pan. 320. Quo, quo | sceles|| tl rui|tis ? t aut || cur dex|teris. Ilor. Wild-wai | bling Na||ture, t all | above || the reach | of'Art. Thomson. 757. ir. The Iambic Tetrameter Catalectic is peculiar to com¬ edy. It consists of two dimeters, the second catalectic (cf. 753, 7G1); and has commonly a caesura after the first. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. I n ! I II + JL i ji_ ii • ^ 1 i | 1 _JL t 1 i _ J_ _ 1 ^ __ JL _^ 1 At w — 6 . ii in proper\ ,w —' -1 names. / "Otov | %apiv || fi 6 8€s | KoXa || tov &v|5pa. Ar. Eq. 454. TROCHAIC VERSE. 435 § 7G3. 759. iv. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of other kinds of Iambic verse (for logaoedic examples, see 754): Monom. Hvperc. 'EtoI | xos vf\vwv. Find. P. 6. 7. Tripody. "Tiretrl ri pot | Opacros. Soph. El. 479. Dim. Cat. 0fXw \ Xeyeiv ||’ATp€i| 5as. Anacreontic. Dim. Hyperc. Hv toi, | _ ~). The last foot of a dipody (where the ictus is less strong) is often lengthened to a spondee or anapaest. In proper names, the dactyl is admitted in some places. 761. i. The Trochaic Tetrameter Catalectic occurs in both tragedy and comedy. It consists of two dimeters, the second cata¬ lectic (753, 757); and has commonly a caesura after the first. IloWa.jxo'O cr/co!|Tro£vres | rpas f || els cIttcvO’ cvi||pr|crf | T€ Tovs rpl |7rous Kal || rt)V 8i | aiTav t || o-c^rfiv | €|A(/>e|!p€crTd |tovs. Small iv | flection || and in| spection, 11| needs it, | friends of || mine, to [ see, 'in the | wasps and !| us your | chorus, I || wondrous | simi||lari|ty. Ar. Vesp. 1101, trails, by Mitchell. 762. ir. The Trochaic verse sometimes occurs in systems of the common form (744 d): TO j dovpiev, || OLVTt | TOVTCOV TijvSe | vvvl Ttjv 0e|bv 7rpocr||ei7ra!T€. Ar. Pax 579. 763. nr. Examples are added, from lyric poetry, of other kinds of Trochaic verse (for logaoedic examples, see 750) : Tripody (Ithyphallic). IIavrpo|^)os 7re|X€ias. iEsch. Th. 294. Trim. Aci>pi|u> cj>cu|!va.v ej'|app.o§|at 7re|SiXa>. Find. O. 3. 9. Trim. Cat. Tlv yap | «v tt6v||to) /appcpvwvIlTaL 0o|at. Ih. 12. 4. Tetram. "Ecrrt | p.oi 0e||wv e|Kan || \Lvpi\a Trav||rd Kl\\ev6os. Find. I. 4.1. a. Syncope sometimes explains a seeming interchange of Iambic and Trochaic rhythm (743g): Bodv t<*>, a KXaer A^oXoardrai. Ar. Nub.1155. 436 PROSODY. -LYRIC VERSE. § 764. . • E. Other Metres. 764. The metres which remain are Lyric, and for the most part admit with great freedom isochronous feet, or the substitution of two short syllables for one long, or of one long for two short. Ex¬ amples are given of some of the most important: a. Cretic System, ‘hpovrtcrov | Kal Yevov IlavStKws | €vcre|3rjs | ’irpo£tvos, Tciv cpvyada | |xtj 7rpoSu>s. iEscli. Sup. 418. b. Bacchic Tetram. TLs &xw, | ris oSp,a | irpoaiizra. | pi G--L-L) iEsch. Pr. 115. c. Clioriambic System, closing, as is frequent, with a bacchius. (-L _ ^ _L) Nvv 8e rbv 4k | Gri/xerepou PvjjLracri'ou | Xeyeiv ri 8ei Kern'd// oirws | 0avqcra. Ar. Yesp. 526. d. Rising Ionic System. ITe7re'paK€v | pev 6 ircpcri j7rroX4s i' ( 8r| (_ __L-L) Bacn'Xeios | crTparos els dv|rt7ropov yeij rova x<$ | ‘irpcdpop.os Itt7t oTas. Ac. AiOepia /avis | /xe imGei cpavtZcr’, 'Arau8os, <7a({>Tjs, | ervpos ixyyekos. iEscli. Til. 79. CHAPTEE II. ACCENT. 766. In every Greek word, one of the three last syllables was distinguished by a special tone of the voice. 1. This tone is commonly spoken of simply as the tone, or the accent. Its precise nature we cannot now determine. It seems to have resembled what is called accent in English orthoepy, but with important differences. That it never receded beyond the antepenult, shows that the Greeks felt the same difficulty in the utterance of a long train of syllables after their accent which we feel after ours. See also 788 i. § 767. PRINCIPLES OF ACCENT. 437 2. The versification of the ancient Greeks was founded upon quantity without regard to accent; that of the modern Greeks is founded upon ac¬ cent without regard to quantity. We cannot resist the conclusion from this, that in the ancient language the distinction of quantity was the more prominent to the ear ; while in the modern language the reverse is strikingly true (79 i). It is evident, however, that the distinction of ac¬ cent was the more intellectual in its character, — more marked by the un¬ derstanding, if less by the ear. 3. The accent, even if not regarded in pronunciation, is still useful, as serving, — (a) To distinguish different words, or different senses of the same word : elfiL to be, elfju to go; 6 the, 6 which (249 c) ; irore; when ? 7r or € once ; &XXa other things, aXXa but; XidofioXos throwing stones, Xl6o- poXos stoned (386. 1). (b) To distinguish different forms of the same word : Opt. eK-Xdaai, Inf. eK-Xvacu, Imv. ex-Xvaai, (37 f, h). (c) To aid in ascertaining quantity (727). (d) To show the original form of a word : thus the circumflex over ti/aw, cpiXQ, SgXu, marks them as contract forms of Tt/idw, (fnXtu, drjXoco. (e) To show how a word is employed in the sentence ; as in cases of anastrophe, and where the accent is retained by a proclitic or enclitic (785 s). 4. Authorities and critics differ upon some of the minute points of ac¬ centuation, as of other grammatical subjects, in both Greek and English. 767. a. In a filial or initial, and often in an intermediate syllable, a long vowel is treated in accentuation as consisting of two vowels (108, 115), and thus forming two tone-places (i. e. places in respect to accent), (b) But final -ai and -oi in affixes are regarded in accentuation as short vowels, except in the Optative. c. By long vowels, in accentuation, are meant those that are long by nature, including diphthongs ; and by short vowels, those that are short in natural quantity, without regard to their position (725). d. It is not strange that this treatment of final -at and -ot should have at length resulted from the natural hurrying of the voice over such familiar endings. It appears not to have prevailed in the earliest form of the lan¬ guage, or in the Doric, which was marked by its closer adherence to old usage (790 a). The remains of that usage also appear in the accentuation of so many Inf. forms upon the penult (780) ; though the circumflex is not here excluded. The exception in the Opt. is explained by its pro¬ traction to express contingenee (272 d). e. The Greek grammarians adopted an ascending line (') as the mark of an accented place, and a descending line (') as the mark of an unac¬ cented place. A syllable in which an unaccented followed an accented place was entitled, of course, to a double mark ('' ). f. In counting tone-places, the ultima is counted as the first place if its vowel is short, but as the first and second if its vowel is long. If the ultima forms two places, the penult makes the third, and completes the number allowed. If the ultima forms only a single place, then a short vowel in the penult forms the second ; and a long vowel the second and third. One of these, however, a long penult often gives up to the ante¬ penult, contenting itself with a single place. Thus the antepenult forms the third place, if the ultima and penult are both short by nature ; and often also, if the ultima is short and the penult long. No account i.° taken of any place beyond the third, or beyond the accent if this is soornn PROSODY.-ACCENT. 438 reached. In the following words, which are all accented on the highest place, the several places would be thus numbered and marked : 1 21 2 1 3 21 2 1 3 21 32 1 32 1 3 21 32 1 6es, wills, SoAos, SoXoii, 86Xol, Tavpou, Tttupos, rdvpol, eKovcrals, excvcrd', 32 1 3 21 321 32 1. 3 21 3 21 3 21 tKOUcral, 'iroXfp.ovs, 7r6A6p.bs, 'jrdXep.ol, avQpwirols, dvSpwiros, &V0pu>7rol. g. It is evidently needless, except for grammatical illustration, to mark unaccented syllables, and when the two marks ('' ) fall upon the same syllable, it is more convenient in writing to unite them into one ( A , or, as rounded for greater ease in writing, ~ or ~). Dropping, therefore, the marks over the unaccented syllables, and uniting the double marks, we write thus : 0€S, irats, 8oXos, SoXov, SoXoi, Tavpou, Tavpos, ravpoi, eKOiicrais, €KoCs, Gea, o)oG, yvncou, npco • 0)617, to, coda, a’L£, alyos, epoi. Oxytone, ) j Acute. Perispome, > if its Ultima is < Circumflexed. Barytone, ) ( Grave. Paroxytone, 1 •, r. i, • f Acute. t, > if its Penult is< a j Properispome, J ( Circumfiexed. Proparoxytone, if its Antepenult is Acute. A word is termed a. The terms above, and those applied to the marks of accent (94), are formed from the Greek and Latin words tLv os accentus, tone, o^vs acutus, sharp, 7re/H,aei'os circumflexus, bent round, (Bapvs gravis, heavy, -rrapa beside, and irpo before, (b) The paroxytones, properispomes, and propar- oxytones are all included in the general class of baryt&nes. See § 5. c. The oxytones are all accented on the first tone-place ; the perispomes, on the second; and the properispomes and proparoxytones, on the third. The paroxytones are accented on the second place, if the last vowel is short; but on the third, if it is long. See 767. 769. The accent is termed filial, when it falls upon the ultima. According as it goes back from this, or forward to¬ wards it, it is said to recede or advance. When it recedes as far as the general laws permit, it is termed recessive. When it retains the same place as in the theme, so far as these laws permit, it is termed retentive. a. The useful term recessive was introduced by Professor Hadley. — Upon the principles which have now been stated, are founded the follow¬ ing general laws. I. General Laws of Accent. 770. Law I. The acute accent cannot recede beyond the antepenult ; and can fall upon this, only when the ultima is short. § 772. GENERAL LAWS. IN VOWEL CHANGES. 439 a. Hence the accent of ovopa name, rpairefa, &yy eAos (15 s), must ad¬ vance in the Gen. to the second syllable : ovjparos, rpairt^ys, ayyeXov. For TpdTrefa 1 .. tiyyeXoi, see 767 b. b. In accentuation, e before w in the endings of the Gen. and of the Attic Dec. 2 is not regarded as forming a distinct syllable (120 i, 200 , 220 c) : hence, ’A rpeideo:, iroXecos, irbXewv • evyeojs. So, in some compound adjectives, even with an intervening liquid: as, (piXbyeXus, fiovKepios (237 b), oviepus • and, according to the same analogy, a few compounds of TaXai lour/ ago, as etaraXcu, irpbTraXat. c. Final £ and vj/, making position after a short vowel (734), forbid the acute on the antepenult, though not the circumflex on the penult (this seeming not so great a remove from the end of the word, 767 f): hence ipifOH Va£, -a cos, though epig joXos, fertile. In the old language, as in the Doric, the length of the ultima by position as well as by nature seems to have been more generally regarded. Even after the dropping of r in the 3 Pers. pi. of verbs, some forms of the Doric retained the old accentua¬ tion : as, (eo«s (105 a, 103 b). 773. n. Crasis. Iii eras is, the accent of the first word is lost; while that of the second remains without change, except as required by 771 c: ravro for to avro, kuv for xai civ, k av for Kal iv, raAXa for ra dAAa (yet some write rdAXa). See 125 s. 774. c. Apostrophe. The accent of an elided vowel is ihrmvn back upon the penult, except in prepositions and conjunctions: deiv enrj for deivci h ttj, tear epe (Kara), dAA’ e’ya> (aXXa) See 128. Except also the enclitics 7 tote and nva, for distinction from 7rore ; and rim; a. In other changes of vowels, or of consonants into vowels, general or special laws often require a change of accent: evperj for evpeia (134); ^cerax for fjvTcu (329 a) : nepaio Kspew Kepw (152). III. Accent in Inflection. 775. Law IV. A long affix of declension can only take the acute in the direct , and the circumflex in the indirect cases. a. Hence, (55?), -rjs, -rj, -yv (15) ; %opou, -u), -Civ, -o?s, -ovs (16) ; ywirGiv, -olv (17). (b) Except in the peculiar datives epoi, pol, aoL (27 a). See also 772 d. 776. Law V. The accent is retentive in declension ; but recessive in comparison and conjugation : Ciov, to ov, aid (10); KUKOS, KCIKUOV, KClKiaTOS (260 a); Xvco, eXvov, XeXvKO. (37). 777. A. Declension. 1 . In Dec. 1, the affix- cov of the Gen. pi. is circumflexed, as contracted from -dcov (197 c): Tpdne£a, rpanefcv. Grammarians except, chiefly, for distinction from other words, y acjwy anchovy, oi eryaLai trade-winds , 6 yXovvys wild-boar , and 6 XPW T7 1 S usurer ; Gen. pi. dcpvuv, kc. See also 2. 2. In adjectives in -os, the feminine is accented throughout, so far as the general laws permit, upon the same syllable as the mase.: thus, 0t- Aios, CXLd, friendly, PI. plap (207 ; yet see b), and (G. -/cos), (d) Observe the accentuation of offsets (following els, 25), rh, r;s (28), yvvTj (203 a), 6vydryp (210 b) ; .and of datives in -acri, from liquids (145 a). (e) The Attics are said to have made the Gen. pi. of numeral substantives in -as perispome : pvpiaSwv, as if contracted from the Ion. pvpiadeojp {221 b). (f) See the poetic dovpup, yovpue, and yopwp (21, 224c). 779. 4. The natural tone of frequent address gives recessive accent to the Yoc. in a few familiar words : as, Dec. 1, deairbrys, master; Dec. 2, ct5e\0os, brother; Dec. 3, yvug (203a), ’AttoXXcop, &c. (208 f); Yoc. Seairord, a5eXov • Y. HuKpares, 'HpdsXees (19). So a few other neuter adjectives, when used adverbially : &\r]0es / really l rpceres [3. 106. (c) In comparatives in -wv : TjStuP, ijbioP. d. Recessive accent appears also in some Nom. forms in -a for --qs (197 b) : evpvoira. (e) Observe the accentuation of pyryp, Ovydryp, Aypy- ryp (210 b). (f) In the forms in -<}h, -0i, -0ev (190 s), the accent usually falls upon the penult if this is short, but is otherwise retentive, (g) For the irregularities and peculiarities in the accentuation of the numerals and pronouns, see 25, 27 s. 780. B. Conjugation has exceptions to the law of reces¬ sive accent ; chiefly in the Infinitive and Participle (as partak¬ ing of the noun and adjective). 1. These forms arc accented upon the penult: —(a) All Infinitives in -ai not 'preceded by -. rev. or. 19* 442 ACCENT IN CONJUGATION AND CONSTRUCTION. § 782. Notes, c. That the final accent in the preceding forms should he acute on the theme of the Part., and circumflex on the Inf. (considered as a Pat., 6GG h), is in accordance with Law IV. (775). (d) The circumflex in A v6Q>, iarui, tiOQ/jm, dd>, XvOeiev, iaTalev, TiOelo (37, 45), and like Subj. and Opt. forms, is due to contraction (772). (e) Monosyllabic forms long by nature, except Participles, are generally cireumflexed : el, 9jv, y, dv (45 1) ; (7x0, a X e'.v, a X cbv (50 e X w). f. In those forms in which the accent of the Perf. and 2 Aor. differs from that of the Pres., a want of uniformity has sometimes arisen from different views in regard to their etymology. Thus, 2 Aor. forms are sometimes accented as Pres.: as Inf. d,); forms noticed in 316 c ; &c. e. The Ionic, in dropping one € from -that, -eeo, does not change the accent: thus 2-jn hivyevrt. E. 479 ; oXtcras tf/rro for aroXlaas, having lost, i. 534 (§ 699 j); &va, irapa, 2vi (699 e). This recession is termed dvaarpofir}, turning back. a. Some so write ir€p£ and airo when used adverbially : irtpi (irepl Bek.), exceedingly, I. 53. (b) Grammarians except 8ia and dva (except for am- § 787 . ANASTROPHE, PROCLITICS, ENCLITICS. 443 r|pl yap, for I say. (b) After the apostrophe: iroXXoi 5 eltriv, but they arc many, (c) If it is emphatic or strongly reflexive: ov K upov, dXXd c re, not G., but you. (d) If it is a dissyllabic, preceded by a paroxytone, or by a properispome in or -\j/ (770 c) : dvdpes tivc's, some men. (e) If it is a personal pronoun, preceded by an orthotone preposition which governs it and is not itself more em¬ phatic : irapa crcn, irepl (rov, Trpos c re • but eiri ere i) ervv croi, against you rather than with you, vii. 7. 32. Yet 7 rpbs ye (sometimes oe) iii. 2. 2 ; and some exceptions occur, chiefly in the poets, with other prepositions. f. When €eiv, one can take, i. 5. 3 ; tout ’ eanv, it is so. g. A word which neither leans upon the following nor upon the pre¬ ceding word, but stands, as it were, erect, is called, in distinction from the proclitics and enclitics, an orthotone (opdorovos, erect in tone). h. Most of the rules about enclitics are explained by applying the gen¬ eral principles of accent to the two words considered as united, but with the accent on the first word permitted to remain. i. Both proclitics and enclitics are more abundant in English than in Greek, and these classes of words furnish another strong analogy between the Greek and the Eng. accent (766. 1). The words in Eng. which are used in translating the Greek proclitics and enclitics are themselves, for the most part, either proclitic or enclitic. Thus, in the sentence, Give me the book (pron. Givme thebook), the pronoun me is enclitic, and the article the, proclitic. In the sentence, If John 's in the house, don't tell him a, word of this, the words If, in, the, a, and of are proclitics, and the words is, not, and him, enclitics. V. Accent in Formation. 789. General Principle. In each word, the accent be¬ longs to that syllable upon which the attention is most strongly fixed. — If, from the general laws of language, this syllable cannot receive the accent, it draws it as near to itself as pos¬ sible. 1. In the origin of language, the attention is absorbed by the greater distinctions of thought ; but, as these become familiar to the mind, it passes to the less, and then to those that are still subordinate. Hence, in the progress of a language, its accent is subject to change, as well as the form of its words, its vocabulary, and its constructions. In the Greek, as in other languages, the accent originally belonged to the sylla¬ bles containing the essential ideas of words, i. e. to their radical syllables. But, in proportion as these became familiar, there was a tendency to throw the accent upon those syllables by which these ideas were modified, either through inflection, derivation, or composition. Compare *ypd<}>a; T write, with Zypacpov I was writing, yiypapa I have ivrittcn, ypai\ the act of writing, ypafCs and ypatptxov the instrument of writing, ypapevs the person who writes, ypacpiKos suited to writing. 2. This tendency would of course vary greatly in different classes and forms of words. It would naturally be the strongest where the root was § 791- IN FORMATION. 445 the most familiar ; or where the formative part was the most significant or characteristic. On the other hand, any strengthening of the radical, or weakening of the formative part, would have a tendency to produce a con¬ trary effect. 3. In illustration of these tendencies (which of course are subject to the general laws of accent), it will be observed, that, — (a) In neuter nouns, the affix, from its inferior importance, very rarely attracts the accent (792i, 793d). (b) In demonstrative pronouns, the deictic -oe always draws the accent to the preceding syllable (787 g), and the still stronger -i (252 c) always takes it upon itself, (c) In verbs, the accent is always attracted by the augment, while it can never pass beyond it (783 a). (d) The old weak stem of the 2d Aor. yields the accent to the affix in several cases where the strengthened stem of the Pres, retains it (780 s). (e) In derivative adjectives, those endings which express most strongly character or relation attract the accent (792 s). (f) In composi¬ tion, the accent is usually attracted by that word which defines the other, and thus gives its special character to the compound (722 k, 795). In the active compound verbals, the idea of the action is more prominent than in the passive; and hence appears to have arisen the distinction in 3S6. 1. 790. That the different dialects should have often varied in ac¬ cent will occasion no surprise In those who have compared the pronuncia¬ tion of our own language in different parts of its native isle. That these differences are often neglected in our copies of the classics has arisen from the late period at which the marks of accent were introduced (93 b), and the tendency at that time to conform every thing to the Attic standard. From the testimony of the old grammarians we learn, that, — (a) The Doric was characterized by its adherence to general rules and old usage (767 d, 770 c). (b) The Lesbian iEolic Avas characterized by its tendency to throw the accent as far back as possible. In words of more than one syllable, it is said to have admitted the accent upon the ultima in prep¬ ositions and conjunctions only. (c) The Attic (which the Ionic appears to have more nearly approached) was characterized by an expressive va- riety of accent, and a greater inclination to mark the minuter shades of thought and species of relation. 791. The accent of the theme in declension, and of un¬ inflected words must be learned from special rules and from observation. Note. For derivatives, the marks of accent in § 363-382 should be carefully noticed. The rules below are not intended for proper names. A. Special Rules for Simple Words. 1.) Of Dec. I. All contracts are perispome : 'E ppir)s, gm. Of other words, — (a) Those in -as are paroxytone : Tapias. (b) Most in -t]s are paroxytone, except verbals in -ttjs from mute and pure stems of verbs in -to, which are commonly oxytone : ’Arpeidrjs (so all patronymics in -8t]s), vavrqs, \pd\rqs, TrpocprjTqs, TrpoaTdrqs • SiKaarr/s, iroiqTqs. (c) Nouns in -a short (194) have recessive accent: fivZ a, /roeo - a, rpdire^d, dXrjdeia. (d) Most abstracts in -id, those in -o-vvt], and those in -tia from verbs in -tva) (363, 367), are paroxytone : coa.£, -pwij, -Tptoij, -pXqs, -0vr|S, -Kp,qs : dnoppu)^, ijpLLdvqs. (d) Words derived from compound words are commonly not accented as though themselves compounded ; but their compounds again follow the general rule : thus, KaraaKevafa, KaraaKevaoTos (792a), a-zcaracrxeeacrros. ADDENDUM. 796. “The REASONS why we spend so long a time in acquiring a mastery over the Greek Language are manifold. We do so partly be¬ cause it is one of the most delicate and perfect instruments for the expres¬ sion of thought which was ever elaborated by the mind of man, and be¬ cause it is therefore admirably adapted, both by its points of resemblance to our own and other modern languages, and by its points of difference from them, to give us the idea, or fundamental conception, of all Gram¬ mar ; i. e. of those laws which regulate the use of the forms by which we express our thoughts. “Again, Greek is the key to one of the most astonishing and splendid regions of literature which arc open for the intellect to explore, —a literature which enshrines works not only of imperishable interest, but also of imperishable importance, both directly and historically, for the development of human thought. It is the language in which the New Testament was first written; and into which the Old Testament was first translated. It was the language spoken by the greatest poets, the greatest orators, the greatest historians, the profoundest philosophers, the world has ever seen. It was the language of the most ancient, the most elo¬ quent, and in some respects the most important of the Christian fathers. It contains the record of institutions and conceptions which lie at the base of modern civilization ; and at the same time it contains the record, and presents the spectacle, of precisely those virtues in which modern civiliza¬ tion is most deficient. “Nor is it an end only ; it is also a means. Even for those who never succeed in reaping all the advantages which it places within their reach, it has been found to be, in various nations and ages during many hundred years, one of the very best instruments for the exercise and training of the mind. It may have been studied irrationally, pedantically, and too exclusively ; but though it is desirable that much should be super- added, yet with Latin it will probably ever continue to be — what the great German poet Goethe breathed a wish that it always should be — the basis of all higher culture.” — Farrar. 797. INDEX I.-GREEK The references are here made, as in other parts of the Grammar, to sections and their parts. The letter s (from the Lat. sequens ) is often added, as else¬ where, to signify and the following; but is often omitted as needless, where it might have been added. The signs < and > represent the forms at the angle as arising by contraction or some other change, chiefly euphonic, from the forms at the opening, or as used in their stead. The sign x denotes opposition or distinction. Dialectic use is marked by an older style of figures in the ref¬ erences (as, 329 ). For abbreviations, see 798. To increase the practical value of the Index, the form or construction of a word is sometimes referred to the appropriate rule or remark, although the particular word may not have been there cited as an example. The reference is then marked Avith an accent ( ' ). The index for the conjugation of verbs is contained in § 50. See 804 s. A 4, 106; <> 138, 142, 156, 158, 160, 202 b, 221 , 329 ; cont. as e 122, 131 cl ; 6g av. gen. 442 a, av. dat. 451; dSe\0e 779. -d 8 i]s in der. 369 a. ' AiStjs dec. 225 b ; ’A 1 - doaSe 688 e ; 438 a. a8r]Xov tv 675. d8iKew av. 2 acc. 480 b w. pt. 677 a ; pres, as dSiKOs dec. 22. [pf. 612. dtSwpos av. gen. 446 b. ad, aid, 13CHI; es a. 706. -d'£to in der. 378 s. di]8wv dec. 224 a. -a0- in 2 aor. 353 a. ’A0f|va^€,-T|crt,382, 380. dOiKTos av. gen. 426. "AGcos, -w acc. 199. 3. at 4, 108 ; at, aai, eai , oat, aei, ae 7, 119 s, 123c; for a, a, 130 d, 131 d, 134 ; elided 127 : -cu-incp. 257 d; in opt. 293 : -at in 2 pers. for -aat 297 e; in aor. imv. 297 g ; in adv. 380 c ; in accent. 767. at, D., E., for el if, 701 f. alScos 219 b, 214, 215 c. -atva in der. 370 b. atveo) av. gen. 429 a. -atvw in der. 378 b. ai'£ dec. 17. [375 a. -ai 05 , adj. in, 240. 3, ai/Trus dec. 237 d. aipg'w av. 2 acc. 480 a ; ] mid. 579, pass. 588'. -atcrt old dat. pi. 198. 3. cucr0dvop.ai AV.gen. 432 b, h,w. dep.verb 657, 677. ato-xpos, -pws, cp. 260, 261 e, 263. alo-xvvop.aiAv. acc. 472f, w. inf. x pt. 657 k. olt€w av. 2 acc. 480 c. al'nos, -dopai, av. gen. 444 f, 431 c, dat. 454 d. -axis, adv. in, 381. 4. dxp.r|v adv. acc. 380 a. dxoXovGos av. gen. 442 a, av. dat. 450. okovco av. gen. and acc. 432g, li, 434a; as pass. 575 a ; pres, as pf. 612 ; av. inf. orpt. 657 k, 677. oKpoctopat av. gen. 432 a. ctKpos, use 508 a. dXyetvo's cp. 260, 261 e. -aXcos in der. 375 f. dXts av. gen. 414 a. aXio-Kopat av. gen. 431 c, av. pt. 677'. aXXa 701 b, n, x dXXa 766 a; introd. 708 e ; aXXa yap 709, aXX’ ?/ 700 m, n. dXXao-o-co av. gen. 429 a. dXXf|Xwv 27, 244. 3. dXXotos av. gen. 406 a. dXXos dec. 281; use 567 ; av. gen. 406 a ; as adv. 509 e, 567 e ; x 6 dXXos 523 f; dWori (i)) 567 g; dXXos cLWov 567 c, d. dXXws re Kal 717 a. &Xs dec. 208. § 797 . u\(ji)7rrj£ GREEK INDEX. yap 449 dXwirrjf; dec. 203 b. aXtos dec. 225 j. [662. dp.a av. dat. 450 ; av. pt. ujiapTavco w. gen. 405. djxsivwv compt. 261 a, f, 262 b. djxeXea> w. gen. 432 d. d;xvr]jxiov w. gen. 432 e. a.xvos dec. 18, 210 . djxir€x« av. 2 acc. 480 c. dxuvw mid. 579'. dx'jn 688 , 689 e; oi dpcpi 527 a. [480 c. dxijxe'vvvp .1 w. 2 acc. d;x:jxo dec. 25, 240 c. -av- added to s. 351. 2. -av < -awv 197 c. dvconting. av. ind., opt., inf., pt., 618, 658a; w. sub. 619 ; av. fut. ind. 620 ; pos. 621, 662 b ; repeated 622, omitted 631 e-g ; w. pot. opt. or ind. 636 s ; av. ind. of habit 616 b ; not w. opt. of wish 638 f. &v conj., <^edv, 619 a. dv < dvd 136 , 166 a. dvd688, 6391; sc. err? )6l 699 e, 785 ; w. 1111 m. 239 f, 692. 5. dvdyxTp-cdjv ecrriv, 572s. dvaKws w. gen. 432 d. avau.i]xvr|trxw const. 473. dva£, V. dva, 17, 204. dvdrcro w. gen. 407. uvSav&> w. dat. 457. dvev w. gen. 405 a. avexojxcu w. gen. 432 f ; w. pt. 677'. dvr|p dec. 18, 210 , 208 f; in address 484 g ; dvpp, Covrjp, 125. dvirpx'. w. gen. 405 b. avri 688 , 689 li; dvd' &v, because, 557 ; derivat. w. gen. 445, w. dat. 455. dyTnroi6 0 |iat w.gen. 430. dvTpov dec. 16. dvuco const. 677 f. dvw cp. 262 d, 263 ; w. -a£ 372b. [gen. 445 c. d|ios, kc., \v. gen. 431 b; w. dat. 454 d. -do> -ew, -d, -ov, 197 c * dirais w. gen. 446 b. uiravTaa) w. dat. 450 a. dira£ as noun 706. d'TUTcop, neut. pi. 231 b. direxQdvojxai w.dat. 457. d-irurTto) w. (hit. 456. dirXoos, -oes, dec. 23 ; cp. 257 c, d. diro 688 , 689 b ; form 136 b ; cp. 263' ; w. pass. 586 d. arroSiSopai sell, 579, w. gen. 431 a. diro8^8pdo-Ka> 472 f. d:roXcrja> w. gen. 412. ’AiroXXwv dec. 208 f, 211 a. [w. dat. 456. ira-opeco w. gen. 414 b; dirocr repeal w.gen. 414 b'; w. 2 acc. 480 c. t'l'rrT jj, mid. w. gen. 426. dpa (pd, dp) 685 c ; pos. 720 ; 7)v as pres. 011 . dpa (ovjp.'rj); 687. [262b. apeicov, apLcrros, cp. 261 a, dpe'cncoi w. dat. 457. dpr|-yco w. dat. 453. "Apps 21, 216 c, 220 a. dpi- in compos. 385 d. dpio-repd 506 b', 533 d. dpiCT-reho) w. gen. 419 c. doKe'ca w. dat. 453 ; per¬ sonally 573. dpxvs dec. 219 f. dp|x3TTa> w. dat. 453. dpveop.ai on ou 713 d. dpvos dec. 18, 210 . aprra£ 230 a ; cp. 259. djprjv dec. 22 , 208 a. dpx^ v adv. acc. 4S3. dpx« w. gen. 407, 425 ; pt. as adv. 674 b. -ds in (ler. 241, 374 h. dtrera, dacra (-rra), 253a, 254 b, 28. [226 g. do*Tr|p, -rpacn 145a; do*Tu dec. 19, 215 b ; wt. art. 533 d. -arai, -aro aipeop.ai const. 485 d. d€iSe'io av. gen. 405 b. dx9op -ecx}v,-dv,-u>v 197 c. B 4, 137 ; <7r, (p, 147 ; ins., or PX, pp < p\, fip, 146 b. PacriXeia x /3 aaiKeLa. 194 b, 370, 363 b. pacriXevs (sc. c) 533 b ; cp. 262 d. paa-iXevw av. gen. 407 ; aor. x pres. 592 d. peXruov, kc., 260, 261 e. pXddj cp. 259. p-Xd-rTTco av. gen. 405 a. pXe' • 10 w. acc. 478 s. p(y)Xrixwv dec. 224 a. por]0e'co, &c., av. dat. 453. popeas, -ppds dec. 15, 196, 198. 1. PovXevai, mid. 579. PovXopai, j 8ov\ci 559 c, 647 b ; j3ov\op.evcp 459 N. Povs dec. 19, 214 s, 217. P 0 V 4 >T] 80 V 98 g. pp^rcis dec. 224 b. T 4, 137 c ; < k, x,147. yiXa dec. 206 a. yap 701 j ; in specif. 705 b; in reply or intr. 708 c, e ; anacol. 716 a ; pos. 720 ; 6 ydp 518 b. cc nr.v. ou. 450 yaarrjp INDEX I. § 797. ■yacrrrjp dec. 210 l), c. ye 389 c, 685 b, c ; pos. 720 ; end. 787 d, li. ■yftrtov const. 442, 450. ■yeXuw w. dot. 456'; aor. 603 b. •yiXcos dec. 207 c ; com- pounds 237 b. ■yc'jjiw w. gen. 414. ■ycvos, yepas, dec. 19, 216 s. [473. yzvoi w. gen., ace., 432 a, yrj om. 506b ; sc. rj 533 d. ytyus dec. 17, 205. •yiyvo|Jtat w. gen. 412, 437 a'; w. dat. 449 ; w. pt. 679. [657 k. y cyv.io'Kco w. inf. x pt. rXovs dec. 21 , 227 b. ySvv dec. 224 c. Fop-yto, -«, mid. 579, 581, w. gen., acc., 431 c, 480 c. ■yvpvos w. gen. 414 b. ywrj dec. 203, 779 ; sc. i] 533 d. yity dec. 17, 203, 186. rouPpvas dec. 15, 198.1. A 4, 137 ; ins. 146 b ; in dec. 217 ; incj. 349/3, 300 c, 329 a. 8a- 385 d : -5a 381 b. 8 ar|p Ep., Y. baep 208 f. Satpuov dec. 18, 208. 8 d,Kp\)ov,-pe dec. 14,225 f. Saptap dec. 17, 153 a. 8 avst£w, mid. 581. Sf 685 c, 701 c., q ; for yap 705 a ; introd. 708 e ; pos. 720 : 6 84 518. -Se local 688 e, 382, 252 ; enclit. 787 d, f, g. SeLKvvpu w. pt. 677. 8 eiva dec. 27, 245. 8 ep.as dipt. 228 a, 437 c. SevSpov, -for, dec. 225 f. 8 f£td (ij) 506 b, 533 d. 8 fcrp.os dec. 226 b. Sf'cnroTa voc. 779. Sevpo w. gen. 420 a. 86 w need, w. gen. 414 b ; w. mini. 242 c : Set w. acc.473b; w.inf.598a; puKpov [5ftr], &c., 665 : 8eo}JLat w. gen. 414 c, 434 a. Stj, bydev, brjra, 5at,685e, 389, 701 q; pos. 673. 8 -rjXos eipu 573, 677 g ; brj\ou [sc. ecrrtr] 572 ; otl 717 b. 8 r]X 6 « w. pt. 677. [208 f. Atj|at|tt|p dec. 210 b, -8t]v, adv. in, 381 b. - 8 t]s patronym. 369. 81 & 688 , 689 a. Stdyco w. pt. 677'. 8 taXtyo|xat 580, w. dat. 452 a. [677 f. SiaXeiiTw, pt. or w. pt. SiaTeXeco w. pt. 677'. Siarpipa) w. pt. 677 a. Siatj>epa> (-cpopos) w. gen. 406 ; mid. w. dat. 455'. SiSvLctkw w. 2 acc. 480 c ; mid. 581. SiSwpu w. dat. 454 e ; pres, x aor. 594. 8 ie\co w. gen. 405. SiKaios eipu w. inf. 573. Six-qv w. gen. 436 d. 8 £\a w. gen. 405. Aiovvs dec. 227 b. 8 iort conj. 701 j. SLTrXdcrLos w. gen. 409. 8 in-ous dec. 22, 231 c. 8 u|/aw w. gen. 432 e. Siwkw w. gen. 431 c, 443 b. 8ok€co personally 573 ; (cjs) boneiv epioL 665, 671 c'; pt. abs. 675 c, d. 8 oXos dec. 14, 11 s. - 8 ov, adv. in, 381 b. 8 opv dec. 21, 224 c. 8oo-ls, &e., w. dat. 454 e. SovXtvw w. dat. 455 g'. Sovs dec. 26, 205, 233. Svvapai w. acc. 472 f ; or -tos, \v. rel. 553 c. 8 xio, bv w, dec. 25, 240 c. Svs dec. 26, 205, 233. Sxxr- 385 c ; aug. 283. Svcrcpcos w. gen. 432 e. 8 vcrp,€vr|s w. dat. 456'. Swpedv adv. acc. 380 a. Swpcopai const. 472 1. Suipov dec. 14, 11 a. ft ”E \j/iXov 4, 98 b, 106; e < a 114, 291 b, 341, 130 b, 222 e, 224 b, 322 ; avTov dec. 27, 244, 248 ; use 537 s ; as gen. refl. 539 d. taco w. 011 , forbid, 686 i. eyyvs cp. 263 d ; w. gen. 445 c ; w. dat. 450. €-yKparT|s w. gen. 407. dec. 218. 2 . tyw dec. 27, 243, 246 ; use, 536 s; £ 7 uye 787b; eyibba, ey&yai, 126 d. e0fXw w. inf. 598 ; w. sub. 647 b. <:0fv for o5 27 f, 247 f. ft < ft, ee, eei, ea, eat, eie, eia, 7, 119 s; < c 130c, 134, 3 2 3 <*■ J < ‘ 314, 347 : in 2 sing. 297 f; in aug. 278 e, 279 c ; in red. 281 ; in plup. 291, 273 e. -fw, adv. in, 381 e. ft, etVep, ft p.r], ftrf, ft sai, et p.7] ft, 701 f, g, i, m, r, 631 s, 639 a, 643s, 674 f; ei yap, eWe, ft, in wish 638 ; ft tls 639 ; ell. w. ft bf ei bi par], &c., 710,717 c; ftprocl.786. § 797. -eia- GRESK. 451 eujjos -eia- in opt. 293 d, e : -euain der. 363b, 367 a, 370. clS^s dec. 26, 233 c, /S. ei0e 787 i; see el. elxd^co w. dat. 451. €iko(ti(v) 52, 163 a. el'ieco w. dat, gen., 455g, eiKwv dec. 224a. [405 b. tljii be x eVxL go 766. 3 ; enclit. 787 c : w. gen. 421 s, 437 ; w. dat. 459 ; w. pt. 679 ; auxil. 285 a ; om. 572 ; &v om. 676 s: £jtlv ol, &c., 559; ecm, 9jv, w. pi. nom. 570 ; rjv as aor. 603 b, as pr. 611 : elvat in naming, &c., 480 N., as inf. of specif. 665. elire', -ov, acc. 781, 783 e; el'pyco w. gen. 405. [656. -eis, adj. in, 155, 375 f ; cp. 258. els dec. 24, 240 b ; w. gen. 419 b ; w. dat. 451 ; w. sup. 512 c ; w. t is 548 c. els, is, 688 , 689 a; w. num. 239 f, 692. 5 ; proclit. 786 ; els ore 712. [480 c'. elsftx) irparTco w. 2 acc. ei'o-ft), e'crco, w. gen. 445, w. acc. 703 a. ck < e£ 165. cko-s cp. 263 . ^Kcur-ros 376 d ; const. 501, 548 c. €k 8 ocj w. 2 acc. 480 c. exeivos 28 1, 252 ; e/cet- vocri 252 c ; use 542 ; w. art. 524. etcXeyco w. 2 acc. 4S0 c. €K7ro8wv adv. 3£& a'. €ktos w. gen. 445 c. exwv elvai 665 b. eXdvr]s w. part. 662. e£dpx« in hypall. 474. apvos w. acc. 472 j. ilijs w. gen. 445 c, w. dat. 450 a. [426. e£(e<|>)iKveo|j.ai w. gen. efov absolute 675'. 'igw cp. 262 d, 263 ; w. gen. 445 c. toiKa const. 657 j.« -eos in der. 375 c. Iiratvew w. gen. 429 a, 443 b; w. 2 acc. 480 b'. w. aor. 605 c, 617 d ; w. evdiw s, ra- %tcrra, &c., 553. 1, b. ei ri 688 , 689 g; w. num., 240 f, 692.5 ; in compos. 699g: i(p' a; (re) 557a, w. inf. 671 ; eVt 785. eiri{3ovXip -euoj, w. dat. 455. eirt.0vp.eco w. gen. 432 e. emxovpe'co w. dat. 453. eTTLXr|(rp,cov cp. 259 a. eirip.eXi)s, -o/xcu, \v. gen. 432 d. errix^pi-os w. gen. 437 b. $irop.ai w. dat. 450 a. eircovvptos \v. gen. 442 a', w. dat. 451'. epaco w. gen. 432 e. ’Epe'^ecrcjuv 190 a. ^prjp.os, -oco, w.gen. 414 b. epi- in compos. 385 d. <=P IS > -tfw, \v. dat. 455 ; dec. 17, 204. 'Epp.e'as,-?js, dec. 15,196. eppcopivos cp. 257 d. ^pxop-ai w. kind. acc. 477, 479 ; w. pt. 598 b, c ; pr. for fut. 609 c : i\6e oxyt. 781 d. epcov dec. 26, 152, 121. epcoTcuo w. 2 acc. 480 c. -€ctl, -ecrtrt, -trcrt, in dat. 221 c. ecnre'pa wt. art. 533 d. £pe[ia.cp. 262 cl. [777 a. T)pi 7 €vr|s, -veta 235 c, ijpcus elec. 19, 216. -fjs < -ees 110 m. 121 e. -tjs in form. 386. 2 ; cp. 258. -rjcri, - 77 s, dat. pi. 198. T]CT(Tfa)V, -TTWV, COlUpt. 262 b. IjO-uxos cp. 257 cl, 259 a. ijT€, 7)TOL, 701 d. i^X*' old dat. 191 . 3 . rjxw clec. 19, 214s, 772e, 779 a. Tjtos, dec. 225 j, 219 b. © 4,137 ; changes 147 s; om. before k or a 149, 151; sign of gen. 186 e ; of pers. 271c, 272 e; changes 297 c ; ins. in pi. and dm, 271 e; 7, et, in s. 310, 314,347; isubs. 109 ; in contr.118 s ; in crasis 124 : sign of clat. 186 f ; conn. vow. 293 ; in red. 357 ; -1 in pron. 352 c, 789 b; adv. in, 381c. [261,348 s. I consonant 138 s, 233, -£a in der. 367,363, 370. ’Iavvris clec. 227 b. -taw in der. 378 d. I 8 t, Mi. imv. 656 b ; 781 cl. -i 8 evs dimin. 371 d. -i 8 rjs, -iStos, in der. 369. ’ 1810 s w. gen. 437 b. ISpws, dec. 207 a. t'epai w. gen. 430 b. lepos w. gen. 437 b. -££w in der. 378 s, 349 j3. -it]- in opt. 293. ’Irjcroas dec. 227 b. I 0 v(s) 164 ; w. gen. 430 . § 797. -IKt GREEK. 453 -tKtt, adv. in, 381. 2. -ikos in der. 374 s; w. gen. 444. Iktivos dec. 22.5 f. -i|xos in der. 374 c. I'va 701 e, 624 e ; tv a rt ; 566 a. -ivos in der. 375 c, d, e. to, io) < eo, ew, Dor. -toy dimin. 371. [323 f. - 1.05 (-atos, &c.) adj. 375. t nr 6 vs dec. 19, 21, 213 s, 222 c. -is fem. 368 s, 217. -Co-kos, - 17 , dimin. 371. lo-opoipos w. gen. or dat. 442 a. I'cros k der. w. dat. 451. forrqju, mid. 582 (3. 1X0 is dec. 19, 217, 219 f. -io)v, -urros, in cp. 260 s. -to)v in der. 369, 729. 3. K 4 , 137; pov€a) w. gen. 432 d. [699 a', 431 c'. Kanpyopew w. 2 gen., Kaxr|Koos w. gen. or dat. 432 g, 455 g'. /ccirco cp. 263', 262 d. :v€'v), Ka, 163 a; = cte618 ; pos. 720 ; end. 787 d. Keap dec. 209 a. K6i[xai w. acc. 472 i. Kcivos 281, 255 c. KcXevw w. dat. or acc. k inf. 452 a, 472b', 666b. Ktvos w. gen. 414 ; cp. 257 b. Kepdvvvjju w. dat. 450. Klpas dec. 17, 207, 222 e; compounds 237 b. KcpSaXeas cp. 260. KsxXfjs const. 426 b. KrjSopai w. gen. 432 d. KTjpvCTCTcl (6 K7]pvt;) 571 b. k.vStjvcV’co w. gen. 446 d ; w. inf. 663 d'. ■ w. gen. 405', 406b. Xc'cav dec. 17, 205. Xt]yco w. gen. 405; w. pt. Xip.rjv dec. 18. [677'. XiTra indecl. 228 b. Xerrcov dec. 26, 781. Xiri, -a, dipt. 228 d. XoiSoptco const. 585. 4. Xonros, gen. 433 a, acc. 483'; 485 e. -Xos, adj. in, 375 f. Xova, mid. 578. Xvy| dec. 17, 203. Xvpa dec. 14, 194 s. Xuxvos, dec., 226 b. \ioi w. gen. 405 : \6cov, Xtjcras, dec. 26. Xwci)v,X^ttoj, 261 a, 262b. M 4, 137 ; <7 r, /3, w. gen. 412. |j.€i£ov cp. 261 a ; /xeiov as indecl. 507 e, 511 c. pe'Xas dec. 23, 208 c, 233; cp. 259. ps'Xe monopt. 228 d. pe'XXw w. inf. 598 a. pe'Xet k der. w. gen. 432 d ; w. dat. 457 : 571 d. p.£jj.rf>o}xttL w. gen., dat, acc., 429a, 443b, 452a. -psv, -iievai, inf. 333 . pev, fihroL, 685 c, 701b, c, q ; pos. 720 : 6 fieu 518 ; as p.£v 519 f. -pes for -fiev 169 c, 328 . p-eo-os cp. 257 d, e ; use 508 : -oco w. gen. 425 a. ptcn-ds, -6w,w.gen.414a. p.eTa 688 , 689 c ; /tera 785': compounds w. gen. 424. peTairepiro, mid. 579. p.eTa^v w. gen. 445 c ; w. part. 662. |j.€T€ctti w. gen., dat., 421, 459. p^pt(s) 164; w. gen. 445 c ; w. 08, k c., 557 ; conj. 701 h, 703 c. pq adv. x oi>, 686 s ; redund. 713 ; /xqSe emph., fx) ov, 713 c, f ; /LL7) TL ye, fJLT] OTL (oiTU s), 717 d, g : conj. 701 e, 624 s : p. t) 8£, p.r]Te, conj. 701 c, a. pq 8 «ts dec. 25, 240 b ; H7)5tv as indecl. 507 e. pqxfrt 546 ; w. art. 524 : 681 252 c. oSous dec. 17, 205 a. ’08v(r[ 6lo) w. gen. 412, 436 c. -o 0 ev, -o 0 i, 191s, 380. 60oi5v€Kal265; use557a, 701 j. ot <1 ot, oet, or], oot, eot, ote, ota, oe, oa, 7, 119 s, 13, 131 d ; <0 130 c, 134 , 201 a ; < e 4 in pf. 312 b: in old dat. 191. 4, 380 c; in voc. 215 c ; inaug. 278 ; in opt. 293, 315 c ; in accent. 767. olSa w. pt. 677 ; old' otl 717 b; olad ’ o Spdaov 655. OlSvirovs dec. 21 , 214 s. -oi'iv for -olv 201 b, 221 d. oiKaSe 225 i, 787 i. otKetos w. gen. 437 b ; w. dat. 450. oIkos 0111 . w. gen. 438. oiKTetpw w. gen. 429 e. oiKTpos cp. 260. oip.01 453; w. gen. 429e. -010 Thes. gen. 201. ol'opai > olpac parentli. 313 e ; w. gen. 413. olos 53 ; use 549 s, 563 s ; in con dens. 555 s, 565 ; in exclam. 564 b ; w. inf. 671 : oIjs re 556 c ; olov, ota, w. pt. 681. ois, ots, dec. 19, 21 . -ouri dat. pi. 187, 201 d. oixopai as pf. 612 ; w. pt. 679. oXbyos cp. 261b, 262 b; w. art. 523 f : oXlyov ( 8eiv ) 665 ; dXiycp 486. oXfycopew w. gen. 432d. 8Xos w. & wt. art. 523 e. '0|ir|p u,mHomer, 469d. opiXeu, - 7 JT 7 JS, w. dat. 450. 6p.wp.1w. acc. 472 f. op.ov & der. w. dat. 450 s, w. gen. 442 a ; w. /cat 705 c; Spocos eipi const. 657 j ; 6/juos w. pt. 662. 8vap dipt. 228 a. oveipov, -os, dec. 225 f. 6vopia in periphr. 437 c ; acc., dat., 485 7 . ot r- in pron. &. adv. 377. 8 mo- 9 ev w. gen. 445 c. o 7 rov, ottol • 7 rod, 7 rot • ov , ol , 53 ; w. gen. 420 ; interchanged 704. ’Ottovs dec. 17, 207 c. 8 ttws adv. 53, 559 a, 624 e ; conj. 701 e, 624 s ; in ell. 626. opcuo w. oVa/s, pi], 626 ; w. pt. 677. op'yl.^op.ai. w. gen., dat., 429, 456. ope^op-ai w. gen. 430 b. opeoxjH old dat. 190 a. opvis dec. 224 e. opc|>av 6 s w. gen. 414 b. -os in der. 363, 365, 367, 386 ; changed in cp. 257 s. opX€op,ai w. acc. 477 b. 8 s rel., dec. 28, 250 : use as rel. 549 s, as complem. 563 s ; attr. 552 s, Att. 554 a, in¬ verse 554 c ; w. modes 640 s : os jSoi/Xei 559 b: 8 s as demonst. 518 f, 519 f : 8 s possess. 252. 5 ; use 538 s. 8cros53; use 549s, 563 s; in condens. 556, 565 ; in exclam. 564 b ; w. inf.671: 8 (rovasindccl. or adv. 507 e, f, 556 d; oacp 468 : oarifiepcu 551 i. oo-cre dec. 228 b. octtcov, - odv , dec. 16,772. 8 crTis,orts, otov, &c.,dec. 28, 254, 255 e : use as rel. 549 s, as complem. 563 s ; x os 549 s ; w. modes 640 s : 0 rt pa- 6 (Jjy (rraOdiv) 674 h. -ocrros, num. in, 240. 2. oo-c|>paivop.cu w.gen.432. 8tc (ora^OlOb) w. inodes 640 s'; w. sup., aor., 553 b, 605. 8ti 701 i, j, n, 643 s ; x cos 702 ; not elided 129 a ; redund. 644, 659 e ; repeated 714 ; in anacol. 716 ; pos. 719 77 : w. sup. 553 c ; otl pr] 701 111 : tin tl ; 566 a. ov < 00 , eo, oe, oa, oF, oov, eov, oet, 7, 217 b, 120s; <0 213s,347h, 130 c ; ovk, oi>x, ovx'p 165, 685 c ; x pr) 686 ; interrog. 687 ; redund. 713 ; wt. pd 476 d : ov pr] w. subj. or fut. 597, 627 ; ov x otl ipaov, o 7 tws , olov), ofiSas dec. 224 b. [717. ovSels (ovdk ets 240 b) 24 : ovdels octtls ov 559. ovkovv therefore 687 c. o5v < eov (c ov d., 1 .) 389 g, 685 c ; pos. 720. ovvexa < 06 eVe/ca 126 8 ; use 557 a, 701 j, 703 c. ovs €CXa> w. dat. 454 d ; in wish 638 g. ocf/eXos dipt. 228 a. ooXlo-kcLvw w. gen. 431. oopa 701 e, 624, 53 v. o\j/e cp. 263 a ; w. gen. 420 ; w. ?> 571 d. owO 135 , 322 c, 324 c. - 6 ( 1 ) in der. 378 b. 114, 137; , w. gen., 414 a. [acc. 479. 7 Tvio xv. gen. 436 c, xv. wvv£, dec. 224 h. ttoGsv, 7 ro?, 7 rod, weis, 53 ; w. gen. 420. TroLecovv’. dat., 2 acc., 460, 480 b ; mid. 579, 581, 585 ; w.gen. 430,431 b; in periph. 475. iroiT]TT]s 15, 366 d, 791 b. iroXfipcw, -10s, w. dat. 455. ttoXis dec. 19, 21, 217 g, li, 222 c. TroXiTetiw, mid. 582 5 . ttoXvs dec. 24, 236 ; w. art. 523 f ; cp. 261 ; \v. /cat 702 c : woWov 431 a, 7roXXy 468. iroppco, TTpocrco, xv. gen. 405, 420 a. Tropcfjvpeos cp. 257 c. nocreiSwv dec. 208 f, 211 a. ttoctis dec. 218. 2. iroo-ov ; -o>; 431 a, 468'. TTOTe,Trov,TTu>s,kc., x wo¬ re; &e., 53, 563 s; pos. 720; end. 787b: wore w. interrog. 389 i. [n. TTorcpos 376s: -ov701i, TroTvia, -va, fern. 238 b. ttovs dec. 17, 214 s, 231 c. -n-pdos dec. 24, 236 c. Trpda-a-o) 577 a; w. 2 acc. 480. wpewoi xv. dat. 453; -u)v, -ovtws, xv. gen. 431 b. 7rpecrP€tia), mid. 581. -rpccr^vs, -eipa, &c., 238 a, 235 d ; cp. 261 e. Trplcto-0ai w. gen., dat, acc., 450 c, 431. wpiv const. 703 d. Trpo 688, 689 i; in crasis 126, 382 a: cp. 262 d; w. comp. 511 a; wpb rod 519 b; wpowa\ai 706b. TrpoLKos,-Ka,adv.380a,b. irpcs ( WpOTL, WOTL, WOT, 136) 688, 689 i; in cp. 511 a ; w. pass. 586 d ; as ad v. 703 b; in compos. 699g; in accent. 788 e ; by per b. 476 b. irp o crp dXXw xv. ge n. 43 6 c. 7rpocnr|K€i xv. gen., dat, 421,450 ; -ovabs. 675 d. Trp^a-0€(v 164 a), wpbre- pov, xv. gen. 445c, 408 ; xv. wpLv 703 d. TrpoTcpos cp. 262 c, d. 7rpovp-yov382 ; cp. 262 d. irpcc-jpwv, -eppaacra, 235 d. TTpoyoos, -ovs, dec. 225 g. wpeot cp. 263 a ; xv. gen. 420. -n-pcoTos cp. 262 c, d. TTT for 7r (wtoXis) I 7 I. 7TTVX;'), -£, dec. 225 b. TruvOdvopai xv. gen. 413', 434 a ; as pf. 612'; xv. pt. 677'. Trvp dec. 14, 225 f. TTtoXecD sell, xv. gen. 431 a. 7ra>s &v in xvish 637 d ; 7rws in reply 708 c. P 4, 137 ; aspirated, doubled, 93 d, 146, § 707. p GREEK. 457 159 e, 171 a; final 169; < v 150,166 ; < a 157, 169 cl ; metatli. 145, 342. 3, 171 ; preference for a 145 a, 333 d : changes of pa - 152 s; P-P > uPp, Pp, 146 b. p iSios cp. 261. pj» w. gen., dat, acc., 412 a', 479. p'jrwp dec. 18, 153. pis dec. 18, 208. -pos, adj. in, 375 f. 2, , iter. 332 . REV. GR. 20 (TKOirew, mid. 5S2 y ; w. 07ra>s, nr], 624, 626. (TKoop dec. 206 a. crpo>Si| dec. 224 f. o-os 252. 5 ; use 538. (toc{>6s dec. 23, 232 ; -6s, -us, cp. 257, 263. criravl^M w. gen. 414 b. o-TTeVSw mid. 580. w. dat. 453. 1 rov (jivv 170) 688, 689 b; in compos. 166 ; w. num.240f: compounds w. dat. 451,699 f; w.gen. o-uvfXovxi 671 c. [424. -o-uvrj in der. 367 c. CT-uvlipjLt w. gen. 432 b. truvoiSa const. 657 j. crus, 5s, dec. 14, 141. o\J>aXXopai w. gen. 405 a. o-4>e, o-lou, o-lv, 27, 246 d, 247 ; use 539 ; end. 787 s. o-4>eT€pos 252. 5, 538 s. cr<})o8p6s cp. 257 a. o-4>(u,w€,&c., 27,246 s. o-xe8ov w. gen., dat, 445 c, 450'- 2\'npa’A\K/4ai'(/ | rdapu<6v{FiOi.- utlov), 569 d. cruXu w. gen. 405 a. 2<*)KpaTT)s dec. 19, 213 s. trciia dee. 17, 206. -Tr)p tL Sb, &c., 564c ; IVa tl 566 a; n Xe£ets. 610- b ; tl ou as imv. 597 f. TurtpvTis : dec. 225 d. to ye , to. ml To y 7rpa rod, 519 b ; tA vuv elvai 665b l rot, Taiy — ol, at, 28 j. [pos. 720. Tot end. 685. c, 787 d ; toios, -ovtos, -bade,. 53, 252, 199 a, 547'. Tomato w. gen. 430. -tos in der.. 240. 2,. 363d, 374 e, 269 d ; verbal in, w. dat. 458. to cros,- out os, -bade, 53, 252, 199 a, 547. totc \v. art. 526. [253. tov = Ttms, &c., 28 f, g, -Tpa in der. 366 b. Tparr^a dec. 15, 791 c. rpets dec. 25, 240 e. Tptirto mid. 585. 5. -Tpta, -rpts, in der. 365 b. Tptr|pr]s dec. 213 c, 219 a. Tp Ltov rnxiraXavTov 242 e. -Tpov in der. 366 b. Tpoirts dec. 218. 1. Tpoirw, -ov, -oas, 485 a. Tv-yxdvo) w. gen. 426 s, 434 ; vv. part. 677. tuvvos, -oaros, 53, 252 a. Tvirro) w. 2 acc. 480 b'. Tvpcrts dec. 218. 2. tv4>Aos w. gen. 446 b. Tixj>i»)s dec. 225 j. to th(wh)erefore 466, 519 b : = tlvl 253. -t top iii der. 365 b. ’ Y v(/tAdv 4, 98 b, 106 ; v- 93 c, u- 93 c ; u < f, cf, 138, 142, 217 b, c, 345 ; < 0 , co, cp,o l, I I 4 d, 20 b ; v < vv, aF, ue,. va, at, ea, 7, 115, 121 s, 217 c, 278 ; u>a, coin s. 310, 314, 347 ; u add¬ ed to s. 355. {»Ppio-TT]9. cp. 259 a. a-yiT]s cont. 120 f. u'Scop dec. 206. at a[v«, mid. 582/3 ; vv. inf. or pt. 657 k'. c{»ap in early cj. 271. av€pos etpt 573 c. < >aos, (puis, dec. 224 f. oapuyl dec. 224 f. cfjciSopai w. gen. 405 b. 4>€pT€pOS, -UTTOS, &C., cp. 262 b. 4>£pw, mid. 578 a, 58.5 : (pepe 656 b. eu 684b; vv. gen. 429e. 4>€uyo) const. 485 d ; as pass. 575 a ; aspf. 612. npl vv. inf. 659 h : 0 a- criv 571 c ; t, p. or vv. pt. 677 f; vv. /cat 705 c. 4>0d‘is, (pOoTs, dec. 224 e. <}) 0 ov€ to vv. gen., dat., 432 f, 456. -<|u(v) old dat. 190 , 163. <}dXos vv. gen., dat., 442', 456 ; ep. 257 d, 261 e. \€vJ/ dec. 17, 151, 778. 4 >\vap€ts ^X wv @74 g. oj3€(o, mid. 582 p ; or 0o/3os, W. oVtos, pup, 624 s ; om. 626 s ; vv. 7 rws, et, 625 b. d>opKus dec. 208 e, 224 f. 4>peap dec. 207 b, 778c. plKT|, -£, dec. 225 b_ 4>poCptOV (7T pb, OLpLOs ) 159 h. 4>povTtcTTT|S; const. 472j. opouSos 161c, 238 a. (Jjpoupos 161 c. Qvyrj, (pvya-Se, 225 ev ouXa£, Ion. -a/cos, 225 f. uXao-crG), mid. 579. tj>v£ipos vv. acc. 472 j. <})uco vv. gen. 412. 4>tos dec. 17, 206, 224 f. X 4 , 137 ; <0,7, 0, 147, 161 , 168 s; changes 147 s, 159, 167 ; ins. 19 . 1 . 3 , ; added to s. 354. Xcdpto vv. dat. 456 \ vv. acc. 472 b, 477 \ vv. pt. 677'. [456, 429 a. XoAciraIvto vv. dat., gen., XctXciros w. dat. 453: -tos GREEK. u>(pe\ov 459 ora. 506 b : x € ^P wv > -taros, 261, 262 b. XeXiSwv dec. 224 a. X*WX ovcra 126 /3. XoXoop.ai, x^°- uat » w * dat., 456 ', 429 a'. yopos dec. 16, 775. yovs dec. 224 f. Xpd.op.ai av. dat., acc., 466 b, 478. Xpeos dec. 224 f. Xpii w. gen., acc., 473 b; w. inf. 595 : ipf. 611. XpT]t« w. gen. 414 c. XPRP-a in periph. 446a; ri xp d, aa why 483 c. Xpritripos av. dat. 453. Xpovos, gen. 433, dat. 469, 485 e, acc. 482. X.pv'St x ovrtos 547, 53. wStj dec. 15, 195, 775. -1084s in der. 375 f. -cov, -wvLa in der. 372 a. cove opai w. gen., dat., acc., 431 a, 450 c. ipov dec. 16, 775. coott interj. 684, 160 g. d’pa w. dat., inf., 460 ; sc. ecrrtV 572 : topalos w. gen. 436'. -cos, adv. in, 381. cosproclit.786; use 711 a, 53, 701 e, i, j, k ; 0111 . before appos. 394b; w. gen. 420 b ; w. dat. 462 d ; w. sup. 553 ; in condens. 558 b, 565 ; in excl. 564 c' ; w. pt. 598 b, 680, 675 e ; final 624 s ; complem. 643 s, x otl 702 a, om. 647 b ; in wish 648 d ; av. inf. 671, 513 d ; w. adv. 711; av. num. 711b; as prep. 711 c ; in ell. 711; anacol. 716 : tar tv cos 559 a ; cos rt 566 a. cocrrrep 389 h; w. pt. 680, 675 e ; in ell. 711 : toairep av el 622 d. cocttc 389j,787e; consec. 701k, 671 d ; w. imv. 655 ; av. inf. 671,513 d. axrr^opai av. dat. 455 f. cov Ion. 108 b, 131 e. cocjjeXe'co av. dat. 453 ; av. acc. 472 b : -uv w. gen. 444 e. [638 g. coc{)eXov in wish, 611, 798 . INDEX II.-LATIN AND ENGLISH. This Index is designed, not only for prominent subjects and words, but also for the Greek and Latin authors cited, and for abbreviations. The writings of Xenophon are commonly cited without naming the author, and the Anabasis Avithout even naming the work (by book, chapter, and section, according to the usual division: as, iv. 3. 12). The lliacl and Odyssey are cited by book-letter and verse as numbered by Wolf, Bekker, &c.; a capital referring to the Iliad, and a small letter to the Odyssey (A. 25, for II. iv. 25; 5. 134, for Od. iv. 134). m Hesiod, the references are made to the verses of Gaisford; in Pindar, to "those of Heyne; and in the Dramatists, to those of Dindorf. The Historians are commonly cited by book and chapter, according to the usual division; Demos¬ thenes, by the pages and lines of fieiske; the other Orators and Plato (includ¬ ing Timaeus Locrus), by the pages and lines or division-letters of Stephens; Strabo by the pages, and Athenanis by the pages and division-letters of Casau- bon; the fragments of the Tragedians and Aristophanes, as numbered by Din¬ dorf; those of Alcaeus, Sappho, Corinna, Epicharmus, and Sophron, as num¬ bered by Ahrens, with the numbers of other well-known editions (as of Alcaeus by Matthiae, and of Sappho by Neue) often annexed ; those of Hesiod, Si¬ monides, and Tyrtaeus, according to Gaisford; those of Aleman, according to Bergk; those of Pindar, according to Bbckh ; &c. Figures indicating the times at or about which the authors nourished are here subjoined to their 460 A- INDEX II. AFFI § 798. names, from the latest edition of Liddell & Scott’s excellent Lexicon. It will be understood that the year before Christ is denoted, unless the number is followed by “ A. D.” For the authors most cited, the dialect and chief department of composition are also indicated. These particulars should be carefully noted, in judging of the forms and constructions adduced. Titles of works are some¬ times added. In most cases, the meaning of the abbreviations used in this work will be plain from their familiar use, or from the connection and the following list of words; in other cases, special aid will be given below. For some explanations applying to the Index itself, see § 797. See also § 804 s. A-Declension 183 b. Ablative in Latin 399 b, c, 465 b. Absolute nom. 401 ; compt. & sup. 514; time 607; inf. 665; gen., acc. Absorption of vowels 118. [(pt.) 675. Abstract noun 55, 363, 367, com¬ ound 3S6 d; in pi. 489; as concrete 0 i, 363 h. Acatalectic verse 743. Accent 766 s ; marks 94, 98 b, 767 e,g: principles 766 s; uses 766.3, 727; final, recessive, retentive, 769: gen. laws 770 s: in contr. 772, crasis 773, apost. 774, dec. 775 s, cp. 776, cj. 776, 780 s, compos.783: in construction 784, grave 784, anastrophe 785, proclitics 786, enclitics 787: information , hist., 789; in dial. 790; in theme 791 s; in adv., prep., 794 ; in compos. 795 : final at- and oi 767 b: rhythmic 741. Accentual, or tone places 767. Accusative 10 , 186 d, 398, 485 d ; local idea 470; mark ^ or « 184 c; changes 122, 160 e, 199, 202 b; in appos. w. sent. 396 : of dir. obj. and eff. 472 s; w. verbs (also gov. gen. or dab, of motion, &c.) 472, 485 d ; w. Verbals 472 j; w. causatives (so Set, xpv) 473; by attr. 474; in periph. 475; w.verb om. 476; w. adv. of swear¬ ing 476 d; om. 476. 2, 577 c: of effect 477; of kind, noun (so w. adj.) 477, neut. adj. 478, defin. noun 479: double, w. verbs of making, doing, choosing, naming, saying, asking, clothing, con¬ cealing, teaching,&c.,480: of specif., or synecd., 481, 587. 2: of extent 482: adv., 483, 380 a: of rel. attracted 554 a; rather w. inf. 661b; subj. of inf. 666 ; abs. 675; w. verbal in reov 682 s ; w. prep. 688 s: accent 775 s : inf. as acc. 663 e, 664 c, 665. Acephalous verse 743. Aehronic forms 590 a, 613 b, 660. Active Voice 30, 271 e ; for pass. 575; trans. and intrans., caus. and immed., 577; w. or wt. reflex, pron. 583, 577 c; = mid. 577, 585: Verbals 363, 365, 374; w. gen. 444; w. acc. 472j. Actual sentence 61 f : mode 30 c, 613; interch. w. contingent 654. Acute accent 94, 767 e; > grave 784: Additive particle 685 c. [syll. 768. Address 57 ; voc. 484, nom. 401. 3 ; sign 65 c, 484 a, 684 b. Adjective 55, 173 ; dec. 22 s, 229 s; of 1, 2, 3 term., 230 s; irreg. 236; num. 25, 239; pron. 28, 249: compar. 256: der. 373, 509 i; compos. 385 s: synt., agreement 504,492 s; anacoluth. 504 b; subj.om.506,712; adj.as subst. or adv. 506 d, 509; use of neut. 507, 491, 502, w. impers. 570 e, pi. for sing. 489: pos. 718 f, s; accent of fem. 777. 2 , of theme 791s: Adj. Clause 62 h; pos. 718 o. Adjunct, prepos. x nude, complem. x circumst., 58. Adnominal genitive 435 d. Adonic verse 750.1. Adopted stems 358. Adverb55,685; num.52,241,pronom. 53, 377, charact., neg., interrog., &c., 685 s: cp. 263, 262 d; der. 380: synt. 685, 703 s; w. art. = adj. 526; attracted 554 d, 558 b; complex 559, 565; as prep., as conn, and non-conn., 703; in const, pneg. 704; used subst. or adj. 706: pos. 718 e, s; accent 794, 786 s. Adverbial clause 62 h, pos. 718 p ; acc. 483, 380, gen., dat., 380; phrases 529, 698; inf. 655; pt. 674 d. Adversative conjunctions 701 b. /Elianus fl. 150 A. D. iEolic dialect (iEol., a:.) 82, 84, 87 a ; opt. 293 e; verse 750; digamma 98 e; form 297 b; accent 790. [tor, § 85. iEschines (J^schin.) fl. 345, Att. ora- iEschylus (iEsch.) fl. 484, Att. tra¬ gedian, § 85: Agamemnon, Choephori, Eumenides, Persse, Prometheus, Sep- tem contra Thebas (Th.), Supplices; iEsdpus, fabulist. [Fragmenta. Affixes, open x close, 172 c ; nude x euph. 183, 303: of dec. 11, 180 s, 20 , analyzed and compared 12 s: of pers. pron. 27 e: of cj., subjective x obj., pri¬ mary x sec.,imv., inf., partic., 32,35s, § 798. AFFO LATIN & ENGLISH. ARTI 4G1 285 s, 48 , 321 s; nude 290 a, 313, 320; regular 303; union w. s. 304 s. Alformatives 360, 32 f. Agent, suff. of, 365 ; w. pass., gen. 586, 434, dat. 586, 461,458, acc. 682 b. Agesilaus, see Xenoplion. Agreement 63 a, 492 s ; acc. to form x sense 493 s; of subst. 393, adj. 504, pron. 505, verb 568. Alcreus (Ale.) 11. 606, iEol. lyrist, § 84: Alcaic verse 743, 750. 3. Aleman (Alcm.) 11. 650, Dor. lyrist: Alcmanian verse 750. 3. Alexandrine dialect 88 a. Allegory 70 e. Alpha privative 385, 436. Alphabet 1 , 90 ; hist. 97 : Heb. and Lat. 2, 92, 97 s. Alternative adv. 685 c ; conj. 701 d. A mo, contr. cj. 43. Amphibrach 77, 740 c. Anabasis, see Xenophon. Anacoluthon 701; in synt. of appos. 396 c, nom. 402, adj. and pt. 504 b, compt. 511, art. 532, fin. verb 644 s, 649 s, 655, inf. and pt. 659, 667 g, ver¬ bal 683, particle 716. Anacreon 11. 540, Ion. lyrist: poems in imitation of, Anacreontica(kn&ct.) : Anacreontic verse 754, 759. Anacrusis 743 e, 750 c. Analysis of sentences 57 s, 72s, words 75 e, cp. 29, verb 32, affixes 12 s, 27 e. 32, 35 s, metres 78. [742, verse 751. Anapaest77, 740 c: anapaestic rhythm Anastrophe 71 a ; of accent 785. Andocides A. 415, Att. orator. Anomaly, -lous, see Irregular. Antecedent, def. or indef., 549 ; in clause w. rel. or om. 551; attracted 553 s: clause, un. w. rel. clause 555 s. Antepenult 111 , 767 f, 770. Anthologia Graeca (Antli.). Antibacchius 77, 740 c : -ic rhythm Antimachus 11. 405, Ep. poet. [742 b. Antimeria 70 a. [in Anthol. Antipater Thessalonicensis 11 .10 A. D., Antipliilus (Antiphil.), epigrams. Antispast 77, 740 c : -ic verse 742 b, Antistrophe 744 e. [765. Antithesis 6 , 104 ; or contrast, 71a. Aorist 30 b, 267 c, 273 s; w. a changed or om. 152, 306: second 289, in pures 313 b; stem 47, 336, 340; accent 780 s, 789 d; redupl. 284 c; intrans. 338 b, 1 577 e; 1 and 2 a. forms united 327 : synt., x def. and compl. tenses, 5U0 s; narrative 590 a; in imv. 592 b; as se¬ quel 592 c, 605 b; genetic use 602 b, 603,605; gnomic 606; x ipf. asconting. or indef. 615 s; x pres. w. nv 628; inf. 660, 598; pt. 674 e, 660 e; pass, and mid. interch. 576; aor. sub = fut pf. Aphaeresis 6 , 103 c, 124 b. [617 c. Apocope 6 , 103 c ; in particles 136 . Apodosis 62 j ; see Conclusion. Apollonius Dyscolus 11. 138 A. D., grammarian: De Pronomine. Apollonius Khodius A. 200 , Epic poet. Apologia (Apol.), see Xenophon. Aposiopesis 68 e, 532. Apostrophe 6 , 103 d, 127, 135 b; accent 774, 788 b: rhetor. 70 g. Appellatives 55 ; der. of fern. 370. Apposition, -tive, 58 ; dir., pred., modal, &c., 393; partitive 395, 417: synt. 393 s; w. sentence 396, w. voc. 485 a, by svnesis 394 c: appositional verb 59 a, 437. Aptote 227 a. Apud (ap.) = quoted in. Aratus 11. 270, didactic poet (Ep.). Archaism 67 b. Archilochus 11.700, Iambic poet (Ion.). Archimedes A. 250, mathematician (Dor. § 86 ). [§ 86 ). Archytas 11. 400 ?, philosopher (Dor. Arcus dec. w. dpKvs 219 f. [(Ion.). Aretaeus 11. 70 ? A. D., medical writer Argive dialect (Dor.), vs in, 156 c. Aristophanes (Ar.) 11. 427, Att. come¬ dian, § 85: Acharnenses, Aves, Eccle- siazusse, Equites, Lysistrata, Nubes, Pax, Plutus, Ran®, Thesmophoria- zus®, Vesp®: Aristophanic verse 753. Aristoteles (Aristl.) 11. 347, philos¬ opher (§ 85 b): De Interpretatione, Metaphysica, Rhetorica, &c. Arrangement, log., rhet., rhythm., 64; hyperb. 71; dir. or normal x indir. or varied, periodic x loose, 718; why varied 719 s. Arsis 741 ; affecting quant. 736 c. Article, prepos. x postpos., 28, 249 s; in crasis 125; mark of gend., &c., 173b; proclit. 786: synt., use as yen. dejin., Ep. 516, Ion. and Doiv5l7, Att. 518 s: as art.proper 520 s; generic , w. proper names, abstracts, inf., &c., 522: limiting 523 s; order of descrip¬ tion x statement 523; w. pron. 524 s, 531, avTo? 540 b; w. num 531 d; w. adv. 526; w. ell. 527, 532, neut. 528 s: w. dfjafn', 7 rept, 527 a; in contrast, &c., 530; = poss.pron.530e; markingsubj. of sent. 534: repeated 523 b, j, 534. 4; omitted 533 s: indefinite (ris) 548 a. 462 AS PI INDEX II. COMP § 798 . Aspirate mute 4, 137 : breathing 93 : aspiration om. 159, 343, i67; trans¬ ferred 159 g, 161, 167 . Assimilation 104 ; of rel. or an tee. Asterisk ( * ) 96 c. [554. Asynartete verse 7 42 b. Asyndeton 68 d, 707; Eng. x Gr.707j. Attenuation of vowels 107, 114 : at¬ tenuated stems 341. Athenaeus ti. 228 A. D., scholar. Atona = Proclitics 786 c. Attic dialect 82, 85 ; old, mid., new, > Common, 85 a, b: dec. 200; gen. 220 f; redupl. 281 d, 357.2; opt. 293 c; imv. 300 d; fut. 305; letters 98 f : accent 790: Atticists 88 c. Attraction 70 q: in synt. of appos. 396 b, acc., &c., 474, agreement 500, adj. 508 s, pron. 552 s, 565, verb 573, 649 d, inf. and pt. 657, 666 s, particle 715, 702 d; affecting pos. 719, 553, 662. Attribute 60 b, 492 b : attributive Audio, contr. cj. 43. [gen. 435 d. Augment, syll. x temp., 277 ; rules 278 s; in compos. 282; in dial. 284 ; in accent 783, 789 c. Augmentatives, deriv., 372. Authority in prosody 726 b, 733. Auxiliary verbs 274, 285 a, 317, 598, 679. [764. Pacchius 77, 740c: -ic verse 742 b, Barbarism 67 b. Barytone 5, 768 : verb 309. Base in cp. 29, 256 a ; in cj. 289 e. Basis in versif. 743 e, 750 c. [(Bek.). Bekker’s Edition of Homer, 1858 Bion 11. 280, pastoral poet (Dor. § 86 ). Bceotic (Boeot., n.) dialect 82. Bonus , dec. compared 23. Brachycatalectic 743. Brachylogy 68 . 4. Brackets [ ] 96 c. Breathings 4, 93 ; < F, 2, 141 ; in dial. 167 c: marks 98 b. • Breve (short syllable) 725 a. Bucolic poetry 86 ; caesura 745 d. Byzantine dialect 88 s. CiES'AR, Latin historian. Caesura, of foot, verse, masc., fern., &c., csesural pause, syll., 745; affect¬ ing quantity 736 c. Callimachus 11. 260, poet (Ep., Dor., &c.): Epigrammata; Hvmni in De- lum, Dianam, Jovem, Lavacrum Pal- lad is; Fragmenta. Callinus 11 . 730 ? elegiac poet (§ 83). Cardinal numbers 52, 239 s. Cases, dir. or in dir., right or oblique, subjective, obj., or resid, 10, 179, 397 s; affixes il s, ISOs; hist. 186s: use 397 s, generic 485, in denoting place or time 470, 482 e, absolute 675, w. prep. 689: Latin 399 b, c. Catalectic 743 ; in syll., &c., 743 h. Catullus, Latin poet. Causal conjunctions 701 j. Causative verbs 379, 577, 581 ; w. acc. 473. Cf. = confer, compare, consult. Characteristic 172 d : exponents 66 . Chiasma 71 a. Chief = principal clauses 626 : chief = primary tenses 267 b: -ly (ch.). Choliambus = Scazon 759. Choral odes 744 e. • Choree = trochee 77, 740 c. [764. Choriamb 77, 740 c : -ic verse 742 b, Chorus using sing. 488 a. Chronic x achronic forms 590 a. Cicero : De Oratore, &c. Circumflex accent 94, 767e, g; 771 : -flexed syll. or vow. 768; long 771, 726. Circumlocution = periphrasis 69 d. Circumstantial adjunct, or circuin- Cj. = conjugation, [stance, 58 d, s. Clauses 57 ; kinds 62, 58 h ; pos. 718 0 , s, 721. [compos. 388 b. Ciofc vowels 107 a: affixes 172 c: Cognate vowels 4, 110 b : consonants 4, 137 b, 167 : themes 338 d. Collateral 338 d, 359 c. Collectives 55 ; w. pi. 499. Comedy, comic (com.), 85 s. Common dialect 85 a: gend. 174: commonly (comm.). Comparedio compcndiaria 511 b. Comparison (cp.) 29 (anal.), 256 s ; of adj. by - repos , -raros 257, by - iixiv . —icttos 260, irreg. 262; of adv., &c.. 263, 262 d; double 262 c; by use or adv. 510: hist. 264; accent 776: Com¬ parative (compt., comp.) w. gen., w. r?, &c., 408, 511, 513, w. ell. 511 b, 513; w. dat. of measure 468; w.reflex. 513 f; two, w. v* 513 h; abs., too, ns pos., 514s: Comp, conjunction ??7011. Compellative 57, 484 s :-part 60. Complementary adjunct, or comple¬ ment, 58 d, c, 63 f: pron., adv., 66 J, 563 s: conjunction 701 i: clause 643 s. Complete tenses 30 b, 267 c ; hist. 273 e, 276; redupl. 280; limited use, esp in act., 317s, 600c; auxil. and nude forms 317 s, 679 a; rel. to stem 47, 336; in dial. 325 d, e, 326 b, 329 s: § 798. COMP LATIN & ENGLISH. DEFI 403 x def. and indef. 590, 599: special uses 599; in imv. 599 d,e; preter. 268, 600; as pres, or fut. 610; intrans. 577 e. [and parts 62 b, g. Complex modification 59 : sentence Composition 359, 383 s ; dir. x indir., loose x close,double, &c., 387 s; vowel 383 a; form of 1st word 383, of 2d, 386; elision 128 a, 282 a; augm. and red. 282; synt. relations 722; quant. 731; accent 789 f, 795, 783. Compound word 359 b ; verb 387, 699: sentence 62 c: vowel (diphthong) 108: system 267 f: constr. 68 f, 495. Concession expr. by pt. or w. conj. 674 f, 701 g. [631 s; omitted 638. Conclusion x premise 62 j ; forms of, Concord = agreement 63 a. Concrete, abstract for, 70 i, 363 li. Condensation, 555, 565. Condition 62 j ; see Premise : Con¬ ditional conj. 701 f; sentences , forms of, 631 s, rel. 641; for oth. forms, 639. Conjugation (cj.), distinctions 30, 265 s; hist. 271 s; anal. 32, 35 s, 277 s; paradigms 37 s, 48 b; prefixes 277, 284 ; affixes 285, 48 , 3 21 ; stem 47, 49, 336: quant. 728, 730; accent 776, 780 s. Conjunctions (conj.) 55, 65 s, 700, classes, origin, 701; generic for spec. 705; ora. 707; introd. 708 e; repeated 714; pos. 718 a, 720. [269 c. Conjunctive, or contingent, mode, Connecting vowels, or connectives, of dec. 12 s, 183, cp. 29, 256 s, cj. 32 h, 35 s, 290 s, 326 , compos. 383. Connective exponents, conj. x conn, pron. or adv., primary x sec., 66: pos. 718 a, 720. Consecutive conj. 701 k, 671 d, e. Consonants 4, 137 s ; in Gr. alph. 98; old 138; changes 139 s; final 160; movable 162; dial, and poet. var. 167 s; added or om. in s. 217, 344 s, 348; af¬ fecting quant. 734 s: cons. dec. 183 b. Construction varied in Gr. 392 : per¬ sonal for impers. 573 : Constructio preegnans 704. Contingent sentence 61 f; modes 30 c; 613 s; particle 618, 685 c: Contingen¬ cy, pres, x past, fut., 613 s. Contraction (cont., ct.) 7, 117 s, 131 ; in Dec. 1 .196 s, Dec. 11 . 200 s, Dec. in. 207, 211, 219, 222 , cp. 261 a, cj. 278 s (aug.), 305 (fut.), 309, 316, 321 , der. 361 d, quant. 726; accent. 772: in versif. 741 b: Contract verbs 42, 309, in Lat. 43. [ Coordinate vowels 110b; consonants} 137 b, 168 ; sentences 62 c; conjunc¬ tions 701: Coordination 62c; for subord. Copula 60 b ; omitted 572. [705. Copulative conjunctions 701 a. Corinna fl. 500, Boeotic lyrist. Coronis 96, 124 b. Correlatives, pronominal, 53, 377. Corresponding vowels and conso¬ nants 138; connectives 66 f. Cp., in § 50 = compounded ; in the Indexes = comparison, [accent 773. Crasis 117, 124, 133 ; quant. 726 ; Cratinus fl. 454, Att. comedian. Cretan dialect 82 ; vs in, 156 c. Cretic 77, 740 c : verse 742 b, 764. Ct. = contracted. Cyropiedia, see Xenophon. [747. Dactyl 77, 740 c: -ic verse 742, Dative 10, 186 f, 190, 398, double office 399: has always <■ 184 b; not elided 129; pi. in Dec. in. 154 s, 216 d: objective 398, 448 s; of APPROACH 448 s; of nearness (traffic, subst. rep., &c.) 449; of likeness 451: of influ¬ ence 452 s, w. words of address 452, advantage, &c., 453, appearance, cause, destiny, oblig.,val., giving, 454, oppos., yielding, &c., 455, mental act or feeling, or power of exciting, 456 s, w. verbals 458, subst. verb 459, other words (to or for) 460; of agent w. pass, verbs 461, 586; for remote relations (sow.pt., cts- ju.ot, trot, &c., ethical) 462; for gen. 463 s: residual 398, 465 s, 485 c; instrum, and mod. 466 s; of instrument, means (so w. xpao^ai), 466; of way, manner, respect (so w. cun-os) 467; of meas. of diff. 468: tem¬ poral and local 469: of rel. attracted 554 b; w. prep. 688 s, w. comp, verbs 699 f,g; as adv. 380 c: pos. 718 s; ac¬ cent. 775 s: implied in an adj. 498 a; inf. as dat. 663 c, 666 b. Dativus Commodi, Incommodi, 453 n. Declarative sentence 61. Declension 10 s, 173s; distinctions 173; three methods 180; gen. rules 181; affixes 11s, 183; hist. 186; par¬ adigms compared w. Lat. 14, &c.: Dec. 1 . 14s, 189, 193; Dec. 11 . 14, 16, 187, 199; Dec. 111 . 14, 17, 186, 202; dial. 20 s; irreg. 21, 223; def. 227: adj. 22, 229; num. 25, 240 s; pt. 26, 234; pron. 27, 239: quant. 728, ac¬ cent 775 s. [verbs 337. Defective nouns 227 ; adj. 238 ; Definite tenses 30 b, 267 c ; x indef. 590 s; descriptive 591 a, 592 a; in _verbs of asking, &c., 595 a; for oth. tenses 602 s: article 520: relatives 549. 4G4 DEFI INDEX II. EURI § 798. Definitive, old, 249, 516 : noun (acc.) 479. Degrees of compar. 256 ; use 510 ; interch. 515: Degree-sign 256 a, 29. Demonstrative pron. and adv. 28, 53, 252, 377; synt. 542; om. bef. rel. 551 f; in attr. 552 s; for rel. 562. Demosthenes fl. 355, Att. orator, § 85. Denominatives in der. 362. Dentals == Linguals 4, 137 b. Dependent sentences 62 b, 58. 3, h. Deponent, mid. x pass., 266 c, 576 b ; pass, of, 588. Derivation, -tive, 54, 359 s ; euph. changes 361; quant. 731; accent 789 s. Desiderative verbs 379. Diaeresis 6, 105 ; accent 772. 3 ; mark 96 b, 110 a: in versif. 745 h. Dialects 81 s : variations in orthog. and orthoepy 98 b, 130 , 167 , dec. 20 s, &c., cj. 48, 284 , 321, synt. 392 c, accent 79° •' Dialectic Forms (D F.). Diastole x Systole 6, 105. Digamma = Vau; see F, before Z, in Greek Index: verbs 345. Diiambus, or Diiamb, 77, 740 c. Dimeter 743, 744 d. [379. Diminutives, gend. 175 ; der. 371, Dinarclius fl. 336, Att. orator. Dindorf’s Edition (Dind.). Dio Cassius fl. ISO A. D., historian. Diodorus Siculus fl. 8, historian. Diogenes Laertius fl. 200 ? A. D., biographer. Diphthongs 4, 106 ; pjrop. x improp. 108; eorresp. 115 a; resolved 105,132; quant. 526, 737; in accent. 767. Dipody 740 b. — Diptote 228 e. Direct cases 10 , 179, 397, 186 c, in accent. 775: complement , obj ., 58 e: discourse, quot., 62 k, 643, w. indir. 644, 659: compound's 388: order 718. Dispondee 77, 740 c. Distich 744 c. Distinct sentence, verb, mode, 62 a, 30 c; in dependent clauses, x incorp., 657. Distinctive adv. 685 c: conj. 701c. Distributive pronouns 55, 501. Ditrocliee 77, 740 c. Divided construction 501 a. Division of syllables 111. Dochmius 77, 740 c : -iac verse 765. Dolus compared w. olAos 14. Donum compared w. 8 Cepov 14. Doric dialect (Dor., I).) 82, 86 s: fu¬ ture 305 d, 325 b: accent. 790. Double accusative 480 : consonants 4, 137 a, d, 170 ; affecting quant. 725, 734: d. cons, verbs 41, 270 c, 311. Doubtful vowels 4, 106, 726. 3. Duad in versif. 744 e. Dual number 178 ; old plur. 186 g, 271 c; in cj. 299: used w. pi. 494. Ecbasis in versif. 743 e. Ecclesiastical dialect 88 b. Elegiac poets 83 : verse 749. Elements of the sentence 57 : of the word 172; in dec. 183, cp. 256, cj. 32, der. 359 s, compos. 383 s. Elision, see Apostrophe. Ellipsis 68 ; in synt. of appos. 394 s, gen. 418 b, 438, dat. 450 d, 462, acc. 476, adj. 506, 511b, art. 527, 533, pron. 536, 551, 555, 562, 565, verb 571, 626, 636, 647, inf. 668, pt. 676, 678 c, particle 707. Empedocles fl. 444, philosoph. poet. Emphatic changes in s. 346 : j parti¬ cles 685 c: repetition 69 b: position 719 a. Enallage (metaphor, &c.) 70s. Enclitics 787 ; accented 788. Ending, see Flexible. English x Greek 171 b. Enneemim 740 b. Eo compared with dpi 45 m. Epenthesis 6 , 103 ; see Insertion. Epexegetic inf. 668 c. [83. Epic, or Homeric, language (Ep., e.) Epicene nouns 174 a. [§ 86 . Epieharmus fl. 477, Dor. comedian, Episema 1 , 91, 98 d. Epithet x predicate adj. 59 a, 492 b. Epitrite 77, 740 c. Epode 744 e. Equestri, De Re, see Xenophon. Equal, or quadruple, rhythm 742. Especially (esp.). Essential x inflective 172 a, c. Ethical dative 462 e. Etymology 172 s ; tables 9 s. Euclldes 11. 350 ?, mathematician. Euphemism 70 m. Euphonic changes 99 ; of vowels 7, 113 s, of consonants 8, 139 s, 147 s: affixes, dec., cj , 183, 187, 303, 271 f. Euripides fl. 441, Att. tragedian, § 85: Alcestis, Andromache, Bacchse, Cyclops, Electra, Hecuba, Helena, Heracliclos, Hercules Furens, Ilippo- lytus, Ion, Iphigenla in Aulide, Iplii- genlain Tauris, Medea, Orestes, Plice- nissse, Rhesus, Supplices, Troades: § 798. exce LATIN & ENGLISH. GUTT 465 F ra^menta (Antiope, Archelaus, Cres- sse, Peleus, Folyidus, Incerta). Except, exception (exc.). Exclamation, nom. in, 401 b, gen. 429 f, dat. 453, acc. 476 a, pron. or adv. 564 b, inf 670, interj.684b: ex¬ clamatory sentence 61 d. Exempli gratia (e. g.), for example. Exponents for words 05, sentences 66 ; pos. 718 d, 720: exponential ad¬ junct 58 c. [324 c, 47 c. Extension of vowels 103 b, 135 , 322 c, Extra metrum , exclamations, 743 f. Falling Ionic 77,740 c : rhythm 742. Feet 77, 740; interch. 741b, 747, 751, 755, 760, 764; ictus 741c; cec- sura 745. Feminine gender 174 s ; dec. 189 ; in adj. 232; w. masc. form 234; fr. kind stem 235: ccesura 745 c. Figures affecting letters and sounds 6 , 99: of syntax, of rhetoric, 67 s. Final consonants 160, movable 162 : conjunctions 701 e: clauses , modes in, 624; relative 642: syll. of verse 738: acctnt 769. Finite modes, sentences 62 a ; synt. of, 568 s; interch. w. incorporated 657, 659, 671. First tenses and tense systems 289. Flexible endings, or ilexives, of dec. 12, 183; of cj. 32 i, 295, 328 - Flourished (of authors ; 11.). Fluents (X, p) 4, 137. Formation 172, 359 ; of simple words 362, compound 383; quant. 731; ac¬ cent 789: formative x radical 172 b. Fractional numbers 242 d, e. Fragment (Fr.).—French (Fr.). Frequentative verbs 379. From (by inflection, deriv., &c.; fr.). Future indef. 30 b, 266 s, 273 s; subjective tense 584; wants sub. and imv. 269 b; liquid 152; Att., Dor., 305, 325 b; redupl. 284 f: second 289: synt. 596 s; for imv. 597; gnomic 606; for pres, or past 610; in final clause 624 b; inf. 598, 660; pt. 674 e, expr. purpose 598 b; opt. 643 h; mid. for act. 584, for pass., v. v ., 576 a, c; in Mod. Gr. 598 d: def. and complete 596 a: Contingency 614. Future Perfect 30 b, 267 e, 273 e, 319: use 601: Lot. 601 e, 617 d. Galenus fl. 163 A.D., medical writer. Gender 174; rules 175s: in synt. 490 s. General or indef. premise, 634, 641. REV. GR. 20 * Generic use 63 g, 392 a ; of cases, 485, tenses 602 s, modes 651, connec¬ tives 705: time for fact 602 c, con¬ tingency 614 b: article 522. Genitive 10 , 186e, 398, 485 b: of departure, 403 s; of separ. 404 s; w. words of sparing, &c., 405 b; of dis¬ tinction 404, 406; w. words of superi¬ ority 407; w. compt. 408, 511; w. mul¬ tiples, &c., 409: of CAUSE 403, 410 s; of origin and mat. 412, for dat. 412 a; of theme, 413: of supply , w. words of plenty and want, 414: partitive 415 s, expr. quantity, &c., 416; w. subst., 418, expr. country 418 a; w. adj., art., sup., &c., 419, 511; w. adv. of place, time, state, &c., 420; w. verb, as subj. 421, as appos. 422, as complem. 423; w. words of sharing, beginning, and touch 424 s; as part taken hold of 426 a; w. words of obtaining, &c., 427: of motive, &c., 428 s, w. words of direc¬ tion, claim, dispute, 430 ; of price, value , merit, crime , 431; of punish¬ ment 431 d; of sensible and mental ob¬ ject 432; w. words of obedience 432 g; of time and place , 433: act. or effic., w. verbs of receiving, learning, &c., w. pass.verbs, verbals, &c.,434, 586: con¬ stituent (ad j unct defining thing or prop¬ erty, w. subst., adj., or adv., distinct or involved) 435 s', 485 b, attrib. or adnom. 435 d; w. compounds of a- priv., w. 6 £ 00 , &c., 436; w. appos. verb, in periphr., w. or for adj., 437; w. subs.om., or>ease of thing possessed, 438; of property 439 s; of relation 441s; social, w. adj. of connect.,442; possess. 443, w. verbs of praise, wonder, &c., 443 b; objective, w. verbals, abstracts, a’irto?, &c., 444; of loc. or temp, rela¬ tion 445; of specification, &c., 446: by attraction 474 c; in pron. 538; rather w. pt. 661 b; abs. 675; w. prep. 688 s, w. comp, verbs 699 a, f; as adv. 380 b: pos. 718 s, w. art. 523 c; accent. 775 s: implied in an adj. 498; inf. as gen. 663 e, 664. Gentile x patrial noun or adj. 368 c. Genu, Genus, dec. compared, 14, 19. Gerund, Lat., = Gr. inf. 658 b. Glyconic verse 750. 2. [&c., 606. Gnomic use of pres. 602 d, aor., fut., Gothic im 50 {dpi b). Government, or regimen, 63. Grammatical x logical parts 60. Grave accent 94, 767 e, 784 : syllable 768. ‘ [796- Greek lang., dial., literat., 81 s, 171 b, Guttler, dec. compared 14. m GUTT INDEX II. INFL § 798. Gutturals = palatals 4, 137b. Hdt. — Herodotus. Hebrew alphabet 2, 97 : influence 88 b : Hebraism 67 b. [see Xenophon. Hellenica (Hel.), or Historia Graeca, Hellenistic dialect (Hellen.) 88 b. Hendiadys, tig. of synt., 69 e. Heplithemim 740 b, 745 c; antici¬ pated 756 a [rician. Herodes Atticus fl. 143 A. P., rheto- Herodotus (Hdt.) fl. 443, Ion. his¬ torian, § 83. [748. Heroic (Epic) poetry 83 : verse 743, Hes. Cert. = Romeri et Hesiodi Cer- tamen. Hesiodus (Hes.) fl. 800 ?, poet (Ep.): Opera et Dies, Scutum Herculis, The- Hesycliius, lexicographer, [ogonia. Heteroclites 223, 225. Heterogeneous nouns 223, 226. Hexameter 743, 748 : -pody 740 b. Hiatus, how avoided, 99 s, 117 s, 162, 217; 190 ; in poetry, 746 a, 737 s. Hiero, see Xenophon. Hippocrates fl. 430, medical writer in Ion., § 83. Hipponax fl. 546, Ton. satirist, § 759. Historic present 609: historical = sec¬ ondary tenses 267 b. History of Greek lang. 81, 359, orthog. 97, dec. 187, pron. 246, 249 s, cp. 264, cj. 271, 336, accent 789. Homeric, or Epic, Dialect 83. Homerus fl. 900 ?, Ep. poet, § 83 : Ilias, Odyssea, Ilymni (in Apollinem, Bacchum, Cererem, Martem,Mercuri- um, Venerem), Batrachomyomachia. Horatius, Latin poet. Hypallage 70 r, 474 a. Hyperbaton 71, 719 s. Hyperbole, or exaggeration, 70 m. Ilypercatalectic verse 743. Hypermeter verse 743. Hypodiastole (, ) 96 d. Hypothetical period 62 j, 631 s. Iiysteron proteron 71 d. Iambus, Iamb, 77, 740 c : Iambic rhythm 742, verse 755. Ibidem (lb.) = in the same work or part of a work. Ictus in pronunc. 79 c : metrical 741. Id est (i. e.) = that is. Idem (Id.) = the same author. Idiotism, or idiom, 67 b. Illative, or inferential, adverbs 685 c. Imitative verbs 378 c. Immediate = nude adjunct 58 c : im¬ mediate, or included, x causative verbs 473, 582 fi. Imparisyllabic (Dec. 3) 184 f. Imperative (imv.) 30 c, 269 s, 272 e, 655; in perf. 318, 599 d; in depend, sent. 655 a; x sub. w. ^ 628: sen¬ tence 61 c. Imperfect (impf.,ipf.) 30 b, 267,271 d; x aor. 591s; x aor. and plup. as conting. or indef. 615 a, 616 b, in wish 636 b, g; for aor. or plup. 603 c, 604, 612, pres. 611. Impersonal verbs 571, pass. 589; inf. and pt. 657 i; pt. abs. in acc. 675; verbal 682. Improper diphthong 4, 108 : redupl. 357. 3: preposition 703 a. Impure vowel, affix, stem, word, 112. Imv. = Imperative. Inceptive verbs 350, 379 a. Incorporation, -ated sentence, verb, mode, x distinct or finite, 62 a, 30 c, 657: extensive use 658, in ind. disc. 659; relation to time 660, to case 661; pos. 718 1, m, 662; accent 780 s. See Infinitive, Participle. Indeclinable (aptote) 227 a. Indefinite (indef.) jwon. and adv. 27 s, 53, 245, 253, 548: rel 549: art. 548 a: subject of verb 571, inf. 667 h: tenses 30 b, 267 c; x def. 590 s, complete 599; how supplied 603: action 616: premise 634. Independent sentence 62 e : elements 57 f: nominative 401. Indicative (ind.) 30 c, 269, 271 s: synt., x sub. and opt. 613; expr. sup pos- contrary to fact 615, habit w. av 616, purpose 624, wish 638; in hypotli. period 631s, 634 s; in indir. disc. 643 s; generic use 651. Indirect cases 10, 179, 186 c, 397 s : complement, obj. 58 e: compounds 388: disc, or quot 62 k: order 718 r. Infinitive 30 c, 269, 272; in -ev 309 c, 326, -/xei/, -fj-evai 333 : SYNT. 657 S; x pt. 657 d,k; wide range 658, 655, in indir. disc. 659; relation to time 660; as neut. noun, w or wt. art., 663 s; of specif., adv., abs., 665; act. = pass. 663 g; w acc. 666 , other cases 667; dat. form 666 b, 782 c; redund. orom. 668; as imv., &c., 670; w connectives 671. See Incorporated. Inferential, or illative, adverbs 685 c. Inflection 172; tables 9s; three periods 276; not arbitrary 171 d. Inflective x essential 172 a, c. § 708. I NSC LATIN k ENGLISH. META 4G7 Inscriptiones Boeotica, Corcyrsea, Cretica, Cumcea, Heracleensis, l’oti- dalca. Inseparable particles 385, 252, 688 e. Insertion of cons, to prevent hiatus 99 s, 217, 19 O; of e in contr. 120 i: of p, mid. mute, 146; for metre 171; of ?, &c., in cj. 307, 311; of v in s. 351. 1; of vowel and a- in compos. 383. Intellective sentence 61: modes 30 c, 613 s. Intensive verbs 379 b : adv. 685 c. Interchange, -ed (interch.). Interjection 55, 68 -lb. Interrogative pron. or adv. 28 g, 53, 253, 564; w. art 531; doubled 666 b; pos. 718, 720: particles , dir., indir., altern , 685 c, 687: sentence 61, ex¬ pressing wish 597. Intransitive use of act., esp. in sec¬ ond and complete tenses, 577 b, e, 338 b. Introduction, -tory (introd.), 81. Inversion 71 a : inverse attr. 554. Ionic dialect (Ion., 1 .), old, mid., new, 82 s: letters 98 f: forms in 3 pi. 300 d, 329 : feet and verse 77, 742 b, 764: accent. 790. Iota subscriyA 109 : form of verbs 349. Ipf., impf., — Imperfect. Irony, fig. of rhet., 70 k. Irregular nouns 223 : adj. 236 : cp. 262: verbs 50, 336 s. Isams (Isse.) 11. 380, Att. orator. Isochronous feet 7 40 a. Isocrates 11. 380, Att. orator, § 85 b. 1 terative pron., see avros : form in cj. Ithyphallie verse 763. [ 332 . Juvenalis, Horn, satirist. [477. Kindred vowels 114b: noun in acc. Koppa (Qopli, Q) 1 s, 91, 98 d. Kiihner’s Largest Grammar, New Ed. (Kilim A Labials 4, 137 ; changes 147 s : in Dec. hi . 17, 203: 1. verbs 38 s, 270 c. Lacedaemoniorum Respublica (Lac.), see Xenophon. Laconic dialect 82, 141 a. Language, significant elements 55, general synt. 56 s ; Indo-European family 81; synthetic x analytic 171 b. Last syllable of Verse common 738. Late (1.), i. e. during the long period of decline which followed the loss of freedom. Latin alphabet 2 , 138 a ; forms of Gr. words 92; process., interch., and contr. of vowels 116 s; equivalents of Gr. 2, N, F, 139; changes of cons. 100 b, 140 c, 147 s, 167 s: dec. 13 s, 185, 204, 206, 210 d, 219; dual 178 a; dat forms 190 b; adj. 23, 25; pron. 27, 247: cp. 29, 264: cj. 32 i, 35 s, 271s, 273 f; mid. voice 266 e; contr. vei'bs 43, 309 a; stem-changes 341, 345, 349 s; fut- pf. 601 e, 617 d : cases 399 b, c: constructions 405 s, 472 1, &c.: metrical system 746 e. Lesbian dialect 82, 84, 87 a, 790 b. Letters, Gr., Heb., Lat., 1 s, 90, 98 : names indecl. 227. Ligatures, or abbreviations, 3, 90. 2 . Limiting article 523 s. Linguals 4, 137 ; changes of and w., 147 s; in Dec. in. 17, 204, contr. 207: lingual verbs 39, 270 c. Liquids 4, 137 ; changes of and w., 144 s, 168; doubled in TEol. 171 a; in Dec. hi. 18, 208: liquid verbs 40,152, 311 b, 342. 3, 347. Liquid-mutes 205 c. Lithuanian esmi 50 (dpi b). Litotes 70 m, 654, 686 i. Livius, Latin historian. Lobeck ad Phryniehum. Plirynichus fl. 180 A. D., grammarian. Local quantity 725, 734 s. Logaoedic verse 742 c, 750 d, 754. Logical parts 60 : order 64. Long vowel 4, 106 ; = 2 short 115, 725; shortened bef. vowel 737; form¬ ing 2 tone-places 767: syll , by nature or pos , 725 s. ’ " [7181. Loose compounds 388 b : structure Lucianus 11. 160 ? A. D., essayist and wit: De Historia Scribenda, Deorum Concilium, Dialogi Deorum (I). D.), Deorum Marinorum (I). Mar.), Mor- tuorum (D. M.), Parasltus. Luens, dec. compared 26. [poet. Lycophron (Lyc.) fl. 270, Iambic Lycurgus (Lycurg.) fl. 330, Att. Lyra, dec. compared 14. [orator. Lyric poetry 84, 86 ; a in, 85 c. Lysias fl. 411, Att. orator, § 85. Macedonio dialect 88 . Magister Equitum, see Xenophon. Masculine 174 ; form as fern., esp. in du. and pi , 234 d, e, 489 c, 490: cce~ Megarian dialect 82. [sura 745 c. Memorabilia Socratis, see Xenophon. Menander 11. 322, Att. comedian, Mesode in versif. 744 e. [§ 85. Metaphor, fig. of rhet., 70 d. 408 META INDEX II. OXYM § 798. Metaplasm, -asts, 223 s. Metathesis G, 104, 145 ; in cj. 308, 342; in cler. 361 d. Metonomy, tig. ofrliet., 70 h. Metre 740 s: metrical ictus 741: scries 745 g. Middle Mutes 4, 137 ; ins. 146 b; changes 146 s; see /3, 7 , S: Stem 47, 386:' Voice 30, 266; hist. 271 e, 274; interch. w. pass, or act. 266, 575 s, 584 s; trans. or intrans. 578; w. dir. reflex, sense 578, indir. 579, recipr 580, caus. 581, subjective 582; w. refl. pron. 583; w. indir. case 585. 4. MinmennusH. 630, Elegiac poet, g 83. Minor elements of sentences 57. 2. Modal sign 65 : appos. 393 c, 394 b. Modern Greek, its pronunc. 79. 2 ; differing from the Ancient in respect to the dual 178 a, fut. 598 d, perf. and plup. 605 c, opt. 653 b, inf. 658 c, versif. 766. 2 , 757 a, &c. See also 630. Modes 30 c, 265, 269 s; hist. 272; affixes 286 s; conn, vowels 290, 326 ; flex, endings 295, 328 : synt. 613 s; intellective 613 s, in final clauses 624, conditional 631, rel. or temp. 640, complem. 643; law of sequence 617; interchange 649: volilive 655: incor¬ porated 657 s. Modified stems 49, 339 a. Modifiers 57 g, 58 ; pos. 718 3 . Molossus, foot, 77, 740 c. Monadic names w. article 522 e. Moneo, contract cj. 43. Monometer 743 : Monopody 740 b. Monoptote 228 e. Monostichs x systems, stanzas, 744. Monosyllables, roots 340. 3, 359 f; quant. 729.2; accent 782 e, 786, 793 c. Month, division of, 242 b. [g 86. Mosclius 11. 200, Dor. pastoral poet, Movable consonants 162 : words, motion, 174 c. Multiples 52, 240. 4 ; w. gen. 409. Mutes 4, 137 ; changes of and w., 147 s, 167s;m. and liquid as afl’cct- ing quant 735: in Dec. in. 17, 203: fn cj. 38 s, 270 c, 347. Names of letters 97. Nasals 4, 137 ; changes of and w., 139 s: nasal form in cj. 351. Nature, long or short by, 725 s. Nauta, dec. compared 14. Negative prron. and adv., object, x subj., 53, 686; as interrog. or affirm. 687; redund. w. indef, inf., &c., 713; ov hi j w. sub. or fut. 627: sentence 61 e. Nepos, Latin biographer. Neuter (neut., n.) 174 ; dec. 188 ; in adj. 231: as generic gend. 491, 496 c, 502; pi. w. sing, verb 569; impers. 571 e: as adv. or acc. of effect 880 a, New stem in cj. 47, 336. [483, 478. Nicopho fl. 388, Att. comedian. Nominative (nom., n.) 10,186 d, 398 s, 485; for voc. 182, 401 c; in appos. w. sent. 396: as subject 400, 568; om. 571; by attr. 573, 657: independ. 401; in anacol. 402 ; of rel. attracted 554 b: accent 775, 791 s. Noun 55 ; dec. 14 s, 193 s ; deriv. 363; compos. 386; synt. 393 s; quant. 728 s; accent 775 s, 791. Nude affixes, dec., 183, 187, cj. 303, 313, 320, 3 2 6e, 335 : adjunct 58 c. Number 178, 270 ; signs 12 , 33 a; use and interch. 488 s, 494 s. Numerals 25, 52, 239 s; how com¬ bined 242; letters as, 1, £1. O -Declension (Dec. 11 .) 183b, 187. Obelisk ( 4*) 96 c. [448, 470 s. Object 58 e, 63 f; dir. x indir. 397 s, Objective affixes 36, 285 : voice 271 e, 274: cases 10, 397 s; dat. 448 s: ney. 68611 : yen., adj.. 444 g. Oblique cases 179 b ; as adv. 380. Odes, choral, 744 e. (Economicus, see Xenophon. Old stem 47, 386. [rhet. 68 . 2. Omitted (om.) : omission as fig. of Onomatopoeia 70 o, 349 a, 355. Open vowels 107 a : affixes 172 c. Optative 30 c, 269, 272 d, Att., rEoh, 293 c, e; conn. vow. 293: synt., x huh, sub., 613; law of sequence 617; in final clauses 624, the hypotli. per. 631, rel. and temp, clauses 640, complem , indir. disc , 643; potential 636; for imv. or ind., esp. fut, 637, 654 a; of wish 638, 637 d, 648 d; of doubt 648; generic conting. mode, for sub , 652, 654 a: extinction 653 b. Oracula Sibylllna (Ep.),from 170 P>.0. to 250 A. D. [blended 644. Oratio recta x obliqua 62 k, 643 ; Order, direct or normal x indirect or varied 718; why varied 719 Ordinals 52, 240. 2 ; w. avrus 541 g. Orphiea, poems ascribed to Orpheus (Kp.): Argonantica, Hymni, bidden. Orthography and Orthoepy 1 s, 90 s ; Orthotone 5, 788 g. [hist. 97- Other Examples (O. E.). Ovidius, Latin poet. Oxymoron 70 L § 798. OXYT LATIN & ENGLISH. rosi 4G9 Oxytone 768 ; w grave mark 784. P.eon 77, 740 c : lkeonic verse 764. Palatals 4, 137 ; changes of and w., 147 s, 169 s: in Dec. 111 . 17,203: in cj. 39, 270 c, 349 s. Palladas, late poet' Epigrammata. Paragoge 6 , 103 : paragogic cons. 162 s; t 252 (1. Parathetic, or loose, compounds 388 b. Parenthesis, -thetic, 71 c. Parisyllabie (Dec. i., it .) 184 g. Paroemiac verse 752 a. Paronomasia, fig. of rhet., 70 n. Paroxytone 768. Parsing, forms of, 74. Participle 30 c, 269 s, 272 h, c; dec. 26, 205, 234: synt., extensive use, 657 s, G73s; as adj. , w. anacol, 504; x inf. 657 d. k; relation to time 669; attract¬ ing adv. 662; circumst., as adv., 674 s, w. dat. 462, expr. purpose 598 b, 674 e, condition 635, concession 674 f, abs., impers., 675; complem., w. verbs of sensation, thought, chance, appear¬ ance, &c , 677; dejin., descript . t 678; w. aux. verb 679; \v. cb?, &c., 680: accent 780 s. See Adjective, Incorp. Particles elided 128 ; in compos. 384 s, 389 : syxt , classes, 684 s : interch. 703; ellips. 707; pleon. 713; attr. 715; anacol. 716; combin 717. pos. 718, 720: accent 785 s, 794. See Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction. | Partitive appos. 393 d, 395 : gen. 415 s: adj. 419 f. Parts of sentences 56 s. Passive Voice 30 ; hist. 271 e, 274 ; for mid., v. v , 266, 575 s; converse of 1 mid. 588: how construed 586s,w. gen., dat., 586, 434 b, 461; choice of subj. 587; impers. 589: Verbals 364, 374; w. dat. 458. [&c. Past, see Tenses, Time, Contingency, Pastoral, or bucolic, caesura 745 d : poetry 86 . Patrials x gentiles, del*., 368, 375 e Patronymics, der. 369. Paullus, Roman jurist. [601 d Paulo-post-future = fut. pf. 267 e. Pausanias 11. 180 A. I)., archaeologist. Pause csesural 745 c : final 738. Pentameter 743, 749 : pentapody 740 b: pentad 744 e. Penthemim 740 b, 745 c. Penult 111 a ; in accent. 768 s. Perfect (perf., pf.), both pres, and past 600 d; see Complete. Period, hypothetical, 62 j, 631s; periodic x loose structure 7181. Periphrasis 69 d ; in synt. of gen. and adj. 437 c, 499 d, acc. 475, art. 527 s, verb 598, 637. Perispome 768 : verbs 309. Person 246, 270 ; signs 246, 249 ; in cj. 33 a, 271: agreement 492, 496; change 503, 539 c, 644. Personal Pronouns 27, 243, 247 ; hist. 246: w. ye 389 c, 787 h; end. 787: syxt, stronger and weaker forms, implied in aff. of verb, 536 s, 571; eth. dat. 462 e: Construction for impers. 573. Personification, fig. of rhet., 70 f. Pf., perf., = Perfect. Phalcecian verse 750. 4. . Pherecrates 11. 438, Att. comedian : Fragmenta Incerta: -ic verse 750. 2 . Philetas 11. 300, elegiac poet. Phoenician alphabet 97. Phrases x clauses 56 a. Pindarus fl. 490, lyric poet, § 84, 744 e : Isthmia, Nemea, Olympia, Pythia, Fragmenta. “ [tceci. Plato fl. 427, Att. comedian: Me- Plato fl. 399, Att. philosopher, § 85 : Alcibiades, Amatores, Apologia, Axi- ochus, Charmides, Convivium, Cra- tylus, Critias, Crito, Definitidnes, Kpi- nomis, Euthydemus, Euthvphron, Gorgias, Hipparchus, Hippias (Major), Ion, Laches, Leges, Lysis, Mencxe- nus, Meno, Parmenides, Pliajdo, Phce- drus (Phcedr.), Philebus, Politicus, Protagoras, de Republica, Sophista, Thegetetus, Theages, Tinneus: Epis- tolse (Ep.). [mus, &c. ! Plautus, Lat. comedian : Trinum- Pleonasm 69 ; in synt. of gen. 446, dat. 462 c, acc. 477, pron. 505 b, adj. 509 g, i, cp. 510 s, art. 523 j, verb 574, inf. 668 , prep. 699, neg., &c-, 713. Pluperfect (plup., pip.), aug. 280 s ; ca >»j, ei, 291 c; cont. 615: see Complete. Plural (plur., pi., p.) 178, 186, 271 ; signs 12, 33 a; wanting 227 c: interch. or joined w. sing, or dual 488 s, 494 s, 499 s, 569. Plutarchus 11. 80 A. D., biographer and philosopher: Pompoius, &e. Poetic (poet., po.. ?.), poetry, 83 s. Pollux fl. 180 A. D., rhetorician. Polybius 11. 167, historian. Polyschematist verse ? 42 b. Polysyndeton 69 f. Position of words and clauses 718 s, 721 c: iu prosody 725, 734 s. Positive detjree 256 ; joined 0 . iiPe'vlr. w. sup. or conipt. 512, 51 5 * s. n y . 8^ a 470 ross INDEX II. I’.ESI § 70 a. Possessive pronoun 28, 252. 5, 538 ; w. or implied in art. 524, 530 e: geni¬ tive 443. [c/es, &c., 720. Postpositive article 249 b, 250 : parti- Potential opt.., inch, 636 a : mode in Eng. 269 c, 617 g, 620 d. Pratinas fi. 499, Att. dramatist. Precession of vowels 107, 114 s, 130 ; in contr. 115 s; in aflix 187, 195; in s. of dee. 114 d, 217, of cj. 341; &c. Predicate 57 ; -part, log. >$ gram., 60 ; pos. 718 c, s: adj., &e., 59 a. Prefixes 172 c; of verbs 32, 277 s, Preformatives 32 c, 356. [ 284 . Premise 62 j ; forms 631 ; indef. or gen. 634; om. 636. Preposition 55 ; prop, x improp. 688 e, 703 a; prof, to verb 282, 387; elided 128; apoc. 136 ; w. and wt. case as adv. 382, 703: syxt. 688 s, 487; as denoting place, time, &c., 689s; in compos., tmesis, 699, 486; constr. preeg 704; pos., accent, 718 d, 785s, 794. 5. See Particle. [subst. 706. Prepositional adjunct 58 c ; used Prepositive vowel 106 : article 249 b. Present definite 30 b, 267 : generic tense, gnomic, 602 s; historic, pro¬ phetic, 609; forperf. 612; x aor. w. txr, 628: indef , how supplied 603: time as generic 602 c, d: contingency 613 s. See Definite. [600. Preteritive use, verbs, &c., 46, 268, Primary tenses 30 b, 267 b, 271 s ; followed by snb. 617: ajfixes 32 i, 35 s, 286; elements of sent. 57. Primitive x derivative 359. Principal word 57 h : sentence 62 b. Prior tense (impf., aor., plup.) 615. Privative, alpha, 385, 436. Proceleusmatic 77, 740 c, 751. Proclitics, or atona, 786. Prohibition w. py 628. Prolepsis 71b, 474 b, 571 g, 657. Pronominal correlatives 53, 362 c, 377. Pronoun 55, 27 s, 243 s, 509, 535 s. See Article; Substantive, Personal, Reflexive, Reciprocal; Adjective,Pos¬ sessive, Iterative (avros), Demonstra¬ tive, Indefinite, Relative, Complemen¬ tary, Interrogative, a\\ o?, &c. Pronunciation, four methods, 79. Probde, in versif., 744 e. Proparoxytone 768, 770. Proper diphthong 4, 108 : rcdupl. 357: prep. 688 c: name w. or wt. art. 622 g, 533a: properly (prop.). Properispome 768, 771. Propertius, Lat. elegiac poet. Property, words of, as modifiers, 58. Proportionals 52, 240. 5 ; w. gen. Prosody 725 s. [409. Prosopopoeia = personification 70 f. Prothesis (or Prosthesis) 6 , 103. Protracted Stems 346 s. Protasis = premise 62 j. Pt., part., = participle. Punctuation 95, 98 b. Pure vowel, affix, stem, word, 112 : nouns in Dec. in. 19, 212 s; verbs 42 s, 270 c, 309, 313. Pyrrhic, foot, 77, 740 c. Q. v. = quod vide, which see. Quadruple, or equal, rhythm 742. Quality, pron. of, 53, 252 a. Quantity, natural x local, 725 s ; in dec. 728 s, cj. 728, 730, der. 731: pron. of, 53, 252 a. Quasi-caisura 756 a. Quintilianus, Rom. rhetorician. Quintus Sinyrnseus fi. 390 ? A. D., Epic poet. Qui-vis, qui-libet, = 8s ftouXei 559 b. Quotation or discourse, dir. x indir., 62 k, 643 s. Radical x formative 172 b, 359. Rare (r.). [799, 800'. Reasons for studying Greek 796,171 b, Recessive x retentive or final accent 769. \of middle , 580. Reciprocal pronoun 27, 244. 3 : use Redundant nouns 233 b : verbs 338. Reduplication 280, 273 e, 284 ; Att., 281 d; in compos. 232; in 2 aor. and fut. 284 e, s: in s., proper, &c., 357. Reflexive pronoun 27, 244, 248 ; use, dir. x indir , 537 s; w. comp, and sup. 513 f; for recipr. 537 c; in 3 per*. 539: w. avros 541 h: sense of middle 266, 578 s. Regimen = government 63 b. Regular affixes of verb 303, 35 s. Relative Pronoun and Adverb 28, 53, 250, 254s, 377: syxt., def. x indef, 549; interch. 550; w. antec. in same clause or om. 551: attraction of, 522 s; transfer 533; assimilation, Att., in¬ verse, 554;condens. 555;rel,for defm. and conn, particle 557: complex pron., adv., 559 : w. another conn., &c., 561; repetition avoided 562: Clauses, con¬ ditional, final, &c., 640 s. [Xenophon. Republica Atheniensium, De, see Residual cases, 10 , 397 s : dat. 465 s. § 798 . reso LATIN & ENGLISH. SUBS 471 Resolution, see Diaeresis: in versif. Responsives 68 c, 708. [741 b. Retention, iig. of synt., 70 v, 392 a. Retentive x recessive or final accent Rhetoric, figures of, 67 a. [769. Rhythm 740 s ; affecting pos. 718 g ; kinds 742; caesura of, 745 c. [764. Rising Ionic 77, 740 c : verse 742 b, Romaic, see Modern Greek. Roman letters for Greek 1, 92. Root 172 b, 340. 3, 359. Rough breathing 93 ; av. init. v and p 93 c, d; < F. 2,141, 345; mutes 4,137; changes of and w-, 147 s, 159, i 67; see 0 , , x- Sallustius, Roman historian. San, or Sampi, 1, 91, 98 d. Sanskrit 81 ; dual 178 a ; asmi 50 (eifxL b), veda 50 (6p 4), md, ted, sa , &c., 246 b, bhdmi 271 d, adiksham 273 c. [verse 750 4. Sappho H. 611, TEol. lyrist: Sapphic Scanning 746d : continuous scansion 738 b, 744 b. Scazon, or Choliambus, 759. Scholia, notes of Greek grammarians. Scilicet (sc.) = namely. Seripta Sacra (S. S.) : Septuagint (Lxx ), Deuteronomy, Psalms, Prov¬ erbs; New Testament, Mattliew (Mat., Mt.), Mark (Mk ), Luke (Im ), John (Jn ), Acts, Romans, Corinthians, Ga¬ latians, Ephesians, James, Revelation. Second tenses and systems 289 ; rel. to stem 47. 336 b, 340. 4; more inclined to intrans. use 338 b, 577 e. Secondary tenses 30 b, 267 b, 271 d, s ; eonting and indef. 615 s; followed by opt. 617; w. av 618; in liypoth. per. 631s; expr. wish 638: affixes 32 i, 35 s. 286. Semivowels 4, 137 ; four old, 138 ; changes of and w., 139 s, 147 s, i 68 s. Senarius (lam. trim.) 756. Seneca, Rom. philosopher. Sentence 56 ; parts 57 s ; kinds, con¬ nection, 61 s; condensed 555,565; pos. 718 n, s, 721: words in appos. w., 396: sentential analysis 57 s, 72 s; exponents Sequence of modes, law of, 615. [ 66 . Seguens (>) = following. Short vow. and syll. 4, 106, 725 s ; elided 127; J> long in dec 194, 213 s, cp. 257, cj. 275 d 288 a, 310, 314, 347, compos. 386 c [139s, 151s, 169 s Sibilants 4, 137 s ; changes of or w., Significant elements of language 55 . Signs of relation or case, number, and gender, in dec., 12; of degree, in cp.. 29; of person, number, voice, mode, and relation, in cj., 32 i, 33; of tense 32 g, 35 s; see also Number, Person, Tenses. Silius Italicus, Lat. Epic peek Simonides of Amorgos fi. 693, Iambic poet (Ion ): of Ceos fl. 525, lvr., § 98 f. Simple sentence 62 e : vowels x diph¬ thongs 4, 106: words 359; der. 362 s; accent 791s: succession 62 d; early use 705 a. Singular (sing., s.) 178 ; wanting 227 c; interch. or joined av. pi. 488 s, Slavic jesmi (50 dpi b). [499 s, 569. Smooth, or soft, breathing 93; TEol. and Ep. for rough 93 c, 167 c; £ 327 251 335 335 488 32 48 N. 137 d 116 220 186 276 b 252 50 336 489 33 34 52 147 117s 217 187 277 253.1 325 d 337 494 34 s 37 53 148 119 218 188 278 2 338 397 44 54 150 120 221 189 279 254 s 47 339 398 36 s 38 s 55 151 121 222 190 280 336 310 s 399 41 s 40 56 152 122 223 191 281 340 312 400 43 s 41 57 153 s 123 224 192 282 257.2 337 313 401 45 s 42 58 156 124 225 193 283 3 338 344 402 48 s 45 59.7 145 a 125 226 194 284 258 339 345 403 53 45 u 8 157 126 227 195 285 259 341 346 404 54 s 45 k 60 158 127 228 196 286 260 s 342 347 s 405 s 61 149 128 229 197 287 263 343 s 349 406 57 45 h 62 159 129 230 198 288 264 345 350 407 58 s 46 63 160 130 231 199 289 265 346 425 60 45 q 64 145 s 131 232 200 305 266 s 347 351 408 61 49 65 161 132 233 201 306 271 348 352 409 62 54 66 162 s 133 234 202 290 272 352 353 410 63 53 67 164 134 235 289 e 273 s 349 354 411 64 76 68 165 s 135 236 203 291 277 s 351 355 412 65 74 69 167 s 136 237 s 204 292 3191 356 413 63 72 70 169 s 137 s 239 s 205 293 279 s 350 357 414 67 78 71 171 139 241 206 s 294 282 353 s 358 415 §1 81 s 72 172 140 242 208.1 290 a 283 s 357 359 416 2s 83 s 73 173 141 243 2 313 287 s 355 360 417 3 84 74 174 142 247 3 320 289 s 351 361 418 4 •85 75 175 143 246 209 295 s 350 362 419 5 86 76 176 s 144 s 244 210 297 297 319 y 363 420 6 85 c 77 178 248 211 298 298 352 s 354 421 rr i 87 78 10 146 245 N. 163 b 299 353 a 355 422 8 s 88 s 179 147 249 212 299 300 345 363 423 10 90 79 180 148 250 213 300 301 358 357 424 11 91 80 181 149 251 214 301s 302 s 359 s 368 s 426 12 92 81 182 150 s 252 215 303 304 362 370 427 13 93 82 183 s 152 253 216 309 305 363 371 428 New 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 439 440 441 442 443 437 44b 438 436 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 459 460 462 463 464 395 465 466 461 467 468 466 469 470 472 474 476 472 472 473 477 478 479 480 10 . as all )nv; )st e fan que ; 01 ami SECTIONS COMPARED. 475 Old. New. Old. New. Old. New. Old New. Old New. 437 s 481 515 546 570 s 592 627 687 688 734 439 482 516 547 572 593 628 s 671s 689 735 440 s 483 517 s 548 573 594 629.1 556 c 690 736 442 s 484 519 549 574 595 630 673 691 737 444 504 520 s 550 575 603 631s 674 692 738 492 522 s 551 606 633 s 677 693 739 445 491 524 552 576 609 634/3 657 k 694 740 446 495 s 525 553 603 635 674 695 741 447 @ 506 526 s 554 577 s 599 s 638 678 696 742 449 507 y 559 b 580 605 637 679 697 T 7 450 y 502 528 555 581 596 638 s 675 s a #40 c 8 507 e 2 559 c 582 601 640 680 P 741 d 451 489 529 556 583 598 641a 504 b 698 743 491 530 557 584 s 610 /3 657 h 699 745 452 508 531 558 586 s 613 s 642 s 682 700 744 453 499 532 560 588 618 s 644 683 701s 746 454 498 N. 556 d 589 s 614 s 645 684 703 s 747 s 455 500 533 561 591s 269 646 685 705 749 456 508 534 562 617 647 686 s 706 750 457 s 509 535 563 593 615 648 688 707 s 751s 459 504 b 536 s 564 y 620 649 s 689 s 709 753 460 510 537.3 551 g 594 616 707 710 754 461 511 538 565 595 a 637 b 712 711 755 462 512 539 564 J8 637 c 652 s 699 712 756 463 s 513 539.2 566 y 647 d 654 s 700 s 713 757 465 514 540 s 567 8 627 656 705 714 s 758 s 466 515 543 568 596 623 657 703 716 760 467 s 516 s 544 495 s 597 a 597 658 706 717 761 469 520 a 501a 598 628 659 704 718 s 762 s 470 s 521s 545 s 571 599 s 638 660 707 720 764 472 523 547 572 648 d 661 708 s 721 765 473 524 548 499 601 624 662 711 722 766 474 525 549 569 s 602 1 650 s 663 709 s 723 s 767 475 526 550 500 2 625 664 s 713 725 768 476 527 551 573 3 626 667 714 726 770 s 477 528 552 574 6C3 631 668 715 727 s 772 s 478 529 553 s 575 s 604 635 s 669 s 716 729 784 479 530 555 577 605 632 s 671 717 730 785 480 531 558 575 a 605.5 639 672 718 d 731 786 481s 539 557 578 606 640 s N. 719 e 732 s 787 s 484 532 558 579 ! 607 s 643 673 2 718 a 734 789 485 s 533 s 559 580 s 609 644 a 720 735 790 490 s 518 560 582 610 645 P 719 r, 736 791 492 s 519 561 583 s 611 643 Y 708 f 737 792 494 505 562 586 647 674.3 721c 7S8 793 495 s 489 s 563 587 612 655 4 621 f 739 795 499 505 b 564 588 s 613 656 5 484 740 776 s 500 503 565 590 614 s 657 s 719 y 741 778 501s 535 s 566 602 616 s 661s 675 s 725 742 s 779 503 s 537 s 567 608 s 617 5 6571 678 s 726 744 775 506 s 539 0 606 618 s 658 s 681 727 745 776 507.7 537 c y 611 620 s 663 682 728 746 776 508 s 540 s 568 607 623 665 683 729 780 512 542 643 b 624 668 s 684 730 747 781 513 543 s 660 625 670 685 s 731s 748 s 782 s 514 545 569 591 626 666 687 733 750 794 ‘ Let me repeat, that so far from dissuading from the study of uancli of general education, I do but echo the universal opin- rsons competent to pronounce on the subject, in expressing my ion that the language and literature of ancient Greece constitute ■ieht instrument of mental training ever enjoyed by man ; and iarity with that wonderful speech, its poetry, its philosophy, e, and the history it embalms, is incomparably the most val- ntellectual possessions.”—Marsh’s Lectures on the Eng- ADDENDA. 801 . (To § 179.) The Cases are in general distinguished as follows: The Nominative expresses the subject of a finite verb; the Genitive, the point of departure or the cause; the Dative, the indirect object or simply accompaniment ; the Accusative, the direct object or the effect ; and the Vocative, address. 852 . (To § 265 s.) The Voices, Tenses, and Modes are in general distinguished as follows : a. Voices. The Active represents the subject of the verb as the doer of the action, or its agent ; the Passive, as the receiver of the action, or its object ; and the Middle, as, more or less directly, both the agent and the object of the action : as, Act. ^iravcra I stopped another, Pass. 4iraij0T]v I was stopped by another, Mid. €'n-aucrd}XT]v I stopped myself I ceased. b. Tenses. The Present represents the action as doing at the present time; the Imperfect, as doing at some past time; the Future, as one that will be performed in future time ; the Aorist, simply as performed ; the Perfect, as complete at the present time ; the Pluperfect, as com¬ plete at some past time ; and the Future Perfect, as one that will be complete at some future time : as, Pres, ypacfjw I am writing, Impf. £ypa- 4>ov I was writing, Fut. -ypdxj/co I shall write, Aor. £ypcu}/a I wrote, Perf. ye-ypacfxx I have written, Plup. I'yeypa^eiv I had written , Fut. Perf. ire- 7rav(ro|j.cu I shall have ceased. c. Modes. The Indicative expresses fact (direct assertion, inquiry, &c.); the Subjunctive, present contingency ; the Optative, past con¬ tingency ; and the Imperative, direct command, entreaty, exhortation, or permission ; while the Infinitive partakes of the nature of an abstract noun; and the Participle, of the nature of an adjective: as, Ind. 4p.a0ov I learned, pavQdvw; am I learning l Subj. 7 paepu 'Iva pdGrjs I write that you may learn, Opt. eypafa Iva p.a0ois I wrote that you might learn , Imv. pd0£ learn, Inf. paOeiv to learn, Part. |xav0dv«v learning. 803 . (To § 720.) Words which regularly stand first in their clauses or precede the words which they modify, are termed in distinction pre¬ positive : as the conjunctions aWa, ei, iav, ?cos, ij, Iva, nai, ottojs, 6 'rt, 7 rpLv, ws (701), the particles of question Spa, y, /xw v (687), and most other con¬ nectives or interrogatives (718 a); the negatives yy, ot) (685 c); &c. 804 . (To § 797 s.) References. In this Grammar, the Arabic numerals of reference, with the letters which often follow them, refer to its sections and their parts, unless a preceding abbreviation or other sign (as i., ii., iii., &c., for the books of Xenophon’s Anabasis, A., B., I\, &c., for those of the Iliad, and a., (3., 7 ., &c., for those of the Odyssey) shows that they are used in citation from authors. The grammatical references are often more obvious from being enclosed in parentheses, or being pre¬ ceded by “see” or “ef.,” or ending with a small letter (which is not other¬ wise often so found except in citations from Plato). In some cases where there seemed to be need, the mark §, for section, is prefixed ; and in suc¬ cessive citations from the same book without an intervening period, chiefly of dialectic forms, the usual “ Id.” or “ lb.” is sometimes omitted. The letter s is often added to a reference, to signify and the following ; and a small r above the line sometimes occurs to show that the reference is to the Revised Grammar only. The period and comma are used with nu- § 805 . ADDENDA. 477 morals of reference according to tlie usual method : the period to separate a division and its subdivision, and the comma to separate divisions of the same class. 805 . Some Distinctions in printing, (a) On the preceding pages, the accents are usually omitted over forms not actually occurring, but supposed for the explanation of existing forms ; while mere roots or stems are marked by hyphens affixed, (b) The doubtful vowels, when they are long and are not so determined by general rules or the con¬ text, are often marked, especially in the penult (79 n), while the more prevalent short quantity (726. 3.) is usually left to be understood, (c) Small capitals immediately affixed to etymologic forms (or in a few cases prefixed) denote dialectic use : viz., m. iEolic, b. Boeotic,, d. Doric, E. Epic, 1 . Ionic, o. Old, o. a. Old Attic, p. Poetic, &c. In lists of dialectic forms (as in 27 g, 48 b), a sign of this kind applies to the words preceding, until another like sign occurs. The abbreviation 1. signifies late ; and r., rare, (d) When a passage cited is fully translated (except, perhaps, a familiar particle), the translation is commonly printed in Italics ; but a partial translation, in Roman type with single marks of quotation ; and words introduced for explanation, in Roman type within brackets or parentheses. - • 7 V BOSTON COLLEGE 3 9031 01392986 4 132954 > C 6 1 13295 I Crosby.ATpheus AUTHOR TITLE A Grammar Of The ftr Language / v Revise* DATE DU'